Professional Documents
Culture Documents
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
EBD_7443
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2017
(memory based)
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
• This question paper contains total 125 questions divided into four parts :
Part I : Physics Q. No - 1 to 40
Part II : Chemistry Q. No - 41 to 80
Part III : Mathematics Q. No - 81 to 120
Part IV : English Q. No - 121 to 125
• All questions are multiple choice questions with four options, only one of them is correct.
• For each correct response, the candidate will get 1 mark.
• There is no negative marking for the wrong answer.
• The test is of 2½ hours duration.
20. Resistances 1 W, 2 W and 3 W are connected to 25. A milli voltmeter of 25 milli volt range is to be
form a triangle. If a 1.5 V cell of negligible internal converted into an ammeter of 25 ampere range.
resistance is connected across the 3 W resistor, The value (in ohm) of necessary shunt will be
the current flowing through this resistor will be (a) 0.001 (b) 0.01
(a) 0.25 A (b) 0.5 A (c) 1 (d) 0.05
(c) 1.0 A (d) 1.5 A 26. In young’s double-slit experiment, the intensity
21. A current carrying coil is subjected to a uniform of light at a point on the screen where the path
magnetic field. The coil will orient so that its difference is l is I, l being the wavelength of
plane becomes light used. The intensity at a point where the
l
(a) inclined at 45° to the magnetic field path difference is will be
(b) inclined at any arbitrary angle to the 4
I I
magnetic field (a) (b)
4 2
(c) parallel to the magnetic field
(c) I (d) zero
(d) perpendicular to the magnetic field
27. Which of the following is a self adjusting force?
22. The value of tan (90° – q) in the graph gives (a) Static friction (b) Limiting friction
(c) Dynamic friction (d) Sliding friction
28. Which of the following are not electromagnetic
waves?
(a) Cosmic rays (b) Gamma rays
(c) b-rays (d) X-rays
Strain
44. For the reaction 47. What is Z in the following sequence of reactions?
2NO2(g) 2 NO(g) + O2(g) , Zn
Phenol¾¾®X¾¾ ¾
CH Cl
3¾®Y¾¾ ¾¾® Z Alkaline
dust Anhyd. AlCl3 KMnO 4
( K c = 1.8 ´ 10 -6 at 184°C ) (R = 0.0831 kJ/ (mol. K)
(a) Benzene (b) Toluene
When K p and K c are compared at 184°C, it is (c) Benzaldehyde (d) Benzoic acid
found that 48. Which of the following oxy-acids has the
(a) Whether K p is greater than, less than or maximum number of hydrogens directly attached
to phosphorus?
equal to K c depends upon the total gas
(a) H4P2O7 (b) H3PO2
pressure
(c) H3PO3 (d) H3PO4
(b) K p = K c 49. The number of geometrical isomers of
(c) K p is less than K c CH3CH=CH–CH=CH–CH=CHCl is
(a) 2 (b) 4
(d) K p is greater than K c
(c) 6 (d) 8
CH3 50. If ‘a’ stands for the edge length of the cubic
systems : simple cubic, body centred cubic and
45. (CH3 CO)2 O
A
Br2 /CH3COOH
B face centred cubic, then the ratio of radii of the
spheres in these systems will be respectively,
+
H /H2 O
X 1 3 1
NH2 (a) a: a: a
What is X? 2 4 2 2
CH3 CH3 1 1
(b) a : 3a : a
Br 2 2
(a) (b)
1 3 3
Br (c) a: a: a
2 2 2
NH2 NH2
(d) 1a : 3a : 2a
CH3 CH3 51. For a first order reaction A®P, the temperature
COCH3 (T) dependent rate constant (k) was found to
(c) (d) 1
COCH3 follow the equation log k = – (2000) + 6.0 . The
T
NH2 NH2 pre-exponential factor A and the activation energy
46. A compound MpXq has cubic close packing (ccp) Ea, respectively, are
arrangement of X. Its unit cell structure is shown (a) 1.0 × 106 s–1 and 9.2 kJ mol–1
below. The empirical formula of the compound is (b) 6.0 s–1 and 16.6 kJ mol–1
(c) 1.0 × 106 s–1 and 16.6 kJ mol–1
(d) 1.0 × 106 s–1 and 38.3 kJ mol–1
52. 1-Propanol and 2-propanol can be distinguished
M by
X (a) oxidation with alkaline KMnO4 followed by
reaction with Fehling solution
(b) oxidation with acidic dichromate followed by
reaction with Fehling solution
(c) oxidation by heating with copper followed
by reaction with Fehling solution
(a) MX (b) MX2 (d) oxidation with concentrated H2SO4 followed
(c) M2X (d) M5 X14 by reaction with Fehling solution
EBD_7443
2017-6 Target VITEEE
53. Which group contains coloured ions out of (a) 750 K (b) 1000 K
1. Cu 2+ 2. Ti 4+ (c) 1250 K (d) 500 K
58. An organic compound (A) on reduction gives
3. Co 2+ 4. Fe 2 + compound (B). (B) on treatment with CHCl3 and
(a) 1, 2, 3, 4 (b) 1, 3, 4 alcoholic KOH gives (C). (C) on catalytic
(c) 2, 3 (d) 1, 2 reduction gives N-methylaniline. The compound
54. The half life period of a first order chemical A is
reaction is 6.93 minutes. The time required for the
completion of 99% of the chemical reaction will (a) Methylamine (b) Nitromethane
be (log 2 = 0.301) (c) Aniline (d) Nitrobenzene
(a) 23.03 minutes (b) 46.06 minutes
59. The standard reduction potential for Cu 2 + /Cu
(c) 460.6 minutes (d) 230.03 minutes
55. A mixture of benzaldehyde and formaldehyde on is + 0.34. Calculate the reduction potential at pH
heating with aqueous NaOH solution gives = 14 for the above couple. (Ksp Cu (OH ) 2
(a) benzyl alcohol and sodium formate
= 1 × 10 -19 )
(b) sodium benzoate and methyl alcohol
(c) sodium benzoate and sodium formate (a) – 0.22 V (b) + 0.22 V
(d) benzyl alcohol and methyl alcohol (c) – 0.44 V (d) + 0.44 V
56. In the following reaction sequence, the correct 60. A substance C4H10O yields on oxidation a
structures of E, F and G are compound, C4H8O which gives an oxime and a
O O positive iodoform test. The original substance
on treatment with conc. H2SO4 gives C4H8. The
structure of the compound is
Ph * OH (a) CH3CH2CH2CH2OH
(b) CH3CHOHCH2CH3
Heat I
¾¾¾
®[E] ¾¾¾®
2
NaOH
[F] + [G] (c) (CH3)3COH
[* implies 13C labelled carbon) (d) CH3CH2–O–CH2CH3
O O 61. The emf of a particular voltaic cell with the cell
(a) E= * F= * – + reaction Hg 22 + + H 2 2Hg + 2H +
CH3 O Na G = CHI3
Ph Ph
is 0.65 V. The maximum electrical work of this cell
O O
when 0.5 g of H 2 is consumed.
(b) E= F= * – +
* O Na G = CHI3
Ph CH3 Ph (a) – 3.12 × 10 4 J (b) –1.25´105 J
O O
(c) 25.0 ´ 10 6 J (d) None
(c) E= F=
– + *
* O Na G = CHI3 62. The number of aldol reaction(s) that occurs in
Ph CH3 Ph
the given transformation is :
O O
CH3CHO + 4HCHO
(d) E= F=
– + *
* O Na G = CH3I OH
Ph CH3 Ph OH
conc. aq. NaOH
¾¾¾¾¾¾¾
®
57. Standard entropies of X2 , Y2 and XY3 are 60,
30 and 50 JK–1mol–1 respectively. For the reaction HO
OH
1 3
X 2 + Y2 XY3 , DH = – 30 kJ to be at (a) 1 (b) 2
2 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
equilibrium, the temperature should be:
Solved Paper 2017 2017-7
63. Which of the following is not intermediate in the of a quantum of light with frequency of 8 × 1015
acid catalysed reaction of benzaldehyde with 2 s –1 ?
equivalent of methanol to give acetal ? (a) 5 × 10–18 (b) 4 × 101
7
(c) 3 × 10 (d) 2 × 10–25
OCH3 + OH 2 68. The number of stereoisomers possible for a
HO H HO H compound of the molecular formula
(a) (b) CH3 – CH = CH – CH(OH) – Me is:
(b) 2 (c) 4
(d) 6 (d) 3
+ 69. The optically active tartaric acid is named as
Å
H - O- CH 3
H - C = O- CH 3
D - (+) - tartaric acid because it has a positive
HO H (a) optical rotation and is drived from D - glucose
(c) (d) (b) pH in organic solvent
(c) optical rotation and is derived from D - (+) -
64. Iron crystallizes in several modifications. At about glyceraldehyde
911°C, the bcc ' a ' form undergoes a trasition to (d) optical r otation when substituted by
fcc ' g ' form. If the distance between the two deuterium
nearest neighbours is the same in the two forms 70. Consider the reaction : N 2 + 3H 2 ® 2 NH 3
at the transition temperature, the ratio of the
carried out at constant temperature and pressure.
density of iron in fcc form (r2 ) to that of iron of
If DH and DU are the enthalpy and internal
bcc form (r1 ) at the transition temperature energy changes for the reaction, which of the
r1 following expressions is true ?
(a) = 0.918 (b) r1 = 0.718
r2 r2 (a) DH > DU (b) DH < DU
(c) DH = DU (d) DH = 0
r r
(c) 1 = 0.518 (d) 1 = 0.318 71. What is D in the following sequence of reactions ?
r2 r2
NaBH HBr
O¾¾ ¾¾4® ( i) Mg, Et 2O
A¾¾¾® B¾¾¾ ¾¾ ¾®
65. The half life of the first order reaction CH OH
3 ( ii ) H 2C = O
( iii ) H3O +
CH 3 .CHO ( g ) ¾
¾® CH 4 ( g ) + CO (g )
PCC
C ¾¾¾® D
If initial pressure of CH 3CHO (g) is 80 mm Hg CH 2 Cl 2
CH 3
(a) + ethylamine
(a)
CH 2 COOH OH
OH C2 H5 OH
CH 3
CH 2 COOH (b) +
(b)
NH 2
OH
NH 2 NH 2
CH 3
(c) +
(c)
CH(OH)COOH
OH C 2 H5
OH
CH 3 NH 2 OH
CH(OH)COOH
(d) (d) +
OH C 2 H5
Solved Paper 2017 2017-9
(a) 3
p = 2ap + aq2 2 (b) 3 2
p = 2aq + ap 2
ò f (x)dx is equal to
0
(c) q 3 = 2ap 2 + aq 2 (d) None of these
1 1
107. A random variable X has the probability (a) (b) –
4 3
distribution
1
(c) (d) 1
2
EBD_7443
2017-12 Target VITEEE
112. The distance of the point (1, –2, 3) from the plane 117. The volume V and depth x of water in a vessel
x - y + z = 5 measured parallel to the line 2
are connected by the relation V = 5x – x and
x y z -1 6
= = is
2 3 -6 the volume of water is increasing , at the rate of
5 cm3/sec, when x = 2 cm. The rate at which the
(a) 1 (b) 2
depth of water is increasing, is
(c) 4 (d) 2 3
5 1
113. The tangent lines to the curve y2 = 4ax at points (a) cm / sec (b) cm / sec
18 4
where x = a, are
(a) parallel (b) perpendicular 5
(c) cm / sec (d) None of these
(c) inclined at 60º (d) inclined at 30º 16
114. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola
11 8. If vectors aiˆ + ˆj + kˆ, iˆ + bjˆ + kˆ and iˆ + ˆj + ckˆ
2 2 2
x - y cos ec a = 25 is 5 times the (a ¹ b ¹ c ¹ 1) are coplanar, then find
1 1 1
+ + .
eccentricity of the ellipse x 2 cos ec 2 a + y 2 = 5 , 1- a 1 - b 1- c
then a is equal to : (a) 0 (b) 1
(c) –1 (d) 2
3
(a) tan -1
2 (b) sin -1
4
é3 - 2 4 ù
ê ú
119. If matrix A = ê1 2 - 1ú and
-1 2 -1 2
(c) tan (d) sin êë0 1 1 úû
5 5
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) PB mB vB
=
1. (d) Given : Mass of rocket (m) = 5000 Kg PA mA vA
Exhaust speed (v) = 800 m/s
Acceleration of rocket (a) = 20 m/s2 mA
mB mB 1
Gravitational acceleration (g) = 10 m/s2 = = =
We know that upward force mA mB mA 3
F = m (g + a) = 5000 (10 +20)
= 5000 × 30 = 150000 N. 5. (d)
We also know that amount of gas ejected 6. (d) Photoelectric effect does not support the
wave nature of light.
æ dm ö F 150000
ç ÷= = = 187.5 kg / s 7. (c) The equivalent electrical circuit of the
è dt ø v 800
arrangement is shown in figure.
2. (c) The power dissipated in the circuit.
2R
V2
P= ...(i)
Req B
A R C R D
v = 10 volt 2R
1 1 1 5+ R Temperature difference between the end
= + =
Req R 5 5R points A and D = 200 – 20 = 180°C
As the resistances for the three parts are
æ 5R ö equal, the temperature difference must be
Req = çè ÷
5 + Rø distribuited equally in the three parts (= 180/
P = 30 W 3 = 60°C)
Substituting the values in equation (i) \ Temperature of B = 200°C – 60° = 140°C.
8. (c) Number of possible spectral lines emitted
(10) 2
30 = when an electron jumps back to ground
æ 5R ö
çè ÷ n(n - 1)
5 + Rø state from n th orbit =
2
15 R n(n - 1)
= 10 Þ 15R = 50 + 10R Here, =6Þn =4
5+ R 2
5R = 50 Þ R = 10 W Wavelength l from transition from n = 1 to
1 n = 4 is given by,
3. (c) E = mv 2 or mv = 2m E
2 1 æ1 1 ö 16
= R ç - 2÷ Þl = = 975 Å
h h l è1 4 ø 15R
so l = =
mv 2m E 9. (c) The magnetic field is perpendicular to the
plane of the paper. Let us consider two
1 2 1 2 diametrically opposite elements. By
4. (c) As mA v A = mB v B
2 2 Fleming's Left hand rule on element AB the
direction of force will be Leftwards and the
vA mB
= magnitude will be
;
vB mA dF = Idl B sin 90° = IdlB
Solved Paper 2017 2017-15
x x x x x x x 20
´ 10-34
3
x xB x x Cxdl x x =
2 ´ 9 ´10 -31 ´ 0.2 ´1.6 ´10 -19
dF dl dF
A D
x x x x Ix x x 25
lmin = × 10–9
x x x x x x x 9
= 2.80 × 10–9 nm \ l ³ 2.8 × 10–9 m
On element CD, the direction of force will
be towards right on the plane of the papper 14. (b) Kerosene oil rises up in wick of a lantern
and the magnitude will be dF = IdlB. because of capillary action. If the surface
10. (b) Apparent depth = d/m1 + d/m2 tension of oil is zero, then it will not rise, so
11. (c) By law of conservation of momentum, oil rises up in a wick of a lantern due to
Mu = MV + mv surface tension.
-3
....(i) LdI 40 ´10 (11 - 1)
15. (a) e= = = 100V
| v1 - v 2 | dt 4 ´10-3
Also e = Þ Mu = Mv - MV 16. (d) Impedence of a capacitor is XC = 1/wC
| u1 - u 2 |
1 1 5000
....(ii) XC = = = .
2 pfC 2 p ´ 50 ´ 2 ´ 10 - 6 p
From (i) and (ii), 2Mu = (M + m)v
17. (a) The final boolean expression is,
2uM 2u
Þv =
M+m
Þ v=
m ( )
X = A . B = A + B = A + B Þ OR gate
1+ 18. (a) Charge resides on the outer surface of a
M
conducting hollow sphere of radius R. We
12. (c) Consider the potential at D be ‘V’. consider a spherical surface of radius r < R.
Potential drop across C1 is (V – V1) and C2 By Gauss theorem
i s ++ +++
++ +
(V2 – V) +
+ +
+ +
\ q 1 = C1(V - V1 ), q 2 = C2 (V2 - V) + R +
+ O +
As q1 = q2 [capacitors are in series] + S +
+ r +
E +
\ C1 (V - V1) = C2 (V2 - V) +
+ +
+ +
C1V1 + C2 V2
++
+ + ++
V= rr
C1 + C2 1
ò
s
E.ds = ´ charge
e0
enclosed or
13. (b) Given : work function f of metal = 2.28 eV
Wavelength of light l = 500 nm = 500 × 10– 2 1
9m E ´ 4pr= ´0 ÞE =0
e0
hc i.e electric field inside a hollow sphere is
KEmax = –f zero.
l
19. (d) Let R be the radius of the bigger drop, then
6.6 ´ 10-34 ´ 3 ´ 108 Volume of bigger drop = 2 × volume of small
KEmax = – 2.82 drop
5 ´ 10-7
4 3 4
KEmax = 2.48 – 2.28 = 0.2 eV pR = 2 ´ pr 3 Þ R = 21/ 3 r
3 3
h h Surface energy of bigger drop,
lmin = =
p 2m ( KE )max E = 4pR 2T = 4 ´ 2 2 / 3 pr 2T = 28 / 3 pr 2T
EBD_7443
2017-16 Target VITEEE
20. (b) Equivalent resistance between A and B = 26. (b) For path difference l, phase
series combination of 1 W and 2 W in parallel
æ 2p 2p ö
with 3 W resistor.. difference = 2p ç Q = x = .l = 2p ÷
è l l ø
Þ I = I0 + I0 + 2I0 cos 2p
Þ I = 4I0 (\ cos 2p = 1)
l p
For x = , phase difference =
4 2
p
\ I' = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1 I 2 cos
2
I I
If I1 = I2 = I0 then I ' = 2I0 = 2. =
1 1 1 2 4 2
= + = or R = 1.5 W.
R 3 3 3 27. (a) Static friction is a self adjusting force in
\ Current in the circuit is I = V/R = 1.5/1.5 = magnitude and direction.
1A. 28. (a) Cosmic rays are coming from outer space,
Since the resistance in arm ACB = resistance having high energy charged particles, like
in arm AB = 3 W, the current divides equally a-particle, proton etc. b-rays are stream of
in the two arms. Hence the current through high energy electrons, coming from the
the 3 W resistor = I/2 = 0.5 A. nucleus of radioactive atoms.
21. (d)
29. (c) For a monatomic gas
stress
22. (a) tan(90° - q) = 3
strain Cv = R
2
ze 2 k ze 2 So correct graph is
23. (c) U = –K ; T.E = –
r 2 r
k ze 2 3 / 2R
K.E = . Here r decreases
2 r Cv
24. (c) When resistance is connected to A.C
source, then current & voltage are in same
phase. T®
25. (a) Galvanometer is converted into ammeter, by
connected a shunt, in parallel with it. q
30. (c)
G L/2
I q
L L/2
L L
S L
The given square of side L may be
GS VG 25 ´ 10-3 considered as one of the faces of a cube
==
G+ S I 25 with edge L. Then given charge q will be
considered to be placed at the centre of the
GS
= 0.001W cube. Then according to Gauss's theorem,
G+S the magnitude of the electric flux through
Here S << G so S = 0.001 W the faces (six) of the cube is given by
Solved Paper 2017 2017-17
= 16 2 - 4 ´ 48 = 64 = 8 1
or, Current in wire, I= A
C1 + C2 = 16 mF 400
C1 - C2 = 8 mF
Þ 2C1 = 24mF Þ C1 = 12mF 2 1
or, = or R = 800 - 40 = 760 W
48 40 + R 400
\ C2 = = 4mF
12
A + d m 60 + 30
33. (d) In LCR series circuit, resonance frequency 38. (b) i= = = 45 º
f0 is given by 2 2
39. (b) I ® ON
1 1 1
Lw = Þ w2 = \ w= = 2pf0 II ® OFF
Cw LC LC
In IInd state it is used as a amplifier it is
1 1 active region.
\ f0 = or f 0a
2p LC C r r
When the capacitance of the circuit is made 40. (c) t = M B sin q = M ´ B
4 times, its resonant frequency become f 0' PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
f0' C f
\ = or f 0' = 0 41. (b) It is stoichiometric defect and it is observed
f0 4C 2 when equal number of cations and anions
34. (b) On polarisation by reflection, the reflected are missing from the lattice site.
and refracted waves are at 90º to each other.
35. (a) v = velocity of efflux through an orifice OH
|
= CH 2 NH 2 :N = O
:
v= 0
H OH
H | | HÅ
CH 2 - Å N - N - O ¾¾¾®
v |
:
H
It is independent of the size of orifice.
EBD_7443
2017-18 Target VITEEE
45. (b)
H OH
| |
CH 2 - Å N - N :- O ¾-¾
2 H 2O
¾ ¾® CH3 CH3
| |
H OH (CH 3CO) 2O Br2/CH3COOH
Å
CH 2 - N º N : ¾
¾® NH2 NHCOCH3
CH3 CH3
+
CH 2 + : N º N: +
Br /CH COOH H
+
-H
Br Br
| CH 2
| NHCOCH3 NH2
|
| (–NHCOCH3 is more electron-releasing than
|
| Å –CH3)
|¾¾ - H+
® ¾ ¾¾ ® 1
46. (b) No. of M atoms = ´ 4+1=1+1=2
OH - 4
1 1
OH No. of X atoms = ×6+ ×8 =3+1 =4
2 8
So, formula = M2X4 = MX2
47. (c)
43. (a) The reaction given is an exothermic reaction OH
thus according to Le chatalier’s principle CH3Cl, anhy. AlCl3
Zn
lowering of temperature, addition of F2 and dust Friedel-Craft reac.
Cl2 favour the forward direction and hence
Phenol Benzene, X
the production of ClF3.
44. (d) For the reaction:-
2NO2 ( g ) 2NO(g) + O2 (g) CH3 COOH
O Ea
51. (d) log k = log A - …(1)
P 2.303RT
(b) H3PO2 Þ OH H
H
1
Hypophosphorous acid Also given log k = 6.0 - (2000)
T
O …(2)
(c) H3PO3 Þ HO – P – OH On comparing equations, (1) and (2)
H log A = 6.0 Þ A = 106 s–1
Phosphorous acid Ea
and 2.303 R = 2000 ;
O
(d) H3PO4 Þ HO – P – OH Þ Ea = 2000 × 2.303 × 8.314
OH = 38.29 kJ mol–1
orthophosphoric acid 52. (c)
49. (d) The given structure has three double bonds
whose each carbon atom is differently (a)
substituted hence number of geometrical
alk. KMnO4
isomers will be 2n = 23’ = 8, where n is the CH 3CH 2CH 2OH ¾¾ ¾¾ ¾¾ ¾® CH 3CH 2CHO
or K 2Cr2O7 / H +
number of double bonds whose each carbon
atom is differently substituted. Fehling sol.
CH3CH 2 CH 2 OH ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH3CH 2 CHO ¾¾ ® CH3CH 2 COOH ¾¾¾¾¾® No reaction
50. (a) Following generalization can be easily derived
for various types of lattice arrangements in (b)
cubic cells between the edge length (a) of
alk. KMnO4
the cell and r the radius of the sphere. CH3CHOHCH3 ¾¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH3COCH3
or K 2Cr2O7 /H +
a
For simple cubic : a = 2r or r =
2 ¾¾ ® CH 3COOH ¾¾¾¾
Feh sol.
® No reaction
For body centred cubic :
(c) CH 3CH 2 CH 2OH ¾¾® Cu
CH 3CH 2 CHO
4 3
a= r or r = a
3 4 Fehling
¾¾¾¾ ® Cu 2O ¯
solution (red)
For face centred cubic :
1
a = 2 2r or r = a Cu
2 2 CH 3CHOHCH 3 ¾¾® CH 3COCH3
Thus the ratio of radii of spheres for these
Fehling
will be ¾¾¾¾
® No reaction
solution
simple : bcc : fcc
(d) CH3CH 2CH 2OH or
a 3 1
= : a: a i.e. Conc. H2SO4
2 4 2 2 CH3CHOHCH3 ¾¾¾¾¾¾ ® CH 3CH = CH 2
option (a) is correct answer.
EBD_7443
2017-20 Target VITEEE
a NaOH
Ksp = [Cu 2 + ] [OH - ]2 = 10 -19
CHO + HCHO ¾¾ ¾
¾®
10 -19
\ [Cu 2+ ] = = 10 -19
Benzaldehyde Formaldehyde [OH - ]2
a - + The half cell reaction
CH2OH + HCOO Na
Cu 2+ + 2e - ¾
¾® Cu
Benzyl alcohol sod. formate 0 .059 1
E = E° – log
56. (c) O
O O 2 [ Cu 2+ ]
C Heat C
¾¾¾® * 0.059 1
Ph * OH - CO 2 CH3 = 0.34 – log -19 = – 0.22 V
Ph 2
(b - keto acid) 10
(E)
Conc.H SO Oxi
O 60. (b) C4H8 ¬¾¾¾¾¾
2 4¾ C H O ¾¾¾
4 10 ®
(-H 2O)
I /NaOH
¾¾¾¾
2
® (–) (+)
*
Ph ONa + CHI3 C4H8O (R- COCH3 )
(F) (G) Thus C4H8O should be CH3CH2COCH3,
hence C4H10O should be CH3CH2CHOHCH3
Solved Paper 2017 2017-21
: :
0.5g H 2 = 0.25 mole.
|
Å OH 2
Hence,
H
Wmax = 1.25 ´ 10 5 ´ 0.25 = –3.12 ´ 10 4 J CH 3
| Å
: :
– j
Ph O
a C O CH 3
62. (c) CH3 – CHO + HCHO ¾¾¾¾
®
OH H
:
1st aldol
condensation
H
a CH2 OH
|
CH2 CHO –
a
: :
OH / HCHO Ph - C O CH 3
2nd aldol
CH CHO | - H+
CH2 OH condensation O
CH2 OH Å
CH 3 H
CH2OH
–
OH / HCHO
3rd aldol
HOCH2 C CHO H
condensation |
CH2OH
: :
Ph - C O CH 3
|
O
: :
CH2OH |
– CH 3
OH / HCHO
HOCH2 C CH2OH
Cannizzaro
reaction 64. (a) In a – form distance between nearest
CH2OH
H 3a1
neighbour atom is .
| 2
63. (b) Ph - C = O + H +
In g form distance between nearest
H
| CH 3 neighbour atom is a 2 .
j - CÅ O
: :
Ph 2
| H
OH
3 a1 a 2
\ = (given)
H 2 2
| Å
CH 3
j-C O - H+
Ph a2 3
| =
:
H or
OH a1 2
H 3 3
| r1 z1 æ a2 ö 1 æ 3 ö÷
+ H+ = ç ÷ = ç = 0.918
j-C ça ÷
: :
Ph O CH 3 r2 z2 è 1ø 2 çè 2 ÷ø
|
OH
EBD_7443
2017-22 Target VITEEE
*
65. (c) CH 3CHO (g ) ¾
¾® CH 4 (g) + CO (g) 68. (b) CH 3 – CH = CH – CHCH 3
|
OH
When t = 0 p 0 0 0
exhibits both geometrical as well as optical
When t = t p - p0 p p isomerism.
cis - R cis - S
\ p 0 - p + p + p = 120 mm Hg trans - R trans - S
or, p 0 + p = 120 mm Hg; 69. (c) Positive sign is for optical rotation (dextro
rotatory) and D - is for configuration. It is
p = 120 – 80 = 40 mm Hg
derived from
1 p0 1 80 1 CHO
k= ln = ln = ln 2
0
t p -p 20 80 - 40 20 |
H– C – OH
D (+) glyceraldehyde
|
ln2 CH2OH
Again, t1 / 2 =
k
CHO
ln2 |
\ t1 / 2 = ´ 20 = 20 min. L (–)glyceraldehyde is HO– C – H
ln2
|
66. (a) Solubility of the compound in conc. H2SO4 CH2OH
indicates that it can be an alkene, alcohol or
70. (b) DH = DU + DnRT for
an ether. The inability to discharge bromine
colour indicates absence of an alkene. Hence N 2 + 3H 2 ¾
¾® 2 NH 3
the compound is an alcohol which should be Dng = 2 – 4 = – 2
primary because it is readily (within 2
seconds) oxidised by CrO3 in sulphuric acid. \D H = D U - 2 RT or DU = D H+ 2R T \D U > D H
ch c NaBH
67. (b) E = hu = ;and u = 71. (a) O ¾¾ ¾¾
4®
OH
l l CH 3OH
O H O F
C 2
H OH O - C - H
73. (c) HO H 4 H - C - OH 1
H OH
CH 2 OH HO - C - H
77. (c) XeF2 : Xe
H - C - OH 3
CH 2 OH
2 1 F
3lp
4 C 1 º 3 C 2 R configurations
3 4
Arrange the groups in order of priority by
following the text. F F
74. (b) Saponification (alkaline hydrolysis) of oils
and fats gives glycerol and sodium salt of Xe
fatty acids, which is sodium palmitate in the
present question XeF4 : F F
75. (a) For non spontaneous reaction
DG = + ve 2lp
DG = DH – T DS and
DS = 121 J K -1
F
For DG = + ve F
DH has to be positive. Hence the reaction is
endothermic.
XeF6 : F Xe F
The minimum value of DH can be obtained
by putting DG = 0
F
DH = TDS = 298 × 121 J F
= 36.06 kJ
76. (c)
CH3 CH3
CHCl3 + NaOH HCN
Reimer Tiemman reaction C=O Xe
OH OH H
XeO3 : O O
CH3 CH3 O
OH HOH
1lp
C CN CH(OH).COOH
dy y sin 2x
93. (c) + =
dx x log x log x
dx
ò x log x
I.F. = e
1
ò dt
\ I.F. = e t = elog t = t = log | x |
12
Required area = 2 ò0 (1 + x ) dx solution is given by
12
y (I.F.) = ò Q.(I.F.) dx + C
æ x 2 ö÷ æ1 1ö 5
= 2ç x + = 2ç + ÷ = sin 2x
ç 2 ÷ è 2 8ø 4
è ø0 y log | x | = ò log | x |
(log | x |) dx + C
x +α β γ cos 2x
92. (a) Given γ x +β α =0 =- +C
2
α β x+γ
é x2 xù
94. (d) Consider lim ê - ú
Operate C1 ® C1 + C 2 + C 3 x ®¥ êë 3x - 2 3 úû
x +α+β+γ β γ
é 3x 2 - x (3x - 2) ù
x +α+β+γ x +β α =0 = x ®¥ ê 3(3x - 2) ú
lim
x +α+β+γ β x+γ êë úû
2x 2x
1 β γ = lim = lim
x ®¥ 3(3 x - 2) x ®¥ é 2ù
= ( x + α + β + γ) 1 x + β α =0 3 x ê3 - ú
ë xû
1 β x+γ
2 1 2 1 2
Þ x + α + β + γ = 0 Þ x = -(α + β + γ) = lim = ´ =
x ®¥ 3 æ 2ö 3 3-0 9
Again if ç3- ÷
è x ø
Solved Paper 2017 2017-27
r r r r r r
95. (c) ((a ´ b ) ´ (c ´ d )).( a ´ d ) = 0 7 - i 3 + 4i
98. (d) z= ´
rrr r rrr r r r 3 - 4i 3 + 4 i
([a c d ] b - [b c d ] a ).(a ´ d ) = 0
rr r rr r 21 + 25i + 4 25(1 + i)
[a c d ][b a d ] = 0 = = = (1 + i )
16 + 9 25
r r r
Either c or b must lie in the plane of a z14 = (1 + i )14 = [(1 + i )2 ]7 = (2i)7
r
and d .
= 2 7 i 7 = -2 7 i
96. (b)
99. (c) f (x) = 2 sin x + sin 2x
f ' (x) = 2 cos x + 2 cos 2x = 2 (cos x + cos 2x)
B (1, 7) \ f ' (x) = 0 Þ 2cos2x + cos x – 1 = 0
-1 ± 3 1 p
cos x = = -1, \ x = p,
(1, 2) C 4 2 3
A
æ 3p ö
Now, f (0) = 0, f çè ÷ø = -2
2
D (4, – 2)
æ pö 3 3 3 3
f (p) = 0, f ç ÷ = 2 + =
Here, centre is A (1,2), and Tangent at B è 3ø 2 2 2
(1,7) is \ difference between greatest value and
x.1 + y.7 – 1 (x + 1) – 2 (y + 7) – 20 = 0 least value
or y = 7 ...(1)
3 3
Tangent at D (4,–2) is = +2
3x – 4y – 20 = 0 ...(2) 2
Solving (1) and (2), we get C is (16, 7) 100. (d) A and B will agree in a certain statement if
Area ABCD = 2 (Area of D ABC) both speak truth or both tell a lie. We define
1
following events
= 2× AB × BC E1 = A and B both speak truth Þ P(E1) = xy
2
AB × BC = 5 × 15 = 75 units E2 = A and B both tell a lie
97. (c) Integrating by parts. Þ P (E2) = (1 – x ) (1 – y)
E = A and B agree in a certain statement
ò f (x )g"(x ) dx - ò f "(x ) g(x ) dx Clearly, P(E / E1 ) = 1 and P(E / E 2 ) = 1
= f ( x )g ' ( x ) - ò f ' ( x ) g ' ( x ) dx The required probability is P(E1 / E ) .
ò sec q tan n -2 q d q
2
3 1 =
Þ =1 – P( A ) + P(B) –
4 4 0
2 2 p/4
Þ 1=1– + P(B) Þ P(B) = ;
3 3 – ò tan n -2 q dq
0
2
Now, P( A Ç B ) = P(B) – P ( A Ç B ) = –
3 p/4
= ò sec 2 q tan n - 2 q dq - u n - 2
1 5 0
= .
4 12
p/4
x y z Þ un + un – 2 = ò sec 2 q tan n - 2 q dq
102. (a) Let the line be = = … (i)
a b c 0
a b c g (x) = – x + 2
= =
1 -3 5
3 f (x) = x2
x y z 2
\ The line is = =
1 -3 5 1 A
C
p/4 O B1 2 3
103. (a) Given: un = ò tan n q dq
0
p/4
1 2
= ò tan 2 q tan n -2 q dq
0 ò
Now, Area of OAB = f (x) dx + g(x)dx ò
0 1
p/4
ò (sec q - 1) tan n -2 q dq
2 1 2
=
0 ò 2
ò
= x dx + (- x + 2) dx
0 1
Solved Paper 2017 2017-29
1 2 1 1 7
x3 é -x 2 ù 108. (c) tan -1 + tan -1 + tan -1
= +ê + 2x ú 2 3 8
3 2
0 ëê ûú1
é 1 1 7 1 1 7 ù
1 é æ -4 ö æ -1 ö ù ê + + - ´ ´ ú
= + êç + 4÷ - ç + 2÷ ú =ê 2 3 8 2 3 8 ú
3 ëè 2 ø è 2 øû 1 1 1 7 7 1
ê1 - ´ - ´ - ´ ú
ë 2 3 3 8 8 2û
1 é æ 3ö ù
= + ê(-2 + 4) - ç ÷ ú
3 ë è 2ø û
é -1 -1 -1
êQ tan x + tan y + tan z
1 1 5 ë
= + = sq unit
3 2 6
æ x + y + z - xyz ö ù
= tan -1 ç ú
106. (a) The line
x y
+ = 1 will be a normal to the è 1 - xy - yz - zx ø÷ û
p q
parabola y2 = 4ax if, for some value of m, it é 41 7 ù
-
-1 ê 24 48 ú
is identical with
= tan ê 1 7
y = mx – 2am – am3 i.e. mx – y = (2am +
ê1 - - 7ú
am3) - ú
ë 6 24 16 û
Comparing coefficients, we get
m - 1 2am + am 3
= = Þ mp = – q, \ é 75 ù
1/ p 1/ q 1 ê ú æ 75 ö
= tan -1 ê 48 ú = tan -1 ç
ê1 - 43 ú è 48 - 43 ÷ø
q
m=– and mp = m (2a + am2) ë 48 û
p
2
æ -q ö é 75 ù
or P = 2a + am 2 = 2a + a çç ÷÷ = tan -1 ê ú = tan -1 15
è p ø ë5û
109. (b) Vertex of the parabola is a point which lies
aq 2
or p = 2a + on the axis of the parabola, which is a line
p2 ^ to the directrix through the focus, i.e., y =
or p3 = 2ap2 + aq2, 2 and equidistant from the focus and
Which is the required condition.
107. (b) P(E) = P ( 2 or 3 or 5 or 7) æ3 ö
directrix x = 0, so that the vertex is ç , 2 ÷ .
= 0.23 + 0.12 + 0.20 + 0.07 = 0.62 è2 ø
P ( F ) = P (1 or 2 or 3) Y
= 0.15 + 0.23 + 0.12 = 0.50
P ( E Ç F ) = P(2 or 3) y=2
A S (3,2)
= 0.23 + 0.12 = 0.35
O X
\ P( EUF ) = P( E ) + P ( F ) - P ( E Ç F )
= 0.62 + 0.50 - 0.35 = 0.77
EBD_7443
2017-30 Target VITEEE
110. (b) Let 113. (b) The given equation of the curve is y2 = 4ax
....(1)
é -1 2 5 ù é -1 2 5 ù
A = ê 2 -4 a - 4 ú ~ ê 0 0 a + 6 ú Differentiating both sides of (1) with respect
ê ú ê ú
êë 1 -2 a + 1úû êë 0 0 a + 6úû to x, we get
[R 2 ® R 2 + 2R1, R 3 ® R 3 + R1 ] dy dy 4a 2a
2y = 4a ; Þ = = ...(2)
dx dx 2 y y
Clearly rank of A is 1 if a = –6
x y z -1 2a
parallel to the line = = is \ from (3), tan y1 = = 1 = tan 45°;
2 3 -6 2a
x -1 y + 2 z - 3
= = = r (say) ...(1) Þ y1 = 45°.
2 3 -6
Then any point on (1) is (2r + 1, 3r – 2, –6r At (a, - 2a), x = a, y = -2a and let y = y2.
+ 3)
If this point lies on the plane x – y + z = 5
2a
then \ from (3), tan y 2 = = -1 = tan135°;
-2a
1
(2r + 1) – (3r – 2) + (–6r + 3) = 5 Þ r =
7 or y2 = 135°.
x2 y2 dV
114. (a) Eccentrcity of - =1 is dx
25 25 sin 2 a Þ = dt
dt æ xö
çè 5 – ÷ø
1 + sin 2 a . 3
x2 y2 æ dx ö 5 15
Eccentricity of + =1 is Þç ÷ = = cm / sec .
è dt ø x = 2 5 – 2 13
5 sin 2 a 5
3
1 - sin 2 a 118. (b) Since vectors are coplanar
2 a 1 1
Þ a = sin -1 = tan -1 2 1- a b -1 0
3 Þ = 0 [Using R2 – R1,
0 1 - b c -1
115. (a)
p q p Ù q ( p Ù q) Þ p R3 – R2]
T T T T Þ a (b – 1)(c – 1) – (1 – a) {(c – 1) – (1 –b)} = 0
T F F T Þ a (1 – b)(1 – c) + (1 – a) (1 – c) + (1 – a) (1 – b)
F T F T =0
F F F T Þ (a – 1 + 1) (1 – b) (1 – c) + (1 – a) (1 – c)
+ (1 – a) (1 – b)= 0
Þ (1 – b) (1 – c) + (1 – a) (1 – c) + (1 – a) (1 – b)
\ ( p Ù q) Þ p is a tautology..
= (1 – a) (1 – b) (1 – c)
(2 sin x ) 2n 1 1 1
116. (c) We have, f ( x ) = lim Þ + + =1
n ® ¥ 3n - (2 cos x ) 2n
1- a 1 - b 1- c
(2sin x)2n é 3 -2 4 ù
= lim 119. (c) If A = ê1 2 -1ú
n ®¥ ( 3)2n - (2 cos x)2n ëê0 1 1 úû
f(x) is discontinuous when
1
and A -1 = adj(A) ......(i)
( 3 ) 2 n - (2 cos x ) 2 n = 0 k
3 p adj(A)
i.e. cos x = ± Þ x = np ± Also, we know A -1 = .......(ii)
2 6 |A|
\ By comparing (i) and (ii)
x2 dV dx x dx
117. (d) V = 5x – Þ =5 × |A| = k
6 dt dt 3 dt
EBD_7443
2017-32 Target VITEEE
3 -2 4 Þ h 2 + k 2 + 4 h - 6k + 9 sin 2 a
Þ | A |= 1 2 -1
0 1 1 +13cos 2 a = 4 cos 2 a
= 3 (2 + 1) + 2 (1 + 0) + 4 (1 – 0) Þ h 2 + k 2 + 4 h - 6k + 9 = 0
= 9 + 2 + 4 = 15 \ Locus of T is x 2 + y 2 + 4x - 6 y + 9 = 0
120. (d) Radius of circle
PART - IV (ENGLISH)
= 4 + 9 - 9 sin a - 13 cos a = 2 | sin a |
2 2
121. (c)
If T be (h, k) then as in Q. 44 122. (d)
2 | sin a | 123. (a)
tana =
124. (c)
h 2 + k 2 + 4h - 6k + 9 sin2 a +13cos2 a
125. (b) The best pronunciation of the word 'sorbet'
is sore-bay.
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2016
(memory based)
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
• This question paper contains total 125 questions divided into four parts :
Part I : Physics Q. No - 1 to 40
Part II : Chemistry Q. No - 41 to 80
Part III : Mathematics Q. No - 81 to 120
Part IV : English Q. No - 121 to 125
• All questions are multiple choice questions with four options, only one of them is correct.
• For each correct response, the candidate will get 1 mark.
• There is no negative marking for the wrong answer.
• The test is of 2½ hours duration.
o
(a) (b) 2 o
2
The equivalent capacitance become
o
(c) o (d)
2 5C 7C
(a) (b)
3. In Wheatstone bridge, 4 resistors P = 10 , 7 5
Q = 5 , R = 4 , S = 4 are connected in cyclic
order. To ensure no current through galvanometer 2C C
(c) (d)
3 2
EBD_7443
2016-2 Target VITEEE
5. If the terminal speed of a sphere of gold (density (a) 3.6 A (b) 1.8 A
= 19.5 kg/m3) is 0.2 m/s in a viscous liquid (density (c) 2 A (d) 1 A
= 1.5 kg/m3), find the terminal speed of a sphere 11. The wavelength of an electron for transition from
of silver (density = 10.5 kg/m3) of the same size 9
in the same liquid a state n1 to n2 is . Which of the following
8R
(a) 0.4 m/s (b) 0.133 m/s wavelengths is possible for a transition from n 2
(c) 0.1 m/s (d) 0.2 m/s to n1
6. In shown fig, the circular loop of wire is moved
16 4
with velocity towards the infinite current carrying (a) (b)
wire. Then 15R 3R
9 36
(c) (d)
v 8R 5R
12. Two solenoids are given – 1st has 1 turn per unit
length and 2nd has n turns per unit length. Ratio
of magnetic fields at their centres is
I (a) n : 1 (b) 1 : n
(a) no current is induced in loop (c) 1 : n2 (d) n2 : 1
(b) current is induced in loop clockwise 13. Which statement is correct for the given circuit?
(c) current is induced in loop anticlockwise R1
(d) extra charges are induced on the wire loop
7. For a current carrying inductor, emf associated
is 20mV. Now, current through it changes from R2
6A to 2A in 2s. The coefficient of mutual
inductance is
(a) 20 mH (b) 10 mH R3
(c) 1mH (d) 2 mH (a) I through R1 > I through R2
8. A square current carrying loop is changed to a (b) I through R3 > I through R2 and R1
circular loop in time t1. Then (c) I through R2 > I through R3 and R1
(a) emf is induced in loop for time t < t1 (d) I is same in R1, R2 and R3
(b) emf is induced in loop for time t > t1 14. A (+)vely charged particle is placed near an
(c) no emf is induced in loop during whole infinitely long straight conductor where there is
process zero gravity. Then
(d) emf is induced due to change in magnetic (a) the charged particle will not move
field (b) it will move parallel to the straight conductor
9. Hologram is based on phenomenon of (c) it will move perpendicular to the straight
(a) diffraction conductor
(b) polarisation (d) it will move with constant acceleration
(c) interference 15. A metallic bar is heated from 0ºC to 100ºC. The
(d) total internal reflection coeficient of linear expansion is 10–5 K–1. What
10. In given circuit, all resistances are of 10 . Current will be the percentage increase in length?
flowing through ammeter is (a) 0.01% (b) 0.1%
(c) 1% (d) 10%
16. If the wavelength is brought down from 6000 Å
to 4000 Å in a photoelectric experiment then what
will happen?
(a) The work function of the metal will increase
(b) The threshold frequency will decrease
A
(c) No change will take place
(d) Cut off voltage will increase
12V
Solved Paper 2016 2016-3
17. For what value of A, B and C, the output Y = 1 act as a single resistance in a circuit. The
temperature coefficient of their single resistance
A
will be
B Y
C
(a) (b) 1 2
1 2
(a) 0 0 1 (b) 1 0 1 1 2
(c) 1 0 0 (d) 0 1 0 1 2 1 2
(c) (d)
2 2
18. Let the energy of an emitted photoelectron be E
23. The current density varies with radial distance r
and thewave-length of incident light be . What as J = a r2, in a cylindrical wire of radius R. The
will be the change in E if is doubled? current passing through the wire between radial
(a) E (b) E / 2 distance R/3 and R/2 is
(c) 2 E (d) E / 4
19. A solid sphere of radius R carries a uniform 65 a R 4 25 a R 4
(a) (b)
volume charge density . The magnitude of 2592 72
electric field inside the sphere at a distance r
65 a 2 R3 81 a 2 R 4
from the centre is (c) (d)
2938 144
r R
(a) (b) 24. A potentiometer circuit shown in the figure is
3 0 3 0 set up to measure emf of cell E. As the point P
moves from X to Y, the galvanometer G shows
R2 R3
(c) (d) deflection always in one direction, but the
r 0 r2 0 deflection decreases continuously until Y is
p reached. The balance point between X and Y
20. Two point dipoles pkˆ and kˆ are located at may be obtained by
2
(0, 0, 0) and (1m, 0, 2m) respectively. The resultant V R
electric field due to the two dipoles at the point
(1m, 0, 0) is
9p ˆ 7p ˆ P Y
(a) 32 k (b) k X
0 32 0
7p
(c) kˆ (d) none of these G
32 0 E
21. An iron rod of length 2m and cross-sectional (a) decreasing the resistance R and decreasing V
area of 50 mm2 stretched by 0.5 mm, when a mass (b) decreasing the resistance R and increasing V
of 250 kg is hung from its lower end. Young’s (c) increasing the resistance R and increasing V
modulus of iron rod is (d) increasing the resistance R and decreasing V.
25. A current I flows in the anticlockwise direction
(a) 19.6 10 20 N / m 2
through a square loop of side a lying in the xoy
18 2 plane with its center at the origin. The magnetic
(b) 19.6 10 N / m
induction at the center of the square loop is
(c) 19.6 1010 N / m 2 2 2 0I 2 2 0I
(a) eˆx (b) eˆz
a a
(d) 19.6 1015 N / m 2
22. Two resistances equal at 0° C with temperature 2 2 0I 2 2 0I
coefficient of resistance 1 and 2 joined in series (c) eˆz (d) eˆx
2 2
a a
EBD_7443
2016-4 Target VITEEE
26. A particle of charge q and mass m moves in a the refractive index of water is 4/3 and the fish is
circular orbit of radius r with angular speed . 12 cm below the surface, the radius of this circle
The ratio of the magnitude of its magnetic (in cm) is
moment to that of its angular momentum depends (a) 36 5 (b) 4 5
on
(c) 36 7 (d) 36 / 7
(a) and q (b) , q and m
33. A metal ball of mass 2 kg moving with a velocity
(c) q and m (d) and m
of 36 km/h has a head on collision with a
27. A long straight wire of radius R carries current i.
stationary ball of mass 3 kg. If after the collision,
The magnetic field inside the wire at distance r the two balls move together, the loss in kinetic
from its centre is expressed as : energy due to collision is
µ0 i 2µ0 i (a) 140 J (b) 100 J
(a) .r (b) .r (c) 60 J (d) 40 J
R 2 R2
34. Two lenses of focal length f1 = 10 cm and f2 = –
µ0 i µ0i 20 cm are kept as shown. The resultant power of
(c) .r (d) .r combination will be
2 R2 2 R
f2
28. If i1 = 3 sin t and i2 = 4 cos t, then i3 is f1
Silvered
i1 i2
i3
(a) –10D (b) 5 D
(c) 0 (d) 10 D
(a) 5 sin ( t + 53°) (b) 5 sin ( t + 37°)
(c) 5 sin ( t + 45°) (d) 5 cos ( t + 53°) 35. When a plastic thin film of refractive index 1.45
29. The equation of AC voltage is E = 220 sin is placed in the path of one of the interfering
waves then the central fringe is displaced
t + / 6 and the A.C. current is I = 10 sin
through width of five fringes. The thickness of
t / 6 . The average power dissipated is the film, if the wavelength of light is 5890Å, will
(a) 150 W (b) 550 W be
(c) 250 W (d) 50 W (a) 6.544 × 10–4 cm (b) 6.544 × 10–4 m
30. The current in an L–R circuit builds up to (3/4)th (c) 6.54 × 10–4 cm (d) 6.5 × 10–4 cm
of its steady state value in 4 seconds. The time 36. An unpolarised beam of intensity I0 is incident
constant of this circuit is on a pair of nicols making an angle of 60° with
1 2 each other. The intensity of light emerging from
(a) sec (b) sec the pair is
ln 2 ln 2
(a) I0 (b) I0/2
3 4 (c) I0/4 (d) I0/8
(c) sec (d) sec
ln 2 ln 2 37. The half life of radioactive Radon is 3.8 days.
31. The magnetic flux in a closed circuit of resistance 1
10 varies with time as = (2t –4t2 +1). The th of the radon
The time at the end of which
20
current in the loop will change its direction after
a time of sample will remain undecayed is (given
(a) 0.25 sec (b) 0.5 sec log10 e 0.4343 )
(c) 1 sec (d) none
(a) 3.8 days (b) 16.5 days
32. A fish looking up through the water sees the
outside world contained in a circular horizon. If (c) 33 days (d) 76 days.
Solved Paper 2016 2016-5
38. If the nuclear radius of 27Al is 3.6 Fermi, the 45. Which of these undergo polymerisation?
(a) CH3OH (b) C2H5OH
approximate nuclear radius of 64Cu in Fermi is
O
(a) 4.8 (b) 3.6 (c) (d) CH3CHO
(c) 2.4 (d) 1.2 CH3 C CH3
39. A hydrogen atom is in an excited state of principal 46. Which of the following graph represents
quantum number (n), it emits a photon of variation of 2p-orbital wave function with
wavelength ( ), when it returns to the ground distance from the nucleus?
state. The value of n is
R ( R 1)
(a) (b)
R 1 R
R (a) (b)
(c) ( R 1) (d)
R 1 r r
40. A marble block of mass 2 kg lying on ice when
given a velocity of 6 m/s is stopped by friction in
10 s. Then the coefficient of friction is (Take g =
10 ms–2)
(c) (d)
(a) 0.06 (b) 0.03
(c) 0.04 (d) 0.01 r r
47. Name the catalyst used to bring down the
PART - II (CHEMISTRY) reaction
NO2 NH2
41. IUPAC name of valeric acid is
(a) Propanoic acid (b) Butanoic acid ?
(c) Ethanoic acid (d) Pentanoic acid
NH2
(a) Sn/HCl (b) CuCl/HCl
HNO3, H2SO4 (c) Cu2Cl2/HCl (d) Zn-Hg/HCl
42. ?
48. The correct set of quantum numbers for Rb
The product P for the above given reaction will (atomic no. 37) is
be
1 1
(a) m-nitroaniline (a) 5, 0, 0, (b) 5,1, 0,
(b) o-nitroaniline 2 2
(c) p-nitroaniline
1 1
(d) both o & p nitroaniline (c) 6, 0,1, (d) 5,1,1,
2 2
43. Coordination number of Co in [Co(NH3 )6 ] Cl3
49. XeF4 disproportionate in water to give
(a) + 2 (b) + 3
(c) + 5 (d) + 8 (a) Xe + HF (b) Xe and XeO3
44. Which of the following complex will show fac & (c) XeOF4 and HF (d) XeO2Fe and HF
mer isomerism? 50. An ionic compound has a unit cell consisting of
(a) Co(NH3 )3 (NO2 )3 A ions at the corners of a cube and B ions on the
centres of the faces of the cube. The empirical
(b) CoCl2 (en)2 formula for this compound would be
2 (a) A 3B (b) AB3
(c) (Co(NH3 ) Cl (en) 2
(c) A 2B (d) AB
(d) Co(NH3 )2 Cl2 (en)
EBD_7443
2016-6 Target VITEEE
51. Among the following the incorrect statement is
(a) R – NH2 (b) R – HN – CH3
(a) Density of crystals remains unaffected due
to Frenkel defect. (c) R – CH3 (d) R – N – (CH3)2
(b) In BCC unit cell the void space is 32%. 59. The protein present in the hair is
(c) Density of crystals decreases due to (a) Lysine (b) Myosine
Schottky defect. (c) Keratin (d) Alanine
(d) Electrical conductivity of semiconductors 60. One mole of an ideal gas at 300 K is expanded
and metals increases with increase in isothermally from an initial volume of 1 litre to
temperature. 10 litres. Then S (cal deg–1 mol–1) for this
process is : (R = 2 cal K–1 mol–1)
NO2 (a) 7.12 (b) 8.314
NH2
(c) 4.6 (d) 3.95
61. For a reaction A B; H = 20 kJ mol–1 the
52.
activation energy of the forward reaction is
(A) (B) (C) 85 kJ/mol. The activation energy of the backward
The correct order of electrophilic substitution reaction will be
for the compounds given above will be (a) 105 kJ/mol (b) 65 kJ/mol
(a) A > B > C (b) C > B > A (c) 45 kJ/mol (d) 75 kJ/mol
(c) B > C > A (d) B > A > C 62. If the reaction N2 + 3H2 = 2NH3 occurs at 200°C
53. For mesotartaric acid, the correct configuration and 1000 atm then the graph showing the correct
for chiral carbon is equilibrium yield at 400°C is
(a) 2R, 3S (b) 2R, 3R
(c) 2S, 3R (d) 1D, 2L 400°C
54. Which of the two acids form anhydrides?
(a) [NH3]
(I) Oxalic acid (II) Succinic acid 200°C
(III) Benzoic acid (IV) Phthalic acid
(a) I & III (b) II & IV
T(°C)
(c) II & III (d) III & IV
55. By which reaction ketal is formed? 200°C
(a) Glycol with acetone 400°C
(b) Hydration of glycol (b) [NH3]
(c) Condensation of glycol
(d) Glycol with acetaldehyde
T(°C)
56. Wh ich one of the following show
stereoisomerism?
(a) 2-Butene 400°C
(b) 3-Methyl but-1-ene (c) [NH3] 200°C
(c) 2-Methyl butene
(d) Butanol
T(°C)
57. Acetophenone and Benzophenone can be
distinguished by which of the following test 200°C
(a) Knoeveangel reaction 400°C
(b) Canizzaro’s reaction (d) [NH3]
(c) Aldol condensation
(d) HVZ Reaction
T(°C)
LiAlH4 63. Group 15 elements have more electron gain
58. R NC P
enthalpy than group 16-elements. The correct
The product P in this reaction is
reason for this is
Solved Paper 2016 2016-7
(a) Half -filled stability of gp. 15 elements. 69. The enthalpy change for a given reaction at 298
(b) Poor shielding in gp. 15 K is – x J mol –1 . For the reaction to be
(c) Poor shielding in gp. 16 spontaneous at 298 K, the entropy change at
that temperature
(d) Half -filled stability of gp. 16 elements
(a) can be negative, but numerically greater
64. t-butyl CH CH C OH can’t give x
|| than Jk 1
O 298
(b) can be negative, but numerically smaller
decarboxylation while normally - unsaturated
x
acid give this reaction because than Jk 1 .
298
(a) t-butyl gp. has large size and does not let
(c) can not be negative
the COOH group to leave. (d) can not be positive
(b) t-butyl gp. can’t extract H from COOH. 70. a moles of PCl5 is heated in a closed container
(c) t-butyl gp. stabilise carbanion formed. to equilibriate PCl5(g) PCl3(g) + Cl2(g) at a
pressure of P atm. If x moles of PCl5 dissociate
(d) t-butyl gp. does not allow this composition at equilibrium, then
to convert to - -unsaturated acid 1/2
65. Which type of carbocation is/are formed when x Kp x Kp P
(a) a Kp P (b)
a Kp
(a) –1 (b) 1
93. If e x y 1 y2 , then the value of y is
1
(c) (d) 3 1 x x 1 x x
3 (a) (e e ) (b) (e e )
85. The probability of India winning a test match 2 2
x x
1 x
against Australia is assuming independence (c) e x e 2 (d) e e 2
2
94. What is the area of a loop of the curve r = asin3 ?
from match to match. The probability that in a
match series India’s second win occurs at third a2 a2
test match is (a) (b)
6 8
1 1 1 2
(a) (b) (c) (d) a2 a2
8 4 2 3 (c) (d)
12 24
86. If | a | 3, | b | 2, | c | 1 then the value of 95. Convert the hexadecimal numeral ABCD into
binary numeral
| a. b b . c c . a | is (given that a b c 0) (a) (1010101111001101)2
(a) –7 (b) 7 (b) (1001000011111111)2
(c) 14 (d) –14 (c) (1111110000010001)2
(d) (1000100100111100)2
87. If f ( x) x 2 , g ( x) 2 x, 0 x 2 then the 96. The normal at the point (at 12, 2at 1) on the
2 parabola, cuts the parabola again at the point
value of I( x ) max f ( x ), g ( x) is whose parameter is
0 2 2
(a) t2 t1 (b) t2 t1
10 1 11 t1 t1
(a) (b) (c) (d) 32
3 3 3 2
88. If A and B are matrices and B = ABA–1 then the (c) t2 t1 (d) None of these
t1
value of (A + B) (A – B) is
(a) A2 + B2 (b) A2 – B2 97. The distance moved by the particle in time t is
(c) A + B (d) A – B given by s = t 3 12 t 2 6 t 8 . At the instant,
89. The value of (1 + – 2)7 is when its acceleration is zero the velocity is :
(a) 128 2 (b) –128 2 (a) 42 (b) –42
(c) 128 (d) –128 (c) 48 (d) –48
90. The moment about the point ˆi 2ˆj 3kˆ of a force 98. The logical expression X, in its simplest form for
the truth table
represented by ˆi ˆj kˆ acting through the a b X
point 2i + 3j + k is 1 0 0
(a) 3iˆ 3jˆ is
(b) 3iˆ ˆj 1 1 1
0 1 0
(c) ˆi ˆj (d) 3iˆ 3jˆ 0 0 0
91. If g (x) is a polynomial satisfying (a) X = a . b (b) X = a + b
g (x) g(y) = g(x) + g(y) + g(xy) – 2 (c) X = a ' . b (d) X = a . b'
for all real x and y and g (2) = 5 then Lt g(x) is 1 1
x 3
99. The value of cos cos 1 is equal to
(a) 9 (b) 10 2 8
(c) 25 (d) 20 (a) – 3/4 (b) 3/4
92. The equation of one of the common tangents to (c) 1/16 (d) 1/4
100. Consider the objective function Z = 40x + 50y.
the parabola y2 = 8x and x 2 y 2 12x 4 0
The minimum number of constraints that are
is required to maximize Z are
(a) y = –x + 2 (b) y = x – 2 (a) 4 (b) 2
(c) y = x + 2 (d) None of these (c) 3 (d) 1
EBD_7443
2016-10 Target VITEEE
101. In a culture the bacteria count is 1,00,000. The
(a) x 2 y 2 z 2 9p 2
number is increased by 10% in 2 hours. In how
many hours will the count reach 2,00,000 if the (b) x 3 y 3 z 3 9p 3
rate of growth of bacteria is proportional to the
number present. (c) x2 y2 z2 9p 2
2 2 log 2 (d) x 3 y3 z3 9p 3
(a) (b)
11 11 108. While shuffling a pack of 52 playing cards, 2 are
log log
10 10 accidentally dropped. The probability that the
missing cards to be of different colours is
log 2 log 2 29 1 26 27
(c) (d) (a) (b) (c) (d)
log11 11 52 2 51 51
log
10 109. Which of the following is INCORRECT for the
1 hyperbola x 2 2y2 2x 8 y 1 0
1
102. The value of sin –1 cot (3) is
5 (a) Its eccentricity is 2
1 PART - IV (ENGLISH)
115. dx is equal to
2 4 3/ 4
x (x 1) Direction (Qs. 121-123) Read the passage carefully
and anser the questions given below.
1/ 4
1 Laws of nature are not commands but statements of
(a) 1 C (b) ( x 4 1)1 / 4 C
acts. The use of the word "law" in this context is rather
x4
unfortunate. It would be better to speak of uniformities
1/ 4 1/ 4 in nature. This would do away with the elementary
1 1
(c) 1 C (d) C 1 fallacy that a law implies a law giver. If a piece of matter
x4 x4 does not obey a law of nature it is punished. On the
116. If the letters of the word KRISNA are arranged contrary, we say that the law has been incorrectly
in all possible ways and these words are started.
written out as in a dictionary, then the rank of 121. If a piece of matter violates nature's law, it is not
the word KRISNA is punished because
(a) 324 (b) 341 (a) it is not binding to obey it
(c) 359 (d) None of these (b) there is no superior being to enforce the
law of nature
117. The shortest distance between the lines (c) it cannot be punished
x = y + 2 = 6z – 6 and x + 1 = 2y = – 12z is (d) it simply means that the facts have not been
1 correctly stated by law
(a) (b) 2 122. Laws of nature differ from man-made laws
2
because
3 (a) the former state facts of Nature
(c) 1 (d) (b) they must be obeyed
2
(c) they are natural
118. The domain and range of the function f given (d) unlike human laws, they are systematic
by f(x) = 2 – |x – 5| is 123. The laws of nature based on observation are
(a) Domain = R+, Range = (– , 1] (a) conclusion about the nature of the universe.
(b) Domain = R, Range = (– , 2] (b) true and unfalsifiable.
(c) Domain = R, Range = (– , 2) (c) figments of the observer imagination.
(d) Domain = R+, Range = (– , 2] (d) subject to change in the light of new facts.
124. Direction: This question presents a sentence,
119. The number of surjective functions from A to B
part of which or all of which is underlined.
where A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and B = {a, b} is Beneath the sentence you will find four ways of
(a) 14 (b) 12 phrasing the underlined part. The first of these
(c) 2 (d) 15 repeats the original; the other three are
b different. If you think the original is best, choose
120. If f (a b – x ) f ( x) , then x f ( x) dx is the first answer; otherwise choose one of the
a
others.
The administration discussed whether the
equal to
number of studen ts studying European
a b
b languages was likely to decline when the senior
(a) f (b – x ) dx lecturer retired.
2 a (a) whether the number of students studying
b European languages was likely
a b (b) whether the number of students studying
(b) f (b x) dx
2 a European languages were likely
(c) if th e students studying European
b languages were likely
b a
(c) f ( x) dx (d) if the number of European language
2 students were likely
a
b
125. Choose the best pronunciation of the word,
a b Restaurant, from the following options.
(d) f ( x ) dx (a) res-trawnt (b) res-tuh-rawnt
2
a (c) rest-rant (d) resto-raunt
EBD_7443
2016-12 Target VITEEE
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) with Q, the equivalent resistance in the
P-arm becomes 10 .
1. (d) When work is done upon a system by a P 10
conservative force then its potential energy 1
Q 10
increases.
2. (a) de-Broglie wavelength is given by S 4
and 1
h R 4
= , where h = Planck’s constant and
p
P S
p = momentum .
Q R
Also, energy (E) and momentum are related
as 4. (a) When a dielectric slab of dielectric constant
p2 K
3
E is inserted between the plates of C 2,
2m 2
p 2mE
its new capacitance C 2 becomes
h 1
as h and m are 3
2mE E C2 C
constants 2
2K ( p / 2) Kp ˆ 45° 45°
E1 ( k) I I
23 8
O
Kp ˆ
E2 ( k)
1
I
7 7p
E1 E2 Kp( kˆ) = kˆ Total field
8 32 0
0I 2 2 0I
250 9.8 = 4. (2sin 45 )
a a
4
21. (c) Y F/A 50 10 6 2
/ 0.5 10 3 26. (c) The angular momentum L of the particle is
2 given by
250 9.8 2 L = mr2 where = 2 n.
6 3 19.6 1010 N / m 2
50 10 0.5 10
Frequency n = ;
22. (d) R1 = R0(1 + 2
1t) + R0(1 + 2t)
q
= 2 R0 1 1 2
t Further i = q × n =
2
2
Comparing with R = R0 (1+ t) q
Magnetic moment, M = iA = r2;
2
1 2
2
Solved Paper 2016 2016-15
qr 2 d
M= 31. (a) e = [ 2 8t 0]
2 dt
M qr 2 q 1
So, 8t =2 t= sec = 0.25 sec
L 2mr 2 2m 4
27. (c) Using Ampere's law, we have
1 r
B.d µ0iin r 32. (d) sin ic
2
R r h2
i
or B × 2 r = µ0 r2 Using h = 12 cm, µ = 4/3
R2
µ0 i r r
B=. 2
2 R
28. (a) From Kirchhoff’s current law, ic
h
i3 i1 i2 3sin t 4sin ( t 90 ) ic
Fish
= 32 42 2(3)(4) cos 90 sin ( t )
36
4sin 90 4 We get r = cm.
where tan 7
3 4 cos 90 3 33. (c) Apply conservation of momentum,
i3 = 5 sin ( t + 53°) m1v1 = (m1 + m2)v
m1 v1
E0 v=
29. (b) We know that, Z = I (m1 m 2 )
0
Given, E0 = 220V and I0 = 10 A Here v1 = 36 km/hr = 10 m/s,
m1 = 2 kg, m2 = 3 kg
220
so Z = = 22 ohm
10 10 2
v 4 m/s
5
=
6 6 3 1
K.E. (initial) = 2 (10) 2 100 J
E0 I0 2
pa cos
2 2 1
K.E. (Final) = (3 2 ) ( 4 ) 2 40 J
220 10 2
= cos = 550 W
2 2 3 Loss in K.E. = 100 – 40 = 60 J
30. (b) I I 0 (1 e ) t/ Alternatively use the formula
where time constant 1 m1m2 2
Ek u1 u 2
3 t/ 2 m1 m 2
I0 I0 (1 e )
4
3 1 100 100
l e t/
e t/ 34. (d) P = 2 0
4 4 10 20
t 1 4 P = 10 dioptre.
ln e ln 2 ln 2
4
(0.45)t
35. (a) X0 ( 1)t 5 10
2 5890 10
ln 2
EBD_7443
2016-16 Target VITEEE
5 5890 10 10 –4 4
t = 6.544 × 10 cm rCu 3.6 4.8 Fermi
0.45 3
36. (c) According to2Malus’ law2
I = I0 cos = I0 (cos 60º) 1 1 1
39. (d) As R
2
I n12 n22
1
= I0 × = 0 1 1 1
2 4 R
37. (b) t1/2 = 3.8 day 12 n 2
Multiply both sides by
0.693 0.693
0.182 1 1 1
t1/ 2 3.8 1 R 1 2 or 1 2
n R n
If the initial number of atom is a = A0 then
after time t the number of atoms is a/20 = A. 1 1 R 1
or 1
We have to find t. n2 R R
2.303 A0 2.303 a R
t log log or n
A 0.182 a / 20 R 1
2.303 6
log 20 = 16.46 days 40. (a) a g [using v = u + at]
0.182 10
6 6
38. (a) Nuclear radius, r A1/ 3 = 0.06
where A is mass number 10 g 10 10
1/ 3 1/ 3
rCu ACu 64
rAl AAl 27
+
PART - II (CHEMISTRY) : NH2 NH3
41. (d) The common name of Pentanoic acid is
conc. HNO3
valeric acid.
conc. H2SO4
42. (d) Nitric acid not only nitrates, but also +
—NH2 gp. o, p-director —NH3 gp. m-director
oxidizes the highly reactive ring as well,
with loss of much material as dark-coloured However, all these difficulties are overcome
tar. Furthermore, in the strongly acidic by protecting the amino group by
nitration medium, the amine is converted acetylation, with either acetyl chloride or
into anilinium ion (—NH3+) ; substitution acetic anhydride. Acetylation (—NH2
is thus controlled not by the —NH2 group NHCOCH3 ) converts —NH2 group to
but by the —NH3+ group which, because acetamido (—NHCOCH3) group which is o,
of its positive charge, directs the entering p-directing but lesser activating toward
group to the meta- position instead of electrophilic aromatic substitution than the
ortho, and para. parent —NH2 group.
H H
+
: NH2 O
:N N
C—CH3 C—CH3
CH3 CCl
O O–
Aniline Acetanilide Resonance in acetanilid due to amide group
(electron pair can delocalize (note that electron pair on N can also delocalize to
only to benzene ring making amide group, hence —NHCOCH3 gp. becomes
o, p-positions highly reactive) weak activator than the —NH2 group)
Solved Paper 2016 2016-17
NO2
NH2 NH2
+ NO2
(i) H2 O, H , heat
+
–
(ii ) OH
NO2
o-Nitroaniline p-Nitroaniline
43. (c) The number of atoms of the ligands that are 46. (a)
directly bound to the central metal atom or 47. (a) The most widely used method for preparing
ion by coordinate bond is known as the aromatic amines is the reduction of the nitro
coordination number of the metal atom or group to the amino group. This reduction
ion. Hence the coordination no. of the given can be achieved by catalytic
compound will be 6. hydrogenation, or most frequently with an
44. (a) Complexes of the type MA B exist in two acid and a metal (Fe, Zn, Sn) or a metal salt
3 3 like SnCl2.
geometrical forms which are named as facial
(fac-) and meridonal (mer-isomers). H2, catalyst
C6H5 NO2 C6H5NH2
Co(NH3 )3 (NO2 )3 may be represented or (i) Sn, HCl, (ii) OH
Nitrobenzene Aniline
in fac- and mer-isomeric forms as follows.
NO2 NH3 48. (a) The electronic configuration for Rb (37) is
NH3 NO2 NO2 Rb (37)
NO2
= 1s2 2s2 2p6 3s2 3p6 4s2 3d10 4p6 5s1
Co Co 1
For 5s1, n = 5, = 0, m = 0, s
NH3 NO2 NH3 NO2 2
49. (b) XeF4 disproportionates in water giving
NH3 NH3
solid XeO3 on evaporation.
fac-isomer mer-isomer
6XeF4 12H 2 O 2XeO3 24HF 4Xe 3O 2
45. (c, d) Acetone on polymerisation give mesitylene
6XeF4 12H 2 O 2XeO3 24HF 4Xe 3O 2
50. (b) Number of A ions in the unit cell
CH3
1
= 8 1
conc H2SO4 8
3CH3COCH3
Number of B ions in the unit cell
H3C CH3 1
= 6 3
3 molecules of acetaldehyde produce 2
paraldehyde (CH3CHO)3 and 4 molecules of it Hence empirical formula of the compound
produce metaldehyde (CH3CHO)4. = AB3
EBD_7443
2016-18 Target VITEEE
51. (d) The electrical resistance of metals
CH 2 COOH heat
CH2 CO
depends upon temperature. Electrical 54. (b) | | O
resistance decreases with decrease in H 2O
CH 2 COOH CH2 CO
temperature and becomes zero near the
Succinic anhydride
absolute temperature. Material in this state
is said to possess super conductivity. COOH CO
heat
52. (a) An electron releasing group stablilises the H 2O
O
carbocation by dispersing its positive COOH CO
charge and thus activates the ring while an Phthalic anhydride
electron-withdrawing group destabilises Oxalic on heating produces formic acid.
the carbocation by intensifying its positive 55. (a)
charge and thus deactivates the ring. CH2OH CH 3 CH 2 O R
| +O=C | O
–NH2 being electron releasing group CH2OH CH 3 CH 2 O R
releases electron and thus tend to neutralise
positive charge of the ring and itself CH3 CH3 H CH3
C=C C=C
becomes somewhat positive. The dispersal 56. (a) H H H3C H
of positive charge of the ring stabilises cis-2-butene trans-2-butene
carbocation and hence facilitates its 57. (c) Aldehydes and Ketones containing
formation which ultimately results an -hydrogen undergo aldol condensation,
increased rate of reaction. Now since such since benzophenone does not have
factor is not present in benzene, its -hydrogen hence do not undergo aldol
condensation whereas acetophenone show
carbocation is less stable than (A). Hence
this reaction due to presence of -H atom.
aniline undergoes electrophilic substitution 58. (b) Isonitriles on reduction with LiAlH4 give
at a faster rate than benzene. 2° amines
On the other hand in (C) the –NO2 group R N C
LiAlH
4 RNHCH 3
(an electron withdrawing group) intensifies 59. (c) Keratin
positive charge on the ring and thus 60. (c) For an isothermal process
destabilises the carbocation and hence its V2
formation becomes difficult which ultimately S = 2.303 nR log
V1
results a slower reaction. Now since
substituent is not present in benzene, its 10
= 2.303 × 1 × 2 log
carbocation (B) is relatively more stable 1
than (C). Hence nitrobenzene undergoes = 4.6 cal deg–1 mol–1
electrophilic substitution at a slower rate 61. (b) Energy of activation for forward reaction
than benzene. (Ea) = 85 kJ/mol
Energy of activation for backward reaction
53. (c) COOH = Ea – H = 85 – 20 = 65 kJ mol–1
4
62. (a) Since the formation of amnonia is an
3 exothermic reaction hence on increasing
H OH
temperature, reaction will proceed in
backward direction i.e. formation of NH3
2
H OH decreases.
63. (a) The atoms having half-filled and fully filled
1 orbitals are comparatively more stable,
COOH
2S, 3R hence more energy is required to remove
Solved Paper 2016 2016-19
1 3 1
K A.e Rt , we get
S 50 60 40 JK
2 2 Ea
log k log A
=50 – (30 + 60) JK–1 = – 40 JK–1 2.303 RT
At equilibrium, T S H
EBD_7443
2016-20 Target VITEEE
Ea (1) +
....(i) H
log k1 log A E
+
2.303 RT E
Ea(2)
and log k2 log A ...(ii) Carbonium ion
2.303 RT (less stable)
1 1 RCOCl +
75. (a) v RZ2 N +
22 32 N –
COR Cl
1 1 5R a better electrophile than RCOCl
= R =
4 9 36
C 2H 5OH
76. (d) The products of the concerned reaction RCOOC2H5 +
react each other forming back the reactants. +
N –
XeF6 3H 2 O XeO3 6HF HCl
77. (c) Although in both cases products are CH3I
and C 6 H5 OH; the two reactions follow PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
different mechanism. –1 dy
2
HI (g ) 81. (b) 1 y ( x e tan y
) 0
C6 H5 O CH 3 CH 3 I C 6 H 5 OH dx
S 2
N 1
conc . HI
(1 y 2 )dx (e tan y
x )dy
C6H5 O CH 3 CH 3 I C 6 H 5 OH
S 1
N1 dx e tan y x
Remember that during S 1 reaction, CH 3 dy 1 y 2
N
is formed because it is more stable than
1
C6H5 . dx 1
. x e tan y
dy 1 y 2 = 1 y 2
: OH + OH
Which is the linear different equation of the
H
78. (c) E
+
dx
E ; form Rx S , where R and S are
dy
functions of y or constant (s)
+ M effect in phenol Oxonium ion
activates benzene ring (more stable)
Solved Paper 2016 2016-21
1 Now b2 = a2 (1 – e2)
.dy 1
I.F = = e tan y
1 y2
e b2
b2 = 16 (1 – e2), 1 e2
Hence required solution is 16
1
e tan y b2 16 b2 16 b2
x.(I.F.) (I.F) dy e2 1 e=
1 y2 16 16 4
1
tan 1 y e tan 1y
Foci = ( ae, 0) = 16 b 2 ,0
x.e 2
(e tan y )dy
1 y
x2 y2 1
Given hyperbola :
2tan 1 y 144 81 25
1 e
x.e tan y dy ...(1)
1 y2 x2 y2
2 2
1
1 12 9
Put t tan y
5 5
dt 1 1
2
dt .dy Now, b2 = a2 (e2 – 1)
dy 1 y 1 y2
2 2
2 tan 1 y 9 12
e e 2t (e 2 1)
2
dy e 2t .dt K 5 5
1 y 2
2
Hence equation (1) becomes, 9
e2 1,
1 1 2t 12
x e tan y e K
2 81 144 81
e2 1
1 1 2tan 1 y 144 144
xetan y e K
2 15 5
e
tan 1 y 2 tan 1 y 12 4
2x e e K
82. (a) AO iˆ 2 ˆj kˆ Foci = ae, o = ( 3,0)
86. (b) a b c 0 1
Put y in equation (1) , we get
x
(a b c )2 0
1 1
g(x).g g(x) g g(1) 2
2 2 2 x x
a b c 2(a .b b .c c .a ) 0
1 1
g(x).g g(x) g 2 2
9 + 4 + 1 + 2 (a.b b .c c.a ) 0 x x
[ g(1) 2 ]
a.b b .c c .a 7
This is valid only for the polynomial
87. (d) Let r (x) = f (x) . g (x) g (x) = 1 + xn ... (2)
= x2 . 2x = 2x3 Now g (2) = 5 (Given)
r (x) = 6x2 x 0 2 1 + 2n = 5 [Using equation (2)]
Put 6x2 = 0, x = 0 r ( x ) 0 16 + 2n = 4, 2n = 4, –4
Max r(x) = 2(2)3 = 16 Since the value of 2n cannot be –Ve.
or Max (f (x), g(x)) = 16 So, 2n = 4, n = 2
Now, put n = 2 in equation (2), we get
2
g (x) = 1 + x2
I(x) = 16 dx
0 Lt g(x) = Lt (1 x 2 ) = 1 + (3)2
x 3 x 3
2
I(x) = 16x 0 = 32 – 0 = 32 = 1 + 9 = 10, – 8
92. (c) Any tangent to parabola y2 = 8x is y =
88. (b) B = ABA–1 (Given)
But B = BAA–A 2
mx ...(i)
ABA–1 = BAA–1 AB = BA m
Now (A + B) (A – B) = A2 – AB + BA – B2 It touches the circle x 2 y 2 12x 4 0 ,
= A2 – AB + AB – B2 [ AB = BA]
if the length of perpendicular from the centre
= A2 – B2
89. (b) (1 + – 2)7 = (– 2 – 2)7 = (–2 2)7 (6, 0) is equal to radius 32 .
= –128 ( 4)3 2 = – 128 2
2
6m
90. (d) Here, r 2iˆ 3jˆ kˆ i 2ˆj 3kˆ m 32
m2 1
r i ˆj 2kˆ and F i ˆj kˆ
2
Then, the required moment is given by 1
3m 8(m 2 1)
r F i ˆj 2kˆ i ˆj kˆ m
(3m 2 1) 2 8(m 4 m2 )
ˆi ˆj kˆ
= 1 1 2 3iˆ 3jˆ m 4 2m 2 1 0 m 1
Hence, the required tangents are y = x + 2
1 1 1
and y = –x – 2.
Moment about given point = 3iˆ 3jˆ 93. (b) Given e x y 1 y2
91. (b) g (x). g(y) = g(x) + g (y) + g (x y) – 2 ...(1)
Put x = 1, y = 2, then ex y 1 y2
g (1). g(2) = g (1) + g (2) + g (2) – 2 Squaring both side, we have
5g (1) = g (1) + 5 + 5 – 2 e2x + y2 – 2exy = 1 + y2
4g (1) = 8 g(1) = 2 2ex y = e2x – 1
Solved Paper 2016 2016-23
e 2x 1 1 a2 sin 2 2
y y ex e x .
x 2 12 2
2e 0
2
94. (d) If curve r = a sin 3 a a2
. sin
To trace the curve, we consider the 12 2 24
following table : 95. (a) Replacing each hexadecimal digit by the
corresponding 4-digit binary numeral, we
3 5 have
3 0 2 3
2 2 2 (ABCD)16 = (1010 1011 1100 1101)2
2 5 96. (c) Let thenormal at ‘t1’ cuts the parabola again
0
6 3 2 3 6 at the point ‘t2’. the equation of the normal
r 0 a 0 a 0 a 0 at (at12, 2at1) is y + t1x = 2at1 + at13
Since it passes through the point ‘t2’ i.e
(at22, 2at2)
Thus there is a loop between 0&
3 2at2 + at1t22 = 2at1 + at13
2a(t1 – t2) + at1(t12 – t22) = 0
as r varies from r = 0 to r = 0.
2 + t1(t1 + t2) = 0 ( t1 t 2 0)
2 + t12 + t1t2 = 0
2
t1t2 = –(t12 + 2) t2 t1
t1
97. (b) s = t3 – 12t2 + 6t + 8
X ds
3t 2 24t 6
dt
d 2s
6t 24
dt 2
Acceleration = 0
Hence, the area of the loop lying in the 6t – 24 = 0
t=4
ds
13 2 Required velocity =
positive quadrant r d dt t 4
2 2
0 = 3 × (4) – 24 × 4 + 6
= 48 – 96 + 6 = 42 units
98. (a) X = a . b
1 3 2 1
sin . d 11
2
0
3 99. (b) Let cos , where 0 < < .
8 2
1 1 1 1
[On putting, 3 d d ] cos 1
3 2 8 2
1 1 1
cos cos 1 cos
a2 2
2 8 2
sin 2 d
6 1 1
0
Now , cos 1 = cos =
8 8
a 2 2 1 cos 2 1
. d cos 2 1 2sin 2 cos 2 1
6 2 2 8
0
EBD_7443
2016-24 Target VITEEE
9 3 1 1
cos 2 cos
2 16 2 4 1 3 2 5
3 = tan 1 1
1
[ 0< , so cos ] 1 .
2 4 2 4 2 3
100. (c) Two constraints are x 0, y 0 and the
1 5/ 6 2
third one will be of the type ax + by c. = tan tan 1 1 =
101. (b) Let y denote the number of bacteria at any 6 1 4
instant t then according to the question 6
dy dy 103. (b) We have,
y = k dt ... (i) abcd = cos (2 + 2 + 2 +2 ) + i sin (2 + 2
dt y
+ 2 +2 )
k is the constant of proportionality, taken
to be + ve on integrating (i), we get abcd = [cos (2 + 2 + 2 +2 )
log y = kt + c ... (ii) + i sin (2 + 2 + 2 +2 )]1/2
c is a parameter. let y0 be the initial number
or abcd
of bacteria
i.e., at t = 0 using this in (ii), c = log y0 = cos ( + + + ) + i sin ( + + + ).... (1)
log y = kt + log y0 [De Moivre's Theorem]
y 1
log = kt ...(iii) = cos ( + + + ) – i sin ( +
y0 abcd
+ + )
10 11y0
y = y0 y , when t = 2 .... (2)
100 0 10 Adding (1) and (2), we obtain
11y 0 1
abcd = 2 cos ( + + + )
So, from (iii), we get log 10 k (2) abcd
y0
104. (a) Standard deviation npq 0
1 11
k = log ... (iv) Now mean = np =25 and q < 1
2 10
y 1 11 So npq np 5
Using (iv) in (iii) log log t
y0 2 10 0 5
... (v) 105. (d) Number of ways
let the number of bacteria become 1, 00,
= [( 3C3 4C3 5C3 6C3 7C3 ) 2 8C 3 ] 2
000 to 2,00,000 in t1 hours. i.e., y = 2y0
when t = t1 hours. from (v) = 392
106. (d) rank (A B) rank (A)
2y0 1 11 2 log 2
log log t t1 = 11 and rank (A B) rank (B)
y0 2 10 1 log Therefore rank (A B) min (rank A, rank B)
10
107. (a) Let A (a, 0, 0), B (0, b, 0), C (0, 0, c), then
2 log 2
Hence, the reqd. no. of hours = 11 x y z
log equation of the plane is =1
10 a b c
Its distance from the origin,
1 1 1
102. (b) Consider sin cot 3 ...(i) 1 1 1 1
5 ... (i)
2 2 2
a b c p2
1 1 1
We have, sin 2 cot If (x, y, z) be centroid of ABC, then
5
From equation (i), we have a b c
x= ,y= ,z= ... (ii)
11 1 3 3 3
cos–1 2 + cot–1 3 = tan tan 1
2 3
Solved Paper 2016 2016-25
a1 2ˆj k,
ˆ b 6iˆ 6jˆ k,
ˆ a2 ˆi, I ( a b ) f ( x ) dx – x f ( x ) dx
1
b a
a
b2 12iˆ 6jˆ kˆ
I ( a b ) f ( x ) dx – I ;
bb
ˆi ˆj k
2I ( a b ) f ( x ) dx
b1 b 2 6 6 1 12iˆ 18ˆj 36kˆ a
b
12 6 1 a b
Hence, I f ( x ) dx
2
a
a2 a1 . b1 b2
Shortest distance = PART - IV (ENGLISH)
b1 b2
121 (b)
ˆi 2ˆj kˆ . 12i 18ˆj 36kˆ 122 (a)
=
2 2 2 123 (d)
12 18 36
124 (a) "Whether" is correct because the question
12 36 36 84 concerns a choice not a condition. With the
= 2 expression "the number of" a singular verb
1764 42
is needed and hence "was" is correct.
118. (b) Given f(x) = 2 – |x – 5| "Liable" is used in expressions such as
Domain of f(x) is defined for all real values "liable to prosecution " and not for
of x. expressions of possibility.
Since, |x – 5| 0 – |x – 5| 0 125 (b)
2 – |x – 5| 2 f(x) 2
Hence, range of f(x) is (– , 2].
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2015
p
2mL
2p
3mL æ rr ö
(c) (d) (c) R = çç 1 2 ÷÷÷ (d) R = r2 – r1
èç r2 + r1 ø÷
qE qE
13. A condenser of capacitance C is fully charged 19. An electron of mass 9.0 × 10–31kg under the
by a 200V supply. It is then discharged through action of a magnetic field moves in a circle of
a small coil of resistance wire embedded in thermally radius 2 cm at a speed of 3 × 106 m/s. If a proton
insulated block of specific heat 250 J/kg-K and of mass 1.8 × 1027 kg was to move in a circle of
of mass 100 g. If the temperature of the block same radius in the same magnetic field, then its
rises by 0.4 K, then the value of C is speed will become
(a) 300µF (b) 200µF (a) 1.5 × 103 m/s (b) 3 × 106 m/s
(c) 400µF (d) 500µF 4
(c) 6 × 10 m/s (d) 2 ×106 m/s
14. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with 20. A horizontal rod of mass 0.01kg and length 10
air as medium is 3 µF. As a dielectric is introduced cm is placed on a frictionless plane inclined at
between the plates, the capacitance becomes 15 an angle 60° with the horizontal and with the
µF. The permittivity of the medium in length of rod parallel to the edge of the inclined
C2N–1m–2 is plane. A uniform magnetic field is applied
(a) 8.15 × 10–11 (b) 0.44 × 10–10 ‘Vertically downwards. If the current through the
(c) 15.2 × 1012 (d) 1.6 × 10–14 rod is 1.73 A, then the value of magnetic field
15. The masses of three copper wires are in the induction B for which the rod remains stationary
ratio 2 : 3 : 5 and their lengths are in the ratio on the inclined plane is
5 : 3 : 2.Then, the ratio of their electrical (a) 1 T (c) 3 T
resistances is (b) 2.5 T (d) 4 T
(a) 1 : 9 : 15 (c) 2 : 3 : 5 21. A current of 2 A is flowing in the sides of an
(b) 5 : 3 : 2 (d) 125 : 30 : 8 equilateral triangle of side 9 cm. The magnetic
16. A 30V-90W lamp is operated on a 120 V DC line. field at the centroid of the triangle is
A resistor is connected in series with the lamp in (a) l.66 ×10–5 T (b) 1.22 × 10–4 T
order to glow it properly. The value of resistance (c) 1.33 × 10 T –5 (d) 1.44 × 10–4 T
Solved Paper 2015 2015-3
22. The direction of magnetic field dB due to current 28. A coil of area 5 cm2 having 20 turns is placed in
element dl at a distance r is the direction of a uniform magnetic field of 103gauss. The normal
(a) r × dl (b) dl × r to the plane of coil makes an angle 30° with the
(c) (rdl)r (d) dl magnetic field. The flux through the coil is
23. A galvanometer with a scale divided into 100 (a) 6.67 × 10–4 wb (b) 3.2 × 10–5 Wb
equal divisions has a current sensitivity of 10 (c) 5.9 × 10–4 wb (d) 8.65 × 10–4 wb
divisions per milliampere and a voltage 29. The current graph for resonance in LC circuit
sensitivity of 2 divisions per millivolt. The is
galvanometer resistance will be
(a) 4 (b) 5
I
(c) 3 (d) 7
24. The earth is considered as a short magnet with (a)
its centre coinciding with the geometric centre
of earth. The angle of dip related to the
magnetic latitude as
1
(a) tanf = (b) tan = 2tan f
2 tan Z
The second ionisation energy of M could be 68. The ratio of slopes of Kmax vs V and V0 vs v
determined from the energy values associated curves in the photoelectric effects gives
with (v = frequency, Kmax = maximum kinetic energy,
(a) 1 + 2 + 4 (c) 1 + 5 – 3 v0 = stopping potential)
(b) 2 + 3 – 4 (d) 5–3 (a) the ratio of Planck’s constant of electronic
63. In benzene, the triple bond consists of charge
(a) one sp-sp sigma bond and two p-p pi bonds (b) work function
(b) two sp-sp sigma bonds and one p-p pi bond (c) Planck’s constant
(d) charge of electron
(c) one sp2-sp2 sigma bond, one p-p pi bond
69. With excess of water, both P2O5 and PCl5 give
(d) one sp2-sp2 sigma bond, one sp2-sp2 pi
(a) H3PO3 (b) H3PO2
bond and one p-p pi bond
64. In keto-enol tautomerism of dicarbonyl (c) H3PO4 (d) H4P2O7
compounds; the enol-form is preferred in contrast 70. The dissolution of AI(OH)3 by a solution of
to the keto-form, this is due to NaOH results in the formation of
(a) presence of carbonyl group on each side (a) [AI(H2O)4 (OH)2]+
of —CH2 — group (b) [AI(H2O)3(OH)3]
(b) resonance stabilisation of enol form (c) [AI(H2O)2 (OH)4 ]–
(c) presence of methylene group (d) [AI(H2O)6 (OH)3]
71. Which of the following does not exist?
(d) rapid chemical exchange
65. An organic compound having carbon, (a) Kl + l2 ¾¾
® Kl3
hydrogen and sulphur contains 4% of sulphur.
The minimum molecular weight of the compound (b) KF + F2 ¾¾
® KF3
is (c) KBr + ICl2 ¾¾
® K[BrlCl]
(a) 200 (b) 400
(d) KF+ BrF3 ¾¾ ® K[BrF4]
(c) 600 (d) 800 72. If the ionisation energy and electron affinity of
66. Which one of the following is a case of negative an element are 275 and 86 kcal mol-1 respectively,
adsorption? then the electronegativity of the element on the
(a) Acetic acid solution in contact with animal Mulliken scale is
charcoal. (a) 2.8 (b) 0.0
(b) Dilute KCl solution in contact with blood (c) 4.0 (d) 2.6
charcoal. 73. Which of the following sets of reactants is used
(c) Concentration KCl solution in contact with for preparation of paracetamol from phenol?
blood charcoal. (a) HNO3 , H2 /Pd,(CH3CO)2O
(d) H2 gas in contact with charcoal at 300 K. (b) H2SO4 ,H2 /Pd, (CH3CO)2O
67. The concentrations of the reactant A in the (c) C6H5 N2 Cl, SnCl2/HCl, (CH3CO)2O
reacntion A ® B at different times are given (d) Br2/H2O, Zn / HCl, (CH3CO)2O
below
74. A certain compound gives negative test with
Concentration (M) Time (Minutes)
ninhydrin and positive test with Benedict’s
0.069 0 solution. The compound is
0.052 17 (a) a protein (b) a monosaccharide
0.035 34 (c) a lipid (d) an amino acid
0.018 51 75. Super glue or crazy glue is
The rate constant of the reaction according to (a) poly (methyl methacrylate)
the correct order of reaction is (b) poly (ethyl acrylate)
(a) 0.001 M/min (b) 0.001 min-1 (c) poly (methyl -cyanoacrylate)
(c) 0.001 min/M (d) 0.001 M-1 min-1 (d) poly (ethyl methacrylate)
EBD_7443
2015-8 Target VITEEE
OH
80 Which of the following reactions is used to
HNO3 prepare isobutane?
COOH X (a) Wurtz reaction of C2H5Br
76.
Br 2, water (b) Hydrolysis of n-butylmagnesium iodide
Y
(c) Reduction of propanol with red phosphorus
X and Y respectively are and HI
(a) picric acid, 2, 4, 6-tribromophenol
(d) Decarboxylation of 3-methylbutanoic acid
(b) 5-nitrophenol acid, 5-bromosalicylic acid
(c) o-nitrophenol, O-bromophenol
(d) 3,5-dinitrosalicylic acid, 3, 5-dibromosalicylic PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
acid
77. In the cannizzaro reaction given below 81. The differential equation
(3x + 4y + 1)dx + (4x + 5y + 1)dy =0
2Ph—CHO ¾¾¾ ®
–
OH
represents a family of
(a) circles (b) parabolas
Ph—CH 2 — OH + PhCO-2
(c) ellipses (d) hyperbolas
the slowest step is
å D(r )
n
82. If D(r ) = r r3 , then is
(a) the attack of OH at the carbonyl group 1 n(n + 1) r =1
(b) the transfer of hydride ion to the carbonyl equal to
group
år år
n n
(c) the abstraction of a proton from the (a)
2
(b)
3
carboxylic acid r =1 r =1
(d) the deprotonation of Ph-CH2OH
år år
n n
4
78. The reaction of 1-bromo-3-chlorocyclobutane (c) (d)
with metallic sodium in dioxane under reflux r =1 r =1
(a) Cl Cl B C
P ( A) P P B is
A A
(a) P (A B C) (b) P (A B C)
(b) Br Cl
C B
(c) P B (d) P
A A
(c) Br Br é1 3 1 ù
84. If A = êê 2 1 –1úú , then rank (A) is equal to
êë3 0 1 úû
(d) (a) 4 (b) 1
(c) 2 (d) 3
79. Identify Z in the following reaction sequence 85. The probability of atleast one double six being
thrown in n throws with two ordinary dice is
CH3CH2 CH2OH ¾¾¾¾®
Conc.H2 SO4
160 –180°C
X greater than 99%.
Then, the least numerical value of n is
Y
(a) 100 (b) 164
Z
(i) Alc. KOH
(ii) NaNH 2
(c) 170 (d) 184
86. Find the value of k for which the simultaneous
(a) CH3 — CH(NH2 ) — CN2 NH2 equations x + y + z = 3; x + 2y + 3z = 4 and x + 4y
(b) CH3 — CHOH — CH2OH + kz = 6 will not have a unique solution.
(c) CH3 — C(OH) = CH2 (a) 0 (b) 5
(d) CH3 — C º CH (c) 6 (d) 7
Solved Paper 2015 2015-9
87. If the complex number z lies on a circle with centre 93. If N is a set of natural numbers, then under binary
1 operation a ·b =a + b, (N, ·) is
at the origin and radius , then the complex (a) quasi-group (b) semi-group
4
(c) monoid (d) group
number –1+ 8z lies on a circle with radius
dx
ò cos x +
(a) 4 (b) 1
(c) 3 (d) 2 94. equals
3sin x
88. If line y = 2x + c is a normal to the ellipse
1 æx p ö
x2 y 2 log tan çç + ÷÷÷ + C
+ = 1 , then (a)
2 èç 2 12 ø
9 16
1 æx p ö
c=
2
c=
73 log tan çç - ÷÷÷ + C
(a)
3
(b)
5
(b)
3 èç 2 12 ø
æ x pö
c=
14
c=
5 log tan çç + ÷÷÷ + C
(c)
73
(d)
7
(c)
èç 2 6 ø
æ 1 ö÷ 1 æ x pö
log tan çç - ÷÷÷ + C
2
å èççç x
6
n
+ ÷ is
89. If x2 + x + 1 = 0, then the value of
n =1 x n ø÷
(d)
2 èç 2 6 ø
(a) 13 (b) 12 95. If (2, 7, 3) is one end of a diameter of the sphere
(c) 9 (d) 14 x2 + y2 + z2– 6x –12y –2z + 20 = 0, then the
90. If p : It rains today, q : I go to school, r : I shall coordinates of the other end of the diameter are
meet my friends and s : I shall go for a movie, (a) (–2, 5, –1) (b) (4, 5, 1)
then which of the following is the proportion? (c) (2, –5, 1) (d) (4, 5, –1)
If it does not rain or if I do not go to school, then 96. The two lines x = my + n, z = py + q and x = m y + n ,
I shall meet my friend and go for a movie. z = p y + q are perpendicular to each other, if
(a) (~ p Ù ~ q) Þ (r Ù s ) m p
(a) mm + pp =1 (b) + = -1
(b) ~ ( p Ù q ) Þ ( r Ù s) m' p'
(c) ~ ( p Ú q) Þ (r Ú s) m p
(d) None of these (c) + =1 (d) mm + pp = –1
m' p'
é1 3 1ù
ê ú 97. A tetrahedron has vertices at O(0, 0, 0),
91. If the matrix A = ê –1 2 –3ú then adj (adj A) is A (1, –2, 1), B (– 2, 1, 1) and C (1, –1, 2). Then, the
êë 0 1 2úû
angle between the faces OAB and ABC will be
equal to
æ1ö æ -1ö
é12 36 12 ù é12 26 –12ù cos –1 çç ÷÷÷ cos –1 çç ÷÷÷
ê –12 24 –36 ú ê 24 36 –36úú
(a) çè 2 ø (b)
èç 6 ø
(a) ê ú (b) ê
êë 0 12 24 úû êë 0 12 –24úû
æ -1ö æ1ö
cos –1 çç ÷÷÷ cos –1 çç ÷÷÷
é12 -12 36ù (c)
èç 3 ø (d) çè 4 ø
ê ú
(c) êê 24 -24 –36úú (d) None of there
êë 0 12 24úû 98. If a line segment OP makes angles of and
4 3
92. Which of the following options is not the
asymptote of the curve with X-axis and Y-axis, respectively. Then, the
3x3 + 2x2y – 7xy2 + 2y3 – 14xy + 7y2 + 4x + 5y direction cosines are
= 0? 1 3 1 1 1 1
(a) , , (b) ,,
-1 5 7 2 2 2 2
(a) y= x- (b) y = x- 2 2
2 6 6
1
3 3 (c) 1, 3, 1 (d) 1, ,1
(c) y = 2x + (d) y = 3x - 3
7 2
EBD_7443
2015-10 Target VITEEE
99. If p, q, r are simple propositions with truth values
T, F, T, then the truth value of (~p Ú q) Ù ~ r (c) (4 2 -1) sq units
Þ p is (d) (4 2 +1) sq units
(a) true (b) false 105. If a, b and c are three non-coplanar vectors, then
(c) true, if r is false (d) true, if q is true (a + b – c) · [(a – b) × (b – c) equals
100. On the interval [0, 1], the function x25(1 – x)75 (a) 0 (b) a . b × c
takes its maximum value at the point (c) a. c × b (d) 3a. b × c
106. If there is an error of m% in measuring the edge
1
(a) 0 (b) of cube, then the percent error in estimating
4 its surface area is
1 1 (a) 2 m (b) 3 m
(c) (d) (c) 1 m (d) 4 m
2 3
107. If the rectangular hyperbola is x2 – y2 = 64. Then,
1 which of the following is not correct?
101. If |z| ³ 3, then the least value of z + is (a) The length of latus rectum is 16
4
(b) The eccentricity is 2
11 11 (c) The asymptotes are parallel to each other
(a) (b)
2 4
(d) The directrices are x = ± 4 2
1 108. The equation of tangents to the hyperbola
(c) 3 (d) 3x2 – 2y2 = 6, which is perpendicular to the line
4
x – 3y = 3, are
102. The normal at the point ( at12 , 2 at1 ) on the
(a) y = –3x ± 15 (b) y = 3x ± 6
parabola meets the parabola again in the point
(c) y = –3x ± 6 (d) y = 2x ± 15
( at22 , 2 at 2 ) , then
tan x -1
2 2 109. xlim is equal to
(a) t 2 = -t1 + (b) t 2 = -t1 - ®p / 4cos 2 x
t1 t1
(a) 1 (b) 0
(c) – 2 (d) –1
2 2
(c) t 2 = t1 - (d) t 2 = t1 + 110. The area of the region bounded by the curves
t1 t1 x2 + y2 = 9 and x + y = 3 is
103. If a = ˆi - ˆj + 2kˆ and b = 2ˆi - ˆj + kˆ , then the 9p 1 9p 1
(a) + (b) -
angle between a and b is given by 4 2 4 2
æp 1ö æp 1ö
-1 æ 1 ö 9 çç - ÷÷÷ 9 çç + ÷÷÷
(a) tan - 1 (1) (b) sin ççç ÷÷÷ (c)
èç 4 2 ø (d)
èç 4 2 ø
è 2ø
111. For any three vectors a, b and c, [a + b, b + c, c + a]
1 1 is
(c) sec–1 (1) (d) tan
3 (a) [a b c] (b) 3 [a b c]
(c) 2 [a b c] (d) 0
104. The area bounded by the curves y = cos x and
p /2
3 4 sin t
(a) (b) 117. At t = 0, the function f (t) = has
214 173 t
9 7 (a) a minimum
(c) (d) (b) a discontinuity
256 231
114. The shortest distance between the lines (c) a point of inflexion
(d) a maximum
x -7 y + 4 z -6
= = 118. Using Rolle’s theorem, the equation
3 -16 7
a0xn + a1xn–1 + . . . + an = 0
x -10 y - 30 4 - z
and = = is has atleast one root between 0 and 1, if
3 8 5
a0 a
234 288 (a) + 1 + .... + an-1 = 0
(a) units (b) units n n -1
7 21
a0 a
221 234 (b) + 1 + .... + an-2 = 0
(c) units (d) units n -1 n - 2
3 21
115. If a plane passing through the point (2, 2, 1) and
is perpendicular to the planes 3x + 2y + 4z + 1= 0 (c) na0 + (n -1)a1 + .... + an-1 = 0
and 2x + y + 3z + 2 = 0. Then, the equation of the
plane is a0 a
(d) + 1 + .... + an = 0
(a) 2x – y – z – 1 = 0 (b) 2x + 3y + z –1= 0 n +1 n
(c) 2x + y + z + 3 = 0 (d) x – y + z –1 = 0 119. Which of the following inequality is true for
116. From a city population, the probability of x > 0?
7
selecting a male or smoker is , a male x
10 (a) log(1 + x) < <x
1+ x
2
smoker is and a male, if a smoker is already x
5 (b) < x < log (1 + x )
1+ x
2
selected, is . Then, the probability of x
3 (c) x < log (1 + x ) <
1+ x
3
(a) selecting a male is x
2 (d) < log (1 + x ) < x
1+ x
1
(b) selecting a smoker is d 2x
5 120. The solution of - x = k , where k is a
dy 2
2
(c) selecting a non-smoker is non-zero constant, vanishes when y = 0 and
5
tends of finite limit as y tends to infinity, is
(d) selecting a smoker, if a male is first selected,
(a) x =k (1 + e–y) (b) x = k(e y + e –y – 2)
8 –y
(c) x = k(e –1) (d) x = k(ey –1)
is given by
5
EBD_7443
2015-12 Target VITEEE
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) p p
1. (a) As r increase, the potential energy p p
increases. Thus, it decreases kinetic
energy of hydrogen atom. So, when an p 0.20 1
atom jumps from one energy level to the p 100 500
higher level, its potential energy increases
and kinetic energy decreases. or, p = 500 p
2. (b) Given: T1/2 = 4.47 × 108 yr 6. (a) The emitted electrons may lie near the
surface and can have a maximum amount
n
N 60 1 10 of energy E0.
2n
N0 100 2 6 If they are from deep inside, then energy
is less than E0.
Apply logarithm on both sides
7. (a) The n-type semiconductor has excess of
n log2 = log 10 – log 6
n × 0.3 = 1 – 0.778 = 0.22 free electrons for conduction. The total
number of electrons in an atom is equal
0.222 to the total number of protons in the
n 0.74
0.3 nucleus. So, n-type semiconductor is
So, t = nT1/2 = 0.74 × 4.47 × 108 neutral.
or, t = 3.3 × 108 yr 8. (c) The output is obtained for half cycle only
3. (b) Y(n, ) the nucleus splits into -particle in half wave rectifier. Therefore, frequency
and neutrons of the ripple is same as that of the input
A 1 7 4 i.e. 50 Hz.
i.e. Z Y 0n 3 Li 2 He 9. (c) Given: IC = 1mA = 10–3 A
So A + 1 = 7 + 4 A = 10 Ib = 15 A = 15 × 10–6 A
and Z + 0 = 3 + 2 or Z = 5 RL = 5k = 5 × 103 .
Hence, the nucleus of element Y is boron Ri = 330
10 10
5Y = 5B . The voltage gain of an amplifier
4. (c) Energy of electron in nth orbit of hydrogen
atom IC R L
Ar
13.6 Ib R i
En eV
n2 10 3
5 103
= 1010
13.6 15 10 6 330
3.4 n2 =4
n2 10. (a) As we know, output of OR gate
or, n = 2 Y=A+ B
Angular momentum of electron Output of AND gate
nh 2h h Y = Y.C
L Y = (A + B).C
2 2
If C = 0 irrespective of A and B, then
5. (b) As, we know de-Broglic wavelength, output Y must be zero.
h 11. (c) Due to charge at A and B magnitude of
p intensity of electric field at point C
1 1 q
E1 E2 .
p 4 0 r2
Solved Paper 2015 2015-13
1 3q 10 4
= E12 E12 2E12 3E1 = C 4
5 10
= 500 F
2 2 10
2 4 0r
14. (b) Capacitance of air capacitor
12. (b) Torque when the wire is brought in a
uniform field E. 0A
C0 3 F ....(i)
= qEL sin d
= qEL [ is very small] When a dielectric of permittivity r and
Moment of inertia of rod AB about O dielectric constant K is introduced
between the plates, then
2 2
L L mL2 K 0A
I m m
2 2 2 Capacitance, C 15 F ....(ii)
d
+q F+q Dividing eq. (ii) by (i), we get
B C d 15
O C0 0A 3
Eq d
–q A K =5
=I . permittivity of the medium
r= 0K
qEL = 8.85 × 10–12 × 5 = 0.44 × 10–10
I mL2 1
2 15. (d) using, R
A
2 2qEL l1 l2 l3
2 [ = 2 ] R1 : R2 : R3 = A : A : A
mL 1 2 3
2qE
2 l12 l 22 l32
= : :
mL V1 V2 V3
Time period of the wire
l12 l 22 l32
2 mL = : :
T 2 m1d m2d m 3d
2qE
EBD_7443
2015-14 Target VITEEE
r1 + r2 + R = 2r2
l12 l22 l32 R = r2 – r1
= : :
m1 m 2 m3 19. (a) Here, the magnetic force (Bqv) will
provide the necessary centripetal force
52 32 22
= : : = 125 : 30 : 8 mv2
2 3 5
16. (b) Resistance of lamp r
2
V2 30 mv2
R0 10 Bqv
P 90 r
Current in the lamp Bqr = mv
V 30 For electron and proton, the magnetic field
I 3A B, charge q and radius r, all same.
R 0 10 mv = constant
As the lamp is operated on 120V DC, then i.e. meve = mpvp
resistance becomes
me 9 10 31
V 120 vP ve 3 106
R 40 mp 1.8 10 27
i 3
For proper glow, a resistance R is joined = 1.5 × 103
m/s
in series with the bulb 20. (a) Here two forces acting on the rod
R = R + R0 simultaneously.
R = R – R0 = 40 – 10 = 30
17. (d) Let us Consider a cell of emf E and iB cos 60°
N
balancing length l1
E = kl1
potential difference is balanced by length l2.
V = kl2 60°
Internal resistance of the cell mg sin 60°
60° mg mg cos 60°
E V E l1
r R 1 R 1 R
V V l2 From FBD, mg sin 60 = Bil cos 60°
mg
560 56 B tan 60
= 1 10 1 10 il
560 60 50
0.01 10
6 = 3 1T
= 1.2 173 0.1
5 21. (c) Due to current through side AB Magnetic
18. (d) Let the emf of each source be E. When field at the centre O
they are connected in series, the current
in the circuit 0I
B1 sin 1 sin 2
4 a
E tot E E 2E
I =
R tot r1 r2 R r1 r2 R C
potential drop across the cell of internal
2E I I
resistance r2 , r r R r2 O
1 2
1
2E 2
Hence, E r2 0 a
r1 r2 R A D I B
Solved Paper 2015 2015-15
As the magnetic field due to each of the 24. For a dipole at position (R, Q)
three sides is the same in magnitude and
direction. 0 2M cos
BR . ....(i)
Total magnetic field at O is sum of all the 4 R3
fields.
0 M sin
3 0I and BQ . ....(ii)
i.e. B = 3B1
4 a
sin 1 sin 2 4 R3
BV BR
Also tan ....(iii)
AD 2 BH BQ
Here, tan 1 tan 60
OD a
BQ
BR
2
9 10
a
2 3 2 3
R
Now B S
7
4 10 2 N
= 3 2
sin 60 sin 60
9 10
4
2 3
Dividing eq. (i) by (ii)
4 3 3 3
= 10 5 BR 2 cos
9 2 2 2 cot ....(iv)
BQ sin
= 1.33 × 10–5
T
From eq. (iii) and (iv)
22. (b) The direction of dB is the direction of
tan = –2cot
vector dl × r. From right hand screw rule, From figure, = 90° +
if we place a right handed screw at the tan = – 2 cot (90 + )
point where the magnetic field is needed tan = 2 tan
to be determined and turn its handle from 25. (b) The hysteresis loop i.e. area of B-H curve
dl to r, then the direction in which the is a measure of energy dissipated per cycle
screw advances gives the direction of field per unit volume of the specimen. It
dB. depends on the nature of magnetic
23. (b) Given: current sensitivity = 10 div/mA and material.
there are 100 division on the scale. 26. (d) Work done by magnet to turn from angle
Current required for full scale deflection. 1 to 2
W = MB(cos 1 – cos 2)
1
Ig 100mA 10mA = 0.01 A = MB (cos0° – cos 45°)
10
Also voltage sensitivity = 2 div/mV 1 2 1
= MB 1 MB
voltage required for full scale deflection 2 2
1 Also torque acting on the magnet
Vg 100mV 0.05V
2 MB
= MB sin 45° =
Galvanometer resistance is given by 2
Vg 0.05 W
G 5 W 2 1.
Ig 0.01 2 1
EBD_7443
2015-16 Target VITEEE
27. (c) From Lentz’s law, the direction of induced
1
emf in a circuit is such that it opposes the XL = XC L
magnetic flux that produces it. C
So, if the magnetic flux linked with a
closed circuit increases the induced 1 1
L 2 = 2 6
current flows in a direction so as to C 100 10 10
develop a magnetic flux in the opposite
direction of original flux. 1
If the magnetic flux linked with a closed L= H = 0.1 H = 100 mH
10
circuit decreases then the induced current
31. (c) When a light ray falls on a mirror at an
flows in the same direction of original
flux. So, the induced emf has not direction angle 30°, then the reflected ray will make
of its own. the same angle with the plane as shown
28. (a) Given : N = 20 in Fig. (i)
B = 103 gauss
= 103 × 10–4 T = 0.1T Normal Reflected ray
A = 5 cm2 = 5 × 10–4 m2 Incident ray
= 80° 30°
30°
Flux through the coil 30°
= NBA cos
= 20 × 0.1 × 5 × 10–4 × cos 30°
30° 30° 30°
3 (i) (ii)
= 10 10 4 = 5 3 10 4
865 10 4 wb
2
In order to make the reflected ray vertical,
1 the mirror should be rotated at an angle
29. (c) In LC circuit, if XL = XC then of 60°.
LC
So, th e mirror should be tilted by
E0
I0 , so Z I0
0. 60
30 Fig. (ii)
2
1 32. (d) For a compound microscope, magnifying
As is the natural power
LC
MP = me × m0
frequency of LC circuit, therefore for an When the final image is at least distance
LC circuit if the frequency of applied AC of distance vision then
becomes equal to the natural frequency of
an AC circuit then the amplitude of D
Me 1
current becomes infinite due to zero fe
impedance.
30. (d) Maximum current flows in the circuit in D
MP m0 1
resonance condition Current in the LCR fe
circuit
25
V 35 m0 1
i 10
2
R2 XL XC –35 = m0 × 35
For current to be maximum denominator m0 = –10
should be minimum The negative sign shows that the image
(XL – XC)2 = 0 formed by objective is inverted.
Solved Paper 2015 2015-17
33. (d) Using prism formula, 36. (d) Let the intensity of unpolarised light be
I0
A m I0, so the intensity of first polaroid is
.
sin 2
2
....(i) On rotating through 60°, the intensity of
A
sin light from second polaroid
2
I0 2 I0 1 I0
where, A = angle of prism I cos 60 = 0.125I0
2 2 4 8
m = angle of minimum deviation
percentage of incident light transmitted
A through the system = 12.5%.
cos 37. (b) As the electromagnetic wave is the crossed
A 2
Given, cot field of electric and magnetic waves, so
2 A
sin the direction of propagation of EM wave
2
is the direction of vector E × B. Here E is
So, from Eq. (i) upward and (E × B) is towards north.
So, from right hand thumb rule B will be
A A m along east.
cos sin 38. (c) An electromagnetic wave is the wave
2 2
A A radiated by an accelerated charge and
sin sin propagates through space as coupled
2 2
electric and magnetic field. These fields
are oscillating perpendicular to each other.
A A m 39. (d) From Rayleigh’s law of scattering,
sin sin
2 2 2 2 intensity
m= – 2A = 180° – 2A 1
I
34. (d) Given: 4
P1 = 2D; P2 = 3D
4
1 I1 2
d m
3 I2 1
1 1 1 d 4 4
I1 330 3 81
We know that
F f1 f2 f1.f2 I2 880 8 4096
Equivatent power,
4096
P = P1 + P2 – dP1. P2 I2 Å 50.557 Å
81
1 40. (c) As we knows, radius of an atom,
=2+3– × 2 × 3 = 3D
3 –10 m
A 10
35. (d) First ray optical path = 1 L1 radius of nucleus,. B 10–15 m
second ray optical path = 2 L2 So, ratio of their volumes
So, phase difference 4 3
rA 3 3
2 2 VA 3 rA 10 10
× path difference = x
VN 4 3 =
rN IN 10 15
3
2
1L1 2 L2 VA : VN = 1015 : 1
EBD_7443
2015-18 Target VITEEE
0
PART - II (CHEMISTRY) 264.4 = [2 G 0f (H+) + 2 G f (Cl–)]
41. (b) Balanced equations are
or 264.4 = – G 0f H 2 G 0f Cl 2
3Cu 8HNO 3 3Cu NO3 2
2NO 4H 2O
0
...(i) = 0 2 G f Cl 0 0
51. (d) Let initially, pressure of C6H6 (g) is p1 H2 NHgO.Hgl + 7KI + H2O
mm and for H2(g) is p2 mm brown ppt.
p1 + p2 = 60 mm ....(i) iodine of Million’s base
After the reaction pressure of
C6H6(g) = 0 (as all C6H6 has reacted) HCl MNO3 MCl HNO3
H2(g) = p2 – 3p1 C white ppt.
So, total pressure = p2 – 3p1 + p1 = 30
(M = Ag+, Pb+, Hg+)
mm
p2 – 2p1 = 30 mm ....(ii)
On solving equation (i) and (ii) 7 5 3
p1 = 10 mm, p2 = 50 mm 6 4 2 1
8
Fraction of C 6H6 by volume = moles 56. (b)
10 1 9
fraction fraction of pressure = 10
60 6
52. (c) In the unit cell number of Cu atoms The correct IUPAC name is 7-ethyl- 2, 4, 5,
(fcc/ccp) 6-tetramethyldeca-1, 8-diene
57. (a) M.wt. of caffeine = 194 u
1 1 % of N present in one molecular of
= 8 6 4
6 2 caffeine is 28.9% of
As Ag atoms occupying edge centred 28.9
194u 194 56 u
1 100
= 12 × 3
4 Mass of one N atom = 14 m
and Au atoms are presents at the body = 1N atom ( 14 m = 14 u)
centred = 1
56
formula, Cu4Ag3Au. 56u N atom 4N atom
53. (b) As we know that –nFE°cell = –RT In k or 14
RT 58. (b) CaCO3 CaO CO 2
E cell ln k.
nF X Colourless
Plot of ln k or E°cell will have slope gas
1 RT
=
2 F CaO H 2O Ca OH 2
54. (d) Since 2° propyl carbocation is little more Re sidue Y
stable than allyl carbocation and ethyl
carbanion is more stable than isopropyl Ca OH 2 2CO2 Ca HCO3
carbanion. 2
Y Excess Z
55. (a) NH 4 Cl NH3 HCl
A B C Ca HCO 3 2 CaCO3 CO 2 H 2O
colourless Z x
equimolar
quantities
59. (b) Zn(OH) 2 2O H ZnO 22 2H 2O
Acid Base Salt Water
NH3 HCl NH 4 Cl
B dense white Zn OH 2
2H Zn 2 2H 2O
Acid Salt Water
fumes Base
The amphoteric character of Zn(OH)2 is
NH3 2K 2 HgI 4 3KOH represented by I and III
Nessler 's reagent
EBD_7443
2015-20 Target VITEEE
64. (b) Resonance stabilisation of enol form is
NO2 NHOH
O – H .....O
Zn dust CH3 – C = CH – C – CH3
60. (a)
NH4CI enol form
A O..........H – O
HCI CH3 – C – CH = C – CH3
keto form
HO NH2 65. (d) The minimum m. wt. must contain at least
B one S atom.
61. (b) Increasing order of stability weight of one S atom
% S 100
(a) [Cu(NH3)4]2+ < [Cu(en)2]2+ minimum m.wt.
< [Cu (trein)2+.
32
Their formation of entropy increases in 4 100
the same order. Ligand denticity is minimum m.wt.
increased. 32
(b) [Fe(H2O)6]3+ < [Fe(NO2)6]3– minimum m. wt. = 100 800
< [Fe(NH3)6]3+. 4
NH3 is weaker ligand than NO2–. 66. (b) When the concentration of the adsorbate
is less on the surface as compare to its
The correct stability order is
concentration in the bulk is called negative
[Fe(H2O)3+ < [Fe(NH3)6]3+ < [Fe(NO2)6]3–
adsorption. Add from left in this
(c) [Co(H2O)6]3+ < [Rh(H2O)6]3+ adsorption, concentration of dilute KCl
< [Ir(H2O)6]3+ solution is less on the surface of blood
Zeff value increases from Co3+ to Ir 3+. charcoal as compare to its concentration
(d) [Cr(NH3)6]1+ < [Cr(NH3)6]2+ in solution.
< [Cr(NH3)6]3+ 67. (a)
O.S of Cr atom increases from +1 to +3.
62. (d) The amount of energy required to take out Interval Conc.change Rate
an electron from the monopositive cation 0.017
0 17 min 0.069 0.052 0.017 M 0.001
is called second ionisation energy 17
0.017
M(g) M2+(g) + 2e– (v) 17 34 min 0.052 – 0.035 0.017M 0.001
17
M(g) M+ (g) + e– (iii) 0.017
34 51 min 0.035 0.018 0.017 M 0.001
17
On subtracting eq(iii) form eq. (v)
we get, Rate remains constant. So, it is
independent of concentration, the reaction
M M2+ + e–. is of zero order.
According to rate law
sp2 Rate = K(conc.)0 = 0.001M/min
68. (d) hv = hv0 + ev0.
63. (d) h h
v0 v v0
2 e e
sp
On comparing this equation with the
In benzene, the triple bond consists of one straight line equation, i.e y = mx + c
sp2–sp2 -bond, one sp2–sp2, -bond and The slope of v0 vs v is
one p–p -bond. (v0 is stopping potential)
h
(slope)1
e
Solved Paper 2015 2015-21
OH OH Br
2, 4, 6- tribromophenol(Y)
HNO 3
77. (b) Hydride ion transfer to the carbonyl group
Phenol is the slowest or the rate determining step.
NO2 –
(Major isomer) O O
O
H2/Pd –
OH Ph – C – H
OH Ph – C – H Ph – C – H
OH slow
(CH3CO)2 O OH
–
O O O
NHCOCH2
Paracetamol NH2
Ph – C – OH Ph – C – OH + Ph – C – H
+
Ph – CH2OH H
EBD_7443
=
CH 3CH 2 CH 2 OH
Conc H 2SO 4
CH 3 CH CH 2 3x 2 5y2
160 180 C 4xy x y C 0
2 2
3x2 + 8xy + 2x + 5y2 + 2y – 2C = 0
Br 2 alc. KOH
CH3CHBr CH 2 Br 3x2 + 2.4xy + 2x + 5y2 + 2y + C = 0 ...(ii)
(Y) where, C = –2C
[CH3C(Br) = CH2 + CH3CH = CHBr] On comparing eq. (ii) with standard form
(A) (B) of conic section
ax2 + 2hxy + by2 + 2gx + 2fy + C = 0
NaNH 2
CH 3C CH We get,
HBr
(Z)
a = 3, h = 4, b = 5
Alcoh olic KOH brings about Here, h 2 – ab = 16 – 15 = 1 > 0
dehydrobromination of Y and give a Hence, the solution of differential equation
mixture of vinyl bromide (A and B) while represents family of hyperbolas.
NaNH2 being a strong base than alc. r r3
KOH readily brings about 82. (b) r
dehydrobromination of less reactive vinyl 1 n n 1
bromide to give propyne CH3 C CH i.e.
n n
(Z).
80. (d) 3-methylbutanoic acid gives isobutane on
n r r3
r r 1 r 1
decarboxylation i.e., r 1
1 n n 1
NaOH/CaO
CH3 CH CH 2COOH
|
CH3 n(n 1) [n(n 1)]2
3-methylbutanoic acid = 2 2
1 n(n 1)
CH3 CH CH3 + CO2
2 2
n n 1 n n 1
CH3 =
Isobutane 2 4
While Wurtz reaction of C2H5Br gives. 2
n n 1 n
n-butane an d h ydrolysis of n-butyl
= r3
magnesium bromide gives n-butane but 2 r 1
reduction of propanol with HI/P gives
propane.
Solved Paper 2015 2015-23
= 2
1 35 9 16 2
=1
36 36
4 49 4 49 196
Now, (p + q)m =
= qn + nC1qn–1p + nC2qn – 2 p2 + .... 9 64 73 73
+ nCrqn–r pr +....+ pn 14
The probability of getting atleast one c
73
double six in n throws with two dice.
= (q + p)n – qn 89. (b) Given equation is x2 + x + 1 = 0
x = and x 2
n Case I : When x =
n 35
=1 q 1 Then
36
6 2 6
1 2n 2 1
35
n xn n 2
1 0.99 n
n 1 x n 1
36
=( + 2 )2 + ( 2 + 4 )2 + ( 3 + 6 )2
n +( 4 + 8)2 + ( 5 + 10)2 +( 6+ 12)2
35
0.01
36
EBD_7443
2015-24 Target VITEEE
= (–1)2 + (–1)2 + (2)2 + (–1)2
1 5
+ (–1)2 + (2)2 = 12 So, when m ,c
Case II: When x = 2 2 6
Then
7
6 2 6 When m = 1, c = –
1 n 2 1 6
xn 2n
n 1 xn n 1
2
3
= 12 When m = 3, c = –
2
90. (b) Correct result is as follows:
(~ p ~ q) (r s)
1 5
or ~(p q) r s Asymptotes are y = x ,
2 6
1 3 1 7 3
y= x– and y = 3x – .
91. (a) A 1 2 3 6 2
0 1 2 93. (b) The structure (N,.) satisfies the closure
|A| = 1.(4 + 3) – 3 (–2 + 0) + 1(–1 –0) property, associativity and commutativity
= 7 + 6 – 1 = 12 but the identity element 0 does not belong
So, adj (adj A) = |A|n – 2 = A to N.
= (12)3 – 2 A = 12A So, N is a semi-group.
1 3 1 dx
94. (a)
= 12 1 2 3 cos x 3 sin x
0 1 2 1 dx
=
2 1 3
cos x sin x
12 36 12 2 2
= 12 24 36 1 dx
0 12 24 =
2 cos cos x sin sin x
3 3
92. (c) 3(m) = 3 + 2m – + 7m2 2m3
(m) = –14m + 7 m 2 1 dx
2 =
2 2
3(m) = 2 – 14m + 6m cos x
Now, putting 3(m) = 0, we have 3
3 + 2m – 7m2 + 2m3 = 0
1
(1 – m) (1 + 2m) (3 – m) = 0 = sec x dx
2 3
1
m ,1,3 1 x
2 = log tan C
2 2 6 4
We know that
c n (m) + n–1(m) = 0, which in the given 1 x
= log tan C
case becomes 2 2 12
c(2 – 14m + 6m2) + (–14m + 7m2) = 0 95. (d) Given sphere is
x2 + y2 + z2 – 6x – 12y – 2z + 20 = 0
14m 7m 2 Centre (3, 6, 1)
c Here, one end of diameter is (2, 7, 3).
2 14m 6m 2
Let the other end of the diameter be (x, y, z)
Solved Paper 2015 2015-25
1 1 11 = sin x cos x
/4
cos x sin x
5 /4
= (–z) 3 0 /4
4 4 4
3 /4
+ sin x cos x 5x / 4
1 11
z
4 4 = 4 2 2 sq units
102. (b) Equation of the normal at point 105. (b) [a + b – c] . [(a – b) × (b – c)
at12 , 2at1 = (a + b – c). [a × b – a × c – b × b + b × c]
on parabola is
= a. (a × b) – a. (a × c) + a. (b × c) + b.
(a × b) – b (a × c) + b. (b × c) – c. (a × b)
y –t1x 2at1 at13
+ c. (a × c) – c.(b × c)
2 = a. (b × c) – b. (a × c) – c. (a × b)
It also passes through at 2 , 2at 2 = [a b c] – [b a c] – [c a b]
=[a b c] + [a b c] – [a b c]
So, 2at 2 t1 at 22 2at1 at13 = [a b c] = a. (b × c)
106. (a) Surface area A of a cube of side x is given
2t 2 2t1 t1 t 22 t12 by A = 6x2.
On differentiating w.r.t. x, we get
2
t1 t 2 dA
t1 12x
dx
2 Let the change in x be x = m% of x
t2 –t1
t1 mx
=
a1b1 a2 b2 a3b3 100
103. (c) cos Change in surface area,
a12 a22 a32 b12 b22 b32
dA
A x 12x x
1 2 1 1 2 1 dx
=
1 1 4 4 1 1
mx 12x 2 m
2 2 2 6 12x
= 1 100 100
6 6 The approximate change in surface area
So, = 0° or = 2
sec 2 = 1 2m
= 6x 2
2 = sec–1(1) 100
= sec–1 (1) = 2m% of original surface area
Solved Paper 2015 2015-27
/2
I log tan x sin 2 x dx
x h 0 2 2
4
a a
1 tan h f x dx f a x dx
0 0
1
1 tan h
= lim /2
h 0 I log cot x. sin 2x dx ....(ii)
cos 2h 0
2 [ sin( – 2x) = sin 2x]
On adding eqs (i) and (ii), we get
1 tan h 1 tan h
= hlim0 sin 2h 1 tanh 2I
/2
log tan x.sin 2x dx
/2
log cot x sin 2x dx
0 0
2 tan h /2
= hlim0 2 sin h cos h 1 tan h = sin 2 x log (tan x.cot x)dx
0
[ log m + log n = log (m . n)]
EBD_7443
2015-28 Target VITEEE
=
/2
sin 2x log 1dx b1 3iˆ –16jˆ 7kˆ
0
I = 0[ log 1 = 0] and b2 3iˆ 8jˆ 5kˆ
/2
sin 2x log tan x dx 0 a 2 a1 . b1 b2
0
Shortest distance = b1 b2
113. (c) Here, mean = 4 and variance = 2
np = 4 and npq = 2
npq 2 1 3iˆ 34ˆj 2kˆ . 24iˆ 36ˆj 72kˆ
So, q
np 4 2 = 84
1 1
Then, p = 1 – q = 1 – 72 1224 144 1152 288
2 2 units
=
Mean = np = 4 84 84 21
1 115. (a) Equation of plane passing through
n× =4 n=8 (2, 2, 1) is
2
a(x – 2) + b(y – 2) + c(z – 1) = 0 ....(i)
P(X = r) = nCrpr qn–r Since, above plane is perpendicular to
8 3x + 2y + 4z + 1 = 0
8 1 1
= Cr p q and 2x + y + 3z + 2 = 0
2 2
3a + 2b + 4c = 0 ....(ii)
The required probability of atleast 7 and 2a + b + 3c = 0 ....(iii)
successes is [ for perpendicular, a1a2
P(X 7) = P(X = 7) + P(X = 8) + b1b2 + c1c2 = 0]
8 On multiplying eq. (iii) by 2, we get
8 8 1
= C7 C8 4a + 2b + 6c = 0 ....(iv)
2 On subtracting eq. (iv) from eq. (ii), we
8 get
8! 8! 1
= a
7!1! 8!0! 2 c
2
8
1 9 a
= 8 1 On putting c in eq. (iii), we get b
2 256 2
x 7 y 4 z 6 a
114. (b) Given, lines are =
3 16 7 2
x 10 y 30 4 z a a
and On putting b = and c = in eq. (i),
3 8 5 2 2
The vector form of given lines are a a
we get a(x – 2) – (y – 2) – (z – 1) = 0
r 7iˆ 4ˆj 6kˆ 3iˆ – 16ˆj 7kˆ 2 2
a
and r 10iˆ 30ˆj 4kˆ 3iˆ 8jˆ 5kˆ
2
[2(x – 2) – (y – 2) – (z – 1)] = 0
On comparing these equations with 2x – 4 – y + 2 – z + 1 = 0
r = a1 + b1 and r = a2 + µb2, we get 2x – y – z – 1 = 0
116. (c) Suppose, A : a male is selected
a 7iˆ 4jˆ 6kˆ
1 B: a smoker is selected
a 2 10iˆ 30jˆ 4kˆ Given:
Solved Paper 2015 2015-29
2 3 3
sin t 2 cos t 2 sin t
= =
5 2 5 t t2 t3
The probability of selecting a non-smoker For maximum or minimum value of f(x),
So, P(B) = 1 – P(B) put
f (x) = 0
3 2
=1– = cos t sin t tan t
5 5 0 1
t 2 t
The probability of selecting a male t
P A P A B P A B P B Now tlim0 f t
20V 15V V
V
(a) (b)
t t
(a) 10 mA (b) 15 mA
(c) 20 mA (d) 5 mA
28. The activity of a radioactive sample is measured V V
(c) (d)
as N0 counts per minute at t = 0 and N0/C counts
per minute at t = 5 min. The time, (in minute) at t t
which the activity reduces to half its value, is 34. When a resistor of 11 is connected in series
with a electric cell. The current following in it is
2 5
(a) loge (b) 0.5 A. Instead when a resistor of 5 is connected
5 log e 2 to the same electric cell in series, the current
(c) 5 log102 (d) 5 loge 2 increases by 0.4A. The internal resistance of the
29. If the electron in the hydrogen atom jumps from cell is
third orbit to second orbit, the wavelength of (a) 1.5 (b) 2
the emitted radiation in term of Rydberg constant (c) 2.5 (d) 3.5
is
EBD_7443
2014-4 Target VITEEE
35. A battery is charged at a potential of 15 V in 8 h
PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
when the current flowing is 10A. The battery on
discharge supplies a current of 5A for 15 h. The 41. The sodium extract of an organic compound on
mean terminal voltage during discharge is 14V. acidification with acetic acid and addition of lead
The watt-hour efficiency of battery is acetate solution gives a black precipitate.
(a) 80% (b) 90% The organic compound contains
(c) 87.5% (d) 82.5% (a) nitrogen (b) halogen
36. A circular current carrying coil has a radius R. (c) sulphur (d) phosphorus
The distance from the centre of the coil on the 42. The volume strength of 1.5 N H2O2 solution is
1 (a) 16.8 L (b) 8.4 L
axis, where the magnetic induction will be th (c) 4.2 L (d) 5.2 L
8
to its value at the centre of the coil is 43. MnO4– + 8H + + 5e – ¾¾
® Mn 2+ + 4H 2 O;
R E° = 1.51 V
(a) (b) R 3
3 MnO 2 + 4H + + 2e – ¾¾
® Mn 2+ + 2H 2 O;
2 E° = 1.23 V E°MnO – | MnO is
(c) 2 3R (d) R 4 2
63. Hg 2+ /H+
Ph — C º C — CH3 ¾¾¾¾ 71. Which of the following compounds cannot be
¾® A. prepared singly by the Wurtz reaction?
O (a) C2H6
Ph—C Ph—H2C (b) (CH3)2CHCH3
C O (c) CH3CH2CH2CH3
(a) CH2 (b)
H3C (d) All of the above can be prepared
H3C
72. Which of the following oxides is strongly basic?
OH (a) Tl2O (b) B2O3
Ph—CH (c) Al2O3 (d) Ga2O3
Ph—C
C—OH 73. In Langmuir’s model of adsorption of a gas on a
(c) CH (d) solid surface,
H3C
H3C (a) th e rate of dissociation of adsorbed
molecules from the surface does not
64. Which of the following has an ester linkage?
(a) Nylon-66 (b) Dacron depend on the surface covered
(c) PVC (d) Bakelite (b) the adsorption at a single site on the surface
65. Which of the following pairs give positive may involve multiple molecules at the same
Tollen’s test? time
(a) Glucose,sucrose (c) the mass of gas striking a given area of
(b) Glucose,fructose surface is proportional to the pressure of
(c) Hexanal,acetophenone the gas
(d) Fructose,sucrose (d) the mass of gas striking a given area of
66. Peptisation involves surface is independent of the pressure of
(a) precipitation of colloidial particles the gas
(b) disintegration of colloidal aggregates
74. How many sigma and pi-bonds are there in the
(c) evaporation of dispersion medium
molecule of dicyanoethene (CN—CH = CH — CN)?
(d) impact of molecules of the dispersion
medium on the colloidal particles (a) 3 sigma and 3 pi (b) 5 sigma and 2 pi
67. Which of the following has the maximum number (c) 7 sigma and 5 pi (d) 2 sigma and 3 pi
of unpaired d-electrons? 75. What will be the order of reactivity of the
(a) Fe2+ (b) Cu+ following carbonyl compounds with Grignard’s
(c) Zn (d) Ni3+ reagent?
68. Iodine is formed when potassium iodide reacts
with a solution of H H
(a) ZnSO4 (b) CuSO4 C O C O
(c) (NH4)2SO4 (d) Na2SO4
H H3C
69. Which of the following does not represent the
correct order of the property indicated? I II
(a) Sc3+ > Cr 3+ > Fe3+ > Mn3+ — ionic radii
(b) Sc < Ti <Cr < Mn —density (CH3)3C
(c) Mn2+ > Ni2+ > Co2+ < Fe2+ —ionic radii H3C
O C O
(d) FeO < CaO < MnO < CuO —basic nature C
70. If the elevation in boiling point of a solution of H3C (CH3)
10 g of solute (mol. wt. = 100) in 100 g of water is
D Tb, the ebullioscopic constant of water is III IV
(a) 10 (b) 100 Tb
(a) I > II > III > IV (b) IV > III > II > I
DTb (c) II > I > IV >III (d) III > II > I >IV
(b) D Tb (d)
10
Solved Paper 2014 2014-7
NH2
PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
dy x 2 + y 2 + 1
H2 O 81. The solution of = , satisfying
¾¾¾
® A ¾¾¾¾
CH3COOH¾
® B ¾¾¾ ®C
Ac2 O Br2
76. H+ dx 2 xy
y(1) = 0 is given by
CH3 (a) hyperbola (b) circle
The final product ‘C’ in the above reacrtion is (c) ellipse (d) parabola
NHCOCH3 dy f ( xy )
NH2 82. If x. + y = x. , then f (xy) is equal to
Br dx f '( xy )
COCH3
x2
(a) (b) (a) (b) k .e y
2/2
k .e 2
xy
2
ò
2
a2 b2 (a2 + b2 )2 117. The value of [ x 2 ] dx, where [ . ] is the
hyperbola, then - = , where 0
l 2 m2 k greatest integer function, is
k is equal to
(a) n (b) n 2 (a) 2 – 2 (b) 2 + 2
(c) n 3 (d) None of these (c) 2 –1 (d) 2 –2
109. If cos + i sin , b = cos + i sin ,
ò
1
118. If l(m, n) = t m (1 + t)n dt, then the expression
b c a
and + + = 1 , then
0
c = cos + i sin for l(m, n) in terms of l(m + 1, n + 1) is
c a b
cos ( ) + cos ( ) + cos ( ) is equal 2n n
(a) - . l (m +1, n -1)
to m +1 m +1
3 3 n
(a) (b) - (b) . l (m + 1, n -1)
2 2 m +1
(c) 0 (d) 1
2n n
110. If | z + 4 | £ 3, then the greatest and the least (c) + l. ( m +1, n -1)
value of | z + 1| are m + 1 m +1
(a) –1, 6 (b) 6, 0 m
(c) 6, 3 (d) None of these (d) . l ( m + 1, n -1)
n +1
111. The angle between lines joining the origin to the
119. The area in the first quadrant between
point of intersection of the line 3 x + y = 2 and the x2 + y2 = 2 and y = sin x is
curve y2 – x2 = 4 is 3
-8 3
2 p (a) (b)
(a) tan –1 3 (b) 4 4
6
-16 3 3
-8
æ 3 ö÷ p (c) (b)
(c) tan–1 ççç ÷÷ (d) 4 2
çè 2 ø÷ 2 120. The area bounded by y = xe |x| and lines | x | = 1,
y = 0 is
112. If the area of the triangle on the complex plane
formed by the points z, z + i z and iz is 200, then (a) 4 sq units (b) 6 sq units
the value of 3 | z | must be equal to (c) 1 sq unit (d) 2 sq units
EBD_7443
2014-10 Target VITEEE
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) 7. (a) red violet
Vp As wavelength less than that of yellow
1. (b) Amplification factor of a triode, colour and hence can initiate photoelectric
Vg effect irrespective of intensity.
Vp Vs = –50 (–20 ) = 10V 8. (c) Radius of circular path
750 10 3
For cell E = V + Ir = =50
15 10 3
For V = 50 V
E = 50 + 11r S
Similarly, for V = 60 V Ig = ×I
S a
E = 60 + r
From eqs. (i) and (ii), we get S
15 × 10–3 = × 25
E = 61V S 50
6. (b) The ionosphere can reflect electromagnetic S = 0.03
waves of frequency less than 40 MHz but
not of frequency more than 40 MHz.
Solved Paper 2014 2014-11
I1 125 2mv
12. (d) Here, r = R I 1 =2 1 18. (b) Radius of path r time =
q
2 100
5 1 r m qp
=2 1 = 2 × = 0.05
4 4 rp mp q
13. (d) Resistances 10 , 60 and 100 are in
series and they together are in parallel to r 4
or, r 10 2cm .
200 resistance. When a potential 10 2
difference of 15 V is applied across 200 19. (d) The effective resistance will decrease when
then current through it resistance R is connected in parallel with
15 the voltmeter.
I= = 7.5×10–2A
200 A V
14. (b) Energy stored in capacitor = energy stored
in inductance
(R)
1 2 1 2
i.e., CV LI
2 2
2 V
LI2 1 2 According to Ohm’s law, V = IR or, R =
C= = 2 = 25 F I
V2 400 Here, as R decreases, so V decrease and I
15. (d) Boolean expression for Logic gate-1 should increase.
B. C = Y’ 20. (c) Fraction retained by nucleus
Boolean expression for Logic gate-II m1 = 1 m2 = A
A+ B.C Y"
Neutron Nucleus at rest
Boolean expression for Logic gate-III
2
2
A + B. C = Y k m 2 m1 A 1
16. (b) In series combination equivalent k retained m1 m 2 A 1
resistance,
R = R1 + R2 After collision kinetic energy retained by
=6 + 4 = 10 k 2
A 1
Error in combination, neutron E
A 1
R= R1 + R2
tan tan 45
10 10 21. (d) Here, tan ' = cos =
6 4 cos 30
=
100 100
= 0.6 + 0.4 = 1 1 2
tan = =
3/2 3
R 1
= 10 %
R 10 2
or = tan–1
17. (b) If the number of electrons increase, their 3
number of collision, increasing the thermal 22. (b) Luminous efficiency for the same power
and electrical resistance. supply, 40 W fluorescent tube gives more
So, electrical and thermal conductivities light. Hence, 40 W fluorescent tube has
both decrease. greater
EBD_7443
2014-12 Target VITEEE
V 2.3 0.3 5
23. (b) Resistance, R = –1 = log 2
I 3 7
10 10
T = 5 loge 2
2
R= 103 = 0.2 × 103 = 0.2k Now, let t’ be the time after which activity
10 reduces to half
24. (c) Here, number of electrons n e = 3.13 × 1015 l'/ 5log e 2
and number of protons n p = 3.12 × 1015 1 1
Current I = n eqe + np qp 2 2
= 3.13 × 10 15 × 1.6 × 10–17 + 3.12 × 10 15 t' = 5 ologe2
× 1.6 × 10 –19
1 1 1 1 1
= 1 × 10 –3 = 1 mA 29. (b) As we know R
Now, due to excess charge on electrons, 2 2 =R 4 9
2 3
the direction of the current will be towards
right. 1 9 4 5R
=R
25. (b) In conductor separation between 36 36
conduction and valence bands is zero and
36
in insulator, it is greater than 1eV. =
Hence, in semiconductor the separation 5R
between conduction and valence band is 30. (d) From Einstein’s Photoelectric equation,
1 eV. hc
26. (c) Potential of big drop = q × n 2/3 = 100 V ev0 + =
27. (d) 250V i i1
hc
and ev0 0
'
i2
20V ev'0 100 1
15V =
eV0 ' 200 2
2ev’0 + 2 = ev0 +
For R = 1k
ev 0 7.7 4.7
15 ev’0 = = 1.5V
i1 = mA = 15 mA 2 2
1 31. (d) As we know, Photoelectric current depends
R = 250 on the intensity of incident radiation i.e.,
i I
20 15 5
i250 = = 20 mA 1 1
250 250
But, intensity of radiation I so, i
iZener = 20 – 15 = 5mA d2 d2
28. (d) After n half-lives 32. (a) The creation of an elementary particle and
n t/7 its antiparticle usually from a photon (or
N 1 1 another neutral boson ) is called Pair
N0 2 2 production. This is allowed, provided there
is enough energy available to create the
5/7
N0 cN0 1 pair.
N
e cN0 2 –
e
5/7 0
1 1 Neutron
e 2
Taking log on both sides, we get Photon )
po
sitr
5 1 on 0
log 1 – log e = log
7 2 +
e
Solved Paper 2014 2014-13
33. (a) For charging the capacitor, q = q 0 37. (c) Inside a magnet, magnetic lines of force
t
move from south pole to north pole.
1 e CR di d
38. (b) E.M.F. e = M = 0.005 × (i sin t)
dt dt 0
= 0.005 × i0 cos t
And, Potential difference V = V0 (1 – e–t/CR) emax = 0.005 × 10 × 100 = 5
39. (a) Impedance of L-C-R circuit will be minimum
V V0 for a resonant frequency so,
1
v0 =
0.632 V0 Growth of potential 2 LC
1 105
= = Hz
2 1 10 3 0.1 10 6 2
CR t
12375
E 40. (a) Energy = = 2.475 eV = 4 × 10–19 J
34. (c) Here, i = 5000
R r
Minimum intensity to which the eye can
E respond.
0.5 = E = 5.5 + 0.5 r leye = (photon flux) × energy of a photon
11 r
leye = (5 × 104) × 4 × 10–19
E = 2 × 10–14 W/m2
0.9 = or, E = 4.5 + 0.9r
5 r Now, lesser the intensity required by a
On solving we get r = 2.5 detector for detection more sensitive it will
35. (c) Power of battery, when charged is given by
P1 = V1I1 lear 10 13
be = l 5
Electrical energy dissipated id given by eye 2 10 14
E1 = P1t1
E1 = V1I1 t1 = 15 × 10 × 8 = 1200 Wh PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
Similarly, the electrical energy dissipated
during the discharge of battery is given by 41. (c) The organic compounds containing
E2 = V2 I2t2 sulphur when react with sodium metal give
= 14 × 5 × 15 = 1050 Wh Na 2S. The Na 2 S when react with lead
Hence, watt-hour efficiency of the battery acetate forms black ppt. of PbS.
E2 Na2S + (CH3COO)2Pb
100 0.875 × 100 = 87.5 %
E1
PbS + 2CH3COONa
BCentre 2 3/ 2 Black
x ppt
36. (b) Here the ratio, = 1
Baxis R2 42. (b) Volume strength = 5.6 × normality
= 5.6 × 1.5
1 = 8.4 L
Also, Baxis = Bcentre 43. (a) On subtracting eqn. (ii) from (i) we get
8
3/ 2 MnO 4 + 4H+ + 3e– MnO2+2H2O
8 x2 x2
1 4=1+ 1.51 5 2 1.23
1 R2 R2 –E3 =
3
x2 E3 = 1.70 V
3= X2 = 3R2 44. (b) Volume of unit cell (V) = a3
R2 = ( 3.04 × 10–8 cm )3
or, x = = 2.81 × 10–23 cm3
3R
EBD_7443
2014-14 Target VITEEE
45. (c) Now, eqs. 2 × (b) + 3 × (c) – (a)
3d 4s 4p 4d 3
C2H6+ O 2CO2 + 3H2O
Fe= 2 2
3+
Heat of combustion of Ethane x = 2(–94.1)
[Fe(H2O)6 ] = '' '' '' '' '' '' + 3 (–68.3) – (–21.1)
= (–188.2) + (–204.9) – 21.1
3 2
sp d hybridisation = – 372 kcal
[Fe(CN)6] =
3–
'' '' '' '' '' '' 51. (a) Ag2CrO4 2Ag+ + Cr O 24
S 2S S
2 3
d sp hybridisation 2
KSP = (2s)2 s = 4s .s = 4s3
3–
[Fe(Cl)6] = '' '' '' '' '' '' 1/3
1/3
K sp 32 10 12
3 2
sp d hybridisation S=
4 4
46. (a) A compound havin g maximum
electronegative element will form strong 2 10 4 M
hydrogen bond. F is the most negative 52. (a) We know that,
element among halogens hence form
strongest hydrogen bond. = eq .C
–1 cm2 eq–1
47. (b) Given kf = 1.1 × 10–2 , kb = 1.5 × 10–3 Given, eq = 91.0
kf 1.1 10 2 = 91
1
cm 2 eq 1
kc= = 7.33
kb 1.5 10 3
2.54
normality 0.1 eq.cm 3
48. (c) Molarity of base = 0.1 159 / 2 1000
Acidity 1
= 2.9 × 10–3 1cm 1
M1V1 = M2V2
0.1 × 19.85 = M2 × 20 53. (b) It is known,
M2 = 0.09925 0.099 (n 1)
t1/2 1 a2
49. (d)
t1/2 2 a1
Here, n = order of the reaction
Given, (t1/2)1 = 0.1 s, a1= 400
(t1/2)2 = 0.8 s, a2= 50
On putting the values,
5 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1 = 15 (n 1)
0.1 50
Equation of normal of x = 0 and y = 1 is 0.8 400
y – 1 = –1 (x – 0)
y – 1 = –x x + y = 1 Taking log on both sides
3 4 1 cos x 0
93. (c) A= (x) 1 sin x cos x 0
5 7
sin x sin x 1
A 21 20 1
EBD_7443
2014-20 Target VITEEE
= cos x – cos x ( 1 + sin x)
[ expanding along C3] = – cos x.sin x x 1 y 1 z 1
100. (c) r say
1 2 3 4
= sin 2 x x = 2r + 1, y = 3r – 1, z = 4r + 1
2
/4 /4 Since, the two lines intersect.
1 So, putting above values in second line,
(x)dx sin 2 x dx
2 we get
0 0
2r 1 3 3r 1 k 4r 1
1 cos 2x / 4
= – 1 2 1
2 2 0
2r – 2 = 4r + 1
1 r = –3/2
= + cos cos 0
2 2 2 Also 3r – 1 – k = 8r + 2
1 1 15 9
= 0 1 k = –5r – 3 = –3=
4 4 2 2
98. (b) f' (x) is differentiable x [1, 6]
By Lagrange’s mean value theorem, x
101. (a) Let f (x) =
f 6 f 1 log x
f' (x) =
6 1
log x 1
f' (x) 2 x 1, 6 (given) f' (x) =
(log x)2
f 6 2
2 [ f (1) = –2] For maxima and minima, put f’ (x) = 0
5
log x – 1 = 0
f (6) 10 – 2 f (6) 8 x=e
m Now, f" (x)
2r 1 Cr 1
99. (b) r =
m2 1 2m m 1 log x
2 1
. log x 1 .
2 log x
x x
sin 2 m 2 sin 2 m sin 2 m 1 = 4
log x
m m m
2r 1 m
Cr 1 1
0 1
r 0 r 0 r 0 e
m f" (e) = = >0
2 m 1 e
r m 1 2 m 1
r 0 f (x) is minimum at x = e.
sin 2 m 2 sin 2 m sin 2 m 1
Hence, minimum value of f (x) at x = e is
e
f (e) = e
2 m log e
m 1 2 m 1
102. (c) Given curve is y = f (x) = x2 + bx – b
m2 1 2m m 1 f' (x) = 2x + b
sin 2 m 2 sin 2 m sin 2 m 1 The equation of tangent at point (1, 1) is
y – 1 = (b + 2) (x – 1)
6 3cos 3i sin
(2 + b)x – y = 1 + b = 2
4 cos 4 cos sin 2
x y
1 6 3cos 3i sin
1 b (1 b) =
5 4 cos
2 b
6 3cos 3sin
=
Y 5 4cos 5 4cos
x y 2
cos sin 1 a2 b2 a2 b2
a b
l 2 m2 n2
Y
But given equation of normal is
Q
2
a2 b2 a2 b2
(a cos , b sin )
l2 m2 k
X' O P
X k n2
109. (d) Given: a = cos i sin
b = cos i sin
Y' and c = cos i sin
Coordinates of P and Q are b cos i sin cos i sin
Now,
a b c cos i sin cos i sin
, 0 and 0, , respectively .
cos sin cos .cos sin .sin i
1 a b ab [sin .cos sin .cos ]
Area of OPQ
2 cos sin sin 2 b
cos isin .....(i)
Minimum area = ab c
108. (b) The equation of any normal
c
x2 y2 Similarly, cos i sin
to 1 is ax cos + by cot a
a 2 b2 ..........(ii)
= a2 + b2 a
ax cos + by cot – (a2 + b2) = 0 .....(i) and cos i sin ........(iii)
b
The straight line lx + my – n = 0 will be On adding Eqs. (i) , (ii) and (iii), we get
normal to the hyperbola
cos cos cos i
x2 y2
1, then eq. (i) and lx + my – n = sin( ) sin sin 1
a 2 b2
0 represent the same line, b c a
2 2
1
a cos b cot a b c a b
l m n On equating real parts, we get
na cos ( ) + cos ( ) + cos ( )=1
sec
l a 2 b2 110. (b) z 4 3 3 z 4 3
6 z 1 0
nb
and tan = 0 z 1 6
m a 2 b2
0 z 1 6
2 2 2 2
n a n b Hence, the greatest and least values are 6
1
2 2 2
2
2 2 2
2 and 0.
l a b m a b 111. (c) On homogenising y2 – x2 = 4 with the
[ sec2 tan 2 1] help of the line 3x y 2, we get
Solved Paper 2014 2014-23
1 2 2
z 200 (given) 116. (b) sin x sin x dx
2 0
2
z 400 z 20 = sin x sin x dx
0
3 z = 3 × 20 = 60
2
113. (b) Given hyperbola is 25x2 – 16y2 = 400 sin x sin x dx
If (6, 2) is the midpoint of the chord, then
equation of chord is T = S1
= 2 sin x dx 0 2 cos x dx
25 (6x) – 16 (2y) = 25 (36) – 16 (4) 0 0
75x – 16y = 450 – 32 = –2 (cos – cos 0) = –2 (–1 –1) = 4
75x – 16y = 418 2 1 2
114. (b) Let the equation of the plane is 117. (c) x2 dx x 2 dx x2 dx
0 0 1
x y z 1 2
1 = 0 dx 1 dx
0 1
EBD_7443
2014-24 Target VITEEE
2 Required area
= x1 2 1
= Area of circle (1st quadrant ) – sin xdx
1 m n 0
118. (a) l(m, n) = l = t 1 t dt
0
. 2 3
= cos x 0 (cos cos 0)
m 1 1 4 4
n t
l m, n 1 t . 3 3 3
m 1 8
0 = 1 1 2
4 4 4
n 1
(1 t)n 1. t m 1 .dt 120. (d) x 1
m 1 0
x 1
2n n
.l m 1, n 1 x x.e x , 1 x 0
m 1 m 1 y xe
x.e x ,0 x 1
2
119. (a) x2 + y2 = is a circle of radius and
0 1
centre at origin. Re quired area xe x dx xe x dx
1 0
2 2
X +Y = 0 1
x.e x e x x.e x ex
y = sin x 1 0
0 1 1.e e e e 0 1
(0, 0) = 1 + 1 = 2 sq units
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2013
22. As the electron in Bohr’s orbit of hydrogen atom 27. A lead shot of 1 mm diameter falls through a
passes from state n = 2 to, n =1, the KE (K) and long column of glycerine. The variation of the
the potential energy (U) changes as velocity with distance covered (s) is correctly
(a) K four fold, U also four fold represented by
(b) K two fold, V also two fold
(c) K four fold, U two fold
(d) K two fold, U four fold v v
23. To get an OR gate from a NAND gate, we need (a) (b)
(a) Only two NAND gates
(b) Two NOT gates obtained from NAND gates s s
and one NAND gate
(c) Four NAND gates and two AND gates v v
obtained from NAND gates
(d) None of the above (c) (d)
24. If a current I is flowing in a loop of radius r as
s s
shown in adjoining figure, then the magnetic field
induction at the centre O will be 28. If e 0 and m 0 represent the permittivity and
permeability of vaccum and and µ represent
the permittivity and permeability of medium, then
refractive index of the medium is given by
I e 0m 0 em
I (a) (b)
em e 0m 0
r
m 0 e0 m 0 e0
(c) (d)
e m
m0 I q 29. A students plots a graph between inverse of
(a) Zero (b)
4pr magnification 1/m produced by a convex thin
m 0 I sin q 2m 0 I sin q lens and the object distance u as shown in figure.
(c) (d) What was the focal length of the lens used?
4pr 4pr 2
25. Two indentical magnetic dipoles of magnetic
moment 1.0 Am2 each,placed at a separation of 1/m
2 m with their axes perpendicular to each other.
The resultant magnetic field at a point midway
b
between the dipoles is
(b) 5 × 10-7 T a c
(a) 5 ´10-7 T u
(c) 10 T -7 (d) 2 × 10-7 T
26. The natural frequency of the circuit shown in b bc
(a) (b)
adjoining figure is ca a
C C c b
(c) (d)
b c
30. Two waves y 1 = A 1 sin (wt -b1 ) and
L L
y2 = A2 sin (wt -b2 ) superimpose to form a
resultant wave whose amplitude is
1 1 (a) A1 + A2
(a) (b) (b) |A1 + A2|
2p LC 2p 2 LC
(c) A12 + A22 - 2 A1 A2 sin (b1 - b2 )
2
(c) (d) zero
2p LC (d) A12 + A22 + 2 A1 A2 cos (b1 - b2 )
EBD_7443
2013-4 Target VITEEE
31. When a certain metallic surface is illuminated 36. A long glass capillary tube is dipped in water. It
with monochromatic light of wavelength , the is known that water wets glass. The water level
stopping potential for photoelectric current rises by h in the tube. The tube is now pushed
3V0.When the same surface is illuminated with a down so that only a length h/2 is outside the
light of wave length 2 , the stopping potential is water surface. The angle of contact at the water
V0. The threshold wavelength for this surface surface at the upper end of the tube will be
to photoelectric effect is (a) tan -12 (b) 60º
(a) 4 (b) 6 (c) 30º (d) 15º
4 37. In the adjoining circuit, if the reading of voltmeter
(c) 8 (d) V1 and V2 are 300 volts each, then the reading
3
32. In the V-T diagram shown in adjoining figure, voltmeter V3 and ammeter A are respectively
what is the relation between p1 and p2? C
L R = 100 W
p2
V
V1 V2 V3
p1
A
~
T 220 V, 50 Hz
(a) p2 = p1 (b) p2 < p1
(a) 220 V , 2.2 A (b) 100 V, 2.0 A
(c) p2 > p1 (d) insufficient data
(c) 220 V , 2.0 A (d) 100 V, 2.2 A
33. If a gas mixture contains 2 moles of O2 and 4
38. If the work done in turning a magnet of magnetic
moles of Ar at temperature T, then what will be
moment M by an angle of 90º from the magnetic
the total energy of the system (neglecting all
vibrational modes) meridian is n times the corresponding work done
(a) 11 RT (b) 15 RT to turn it through an angle of 60º, then the value
(c) 8 RT (d) RT of n is
34. In the adjoining figure, two pulses in a stretched (a) 1 (b) 2
string are shown. If initially their centres are 1 1
8 cm apart and they are moving towards each (b) (d)
2 4
other, with speed of 2cm/s, then total energy of 39. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with
the pulses after 2 s will be air as dielectric is C. If a slab of dielectric constant
K and of the same thickness as the separation
between the plates is introduced so as to fill
8 cm
1/4th of the capacitor (shown in figure), then the
(a) Zero new capacitance is
(b) Purely kinetic
(c) Purely potential
(d) Partly kinetic and partly potential K Air t
35. When two waves of almost equal frequency n 1
and n2 are produced simultaneously, then the
time interval between succesive maxima is t
1 1 1
(a) (b) + C C
n1 + n2 n1 n2 (a) (K + 2)
4
(b) (K + 3)
4
1 1 1 C
(c) - (d) (c) (K + 1) (d) None of these
n1 n2 n1 - n2 4
Solved Paper 2013 2013-5
40. Seven resistance are connected between points 43. Benzene diazonium chloride on treatment with
A and B as shown in adjoining figure. The hypophosphorous acid and water yield benzene.
equivalent resistance between A and B is Which of the following is used as a catalyst in
10 this reaction?
(a) LiAlH4 (b) Red p
(c) Zn (d) Cu+
44. Consider the following reaction sequence,
10 3
A B Alcoholic
P/Br 2 KOH O3, H2O
CH2COOH A B C
5 8 6
CF3CO 3H
CH2COOH D Alkaline
E
KMno4
NH3
(c) (d) (a) (b) Q
Q
CO2 CO2
N
OCH3 CH3 H H
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these
47. Calculate pH of a buffer prepared by adding 10
42. COOH + NaHCO3 ® mL of 0.10 M acetic acid to 20 mL of 0.1 M sodium
acetate [pKa (CH3COOH) = 4.74]
(a) 3.00 (b) 4.44
CO2 + COONa + (c) 4.74 (d) 5.04
48. The equivalent conductance of silver nitrate
* solution at 250°C for an infinite dilution was
C is with the product found to be 133.3 –1 cm2 equiv-1. The transport
(a) CO2 number of Ag+ ions in very dilute solution of
AgNO3 is 0.464. Equivalent conductances of Ag+
(b) COONa and NO-3 (in –1 cm2 equiv–1) at infinite dilution
are respectively
(c) Both (a) and (b) (a) 195.2, 133.3 (b) 61.9, 71.4
(d) None of the above (c) 71.4, 61.9 (d) 133.3, 195.2
EBD_7443
2013-6 Target VITEEE
49. Treating anisole with the following reagents, the
major product obtained is
I. (CH3)3 CCl, AlCl3 II. Cl2, FeCl3 (a) (b)
III. HBr, Heat
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None is correct
OH Br KHSO HCIO
53. Glycerol 4
A B,
Br Br A –A and B respectively are
(a) (b)
O O
(a) CH2 CH CH
C(CH3)3 C(CH3)3
Cl OH
OCH3 OH
O O
Br Cl
(c) (d) (b) CH2 CHCH
OH Cl
C(CH3)3 C(CH3)3
OH
(c) CH3CH2CHO CH3CH2CH
50. Ketones [R—C—R’] where, R = R’ = alkyl Cl
O O
group can be obtained in one step by (d) CH2 CHCH
(a) Hydrolysis of esters
(b) Oxidation of primary alcohols ClO
(c) Oxidation of secondary alcohols 54. Phenol is heated with phthalic anhydride in the
(d) Reaction of acid halide with alcohols presence of conc. H2SO4. The product gives
51. An optically active compound ‘X’ has molecular pink colour with alkali. The product is
formula C4H8O3. It evolves CO2 with aqueous (a) phenolphthalein (b) bakelite
NaHCO3. ‘X’ reacts with LiAlH4 to give an
(c) salicylic acid (d) flurorescein
achiral compound.’X’ is
CuCN
(a) CH 3CH 2CHCOOH 55. C6H5NH2 0ºC X
+
H O/H
OH Y 2 Z, Z is identified as
(b) CH 3CHCOOH (a) C6H5 — NH—CH3
(b) C6H5 — CH2—NH2
OMe (c) C6H5 — CH2—COOH
(c) CH 3CHCOOH (d) C6H5—COOH
56. B can be obtained from halide by van-Arkel
method. This involves reaction
(d) CH 3CHCH2C OOH
(a) 2Bl3 Red hot W or Ta
OH
Red hot W or Ta
(b)
OH
52. conc.H2SO4
products. (c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) None of the above
Product is/are
Solved Paper 2013 2013-7
57. NH4Cl(s) is heated in a test tube. Vapours are 64. Select the correct statements(s).
brought in contact with red litmus paper, which (a) LiAlH4 reduces methyl cyanide to methyl
changes it to blue and then to red. It is because amine
of
(b) Alkane nitrile has electrophilic as well as
(a) formation of NH4OH and HCl
nucleophilic centres
(b) formation of NH3 and HCl
(c) saponification is a reversible reaction
(c) greater diffusion of NH3 than HCl
(d) greater diffusion of HCl than NH3 (d) Alkaline hydrolysis of methane nitrile forms
methanoic acids
58. Out of H2S2O3, H2S2O4, H2SO5 and H2S2O8
peroxy acids are
conc.HNO3 + conc.H2SO4 Cl2/FeCl3
(a) H2S2O3, H2S2O8 (b) H2SO5, H2S2O8 65. X Y
(c) H2S2O4, H2SO5 (d) H2S2O3, H2S2O4
59. The density of solid argon is 1.65 g per cc at - The product Y is
233°C. If the argon atom is assumed to be a (a) p-chloro nitrobenzene
sphere of radius 1.54 × 10-8 cm, what per cent of (b) o-chloro nitrobenzene
solid argon is apparently empty space?
(c) m-chloro nitrobenzene
(Ar = 40)
(a) 16.5% (b) 38% (d) o, p-dichloro nitrobenzene
(b) 50% (d) 62% 66. End product of the following reaction is
60. When 1 mole of CO2(g) occupying volume 10L
at 27°C is expanded under adiabatic condition, O O + HBr
temperature falls to 150 K. Hence,final volume is
(a) 5 L (b) 20 L
(c) 40 L (d) 80 L
61. Acid hydrolysis of ester is first order reaction (a) O O
and rate constant is given by
Br
2.303 V -V0
k= log ¥ where, V0, Vt and V¥
t V¥ - Vt
OH
are the volumle of standard NaOH required to
neutralise acid present at a given time, if ester is
50% neutralised then (b) HO
(a) V¥ = Vt (b) V¥ = (Vt –V0)
(c) V¥ = 2Vt –V0 (d) V¥ = 2Vt + V0 Br
62. A near UV photon of 300 nm is absorbed by a
gas and then re-emitted as two photons. One
photon is red with wavelength of the second (c) Br OH
photon is
(a) 1060 nm (b) 496 nm
HO
(c) 300 nm (d) 215 nm
63. Which of these ions is expected to be coloured
in aqueous solution?
(d) HO OH
I. Fe3 + II. Ni2+ III. Al3+
(a) I and II (b) II and III
(c) I and III (d) I, II and III Br
EBD_7443
2013-8 Target VITEEE
67. Following compounds are respectively …
OH O
geometrical isomers
Cl
(a)
Cl Cl
Cl O O
P Cl Cl
Q R (b)
P Q R
(a) cis cis trans O
H3C O
(b) cis trans trans
(c) H3C
(c) trans cis cis
(d) cis trans cis
68. Which is more basic oxygen in an ester?
CH3 CH3
O
(d)
R— C—O—R
(a) Carbonyl oxygen, OH OH
(b) Carboxyl oxygen, b 72. For the cell reaction 2Ce4+ + Co ® 2Ce3+ +
(c) Equally basic
(d) Both are acidic oxygen Co3+ ; Eºcell cell is 1.89 V. If ECo2 + /Co is – 0.28 V,,
69. In a Claisen condensation reaction (when an º
ester is treated with a strong base) what is the value of E Ce4 + /Ceo3+ ?
(a) a proton is removed from the -carbon to (a) 0.28 V (b) 1.61 V
form a resonance stabilised carbanion of (c) 2.17 V (d) 5.29 V
the ester 73. A constant current of 30 A is passed through an
(b) carbanion acts as a nucleophile in a aqueous solution of NaCl for a time of 1.00 h.
nucleophilic acyl substitution reaction with
What is the volume of Cl2 gas at STP produced?
another ester molecule
(c) a new C—C bond is formed (a) 30.00 L (b) 25.08 L
(d) All of the above statements are correct (c) 12.54 L (d) 1.12 L
70. An organic compound B is formed by the reaction 74. Consider the following reaction,
of ethyl magnesium iodide with a substance A,
kA
followed by treatment with dilute aqueous acid, kB
Compound B does not react with PCC or PDC in Chair
Boat
dichloromethane. Which of the following is a
possible compound for A? The reaction is of first order in each diagram,
with an equilibrium constant of 104. For the
O O
conversion of chair form to boat form e–Ea/RT =
(a) CH—CH
2 2 (b) CH3CH2CCH3 4.35 × 10-8 m at 298 K with pre-exponential factor
of 1012 s-1. Apparent rate constant (= kA / kB)
O at 298 K is
(c) CH 3CH (d) H2C O (a) 4.35 × 104 s-1 (b) 4.35 × 108 s-1
(c) 4.35 × 10 s-8 -1 (d) 4.35 × 1012 s-1
O O
71. || || 75. If for the cell reaction, Zn + Cu2+ Cu+ Zn2+
CH3 C CH 2CH 2 COCH 2 CH3
Entropy change Sº is 96.5 J mol-1K-1, then
(i) CH3MgBr(one mole) temperature coefficient of the emf of a cell is
(ii) H 2O
A formed in this (a) 5 × 10-4 VK-1 (b) 1 ×10-3 VK-1
reaction is (c) 2 × 10-3 VK-1 (d) 9.65 × 10-4 VK-1
Solved Paper 2013 2013-9
x+ 2 x+3 x + 2a
x+3 x+4 x + 2b is
N x+4 x+5 x + 2c
(b) (a) 0 (b) 1
N N (c) x (d) 2x
84. If two events A and B. If odds against A are as
N
H2
2:1 and those in favour of A È B are as 3:1, then
1 3 5 3
NH (a) £ P( B) £ (b) £ P( B) £
2 4 12 4
(c) 1 3
(c) £ P(B) £ (d) None of these
4 5
NH
85. The value of 2 tan–1 (cosec tan–1 x – tan cot–1 x)
NH2 is
(a) tan–1 x (b) tan x
(c) cot x (d) cosec–1 x
EBD_7443
2013-10 Target VITEEE
86. The proposition ~ ( p Û q) is equivalent to (a) 4 £ x2 + y2 £ 64
(a) (p ~ q) Ù (q Ù ~ p) (b) x2+ y2 £ 25
(b) (p Ù ~ q) (q Ù ~ p)
(c) x2+ y2 ³ 25
(c) (p Ù ~q) Ù (q Ù ~ p)
(d) None of the above (d) 3 £ x2 + y2 £ 9
87. If truth values of P be F and q be T. Then, truth 94. A tower AB leans towards west making an angle
value of ~(~ p q) is with the vertical.The angular elevation of B,
(a) T (b) F the top most point of the tower is b as observed
(c) Either T or F (d) Neither T not F from a point C due east of A at a distance ‘d’
88. The rate of change of the surface area of a sphere from A. If the angular elevation of B from a point
of radius r, when the radius is increasing at the D due east of C at a distance 2d from C is r, then
rate of 2 cm/s is proportional to 2 tan can be given as
1 1 (a) 3 cot b – 2 cot (b) 3 cot – 2 cot b
(a) (b) (c) 3 cot b – cot (d) cot b – 3 cot
r r2
(c) r (d) r2 95. If and b are the roots of x2 – ax + b = 0 and if
89. If N denote the set of all natural numbers and R n + b n = V , then
n
be the relation on N × N defined by (a, b) R (c, d),
(a) Vn+1 = aVn + bVn-1
if ad (b + c) = bc (a + d ), then R is
(b) Vn+1 = aVn + aVn–1
(a) symmetric only
(c) Vn+1 = aVn – bVn–1
(b) reflexive only
(c) transitive only (d) Vn+1 = aVn-1 – bVn
(d) an equivalence relation 96. The sum of the series
90. A complex number z is such that arg æ 1 3r 7r 15r ö
çç + + + +...m terms÷÷is
å
n
r n
(–1) Crç ÷
æ z - 2 ö÷ z è2 2 ø÷
r 2r 3r 4r
çç 2 2
÷ = . The points representing this r =0
èç z + 2 ø÷ 3
complex number will lie on 2 mn -1 2 mn -1
(a) (b)
(a) an ellipse (b) a parabola 2 mn (2 n -1) 2 n -1
(c) a circle (d) a straight line
91. If a1, a2 and a3 be any positive real numbers, 2mn + 1
(c) (d) None of these
then which of the following statement is true? 2n + 1
(a) 3a1a2 a3 £ a13 + a23 + a33 97. The angle of intersection of the circles x2+ y2
– x + y – 8 = 0 and x2 + y2 + 2x + 2y – 11 = 0 is
a1 a2 a3
+ + ³3 æ19 ö
(a) tan–1 ççç ÷÷÷
(b)
a2 a3 a1 (b) tan –1(19)
è9ø
æ1 1ö
(a1 + a2 + a3 )ççç + + ÷÷÷ ³ 9
1 æ9ö
(c)
çè a1 a2 a3 ÷ø (c) tan–1 ççç ÷÷÷ (d) tan–1 (9)
è19 ø
æ1 98. The vector b = 3j + 4k is to be written as the sum
1 a ö
3
99. If the points (x1, y1), (x2, y2) and (x3, y3) are
x 1
collinear, then the rank of the matrix (c) xe x C
é x1 y1 1ù
1
x x
ê x y 1ú will always be less than (d) xe x C
ê 2 2 ú 106. If f (x) = x – [x], for every real number x, where [x]
êë x3 y3 1úû
1
(a) 3 (b) 2 is the integral part of x. Then, ò f ( x ) dx is equal
(c) 1 (d) None of these -1
100. The value of the determinant to
1 cos ( ) cos (a) 1 (b) 2
cos ( ) 1 cos is
cos cos 1 1
(c) 0 (d)
2
2 2 2 2
(a) (b) 107. The value of the integral
(c) 1 (d) 0
é ù
1/ 2
2
e=
2 ìï p
(a) 1 < e < (b) ïï(1+ | sin x |)a /|sin x| , - < x < 0
3 3 ïï 6
117. If f (x) = í b , x=0 , then
2 ïï p
e=
3
(d) e > ïe tan 2 x /tan 3 x
, 0< x <-
(c)
2 3 ïîï 6
111. The sides AB, BC and CA of a ABC have the value of a and b, if f is continuous at x = 0,
respectively 3, 4 and 5 points lying on them.The are respectively.
number of triangles that can be constructed
using these points as vertices is 2 3 2 2/3
(a) , (b) ,e
(a) 205 (b) 220 3 2 3
(c) 210 (d) None of these 3 3/ 2
(c) ,e (d) None of these
a + bx 2
112. In the expansion of , the coefficient of
ex 118. The domain of the function
x r is 1
f ( x) = + x + 2 is
a-b a - br log10 (1- x )
(a) (b)
r! r!
(a) ] 3, 2.5 2.5, 2[
a - br
(c) (-1) r (d) None of these (b) [ 2, 0 0, 1[
r!
(c) ]0, 1[
113. If n = (1999) !, then å log n x is equal to
1999
(d) None of the above
x=1 119. The solution of the differential equation
(a) 1 (b) 0 1 dy
(1+ y2) + ( x etan y ) 0, is
(c) 1999
1999 (d) –1 dx
114. P is a fixed point (a, a, a) on a line through the (a) (x – 2) = Ke tan 1
y
origin equally inclined to the axes, then any plane
through P perpendicular to OP, makes intercepts (b) 1 2 –1
2 xe tan y = e tan y + K
on the axes, the sum of whose reciprocals is
(c) xetan–1y = tan–1 y + K
equal to
(d) xe2tan–1y = etan–1y + K
3 120. If the gradient of the tangent at any point (x, y)
(a) a (b)
2a æ pö
of a curve which passes through the point ççç1, ÷÷÷
3a è 4ø
(c) (d) None of these
2
ïìï y æ öüï
2 y ֕
is íï - sin èççç ÷÷øýï , then equation of the curve is
115. For which of the following values of m, the area
of the region bounded by the curve y = x – x2 îï x x þï
9 (a) y = cot –1 (log e x)
and the line y = mx equals
2
æ x ö÷
(a) – 4 (b) – 2 y = cot –1 ççloge ÷
èç e ø÷
(b)
(c) 2 (d) 4
116. If f : R R be such that f (1) =3 and f (1) = 6.
(c) y = x cot –1 (log e ex )
ïìï f (1 + x ) ïüï
1/ x
q q A
a
4q 2q Y
V= 4 (a 2) / 2 =
0 0a
W0 =– W B
0
(oxalic acid)
D
d(+) and l(–)
5 8 3 tartaric acid
(racemic mixture) COOH
D H—C—OH
H—C—OH
This is a balanced Wheatstone bridge.
Therefore, the arm CD becomes in effective. COOH
E
Hence 5 and 3 are in series and they meso-tartaric acid
together are in parallel with (5 + 3)
(5 3) (5 3) 45. (d) When two cyclic forms of a carbohydrate
Net resistance = 4
(5 3) (5 3) differ in configuration only at hemiacetal
carbons, they are said to be anomers. Thus,
PART - II (CHEMISTRY) anomers are cyclic forms of carbohydrates
that are epimeric at hemiacetal carbon and
41. (a) Benzoin condensation is performed by
aromatic aldehydes (i.e., compounds in this carbon (C–1 of aldose) is called
which –CHO group is directly attached with anomeric carbon, e.g.,
benzene ring).
EBD_7443
2013-18 Target VITEEE
50. (c) Oxidation of Ketones, yield secondary
Anomeric carbon alcohol
R [O] R
HO—C—H CHOH C=O
H—C—OH R K2Cr2O 7/H2SO4 R
H—C—OH H—C—OH
R R
HO—C—H PCC C= O
HO—C—H CHOH
R CH2Cl2 R
H–C O H—C—OH
CH2OH R CH3
H—C O CHOH + C=O
-D-glucose
CH2OH R CH3
-D-glucose [(CH 3)3CO]3Al R
C=O
46. (c) – amino acids are bifunctional organic R
compounds. They contain a basic amino
group (–NH2) on the –carbon and one 51. (c) Since, X NaHCO3 CO 2
acidic carboxyl group (–COOH). Hence, it must contain —COOH group.
47. (d) [CH3COOH] = millimoles of CH3COOH
Achiral carbon
= 0.1 × 10 = 1.0
CH2OH CH3
[CH3COONa] = millimoles of CH3COONa
LiAlH 4
= 0.1 × 20 = 2.0 H—C—COOH H—C—CH2OH
From, Henderson Hasselbalch equation,
CH3 CH2OH
[conjugate base]
pH = pKa + log 52. (a)
[acid]
2 OH2
= 4.74 + log = 4.74 + 0.30 = 5.04 OH conc. H2SO4
1
–H2O
48. (b) (Ag + ) = tr an sport number of
Ag+ × A(AgNO3 )
= 0.464 × 133.3 = 61.9 –1 cm2 equiv–1
By Kohlrausch’s law H can be lost only from this
carbon (3° carbocation (X)
(AgNO3 ) 1, 2-methyl shift
(Ag ) (NO3 )
54. (a)
O O
H2S2O4
O HO—S—S—OH
C O O
O C H2SO5 HO—S—O—O—H
O O
O C O O
H + H
conc.
H2S2O8 HO—S—O—O—S—OH
H2 SO4
O O
59. (d) Volume of one molecule
OH OH OH OH 4 3 4
(phenolphthalein) = r = (1.54 × 10–8)3 cm3
3 3
NaOH (Phenolphthalein = 1.53 × 10–23 cm3
test) Volume of molecules in 1.65 g Ar
Pink colour
1.65
= N0 1.53 10 23 = 0.380 cm3
55. (d) 40
Volume of solid containing 1.65 g Ar = 1 cm3
NaNO2 /HCl
Empty space = 1 – 0.380 = 0.620
NH2 0°C
N NCl Per cent of empty space = 62%
60. (d) In adiabatic expansion
1
CuCN
CN T2 V1
T1 V2
Y
+ for CO2 (triatomic gas) is,
H2O/H
= 1.33
0.33
COOH 150 10
300 V2
56. (a) According to Van–Arkel method, pyrolysis 0.33
of BI3 is carried out in the presence of red 1 10
hot W or Ta filament. 2 V2
2BI3 Red hot w or Ta filament 2B + 3I2 3
1 10
57. (c) NH 4 Cl(s) NH 3 HCl 2 V2
Graham’s law of diffusion says, lighter gas
will diffuse most rapidly. Therefore, NH3 1 10
will be (mol. wt. = 17) diffused rapidly than 8 V2
HCl. (mol. wt. = 36.5). V2 = 80 L
58. (b) Peroxy acids contain —O—O— linkage.
61. (c) H
O RCOOR H2O RCOOH R OH
At t = 0, a 0 0
H2S2O3 H—O—S—O—H At time t, a – x x x
O At time , a – a a a
At t = 0, V0 = volume of NaOH due to H+ (catalyst)
Vt = x + V0
EBD_7443
2013-20 Target VITEEE
V = a + V0 66. (d)
a
If ester is 50% hydrolysed then, x =
2 H Br –
O O O O– 1,4-addition
a
or Vt = V0
2 Br Br
or a = 2Vt – 2V0
V = 2Vt – 2V0 + V0 Enolisation
O OH HO OH
= 2Vt – V0
62. (b) Energy values are additives.
E = E1 + E2 67. (a)
hc hc hc
Cl Cl Cl
1 2
1 1 1 Cl
Cl' Cl'
300 760 2 cis cis trans
p. Q. R
1 1 1
2 300 760 O
= 495.6 nm = 496 nm 68. (a)
R—C—O—R
63. (a) I. Fe2+ = Ar –O oxygen atom can donate lone pair of
6 electron more easily, therefore, it is more
3d basic than –oxygen.
4 unpaired electrons,
Coloured ion, 69. (d) When two molecules of an ethylacetate
undergo condensation reaction, in presence
II. Ni2+ = Ar of sodium ethoxide involving the reaction
8 is called as Claisen condensation and
3d
2 unpaired electrons, product is a –keto ester.
Coloured ion O
III. Al3+ = [Ne] (i) CH3O–
No unpaired electron in 3d, colourless ion. 2CH3CH2COCH3 +
(ii) H
74. (b) KB = Ae E a / RT R H Z2
En =
= 1012 × 4.35 × 10–8 n2
= 4.35 × 104 s–1 where, Z = atomic number, n2 = degeneracy
kA R H (1)2
Also equilibrium constant, k = k = 104 For H–atom, En =
B n2
kA = kB × 104 = 4.35 × 108 s–1 RH RH
dE 9 n2
75. (a) G = H – nFT dT n2 = 9
P
and G = T–T S 78. (d)
Compound Symbol/ Uses
S dE
formla
nF dT P
A. Dry ice CO2 Referigerant
96.5 dE for preserving
or food
2 96500 dT P B. Semicon Ge Electronic diode
3
ductor and triode in
dE cell 1 10 computer
= 5 × 10–4 VK–1
dT P 2 C. Solder Sn/Pb Joining circuits
D. TEL (C2H5)4 Pb Antiknocking
76. (c) We have to compare wavelength of
compound for
transition in the H–spectrum with the Balmer
petroleum
transition n = 4 to n = 2 of He+ spectrum.
products
H= He 79. (c)
2 1 1 1 1
R H ZH R H Z2
n12 n 22 He 2 2
42 N
H N
1 1 1 1 NH2 NH2; N
1 4 N
n12 n 22 4 16 (a) tridentate (b) tridentate
1 1 4 1 NH2 CH3
4
n12 n 22 16 NH C=O
1 1 3 NH CH2
n12 n 22 4 C=O
NH2
If n1 = 1, then n2 = 2, 3, .... CH3
(c) tetradentate (d) bidentate
For first line n2 = 2, n1 = 1
1 1 1 1 3 80. (b) Effective atomic number EAN = Atomic
number – oxidation number + 2 ×
12 22 1 4 4
coordination number
Hence, trnasition n2 = 2 to n1 = 1 will give For [Al (C2O4)3]3–
spectrum of the same wavelength as that Z = 13
of Balmer transition, n2 = 4 to n1 = 2 in He+. ON = 3
77. (b) Energy of the electron in the nth orbit in CN = 6
terms of RH is EAN = 13 – 3 + 2 × 6 = 22
Solved Paper 2013 2013-23
yf (x)dx f (x)dy
= dx 1 1
y2 tan tan
x
f (x)
d = dx 1 x2 1
y = 2 tan–1
x x
On integration, we get
f (x)
=x+C 1 x2 1
y = 2 tan–1
f (x) = y (x + C) x
x 2 x 3 x 2a sec 1
= 2 tan–1 (put x = tan )
83. (a) Let = x 3 x 4 x 2b tan
x 4 x 5 x 2c
1 cos
= 2 tan–1
x 2 x 3 x 2a sin
1
= 0 0 2(2b a c)
2 2sin 2
x 4 x 5 x 2c
=2 tan–1 2
(using R2 2R2 – R1 – R3)
2sin .cos
But a, b and c are in AP using 2b = a + c, we 2 2
get
x 2 x 3 x 2a = 2 tan–1 tan
1 2
= 0 0 0 =0
2
x 4 x 5 x 2c 1
= 2. tan x
Since, all elements of R2 are zero. 2
86. (b) ~ (p q) ~ [( p q) (q p)]
1 3
84. (b) P (A) = , P (A B) = ~ (p q) (~ (q p))
3 4
P (A B) = P(A) + P (B) – P (A B) ( De–Morgan’s law)
P(A) + P (B) (p ~ q) (q ~ p)
3 1 87. (b)
P(B) p q ~ p ~ p q ~ (~ p q )
4 3
F T T T F
5
P(B)
12
Also, B A B Truth value of ~ (~ p q) is F..
EBD_7443
2013-24 Target VITEEE
88. (c) Surface area of sphere, 91. (d) We know that, GM HM
S = 4 r2
3
dr (a1.a2.a3)1/3
and =2 1 1 1
dt
a1 a2 a3
ds dr
4 2r 8 r 2 16 r
dt dt 27
(a1.a2.a3) 3
ds 1 1 1
r
dt a1 a2 a3
89. (d) For (a, b), (c, d) N × N
3
(a, b) R (c, d) 1 1 1
ad (b + c) = bc (a + d) (a1.a2.a3) 27
a1 a2 a3
Reflexive : ab (b + a) = ba (a + b), ab N
(a, b) R (a, b) 92. (b) |x2 – x – 6| = x + 2, then
So, R is reflexive, Case I : x2 – x – 6 < 0
Symmetric : ad (b + c) = bc (a + d) (x – 3) (x + 2) < 0
bc (a + d) = ad (b + c) –2<x<3
cd (d + a) = da (c + b) In this case, the equation becomes
(c, d) R (a, b) x2 – x– 6 = –x – 2
So, R is symmetric. or x2 – 4 = 0
Transitive : For (a, b), (c, d), (e, f) N × N x=±2
Let (a, b) R (c, d), (c, d) R (e, f) Clearly, x = 2 satisfies the domain of the
ad (b + c) = bc(a + d), cf (d + e) = de (c + f) equation in this case. So, x = 2 is a solution.
adb + adc = bca + bcd ...(i) Case II : x2 – x – 6 0
and cfd + cfe = dec + def ...(ii) So, x – 2 or x 3
On multiplying eq. (i) by ef and eq. (ii) by In this case, the equation becomes
ab and then adding, we have x2 – x – 6 = 0 = x + 2
adbef + adcef + cfdab + cfeab
i.e., x2 – 2x – 8 = 0 or x = –2, 4
= bcaef + bcdef + decab + defab
Both these values lie in the domain of the
adcf (b + e) = bcde (a + f)
equation in this case, so x = –2, 4 are the
af (b + e) = be (a + f)
(a, b) R (e, f) roots.
So, R is transitive. Hence, roots are x = –2, 2, 4.
Hence R is an equivalence relation. 93. (a) Let (h, k) be any point in the set, then
equation of circle is
z 2 (x – h)2 + (y – k)2 = 9
90. (c) arg
z 2 3
8
x 2 iy
arg
x 2 iy 3
2
arg (x – 2 + iy) – arg (x + 2 + iy) =
3
y 1 y
tan–1 tan
x 2 x 2 3
(h, k) lies on x2 + y2 = 25, then h 2 + k2 = 25
4y 2 Distance between the two circles 8
3
x2 y2 4 2 h2 k2 8
3(x 2 2
y ) 4y 4 3 = 0 4 h 2 + k2 64
Locus of (h, k) is 4 (x2 + y2) 64
which is an equation of a circle.
Solved Paper 2013 2013-25
17 10
r12 r22 d 2 13
cos = 2 4
Y'(S) 2r1r2 17
2 . 13
2
3d cot = d cot + 2d tan
3 cot = cot + 2 tan
2 tan = 3 cot – cot
2 2
95. (c) Multiplying x2 – ax + b = 0 by xn–1, we get 1 1
here, r1 8
xn+1 – axn + bxn–1 = 0 ...(i) 2 2
are roots of x2 – ax + b = 0, therefore
they will satisfy (i). 17
,
Also, n+1 – a n + b n–1 = 0 ...(ii) 2
and n+1 – a n + b n–1 = 0 ...(iii) r2 13
On adding eqs. (ii) and (iii), we get
10
( n+1 + n+1) – a ( n + n) and d c1c 2
+ b( n–1 + (n–1)) = 0 2
Vn+1 – aVn + bVn–1 = 0 ( n + n = Vn)
Vn+1 = aVn – bVn–1
19
n cos =
( 1)r .n Cr 442
96. (a)
r 0
9
r r or tan =
1 3 7 19
...upto m terms
2r 22r 23r
9
= tan–1
19
n
1 n
3r
( 1)r .n Cr ( 1)r .n C r .
2r 22r 98. (a) b1|| a b1 = a (i + j)
r 0 r 0
b2 = b – b1 = (3 – a) i – aj + 4k
n
7r Also, b2 . a = 0
( 1)r .n C r . ...
r 0 23r 3
(3 – a) – a a=
2
n n n
1 3 7
1 1 1 3
2 4 8 b1 = (i + j)
2
... upto m terms
EBD_7443
2013-26 Target VITEEE
Thus, slope of new line is tan (45° + 15°)
x1 y1 1
= tan 60° = 3
x2 y2 1
99. (b) The given matrix is , ( it is rotated anti-clockwise, so the angle
x3 y3 1
will be 45° + 15° = 60°)
using R2 R2 – R1, R3 R3 – R1
Y C
x1 y1 1
B (3, 1)
= x2 x1 y2 y1 0 =0
x3 x1 y3 y1 0
°
15
( points are collinear i.e., area of triangle = 0)
45°
X
x2 x1 y2 y1 A (2, 0)
x3 x1 y3 y1 = 0
Hence, the equation is y = 3 x + c
So, the rank of matrix is always less than 2.
But it passes through (2, 0),
100. (d) On solving the determinant, we have
1 (1 – cos2 ) – cos ( – ) [cos ( – ) So, c = – 2 3
– cos . cos ] + cos [ cos . cos ( – ) Thus, required equation is y = 3x 2 3
–cos ] 103. (a) Solving the equation of line and curve, we
= 1 – cos2 – cos2 – cos2 ( ) get
+ 2 cos . cos .cos ( – ) 2
= 1 – cos2 – cos2 + cos ( – ) 2 2x
x2 2 =4
[2cos .cos – cos( – )] 6
= 1 – cos2 – cos2 + cos ( – )cos( + )
1
[cos ( + ) + cos ( – ) – cos ( – )] x2 – × 4 (1 + x2 – 2x) = 4
3
= 1 – cos2 – cos2 + cos2 . cos2
3x2 – 4 – 4x2 + 8x = 12
– sin2 . sin2 x2 – 8x + 16 = 0
= 1 – cos – cos (1 – cos2 )
2 2
(x – 4)2 = 0 x = 4
– sin2 .sin2
2 2
and 6 .y = 2 – 2 (4) = – 6
= 1 – cos – cos sin – sin2 .sin2
2
x 1 1 1
105. (c) (1 x x 1 )ex dx
= 2log 1 2log 1
4 4
x x 1 1 x 1
= [x.e 1 2
ex ]dx 3 4
x = 4log 4log
4 3
[ xf (x) f (x)dx xf (x) C] 108. (d) Let P (x1, y1) be a point on the ellipse.
x 1 x 1 x2 y2
(1 x x 1)e x dx xe x C =1
18 32
106. (a) f(x) = x – [x], – 1 x < 0
f (x) = x + 1 x12 y12
When 0 x < 1 = 1... (i)
18 32
f(x) = x
The equation of the tangent at (x1, y1) is
1 0 1
f (x)dx f (x)dx f (x) dx xx1 yy1
= 1. This meets the axes at
1 1 0 18 32
0 1 18 32
= (x 1)dx x dx A x ,0 and B 0, y . It is given that
1 1
1 0
4
0 1 slope of the tangent at (x1, y1) is –
x2 x2 3
= 2 x
2
1 0 x1 32 4
So, – . =–
18 y1 3
( 1) 2 1
=0 1 1
2 2 x1 3
y1 = 4
2 2 1/ 2
1/ 2 x 1 x 1
107. (c) 2 dx x1 y1
1/ 2 x 1 x 1 =K (say)
3 4
x1 = 3K and y1 = 4K
2 1/ 2
1/ 2 x 1 x 1 Putting x1, y1 in (i), we get
= dx
1/ 2 x 1 x 1 K2 = 1
1
1/ 2 4x Area of OAB = OA.OB
dx 2
= 1/ 2 x2 1
1 18 32 1 (18)(32) 24
= . . = = 2
0 4x 1/ 2 4x 2 x1 y1 2 (3K)(4K) K
= dx dx
1/ 2 1 x2 0 1 x2 = 24 sq units ( K2 = 1)
EBD_7443
2013-28 Target VITEEE
109. (d) Let mid–point of part PQ which is in 4b2 tan2
= b2tan2a2sec2
between the axis is R (x 1 , y1 ), then 3b2 tan2 = a2 sec2
coordinates of P and Q will be (2x1, 0) and 3b2 sin2 = a2
(0, 2y1), respectively. 3a2 (e2 – 1) sin2 = a2
3 (e2 – 1) sin2 = 1
x y
Equation of line PQ is =1
2x1 2y1 1
2
= sin2 < 1,( sin 2 < 1)
3(e 1)
y1
y= x 2y1 1 4
x1 1
3 e2 1 e2
e 2
1 3 3
If this line touches the ellipse
2
x2 y2 e>
=1 3
a 2 b2
111. (a) There are 3 + 4 + 5 = 12 points in a plane.
then it will satisfy the condition,
The number of required triangles
c2 = a2m2 + b2
= (The number of triangles formed by these
2 12 points) – (The number of triangles formed
y1
So, (2y1 )2 = a2 b2 by the collinear points)
x1 = 12C3 – (3C3 + 4C3 + 5C3)
= 220 – (1 + 4 + 10) = 205
a 2 y12 112. (c) (a + bx) e–x
4y12 = b2
x12 = (a + bx)
x x2 x3 xn
a 2
b 2
a 2
b 2 1 ... ( 1)n ...
4= =4 1! 2! 3! n!
x12 y12 x12 y12
The coefficient of xr = a.
Required locus of (x1, y1) is
( 1)r ( 1)r 1 ( 1)r
a 2
b 2 b = (a br)
r! (r 1)! r!
2 =4
x y2
1999
110. (d) Let P (a sec , b tan ), Q (a sec , – b tan ) 113. (a) log n x
be end points of double ordinates and x 1
(0, 0) is the centre of the hyperbola. = log(1999)! 1+ log(1999)! 2 + ... + log(1999)! 1999
So, PQ = 2b tan = log(1999)! (1.2.3.... 1999)
= log(1999)! (1999)! = 1
114. (d) Since, the line is equally inclined to the axes
P
(0, 0) (a sec , b tan ) and passes through the origin, its direction
O ratios are 1, 1,1.
x y z
Q So, its equation is .
1 1 1
(a sec , – b tan )
A point P on it is given by (a, a, a). So,
equation of the plane through P (a, a, a)
OQ = OP = a 2 sec 2 b2 tan 2 and perpendicular to OP is
Since, OQ = OP = PQ 1 (x – a) + 1 (y – a) + 1 (z – a) = 0
( OP is normal to the plane)
Solved Paper 2013 2013-29
i.e., x + y + z = 3a 1
lim [log f (1 x) log f (1)]
x y z 116. (c) ex 0 x
=1
3a 3a 3a
f (1 x) / f (1 x)
Intercepts on axes are 3a, 3a and 3a, lim
ex 0 1
therefore sum of reciprocals of these =
intercepts. f (1) / f (1)
=e e613 e2
1 1 1 1
=
3a 3a 3a a
117. (b) (1 sin x )
a/ sin x
, x 0
115. (b) The equation of curve is y = x – x2
6
x2 – x = y
f (x) b , x 0
2
1 1 e tan 2x/tan 3x ,0 x
x y
2 4 6
Y 1 1
, lim (1 + |sin x|)a / | sinx |
2 4 y = mx x 0
a
lim |sin x|
x 0 |sin x|
X =e = ea
O (1 – m)
tan 2x / tan 3x
Now, lim e
x 0
Hence, finding the point of intersection of
the curve and the line, tan 2x tan 3x
2x 3x
x – x2 = mx x (1 – x – m) = 0 2x 3x
= lim e
i.e., x = 0 or x = 1 – m x 0
9 1 m
(x x 2 mx)dx = lim e
2/ 3
e
2 /3
2 0
x 0
tan 1
y dy dv
119. (b) (1 + y2) + (x e ) =0 v+x = v – sin2 v
dx dx
dx 1 dx
(1 + y2) x e tan y
– cosec2v dv =
dy x
1
Integrating both sides, we get
dx x e tan y
dx
dy 1 y2 (1 y 2 ) – cosec 2 vdv
x
1 cot v = log x + C
dy 1
1 y2
IF = e e tan y y
cot = log x + C
x
1
e tan y 1
.e tan y .dy
1
tan y
x. e = 2 Curve passes through the point 1,
1 y 4
1 C=1
tan 1 y e 2tan y
x(e ) c y
2 cot = log x + logee
x
1 1
2xe tan y
e 2 tan y
K y
cot log xe
dy y y x
120. (c) sin 2 y = x cot–1 (log xe)
dx x x
dy dv
Put y = vx v x
dx dx
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2012
G2 G
T/4 T/2 3T/2 T (c) (d)
t (S G) (S G)
(b) 0
40. Three charges, each + q, are placed at the corners
of an isosceles triagle ABC of sides BC and AC,
2a. D and E are the mid-points of BC and CA.
emf
The work done in taking a charge Q from D to E
is
T/2 3T/4 T A
(c) 0 t
T/4
E
emf
B C
T/4 D
(d) 0 t
T/2 3T/4 T eqQ qQ
(a) 8 0a (b) 4 0a
36. A transistor is operated in common emitter
3qQ
configuration at VC = 2 V such that a change in (c) Zero (d)
the base current from 100 µA to 300 µA produces 4 0a
Solved Paper 2012 2012-5
List-I List-II
(a) 2 3
Al3 SO 24 (Substances) (Processes)
A. Sulphuric acid 1. Haber's process
(b) B. Steel 2. Bessemer's process
Al3 SO 24
C. Sodium hydroride 3. Leblanc process
D. Ammonia 4. Contact process
(c) 3 6 Codes :
Al3 SO 24
A B C D
1 1 (a) 1 4 2 3
(d) Al3 2 (b) 1 2 3 4
3 2 SO4
51. The pressure exerted by 6.0g of methane gas in (c) 4 3 2 1
a0.03 m3 vessel at 129°C is (d) 4 2 3 1
56. When glycerol is treated with excess of HI, it
(Atomic masses : C =12.01, H = 1.01 and
produces
R = 8.314 JK–1 mol–1)
(a) 2-iodopropane (b) allyl iodide
(a) 215216 Pa (b) 13409 Pa
(c) propene (d) glycerol triiodide
(c) 41648 Pa (d) 31684 Pa
57. Some statements about heavy water are given
52. Match List I (Equations) with List II (Types of
below.
process) and select the correct option. (i) Heavy water is used as moderator in nuclear
List-I List-II reactors
(Equations) (Types of process) (ii) Heavy water is more associated than
ordinary water
A. KP > Q 1. Non-spontaneous
(iii) Heavy water is more effective solvent than
B. G RT ln Q 2. Equilibrium ordinary water
C. KP = Q 3. Spontaneous and Which of the above statements are correct?
endothermic (a) (i) and (ii) (b) (i), (ii) and (iii)
(c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (i) and (iii)
H
D. T 4. Spontaneous 58. Which one of the following compounds will be
S most readily dehydrated ?
Codes : O
A B C D
(a) 1 2 3 4
(b) 3 4 2 1 (a) H3C
(c) 4 1 2 3
OH
(d) 2 1 4 3
O
53. Among the following which one has the highest
cation of anion size ratio?
(a) CsI (b) CsF (b) H3C
(c) LiF (d) NaF
54. Which of the following species is not OH
electrophilic in nature? O OH
59. Which one of the following complexes is not (b) Isostructural with same hybridisation for
expected to exhibit isomerism? the central atom
(a) [Ni(NH3)4(H2O)2]2+ (c) Isostructural with different hybridisation for
(b) [Pt(NH3)2Cl2] the central atom
(c) [Ni(NH3)2Cl2] (d) Similar in hybridisation for the central atom
(d) [Ni(en)3]2+ with different structures
60. Which of the following conformers for ethylene 64. Following compounds are given
glycol is most stable ? (i) CH3CH2OH (ii) CH3COCH3
OH (iii) CH 3 CHOH (iv) CH3OH
|
H H CH3
(a) E A 2D 350
NO2
For B D E 2C, H will be
Cl (a) 525 kJ/mol (b) –175 kJ/mol
(c) –325 kJ/mol (d) 325 kJ/mol
76. Match the compounds given in List-I with
(b) List-II and select the suitable option using the
codes given below
CH3
List-I List-II
Cl A. Benzaldehyde 1. Phenolphthalein
B. Phthalic 2. Benzoin
Cl anhydride condensation
(c) (d) C. Phenyl benzoate 3. Oil of wintergreen
D. Methyl 4. Fries rearrangement
OCH3 salicylate
71. A 0.1 molal aqueous solution of a weak acid is Codes :
30% ionised. If Kf for water is 1.86° C/m, the A B C D
freezing point of the solution will be
(a) 4 1 3 2
(a) –0.18°C (b) –0.54°C
(c) –0.36°C (d) –0.24°C (b) 4 2 3 1
72. Which of the following carbonyls will have the (c) 2 3 4 1
strongest C – O bond? (d) 2 1 4 3
(a) Mn(CO)+6 (b) Cr(CO)6 77. Which of the following compound is the most
(c) V(CO)–6 (d) Fe(CO)5 basic ?
73. The order of reactivity of phenyl magnesium
bromide (PhMgBr) with the following
compounds (a) O2N NH2
H 3C H 3C Ph
C O C O and C O (b) CH2NH2
H H 3C Ph
(I) (II) (III)
(a) III > II > I (b) II > I > III N COCH3
(c) I > III > II (d) I > II > III (c)
74. A solid compound XY has NaCl structure. If the H
radius of the cation is 100 pm, the radius of the
anion (Y–) will be NH2
(d)
(a) 275.1 pm (b) 322.5 pm
(c) 241.5 pm (d) 165.7 pm
Solved Paper 2012 2012-9
78. Which of the following structures is the most 84. If 3p and 4p are resultant of a force 5p, then the
preferred and hence of lowest energy for SO3? angle between 3p and 5p is
O 1 3 1 4
(a) sin (b) sin
S 5 5
(a) S (b) O O (c) 90° (d) None of these
85. If 2 tan –1(cos x) = tan–1(2 cosec x), then the value
O O
of x is
O 3
O (a) (b)
4 4
S S
(c) (d)
O
O
O
3
79. What is the value of electron gain enthalpy of 86. Let a be any element in a boolean algebra B.
If a + x = 1 and ax = 0, then
Na+ if IE1 of Na = 5.1 eV ?
(a) x = 1 (b) x = 0
(a) –5.1 eV (b) –10.2 eV
(c) x = a (d) x = a'
(c) +2.55 eV (d) +10.2 eV
87. Dual of (x + y) . (x + 1) = x + x . y + y is
80. The unit of rate constant for a zero order reaction
(a) (x . y) + (x . 0) = x . (x + y) . y
is (b) (x + y) + (x . 1) = x . (x + y) . y
(a) mol L–1s–1 (b) L mol–1s–1 (c) (x . y) (x . 0) = x . (x + y) . y
2
(c) L mol s –2 –1 (d) s –1 (d) None of the above
PART - III (MATHEMATICS) 88. The function f : R R defined by
f (x) = (x – 1)(x – 2)(x – 3) is
81. The solution of the differential equation (a) one-one but not onto
(b) onto but not one-one
dy 2yx 1
is (c) both one-one and onto
dx 1 x 2 (1 x 2 ) 2 (d) neither one-one nor onto
(a) y (1 + x2) = C + tan–1x 89. If the complex numbers z 1, z2 and z3 are in AP,
then they lie on a
y (a) a circle (b) a parabola
(b) = C + tan–1x
1 x2 (c) line (d) ellipse
(c) y log (1 + x2) = C + tan–1x 90. Let a, b and c be in AP and |a| < 1, |b| < 1, |c| < 1.
(d) y (1 + x2) = C + sin–1x If x = 1 + a + a2 + ... to ,
82. If x, y and z are all distinct and y = 1 + b + b2 + ... to ,
z = 1 + c + c2 + ... to , then x, y and z are in
(a) AP (b) GP
x x 2 1 x3
(c) HP (d) None of these
y y 2 1 y3 0, then the value of xyz is 91. The number of real solutions of the equation
2 3 9
z z 1 z
3 x x 2 is
10
(a) –2 (b) –1 (a) 0 (b) 1
(c) –3 (d) None of these (c) 2 (d) None of these
83. The probability that atleast one of the events A 92. The lines 2x – 3y – 5 = 0 and 3x – 4y = 7 are
and B occurs is 0.6. If A and B occur diameters of a circle of area 154 sq units, then
simultaneously with probability 0.2, then the equation of the circle is
P(A) P(B) is (a) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y – 62 = 0
(a) 0.4 (b) 0.8 (b) x2 + y2 + 2x – 2y – 47 = 0
(c) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 47 = 0
(c) 1.2 (d) 1.4
(d) x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 62 = 0
EBD_7443
2012-10 Target VITEEE
93. The angle of depressions of the top and the foot (a) independent of
of a chimney as seen from the top of a second (b) independent of
chimney, which is 150 m high and standing on (c) independent of and
the same level as the first are and respectively, (d) None of the above
then the distance between their tops when 100. Themaximum valueof 4 sin2 x – 12 sin x + 7 is
(a) 25 (b) 4
4 5
tan and tan is (c) does not exist (d) None of these
3 2 101. A straight line through the point A(3, 4) is such
150 that its intercept between the axes is bisected at
(a) m (b) 100 3 m A, its equation is
3
(a) 3x – 4y + 7 = 0 (b) 4x + 3y = 24
(c) 150 m (d) 100 m (c) 3x + 4y = 25 (d) x + y = 7
94. If one root is square of the other root of the 102. The tangent at (1, 7) to the curve x2 = y – 6
equation x2 + px + q = 0, then the relations touches the circle x2 + y2 + 16x + 12y + c = 0 at
between p and q is (a) (6, 7) (b) (–6, 7)
(a) p3 – (3p – 1) q + q2 = 0 (c) (6, –7) (d) (–6, –7)
(b) p3 – q (3p + 1) + q2 = 0 103. The equation of straight line through the
(c) p3 + q (3p – 1) + q2 = 0 intersection of the lines x – 2y = 1 and x + 3y = 2
(d) p3 + q (3p + 1) + q2 = 0 and parallel 3x + 4y = 0 is
95. The coefficient of x53 in the following expansions (a) 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 (b) 3x + 4y – 10 = 0
100 (c) 3x + 4y – 5 = 0 (d) 3x + 4y + 6 = 0
100
Cm (x 3)100 m .2 m is
dx
m 0 104. equals to
(a) 100C (b) 100C sin x cos x 2
47 53
(c) –100C 53 (d) –100C 100 1 x
96. If (–3, 2) lies on the circle x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0, (a) tan C
which is concentric with the circle 2 2 8
x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y – 5 = 0, then c is equal to 1 x
(a) 11 (b) –11 (b) tan C
(c) 24 (d) 100 2 2 8
97. If a = i + j + k, b = i + 3j + 5k and c = 7i + 9j + 11k, 1 x
then the area of Parallelogram having diagonals (c) cot C
2 2 8
a + b and b + c is
1 1 x
(a) 4 6 sq. units (b) 21 sq. units (d) cot C
2 2 2 8
1
6 1 x
(c) sq. units (d) 6 sq. units 105. The value of integral dx is
2 1 x
0
1 5 7
98. If A 0 7 9 , then trace of matrix A is (a) 1 (b) 1
2 2
11 8 9 (c) –1 (d) 1
(a) 17 (b) 25 1
1
(c) 3 (d) 12 106. The value of I xx dx is
99. The value of the determinant 2
0
cos sin 1 1 1
(a) (b)
sin cos 1 is 3 4
cos( ) sin( ) 1 1
(c) (d) None of these
8
Solved Paper 2012 2012-11
107. The eccentricity of the ellipse, which meets the 114. Area lying in the first quadrant and bounded by
x y the circle x2 + y2 = 4, the line x 3y and x-axis
straight line 1 on the axis of x and the
7 2 is
x y (a) sq units (b) sq units
straight line 1 on the axis of y and whose
3 5 2
axes lie along the axes of coordinates, is
(c) sq units (d) None of these
3 2 2 6 3
(a) (b) 1x
7 7 1
115. The value of lim tan x is
3 x 2
(c) (d) None of there
7 (a) 0 (b) 1
(c) –1 (d) e
x2 y2
108. If 1 (a b) and x2 – y2 = c2 cut at
a 2 b2 mx 1, x
2
right angles, then 116. If f (x) is continuous at
(a) a2 + b2 = 2c 2 (b) b2 – a2 = 2c 2 sin x n, x
2 2
(c) a – b = 2c 2 (d) a2b2 = 2c 2 2
109. The equation of the conic with focus at (1, –1)
directrix along x – y + 1 = 0 and with eccentricity x , then
2
2 is n
(a) x2 – y2 = 1 (a) m = 1, n = 0 (b) m 1
2
(b) xy = 1
(c) 2xy – 4x + 4y + 1 = 0 n m m n
(c) (d)
(d) 2xy + 4x – 4y – 1 = 0 2 2
110. There are 5 letters and 5 different envelopes.
The number of ways in which all the letters can 4 x2
be put in wrong envelope, is 117. The domain of the function f (x)
sin 1 (2 x)
(a) 119 (b) 44
(c) 59 (d) 40 is
111. The sum of the series (a) [0, 2] (b) [0, 2)
(c) [1, 2) (d) [1, 2]
12 22 12 22 32 12 22 32 42 118. The general solution of the differential equation
1 ...
2! 3! 4! (1 + y2) dx + (1 + x2) dy = 0 is
is (a) x – y = C (1 – xy) (b) x – y = C (1 + xy)
17 13 19 (c) x + y = C (1 – xy) (d) x + y = C (1 + xy)
(a) 3e e (c)
(b) e (d) e 119. The order and degree of the differential equation
6 6 6
n
112. The coefficient of x in the expansion of 2 32
loga(1 + x) is dy
1
( 1)n 1 ( 1)n 1 dx
are, respectively
(a) (b) log a e 2
n n d y
n 1 n
( 1) ( 1) dx 2
(c) log e a (d) log a e
n n (a) 2, 2 (b) 2, 3
113. If a plane meets the coordinate axes at A, B and (c) 2, 1 (d) None of these
C in such a way that the centroid of ABC is at 120. The relation R defined on the set of natural
the point (1, 2, 3), then equation of the plane is numbers as {(a, b) : a differs from b by 3} is
x y z x y z given
(a) 1 (b) 1 (a) {(1, 4), (2, 5), (3, 6),... }
1 2 3 3 6 9 (b) {(4, 1), (5, 2), (6, 3),... }
x y z 1 (c) {(1, 3), (2, 6), (3, 9),... }
(c) (d) None of these (d) None of the above
1 2 3 3
EBD_7443
2012-12 Target VITEEE
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) 6. (d) When reactance of inductance is mroe than
the reactance of cndenser, the current will
I1 lag behind the voltage.
1. (d)
F1 1 1
d Thus L or
c LC
I
F4 1
or n or n > nr
2 LC
nr = resonant frequency
F2
K1 0 A K2 0A
I 7. (c) Capacitance, CA = , CB
d d
F3 2 2
F2 = – F4 C1 2K1K 2
Ceq = C K1 K 2
0 I1Il 2
F1 =
2 dl CACB 2K1K2 0A 0A
= e
0 I1I CA CB K1 K2 d d
F2 =
2 (d l)
dV
F1 > F3 8. (d) Intensity of the electric field, E = = 6x
Fnet = F1 – F3 dx
So, wire attract loop. Potential (v) = 3x2 + 5
E at x = –2
E V h(v v0 ) = 6 (–2) = – 12V/m
2. (a) Here, V0 =
e e 9. (c) Volume of 8 small drops = Volume of big
34 drop
6.62 10 (8.2 1014 3.3 1014 )
= 19 4 3 4 3
1.6 10 r 8 R
3 3
34
6.62 10 2r = R
= 4.9 1033
1.6 ...(i)
According to charge conservation
6.62 4.9 10 1 8q = Q
=
1.6 ...(ii)
V0 = 2 volt q
3. (a) In forward biasing, resistance of p–n junctin Potential of one small drop (V ) = 4
diode is zero, so whole voltage appears 0r
across the resistance. Q
4. (d) BE of Li7 = 39.20 MeV Similarly, potential of big drop (V) = 4
and He4 = 28.24 MeV 0R
Hence binding energy of 2He4 = 56.84 MeV V q R V 9 2r
Energy of reaction = 56.84 – 39.20 Now,
V Q r 20 8q r
= 17.28 MeV
V = 5V
5. (b) v (Z b)
Solved Paper 2012 2012-13
or =
3
A C
3 i.e. de–Broglie wavelength will change by
1
factor .
3V 3
15. (a) We know,
Here, two reisistance of 1 and 2 are in
series, which form 3 which is in parallel 10
t/T
N 1 N 1 20
with 3 resistance.
Therefore, the effective resistance N0 2 10000 2
(1 2) 3 3 10000 10000
(1 2) 3 2 N= = 7070
2 1.414
EBD_7443
2012-14 Target VITEEE
16. (c) As X-rays pass through the intestine
0 2N
without casting a clear shadow. 23. (c) The magnetic field, B = .
17. (b) Given : A = 0.3 m2 n = 2 × 1025/m3 4 d3
q = 3t2 + 5t + 2 2 1.25
= 10–7 × = 2 × 10–6 N/A–m
dq (0.5)3
i= = 6t + 5 = 17
dt
IP nS
i 24. (c) Transformation ratio, I
Drift velocity, vd = S nS
neA
17 3 3
= i.e. I 2 or, IS = 2A
2 10 25 1.6 10 19 0.3 S
25. (b) Voltage
17
= = 1.77 × 10–5 m/s V= VR2 VC2 = (20)2 (16)2
0.96 106
18. (b) Capacitance 1 F and C F are connected = 25.6V
in series, 26. (a) Electron goes to its first excited state
(n = 2) from ground state (n = 1) after
C
Ceq = absorbing 10.2 eV energy
1 C
Given, V = 120 V and q = 80 C h
Increase in momentum =
q = CeqV 2
C 6.6 10 34
80 = 20 =
C 1 6.28
or C = 2 F = 1.05 × 10–34 J–s
Energy stored in the capacitor of capicity C 27. (b) Using R = R0 A1/3
1q 1/3
U= R1 A1
2 C
R2 A2
1 (80 10 6 )2
= 6
1
2 2 10 R A 3
R He 4
1 80 10 6 80 10 6
=
2 2 10 6 1
U = 1600 J A 3
(14)1/3 = A = 56
19. (d) Conducting surface behaves as 4
equipotential surface.
So, = 56 – 30 = 26
20. (a) I = neqe + npqE = 1 mA (towards right)
28. (a) Given circuit is a balanced Wheatstone
21. (a) 1 faraday deposited 1 g equivalent
bridge.
22. (c) The magnetic field
0 2 (qv) 2
B= . 2
4 r
19
2 3.14 (1.6 10 1.6 1015 ) A B
= 10–7 × 10 2
0.53 10
2
= 12.5 Wb/m3
2
* *
2 p 2y , 2 p x2 2 p1y In the presence of strong field ligand
NH3, pairing of electrons takes place
* * and hence, octahedral complex,
O22 1s 2 , 1s 2 , 2s 2 , 2s 2 , 2 pz2 , 2 px2
[Co(NH3)6]3+ is diamagnetic.
* * inner orbital or
2 p 2y , 2 p 2x 2 p 2y
[Co(NH3)6]3+ low spin complex
(6NH3 molecles)
Solved Paper 2012 2012-17
3
(0.75)3 (0.25)
sp d 2 hybridisation K=
(0.50)2 (0.75)
OH H-bonding
CH2OH CH2I CH2
3HI H OH
CHOH CHI CH
–3H 2O –I2
O Cl
||
CH3 C HOH,CH3 — C— CH 3 , CH 3 — CHOH > > >
| |
H CH3
NO2 CH3 OCH3
give iodoform when heated with I2 and
NaOH. (Note : NaOI oxidises CH3CH2OH 71. (d) Freezing point depression ( Tf) = iKf m
to CH3CHO, and gives positive iodoform HA H+ + A–
test.) 1–
65. (d) In aqueous medium, fructose is enolised 1 – 0.3 0.3 0.3
and converted into aldehyde in basic i = 1 – 0.3 + 0.3 + 0.3
medium. Generally all aldehydes reduce i = 1.3
Tollen's reagent, thus fructose can also Tf = 1.3 × 1.86 × 0.1 = 0.2418°C
reduces Tollen's reagent. Tf = 0 – 0.2418°C
Mg,Ether = – 0.2418°C
66. (c) C6H5CH2Br C6H5CH2MgBr 72. (a) As positive charge on the central metal atom
Grignard reagent increases, the less readily the metal can
Br donate electron density into the anti–
bonding –orbitals of C–O ligand to
H3O /H
C6 H5CH3 Mg weaken the C—O bond. Thus, the C–O
toluene
bond would be strongest in Mn(CO)6+
OH
EBD_7443
2012-20 Target VITEEE
73. (d) Since alkyl group has +I–effect and aryl OH OH
group has + R–effect, Hence greater the
number of alkyl and aryl groups attached
to the carbonyl group, its reactivity towards
nucleophilic addition reaction. Secondly, as
the steric crowding on carbonyl group
conc. H2SO4/
increases, the r eactivity decreases H H
accordingly. O –H2O
Correct reactivity order for reaction with
PhMgBr is C
H3C H3C Ph O OH OH
C O > C O > C O
C
H H3C Ph
(I) (II) (III) O
phthalic anhydride
C
r
74. (c) Radius ratio of NaCl like crystal =
r O
100 C
= 0.414 or r – = = 241.5 pm
0.414
O
1 phenolphthalein
75. (b) A B ; H = 150 kJ/mol ...(i) (c) Fries rearrangement Phenyl benzoate
2
heated with anhydrous AlCI 3 in the
3B 2C + D; H = – 125 kJ/mol ...(ii)
presence of inert solvent gives ortho–and
E + A 2D; H = + 350 kJ/mol ...(iii)
Para–hydroxybenzophenone. In this
By [2 × (i) + (ii)] – (iii), we have rearrangement, there is only a benzoyl
B + D E + 2C group migration from the phenolic oxygen
H = 150 × 2 + (–125) – 350 to an ortho–and para–position.
= –175 kJ/mol
76. (d) (a) Benzoin condensation : Heating
O
ethanolic solution with strong alkali
like KCN or NaCN, benzoin is obtained. O—C—C6H5 OH
C—C6H5
O AlCl3/
– O
CN
2C6H5 — C — H
O phenyl p-hydroxy-
benzoate benzophenone
C6H5 — C — CH — C6H5 OH
OH
benzoin +
(b) Formation of phenolphthalein phenol is
treated with phthalic anhydride in the
presence of conc. H 2 SO 4 , it gives O C — C6H5
phenolphthalein, an indicator. p-hydroxy-
benzophenone
Solved Paper 2012 2012-21
(d) Methylsalicylate
PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
OH
dy 2yx 1
COOCH3 81. (a) 2
dx 1 x (1 x 2 ) 2
which is a linear differential equation.
2x 1
Here, P = ,Q
2
(A chief constituent of oil of wintergreen) 1 x (1 x 2 ) 2
77. (b) Now, IF = e P dx
CH2NH2
2x 2
= 2
dx 2 = (1 + x )
Compound is most basic due to localised e1 x elog(1 x )
lone pair of electrons on nitrogen atom Solution of differential equation is
While in other compounds, because of
resonance, the lone pair of electrons on 1
y. (1 + x2) = .(1 x 2 )dx C
nitrogen atom gets delocalised over (1 x 2 ) 2
benzene ring and thus is less easily
available for donation. 1
78. (d) Formal charges help in selection of the y (1 + x2) = dx C
1 x2
lowest energy structure from a number of
possible Lewis structures for a given y (1 + x2) = tan–1 x + C
species. Generally the lowest energy
structure is the one with the smallest formal x x 2 1 x3
charges on the atoms. 82. (b) y y2 1 y3 = 0
Formal charge on an atom
= total no. of valence electrons – non -bonding z z2 1 z3
1
electrons – × bonding electrons.
2 x x2 1 x x2 x3
For Lewis structure of SO3
y y2 1 y y2 y3 = 0
O
..
..
z z2 1 z z2 z3
S
.O... ..O.. x x2 1 1 x x2
Formal charge on S atom y y2 1 xyz 1 y y 2
=0
1 z z2 1 1 z z2
=6–0– × 12 = 0
2
Formal charge on three O atoms
1 x x2 1
6 4 4 0
2 y y2 1
79. (a) IE1 of Na = – Electron gain enthalpy of Na+ ion (1 + xyz) =0
= –5.1eV. z z2 1
80. (a) For zero order reaction,
Rate = k [Reactants]° (1 + xyz) [x(y2 – z2) –y (x2 – z2)
Rate = k + z (x2 – y2)] = 0
and unit of k = mol L–1 s –1 (1 + xyz) (x – y) (y – z) (z – x) = 0
1 + xyz = 0 xyz = –1
EBD_7443
2012-22 Target VITEEE
83. (c) P (A B) = 0.6 and P (A B) = 0.2 87. (a) (x + y) . (x + 1) = x + x.y + y
we know that Replace ‘.’ by ‘+’, ‘+’ by ‘.’, ‘1’ by ‘0’, we
P (A B) = P (A) + P(B) – P(A B) get (x . y) + (x . 0) = x.(x + y) . y
0.6 = P(A) + P(B) – 0.2 88. (b) f (x) = (x – 1) (x – 2) (x – 3)
P(A) + P(B) = 0.8 f(1) = f(2) = f (3) = 0
1 – P( A ) + 1 – P ( B ) = 0.8 f(x) is not one–one.
For each y R, there exists x R such that
– [P( A ) + P( B )] = 0.8 – 2 f (x) = y.
P( A ) + P( B ) = 1.2 f is onto.
Note that if a continuous function has more
R sin than one roots, then the function is always
84. (b) Q =
sin( ) many–one.
Also, (5P) = (4P)2 + (3P)2
2 89. (c) Let z1, z2 and z3 be affixes of points A, B
+ 2 (4P) (3P) cos ( + ) and C, respectively. Since, z1, z2 and z3 are
25P2 = 16p2 + 9P2 + 24P2 cos ( + ) in AP, therefore
24P2 cos ( + ) = 0 2z2 = z1 + z3
cos ( + ) = 0 = cos90° z1 z 3
+ = 90° z2 =
2
4P So, B is the mid–point of the line AC.
A, B and C are collinear.
z1, z2 and z3 lie on a line.
R 1
5P 90. (c) x = 1 + a+ a2 + ... =
1 a
1
3P y = 1 + b + b2 + .... =
1 b
5P sin 1
Now, 4P = and z = 1 + c + c2 + .... =
sin 90 1 c
Since, a, b and c are in AP.
4
sin = 1 – a, 1 – b and 1 – c are also in AP.
5
1 1 1
4 , and are in HP..
= sin–1 1 a 1 b 1 c
5
x, y and z are in HP.
85. (b) 2 tan–1 (cos x) = tan –1 (2 cosec x) Note that if the common ratio of a GP is not
less than 1, then we do not determined the
2 cos x
tan–1 = tan–1 (2 cosec x) sum of an infinite GP that series.
1 cos 2 x 91. (a) Let f(x) = – 3 + x – x2
Then, f(x) < 0 for all x because coefficient of
2cos x x2 < 0 and disc < 0. Thus, LHS of the given
= 2 cosec x
1 cos 2 x equation is always positive whereas the
RHS is always less than zero.
2 cos x
= 2 cosec x Hence, the given equation has no solution.
sin 2 x Alternate Solution :
Given, equation is
sinx = cos x x= 9
4
= –3 + x – x2
86. (d) Given conditions are a + x = 1 and ax = 0. 10
These two conditions will be true, if x = a .
Solved Paper 2012 2012-23
In ABE,
Y
150
tan =
d
d = 150 cot
y= 9
10 2
= 150 × = 60 m
X X 5
In DCE,
h
y = – 3 + x – x2 tan =
d
4 h 4
Y h 60 h = 80 m
3 d 3
Now in DCE,
9 DE2 = DC2 + CE2
Let y = , therefore
10 x2 = 602 + 802 = 10000
y = –3 + x – x2 x = 100 m
94. (a) Given equation x2 + px + q = 0 has roots
1 1
y= x2 x 3 and 2.
4 4 Sum = + 2 = –p and Product = 3 = q
2 ( + 1) = –p
11 1 3 [ 3 + 1 + 3 ( + 1)] = – p3
y+ x
4 2 q (q + 1 – 3p) = –p3
It is clear from the graph that two curves do p3 – (3p – 1) q + q2 = 0
not intersect. Hence, no solution exists. 100
100
92. (c) The centre of the required circle lies at the 95. (c) C m (x 3)100 m
.2m
intersection of 2x – 3y – 5 = 0 and 3x – 4y – m 0
7 = 0. Thus, the coordinates of the centre Above expansion can be rewritten as
are (1, –1). [(x – 3) + 2]100 = (x – 1)100 = (1 – x)100
Let r be the radius of the circle. x53 will occur in T54.
r2 = 154 T54 = 100C53 (–x)53
22 2 Required coefficient is – 100C53.
r = 154 r = 7 96. (b) Equation of family of concentric circles to
7
the circle x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y – 5 = 0 is
Hence, the equation of required circle is
x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y + = 0
(x –1)2 + (y + 1)2 = 72
which is similar to
x2 + y2 – 2x + 2y – 47 = 0
x2 + y2 + 2gx + 2fy + c = 0
4 5 Thus, the point (–3, 2) lies on the cirlce
93. (d) Given : tan = and tan = x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y + c = 0
3 2
(–3)2 + (2)2 + 6(–3) + 8 (2) + c = 0
E 9 + 4 – 18 + 16 + c = 0 c = –11
97. (a) a = i + j + k, b = i + 3j + 5k
and c = 7i + 9j + 11k
x h Let A = a + b
= (i + j + k) + (i + 3j + 5k)
150 m = 2i + 4j + 6k
D
d C and B = b + c
= (i + 3j +5k) + (7i + 9j + 11k)
= 8i + 12j + 16k
A d B Area of parallelogram
EBD_7443
2012-24 Target VITEEE
dy n2 n(n 1)(2n 1)
2x – 2y =0 = =
dx n! 6n!
dy x
= 1 2n 3 3n 2 n
dx y =
6 n!
The two curves will cut at right angles, if
dy dy 1 n3 3n 2 n
= –1 = 2.
dx c1 dx c2 6 n! n! n!
Sum of the series
b2 x x
. = –1
a2y y 1 n3 n2 n
= 2 3
6 n 1 n! n 1 n! n 1
n!
x2 y2
a2 b2 1
= (2 5e 3 2e e)
6
x2 y2 1
1 17
a 2
b 2 2 = (10e 6e e) e
6 6
Solved Paper 2012 2012-27
a b c 1
1, 2, 3
3 3 3 1 x2
= lim
a = 3, b = 6, c = 9 x 1
tan x
Hence, the equation of the plane is 2
x y z
=1 (using L ‘Hospitals’ rule)
3 6 9
114. (c) Required area 2x
(1 x 2 )2
Y = lim
x 1
x = 3y 1 x2
(using L Hospital’s rule)
X X 2x
O
= lim =0 y = e° = 1
2 2
x 1 x2
x +y =4
116. (c) f(x) is continuous at x = .
2
Y
So, lim f (x) lim f (x)
1 x x
= (x 2 x1 )dy 2 2
0
1
= ( 4 y2 3y) dy m 1 sin n
0 2 2
1 m
1 2 1 1 y 3y 2 m 1 1 n =n
= 2y 4 y 2
(4)sin
2 2
2 2
0
EBD_7443
2012-28 Target VITEEE
4 x2 3
117. (c) f(x) = 2 2
dy
sin 1 (2 x) 1
dx
2
4 x 2 is defined for 4 – x 0. 119. (a) =
d2 y
x2 4
–2 x 2 dx 2
and sin–1 (2 – x) is defined for –1 2 – x 1
–3 – x – 1 2 3/ 2
d2 y dy
1 x 3 1
Also, sin–1 (2 – x) = 0 for x = 2 dx 2 dx
Domain of f (x) = [–2 , 2] [1, 3] – {2} On squaring both sides, we get
= [1, 2)
118. (c) (1 + y2) dx + (1 + x2) dy = 0
2 2 3
2 d2y dy
1
dx dy dx 2 dx
=0
1 x 2 1 y2 Clearly, it is a second order differential
On integrating, we get equation of degree 2.
tan–1 x + tan–1 y = tan –1 C Note that the higher order derivative is in
x y the transcendental, then we do not
=C determined the degree of that equation.
1 xy 120. (b) Let R = {(a, b) : a, b N, a – b = 3}
x + y = C (1 – xy) = [{(n + 3), n} : n N]
= {(4, 1), (5, 2), (6, 3), ...}
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2011
CH2 — C — CH3 O
||
(d) SeO 2
OH 52. CH 3 C CH 3 X Se H 2 O : X
46. The alcohol having molecular formula C4H9OH,
when shaken with a mixture of anhydrous ZnCl2 O O O
and conc. HCl gives an oily layer product after || || ||
(a) CH 3 C C H (b) CH3 C OCH3
five minutes. The alcohol is
(a) H3C — (CH2)3 — OH
O
(b) (CH3)2CH — CH2OH ||
(c) (CH3)3C — OH (c) CH3 C CH2OH (d) None of the above
(d) H3C — CH(OH) CH2 — CH3 53. Which of the following will give Cannizzaro
47. p-toluidine and benzyl amine can be distinguished reaction?
by
(a) CH3CHO (b) CH3COCH3
(a) Sandmeyer's reaction
(b) Dye test (c) (CH3)3C – CHO (d) CH3CH2CHO
(c) Molisch test 54. The secondary structure of a protein refers to
(d) Gattermann reaction (a) -helical backbone
48. CH3CH2Br undergoes Wurtz reaction. We may (b) hydrophobic interactions
expect some of the following product (c) sequence of -amino acids
A : CH3CH2CH2CH3
(d) fixed configuration of the polypeptide
B : CH2 = CH2
backbone
C : CH3 — CH3
55. Self condensation of two moles of ethyl acetate
Select correct product.
in the presence of sodiumethoxide after
(a) Only A (b) A and B
acidification yields
(c) A, B and C (d) A and C
49. Sometimes explosion occurs while distilling (a) acetic acid (b) acetoacetic ester
ethers. It is due to the presence of (c) ethyl propionate (d) ethyl butyrate
(a) peroxides (b) oxides 56. Which one of the following will be most basic?
(c) ketones (d) aldehydes (a) Aniline (b) p-methoxyaniline
50. Glycerine is used as a preservative for fruits and (c) p-methyl aniline (d) Benzylamine
eatables because
57. Mn2O7 dissolves in water to give an acid. The
(a) it makes them sweet
colour of the acid is
(b) it acts as an insecticide
(a) green (b) blue
(c) it keeps the food moist
(d) all of the above (c) purple (d) red
58. "925 fine silver" means an alloy of
OH OH OH
(a) 7.5% Ag and 92.5% Cu
CH2OH
51. HCHO
OH
+ (b) 92.5% Ag and 7.5% Cu
or H
(c) 80% Ag and 20% Cu
(d) 90% Ag and 10% Cu
EBD_7443
2011-6 Target VITEEE
59. In which of the following octahedral complexes (a) 75 cm3 (b) 125 cm3
(c) 150 cm 3 (d) 250 cm3
of Co (At. no. 27), will the magnitude of 0 be the
highest? 67. 20 mL of 0.2 M NaOH is added to 50 mL of 0.2 M
(a) [Co(CN)6]3– (b) [Co(C2O4)3]3– acetic acid. The pH of this solution after mixing is
(c) [Co(H2O)6] 3+ (d) [Co(NH3)6]3+ (Ka = 1.8 × 10–5)
(a) 4.5 (b) 2.3
60. Assertion (A) Cu and Cd2+ are separated by
2+
(c) 3.8 (d) 4
first adding KCN solution and then passing H2S 68. Consider the followin g equation, which
gas. represents a reaction in the extraction of chromium
Reason (R) KCN reduces Cu2+ to Cu+ and forms from its ore
a complex with it. 2Fe2O3 . Cr2O3 + 4Na2CO3 + 3O2
The correct answer is
(a) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the 2Fe 2 O 3 4Na 2 CrO 4 4CO 2
correct explanation of (A) Which one of the following statements about the
(c) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not the oxidation states of the substances is correct?
correct explanation of (A) (a) The iron has been reduced from +3 to +2
(c) (A) is true but (R) is not true state.
(d) (A) is not true but (R) is true (b) The chromium has been oxidised from +3 to
61. The effective atomic number of cobalt in the +6 state.
(c) The carbon has been oxidised from +2 to +4
complex [Co(NH3)6]3+ is
state.
(a) 36 (b) 24 (d) There is no change in the oxidation state of
(c) 33 (d) 30 the substances in the reaction.
62. The IUPAC name for th e complex 69. The freezing point of a solution composed of 10.0
[Co(NO2)(NH3)5]Cl2 is g of KCl in 100 g of water is 4.5ºC. Calculate the
(a) nitrito-N-pentammine cobalt (III) chloride van't Hoff factor, i for this solution.
(b) nitrito-N-pentammine cobalt (II) chloride (a) 2.50 (b) 1.8
(c) pentaminenitrito-N-cobalt (II) chloride (c) 1.2 (d) 1.3
(d) pentaminenitrito-N-cobalt (III) chloride 70. In the reversible reaction,
63. The radio-isotope used for treatment of thyroid k1
2NO 2 N 2O 4
disorders is k2
(a) Na-24 (b) P-32 the rate of disappearance of NO2 is equal to
(c) Co-60 (d) I-131
2k1 2
64. Tetragonal crystal system has the following unit (a) NO 2
cell dimensions k2
(a) a = b = c, = = = 90º (b) 2k1[NO2]2 – 2k2[N2O4]
(b) a = b c, = = = 90º (c) 2k1[NO2]2 – k2[N2O4]
(c) a b c, = = = 120º (d) (2k1 – k2) [NO2]
71. A chemical reaction was carried out at 300 K and
(d) a = b c, = = 90º, = 120º
280 K. The rate constants were found to be k l and
65. A crystalline solid k2 respectively. Then
(a) changes rapidly from solid to liquid (a) k2 = 4kl (b) k2 = 2kl
(b) has no definite melting point (c) k2 = 0.25 kl (d) k2 = 0.5 kl
(c) undergoes deformation of its geometry 72. The rate constant of a reaction at temperature
easily 200 K is 10 times less than the rate constant at
(d) soften easily 400 K. What is the activation energy of the
66. Two glass bulbs A and B are connected by a very reaction?
small tube having a stop-cock. Bulb A has a volume (a) 1842.4 R (b) 460.6 R
of 100 cm3 and contained the gas while bulb B (c) 230.3 R (d) 921.2 R
was empty. On opening stop-clock, the pressure 73. A vessel at 1000 K contains CO2 with a pressure
fell down to 40%. The volume of the bulb B must of 0.5 atm. Some of the CO2 is converted into CO
be on the addition of graphite. The value of K if the
total pressure at equilibrium is 0.8 atm, is
Solved Paper 2011 2011-7
104. If , and are the roots of x3 + ax2 +b = 0, then (c) both p and q are true
(d) None of the above
113. In how many ways 6 letters be posted in 5
the value of is different letter boxes?
(a) 56 (b) 65
(c) 5! (d) 6!
(a) –a3 (b) a3–3b 114. If A and B be two sets such that A×B consists of
(c) a3 (d) a2–3b 6 elements. If three elements A × B are (1, 4), (2, 6)
105. If the axes are shifted to the point (1, –2) without and (3, 6), find B×A.
solution, then the equation 2x2 + y2 – 4x + 4y = 0 (a) {(1, 4), (1, 6), (2, 4), (2, 6),(3, 4), (3, 6)}
becomes (b) {(4, 1), (4, 2), (4, 3), (6, 1),(6, 2), (6, 3)}
(a) 2X2+3Y2 = 6 (b) 2X2 + Y2=6
(c) {(4, 4), (6, 6)}
(c) X2 + 2Y2 = 6 (d) None of these
(d) {(4, 1), (6, 2), (6, 3)}
x2 , x 0 115. Let f : R R be defined as f (x) = x2+1, find f –1(–5).
106. If f(x)= , then x = 0 is
2sin x, x 0
(a) (b)
(a) point of minima
(b) point of maxima (c) {5} (d) {–5, 5}
(c) point of discontinuity 116. If X is a poisson variate such that P(X = 1)
(d) None of the above = P(X = 2), then P(X=4) is equal to
107. In a group (G,*), then equation x * a = b has a 1 1
(a) 2 (b)
(a) unique solution b * a 1
2e 3e 2
(b) unique solution a 1 * b 2 1
(c) 2 (d)
(c) unique solution a 1 * b 1 3e e2
(d) many solutions 117. The area enclosed by y = 3x – 5, y = 0, x = 3 and
108. A die is rolled twice and the sum of the numbers x = 5 is
appearing on them is observed to be 7. What is (a) 12 sq units (b) 13 sq units
the conditional probability that the number 2 has 1
appeared at least once? (c) 13 sq units (d) 14 sq units
2
1 1 2 2 118. The order and degree of the differential equation
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2 3 3 5 2/3
dy d2y
109. The locus of the mid-points of the focal chord of 1 4 4 are respectively
dx dx 2
the parabola y 2 4ax is
(a) y2 = a(x – a) (b) y2 =2a(x – a) 2
(a) 1, (b) 3, 2
2
(c) y = 4a(x – a) (d) None of these 3
110. Find the value of sin 12° sin 48° sin 54° .
2
1 1 (c) 2, 3 (d) 2,
(a) (b) 3
2 4 119. The solution of the differential equation
1 1 dy 2
(c) (d) 4 x y 1 , is
6 8 dx
111. In an equilateral triangle, the inradius, (a) (4x + y + 1) = tan (2x+ C)
circumradius and one of the exradii are in the (b) (4x + y +1)2 = 2tan (2x + C)
ratio (c) (4x + y +1)3 = 3tan (2x + C)
(a) 2 : 3 : 5 (b) 1 : 2 : 3 (d) (4x + y + 1) = 2tan (2x + C)
(c) 1 : 3 : 7 (d) 3 : 7 : 9 120. The system of equations 2x + y –5=0,
112. Let p and q be two statements. Then, p q is x – 2y + 1 = 9, 2x –14y – a = 0, is consistent. Then,
false, if a is equal to
(a) p is false and q is true (a) 1 (b) 2
(b) both p and q are false (c) 5 (d) None of these
EBD_7443
2011-10 Target VITEEE
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) 5. (a) Here length l = 1 cm = 10 –2 m
Area of cross-section, A = 1 cm × 100 cm
1. (b) As charge on glass rod is +(ve) so charge = 10 –2 m2
on gold leaves will also be +(ve). Due to 1 cm
X-rays more electrons from leaves will be
emitted, so leaves becomes more positive 1 cm
and diverge further. 100 cm
2. (b) In figure there is the schematic diagram of 2
10
distribution of charges on x-axis Resistance, R = = 3 × 10 –7 ×
A 10 2
= 3 × 10 –7
6. (d) The current in the circuit will be clockwise
1C 1 C 1 C 1 C 1 C Since E1 (10 V) > E2 (4V)
x=1 x=2 x=3 x=8 1C E1 e E2 2
a b
10 V 4V
Using principle of superposition total force
acting on 1 C charge
6 6
1 1 1 10 1 1 10 3
F
4 0 (1)2 (2) 2
Applying Kirchhoff’s junction rule
6 6
1 1 10 1 1 10 –1 × i – 10 – 4 × –2 × i –3i = 0
...
(4)2 (8)2 i = 1A (a to b via e)
V 10 4
10 6
1 1 1 1 Current I = = =1A
... R 6
4 0 1 4 16 64
V 2 220 220
7. (a) Power P = = = 484 W
R 100
1 8. (b) When switched off, resistance of an
6
9 10 109 incandescent lamp increases.
1
1 9. (d) Using Faraday’s law of electrolysis,
4
Mass m = Zit
4 = 0.216 × 10 – 3 × 5 × 3600
9 109 10 6
12000 N
3 = 2.27 g
3. (a) Here, net flux is zero, as there is no charge 10. (c) P = 100 W and V = 125 V
residing inside the cube.
P 100
4. (a) Energy released on discharge of capacitor P = VI I= = A
V 125
1 Mass of chlorine liberated = zit
U CV 2
2
100
1 = 0.367 × 10– 6 × × 60 = 17.6 mg
= × 4 × 10 – 6 × (100)2 = 0.02J 125
2
Solved Paper 2011 2011-11
3 t Q
24. (d) Here, N0 = N0e Charge on capacitor, C =
5 V
t 5 CV
e Charge on capacitor of capacity C =
3 2
30. (a) It is a parallel combination of three
log e t = loge 5 or
t = loge
5 resistances, each of 10 .
3 3 The effective resistance between
points A and B.
or t = 1 loge 5
3 1 1 1 1
T 0.693 R 10 10 10
= 0.5 T
0.693 10
or R
5570 0.5 3
yr 4018.7 yrs 31. (b) Here, E1 64
0.693
E1 – E2 8
25. (d) Field inside the metallic shell is zero.
E2 l
26. (b) Potential at A
64 – l = 8 or l = 64 –8 = 56 cm
q q
0 B2
2 2
a b a b2 2
32. (b) Emag =
2 0
27. (a) Potential difference between two points in
an electric field k
33. (c) is independent of
W
VA – VB =
q0 GI g
where W is work done by moving charge 34. (a) Shunt S = I I
g
q0 from point A to B
Here, W = 2J, q0 = 20 c 0.81 1 0.81
= 0.09
10 1 9
2
VA – VB = = 0.1 volt E
20 35. (a) Final current, I = =10 A
R
1 Qmax Energy stored in the magnetic field
28. (b) Maximum electric field, Emax
4 0 R2
1
U= Li
9
9 10 Qmax 2
3 × 106 =
2.5 2.5 1
× 5 × (10)2 = 250 J
3 10 6 2.5 2.5 2
or Qmax
9 109 36. (a) A
Z X 4
2 He A 2
Z 2 Y
= 2×10 – 3 C A 4
Y e A 4
Y'
Z 2 Z 3
29. (a) In parallel combination, the potential + emission.
difference across each individual capacitor During
1 1 +
is the same as the potenital difference across 1p 0n +
the combination. The proton changes into neutron. So,
So, potential difference across capacitor of charge number decreases by 1 but mass
number remains unchanged.
V
capacity C is .
2
Solved Paper 2011 2011-13
42. (b) The electronic configuration of Ni is 46. (d) Secondary alcohol, when shaken with a
mixture of anthydrous ZnCl2 and conc. HCl
Ni(28) = [Ar] 3d8, 4s2
(Lucas regent) gives an oily layer product
Ni2+ = [Ar] 3d 8 after five minutes.
Both Ni and Ni 2+ have two unpaired
electrons. Lucas
reagent
CO and CN– are strong field ligands and H3C CH CH 2 CH3
thus unpaired electrons get paired. Hence, |
Ni(CO)4 and [Ni(CN)4]2– are diamagnetic. OH
Cl– is a weak field ligand hence, no pairing oily layer product after 5 min.
The amines in which amino group is directly
of e– will take place. hence NiCl 24 is attached to benzene ring undergo
paramagnetic. diazotisation reaction.
EBD_7443
2011-14 Target VITEEE
47. (b) p-toluidine contains amino group attached
directly to benzene ring, thus undergo O O O
|| || ||
diazotisation reaction and gives red dye. In SeO 2
CH3 C CH3 CH3 C C H
benzyl amine, the amino group is not
directly attached to benzene ring. Hence, it
will not undergo diazotisation reaction. Se H 2O
53. (c) Aldehydes which have no -H atom give
NH2
Cannizzaro’s reaction, (CH3)3C – CHO does
CH2NH2
not contain -H atom, hence it will give
Cannizzaro reaction.
CH3
CH3
benzyl amine 2CH3 C CHO + KOH
p-toluidine
|
Thus, these two can be distinguished by CH3
dye test.
CH3 CH3
48. (c) C2H5Br + Na• CH3CH 2 + NaBr |
CH3 C CH2OH + CH3— C — COOK
Intermediate free radical CH 3CH 2 | |
combines to form CH3CH2 – CH2CH3 (as a CH3 OH
main product) and also CH2 == CH2 and
54. (a) Secondary structure involves -helical and
CH3CH3 by disproportion
-pleated sheet like structure. Where as
CH3CH 2 + CH3CH 2 CH3CH2 – CH2CH3 Primary strucure involves sequence of
n-butane -amino acids polypeptide chain.
CH3CH 2 + CH3CH 2 CH2 CH2 + CH3 – CH3 55. (b)
(disproportion reaction)
NaOC2 H5
2CH3 COOC2 H5 CH3COCHNaCOOC2H 5
49. (a) Ethers, In the presence of air and light form
peroxides +HCl
50. (c) Glycerine is used as a preservative because
it keeps the fruit moist. CH3COCH2COOC2H5
51. (b) acetoacetic ester
OH OH
– + CH2OH 56. (d) In aniline, p-methoxyaniline and p-methyl
OH or H aniline, the lone pair of electrons on the N-
+ HCHO
(Lederer - Menasse atom is delocalised on the benzene ring
reaction) while in benzylamine it is delocalised, and
more available for donation. Hence
OH
benzylamine is most basic among the given.
57. (c) Mn 2 O 7 dissolves in water to give
+
permanganic acid which is purple in colour.
Mn2O7 + H2O 2HMnO4
CH2OH Purple
52. (a) In presence of SeO2 compounds containing 58. (b) “925 fine silver” means 925 parts of pure
active methylene (i.e., CH2 next to the Ag in 1000 parts of an alloy. Therefore, in
carbonyl group) oxidises to another CO terms of percentage, it will be 92.5% Ag
group. and 7.5% Cu.
Solved Paper 2011 2011-15
Hence, H f is positive. x 2 y2 xy
...(i)
a b h
77. (b) C3H8(g) + 5O2(g) 3CO2(g) + 4H2O(l)
And the equation of the bisectors of the
ng = np – nr angle between the lines given by
= 3 – 6 = –3 a2x2 + 2h (a + b) xy + b2y2 = 0 is
H = E + ngRT
H = E – 3RT x2 y2 xy
2 2 h(a b)
H – E = –3RT a b
78. (a) G= H–T S
x2 y2 x
For a spontaneous reaction, G should be ...(ii)
negative. Hence, H = +ve, S = +ve and a b h
T S> H From eqs. (i) and (ii), it is clear that both
79. (b) Gas (Y) SO2 which can be obtained from the pair of straight lines have the same
Na2SO3(A) and gas (Z) is H2S which can be bisector, hence, the given two pairs of
obtained from Na2S(B). straight lines are equally inclined.
This can be easily understood by the 82. (c) A = {1, 2, 3, 4} and B = {1, 3, 5}
following reactions. R = {(1, 3), (1, 5), (2, 3), (2, 5), (3, 5), (4, 5)}
and R–1 = {(3, 1), (5, 1), (3, 2), (5, 2), (5, 3),
Na2SO3 + 2HCl 2NaCl + SO2 + H2O
(5, 4)}
(A) (Y) ROR–1 = {(3, 3), (3, 5), (5, 3), (5, 5)}
Na2S + 2HCl 2NaCl + H2S
100
(B) (Z) 1 i 3
83. (c) (1 i 3)100 2100
K2Cr2O7 + H2SO4 + 3SO2 K2SO4 2 2
+ Cr2(SO4)3 + H2O
= 2100 100
= 2100
Pb(CH3COO)2 + H2S PbS + 2CH3COOH
black 100 1 3i 99
80. (d) Higher the bond order higher will be the =2 =–2 299 3i
2 2
stability.
When the bond order of two molecules are Now, x + iy = (1 i 3)100
same, the molecule with least number of
antibonding electrons is more stable. = 299 299 3i
Molecular orbital configuration of H2+ is x = –299, y = 299 3
H+2 (1) = 1s1 (x, y) = (–299, –299 3)
Solved Paper 2011 2011-17
84. (a) Given, an = 3 (2 ) n 89. (b) The centres of the given circles x + y2 = 4 2
I= 1/ 3
t2 (2 2 )2 0.005
=2 1
8
1 1 t
= tan C
2 2 2 2 1 0.005
=2 1 = 2 [1 – 0.000208]
3 8
4
x = 1.9996
1 1 x
I tan C
2 2 2 2 x2 1
98. (b) lim ax b = 0
x x 1
2
1 x 4
= tan 1 C x 2 (1 a) (a b)x b 1
2 2 2x 2 lim
x x 1 =0
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 cos x
93. (a) dx dx 1 – a = 0 and a + b = 0 a = 1, b = –1
/4 1 cos x /4 sin 2 x 99. (b) Let a = i – 2j + k and b = 4i – 4j + 7k, then
3 /4 projection of a on b is equal to
= (cosec2 x – cot x cosec x ) dx
/4
a.b 4 8 7 19
3 /4 =
= cot x cosec x |b| 16 16 49 9
/4
100. (a) Here, a + b + c = 0
= (1 2) ( 1 2) = 2 |a + b + c|2 = 0
94. (b) Let a and b are two numbers. |a|2 + |b|2 + |c|2 + 2 {a.b + b.c + c.a} = 0
a b a.b + b.c + c.a
Then, A = ...(i)
2 1
=– {|a|2 + |b|2 + |c|2} < 0
2
Also, a, p, q, b are in GP. m<0
p q b 101. (a) Let is the required angle, then
a p q cos245° + cos2 60° + cos2 = 1
1 1
p2 q2 cos2 =1
= a and =b 2 4
q p
3 1
2 2 cos2 = 1 –
p q 4 4
= a + b = 2A [Using eq. (i)]
q p 1
95. (b) f(x) = x2 + ax + b, then cos = = 60°
2
f(x + c) = (x + c)2 + a (x + c) + b
= x2 + (2c + a) x + c2 + ac + b cos sin
which shows that the roots of f (x) 102. (a) B= sin cos
are transformed to (x – c) i.e., roots of
f (x + c) = 0 are c – c and d – c. cos 0 0 sin
Hence, one of the roots of the equation = 0 cos sin 0
f(x + c) is (d – c).
96. (a) For the sum of the coefficients in the 1 0 0 1
expansion of (6a – 5b)n, put a = b = 1 = cos sin
Sum of the coefficients = (6 – 5)n 0 1 1 0
= 1n = 1 = I cos + J sin
Solved Paper 2011 2011-19
103. (c) According to the definition of determinant, 109. (b) Any chord PQ which bisected point
determinant is a number associated to a R (h, k) is T = S
square matrix. i.e., ky – 2a (x + h) = k2 – 4ah
104. (c) are the roots of given equation, Since, it is a focal chord, so it must pass
Therefore + + = – a through focus (a, 0).
+ + =0 k (0) – 2a (a + h) = k2 – 4ah
and = –b k2 = 2ah – 4a2
Hence, locus is
y2 = 2a (x – a)
Now, =–( + + ) 110. (d) sin 12° sin 48° sin 54°
= sin 12° sin (60° – 12°) sin (90° – 36°)
( 2+ 2+ 2– – ) sin12 sin(60 12 ) sin 72 cos 36
= – ( + + ) [( + + )2 =
sin 72
– 3( + + )]
= – (–a) (a2 – 0) = a3 [sin12 sin(60 12 )sin(60 12 )cos36 ]
=
105. (b) Substituting x = X + 1 and y = Y – 2 in sin 72
given equation, we get
2 (X + 1)2 + (Y – 2)2 – 4(X + 1) + 4 (Y – 2) = 0 sin12 (sin 2 60 sin 2 12 ) cos 36
=
2X2 + Y2 = 6 sin 72
x2 , x 0 3
106. (a) Given f (x) = sin12 sin 2 12 cos36
2sin x, x 0, 4
=
sin 72
2x, x 0
non differentiable, x 0 3sin12 4sin3 12 ) cos 36
f (x) = = .
4 sin 72
2 cos x, x 0
So, x = 0 is a critical point f(0 ) > 0 as well as
– sin 36 cos 36 1 sin 72 1
= =
f (0+) > 0 and f (0) = 0 4 sin 72 2 4sin 72 8
Hence, it is a point of minima.
107. (a) x * a = b (x * a) * a–1 = b * a–1 3 2 3a
111. (b) We have, = a ,s
x *(a * a–1) = b * a–1 4 2
x *e = b * a–1
a
x = b * a–1 Inradius r =
108. (b) Let A and B be two events such that s 2 3
A= getting number 2 at least once
B = getting 7 as the sum of the numbers on abc a3 a
Circumradius R = 2
two dice 4 3a 3
Here,
A = {(2, 1), (2, 2), (2, 3), (2, 4), (2, 5), (2, 6), 3 / 4a 2
(1, 2), (3, 2), (4, 2), (5, 2), (6, 2)} and exradii r1 =
s a a/2
and
B = {(2, 5), (5, 2), (6, 1), (1, 6), (3, 4), (4, 3)} 3
= a
11 6 2
P(A) = , P(B) = Required ratio = r : R : r 1
36 36
2 a a 3
P(A B) = : : a = 1 : 2 : 3.
36 2 3 3 2
Required probability 112. (b) p q is false only when both p and q are
P(A B) 2 / 36 2 1 false.
P (A/B) =
P(B) 6 / 36 6 3
EBD_7443
2011-20 Target VITEEE
113. (a) Since, each letter can be posted in any one 3
2
of the five different letter boxes. So, a letter dy 3 d2 y
can be posted in 5 ways. Since, there are 1 4 4
dx dx 2
six letters and each can be posted in 5 ways.
So, total number of ways Here, order is 2 and degree is 3.
= 5 × 5 × 5 × 5 × 5 × 5 = 56 dy
114. (b) Since, (1, 4), (2, 6) and (3, 6) are the elements 119. (d) = (4x + y + 1)2 …(i)
dx
of A × B, therefore 1, 2, 3 are the elements
Put 4x + y + 1 = v
of A and 4, 6 are the elements of B.
Also, A × B has 6 elements dy dv
4
A = {1, 2, 3} dx dx
and B = {4, 6}
B × A = {(4, 1), (4, 2), (4, 3), (6, 1), (6, 2), dv
4 = v2 ( From eq. (i))
(6, 3)} dx
115. (b) Let f –1 (–5) = x. Then, f (x) = – 5 dv
x2 + 1 = – 5 x2 = –6 x = ± dx
6 v 2
4
which does not belong to R.
f –1 (–5) = 1 1 v
tan x C
116. (c) Given : P (X = 1) = P (X = 2) 2 2
2
e e 4x y 1
1
tan 2x C
1! 2! 2
=2 4x + y + 1 = 2 tan (2x + C)
2 4 120. (d) Given system of equations are
e 2 2
P (X = 4) = 2x + y – 5 = 0 ...(i)
4! 3e2 x – 2y + 1 = 0 ...(ii)
5 and 2x – 14y – a = 0 ...(iii)
117. (d) Required area = (3x 5)dx This system is consistent
3
5 2 1 5
3x 2 75 27 1 2 1 =0
= 2 5x = 25 15
2 2 2 14 a
3
P (c) (d)
12 0 16 0
i 18. Sinusoidal carrier voltage of frequency 1.5 MHz
and amplitude 50 V is amplitude modulated by
sinusoidal voltage of frequency 10 kHz producing
50% modulation. The lower and upper side-band
2 0i 0i frequencies in kHz are
(a) (b)
l 4 l (a) 1490, 1510 (b) 1510, 1490
1 1 1 1
2 0i 0i (c) , (d) ,
(c) (d) 1490 1510 1510 1490
8 l 2 2 l
13. Zener diode is used for 19. 50 and 100 resistors are connected in series.
(a) producing oscillations in an oscillator This connection is connected with a battery of
(b) amplification 2.4 V. When a voltmeter of 100 resistance is
(c) stabilisation connected across 100 resistor, then the
(d) rectification reading of the voltmeter will be
14. Two light sources are said to be coherent if they (a) 1.6V (b) 1.0V
are obtained from (c) 1.2V (d) 2.0V
(a) two independent point sources emitting 20. In space charge limited region, the plate current
in a diode is 10 mA for plate voltage 150V. If the
light of the same wavelength
plate voltagte is increased to 600V, then the plate
(b) a single point source
current will be
(c) a wide source
(a) 10 mA (b) 40 mA
(d) two ordinary bulbs emitting light of (c) 80 mA (d) 160 mA
different wavelengths
Solved Paper 2010 2010-3
21. Light of wavelength strikes a photo-sensitive 27. Using an AC voltmeter the potential difference
surface and electrons are ejected with kinetic in the electrical line in a house is read to be 234V.
energy E. If the kinetic energy is to be increased If line frequency is known to be 50 cycles/s, the
to 2E, the wavelength must be changed to equation for the line voltage is
wher
(a) V=165sin (100 t)
(a) (b) (b) V=331sin (100 t)
2
2 (c) V=220sin (100 t)
(d) V=440sin (100 t)
(c) (d)
2 28. There are a 25W – 220 V bulb and a 100W–220V
22. The maximum velocity of electrons emitted from line.Which eletric bulb will glow more brightly?
a metal surface is v, when frequency of light (a) 25W bulb
falling on it is f. The maximum velocity when
(b) 100W bulb
frequency becomes 4f is
(a) 2v (b) > 2v (c) Both will have equal incadescene
(c) < 2v (d) between 2v and 4v (d) Neither 25 W nor 100 W bulb will give light
23. The collector plate in an experiment on 29. Silver has a work function of 4.7 eV. When
photoelectric effect is kept vertically above the ultraviolet light of wavelength 100 nm is incident
emitter plate. Light source is put on and a upon it , potential of 7.7 V is required to stop
saturation photo-current is recorded. An electric photoelectrons from reaching the collector plate.
field is switched on which has a vertically The potential required to stop electrons when
downward direction, then light of wavelength 200 nm is incident upon silver
(a) the photo-current will increase
is
(b) the kinetic energy of the electrons will
increase (a) 1.5V (b) 1.85V
(c) the stopping potential will decrease (c) 1.95V (d) 2.37V
(d) the threshold wavelength will increase 30. Two particles X and Y having equal charges, after
24. A cylindrical conductor of radius R carries a being accelerated through the same potential
current i. The value of magnetic field at a point difference, enter a region of uniform magnetic
R field and describe circular paths of radii R1 and
which is distance inside from the surface is R2, Respectively. The ratio of masses of X and Y
4
10 T. The value of magnetic field at point which is
is 4R distance outside from the surface (a) (R1/R2)–2 (b) (R2/R1)
(c) (R1/R2) 2 (d) (R1/R2)
4 8
(a) T (b) T 31. According to the Bohr's theory of hydrogen
3 3
atom, the speed of the electron, energy and the
40 80 radius of its orbit vary with the principal quantum
(c) T (d) T
3 3 number n, respectively, as
25. The power of a thin convex lens (ang= 1.5) is
5.0 D. When it is placed in a liquid of refractive 1 1 2 1 2 1
(a) , ,n (b) ,n , 2
index an , then it behaves as a concave lens of n n2 n n
focal length 100cm. The refractive index of the
liquid anl will be 1 1 1
(c) n2 , , n2 (d) n, 2 , 2
(a) 5/3 (b) 4/3 n 2
n n
(c) 3 (d) 5/4 32. In the hydrogen atom, the electron is making
26. Find the value of magnetic field between plates 6.6 × 1015 rps. If the radius of orbit is 0.53 × 10–10 m,
of capacitor at a distance 1m from centre, where then magnetic field produced at the centre of
electric field varies by 1010 V/m per second. the orbit is
(a) 5.56×10-8T (b) 5.56×10-3T (a) 140T (b) 12.5T
(c) 5.56 T (d) 5.55T (c) 1.4T (d) 0.14T
EBD_7443
2010-4 Target VITEEE
33. Two identical light sources S1 and S2 emit light 39. An AM wave has 1800 W of total power content.
of same wavelength . These light rays will For 100% modulation the carrier should have
exhibit interference if power content equal to
(a) their phase differences remain constant (a) 1000 W (b) 1200 W
(b) their phases are distributed randomly (c) 1500 W (d) 1600 W
(c) their light intensities remain constant 40. Two light rays having the same wavelength in
(d) their light intensities change randomly vacuum are in phase initially. Then the first ray
34. In Meter bridge or Wheatstone bridge for travels a path l1 through a medium of refractive
measurement of resistance, the known and the index n1 while the second ray travels a path of
unknown resistances are interchanged. The error length l2 through a medium of refractive index
so removed is n2. The two waves are then combined to observe
(a) end correction interference. The phase difference between the
(b) index error two waves is
(c) due to temperature effect 2 2
(d) random error (a) l2 l1 (b) n1l2 n2 l1
35. A fish, looking up through the water, sees the
outside world contained in a circular horizon. If 2 2 l1 l2
the refractive index of water is 4/3 and the fish is (c) n2 l2 n1l1 (d) n1 n2
12cm below the surface of water, the radius of
the circle in centimetre is
PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
12 3
(a) (b) 12×3× 5 41. The correct formula of the complex
5
tetraammineaquachlorocobalt (III) chloride is
12 3 (a) [Cl(H2O) (NH3)4 Co] Cl
(c) (d) 12 3 7
7 (b) [CoCl(H2O) (NH3)4] Cl
36. Radio waves diffract around building althrough (c) [Co (NH3)4(H2O)Cl] Cl
light waves do not. The reason is that radio waves (d) [CoCl (H2O) (NH3)4] Cl2
(a) travel with speed larger than c
42. The equivalent conductance at infinite dilution
(b) have much larger wavelength then light
(c) carry news of a weak acid such as HF
(d) are not electromagnetic waves (a) can be determined by extrapolation of
37. In the Bohr model of a hydrogen atom, the measurements on dilute solutions of HCl,
centripetal force is furnished by the coulomb HBr and HI
attraction between the proton and the electron. (b) can be determined by measurement on very
If a0 is the radius of the ground state orbit, m is dilute HF solutions
the mass and e is charge on the electron and 0 is (c) can best be determined from measurements
the vacuum permittivity, the speed of the electron on dilute solutions of NaF, NaCl and HCl
is
(d) is an undefined quantity
e
Alcoholic Br2 KCN
(a) 0 (b) 43. C2 H5 I X Y Z
0a 0 m KOH CCl4
+
H3O
e 4 0a0m A
(c) (d) The product 'A' is
4 0a0m e
(a) succinic acid (b) melonic acid
38. A potential difference of 2V is applied between
(c) oxalic acid (d) maleic acid
the opposite faces of a Ge crystal plate of area
1 cm2 and thickness 0.5 mm. If the concentration 44. For a reaction of type A + B products, it is
of electrons in Ge is 2×1019/m2 and mobilities of observed that doubling concentration of A
electrons and holes are 0.36 m2V-1s-1 and 0.14 causes the reaction rate to be four times as great,
m2V-1s-1 respectively, then the current flowing but doubling amount of B does not affect the
through the plate will be rate. The unit of rate constant is
(a) 0.25 A (b) 0.45 A (a) s – 1 (b) s–1 mol L–1
–1
(c) s mol L –1 (d) s s–1 mol–2 L2
(c) 0.56 A (d) 0.64 A
Solved Paper 2010 2010-5
45. A chemical reaction was carried out at 320 K and (c) spherically symmetrical
300 K. The rate constants were found to be k1 (d) arranged in planes
and k2 respectively. Then 56. [Co (NH3)4Cl2]NO2 and [Co (NH3)4ClNO2]Cl
(a) k2 = 4k1 (b) k2 = 2k1 exhibit which type of isomerism?
(c) k2 = 0.25 k1 (d) k2 = 0.5 k1 (a) Geometrical (b) Optical
46. The formula of ethyl carbinol is (c) Linkage (d) Ionisation
(a) CH3OH (b) CH3CH2OH 57. Which of the following compounds is not
(c) CH3CH2CH2OH (d) (CH3)3COH
coloured?
47. Which of the following gives red colour in Victor
Meyer's test? (a) Na2[Cu(Cl4] (b) Na[Cd(Cl)4]
(a) n-propyl alcohol (b) Isopropyl alcohol (c) K4[Fe(CN)6] (d) K3[Fe(CN)6]
(c) tert-butyl alcohol (d) sec-butyl alcohol 58. Which of the following is a Gattermann aldehyde
48. Enthalpy of a compound is equal to its synthesis?
(a) heat of combustion(b) heat of formation H 2 / Pd
(c) heat of reaction (d) heat of solution (a) COCl BaSO 4
CHO
49. For which one of the following reactions will there
be a positive S?
(b) H + CO + HCl
(a) H 2 O (g) H 2 O (l )
(b) H2 I2 2HI AlCl3
CHO
(c) CaCO 3 (s) CaO(s) CO 2 (g)
(d) N 2 (g) 3H 2 (g) 2NH 3 (g)
(c) + HCl + HCN
50. Across the lanthanide series, the basicity of the
lanthanide hydroxides
(a) increases (i) Anhy. AlCl3
CHO
(b) decreases (ii) H 3O
(c) first increases and then decreases
(d) first decreases and then increases CH3 CrO 2Cl 2
CHO
51. When p-nitrobromobenzene reacts with sodium (d)
ethoxide, the product obtained is 59. Aldol is
(a) p-nitroanisole (b) ethyl phenyl ether (a) -hydroxybutyraldehyde
(c) p-nitrophenetole (d) no reaction occurs (b) -hydroxybutanal
52. A radioactive element X emits 3 , 1 and 1 - (c) -hydroxypropanal
particles and forms 76Y235. Element X is (d) None of the above
(a) 81 X 247 (b) 80 X 247 60. Nitrobenzene can be converted into azobenzene
(c) 81 X 246 (d) 80 X 246 by reduction with
53. For the reaction, (a) Zn, NH4Cl,
2A(g) B2 (g) 2AB 2 (g) (b) Zn/NaOH, CH3OH
the equilibrium constant, Kp at 300 K is 16.0. The (c) Zn/NaOH
(d) LiAlH4, ether
value of Kp for AB2 (g) A(g) + 1/2 B2 (g) 61. The one which is least basic is
is (a) NH3 (b) C6H5NH2
(a) 8 (b) 0.25 (c) (C6H5)3N (d) (C6H5)2NH
(c) 0.125 (d) 32 62. Coordination number of Ni in [Ni(C2O4)3]4– is
54. Frenkel defect is generally observed in (a) 3 (b) 6
(a) AgBr (b) AgI (c) 4 (d) 5
(c) ZnS (d) All of the above 63. Mg is an important component of which
55. Most crystals show good cleavage because their biomolecule occurring extensively in living
atoms, ions or molecules are world?
(a) weakly bonded together (a) Haemoglobin (b) Chlorophyll
(b) strongly bonded together (c) Florigen (d) ATP
EBD_7443
2010-6 Target VITEEE
64. Sterling silver is 73. The yield of the product in the reaction
(a) AgNO3 A 2 (g) 2B (g) C (g) Q kJ
(b) Ag2 S would be higher at
(c) Alloy of 80% Ag + 20% Cu (a) high temperature and high pressure
(d) AgCl (b) high temperature and low pressure
65. Identify the statement which is not correct (c) low temperature and high pressure
regarding CuSO4 . (d) low temperature and low pressure
(a) It reacts with KI to give iodine 74. In which of the following case, does the reaction
(b) It reacts with KCl to give Cu2Cl2 go farthest to completion?
(c) It reacts with NaOH and glucose to give (a) K = 102 (b) K = 10
Cu2O (c) K = 10–2 (d) K = 1
(d) It gives CuO on strong heating in air 75. Formation of cyanohydrin from a ketone is an
66. Transition metals usually exhibit highest oxidation example of
states in their (a) electrophilic addition
(a) chlorides (b) fluorides (b) nucleophilic addition
(c) bromides (d) iodides (c) nucleophilic substitution
67. The number of Faradays needed to reduce 4 g (d) electrophilic substitution
equivalents of Cu2+ to Cu metal will be 76. Glycerol on treatment with oxalic acid at 110ºC
(a) 1 (b) 2 forms
1 (a) formic acid (b) allyl alcohol
(c) (d) 4 (c) CO2 and CO (d) acrolein
2
77. The activity of an old piece of wood is just 25%
68. Which one of the following cells can convert
of the fresh piece of wood. If t 1/2 of C-14 is 6000
chemical energy of H2 and O2 directly into
yr, the age of piece of wood is
electrical energy?
(a) 6000 yr (b) 3000 yr
(a) Mercury cell (b) Daniel cell
(c) 9000 yr (d) 12000 yr
(c) Fuel cell (d) Lead storage cell
69. On treatment of propanone with dilute Ba(OH)2, 78. The radius of Na+ is 95 pm and that of Cl– ion is
the product formed is 181 pm. Hence, the coordination number of Na +
(a) aldol will be
(b) phorone (a) 4 (b) 6
(c) propionaldehyde (c) 8 (d) unpredictable
(d) 4-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-pentanone 79. The reaction, ROH + H2CN2 in the presence of
70. Which of the following converts CH3CONH2 to HBF4, gives the following product
CH3NH2? (a) ROCH3 (b) RCH2OH
(a) NaBr (b) NaOBr (c) ROHCN2N2 (b) RCH2CH3
(c) Br2 (d) None of the above 80. The fatty acid which shows reducing property is
71. Which metal aprons are worn by radiographer to (a) acetic acid (b) ethanoic acid
protect him from radiation? (c) oxalic acid (d) formic acid
(a) Mercury coated apron
(b) Lead apron
PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
(c) Copper apron 81. If F is function such that F (0) = 2, F (1) = 3,
(d) Aluminimised apron F (x+2)= 2F (x) - F (x+1) for x 0, then F (5) is
72. The standard Gibb's free energy change, Gº is equal to
related to equilibrium constant, Kp as (a) –7 (b) –3
Gº (c) 17 (d) 13
e 82. Let S be a set containing n elements. Then,
(a) Kp RT ln Gº (b) K p
RT number of binary operations on S is
2
G (a) nn (b) 2n
Kp Gº/ RT
(c) (d) K p e 2
RT (c) nn (d) n2
Solved Paper 2010 2010-7
83. The numerically greatest term in the expansion 92. The chances of defective screws in three boxes
1 1 1 1
of (3–5x)11 when x = , is A, B, C are , , respectively. A box is selected
5 5 6 7
(a) 55 × 39 (b) 55 × 36 at random and a screw drawn from it at random is
(c) 45 × 3 9 (d) 45 × 36 found to be defective. Then, the probability that
84. The number of solutions of the equation it came from box A, is
sin (ex) = 5x + 5–x, is
16 1
(a) 0 (b) 1 (a) (b)
(c) 2 (d) infinitely many 29 15
85. If ax = by = cz = du and a, b, c, d are in GP, then x, 27 42
y, z, u are in (c) (d)
(a) AP (b) G P 59 107
(c) HP (d) None of these cos
86. If z satisfies the equation |z|–z = 1+2i, then z is 93. The value of is equal to
1 sin
equal to
3 3 (a) tan (b) tan
(a) + 2i (b) –2i 2 4 4 2
2 2
3 3 (c) tan (d) tan
(c) 2– i (d) 2 + i 4 2 4 2
2 2
94. If 3sin 5cos 5 , then the value of
1 i 3
87. If z = , then arg (z) is 5 sin – 3 cos is equal to
1 i 3
(a) 5 (b) 3
(a) 60 (b) 120 (c) 4 (d) None of these
(c) 240 (d) 300
5
95. The principal value of sin 1 sin is
88. If f (x) = log10 x 2 . The set of all values of x for 6
which f (x) is real, is
5
(a) [–1, 1] (b) [1, ] (a) (b)
(c) (– , –1] (d) (– , –1] [1, ) 6 6
89. For what values of m can the expression 7
2x2 + mxy + 3y2 – 5y – 2 (c) (d) None of these
6
be expressed as the product of two linear factors?
96. A rod of length l slides with its ends on two
(a) 0 (b) 1 perpendicular lines. Then, the locus of its mid
(c) 7 (d) 49 point is
90. If B is a non-singular matrix and A is a square
matrix, then det (B–1AB) is equal to l2 l2
(a) det (A–1) (b) det (B–1) (a) x2 y2 (b) x 2 y2
4 2
(c) det (A) (d) det (B)
91. If f (x), g(x) and h (x) are three polynomials of l2
degree 2 and (c) x2 y2 (d) None of these
4
f (x) g(x) h(x) 97. The equation of straight line through the
intersection of line 2x + y=1 and 3x + 2y=5 and
(x) f' (x) g' (x) h' (x)
passing through the origin is
f'' (x) g'' (x) h'' (x) (a) 7x + 3y = 0 (b) 7x – y = 0
then (x) is a polynomial of degree (c) 3x + 2y = 0 (d) x + y = 0
(a) 2 (b) 3 98. The line joining (5,0) to (10 cos , 10 sin ) is
(c) 0 (d) atmost 3 divided internally in the ratio 2:3 at P. If varies,
then the locus of P is
EBD_7443
2010-8 Target VITEEE
(a) a straight line 105. The equation of the common tangents to the two
(b) a pair of straight lines
x2 y2 y2 x2
(c) a circle hyperbolas 1 and 1 , are
(d) None of the above a2 b2 a2 b2
99. If 2x + y + k = 0 is a normal to the parabola
(a) y= x b2 a2
y2 = – 8x, then the value of k, is
(a) 8 (b) 16 (b) y= x a2 b2
(c) 24 (d) 32
1 1 1 1 (c) y= x a2 b2
100. nlim ..... is equal
1.2 2.3 3.4 n( n 1) (d) y= x a 2 b2
to 106. Domain of the function f (x) log x cos x, is
(a) 1 (b) –1
(c) 0 (d) None of these , {1} , {1}
(a) (b)
101. The condition that the line lx + my =1 may be 2 2 2 2
normal to the curve y2 = 4ax, is
(c) , (d) None of these
(a) al 3 2alm2 m 2 (b) al 2 2alm3 m2 2 2
(c) al 3 2alm 2 m3 (d) al 3 2alm2 m2 x2
2
107. Range of the function y = sin 1 , is
102. If f ( x)dx f ( x), then f ( x) dx is equal to 1 x2
1 2 3 0, 0,
(a) f (x) (b) f (x) (a) (b)
2 2 2
3
f (x) 2 (c) 0, (d) 0,
(c) (d) f (x) 2 2
3
108. If x = sec cos , y sec n cos n , then
1 (2 x 2)
103. sin dx is equal to dy
2
4 x 2 8 x 13 (x 2 4) is equal to
dx
2x 2 3 4 x 2 8 x 13
(a) (x+1) tan 1
log c (a) n2 ( y 2 4) (b) n2 (4 y 2 )
3 4 9
(c) n2 ( y 2 4) (d) None of these
3 1 2x 2 3 4 x 2 8 x 13
(b) tan log c dy
2 3 4 9
109. If y= x y x y , then is
dx
1 2x 2 3
(c) ( x 1) tan log 4 x 2 8 x 13 c equal to
3 2
y x y3 x
3 1 2x 2 3 (a) (b)
(d) x 1 tan log 4 x 2 8 x 13 c y 2
2x 2y 2
2 xy 1
2 3 4
104. If the equation of an elipse is y3 x
2 2 (c) 2 (d) None of these
3x 2 y 6 x 8 y 5 0 , then which of the 2y x
following are true ? x
dt
1 110. If = , then x can be equal to
(a) e 1 t t2 1 6
3
(b) centre is (–1, 2) 2
(c) foci are (–1, 1) and (–1, 3) (a) (b) 3
3
(d) All of the above (c) 2 (d) None of these
Solved Paper 2010 2010-9
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) 4. (d) Magnetic field,
1 02 i 0i 2Br
1. (b) Here, length l = 2 r or r B or i
2 4 r 2r 0
2
Area of circular loop A r 1/ 2
A
Magnetic moment M = iA = i r2 Also, A = r2 or r
l2 Magnetic moment,
M i 2
4
2 Br
M iA A
4 M
l 0
i
1/ 2
2. (b) Current through arms of resistances P and 2 BA A 2 BA3/ 2
Q in series 1/ 2
0 0
i 330 3
i1 i Y
330 110 4 Y
5. (c) Here, sin
Here i = total current D D
Similarly, current through arms of Angular fringe width 0=
resistances R and S in series (width Y = )
i 110 1 D 1
i2 i
330 110 4 0
D d D d
Heat developed per second = i2R
Ratio of heat developed per sec 1
0 rad and = 6 × 10–7 m
H P : HQ : H R : H S 180
2 2 180 7
3 3 d 6 10 0.03 mm
i 100 : i 10 : 0
4 4
6. (d) Here, charge q = ± 1 × 10–6 C
1
2
1
2 2a = 2.0 cm = 2.0 × 10–2 m
i 300 : i 30 E = 1 × 105 NC–1, max = ?
4 4
W = ?, 1 = 0°, 2 = 180°
= 30 : 3 : 10 : 1
3. (c) Heat taken by water when its temperature max = pE = q(2a)E
= 1 × 10–6 × 2.0 × 10–2 × 1 × 105
changes from 20°C to 100°C.
= 2 × 10–3 Nm
H1 mc( 2 1 ) 1000 1 (100 20) cal
W pE (cos 1 cos 2 )
= 1000 × 80 × 4.2 J
Heat produced in time t due to current in = (10–6 × 2 × 10–2)(105) (cos 0° – cos 180°)
resistor = 4 × 10–3 J
H2 = Vit = 220 × 4 × t J e e ev
According to question, 7. (b) Current, i
t 2 r /v 2 r
220 × 4 × t = 1000 × 80 × 4.2
2
e2
t
1000 80 4.2
381.8 s = 6.3 min
Here, v and r
220 4 me 2
Solved Paper 2010 2010-11
S2 D 0 i 0 i
B (sin 0 sin 45 )
4 r 4 2l
d d
(2 5 1)
2 D 2 2 0i
B
8 l
d2
or 9 13. (c) Zener diode is suitable for voltage
D regulating purpose. It is used as voltage
d2 stabilizer in many applications in
Wavelength, electronics.
9D
9. (d) Generally, temperature of human body is 14. (a) If two independent sources emitting light
37°C (= 98.4°F) corresponding to which IR of the same wavelength are said to be
and microwave radiations are emitted from coherent.
the human body. 15. (d) Induced charge
10. (d) The path of moving proton in a normal nBA
magnetic field is circular. If r is the radius of Q (cos 2 cos 1 )
R
the circular path, then from the figure,
From the symmetry of figure, the angle nBA
= 45°. (cos180 cos 0 )
R
1
AC 2r cos 45 2r 2r ...(1) QR
2 B
2nA
mv 2 mv 16. (d) From an optical fibre due to absorption or
As Bqv or r light leaving the fibre area resulting
r Bq
scattering of light sideways by impurities
2mv 2 1.67 10 27
107 in the glass fibre. And due to this reason a
AC 19 very small part of light energy is lost.
Bq 1 1.6 10
= 0.14 m
EBD_7443
2010-12 Target VITEEE
r hc hc
17. (c) Length of the arc = r 21. (c) Here, E W0 and 2E W0
3 2 '
r E W 1 W0 / E
Charge on the arc = 2 E W0 2 W0 / E
3
Potential at centre v (1 W0 / E ) 1
Since (2 W / E ) 2
So
kq 1 r 0 2
r 4 0 3 r 12 0 22. (b) According to Einstein's photoelectric
equation,
l, 1 2 2(hf W0 )
E W0 mvmax vmax
2 m
If frequency becomes 4f then
r r W0
2 hf
3 2(h 4 f W0 ) 4
v' 2
m m
v ' 2v
18. (a) Herefc = 1.5 MHz = 1500 kHz, fm = 10 kHz 23. (b) In electric field photoelectron will
Lower side-band frequency experience force and accelerate opposite
= fc – fm = 1500 kHz – 10 kHz = 1490 kHz to the field so its KE increases (i.e., stopping
Upper side-band frequency potential will increase), no change in
= fc + fm = 1500 kHz + 10 kHz = 1510 kHz photoelectric current, and threshold
19. (c) Equivalent resistance of the circuit wavelength.
Req = 100 24. (b) Magnetic field inside the cyclindrical
V 2.4 0 2ir
Current through the circuit, i A conductor Bin
R 100 4 R2
(R = radius of cylinder and r = distance of
Potential difference across combination of observation point from axis of cylinder)
voltmeter and 100 resistance Magnetic field outside the cylinder at a
2.4 0 2i
50 1.2 V distance r' from its axis, Bout
100 4 r'
Since the voltmeter and 100 resistance
R
are in parallel, the voltmeter reads the same R ( R 4 R)
Bin rr ' 10 4
value i.e., 1.2 V.
20. (c) In space charge limited region, the plate Bout R2 Bout R2
or, i p 2 i p1 8 10 8 mA 80 mA 2
5 (1.5 1) ...(i)
R
Solved Paper 2010 2010-13
If a lens of refractive index g is immersed Since P '1 P '2 , so, 25 W bulb will glow
in a liquid of refractive index 1, then its
focal length in liquid more brightly.
29. (a) Given : = 100 nm = 1000 Å
1 1 1 Energy corresponding to 1000 Å
( g 1)
fl R1 R2 12375
12.375 eV
1.5 2 1000
1 1 ...(ii) Now, 7.7 = 12.375 – 0
n R
or 0 = 12.375 – 7.7 = 4.675 eV
0.5n In the second case,
Dividing, (i) by (ii) 5 Energy corresponding to 2000 Å
1.5 n
7.5 5n 0.5n 7.5 4.5n 12375
eV 6.1875 eV
75 5 2000
n
45 3 Now, 4.7 = 6.1875 – '0
26. (a) Magnetic field or '0 = 6.1875 – 4.7 = 1.4875 1.5 V
dE0 0r 1 1 2 2qV
B 1010 30. (c) As we know, mv qV or v
2 dt 9 1016 2 2 m
= 5.56 × 10–8 T
27. (b) E E0 sin t mv 2
Centripetal force q B v
Voltmeter read rms value R
For the second bulb, 31. (a) According to Bohr's theory of hydrogen
atom,
V2 (220)2 (i) The speed of the electron in the nth orbit
R2 484
P2 100
1 e2 1
Current in series combination is the same Vn or vn
n4 0 (h / 2 ) n
in the two bulbs,
(ii) The energy of the electron in the nth orbit
V 220 220 1
i A
R1 R2 1936 484 2420 11 me4 13.6 1
En eV or En
If the actual powers in the two bulbs be P1 8n2 20 h2 n 2
n2
and P2 then (iii) The radius of the electron in the nth orbit
2
1 n2 h2
P '1 i 2 R1 1936 16 W rn 0
n 2 a0 or rn n2
11 me 2
2
1 h2 0
and P '2 i 2 R2 484 4W where a0 5.29 10 11
m
11 me
EBD_7443
2010-14 Target VITEEE
32. (b) Current, i = qv 3
l l 0.5 10 25
R
0i 0 qv A A 4
8
B 1.6 10
2r 2r
V 2
4 10 7
1.6 10 19
6.6 1015 i 0.64A
R 25 / 8
10
2 0.53 10
ma 2
21.6 6.6 39. (b) Total power Pt Pc 1
2 ma 2 1
12.513 T
5.3
33. (a) For interference phase difference must be 1
constant. 1800 Pc 1 Pc 1200 W
2
34. (a) To remove the error, resistance box and the
40. (b) Optical path for ray 1 = n1l1
unknown resistance must be interchanged
Optical path for ray 2 = n2l2
and then the mean reading must be taken.
Phase difference,
r
35. (c) Here, tan ic or r h tan ic 2
x
2
( n1l1 n2 l2 )
h
sin ic sin ic PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
or r h or r h
cos ic 1 sin ic 2
41. (d) The correct formula of the given complex is
tetraammine aqua chlorocobalt (III) chloride
1 is [CoCl(H2O)(NH3)4]Cl2, because in it the
But sin ic
oxidation number of Co is +3. While in rest
other options O. No. of Co is +2
1 [CoCl(H2O)(NH3)4]Cl2
h 12 x + (–1) + 0 + (0 × 4) + (–1) 2 = 0
r h x – 3 = 0 x = +3
1 2
1 16
1 2
1 42. (c) According to Kohlrausch's law, equivalent
9
conductance at infinite dilution of HF,
HF = NaF + HCl – NaCl
12 3
cm 43. (a) C2 H5 I
Alc. KOH
C2 H 4
Br2
7 (dehydrohalogenation) ethylene 'X' CCl 4
36. (b) Diffraction takes places when the
wavelength of waves is comparable with Br CN
the size of the obstacle in path. | |
KCN
Pradio > Plight CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 — CH 2
| |
Hence, radio waves are diffracted around Br CN
building. 1, 2-dibromoethane 'Y' 'Z'
37. (c) Centripetal force = force of attraction of
nucleus on electron. COOH
|
H 3O
mv 2 1 e2 e CH 2 — CH 2
v |
a0 4 0 a02 4 0 ma0 COOH
succinic acid 'A'
38. (d) As we know, conductivity
44. (c) Let the initial rate be R
ne( e h) and order with respect to A be x and B be y.
(0.36 + 0.14) Thus, rate law can be written as,
2 1019 1.6 10 19
rate, R = [A]x [B]y ...(i)
= 1.6 ( m)–1
After doubling the concentration of A, rate
becomes 4R,
Solved Paper 2010 2010-15
Anhy. AlCl3
67. (d) Cu 2 2e Cu
58. (c) + HCN + HCl 1 mol 2F 1 mol
1 1
mol 1F mol
2 2
CHO 1 gequi. 1F 1g equi.
H3 O
+
Thus, to reduce 4 g equivalent of Cu2+ into
–NH3
Cu 4F are required.
(Benzaldehyde)
68. (c) Fuel cell, which convert chemical energy
of fuels like H2, O2, CH4, etc, is converted
This is Gattermann aldehyde synthesis. into electric energy, e.g., H2–O2 fuel cell.
Solved Paper 2010 2010-17
OH
OH H
CH2 OOCH
H3C – C – CH2COCH3
CHOH
CH3 –CO 2
4-hydroxy-4-methyl pentanone-2
(diacetone alcohol)
CH2OH
CH2OH
70. (b) CH3CONH 2 NaOBr CH3 NH 2 Na 2 CO3
71. (b) Radiographer to protect themself from
CHOH + HCOOH
radiation worn lead apron. formic acid
72. (d) G° and Kp are related as
CH2OH
G RT ln K p
77. (d) As we know that,
G
ln K p K p e G / RT 0.693 0.693 4
RT k 1.155 10
73. (c) A2 ( g ) 2 B ( g ) C ( g ) Q kJ t1/ 2 6000
Since, the reaction is exothermic, So, it is 2.303 N 2.303 100
favoured by low temperature. t log 0 4
log
k N 1.155 10 25
In addition, the number of moles of
products is lesser than the number of moles = 12000 yr (age of piece of wood)
of reactants, thus high pressure favours Radius of cation, r 95
the forward reaction. 78. (b) 0.525
74. (a) Larger the value of K more the reaction Radius of anion, r 181
moves towards completion. As this value lies in between 0.414 – 0.732,
75. (b) As CN is a nucleophile. So it is an example thus, the coordination number of Na + ion
of nucleophilic addition will be 6.
HBF
CN 79. (a) ROH H 2 CN 2 4
ROCH3 N 2
– –
80. (d) The compounds having –CHO group
R2C = O + CN R2 – C – O reduces Tollen's reagent, Fehling solution
nucleophile etc. Thus, formic acid (HCO/ OH) has
CN reducing property.
+
H
R2 – C – OH PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
81. (d) F ( x 2) 2 F ( x) F ( x 1) ...(i)
CH2OH
HOOC Putting x = 0, we get
76. (a) CHOH + F (2) 2 F (0) F (1)
COOH F (2) 2(2) 3
CH2OH
{ F (0) 2, F (1) 3}
EBD_7443
2010-18 Target VITEEE
F (2) 4 3 F (2) 1 11 10 9 1
311 . 55 39
Putting x = 1, in eq. (i), we get 1.2.3 27
F (3) 2 F (1) F (2) Greatest term (numerically)
2(3) 1 { F (1) 3, F (2) 1} = T3 = T4 = 55 × 39
F (3) 5 84. (a) We have, sin(e x ) 5x 5 x ...(i)
Putting x = 2, in eq. (i), we get Let 5x = t, then eq. (i), reduces to
F (4) 2F (2) F (3) 1
sin(e x ) t
2(1) 5 { F (2) 1, F (3) 5} t
F (4) 3 1
sin(e x ) t 2 2
Putting x = 3, in eq. (i), we get t
F (5) 2F (3) F (4) 1
2
x
sin(e ) t 2
2(5) 3 { F (3) 5, F (4) 3} t
F (5) 13
{ 5x 0, 5x t exists}
82. (c) The number of binary operations on a set S
having n elements in n n .
2 sin(e x ) 2
Let P (h, k) be the mid point of the rod AB. [Using the internal section formula]
0 a a h 3 k
Then, h ...(i) cos and sin
2 2 4 4
b 0 b Squar ing and adding both of these
k equations,
2 2
In OAB, (h 3)2 k2
cos 2 sin 2
OA 2
OB 2
AB 2 16 16
a 2
b 2
l 2 (h 3)2 k 2 16
Therefore, locus of point P is
(2h)2 (2k )2 l2 [using eq. (i)]
( x 3) 2 y 2 16 which is a circle.
2
l 99. (c) The equation of any normal to the parabola
h2 k2
4
y2 8 x is y = mx + 4m + 2m3 ...(i)
The equation of locus is
(using equation of normal of parabola in
l2 slope form y = mx – 2am – am3 and a = –2)
x2 y2
4 The given normal is
97. (a) Let L1 2x y 1 0 2x y k 0 y 2x k ...(ii)
Comparing eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
L2 3x 2 y 5 0
m = – 2 and –4m –2m3 = k
The equation of straight line passing k = 8 + 16 = 24
through the intersection point of the lines
L1 and L2 is given by 1 1 1 1
100. (a) lim .....
L1 L2 0 n 1 2 2 3 3 4 n( n 1)
(2 x y 1) (3 x 2 y 5) 0 1 1 1 1 1
Since, this line passes through the origin lim 1 ......
n 2 2 3 3 4
also
1 1
(0 0 1) (0 0 5) 0
n n 1
1
5 1
5 1 n
lim 1 lim
Required line is n n 1 n n 1
1 n 1
(2 x y 1) (3 x 2 y 5) 0 lim lim 1
5 n 1 n 1
n 1 1
3 2 n n
2 x 1 y 1 1 0
5 5 101. (d) Let P(x1, y1) be a point on the curve
7 3 y2 4ax ...(i)
x y 0 7x 3y 0
5 5 On differentiating y 2 4ax w.r.t. 'x', we get
98. (c) Let coordinates of P be (h, k), then
dy
2(10 cos ) 3(5) 2y 4a
h 4 cos 3 dx
2 3
dy 2a
2(10 sin ) 3(0)
and k 4 sin dx ( x1 , y1 ) y1
2 3
EBD_7443
2010-22 Target VITEEE
Thus, the equation of normal at (x1, y1) is
1 2x 2
y 103. (a) Let I sin dx
y y1 – 1 ( x x1 ) 4 x 2 8 x 13
2a
y1 x 2ay y1 ( x1 2a) ...(ii) 1 2x 2
I sin dx
2
But lx + my = 1 ...(iii) 4x 8x 4 9
is also a normal.
Therefore, coefficients of eqs. (ii) and (iii), 1 2x 2
I sin dx
must be proportional. (2 x 2)2 32
y1 2a y1 ( x1 2a ) Substituting 2x + 2 = 3 tan ,
i.e.,
l m 1 2dx 3sec 2 d , we get
2al 1 1 3tan 3 2
y1 and x1 2a I sin sec d
m l 3sec 2
Putting these values of x1 and y1 in eq. (i),
3
we get I sin 1 (sin ) sec 2 d
2
2
2al 1 3
4a 2a I sec 2 d
m l 2
3
4a 2l 2 4 a 8a 2 l I tan tan d
2
2
m l (integrating by parts)
3 2 2 3 2 2
al m 2am l al 2alm m 3
I [ tan log | sec |] c
f ( x ) dx f ( x) 2
102. (a)
3 1 2x 2 2x 2
d tan
f ( x) f ( x) 2 3 3
dx
2
d 2x 2
f ( x) f ( x)dx log 1 c
dx 3
y x a 2 b2
EBD_7443
2010-24 Target VITEEE
111. (c) Required area = Shaded area
dy n(sec n cos n )
dx (sec cos ) Y
2
dy n 2 {(sec n – cos n ) 2 4}
2
dx (sec – cos ) 4
X
2 2 2
O
dy n (y 4)
2
dx x 4
x=– x=
2
dy
( x2 4) n2 ( y 2 4)
dx
| sin x | dx 2 | sin x | dx
0
109. (d) y x y x y ......
2[cos x]0 2(cos cos 0)
y2 x y x y ...... = 4 sq units
112. (d) Length of normal = c
y2 x y y y2 x 2y
2
dy
( y 2 x)2 2 y y 1 c
dx
On differentiating both sides w.r.t. x, we get
2
dy dy dy
2( y 2 x) 2 y 1 2 y2 1 c2
dx dx dx
Since, a tb is perpendicular to c
[sec 1 t ]1x
6 (a tb) c 0
18. Two sources A and B are sending notes of Superposition of which two waves give rise to
frequency 680 Hz. A listener moves from A and B interference?
with a constant velocity u. If the speed of sound (a) (i) and (ii) (b) (ii) and (iii)
in air is 340 ms–1, what must be the value of u (c) (i) and (iii) (d) (iii) and (iv)
so that he hears 10 beats per second? 23. The two lenses of an achromatic doublet should
(a) 2.0 ms–1 (b) 2.5 ms–1 have
(c) 3.0 ms –1 (d) 3.5 ms–1 (a) equal powers
19. Two identical piano wires have a fundamental
(b) equal dispersive powers
frequency of 600 cycle per second when kept
(c) equal ratio of their power and dispersive
under the same tension. What fractional increase
power
in the tension of one wires will lead to the
occurrence of 6 beats per second when both wires (d) sum of the product of their powers and
vibrate simultaneously? dispersive power equal to zero
(a) 0.01 (b) 0.02 24. Two bar magnets A and B are placed one over
(c) 0.03 (d) 0.04 the other and are allowed to vibrate in a vibration
20. In the Young's double slit experiment, the magnetometer. They make 20 oscillations per
intensities at two points P1 and P2 on the screen minute when the similar poles of A and B are on
are respectively I1 and I2. If P1 is located at the the same side, while they make 15 oscillations
centre of a bright fringe and P2 is located at a per minute when their opposite poles lie on the
distance equal to a quarter of fringe width fromP1, same side. If MA and MB are the magnetic
moments of A and B and if MA > MB, the ratio of
I1 MA and MB is
then I is
2 (a) 4 : 3 (b) 25 : 7
(c) 7 : 5 (d) 25 : 16
1
(a) 2 (b) 25. A bar magnet is 10 cm long is kept with its north
2
(N)-pole pointing north. A neutral point is formed
(c) 4 (d) 16 at a distance of 15 cm from each pole. Given the
21. In Young's double slit experiment, the 10th horizontal component of earth's field is 0.4 Gauss,
maximum of wavelength 1 is at a distance of y1, the pole strength of the magnet is
from the central maximum. When the wavelength
(a) 9 A-m (b) 6.75 A-m
of the source is changed to 2, 5th maximum is at
a distance of y2 from its central maximum. The (c) 27 A-m (d) 1.35 A-m
26. An infinitely long thin straight wire has uniform
y1
ratio y is 1
2 linear charge density of cm –1 . Then, the
3
2 1 2 2 magnitude of the electric intensity at a point
(a) (b) 18 cm away is (given 0 = 8.8 × 10–12 C2Nm–2)
2 1
(a) 0.33 × 1011 NC–1 (b) 3 × 1011 NC–1
1 2 (c) 0.66 × 1011 NC–1 (d) 1.32 × 1011 NC–1
(c) (d) 27. Two point charges –q and +q are located at
2 2 2 1
points (0, 0, – a) and (0, 0, a) respectively. The
22. Four light sources produce the following four
electric potential at a point (0, 0, z), where z > a is
waves:
(i) y1 a sin( t 1)
qa q
(a) 2 (b)
(ii) y2 a sin 2 t 4 0z 4 0a
A
0I 0 nI
(a) (b)
50k 2 R 2R
B 0I 0I
100V (c) ( 1) (d) ( – 1)
50k 2 R 2 R
33. The work function of a certain metal is 3.31 × 10–19
C J. Then, the maximum kinetic energy of
(a) 100 k (b) 75k photoelectrons emitted by incident radiation of
(c) 50k (d) 25k wavelength 5000 Å is (Given, h = 6.62 × 10–34 J-
29. A cell in secondary circuit gives null deflection s, c = 3 × 108 ms–1, e = 1.6 × 10–19 C)
for 2.5 m length of potentiometer having 10 m (a) 2.48 eV (b) 0.41 eV
length of wire. If the length of the potentiometer (c) 2.07 eV (d) 0.82 eV
wire is increased by 1 m without changing the 34. A photon of energy E ejects a photoelectron
cell in the primary, the position of the null point from a metal surface whose work function is W0.
now is If this electron enters into a uniform magnetic
(a) 3.5 m (b) 3 m field of induction B in a direction perpendicular
(c) 2.75 m (d) 2.0 m to the field and describes a circular path of radius
30. The following series L-C-R circuit, when driven r, then the radius r is given by, (in the usual
by an emf source of an gular frequency notation)
70 kilo-radians per second, the circuit effectively 2m(E W0 )
behaves like (a) (b) 2m(E W0 )eB
eB
100 µH 1µH 10
2e(E W0 ) 2m(E W0 )
(c) (d)
mB eB
35. Two radioactive materials x1 and x2 have decay
constants 10 and respectively. if initially they
have the same number of nuclei, then the ratio of
(a) purely resistive circuit the number of nuclei of x1 to that of x2 will be 1/e
(b) series R-L circuit after a time
(c) series R-C circuit (a) (1/10 ) (b) (1/11 )
(d) series L-C circuit with R = 0 (c) 11/(10 ) (d) 1/(9 )
31. A wire of length l is bent into a circular loop of 36. Current flowing in each of the following circuit A
radius R and carries a current I. The magnetic and B respectively are
field at the centre of the loop is B. The same wire
4 4
is now bent into a double loop of equal radii. If
both loops carry the same current I and it is in
the same direction, the magnetic field at the
centre of the double loop will be 4 4
(a) Zero (b) 2 B
(c) 4 B (d) 8 B
32. An infinitely long straight conductor is bent into 8V 8V
(Circuit A) (Circuit B)
the shape as shown below. It carries a current of
Solved Paper 2009 2009-5
(a) 1A, 2A (b) 2 A, 1 A 42. Identify the alkyne in the following sequence of
(c) 4 A, 2 A (d) 2 A, 4 A reactions,
37. A bullet of mass 0.02 kg travelling horizontally H2 Ozonolysis
with velocity 250 ms–1 strikes a block of wood of Alkyne A B
Lindlar 's catalyst only
mass 0.23 kg which rests on a rough horizontal
surface. After the impact, the block and bullet Wacker
CH 2 CH 2
move together and come to rest after travelling a Process
distance of 40 m. The coefficient of sliding friction (a) H3C — C — C — CH3
of the rough surface is (g = 9.8 ms–2) (b) H3C — CH2 — C CH
(a) 0.75 (b) 0.61 (c) H2C = CH— C CH
(c) 0.51 (d) 0.30 (d) HC C — CH2 — C CH
38. Two persons A and B are located in X-Y plane at 43. Fluorine reacts with dilute NaOH and forms a
the points (0, 0) and (0,10) respectively. (The gaseous product A. The bond angle in the
distances are measured in MKS unit). At a time molecule of A is
t = 0, they start moving simultaneously with (a) 104°40' (b) 103°
(c) 107° (d) 109°28'
velocities va 2 ˆjms 1 and vb 2ims ˆ 1
44. One mole of alkene X on ozonolysis gave
respectively. The time after which A and B are at one mole of acetaldehyde and one mole of
their closest distance is acetone. The IUPAC name of X is
(a) 2.5s (b) 4s (a) 2-methyl-2-butene (b) 2-methyl-1-butene
10 (c) 2-butene (d) 1-butene
(c) 1s (d) s 45. The number of p – d ‘pi’ bonds present in
2
XeO3 and XeO4 molecules, respectively are
39. A rod of length l is held vertically stationary (a) 3, 4 (b) 4, 2
with its lower end located at a point P, on the (c) 2, 3 (d) 3, 2
horizontal plane. When the rod is released to 46. The wavelengths of electron waves in two
topple about P, the velocity of the upper end of orbits is 3 : 5. The ratio of kinetic energy of
the rod with which it hits the ground is electrons will be
g (a) 25 : 9 (b) 5 : 3
(a) (b) 3gl (c) 9 : 25 (d) 3 : 5
l
47. Which one of the following sets correctly
represents the increase in the paramagnetic
g 3g
(c) 3 (d) property of the ions?
l l (a) Cu2+ > V2+ > Cr2+ > Mn2 +
40. A wheel of radius 0.4 m can rotate freely about (b) Cu2+ < Cr 2+ < V2+ < Mn2+
its axis as shown in the figure. A string is wrapped (c) Cu2+ < V 2+ < Cr2+< Mn2+
over its rim and a mass of 4 kg is hung. An angular (d) V2+< Cu2+ < Cr2+ < Mn2+
acceleration of 8 rad-s–2 is produced in it due to 48 . Electrons with a kinetic energy of 6.023 × 104 J/ mol
the torque. Then, moment of inertia of the wheel are evolved from the surface of a metal, when it
is ( g = 10 ms–2) is exposed to radiation of wavelength of
(a) 2 kg-m2 (b) 1 kg-m2 600 nm. The minimum amount of energy
(c) 4 kg-m 2
(d) 8 kg-m2 required to remove an electron from the metal
atom is
PART - II (CHEMISTRY) (a) 2.3125 × 10–19 J (b) 3 × 10–19 J
(c) 6.02 × 10–19 J (d) 6.62 × 10–34 J
41. Given that Hf(H) = 218 kJ/mol, express the 49. The chemical entities present in thermosphere
H—H bond energy in kcal/mol. of the atmosphere are
(a) 52.15 (b) 911 (a) O2 , O , NO (b) O3
(c) 104 (d) 52153
(c) N2, O2, CO2, H2O (d) O3, O2 , O2
EBD_7443
2009-6 Target VITEEE
50. The type of bonds present in sulphuric The correct answer is
anhydride are (a) Both (A) and (R) are true and (R) is the
(a) 3 and three p – d correct explanation of (A)
(b) 3 , one p – p and two p – d (b) Both (A) and (R) are true but (R) is not
(c) 2 and three p – d the correct explanation of (A)
(d) 2 and two p – d (c) (A) is true but (R) is not true
51. In Gattermann reaction, a diazonium group is (d) (A) is not true but (R) is true
replaced by X using Y. X and Y are 59. How many mL of perhydrol is required to
X Y produce sufficient oxygen which can be used to
completely convert 2 L of SO2 gas to SO3 gas?
(a) Cl – Cu/HCl (a) 10 mL (b) 5 mL
(b) CuCl2/HCl (c) 20 mL (d) 30 mL
Cl
60. pH of a buffer solution decreases by 0.02 units
(c) Cl – CuCl2/HCl when 0.12 g of acetic acid is added to 250 mL of
(d) Cl2 Cu2O/HCl a buffer solution of acetic acid and potassium
52. Which pair of oxyacids of phosphorus contains acetate at 27°C. The buffer capacity of the
' P—H' bonds? solution is
(a) H3PO4, H3PO3 (b) H3PO5, H4 P2O7 (a) 0.1 (b) 10
(c) H3PO3, H3PO2 (d) H3PO2, HPO3 (c) 1 (d) 0.4
53. Dipole moment of HCl = 1.03 D, HI = 0.38 D. 61. Match the following
Bond length of HC1 = 1.3 Å and HI =1.6 Å. The List I List II
ratio of fraction of electric charge, , existing on (A) Flespar (I) [Ag3Sb3]
each atom in HCl and HI is (B) Asbestos (II) Al2O3. H2O
(a) 12 : 1 (b) 2.7 : 1 (C) Pyrargyrite (III) MgSO4. H2O
(c) 3.3 : 1 (d) 1 : 3.3 (D) Diaspore (IV) KAlSi3O8
54. SiC14 on hydrolysis forms ‘X’ and HC1. (V) CaMg3(SiO3)4
Compound ‘X’ loses water at 1000°C and gives The correct answer is
(A) (B) (C) (D)
‘Y’. Compounds ‘X’ and ‘Y’respectively are
(a) IV V II I
(a) H2SiCl6 , SiO2 (b) H4SiO4, Si
(b) IV V I II
(c) SiO2, Si (d) H4 SiO4, SiO2
(c) IV I III II
55. 1.5 g of CdCl 2 was found to contain 0.9 g of Cd.
(d) II V IV I
Calculate the atomic weight of Cd.
62. Which one of the following order is correct for
(a) 118 (b) 112
the first ionisation energies of the elements?
(c) 106.5 (d) 53.25
(a) B < Be < N < O (b) Be < B < N < O
56. Aluminium reacts with NaOH and forms (c) B < Be < O < N (d) B < O < Be < N
compound ‘X’. If the coordination number of 63. What are X and Y in the following reaction
aluminium in ‘X’ is 6, the correct formula of X is sequence?
(a) [Al(H2O)4(OH)2]+ (b) [Al (H2O)3(OH)3]
Cl
2 2 Cl
(c) [Al(H2O)2 (OH)4 ]– (d) [Al (H2O)6 ](OH)3 C 2 H 5 OH X Y
57. The average kinetic energy of one molecule of (a) C2H5C1, CH3CHO
an ideal gas at 27°C and 1 atm pressure is (b) CH3CHO, CH3CO2H
(a) 900 cal K –1mo1–1 (c) CH3CHO, CC13CHO
(b) 6.21 × 10– 21 JK–1 molecule–1 (d) C2H5C1, CCl3CHO
(c) 336.7 JK–1 molecules–1 64. What are A, B, C in the following reactions?
(d) 3741.3 JK–1 mol–1
(i) (CH 3CO 2 ) 2 Ca A
58. Assertion (A) : K. Rb and Cs form superoxides.
Reason (R) : The stability of the superoxides HI
(ii) CH3 CO2 H B
increases from ‘K’ to ‘Cs’ due to decrease in Red P
lattice energy. P4 O10
(iii) 2CH3CO 2 H C
Solved Paper 2009 2009-7
89. The locus of z satisfying the inequality 96. If m 1, m 2, m 3 and m 4 are respectively the
magnitudes of the vectors
z 2i
1 , where z = x + iy, is a1 2iˆ ˆj kˆ, a2 3iˆ 4 ˆj 4kˆ,
2z i
(a) x2 y2 1 (b) x2 y2 1 a3 iˆ ˆj kˆ, and a4 –iˆ 3 ˆj kˆ ,
then the correct order of m1, m2, m3 and m4 is
(c) x 2 y 2 1 (d) 2 x 2 3 y 2 1 (a) m3 < m1 < m4 < m2
90. If n is an integer which leaves remainder one (b) m3 < m1 < m2 < m4
(c) m3 < m4 < m1 < m2
when divided by three, then
(d) m3 < m4 < m2 < m1
(1 3i ) n (1 – 3i ) n equals 97. If X is a binomial variate with the range {0, 1, 2, 3, 4,
(a) –2n + 1 (b) 2n + 1 5, 6} and P(X = 2) = 4P(X = 4), then the parameter
n p of X is
(c) –(–2) (d) –2n
1 1 2 3
91. The period of sin 4 x cos 4 x is (a) (b) (c) (d)
3 2 3 4
4 2 98. The area (in square unit) of the circle which
(a) (b) (c) (d) touches the lines 4x + 3y = 15and 4x + 3y = 5is
2 2 4 2
(a) 4 (b) 3
92. If 3cos x 2sin x, then the general solution of (c) 2 (d)
99. The area (in square unit) of the triangle formed
sin 2 x – cos 2 x 2 sin 2 x is by x + y + 1 = 0 and the pair of straight lines
x2 – 3xy + 2y2 = 0 is
(a) n ( 1) n ,n Z
2 7 5 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
n 12 12 12 6
(b) ,n Z 100. The pairs of straight lines x2 – 3xy + 2y2 = 0 and
2
x2 – 3xy + 2y2 + x – 2 = 0 form a
(a) square but not rhombus
(c) (4 n 1) ,n Z (b) rhombus
2
(c) parallelogram
(d) (2n 1) , n Z (d) rectangle but not a square
101. The equations of the circle which pass through
1 1 1 1 1 1 the origin and makes intercepts of lengths 4 and
93. cos 2sin 3cos
2 2 2 8 on the x and y-axes respectively are
(a) x2 + y2 ± 4x ± 8y = 0
4 tan 1 ( 1) equals (b) x2 + y2 ± 2x ± 4y = 0
(c) x2 + y2 ± 8x ± 16y = 0
19 35 47 43 (d) x2 + y2 ± x ± y = 0
(a) (b) (c) (d)
12 12 12 12 102. The point (3, –4) lies on both the circles
94. In a ABC x2 + y2 – 2x + 8y + 13 = 0
and x2 + y2 – 4x + 6y + 11 = 0
(a b c )(b c a )(c a b)(a b c ) Then, the angle between the circles is
4b2 c 2 1
1
equals (a) 60° (b) tan
(a) cos2A (b) cos2B 2
2
(c) sin A (d) sin2 B 3 1
(c) tan (d) 135°
95. The angle between the lines whose direction 5
cosines satisfy the equations l + m + n = 0,
103. The equation of the circle which passes through
l2 m2 n2 0 is the origin and cuts orthogonally each of the
circles x 2 y2 6x 8 0 and
(a) (b) (c) (d)
6 4 3 2 x2 y2 2x – 2 y 7 is
EBD_7443
2009-10 Target VITEEE
(a) 3x2 + 3y2– 8x – 13y = 0 (a) 0 (b) tan t
(b) 3x2 + 3y2 – 8x + 29y = 0 (c) 1 (d) sin t cos t
(c) 3x2 + 3y2 + 8x + 29y = 0
3x2 + 3y2 – 8x – 29y = 0 d x 1 1
(d) 113. a tan 1 x b log
104. The number of normals drawn to the parabola dx x 1 4
x 1
y2 = 4x from the point (1, 0) is a – 2b is equal to
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3 (a) 1 (b) –1 (c) 0 (d) 2
105. If the circle x2 + y2 = a2 intersects the hyperbola
a sin 1 x
xy = c2 in four points (x1, y1) for i = 1, 2, 3 and 4, 114. y e (1 x 2 ) yn 2 (2n 1) xyn 1
is
then y1 + y2 + y3 + y4 equals equal to
(a) 0 (b) c (c) a (d) c 4
106. The mid point of the chord 4x – 3y = 5 of the (a) (n2 a 2 ) yn (b) (n2 – a 2 ) yn
hyperbola 2x2 – 3y2 = 12 is
(c) (n2 a 2 ) yn (d) (n2 a2 ) yn
5
(a) 0, (b) (2, 1) 115. The function f ( x) x3 ax 2 bx c, a 2 3b
3
has
5 11 (a) one maximum value
(c) ,0 (d) ,2
4 4 (b) one minimum value
107. The perimeter of the triangle with vertices at (c) no extreme value
(1, 0, 0), (0, 1, 0) and (0, 0, 1) is (d) one maximum and one minimum value
(a) 3 (b) 2 2 sin 2 x x
(c) 2 2 (d) 3 2 116. e dx is equal to
1 cos 2 x
108. If a line in the space makes angle , and with (a) – ex cot x + c (b) ex cot x + c
the coordinate axes, then x
(c) 2e cot x + c (d) – 2ex cot x + c
cos 2 cos 2 cos 2 sin 2 sin 2 117. If I n sin n x dx , then nI n (n 1) I n 2
2 equals equals
sin
(a) –1 (b) 0 (c) 1 (d) 2 (a) sin n 1 x cos x (b) cos n 1
x sin x
109. The radius of the sphere
x2 + y2 + z2 = 12x + 4y + 3z is (c) sin n 1
x cos x (d) cosn 1
x sin x
(a) (b) (c) (d) 52
118. The line x divides the area of the region
x 3 4
x 5
110. lim equals bounded by y = sin x, y = cos x and x-axis
x x 2
(a) e (b) e2 (c) e3 (d) e5 0 x into two regions of areas A1 and
111. If f : R R is defined by 2
A2. Then A1 : A2 equals
2sin x sin 2 x (a) 4 : 1 (b) 3 : 1 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 1
, if x 0
f ( x) 2 x cos x 119. The solution of the differential equation
,
a, if x 0 dy
sin ( x y ) tan ( x y ) – 1 is
then the value of a so that f is continuous at 0 is dx
(a) 2 (b) 1 (c) –1 (d) 0 (a) cosec (x + y) + tan (x + y) = x + c
(b) x + cosec (x + y) = c
1 1
112. x cos , (c) x + tan (x + y) = c
1 t2 (d) x + sec (x + y) = c
120. If p (~ p q) is false, the truth value of p
1 t dy
y sin and q are respectively
1 t 2 dx is equal to (a) F, T (b) F, F (c) T, F (d) T, T
Solved Paper 2009 2009-11
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) Maximum height attained
2
1. (d) Here, y a sin (bt cx) 1 1 t t
H max g (T ) 2 g 1 2
Comparing this equation with geneal wave 2 2 2
equation
2 t 2 x 1 (t1 t2 )2
y a sin g
T 2 4
1
2 2 Or, H max g (t1 t 2 ) 2 m
we get b ,c 8
T
p
y [ L] 3. (a) Momentum, p m v v
(a) Dimensions of = Dimensionless m
a [ L]
y
2 [T ] v
(b) Dimensions of bt t
T [T ] vy
= Dimensionless
P vx
[ L] 2 (x, y)
(c) Dimensions of cx x
[ L] x
O
= Dimensionless
Kinetic energy, KE
2
b 1 2 1 p2 1 2
(d) Dimensions of T [ LT 1 ] mv m 2 p
c 2 T 2 2 m 2m
1
2. (b) Let t' be the time taken by the body to fall or, KE p2 constant
from point C to B. 2m
Hence, the graph between KE and p2 will
t2 t1 be linear.
Then t1 2t ' t2 t' ...(i)
2
1 2
Now, kinetic energy KE = mv
C 2
The velocity component at point P,
t' vy (u sin
gt ) and vx u cos
Resultant velocity at point P,
B Hmax
v v y ˆj vx iˆ
t1 H
(u sin gt ) ˆj u cos iˆ
A
Total time taken to reach point C |v| (u cos )2 (u sin gt ) 2
t2 t1 u 2 cos 2 u 2 sin 2 g 2t 2 2ugt sin
T t1 t ' t1
2
2t1 t2 t1 t1 t2
u 2 (cos 2 sin 2 ) g 2 t 2 2ugt sin
2 2
EBD_7443
2009-12 Target VITEEE
If rate of flow of water is increased by n
1
KE m (u 2 g 2t 2 2ugt sin ) times, i.e., (nx).
2 Increased power,
i.e., KE t 2
mgy ' y'
Hence, graph will be parabolic intercept on P1 mg nmgx ...(ii)
t t
y-axis.
Hence, the graph between KE and t. The ratio of power,
Now, in case of height P1 nmgx
; P1 : P0 n :1
1 P0 mgx
KE m(v 2 ) and v 2 (u 2
2 gy )
2 5. (a) Mass of the first body m1 = 5 kg and for
1 elastic collision coefficient of restitution,
KE m(u 2 2 gy ) e = 1.
2
u =u
1 m1 1 M
KE mgy mu 2
2 u2 = 0
1 Let initially body m1 moves with velocity v
Intercept on y-axis = mu 2
2 u
after collision velocity becomes .
10
Let after collision velocity of M block
B becomes (v2).
1 2 By conservation of momentum
mu –mg = tan
2 m1u1 m2 u2 m1v1 m2 v2
O A u
or 5u M 0 5 Mv2
10
1 2 u
Now, KE mv
or 5u Mv2 ...(i)
2 2
Since, v1 v2 e(u1 u2 )
u u
or v2 1(u ) or u v2
KE 10 10
11u
or v2 ...(ii)
x 10
2 Substituting value of v2 in Eq. (i) from Eq. (ii)
1 x
KE m u 11u
2 t 5u M
2 10
i.e., KE x 2 . Thus graph between KE and
x will be parabolic. 1 11 9 10 45
or 5 M M
4. (a) Power of motor initially = P0 2 10 2 11 11
Let, rate of flow of motor = (x)
4.09 kg
Since, power,
6. (c) Let third mass particle (2m) moves making
work mgy y angle with X-axis.
P0 mg
time t t The horizontal component of velocity of
2m mass particle = u cos
y And vertical component = u sin
x = rate of flow of water = mgx ...(i)
t
Solved Paper 2009 2009-13
Velocity of particle
Y
dy 5d
u=? sin 4t
–1 dt dt 3
6ms 2m1
5cos 4t 4 20cos 4t
m 3 3
T
X Velocity at t
4m –1 4
m 4ms
dy T
From conservation of linear momentum in 20 cos 4
dt t
T 4 3
X-direction 4
m1u1 m2 u2 m1v1 m2 v2
or u 20cos T ...(ii)
or 0 m 4 2m(u cos ) 3
or 4 2u cos or 2 u cos ...(i) Comparin g the given equation with
Again, applying law of conservation of standard equation of SHM.
linear momentum in Y-direction y a sin ( t )
0 m 6 2m(u sin ) We get, = 4
6 As
2 2
u sin or 3 u sin T
...(ii) T
2
Squaring Eqs. (i) and (ii) and adding, 2
2 2 2 2 or T =
(4) (9) u cos u sin 4 2
Now, putting value of T in Eq. (ii), we get
u 2 (cos2 sin 2 )
or 13 u 2 u 20 cos 20sin
2 3 3
u 13 ms 1
10 3
7. (b) Here, maximum height attained by a
The kinetic energy of particle,
projectile
1 2 1 3
v2 R KE mu 2 10 ( 10 3) 2
h ...(i) 2 2
2 gR v 2 3
10 100 3 0.3J
Velocity of body = half the escape velocity
l1 r Y
ve 9. (d) Given, a, 1 b, 1 c
i.e., v l2 r2 Y2
2
Free body diagram of the two blocks brass
2 gR 2 gR gR and steel are
or v v2 v2
2 4 2
Now, putting value of v2 in Eq. (i), we get T' T
gR gR 2 Brass Steel
R
2 2 R
Height, h
gR 3 gR 3
2 gR 2g
2 2
8. (d) Particle executing SHM.
T 2g
Displacement y 5sin 4t ...(i)
3
EBD_7443
2009-14 Target VITEEE
Let Young's modulus of steel is Y1 and of
brass is Y2. 2 r2
vT ( )g
9
F1 l1
Y1 ...(i) where is coefficient of viscosity and is
A1 l1
density of drop is density of liquid.
F2 l2 Terminal speed drop is 6 cm s–1
and Y2 A2 l2
...(ii)
2 r2
6 ( )g ...(i)
Dividing Eq. (i) by (ii), 9
F1 l1 Let terminal velocity becomes v' after
coalesce, then
Y1 A1 l1
Y2 F2 l2 2 R2
v' ( )g ...(ii)
A2 l2 9
Dividing Eq. (i) by (ii), we get
Y1 F1 A2 l1 l2
or Y2 F2 A1 l2 l1
...(iii) 2 r2
( )g
Force on steel wire from free body diagram 6 9 6 r2
T = F1 = (2g) newton v' 2 R2 v' (2r ) 2
( )g
Force on brass wire from free body diagram 9
F2 T ' T 2 g (4 g ) newton or v' = 24 cm s–1
Now, putting the value of F1, F2, in Eq. (iii), 12. (a) Time period of oscillation,
we get
l dT 1 dl
Y1 2g r22 l1 l2 T 2
g T 2 l
Y2 4g r12 l2 l1
dl
As, dt
1 1 l2 l
or c a
2 b2 l1 dT1 1
dt 9 10 7 (30 20)
T 2 2
l1 a
or = 4.5 × 10–6
l2 2b 2 c Loss in time = 4.5 × 10–6 × 0.5
10. (d) Initially area of soap bubble, A1 = 4 r2 = 2.25 × 10–6 s
Under isothermal condition radius becomes 13. (c) Volume of the metal at 30°C
2r.
loss of weight
Area A2 4 (2 r )2 16 r 2 V30
specific gravity × g
Increase in surface area
(45 25) g
A 2( A2 A1 ) 2(16 r 2 4 r 2 ) 24 r 2 13.33 cm3
1.5 g
Energy spent,
Similarly, volume of metal at 40°C
W T A T 24 r 2 24 Tr 2 J
(45 27) g
11. (c) Let radius of big drop = R. V40 14.40 cm 3
1.25 g
4 3 4
R r3 8 Now, V40 V30 [1 (t2 t1 )]
3 3
R 2r V40 V30 14.40 13.33
Here r = radius of small drops. or
V30 (t 2 t1 ) 13.33(40 30)
Now, terminal velocity of drop in liquid
= 8.03 × 10–3/°C
Solved Paper 2009 2009-15
p 1 R 3
C W (442 400) R 42
5 2
1
D 3
or W = 63R
V
But U 0 , for cylinder A
Hence, equivalent cyclic process is has
follows. Q 0 63R 63R
For cylinder B volume is constant,
W = 0 and Q CV T
A B For monoatomic gas
3 3
p CV R Q 1 R T
2 2
C As heat given on both cylinder is same
D 3
63R R T T 42 K
T 2
17. (a) From figure, H = H1 + H2
15. (b) From first law of thermodynamics
3 KA(100 T ) 2 KA(T 50) KA(T 0)
Q U W or U Q W
l l l
U1 Q1 W1 6000 2500 3500 J 300 3T 2T 100 T 6T 400
U2 Q2 W2 5500 1000 4500 J 200
T C
U3 Q3 W3 3000 1200 1800 J 3
U 4 Q4 W4 3500 x 18. (b) Let listener go from A B with velocity
For cyclic process U 0 ( ).
As Bs
3500 4500 1800 3500 x 0
or x 700 J 680 Hz 680 Hz
And the apparent frequency of sound from
output source A by listener using Doppler's effect,
Efficiency, 100
input
EBD_7443
2009-16 Target VITEEE
constructive inference takes place.
v vo 340 u The position of fringe at p2.
n' n n ' 680
v vs 340 0
n D
The apparent frequency of sound from x
d
source B by listener
v vo 340 u Given, '
n '' n 680 4
v vs 340 0
P2
Listener hear 10 beats per second.
Hence, n'' – n' = 10
340 u 340 u S1
680 680 10
340 340 P1
d
2(340 u 340 u) 10 S2
D
u 2.5 ms –1
19. (b) When both the wires vibrate
simultaneously, beats per second, D n D 1
n1 n2 6 or n
4d d 4
1 T 1 T'
6
I1 a2
or 16 :1
2l m 2l m I2 a
2
1 T' 1 T 4
6
2l m 2l m 21. (a) Position fringe from central maxima
n 1D
1 T' 1 T' y1
600 6 606 ...(i) d
2l m 2l m Given, n = 10
Given that fundamental frequency
10 1 D
y1 ...(i)
1 T d
600 ...(ii)
2l m For second source
Dividing Eq. (i) by (ii), 5 2D
y2 ...(ii)
1 T' d
2l m 606 10 1 D
1 T 600 y1 d 2 1
2l m y2 5 2D 2
d
T' T' 22. (c) Inteference takes place between two waves
(1.01) (1.02)%
T T having equal frequency and propagate in
same direction.
T ' T (1.02)
Hence, y1 a sin( t 1 )
Increase in tension
T ' T 1.02 T (0.02T ) y3 a 'sin( t 2 )
T = 0.02 will give interference as the two waves have
same frequency .
D 23. (d) The two lenses of an achromatic doublet
20. (d) Fringe width
d should have, sum of the product of their
Let be the amplitude of the place where powers and dispersive power = zero.
Solved Paper 2009 2009-17
2 2 q q
1 1 E dS or E 2 rl
20 15 400 225 0 0
2 2
1 1 400 225 q q /l
E
15 20 2 0 rl 2 0r
M A : M B 25 : 7 2 2
25. (d) Here, length of magnet = 10 cm = 10 × 10–2 m, 2 0r 2 4 0r
r = 15 × 10–2 m
P 1 1
15 9 109 2
3 18 10 2
cm cm
15 = 0.33 × 1011 NC–1
27. (c) Potential at P due to (+q) charge of dipole
1 q
SA BN V1
4 0 (z a)
O
5 cm 5 cm Potential at P due to (–q) charge of dipole
1 q
OP 225 25 200 cm V2
4 0 ( z a)
Since, at the neutral point, magnetic field
due to the magnet is equal to BH, y
0 M –q
BH 2a q P
4 (OP 2 AO 2 )3/ 2 Z
A B (0,0,z)
4 7 M (0,0,–a) (0,0,a)
0.4 10 10
(200 10 4
25 10 4 )3 / 2 x
4
Total potential at P due to electric dipole
0.4 10
7
(225 10 4 )3/ 2 M V V1 V2
10
1 q 1 q
0.4 103 10 6 (225)3/ 2 M
4 0 ( z a) 4 0 ( z a)
M 1.35 A-m
26. (a) Charge density or charge per unit length of q ( z a z a)
long wire 4 ( z a)( z a)
0
1 1
Cm and r = 18 × 10–2 m 2 qa
3 or V 2
4 0 (z a2 )
28. (c) Internal resistance of voltmeter = R.
Effective resistance across B and C
1 1 1 50 R
l
l R' R 50 50 R
or R '
50 R
50 R
EBD_7443
2009-18 Target VITEEE
I 2.5 l
A I
A 10 11 A
50 k 2.5 11
or l 2.75 m
10
100V B 100 H 1 F 10
VL
R V 30. (c) I
50 k VR
~ VC
C
According to Ohm's law, V ' IR ' Impedance, Z ( X L ~ X C )2 R2
100 50R 2
or I 1
3 50 R or Z L~ R2
C
100 50 R Inductive reactance
or I ...(i)
3 50R XL L 70 103 100 10 6
7
Now, total resistance of circuit Capacitance reactance
50 R 1 1
R '' 50 XC
50 R C 70 103 1 10 6
2( E W0 )
R m
m 2m( E W0 )
or r r
I O eB eB
10 t t
35. (d) Here, N1 N0 e and N 2 N0 e
l0
B1 (upward) N1 1 1
2 R e e( 10 )t
e 9 t
N2 e
Magnetic field due to loop at O point
I 2 R 1
B2 0 t
9
4 R2
36. (c) Here current flows in circuit A as both (p-n)
I 0 junction diode act as forward biasing.
B2 (in upward direction)
2 R Total resistnace R.
Resultant magnetic field at centre O 1 1 1 2
B = B1 + B2 or R = 2
R 4 4 4
0I According to Ohm's law
B ( 1)T
2 R V I AR
33. (b) Work function W0 3.31 10 19 J or 8 = IA × 2 or IA = 4A
Wavelength of incident radiation In circuit B, lower p-n-junction diode is
reverse biased. Hence, no current will flow
5000 10 10 m but upper diode is forward biased so
According to Einstein's photoelectric current cna flow through it
equation E W0 KE V IB R
hc or 8 I B 4 or I B 2 A
19
3.31 10 KE 37. (c) After collision the bullet and block move
together and comes to rest after covering a
34
19 6.62 10 3 108 distance of 40 m.
KE 3.31 10 10
5000 10 250 ms
–1
6.62 3 19 19
m 0.23 kg
3.31 10 10
5 m = 0.2 kg
= (–3.31 × 1.324 × 3) × 10–19 u2 = 0
EBD_7443
2009-20 Target VITEEE
By conservation of momentum
ml 2
m1u1 m2 u2 m1v1 m2 v2 I about point A .
3
0.02 250 0.23 0 0.02v 0.23v By law of conservation of energy
5 0 v (0.25) or v 20 ms 1 l 1 1 ml 2 vB
2
2
Now, by conservation of energy mg I
2 2 2 3 l
1
or Mv 2 R d By solving, we get vB 3gl
2
40. (a) Given, r = 0.4 m,
1 = 8 rad s–1,
or 0.25 400 0.25 9.8 40
2 m = 4 kg, I = ?
200 Torque, I
0.51 mgr I
9.8 40
38. (a) Let after the time (t) the position of A is 16
(0, vAt) and position of B = (vBt, 10). Distance 4 10 0.4 I 8 or I 2 kg.m 2
8
between them
PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
y (0 vB t ) 2 (v At 10) 2
41. (c) Given : H f (H) = 218 kJ/mol
or y 2 (2t )2 (2t 10)2
1
or y 2 l 4t 2 4t 2 100 40t i.e., H2 H; H = 218 kJ/mol
2
l 8t 2 100 40t or H 2 2H; H = 436 kJ/mol
dl 436
Now, (16t 40) 0 104.3 kcal/mol
dt 4.18
or Hence, H–H bond energy is 104.3 kcal/mol.
40 d 2l 42. (a) In Wacker process,alkene is oxidised into
t 2.5 s 16 (+ve) aldehyde.
16 dt 2
So, l will be minimum. 1 PdCl2 CuCl2
CH 2 CH 2 O2 CH3CHO
39. (b) Here, potential energy of the metre stick 2 H 2O (B)
will be converted into rotational kinetic
energy. Since only alkenes produce aldehydes, on
ozonolysis hence 'A' must be an alkene.
B Now to find the structure of alkene we
should add two molecules of aldehyde and
replace O by double bond
CG H3C CH3
C=O+O=C
l/2 H ‘B’ ‘B’ H
H3C CH3
A Replacement of
C =C
v O by double bond H H
'A'
Because centre of gravity of stick lies at Therefore, alkyne must be
the middle of the rod, H2
CH3–C C– CH3
mgl Lindlar's catalyst
(alkyne)
PE of metre stick =
2 H3C CH3
C =C
1 2 H H
Rotational kinetic energy E I
2 'A'
Solved Paper 2009 2009-21
2 2
43. (b) 2F2 2NaOH 2NaF OF2 H2O K1 2 5
dilute ( A)
K2 1 3
The structure of 'A' (OF2) is as
O K1 : K 2 25 : 9
47. (c) Paramagnetic nature depends upon the
F 103.2 F
number of unpaired electrons. Higher the
bonds made by O = 2 number of unpaired electrons, higher the
Due to repulsion between two lone pairs of paramagnetic property will be.
electrons, its shape gets distorted. Cu2+ = [Ar] 3d9, no. of unpaired electrons = 1
Therefore, the bond angle in the molecule V2+ = [Ar] 3d3, no. of unpaired electrons = 3
is 103°. Cr2+ = [Ar] 3d4, no. of unpaired electrons = 4
44. (a) To decide the structure of alkene that Mn2+ = [Ar] 3d5, no. of unpaired electrons = 5
undergoes ozonolysis, add the products Hence, correct order is
and replace O by double (=) bond. Thus,
Cu 2 V2 Cr 2 Mn 2
H3C CH3 48. (a) 23
1 mol = 6.023 × 10 atoms
C=O+O=C KE of 1 mol = 6.023 × 104 J
H CH3 or KE of 6.023 × 1023 atoms = 6.023 × 104 J
acetaldehyde acetone
4 1 6.023 104
H3C 3 2 CH3 KE of 1 atom =
Replacement 6.023 1023
C= C
of O by double bond
H CH3 = 1.0 × 10–19 J
34
2- methyl-2-butene hc 6.626 10 3 108
hvenergy 9
45. (a) Structure of XeO3 600 10
= 3.313 × 10–19 J
Xe Now since Threshold energy
O O hv KE
O
3.313 10 19 1.0 10 19
3p -d pi bonds.
= 2.313 × 10–19 J
Structure of XeO4
Hence minimum amount of energy required
O to remove an electron from the metal ion
will be 2.313 × 10–19J.
Xe 49. (a) The earth's thermosphere also includes the
region of the atmosphere, called the
O O ionosphere. The ionosphere is the region
O of the atmosphere that is filled with charged
4p -d bonds. particles such as O 2 , O+, NO+. The high
46. (a) According to de-Broglie's equation.
temperature in the thermosphere can cause
h 2 h2 molecules to ionize.
mv m 2v 2 50. (b) The formula of sulphuric anhydride is SO3
and its structure is as follows :
2 h2 O
or mv 2
m
1 2 S
KE( K ) mv
2 O O
3 , 1p -p , 2 p -d bonds are present.
1 h2
KE ( K )
2m 2
EBD_7443
2009-22 Target VITEEE
CH3 CH3 57. (b) Average kinetic energy per molecule
+ – –
N2Cl Cl 3
kT
51. (a) Cu/HCl 2
+ N2
Gattermann 3 R 3 8.314
reaction or T 300
2 N0 2 6.023 10 23
H
P–H bonds = 6.21 × 10–21 JK–1 molecule–1
52. (c) H3PO3 H – O – P – O – H} 58. (c) The species having an O–O bond and O in
1
O an oxidation state of are super oxides
2
O and is represented as O2–. Usually these
are formed by active metals such as KO2,
H3PO2 P – OH RbO2 and CsO2. For the salts of larger
H
H anions (like O2 ), lattice energy increases
two P–H bonds in a group. Since, lattice energy is the
53. (c) Dipole moment, driving force for the formation of an ionic
compound and its stability, the stability of
( ) d the superoxides from 'K' to 'Cs' also
where, = magnitude of electric charge increases.
d = distance between particles (or bond 59. (a) 30% solution of H 2 O 2 is known as
length) perhydrol .
H2O2 decomposes as
d 2H 2 O2 2H 2 O O 2
d HI Volume strength of 30% H2O2 solution is
HCl HCl
or 100 i.e., 1 mL of th is solution on
HI d HCl HI decomposition gives 100 mL oxygen.
1.03 1.6 1
3.3 :1 SO2 O2 SO3
1.3 0.38 2
1L 1
L 1L
54. (d) SiCl4 4H 2 O H 4SiO4 4HCl 2
2L 1L 2L
H 4SiO 4 SiO2 2H 2 O
1000 C Since, 100 mL of oxygen is obtained by
55. (c) Mass percent of Cd in CdCl 2 = 1 mL of H2O2
0.9 1000 mL of oxygen will be obtained by
= 100 60% 1
1.5 1000 mL of H O = 10 mL of H O
100 2 2 2 2
Mass percent of Cl2 in CdCl2
= 100 – 60 = 40% dCHA
40% part (Cl2) has atomic weight 60. (d) Buffer capacity, ,
= 2 × 35.5 = 71.0 d pH
60% part (Cd) has atomic weight where, dCHA = no. of moles of acid added
per litre
71.0 60
106.5 dpH = change in pH
40
moles of acetic acid
56. (c) 2Al 2NaOH 2H 2 O 2NaAlO 2 3H 2 dCHA =
volume
sodium meta
aluminate
0.12/60 1
Sodiummetaaluminate, thus formed, is =
250/1000 125
soluble in water and changes into the
complex [Al(H2 O) 2 (OH) 4 ] – , in which 1/125 1
0.4
coordination number of Al is 6. 0.02 2.5
Solved Paper 2009 2009-23
G oreaction G op G Ro 1
Again, [NO2 ] N2 O2
= (78 – 129) – (–109) 2
= + 58 kJ/mol
[N 2 ]1/2 [O2 ]
G o
nFE o K2
[NO2 ]
3 o
58 10 J 1 96500 Ecell
[N 2 ][O 2 ]2
or K 22 ...(ii)
58 1000
o [NO 2 ]2
Ecell 0.6 V
96500
72. (d) Crotonaldehyde is produced by the aldol Eqs. (i) × (ii), we get 100 K 22 1
condensation of acetaldehyde. 1 1
K 22 or K 2 0.1
H 100 10
H
Dil. NaOH 76. (c) For a first order reaction,
CH3 – C = O + H – C – CHO
acetaldehyde
(nucloeophilic 2.303 a
H addition) t log10
a x
acetaldehyde
H H Let initial amount of reactant is 100.
25x 1.148 2x
3/ 2
1/5
x 0.045M 84. (a) 1 (32 5x)
3
C 1/5
79. (b) By ' 2 A B ' , we get 3 2x 5
2 1 (32) 1/ 5 1 x
2 3 32
Na 2 O SO3 Na 2SO4 ; (neglecting higher powers of x)
259 1 1 5
H 2 146 418 [1 x ]2 1 x
2 5 32
H 580.5 581 kJ (neglecting higher powers of x)
80. (a) According to Hardy Schulze rule, greater 1 x
(1 x) 1
the valency of the coagulating ion, greater 2 32
is its coagulating power. Thus, out of the
(1 x)(32 x) 32 31x
given, AlCl3 (Al3 ) is most effective for
64 64
causing coagulation of As2S3 sol. (neglecting x2 term)
85. (c) ( x a)( x a 1) ( x a 1)( x a 2)
PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
( x a )( x a 2) 0
81. (b) Given, f ( x) x3 3 x 2 Let x – a = t, then
f '( x) 3 x2 3 t (t 1) (t 1)(t 2) t (t 2) 0
t 2 t t 2 3t 2 t 3 2t 0
Put f '( x) 0 3x 2 3 0
2
3t 6t 2 0
x2 1
f (x) is either increasing or decreasing. 6 36 24 6 2 3
t
At x = 2, f (2) = 23 + 3(2) – 2 = 12 2(3) 2(3)
At x = 3, f (3) = 33 + 3(3) – 2 = 34
f ( x ) [12, 34] . 3 3
x a
82. (c) The total number of subsets of given set is 3
29 = 512 3 3
Even numbers are {2, 4, 6, 8}. x a
3
Case I : When selecting only one even
Hence, x is real and distinct.
number = 4C1 = 4
Case II : When selecting only two even 86. (b) f ( x) x2 ax b has imaginary roots.
numbers = 4C2 = 6 Discriminant, D
Case III : When selecting only three even 0 a 2 4b 0
numbers = 4C3 = 4 f '( x ) 2 x a
Case IV : When selecting only four even f ''( x ) 2
numbers = 4C4 = 1
Required number of ways Also, f ( x ) f '( x) f ''( x) 0 ...(i)
= 512 – (4 + 6 + 4 + 1) – 1 = 496 x2 ax b 2 x a 2 0
[Here, we subtract 1 for due to the null set] 2
83. (a) The required number of ways = The even x (a 2) x b a 2 0
number of 0's i.e., {0, 2, 4, 6, …}
( a 2) ( a 2) 2 4( a b 2)
n! n! n! x
2
n ! 2!(n 2)! 4!( n 4)!
( a 2) a2 4b 4
n n n n 1
C0 C2 C4 ... 2 2
EBD_7443
2009-26 Target VITEEE
Since, a 2 4b 0 3x 2 3 y 2 3 x2 y2 1
a 2 4b 4 0 90. (c) (1 3i) n (1 3i) n
Hence, Eq. (i) has imaginary roots.
n n
87. (c) f ( x) 2 x4 13x 2 ax b is divisible by 1 3i 1 3i
2 2
2 2
( x 2)( x 1) .
2 n
f (2) 2(2)4 13(2) 2 a (2) b 0 ( 2 ) ( 2 )n
(C2 C2 C3 ) 4 tan 1 ( 1)
=0+0= 0 ( two columns are identical) 1 1 1 1
cos 2 3 cos
89. (c) Let z = x + iy 2 6 2
z 2i 4 tan 1(1)
Given : 1
2z i
3 4
( x)2 ( y 2) 2 3 3 4 4
1
2 2 3 43
(2 x ) (2 y 1)
3
3 4 12
x2 y2 4 4 y 4x2 4 y2 1 4 y
Solved Paper 2009 2009-27
x' x
4
C(±2, ±4) (1, 0)
4
A
O 2 32
y'
Also, point (1, 0) is the focus of the
Required equation of circle is parabola.
( x 2)2 ( y 4)2 20 It is clear from the graph that only one
normal is possible.
x2 y 2 4 x 8 y 0 105. (a) x2 y 2 c4
102. (d) Given circles are
2 2 y 2 (a2 y2 ) c4
x y 2 x 8 y 13 0
2 2
y 4 a 2 y 2 c4 0
and x y 4 x 6 y 11 0 Let y1, y2, y3 and y4 are the roots.
Here C1 (1, 4), C2 (2, 3) y1 y2 y3 y4 0
r1 1 16 13 2 106. (b) Solving 4 x 3 y 5 and 2 x2 3 y 2 12
2
and r2 4 9 11 2 5 3y
2 3y2 12
2 2
4
So, d C1C2 (2 1) ( 3 4) 2
(25 9 y 2 30 y )
d2 r12 r22 2 4 2 1 3y2 12
cos 8
2r1r2 2 2 2 2
15 y 2 30 y 71 0
135
103. (b) Let the required equation of circle be 30 900 4260 3360
y 1
2
x y 2 gx 2 fy 02 30 30
The above circle cuts the given circles 2
2 4x 5
orthogonally. Also, 2 x 3 12
3
8
2( 3 g ) 2 f (0) 8 2g 10 x 2 40 x 61 0
3
and 2 g 2 f 7 40 1600 4 10 61
x
2 10
8 29
2f 7 40 840 840
3 3 2
Required equation of circle is 20 20
8 29 840 3360
x2 y2 x y 0 Points are A 2 ,1
3 3 20 30
or 3 x2 3 y 2 8 x 29 y 0 840 3360
and B 2 ,1 .
104. (b) Given curve is y2 = 4x. 20 30
Mid point of AB is (2, 1).
Solved Paper 2009 2009-29
x 5
x 3
3
x 3 1 x 1 1 1
lim lim 1 log tan x
110. (c) 4 x 1 2
x x 2 x x 2
1 1
3( x 3) a ,b
x 2 x 2 2 4
3 3
lim 1 1 1
x x 2 a 2b 2 1
2 4
1
3
1 114. (c) y e a sin x
lim 3 x
x 1
2 On differentiating w.r.t. x, we get
e x
e3 1 1
y1 e a sin x
a
2 sin x sin 2 x 1 x2
, if x 0
111. (d) f ( x) 2 x cos x
y1 1 x 2 ay
a, if x 0
2
(1 x ) y12
a2 y2
2sin x sin 2 x 0
lim f ( x) lim form Again differentiating w.r.t. x, we get
x 0 x 0 2 x cos x 0
(1 x 2 )2 y1 y2 2 xy12 a 2 2 yy1
2 cos x 2 cos 2 x
lim (1 x 2 ) y2 xy1 a 2 y 0
x 0 2(cos x x sin x )
EBD_7443
2009-30 Target VITEEE
Using Leibnitz's rule,
Y
(1 x 2 ) yn n
C1 yn 1 ( 2 x) n
C2 yn ( 2) 118. (d) y = cos x
2
n
xyn 1 C1 yn a 2 yn 0 y = sin x
(1 x 2 ) yn 2 xyn 1 ( 2n 1) X' X
O /4 /2
2
yn [ n(n 1) n a ] 0
(1 x 2 ) yn 2 (2n 1) xyn 1 (n2 a 2 ) yn
115. (c) Given, f ( x ) x 3 ax 2 bx c, a 2 3b Y'
f '( x) 3x 2 2ax b /4
Area, A1 sin x dx
Put f '( x) 0
0
3x 2 2ax b 0 1
[cos x]0 / 4 1
2a 4a 2
12b 2
x
2 3 2 1
2a 2 a 2 3b 2
/2
3
and area, A2 cos x dx
Since, a 2 3b , /4
x has an imaginary value.
Hence, no extreme value of x exists. /2 1 2 1
[sin x] /4 1
2 sin 2 x x 2 2
116. (a) Let I e dx
1 cos 2 x 2 1 2 1
A1 : A2 : 1:1
2 2sin x cos x x 2 2
e dx
2sin 2 x dy
119. (b) sin ( x y) tan ( x y ) 1
dx
cosec 2 xe x dx cot x e x dx Put x + y = z
cot xe x ( cot x ) e x dx dy dz
1
dx dx
cot x e x dx c
dz
1 sin z tan z 1
cot xe x c dx
117. (c) We know that, if cos z
n dz dx
In sin x dx, then sin 2 z
Putting sin z t cos z dz dt , we have
sin n 1 x cos x n 1
In In 2 1 1
n n dt x c x c
where n is a positive integer. t2 t
cosec z x c x cosec( x y) c
nI n (n 1) I n 2 sin n 1 x cos x
120. (c) p (~ p q) is false means p is true and
~ p q is false.
p is true and both ~p and q are false.
p is true and q is false.
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2008
PART - I (PHYSICS) 6. An electron microscope is used to probe the
atomic arrangements to a resolution of 5Å. What
should be the electric potential to which the
1. Two beams of light will not give rise to an
electrons need to be accelerated ?
interference patern, if
(a) 2.5 V (b) 5 V
(a) they are coherent
(c) 2.5 kV (d) 5 kV
(b) they have the same wavelength
7. Which phenomenon best supports the theory
(c) they are linearly polarized perpendicular to
that matter has a wave nature ?
each other
(a) Electron momentum
(d) they are not monochromatic (b) Electron diffraction
2. A slit of width 'a' is illuminated with a (c) Photon momentum
monochromatic light of wavelength from a (d) Photon diffraction
distant source and the diffraction pattern is 8. The radioactivity of a certain material drops to
observed on a screen placed at a distance 'D'
from the slit. To increase the width of the central 1
of the initial value in 2 hours. The half life of
maximum one should 16
(a) decrease D this radionuclide is
(b) decrease a (a) 10 min (b) 20 min
(c) decrease (c) 30 min (d) 40 min
(d) the width cannot be changed 9. An observer 'A' sees an asteroid with a
3. A thin film of soap solution (n = 1.4) lies on the radioactive element moving by at a speed = 0.3 c
top of a glass plate (n = 1.5). When visible light and measures the radioactivity decay time to be
TA. Another observer 'B' is moving with the
is incident almost normal to the plate, two
asteroid and measures its decay time as TB. Then
adjacent reflection maxima are observed at two
TA and TB are related as below
wavelengths 420 and 630 nm. The minimum
(a) TB < TA
thickness of the soap solution is
(b) TA = TB
(a) 420 nm (b) 450 nm (c) TB > TA
(c) 630 nm (d) 1260 nm (d) Either (A) or (C) depending on whether the
4. If the speed of a wave doubles as it passes from asteroid is approaching or moving away
shallow water into deeper water, its wavelength from A
will be 10. 234U has 92 protons and 234 nucleons total in its
(a) unchanged (b) halved nucleus. It decays by emitting an alpha particle.
(c) doubled (d) quadrupled After the decay it becomes
5. A light whose frequency is equal to 6 × 1014 Hz (a) 232U (b) 232Pa
is incident on a metal whose work function is (c) 230 Th (d) 230Ra
34 19 11. K and K x-rays are emitted when there is a
2eV. h 6.63 10 Js 1eV 1.6 10 J transition of electron between the levels
(a) n = 2 to n = 1 and n = 3 to n = 1 respectively
The maximum energy of the electrons emitted
(b) n = 2 to n = 1 and n = 3 to n = 2 respectively
will be
(c) n = 3 to n = 2 and n = 4 to n = 2 respectively
(a) 2.49 eV (b) 4.49 eV
(d) n = 3 to n = 2 and n = 4 to n = 3 respectively
(c) 0.49 eV (d) 5.49 eV
EBD_7443
2008-2 Target VITEEE
12. A certain radioactive material ZXA starts emitting 18. The reverse saturation of p-n diode
and particles successively such that the end (a) depends on doping concentrations
product is Z 3 Y A 8 . The number of and (b) depends on diffusion lengths of carriers
particles emitted are (c) depends on the doping concentrations and
(a) 4 and 3 respectively diffusion lengths
(b) 2 and 1 respectively (d) depends on the doping concentrations,
(c) 3 and 4 respectively diffusion length and device temperature
(d) 3 and 8 respectively 19. A radio station has two channels. One is AM at
13. 10k 1020 kHz and the other FM at 89.5 MHz. For
good results you will use
1k
– (a) longer antenna for the AM channel and
+1 V A Vout shorter for the FM
+
(b) shorter antenna for the AM channel and
longer for the FM
In the circuit shown above, an input of 1V is fed
(c) same length antenna will work for both
into the inverting input of an ideal Op-amp A.
The output signal Vout will be (d) information given is not enough to say
(a) +10 V (b) –10 V which one to use for which
(c) 0 V (d) infinity 20. The communication using optical fibers is based
14. When a solid with a band gap has a donor level on the principle of
just below its empty energy band, the solid is (a) total internal reflection
(a) an insulator (b) Brewster angle
(b) a conductor
(c) polarization
(c) a p-type semiconductor
(d) an n-type semiconductor (d) resonance
15. A p-n junction has acceptor impurity 21. In nature, the electric charge of any system is
concentration of 1017 cm–3 in the p-side and always equal to
donor impurity concentration of 1016 cm–3 in the (a) half integral multiple of the least amount of
n-side. What is the contact potential at the charge
junction (kT = thermal energy, intrinsic carrier
(b) zero
concentration ni = 1.4×1010 cm–3) ?
(a) (kT/e) ln (4×1012) (c) square of the least amount of charge
(b) (kT/e) ln (2.5×1023) (d) integral multiple of the least amount of
(c) (kT/e) ln (1023) charge
(d) (kT/e) ln (109) 22. The energy stored in the capacitor as shown in
16. A Zener diode has a contact potential of 1V in Fig. (a) is 4.5×10–6 J. If the battery is replaced by
the absence of biasing. It undergoes Zener another capacitor of 900 pF as shown in Fig. (b),
breakdown for an electric field of 106 V/m at the
then the total energy of system is
depletion region of p-n junction. If the width of
the depletion region is 2.5 m, what should be
the reverse biased potential for the Zener + – + –
+ – + –
breakdown to occur ? + – + –
+ – + –
(a) 3.5 V (b) 2.5 V + – 900pF 900pF
(c) 1.5 V (d) 0.5 V + ––
+ –
17. In Colpitt oscillator the feedback network +– + –
100V + 900pF
consists of
(a) two inductors and a capacitor Fig. (a) Fig. (b)
(b) two capacitors and an inductor
(c) three pairs of RC circuit (a) 4.5 × 10–6 J (b) 2.25 × 10–6 J
(d) three pairs of RL circuit (c) zero (d) 9×10–6 J
Solved Paper 2008 2008-3
23. Equal amounts of a metal are converted into 28. Three resistances of 4 each are connected
cylindrical wires of different lengths (L) and
as shown in figure. If the point D divides the
cross-sectional area (A). The wire with the
resistance into two equal halves, the resistance
maximum resistance is the one, which has
(a) length = L and area = A between point A and D will be
L A
(b) length = and area = 2A
2
A 4 4
(c) length = 2L and area =
2
(d) all have the same resistance, as the amount
D
of the metal is the same
24. If the force exerted by an electric dipole on a B 4 C
charge q at a distance of 1m is F, the force at a
point 2m away in the same direction will be (a) 12 (b) 6
F F 1
(a) (b) (c) 3 (d)
2 4 3
F F 29. The resistance of a metal increases with
(c) (d) increasing temperature because
6 8
(a) the collisions of the conducting electrons
25. A solid sphere of radius R1 and volume charge
with the electrons increase
0 (b) the collisions of the conducting electrons
density is enclosed by a hollow sphere
r with the lattice consisting of the ions of the
of radius R2 with negative surface charge density metal increase
, such that the total charge in the system is (c) the number of conduction electrons
zero. 0 is a positive constant and r is the decreases
distance from the centre of the sphere. The ratio (d) the number of conduction electrons
R2 increases
30. In the absence of applied potential, the electric
R1 is
current flowing through a metallic wire is zero
because
(a) (b) 2 / 0 (a) the electrons remain stationary
0 (b) the electrons are drifted in random direction
0 with a speed of the order of 10–2 cm/s
(c) 0 / 2 (d)
26. A solid spherical conductor of radius R has a (c) the electrons move in random direction with
spherical cavity of radius a (a < R) at its centre. A a speed of the order close to that of velocity
charge + Q is kept at the centre. The charge at of light
the inner surface, outer surface and at a position (d) electrons and ions move in opposite
r (a < r < R) are respectively direction
(a) + Q, – Q, 0 (b) – Q, + Q, 0 31. A meter bridge is used to determine the resistance
(c) 0, – Q, 0 (d) + Q, 0, 0 of an unknown wire by measuring the balance
27. A cylindrical capacitor has charge Q and length point length l. If the wire is replaced by another
L. If both the charge and length of the capacitor wire of same material but with double the length
are doubled, by keeping other parameters fixed, and half the thickness, the balancing point is
the energy stored in the capacitor expected to be
(a) remains same
1 1
(b) increases two times (a) (b)
(c) decreases two times 8 4
(d) increases four times (c) 8 (d) 16
EBD_7443
2008-4 Target VITEEE
32. Identify the INCORRECT statement regarding a (a) both bulbs will glow alternatively
superconducting wire (b) both bulbs will glow with same brightness
(a) transport current flows through its surface
1
(b) transport current flows through the entire provided frequency f
area of cross-section of the wire 2 1/ LC
(c) it exhibits zero electrical resistivity and
(c) bulb b1 will light up initially and goes off,
expels applied magnetic field
bulb b2 will be ON constantly
(d) it is used to produce large magnetic field
(d) bulb b1 will blink and bulb b2 will be ON
33. A sample of HCl gas is placed in an electric field
constantly
3×104 NC–1. The dipole moment of each HCl
molecule is 6×10–30cm. The maximum torque 37. A transformer rated at 10 kW is used to connect
that can act on a molecule is a 5kV transmission line to a 240V circuit. The
(a) 2 × 10–34 C2Nm–1 (b) 2 × 10–34 Nm ratio of turns in the windings of the transformer
(c) 18 × 10–26 Nm (d) 0.5×1034 C–2 Nm–1 is
34. When a metallic plate swings between the poles (a) 5 (b) 20.8
of a magnet (c) 104 (d) 40
(a) no effect on the plate 38. Three solenoid coils of same dimension, same
(b) eddy currents are set up inside the plate number of turns and same number of layers of
and the direction of the current is along the winding are taken. Coil 1 with inductance L1 was
motion of the plate wound using a Mn wire of resistance 11 /m;
(c) eddy currents are set up inside the plate Coil 2 with inductance L2 was wound using the
and the direction of the current oppose the similar wire but the direction of winding was
motion of the plate reversed in each layer; Coil 3 with inductance L3
(d) eddy currents are set up inside the plate was wound using a superconducting wire. The
35. When an electrical appliance is switched on, it self inductance of the coils L1, L2, L3 are
responds almost immediately, because
(a) L1 = L2 = L3 (b) L1 = L2; L3 = 0
(a) the electrons in the connecting wires move
(c) L1 = L3; L2 = 0 (d) L1 > L2 > L3
with the speed of light
39. Light travels with a speed of 2 × 108 m/s in crown
(b) the electrical signal is carried by
glass of refractive index 1.5. What is the speed
electromagnetic waves moving with the
speed of light of light in dense flint glass of refractive index
1.8 ?
(c) the electrons move with the speed which is
close to but less than speed of light (a) 1.33 × 108 m/s (b) 1.67 × 108 m/s
8
(c) 2.0 × 10 m/s (d) 3.0 ×108 m/s
(d) the electrons are stagnant.
36. Two identical incandescent light bulbs are 40. A parallel beam of fast moving electrons is
connected as shown in the Figure. When the incident normally on a narrow slit. A screen is
circuit is an AC voltage source of frequency f, placed at a large distance from the slit. If the
which of the following observations will be speed of the electrons is increased, which of the
correct ? following statement is correct ?
(a) diffraction pattern is not observed on the
R R screen in the case of electrons
(b) the angular width of the central maximum
C of the diffraction pattern will increase
L
Bulb b1 (c) the angular width of the central maximum
Bulb b2 will decrease
(d) the angular width of the central maximum
will remain the same
Solved Paper 2008 2008-5
(d) 3 2 log(1 2) 2 2
dy dy
(b) y x a2 1
dx dx
x5
96. If I dx , then I is equal to
1 x3 dy dy
(c) y x a2 1
5 3
dx dx
2 2
(a) (1 x 3 ) 2 (1 x3 ) 2 C dy dy
9 3 (d) y a2 1
dx dx
(b) log x 1 x3 C
dy
101. The differential equation y 3 0
dx
(c) log x 1 x3 C admits
(a) infinite number of solutions
3 1 (b) no solution
2 2 (c) a unique solution
(d) (1 x 3 ) 2 (1 x3 ) 2 C
9 3 (d) many solutions
Solved Paper 2008 2008-9
102. Solution of the differential equation 109. Mean and standard deviation of marks obtained
in some particular subject by four classes are
xdy ydx x2 y2 dx 0 is given below. Report the class with best
performance
(a) y x2 y2 C x2
(a) 80, 18 (b) 75, 5
(c) 80, 21 (d) 76, 7
(b) y x2 y2 C x2
110. A random variable X follows binomial
(c) x x2 y2 C y2 distribution with mean and variance . Then
(a) 0 < < (b) 0 < <
(d) x x 2 y2 C y 2 (c) <0< (d) <0<
103. Let P, Q, R and S be statements and suppose 111. The system of equations
x + y+ z = 0
that P Q R P. if ~ S R , then
2x + 3y + z = 0
(a) S ~ Q (b) ~ Q S x + 2y = 0
(c) ~ S ~ Q (d) Q ~ S has
104. In how many number of ways can 10 students (a) a unique solution; x = 0, y = 0, z = 0
be divided into three teams, one containing four (b) infinite solutions
students and the other three? (c) no solution
(a) 400 (b) 700 (d) finite number of non-zero solutions
(c) 1050 (d) 2100
105. If R be a relation defined as a R b iff |a – b| > 0, 4
0 a
then the relation is 112. 1 , then
b 0
(a) reflexive (b) symmetric
(c) transitive (a) a = 1 = 2b (b) a = b
(d) symmetric and transitive (c) a = b2 (d) ab = 1
106. Let S be a finite set containing n elements. Then 113. If D = diag (d1, d2, ..., dn) where d1 0, for
the total number of commutative binary i = 1, 2, ..., n, then D–1 is equal to
operation on S is
(a) DT
n(n 1 n(n 1 (b) D
(a) 2 (b) 2
n n (c) Adj (D)
(c) n (n ) 2
(d) 2(n 2 ) (d) diag (d1–1, d2–1, ...dn–1)
114. If x, y, z are different from zero and
107. A manufacturer of cotter pins knows that 5% of
his product is defective. He sells pins in boxes a b y c z
of 100 and guarantees that not more than one
a x b c z
pin will be defective in a box. In order to find the = 0 then the value of
probability that a box will fail to meet the a x b y c
guaranteed quality, the probability distribution
one has to employ is a b
c
(a) Binomial (b) Poisson the expression is
x y
z
(c) Normal (d) Exponential
108. The probability that a certain kind of component (a) 0 (b) –1
(c) 1 (d) 2
3 115. Probability of getting positive integral roots of
will survive a given shock test is . The
4 the equation x2 – n = 0 for the integer n, 1 < n < 40
probability that exactly 2 of the next 4 is
components tested survive is
1 1
9 25 (a) (b)
(a) (b) 5 10
41 128
3 1
1 27 (c) (d)
(c) (d) 20 20
5 128
EBD_7443
2008-10 Target VITEEE
116. The number of real roots of the equation 119. The plane through the point (–1, –1, –1) and
containing the line of intersection of the planes
x4 x 4 20 22 is
(a) 4 (b) 2 r.(iˆ 3jˆ k)
ˆ 0 and r.(ˆj 2k) ˆ 0 is
(c) 0 (d) 1 (a) r.(iˆ 2ˆj 3k)
ˆ 0
117. Let , be the roots of the equation
x2 – ax + b = 0 and An = n + n. (b) r.(iˆ 4jˆ k)
ˆ 0
Then An+1 – aAn + bAn–1 is equal to
(a) –a (b) b (c) r.(iˆ 5jˆ 5k)
ˆ 0
(c) 0 (d) a – b
118. If the sides of a right-angle triangle form an A.P.,
(d) r.(iˆ ˆj 3k)
ˆ 0
the 'Sin' of the acute angles are 120. a ˆi ˆj kˆ and b 2iˆ 4jˆ 3kˆ are one of the
3 4 sides and medians respectively, of a triangle
(a) ,
5 5 through the same vertex, then area of the triangle
is
1
(b) 3, 1
3 (a) 83 (b) 83
2
5 1 5 1 1
, (c) 85 (d) 86
(c) 2 2 2
3 1 3 1
(d) ,
2 2
Solved Paper 2008 2008-11
SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS)
2
1. (d) Two beams of light give rise to an
interference pattern if they are coherent, they t 2
1
have same wavelength/frequency in same 1
phase or having a constant phase difference
and same state of polarisation. Putting, 1 = 420 nm, 2 = 630 nm, = 1.4
Interference pattern can not be obtained if We get, t = 450 nm
the two beams are not mono chromatic. 4. (c) We have,
2. (b) By the theory of diffraction at a single slit, speed = frequency × wavelength
the width of the central maximum is given by Also, when a wave passes from one medium
2D to the other, its frequency remains constant.
W W D, speed wavelength
a
Therefore, when the speed of a wave doubles,
1 its wavelength also doubles.
W and W 5. (c) Here,
a
Therefore, to increase the width of the central Frequency, = 6 ×1014 Hz
maximum a should be decreased. Work-function, = 2eV = 2 × 1.6 × 10–19 J
3. (b) R1 and R2 are the two rays considered for = 3.2 × 10–19J
interference. R1 is the result of reflection at Maximum energy, Tmax = ?
denser medium; hence it suffers an additional By Einstein's photo electric equation, we
have
path difference of . Ray R2 originates after h = + Tmax
2 Tmax = h –
reflection at narer medium. = (6.63 × 10–34 × 6 × 1014)– (3.2 × 10–19)
= (3.97 × 10–19) – (3.2 × 10–19)
Net path difference = 2 t+ , = 0. 77 × 10–19 J
2
where t is the thickness of the soap solution. 19
0.77 10
For constructive interference, = eV = 0.49 eV
19
1.6 10
2 t+ = m , where m = 0, 1, 2..... 6. (b) We have, d sin
2
Let the two adjacent reflection maxima be For = 90° and n = 1, we get d =
observed at m and m–1. Then
h h h2
1 But = =
2 t m 1 p 2meV 2meV
2
1 34 2
(6.63 10 )
or 2 t m 1 ... (1) =
2 31 19
2 9.1 10 1.6 10 V
3
Similarly, 2 t m 2 ...(2) 1.5
10 9
m
1.5
10 9
2 = d=
V V
Solving (1) & (2), we get
R1 R2 1.5 1.5
or 5 10 10
10 9 or 0.5
n=1 V V
Soap solution n = 1.4 1.5 1.5
Glass Plate or 0.5 0.5 V = 6V
T n = 1.5 V 0.5 0.5
EBD_7443
2008-12 Target VITEEE
No option is matching with the exact answer. 12. (b) Let thenumber of and particles emitted
But 5V is approximately equal to the exact be m and n respectively. Then
potential. Therefore, option (b) should be the A – 4m = A – 8 m = 2
correct option. [ the mass number of a radioactive nuclide
7. (b) Davison and Germer performed an experiment decreases by 4 due to emission of one -
to prove that matter has a wave nature. The particle]
experiment was based on electron diffraction.
Again,
t (Z – 2m) + n = Z – 3
1 T1/ 2 [ the atomic number decreases by 2 due to
8 (c) We have, Nt = N0 ,
2 emission of 1 -particle but increases by 1
When due to emission of 1 - particle]
Nt = number of atoms present after time t or –2m + n = –3
N0 = initial number of atoms or 2m – n = 3
T1/2 = half life of the nuclide or (2 × 2) –n = 3 ( m=2)
t 2 n=1
Nt 1 T1/ 2 1 1 T1/ 2
or 13. (b) Rf
N0 2 16 2
2
4 2
1 1 T1/ 2 4 RI
or T1/ 2
2 2 VI – Op – amp Vo
2 1
T1/2 = Hr = Hr T1/2 = 30 min. +
4 2
9. (c) Due to time dilation the interval between two
events at the same point in a moving frame
appears to be longer by a factor For the Op-amp shown above, we have
1 Vo Rf
2 VI RI
v to an observer in a stationary
1
c 2 Comparing this circuit with the given one,
frame. We get VI = 1V, Rf = 10k = 10 × 103
Time dilation is independent of the direction RI = 1k = 1 × 103
of velocity and depends only on its
magnitude. Vo 10 103
Vo = – 10 V
10. (c) The - decay in the case of 234U takes place 1 1 103
as follows : 14. (d) The solid is an n-type semiconductor. In an
234 230 Th 4 n-type semiconductor, the impurity is
92 U 90 2 He
pentavalent which is also called the Donar
11. (a) When electron jumps from the level n = 2 to impurity because one impurity atom generate
the level n = 1, K x - rays are emitted.
Similarly, K x-rays are emitted when there is one electron. The Donor energy level lies
atransition of electron from the level n = 3 to just below the conduction band as shown in
the level n = 1. X-ray spectra has been shown the figure.
below.
O n=5 Conduction band
N n=4
M M Donor levels
M n=3
Valence band
L L L
L n=2 15. (a) We have, ID = IS (e VD / VT 1)
K
K kT
K
K where, VT
e
K n=1
Solved Paper 2008 2008-13
V0
20. (a) The principle of communication using optical
ID VT ID VD fibers is based on the principle of total
1 e or ln 1 internal reflection.
IS IS nVT
ID ID
VD nVT ln 1 = VT ln 1 21. (d) According to quantization of charge, the
IS IS charge of any system is an integral multiple
I majority of the charge of electron which is the least
= VT ln amount of charge on any system.
IS 22. (b) The charge on the capacitor when connected
to the battery is given by
Here, n e (1017 1016 )cm 3
+ – + –
= 1016 (10 1)cm 3
9 1016 cm 3 +
+
–
–
+
+
–
–
+ – + –
We know that, ne nh ni2 900pF 900pF
n i2 (1.4 1010 )2
nh cm3 + –
ne 9 1016 + –
+
+
–
–
Imajority 100 V + –
ne 900pF
Also,
IS nh Q= CV = (900 × 10–12 F) × 100 V = 9 × 10–8 C
When the battery is replaced by another
9 1016 capacitor of 900 pF capacitance, the charge
kT of 9 × 10–8 C is distributed on both. Let Q1
VD ln (1.4 1010 ) 2
e and Q2 be the charge on each of them.
9 1016 Q = Q1 + Q2
= C1V + C2V, where V is the common potential.
kT Q
= ln(4 1012 )
e or V = C C
1 2
16. (c) Here, electric field, E = 106 V/m
width of depletion region, As the two capacitors are in parallel, the
d = 2.5 m = 2.5 × 10–6m equivalent capacitance is given by C = C1 + C2
Potential required for breakdown 1
(V) = Ed = (106 × 2.5 × 10–6) V = 2.5 V Total energy of the capacitors = CV 2
2
Contact Potential = 1.0 V
Reverse biased potential for zener 1 Q2 Q2
breakdown = (2.5 – 1.0) V = 1.5 V = C1 C2
2 =
17. (b) In a colpitt oscillator, the feed-back network 2 C1 C2 2(C1 C2 )
consists of two capacitors and one inductor. 2
18. (d) The reverse saturation of p-n diode depends 9 10 8
on the doping concentrations, diffusion =
length and device temperature. 2(900 10 12 900 10 12 )
F = qE 1
F
r3 27. (b) The energy stored in a capacitor is given by
When the distance of the charge becomes Q2
2m, i.e. double of its initial value, then new E
force (F´) will become 2C
1 2 0 L
F´ = .F = F Here, C , where
(2) 3
8 R2
ln
25. (c) Let us first calculate the total charge on the R1
soild sphere. L = length of the cylindrical conductor
Let us consider a concentric sphere of radius R1 = inner radius
r and thickness dr. R2 = outer radius
Then volume of thesphere, dV = 4 r2dr
Given, the volume charge density of the Q2
C L E
0
L
sphere = When both Q and L are doubled, by keeping
r
other parameters fixed, the energy stored (E´)
R1 becomes
r dr
(2Q) 2
E´
2L
Charge on this sphere, 2Q 2
L
dQ = .dV
0
.4 r 2 dr = 4 .rdr..
r E´ 2E
Solved Paper 2008 2008-15
47. (b) No. of moles of a compound Hence the Ph– will attack the phosphorous
given mass (gm) in PCl 3 to form organic phosphine with
= Molar mass (gm) formula Ph3P.
3PhMgBr PCl3 Ph 3 P 3MgBrCl
25.6 Triphenylphosphine
i.e. = 0.0748 moles.
342.3 53. (d) Transition elements or d-block elements have
1 mole of sucrose (C12 H22O11) contains 6.022 variable oxidation states, they form coloured
× 1023 molecules of it. compounds because of partially filled d-
Hence 0.0748 moles contains orbitals and also because of small size they
= 6.022 × 1023 × 0.0748 form interstitial compounds. They are stable
= 0.4504 × 1023 molecules. elements and does not show radio activity.
1 molecule of sucrose by formula is having 54. (a) In PCl 5 , phosphorous undergoes sp 3 d
22 atoms of hydrogen. hybridization and has trigonal bipyramidal
0.4504 × 1023 × 1023 × 22 = 9.91 × 1023 geometry. It has two axial chlorine atoms &
atoms of hydrogen. three equatorial chlorine atoms bonded to
48. (c) Milk contains lactose as milk sugar. After the central P.
digestion of milk lactose is broken down by Hence bond angles for axial are 90°, Cl–P–Cl
enzymes lactase to form glucose and & for equatorial Cl–P–Cl it is 120°.
galactose before it enter the blood stream.
49. (b) Out of 20 amino acids, the 10 amino acids Cl
which human body cannot synthesize are 90°
called essential amino acids. The ten Cl
essential amino acids are :
1) Valine 2) Leucine 3) Isolucine 4) Histidine Cl P 120°
5) Phenylanaline 6) Methionine 7)
Tryptophan 8) Lysine 9) Arginine 10) Cl
Threonine.
50. (c) Among the given examples, glucose is an Cl
alcohexose, sucrose is a disaccharide, 55. (a) Magnetic moment of a salt depends upon
fructose is a ketohexose while ribose is a the number of unpaired d-electrons. In Zn 2+
aldopentose.
salt configuration of cation is 4s03d10. Hence
51. (d) To find the oxidation number of a given
compound we have to equate the charge on total no. of unpaired electron, n is zero. So
the overall compound with the charge on magnetic moment i.e.
individual atom of which the compound is B.M. n(n 2) 0.
made of. 56. (a) Formula unit = no. of molecules of CaF2.
In KO3 . K is an alkali metal.
hence its oxidation number is +1. massin gm 146.4 gm
Moles = molar mass 78.08gm 1.875
1
(+1) + 3 × (x) = 0 or x = 0.33
3 Molecules = Mole × 6.022 × 1023
hence oxidation number of oxygen = 1.875 × 6.022 × 1023
i.e. x = –0.33. = 1.129 × 1024 units of CaF2
In Na2 O2, again Na is an alkali metal. 57. (c) For writing IUPAC name of a co-ordination
Hence 2 × (+1) + 2 × x = 0 compound we first write the name of (+) ive
2 complex here. [Co(NH3)5Cl]2+
x= 1 The names of ligands will come first in
2 alphabatical order, followed by metal ion with
52. (c) In a reaction the alkyl part of grignard reagent its oxidation state written in bracket or
acts as a nucleophile as carbon is more
parentheis in Roman number i.e. Co (III) here.
electronegative than magnesium. Hence the
IUPAC name for cationic complex
alkyl part will get attached to the electron
deficient species. Pentaamine chloro cobalt (III).
In PCl3, chlorine is more electronegative than This will follow the name of anion with a gap.
phosphorous. i.e. Pentaamine chloro cobalt (III) chloride.
EBD_7443
2008-18 Target VITEEE
58. (b) Fe (III) ion from ferric nitrate will react with 65. (b) The driving forces which are responsible for
thiocyanate, SCN– ion to form a blood red a process to be spontaneous are :
complex i.e. FeSCN2+. But in presence of i) Tendency for minimizing energy
water it forms a complex containing five water ii)Tendency for maximum randomness. i.e.
molecules. i.e. [Fe (H2O)5 (SCN–)]2+.
maximum entropy
59. (c) Silver nitrate has been used since the
begining of nineteenth century to dye hair. 66. (b) For 1st order reaction.
Silver salts darken when exposed to light and 0.693
silver combines with protein yeilding a dark t½ (half life time) =
K
coloured proteinate.
60. (b) Schottky defect is generally shown by 0.693 0.693
compounds which have ionic nature and Hence K = = = 0.693 ×
t½ (60 40)sec
small difference in the size of cations &
anions. 10–2 sec–1 = 6.93 × 10–3 sec–1
In this defect equal no. of cations & anions 67. (b) Since NaNO3 is formed by the reaction
is found missing from their lattice sites.
61. (d) In [Co(NH3) 6]3+ and {CoF6}3– both the Nacl KNO3 NaNO3 KCl
oxidation state of cobalt ion is +3. In first hence, using Kohlrausch's law
case NH3 is the neutral ligand which is a
o o o o
strong field ligand. m NaNO 3 NaCl KNO 3 KCl
hence the electrons in Co (+III) i.e. 4s03d6
get paired to form inner orbital complex. = 128 + 111 – 152 = 87 S cm2 mol–1
Hence no unpaired electron. 68. (c) As we know that
On the other hand F– is a weak field ligand Ecell = Ecathode – Eanode
hence it forms an outer orbital complex with when Ecathode = Eanode
4 unpaired electrons. Ecell = 0
62. (a) G° = –115 kJ at 298K. If Ecell = 0 no net reaction occurs. The
Now, G° = –2.303 RT log kP reactants and products are at equilibrium and no
R = 8.314 JK–1 mol –1 & T = 298K. current will flow.
G° = –2.303 × 8.314 × 298 × log kP Note that it is only possible to obtain electrical
115 103 work from a system that is not at equilibrium. In
log kP = = 20.155 order for current to flow, there must be a net
2.303 8.314 298 reaction occurring. As the oxidation- reduction
= 20.16 reaction proceeds toward equilibrium, and the
63. (c) For a reaction to take place spontaneously concentrations of the reacting species approach
the value of G must be negative i.e. G< 0. their equilibrium values, the EMF of the cell
Now, G = H– T S. decreases to zero. When the system is at
As the reaction is endothermic, so value of equilibrium, the cell potential is zero and we have
H must be positive, i.e. H > 0. a dead battery.
Hence to have a negative G.
H < T S. As T & P are constant. 69. (c) In CuSO4 solution, oxidation state of Cu is
T S must be positive to give the total value +2. Hence one mole of copper sulphate will
a negative sign. require charge equal to two moles of
Hence S> 0. electrons to form metallic Cu. Mole charge =
64. (b) Any first order reaction follows the equation IF. Hence 2 Faraday is required.
k 70. (c) Rusting of iron is generally promoted in an
log [A] = t + log [A]o acidic aqueous medium. Alkaline medium
2.303
it resembles equation of straight line prevents availability of H+ ions. Sodium
y = mx + C phosphate will cause formation of a
y = log [A] i.e. log10 C protective film of iron phosphate on the iron
k preventing rusting. These solutions are used
m= if x = t & C = log [A]0 in car radiators to prevent rusting of iron
2.303
hence the plot is for a 1st order reaction. parts.
Solved Paper 2008 2008-19
71. (a) Hydroboration-oxidation of alkenes give 76. (c) The witting reaction is a chemical reaction of
alcohols containing same number of carbon an aldehyde or ketone with triphenyl
atoms. The addition follow anti-Markowi phosphonium ylide to give an alkene and
Koff's rule. Boron atom act as an electrophile. triphenyl phosphine oxide.
Main two steps re involved. Reagent used R
BH3 & NaOH/H2O2.
C = O + (C6 H5)3 P = C
H H H Me H R´
| | | | |
3H3C — C — C— C — C — C— C CH2 BH 3 OR
| | | | | |
H H H H H H R
–+
4 - methyl octene (C6H5)3P – C
Phosphorus ylide R´
R 3B
where R=4-methyl octyl R
C=C + O = P(C6 H5)3
H 2O 2 R´
3CH 3 (CH 2 ) 3 CH (CH 2 ) 3 OH
NaOH | Triphenyl phosphine
Me oxide
4 Methyloctanol
77. (a) Cannizaro's reaction is for those aldehydes
72. (d) Ethyl alcohol on treating with conc. H2SO4
which does not contain - hydrogen atom.
undergoes dehydration to form alkene i.e.
This is also called self oxidation - reduction
ethylene
reaction. Among the given carbonyl
Conc
C2 H5 OH C2 H 4 H 2O compounds only HCHO does not have -
H 2SO4
hydrogen.
OCH3
CHO
73. (b) Anisole is O , Phenyl methyl ether. It 78. (c) O + CO
AlCl3
HCl O
can be prepared by treating phenol first with
a base like NaOH to form phenoxide ion. The When a mixture of CO and HCl gas is passed
phenoxide ion will then substitute the halide through benzene in presence of catalyst
of an R-X molecule, to form methyl phenyl consisting anhydrous AlCl3, benzaldehyde
ether. is formed.
C6 H5ONa CH3 Cl CH3 O C6 H5 CO HCl HOCl
Anisole
formyl chloride
74. (c) Alkaline Potassium permanganate is a strong
oxidising agent. It oxidises ethylene glycol AlCl3
C6 H 6 HOCl C6 H 5 CHO HCl
to oxalic acid.
79. (b) Maleic acid & fumaric acid are both the
CH2OH COOH
alk. isomers of butene dioic acid. Maleic acid is
KMnO 4 the cis isomer & fumaric is the trans-isomer.
CH2OH COOH
Ethylene Oxalic O O
glycol acid O OH
75. (a) In the structure of diamond each carbon atom OH OH
in sp3 hybridised & is covalently bonded OH O
with four other carbon atom held at the Maleic acid Fumaric acid
corners of a regular tetrahedron by covalent
bonds. This results in a very big three 80. (c) Alkali formate i.e. HCOONa with soda-lime
dimensional polymeric structure in which C i.e. NaOH + CaO will react to give Na2CO3
– C distance is 154 pm and bond angle is and hydrogen gas is liberated.
109.5°. Owing to very strong covalent bonds CaO
HCOONa NaOH Na 2 CO3 H 2
by which atoms are held to gether diamond
is the hardest substance known.
EBD_7443
2008-20 Target VITEEE
a2 b2
= + c2 – 2bc cos A x2 + y2 + z2 + 3x – 4z + 1 = 0,
= (b + c)2 – 2bc – 2bc cos A
3
= (b + c)2 – 2bc (1 + cos A) Centre , 0, 2 , and
2
3
= (61)2 – 2 × 820 1 2
5 3
Radius = 02 (2)2 1
= 3721 – 2624 = 1097 2
87. (d) Equation of first line,
x 6 y 2 z 2 9 21
k(say) 4 1
1 2 2 4 2
x = k + 6, y = –2k + 2, z = 2k + 2 89. (b) Let two fixed points be A (ae, 0) and B (–ae,
Hence, general point on the first line, 0). Let C (x, y) be a moving point such that
P (k + 6, – 2k + 2, 2k + 2) AC + CB = constant = 2a (say)
Equation of second line,
i.e. , (x ae) 2 (y 0)2
x 4 y Z 1
l (say)
3 2 2 (x ae) 2 (y 0)2 2a
x = 3l – 4, y = –2l, z = –2l –1
Hence, general point on the second line, Or x2 y2 a 2e2 2aex
Q (3l – 4, – 2l, –2l – 1)
Direction ratios of PQ are x 2 y 2 a 2e 2 2aex 2a ...(1)
3l – 4 – k –6, –2l + 2k –2, – 2l –1 –2k – 2 Or l + m = 2a ...(2)
i.e. 3l – k – 10, –2l + 2k– 2, – 2l –2k – 3 Where, l2 = x2 + y2 + a2e2 – 2aex ...(3)
Now |PQ| will be the shortest distance and m2 = x2 + y2 + a2e2 + 2aex ...(4)
between the two lines if PQ is perpendicular From, (3) and (4)
to both the lines. Hence, m2 – l2 = 4aex
1(3l k 10) ( 2) or (m – l) (l + m) = 4 aex
2a (m – l) = 4aex [From (2)]
( 2l 2k 2) 2( 2l 2k 3) 0
m – l = 2ex ...(5)
and 3 (3l – k – 10) + (–2) (–2l Adding (2) and (5), we get
+ 2k – 2) + (–2) (–2l – 2k – 3) = 0 m = a + ex ...(6)
i.e. 3l – 9k = 12 or l – 3k = 4 ...(i) From (4) and (6),
and 17l – 3k = 20 ... (ii) a2 +e2 x2 + 2aex = x2 +y2 + a2e2 + 2aex
Subtracting equation (i) from (ii), we get x2 (1 – e2) + y2 = a2 (1 – e2)
16l = 16 l=1 Dividing both sides by a2 (1 – e2), we get
Putting this value of l in equation (i), we get
– 3k = 3, k = – 1 x2 y2
P (–1 + 6, – 2 (– 1) + 2, 2 (– 1) + 2) 1
a2 a 2 (1 e 2 )
(5, 4, 0)
Similarly, Q = (–1, –2, –3) x2 y2
Hence, shortest distance, PQ, Or 1 , where b2 = a2 (1 – e2)
a2 b2
= ( 1 5)2 ( 2 4)2 ( 3 0)2 This is the equation of ellipse.
90. (d) The equation of the parabola is
= ( 6)2 ( 6)2 ( 3)2 = 36 36 9
y2 4x 3 0
= 9 units
88. (c) Since the centre and radius of the sphere 3
x2 + y2 + z2 + 2 ux + 2vy + 2wz + d = 0 are or y2 4 x ...(1)
4
(–u, –v, – w) and u 2 v 2 w2 d The directrix of the parabola
respectively. So, for the sphere Y2 = – 4aX ... (2)
is X = a.
EBD_7443
2008-22 Target VITEEE
On comparing the equation (1) and (2), we 93. (b) Check the continuity of the function
3 f (x) = [tan2 x] at x = 0.
get 4a = 4 and X x L.H.L. (at x = 0)
4
2
3 = lim [tan x] lim [tan 2 (0 h)]
x 0 h 0
or a= 1 and X x
4 2 2
Hence the directrix of the parabola (1) is = lim [tan h] [tan 0] [0] 0
h 0
3 1 R.H.L. (at x = 0)
x 1or x 0.
4 4 2
= lim [tan x] lim [tan 2 (0 h)]
91. (b) g (x). g(y) = g(x) + g (y) + g (x y) – 2 ...(1) x 0 h 0
Put x = 1, y = 2, then
2 2
g (1). g(2) = g (1) + g (2) + g (2) – 2 = lim [tan h] [tan 0] [0] 0
5g (1) = g (1) + 5 + 5 – 2 h 0
4g (1) = 8 g(1) = 2 Now, determine the value of f(x) at x = 0.
f (0) = [tan 2 0] = [0] = 0
1 Hence, f (x) is continuous at x = 0.
Put y in equation (1) , we get
x 94. (c) Let r and V be the respectively radius and
1 1 volume of the balloon. Let t represents the
g(x).g g(x) g g(1) 2 time. The rate of increament in radius is
x x
dr
1 1 2 cm/minute. The volume of the
g(x).g g(x) g 2 2 dt
x x balloon is given by
[ g(1) 2] 4 3
V r
This is valid only for the polynomial 3
g (x) = 1 + xn ... (2) Differentiating w.r. to t, we get
Now g (2) = 5 (Given)
1 + 2n = 5 [Using equation (2)] dV 4 dr
(3r 2 )
+ 2n = 4, 2n = 4, –4 dt 3 dt
Since the value of 2n cannot be –Ve. dr
So, 2n = 4, n = 2 Substituting the values of and , we get
Now, put n = 2 in equation (2), we get dt
g (x) = 1 + x2 dV 4
(3 52 2) 200 cm3 / minute
2
Lt g(x) = Lt (1 x ) = 1 + (3)2 dt 3
x 3 x 3 95. (a) On comparing the equation of the parabola
= 1 + 9 = 10, – 8 y2 = 12 x with the standard equation,
y2 = 4 ax, we get 4 a = 12 or a = 3.
ex 2x
92. (d) f (x) y
x
A(3, 6)
1 x x2 x3 log 2
=x (1 ..) 1 x
1! 2! 3! 1!
6
centre ( 2, 0 ).
2 2 Observe the figure of ellipse (1). The centre
log y 6 y C
0
2
1 6 2 P is ( 2, 0 ). A and B are 2, , 0 and
= 6 62 18log 6 6 2
6 2
3 2
2
C 0 18log 0 62 0 C 2 , 0 respectively..
EBD_7443
2008-24 Target VITEEE
y Q
1 1
=8 (0) + sin –1 (1)–0–0
1
8 4 square units.
2
98. (c) Let x = cos2 , so that dx = – 2a sin cos d
2 ,0 2 ,0
2 2 a a x 0 a a cos2
( 2, 0)
Now dx
O A P B 0 x 2 a cos 2
( a sin cos )d
[ at x 0; 0 at x a]
2
/2 1 cos 2
=a 0 2sin cos d
cos 2
The required area = 4 × area of figure PQB 0 t
f (x) dx f (x) dx
2 t 0
2
=4 ydx
2 /2 sin
2
=a 2 .sin cos
2 8
0 cos
=4 4(x 2) 2 dx /2 /2
2
=a 2sin 2 =a (1 cos 2 ) d
2 2
0 0
2 2
4 2 (x 2) 2 dx [ cos 2 1 2sin 2 ]
2
/2
sin 2
x 2 2 =a
2)2 2 0
=8 2
(x
sin
2
2 =a (0 0)
(2 / ) x 2 2 2
1
sin
2 2/ a
2
=a 0
a 2
x
2 2
1 1
a2 x 2 dx x a2 x2 sin C 99. (b) According to the question,
2 2 a
dy dy
2 y ky
2 2 dt dt
2 2 2
8 ( 2 2)
= 2 x dy
Separating the variables, we get kdt
dt
2 dy
2 2 Integrating both sides, we get k dt
1 1 2 2 y
sin
2 2 log y = k t + M (as y cannot be –ve)
y = ekt+M y = eM . ekt
y = C ekt, where C = eM
2 1 2 2 Constant k cannot be positive because the
( 2 2) 2 sin 1
2/ population never increases in time. And
Solved Paper 2008 2008-25
(y x2 y2 a a 0| 0 a R/ a
dy
dx x This, R is not reflexive on R.
EBD_7443
2008-26 Target VITEEE
Symmetry – Let a and b be two distinct 2 2
n 3 1
elements, then (a, b) R Cr pr q n r 4
C2
4 4
|a – b| > 0 |b – a| > 0
a b b a 3 3 1 27
=6
4 4 4 4 128
(b, a) R 109. (b) Performance of the class will be best if mean
Thus, (a, b) R (b, a) R. So, R is of the marks obtained is maximum but
symmetric. standard deviation of the marks obtained is
Transitivity – Let (a, b) R and (b, c) R. minimum.
Then |a – b| > 0 and |b – c| > 0 Hence the class which has mean and
|a – c| > 0 (a, c) R standard deviation of the marks obtained as
So, R is transitive. 75 and 5 respectively performs best.
106. (a) Let S = {ai } where i = 1.2.....n 110. (b) Mean, np = ; and variance, npq = where n
From commutative operations, = number of trials and p + q = 1.
a i *a j a j *ai … (i) i, j 1, 2,3....n npq
So, q (1 p)
where * represents a binary operation np
Number of distinct elements in S × S
0 p 1
i.e., {a i } {a j} subject to the condition (i)
–1< – p < 0 0<1–p<1
i 1,2...n j 1,2...n
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 d n1
d1 0 0 0 = diag ( d1 1 , d 2 1,...., d n 1 )
0 d2 0 0
a b y c z
0 0 d3 0
D 114. (d) a x b c z 0
a x b y c
0 0 0 0 0 a(bc bc bz cy yz) (b y)
= d1 d2 d3 ....... dn (ac cx ac az cx zx) (c z)
(ab ay bx xy ab bx) 0
d 2 d 3d 4 ...dn 0 0 0 abz + acy – ayz – abz + bzx + ayz –
0 d1d 3d 4 ...dn 0 0
0 0 d1d 2 d 4 ...dn 0 xyz – acy + cxy + ayz – xyz = 0
adj(D)
ayz bzx cxy 2xyz 0
0 0 0 0 d1d 2 d 3 ...d n 1 a b c
2 0 (Dividing by xyz)
1 1 x y z
d adj (D)
D a b c
2
1 x y z
adj(D)
d1d 2 d3....d n 115. (c) x2 – n = 0 x n
d 2 d3d 4 ...dn 0 0 0 For each integral value of x [1, 40], There is
0 d1d3 d 4 ...dn 0 0 a positive root. Hence for 40 integral values
0 0 d1d 2 d 4 ...dn 0 of x from 1 to 40, there are 40 positive roots,
out of which only six roots 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6
are positive integral roots. Hence, probability
0 0 0 0 d1d 2 d3 ...d n 1
6 3
of getting positive integral roots =
40 20
1
0 0 0
d1 116. (a) x4 x4 20 22
1
0 0 0 or x4 – 22 =x 4 20
d2 4
Put x = y and square both the sides.
1 (y – 22)2 = y + 20
0 0 0
d3 y2 + 484 – 44y = y + 20
y2 – 45y + 464 = 0
y2 – 29y – 16y + 464 = 0
1 (y – 29) (y – 16) = 0
0 0 0 0 y = 16, 29
dn
x4 = 16, 29 or x = + 2, + 2.31
EBD_7443
2008-28 Target VITEEE
117. (c) Since , be the roots of the equation
i j k .[i (3 ) j (2 1)k] 0
x2 – ax + b = 0, so each of them must satisfy
the equation. Therefore 1 (3 ) (2 1) 0
2 2
a b 0 ...(1) and a b 0 3 3 0 1
...(2) Substituting this value for in (i), we get the
Now, An + 1 – a An + b An–1 = n+1 + n+1 required plane r.(i 2j 3k) 0
– a ( n n) + b ( n–1 + n–1)
= n–1 ( – a + b) + n–1( 2 – a + b)
2 120. (d) In the figure, OAC is a triangle and OB is a
n–1 median such that
= (0) + n–1(0) = 0 [From (1) & (2)]
118. (a) Let the sides of the triangle be a – d, a, a+d, OA a i ˆj kˆ
where d is greater than zero. From the figure,
it is clear that the angles A and C are acute OB b 2i 4ˆj 3kˆ
angles. Now, by the theorem of Pythagorus,
OC c (say)
AC2 = AB2 + BC2
(a + d)2 = a2 + (a – d)2 O
a2 + d2 + 2ad = a2 + a2 + d2 – 2ad
4ad = a2 d = a/4
A a
b
a+d
a
A B C
OA OC 2OB
B a–d C a c 2b
c 2b a ˆ (iˆ ˆj k)
2(2iˆ 4jˆ 3k) ˆ
a
a = (3iˆ 9jˆ 5k)
ˆ
a d 4 3
sin A Now, the area of the triangle,
a d a 5
a
4 1 1
OA OC a c
2 2
a 4 a Here,
sin C
a d a 5
a ˆi ˆj k
4
119. (a) The plane containing the line of intersection a c 1 1 1
3 9 5
of the planes r.(i 3j k) 0 and
21. Two point like charges Q1 and Q2 of whose 24. Theelectric field intensity E , due to an electric
strength are equal in absolute value are placed dipole of moment p , at a point on the equatorial
at a certain distance from each other. Assuming line is
the field strength to be posiive in the positive (a) parallel to the axis of the dipole and
direction of x-axis the signs of the charges Q1 opposite to the direction of the dipole
and Q2 for the graphs (field strength versus moment p
distance) shown in Figures 1,2,3 and 4 are (b) perpendicular to the axis of the dipole and
is directed away from it
(c) parallel to the dipole moment
E E
(d) perpendicular to the axis of the dipole and
x Q1 x is directed toward it
Q1
Q2 Q2 25. Twelve wires of each of resistance 6 ohms are
connected to form a cube as shown in the figure.
1 2 The current enters at a corner A and leaves at
the diagonally opposite corner G. The joint
resistance across the corners A and G are
E E
E F
Q1 x Q1 x A B
Q2 Q2
3 4
34. From figure shown below a series LCR circuit 38. Following diffraction pattern was obtained using
connected to a variable frequency 200V source. a diffraction grating using two different
L = 5H, C = 80 F and R = 40 . Then the source wavelengths and . With the help of the
figure identify which is the longer wavelength
frequency which drive the circuit at resonance
and their ratios.
is I
1 1
2 2
1 1
C = 80 F L = 5H 1 2 2 1
R = 40
(a) is longer than and the ratio of the
longer to the shorter wavelength is 1.5
(b) is longer than and the ratio of the
V = 200 V longer to the shorter wavelength is 1.5
(c) and are equal and their ratio is 1.0
(d) is longer than and the ratio of the
25 longer to the shorter wavelength is 2.5
(a) 25 Hz (b) Hz
39. In Young's double slit experiment, the interference
pattern is found to have an intensity ratio
50 between bright and dark fringes is 9. This implies
(c) 50 Hz (d) Hz
the
(a) the intensities at the screen due to two slits
35. If the coefficient of mutual induction of the
are 5 units and 4 units respectively
primary and secondary coils of an induction coil (b) the intensities at the screen due to the two
is 5H and a current of 10A is cut off in 5×10–4 slits are 4 units and 1 units respectively
second, the emf induced(in volt) in the secondary (c) the amplitude ratio is 7
coil is (d) the amplitude ratio is 6
(a) 5×104 (b) 1×105 40. Rising and setting sun appears to be reddish
(c) 25×10 5 (d) 5×106 because
(a) Diffraction sends red rays to earth at these
36. A voltage of peak value 283 V and varying
times
frequency is applied to a series L, C, R
(b) Scattering due to dust particles and air
combination in which R = 3 ohm, L=25 mH and molecules are responsible
C= 400 F. The frequency (in Hz) of the source at (c) Refraction is responsible
which maximum power is dissipated in the above (d) Polarization is responsible
is
(a) 51.5 (b) 50.7 PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
(c) 51.1 (d) 50.3
37. Four independent waves are represented by 41. The catalyst used in Rosenmund reaction is
equations (a) Zn / Hg (b) Pd / BaSO4
(1) X1 = a1sin t (3) X2 = a2sin2 t (c) Raney Ni (d) Na in Ethanol
(2) X3 = a1sin t (4) X4 = a1sin( t+ ) H 2O
42. CH 2 CO 2
O RMgX ?
Interferen ce is possible between waves
represented by equations (a) ROOC(CH2)COOR
(b) RCOCH2CH2COOH
(a) 3 and 4 (b) 1 and 2 (c) RCOOR
(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1 and 4 (d) RCOOH
EBD_7443
2007-6 Target VITEEE
43. Identify, which of the below does not possess 51. In TeCl4 the central atom tellurium involves
any element of symmetry? (a) sp3 hybridization
(a) (+)– Tartaric acid (b) sp3d hybridization
(b) Carbon tetrachloride (c) sp3d2 hybridization
(c) Methane (d) dsp2 hybridization
(d) Mesotartatric acid 52. The purple colour of KMnO4 is due to the
transition
44. The weakest acid amongst the following is
(a) C.T. (L M) (b) C.T. (M L)
(a) ClCH2COOH (b) HCOOH
(c) d – d (d) p –d
(c) FCH2CH2COOH (d) CH2(I)COOH
53. A nuclear reaction of 235 with a neutron
92 U
45. HOOC CH 2 4 COOH 2C 2 H5OH
H2SO 4 produces 90
36 Kr and two neutrons. Other element
C2 H5OOC CH 2 COOC2 H 5
Toluene produced in this reaction is
The purpose of using toluene here is (a) 137 (b) 144
52Te 55 Cs
(a) to make both substances (acid & alcohol)
miscible (c) 137 (d) 144
56 Ba 56 Ba
(b) that the product is insoluble in toluene 54. AgCl dissolves in a solution of NH3 but not in
(c) that the reactants are insoluble in water water because
(d) because of the formation of low boiling (a) NH3 is a better solvent than H2O
azotrope (b) Ag+ forms a complex ion with NH3
46. Trans esterification is the process of (c) NH3 is a stronger base than H2O
(a) conversion of an aliphatic acid to ester (d) the dipole moment of water is higher than
(b) conversion of an aromatic acid to ester NH3
(c) conversion of one ester to another ester 55. Which of the following is hexadenate ligand?
(d) conversion of an ester into its components (a) Ethylene diamine
namely acid and alcohol (b) Ethylene diamine tetra acetic acid
(c) 1, 10- phenanthroline
47. The correct sequence of base strengths in
(d) Acetyl acetonato
aqueous solution is
56. A coordinate bond is a dative covalent bond.
(a) (CH3)2NH > CH3NH2>(CH3) 3N
Which of the below is true?
(b) (CH3)3N > (CH3)2 NH>CH3NH2 (a) Three atoms form bond by sharing their
(c) (CH3)3N > CH3 NH2= (CH3 )2 NH electrons
(d) (CH3)2N H > (CH3 )3 N> CH3 NH2 (b) Two atoms form bond by sharing their
48. When aqueous solution of benzene electrons
diazoniumchloride is boiled, the product formed (c) Two atoms form bond and one of them
is provides both electrons
(a) C6H5CH2OH (b) C6H6+N2 (d) Two atoms form bond by sharing electrons
(c) C6H5COOH (d) C6H5OH obtained from third atom
49. Carbylamine reaction is given by aliphatic 57. Which of the following complex has zero
(a) primary amine magnetic moment (spin only)?
(b) secondary amine (a) [Ni(NH3 )6 ]Cl2 (b) Na 3[FeF6 ]
(c) tertiary amine (c) [Cr(H 2O)6 ]SO4 (d) K 4 [Fe(CN)6 ]
(d) quaternary ammonium salt
58. The IUPAC name of [Ni(PPh3)2Cl2]2+ is
NH3 (a) bis dichloro (triphenylphosphine) nickel (II)
50. C6 H5 CHO ?
H 2 ,Ni (b) dichloro bis (triphenylphosphine) nickel (II)
(a) C6H5NH2 (b) C6H5NHCH3 (c) dichloro triphenylphosphine nickel (II)
(c) C6H5 CH2NH2 (d) C6H5NHC6H5 (d) triphenyl phosphine nickel (II) dichloride
Solved Paper 2007 2007-7
59. Among the following the compound that is both 67. Given the equilibrium system:
paramagnetic and coloured is NH4Cl (s) NH4+(aq) + Cl–(aq)
(a) K2Cr2O7 (b) (NH4)2 [TiCl6] ( H = +3.5kcal/mol).
(c) VOSO4 (d) K3Cu (CN)4 What change will shift the equilibrium to the
60. On an X-ray diffraction photograph the intensity right?
of the spots depends on (a) Decreasing the temperature
(a) neutron density of the atoms/ions (b) Increasing the temperature
(b) electron density of the atoms/ions (c) Dissolving NaCl crystals in the equilibrium
(c) proton density of the atoms/ions mixture
(d) photon density of the atoms/ions (d) Dissolving NH 4NO 3 crystals in the
equilibrium mixture
61. An ion leaves its regular site occupy a position
68. According to Arrhenius equation, the rate
in the space between the lattice sites is called
constant (k) is related to temperature (T) as
(a) Frenkel defect (b) Schottky defect
(c) Impurity defect (d) Vacancy defect k2 Ea 1 1
(a) In –
62. The 8:8 type of packing is present in k1 R T1 T2
(a) MgF2 (b) CsCl
(c) KCl (d) NaCl k2 Ea 1 1
(b) In – –
63. When a solid melts reversibly k1 R T1 T2
(a) H decreases (b) G increases
(c) E decreases (d) S increases k2 Ea 1 1
(c) In
64. Enthalpy is equal to k1 R T1 T2
G G/T
(a) –T 2 (b) –T 2 In
k2
–
Ea 1 1
T T (d) k1 R T1 T2
V P
G/T
69. Equivalent amounts of H2 and I2 are heated in a
G
(c) T2 (d) T 2 closed vessel till equilibrium is obtained. If 80%
T V T of the hydrogen can be converted to HI, the Kc
P
65. Condition for spontaneity in an isothermal at this temperature is
process is (a) 64 (b) 16
(c) 0.25 (d) 4
(a) A W 0 (b) G U 0
70. For the reaction H2(g)+I2(g) 2HI(g), the
(c) A U 0 (d) G–U 0 equilibrium constant Kp changes with
66. Given: 2C s 2O 2 g 2CO2 g ; (a) total pressure
(b) catalyst
H –787kJ (c) the amount H2 and I2
(d) temperature
1 71. How long (in hours) must a current of 5.0 amperes
H2 g O2 g H 2O( ); H –286kJ
2 be maintained to electroplate 60g of calcium from
molten CaCl2?
1
C2 H 2 g 2 O2 g 2CO 2 g H 2O( ) (a) 27 hours (b) 8.3 hours
2 (c) 11 hours (d) 16 hours
; H –1310kJ 72. For strong electrolytes the plot of molar
The heat of formation of acetylene is conductance vs C is
(a) –1802 kJ (b) +1802 kJ (a) parabolic (b) linear
(c) +237 kJ (d) –800 kJ (c) sinusoidal (d) circular
EBD_7443
2007-8 Target VITEEE
73. If the molar conductance values of Ca2+ and Cl– 80. In which of the below reaction do we find , -
at infinite dilution are respectively 118.88×10–4 unsaturated carbonyl compounds undergoing
m2 mho mol–1 and 77.33×10–4 m2 mho mol–1 then a ring closure reaction with conjugated dienes?
that of CaCl2 is (in m2 mho mol–1) (a) Perkin reaction
(a) 118.88 × 10–4 (b) 154.66 × 10–4 (b) Diels-Alder reaction
(c) 273.54 × 10–4 (d) 196.21× 10–4
(c) Claisen rearrangement
74. The standard reduction potentials at 298K for
(d) Hoffman reaction
the following half reactions are given against
each
Zn2+ (aq) + 2e– Zn(s) E0 = – 0.762 V PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
Cr3+ (aq) + 3e– Cr(s) E0 = – 0.740 V
2H+ (aq) + 2e– H2(g) E0 = 0.00 V
Fe3+ (aq) + 3e– Fe2+(aq) E0 = + 0.762 V 81. Let the pairs a , b and c , d each determine a
The strongest reducing agent is plane. Then the planes are parallel if
(a) Zn(s) (b) Cr(s)
(c) H2(g) (d) Fe2+(aq) (a) a c b d 0
75. The epoxide ring consists of which of the
following ? (b) a c b d 0
(a) Three membered ring with two carbon and
one oxygen (c) a b c d 0
(b) Four membered ring with three carbon and
one oxygen a b c d 0
(d)
(c) Five membered ring with four carbon and
one oxygen
82. The area of a parallelogram with 3iˆ ˆj – 2kˆ and
(d) Six membered ring with five carbon and
one oxygen ˆi – 3jˆ 4kˆ as diagonals is
76. In the Grignard reaction, which metal forms an
organometallic bond? (a) 72 (b) 73
(a) Sodium (b) Titanium
(c) Magnesium (d) Palladium (c) 74 (d) 75
77. Phenol is less acidic than 83. If cosx + cos2 x=1then the value of
(a) p-chlorophenol sin12 x+ 3sin10 x + 3sin8x + sin 6 x–1 is equal to
(b) p-nitrophenol (a) 2 (b) 1
(c) p-methoxyphenol (c) –1 (d) 0
(d) ethanol
84. The product of all values of (cos +i sin )3/5 is
78. Aldol condensation is given by
equal to
(a) trimethylacetaldehyde
(b) acetaldehyde (a) 1 (b) cos +i sin
(c) benzaldehyde (c) cos3 +i sin3 (d) cos5 +i sin5
(d) formaldehyde 2
79. Give the IUPAC name for 1 i
85. The imaginary part of is
O O i 2i –1
|| ||
H3C CH 2 C H 2 C CH 2 C OCH3 4
(a) (b) 0
(a) Ethyl-4-oxoheptonate 5
(b) Methyl-4-oxoheptonate
(c) Ethyl-4-oxohexonate 2 4
(c) (d) –
(d) Methyl-4-oxohexonate 5 5
Solved Paper 2007 2007-9
u u
If sin –1 x sin y
–1
86. , then cos–1x + cos–1y is 93. If (x +y )sin u = x2y2, then x y
2 x y
equal to
(a) sin u (b) cosec u
(a) (b) (c) 2 tan u (d) tan u
2 4
94. The angle between the tangents at those points
3 on the curve x = t2 + 1 and y = t2 – t – 6 where it
(c) (d)
4 meets x-axis is
87. The equation of a directrix of the
4 5
x 2 y2 (a) tan –1 (b) tan –1
ellipse 1 is 29 49
16 25
(a) 3y = 5 (b) y = 5 10 8
(c) 3y = 25 (d) y = 3 (c) tan –1 (d) tan –1
49 29
88. If the normal at (ap2, 2ap) on the parabola
y2 = 4ax, meets the parabola again at (aq2, 2aq),
then 4
(a) p2 + pq + 2 = 0 (b) p2 – pq + 2 = 0 95. The value of x – 3 dx is equal to
(c) q2 + pq + 2 = 0 (d) p2 + pq + 1 = 0 1
89. The length of the straight line x – 3y = 1
intercepted by the hyperbola x2 – 4y2 = 1is 5
(a) 2 (b)
6 2
(a) 10 (b)
5
1 3
(c) (d)
1 6 2 2
(c) (d) 10
10 5 96. The area of the region bounded by the straight
90. The curve described parametrically by lines x = 0 and x = 2 and the curves y = 2x and
x = t2 + 2t–1, y = 3t + 5 represents y = 2x –x2 is equal to
(a) an ellipse (b) a hyperbola
(c) a parabola (d) a circle 2 4 3 4
91. If the normal to the curve y = f(x) at (3,4) makes (a) – (b) –
log 2 3 log 2 3
3
an angle with the positive x-axis, then f '(3)
4 1 4 4 3
(c) – (d) –
is equal to log 2 3 log 2 2
3
(a) – 1 (b)
4 dx
97. The value of 7
is equal to
3 0 a2 x2
(c) 1 (d) –
4
92. The function f(x) = x2 e–2x, x > 0. Then the
maximum value of f(x) is 231 1 235 1
(a) (b)
1 1 2047 a13 2048 a13
(a) (b)
e 2e
232 1 231 1
1 4 (c) (d)
(c) (d) 2047 a13 2048 a13
e2 e4
EBD_7443
2007-10 Target VITEEE
101. The general solution of the differential equation
2
x 1– x d2 y dy
98. The value of the integral e 2
dx is 2 y 2e3x is given by
1 x dx 2 dx
e3x
ex
1– x
C (a) y c1 c 2 x e x
(a) 8
1 x2
e –3x
(b) y c1 c 2 x e – x
1 x 8
(b) ex C
1 x2 e3x
(c) y c1 c2 x e – x
8
ex e –3x
(c) C y c1 c2 x e x
1 x 2 (d)
8
(d) ex(1–x) + C 102. The solution of the differential equation
ydx+(x–y3)dy = 0 is
y y 1 3
99. If x sin dy y sin – x dx (a) xy y C (b) xy = y4 + C
x x 3
(c) y4 = 4xy + C (d) 4y = y3 + C
103. The number of positive integral solutions of the
y equation x1 x2x3x4x5=1050 is
and y 1 , then the value of cos is
2 x (a) 1870 (b) 1875
(c) 1865 (d) 1880
equal to 104. Let A= {1,2,3,....., n}and B ={a,b,c}, then the
number of functions from A to B that are onto is
1 (a) 3n – 2n (b) 3n – 2n –1
(a) x (b) n
x (c) 3 (2 – 1) (d) 3n – 3(2n – 1)
105. Everybody in a room shakes hands with
(c) log x (d) ex everybody else. The total number of hand
100. The differential equation of the system of all shakes is 66. The total number of persons in the
room is
circles of radius r in the XY plane is (a) 9 (b) 12
(c) 10 (d) 14
2 2
dy
3
d2 y 106. If(G,*) is a group and the order of an element
(a) 1 r2 a G is 10, then the order of the inverse of a* a
dx dx 2 is
1
(a) 10 (b)
3 2 3 10
dy 2 d2 y
(b) 1 r 1
dx dx 2 (c) 5 (d)
5
107. A box contains 9 tickets numbered 1 to 9
inclusive. If 3 tickets are drawn from the box one
2 3 2
dy 2 d2 y at a time, the probability that they are
(c) 1 r alternatively either {odd, even, odd} or {even,
dx dx 2 odd, even} is
5 4
(a) (b)
2 3 3 17 17
dy d2 y
(d) 1 r2 5 5
dx dx 2 (c) (d)
16 18
Solved Paper 2007 2007-11
1 5 1 –1 2 5
108. If P(A) = , P(B) = and P(B/A)= then
12 12 15 114. If the rank of the matrix 2 –4 a – 4 is 1,
p A B is equal to 1 –2 a 1
(a) A( ) (b) A PQ
2 (a) 2 (b)
P Q
– 1 P Q
(c) A(– ) (d) A (c) (d)
2 2 PQ
2007 SOLUTIONS
PART - I (PHYSICS) 3 3 36
2 Rc f 1.35f .
16 16 5
1. (d) The magnetic moment of the ground state 5. (d) Here, Kinetic energy = Rest energy
of an atom whose open sub-shell is half we know that
filled with n electrons is given by Kinetic energy (Relativistic)
= (m – m0)c2,
n(n 2). B and Rest energy = m0c2,
where B is the gyromagnetic moment of where m0 = rest mass, c = velocity of light
the atom. Also, mass (m) of a particle moving with
Here, n = 5. velocity v is given by
5(5 2). B 35 B m0
m .
2. (a) Bragg's law gives 2dsin = n , n= order of v2
reflection, d= distance between planes. For 1
c2
same and d, n for a given , smallest
d for least n, can be found. If crystal is (m – m0)c2 = m0c2 provides
symmetric reflections from different planes
may cancel out.
3. (b) According to Moseley's law, square root
of frequency of X-ray is plotted against m0
m0 c 2 m 0c2
atomic number it gives straight line, the v 2
relation is 1
c2
f c Z –1 where c = constant
1
(for f 0, Z c , for Z = 0, f –c ) or, 1 1
Option (b) is correct. as Z can not be v2
1
negative. c2
4. (b) Balmer series is given for n 1 = 2 and
n2 = 3, 4, ... v2 1
1 1
or, 2 or, 2
1 1 c 4
Rc – v2
1
22 n 22 c2
For Ist line in spectrum n2 = 3
v2 1 3
or, 2
1
1 1 1 1 c 4 4
1 Rc – Rc – f
2 2 4 9
2 n2 3
v c.
5 36 2
f Rc Rc f
36 5 v2 1
1– 2
=
For second line n 2 = 4 c 4
1 1 1 1 v2 1 3 3 2
Rc – Rc –
2
2 2
4 2 4 16 2 =1 = v2 = c
c 4 4 4
4 –1 3
Rc v= c
16 2
Solved Paper 2007 2007-13
6. (d) de-Broglie wavelength ( ) of a particle of 10. (c) Radio carbon dating is done by measuring
mass m and moving with a velocity v is ratio of 14C present in the sample, since
proportion of 14C and 12 C in a body is same;
h
given by, , where h is Planck's but after death 14C decays. Hence knowing
mv the present ratio of 14C to 12 C, sample can
constant. be dated.
When a particle having charge q is 11. (b) particles are positively charged He
accelerated through a potential V then nucleus, it can accept 2e– , rays are
1 negatively charged which are similar to e–,
qV mv 2 can donate 1e–, are radiations. Hence
2
ionisation power of is maximum. are
m 2 v2 most energetic and is least energetic
or, qV mv 2mqV Penetration power of is maximum
2m
12. (d) Given half life T= 3.8 days; t = 19 days
h N t 19
2mqV ? now 5
N0 T 3.8
Hence, de-Broglie wavelength of electron,
t
5
h N 1 T 1 1
e
2me eV N0 2 2 32
8.93
2 C = 100 pF = 100 × 10–12 F, = 8.85 × 10–12,
Modulation index, m a –1 2 A = r2 = 3.14×(10–2)2 (r = lcm)
82
t = 10–3m, d = t, K = 4
79.7
–1 2 1.24 –1 2
64 8.85 10 –12 3.14 10 –4
C1
= 0.701 1
10 –3 –10 –3 (1 – )
Percentage modulation = ma × 100 =70.1% 4
1
21. (d) For a point charge, E . For positive 27.79 10 –16
x2
10 –3 – 0.75 10 –3
charges, electric field will decrease in
positive direction as distance increases,
27.79 10 –13
(case 1), for negative charge, as distance
increases field will increase (case 4). As we 0.25
move from positive charge to negative
charge, field will keep on decreasing (case 27.79 10 –13
111.16 10 –13 F
2), As we move from negative to positive 0.25
charge, field will keep on increasing (case 3) (for 1 set)
A 4 cm B(q 1) Required C = 100 10 –12
F
22. (a) 3 cm 3 cm
C 100 10 –12
n 10
D(q 3 ) 4 cm C(q 2) C1 111.16 10 –13
Solved Paper 2007 2007-15
24. (a) The resultant intensity at a point on 26. (c) Since conductor and semiconductor are
connected in parallel hence voltage across
equatorial line is E . E is parallel and them is same. If ammeters show same
opposite to direction of p . V
reading hence their resistances R are
I
E2 same. If voltage is increased by small value
E 3 cm
then following the same relation V I for
E1 constant R, both conductor and
semiconductor show same current.
27. (d) Time taken by free electrons to cross the
–q +p
O conductor
I
25. (d) Let a total current of 6I enter at A. It divides t where drift velocity v d
vd neA
into three equal parts, each of 2I, along AE,
AB and AD. At E, B and D each the current
1
2I divides into two equal parts, each of I, vd 28
along EF, EH, BF, BC, DH and DC. 8 10 1.6 10 –19 5 10 –7
At F, H and C, the two currents each of I, 10 –2
combine together to give a current of 2I at m/s .
64
each corner. Thus, at G we get the same
1 64
current 6I as shown in the figure. t 64 102 s 6.4 103 sec
vd 10–2
E I F
2I
R 2 – R1
I I 28. (b) Temperature coefficient,
A B 2I R1 t 2 – t1
2I I 2I G 6I
2I H
R 2 – R1
6I
I 2I t 2 – t1
D I C R1
2 –1
E t 2 – t1
1 0.00125
Let r be the value of resistance of each arm 1
of the cube and R be the joint resistance t2 t1 800 300 1100K
0.00125
across the conners A and G.
29. (d) Torque on the coil is = nIB A cos . If coil
Applying Kirchhoff's law along the loop is set with its plane parallel to direction of
AEFGA, we get magnetic field B, then =0°, cos = 1
2Ir + Ir + 2Ir = E = nIBA.1 = nIBA = maximum.
or, 5Ir = E ........... (1) Hence, I = maximum (as n,B, A are constant)
Also, by Ohm's law, 1 2
6I × R = E 30. (d) E at
bt is the parabolic equation for
2
6IR = 5Ir, using (1) thermo emf. The thermoelectric power is
5 dE
or, R r. S
6 dt
Here, r = 6 dE
S = a + bt. The graph between S
5 dt
R 6 5
6 and straight line.
EBD_7443
2007-16 Target VITEEE
When t = 0, S = a (intercept).
1 1
dE –6
At neutral temperature 0 and 2 5 80 10 2 400 10 –6
dt
1
–a
t = tn 0 = a + btn tn and at cold 2 20 10 –3
b
39. (b) For bright fringes, I max = (a + b)2 43. (a) (+) – Tartaric acid does not have element of
For dark fringes, Imin = (a – b)2 symmetry.
61. (a) In Frankels defect an ion leaves its regular 65. (a) Since G A P. V
site and occupy a position in the space For a spontaneous process G should be
between the lattice sites.
negative which is possible only if
+ – + –
A P. V or A W 0 .
A B A B 66. (c) We have to find
+
A
– – +
B B A 2C(s) H 2(g) C2 H2(g) H ?
This is the equation for formation of
+ – + –
A B A B acelytene Given
– + – + 2C (s) 2O 2(g) 2CO 2(g) ; H 787 kJ
B A B A
....(1)
62. (b) 8 : 8 type of packing is present in CsCl. 1
H 2(g) O2(g) H 2 O( ) ; H 286 kJ
6 : 6 type of packing is present in NaCl and 2
KCl. ...(2)
63. (d) When solid melts S increases. because 1
when solid changes into liquid randomness C2 H 2(g) 2 O2(g)
2
increases.
64. (d) Gibbs Helmholtz Equation– 2CO 2(g) H 2 O( ) ;
G H – T S .......(1)
H 1310 kJ ....(3)
differentiate this equation w.r.t. temperature
at constant pressure Add eq.(1) and (2)
1
G Gy Gx 2C(s) H 2(g) 2 O 2(g) 2CO 2(g)
– ....(2) 2
T P T T P
P H 2 O( ) ; H 1073kJ ......(4)
= – Sy – ( – Sx)
Subtract eq. (3) form eq. (4) we get
= – ( Sy – Sx) = S ......(3)
where S change in entropy 2C(s) H 2(g) C 2 H 2(g) ;
on combining equation (1) & (3) we get H 237 kJ
G 67. (b) Endothermic reactions are favoured at high
G H T ....(4) temperature. Therefore, increasing the
T temperature will shift equilibrium to the
P
= ˆi(4 6) ˆj (12 2) kˆ ( 9 1) 55 33 22
i isin
sin 2.2. 55 11 ..
22 55 55
d1 × d 2 = 2iˆ 14ˆj 10kˆ
5 6 8 5 6 8
d1 d 2 = ( 2) 2 ( 14) 2 ( 10) 2 = cos . i sin
2 5 5 2 5 5
= 4 196 100 300 2 75
5 6 2 5 6 8
1 cos . i sin
Area of parallelogram = d1 d 2 2 5 5 2 5 5
2
= cos (3 + 4 ) + i sin(3 + 4 )
1 = cos (4 + 3 ) + i sin (4 + 3 )
= × 2 75 = 75 square units
2 = cos 3 + i sin 3
EBD_7443
2007-22 Target VITEEE
2
1 i 1 i2 2i
85. (d) 2 Y
i 2i 1 2i i y= a/e
directrix
1 1 2i 2i 2 i 4i 2i 2 4i 2 2 4i (0,5)
2 i 2 i 2 i 4 i2 4 1 5
[ i2 = –1]
F (0,c)
(–4,0) (4,0)
2i 2i 4i 2i 2 4i 2 2 4i 2 4i X
2 1 2 i 4 i 2 4 1 5 5 5 X'
F' (0, – c)
4
The imaginary part = –
5 (0,–5) y= – a/e
5 2 2
13 6
y= 3y = ± 25 PQ = 1 0
3/ 5 5 5
Solved Paper 2007 2007-23
2 U U sin U
18 36 x y tan U
324 36 360 x y cos U
5 25
25 25 U U
x y tan U
6 10 x y
length of straight line PQ = units.
5 94. (c) Equation of the given curve in parametric
90. (c) Given x = t2 + 2t–1 & y = 3t + 5 form,
x = t2 + 1 and y = t2 – t – 6
x = t2 + 2t + 1–2 & y = 3t + 3+2
Y-coordinate of the point, where the given
x = (t+1)2 –2 & y = 3(t + 1) + 2 (2)
curve meets X-axis is 0.
(t+1) = x 2 .......... (1) When y = 0, then t2 – t – 6 = 0
Equation (2) becomes [using equation (1)] t 2 3t 2t 6 0
y= 3 x 2 2 t(t 3) 2(t 3) 0
y–2 = 3 x 2 (t 3)(t 2) 0
squaring both sides, we get t 3 or 2
(y–2)2 = 9 (x + 2)
when t = 3, then x = 10
Y2 =9X where Y = y – 2 & X = x + 2
when t = –2, then x = 5
This equation represents a parabola Hence, the points where the curve meets
91. (c) Slope of the normal at (3,4) is the value of the X-axis are (10, 0) and (5, 0).
1 1 3 dy
at x = 3 or = tan =–1
f '(x) f '(3) 4 dy dt 2t 1
f`'(3) = 1 Now, dx dx 2t
92. (c) Given : f (x) = x2 e–2x, x > 0 dt
f '(x) = x2.e–2x(–2) + e–2x.2x Slope of the tangent at point (10, 0)
put f '(x) = 0 2e–2x. x (–x + 1) = 0 dy dy 5
x = 1 or x = 0 m1
dx x 10 dx t 3 6
f"(x) = (–4x2 – 6x + 1)e–2x
f"(1) = –9e–2x < 0 Slope of the tangent at point (5, 0),
f"(0) = e–2x > 0 dy dy 5 5
value of f(x) is maximum at x = 1 m2
dx x 5 dx t 2 4 4
1 If be the angle beween two tangents, then
f(x) = x2.e–2x f(1) = e–2 = 2
e 55
93. (d) Given : (x + y) sin U = x2y2 m 2 m1 64
tan
1 m1m 2 5 5
x 2 y2 1
sinU = = v (let) 6 4
x y
Here n = 2 – 1 = 1 15 10 5
12 12 10
v v
Euler's theorem x. y. nv 24 25 49 49
x y
24 24
sin U sin U 10
x y sin U tan
x y 49
U U 1 10 1 10
x.cos U y.cos U. sin U tan tan
x y 49 49
EBD_7443
2007-24 Target VITEEE
4 3 4
dx
95. (b) | x 3 | dx (x 3)dx (x 3)dx 97. (d) Let I 2
1 1 3 0 (a x 2 )7
x2
3
x2
4
Put x a tan dx a sec2 d
3x 3x
2 2
1 3
limit at x 0 0&x
2
1 2 2 1 2 2
[3 1 ] 3[3 1] .[4 3 ] 3[4 3]
2 2
1 1
2
a sec 2
(8) 3(2) .(7) 3(1) I d
2 2 0 a14 (1 tan 2 )7
7 5
4 6 3
2 2
2 2
1 1 1
2 d . cos12 .d
96. (b) Required area (y 2 y1 )dx a13 0 sec12 a13 0
0
But
y 2 1
x
y=2 (2,4) sin 2m 1 .cos 2n 1 . d B(m, n)
2
(x2y2) 0
(0,1) Q
(1,1) m n 1
& B(m, n) &
m n 2
P
2
1
x' I sin 0 . cos12 d
o
x a13 0
(2,0)
2
–x
2x
1 13
m , n
y=
2 2
1 13
.
1 2 2
2
I
x 2 2a13 1 13
(2 2x x )dx
2 2
0
2 11 9 7 5 3 1
2x x3 . . . . . . .
1
x2 . 2 2 2 2 2 2
log 2 3 2a13 6.5.4.3.2.1
0
4 8 1 3 4 231 1
4 .
log 2 3 log 2 log 2 3 2048 a13
Solved Paper 2007 2007-25
(1 x)2
98. (c) Let I ex dx cos log(1) c c 0
(1 x 2 )2 2
y
x 1 x 2 2x cos log x
I e dx x
(1 x 2 )2 100. (c) The equation of the family of circles of
radius r is
1 x2 2x (x – a)2 + (y – b)2 = r2 ...(1)
ex dx
2 2
(1 x ) (1 x 2 )2 Where a & b are arbitrary constants.
Since equation (1) contains two arbitrary
1 x constants, we differentiate it two times w.r.t
I ex dx 2 e x . dx
(1 x 2 ) (1 x 2 )2 x & the differential equation will be of
second order.
1 Differentiating (1) w.r.t. x, we get
I .e x ex . (1 x 2 ) 2 2xdx
(1 x 2 )
dy
2(x a) 2(y b) 0
ex x dx
2 dx
(1 x 2 )2 dy
(x a) (y b) 0 ...(2)
ex x dx
ex dx
I 2 Differentiating (2) w.r.t. x, we get
1 x2 (1 x 2 )2
2
d2 y dy
ex x 1 (y b) 0 ...(3)
2
2 2
dx dx 2 dx
(1 x )
2
x dy
e 1
I +C dx
1 x2 (y b)
d2 y ...(4)
y y dx 2
99. (c) Given : x sin dy y sin x dx
x x On putting the value of (y – b) in equation
(2), we get
y
y sin x
dy x dy
2
dy
dx y 1
x sin dx dx
x x a
d2 y ...(5)
y dy dz dx 2
Put z z.1 x.
x dx dx Substituting the values of (x – a) & (x – b)
dz zx sin z x in (1), we get
x. z z cosec z
dx x sin z
2 2 2 2 2
dy dy dy
dz dx 1 1
x cosec z sin z dz dx dx dx
dx x r2
2 2
cos z log x c d2 y d2 y
2
y dx dx 2
cos log x c
x
2 3 2
dy 2 d2 y
1 r
But y(1) x 1, y dx dx 2
2 2
EBD_7443
2007-26 Target VITEEE
104. (d) Number of onto functions: If A & B are two
d2 y dy 3x sets having m & n elements respectively
101. (c) Given : 2 y 2e
dx 2 dx such that 1 n m then number of onto
The auxiliary equation is functions from A to B is
D2 + 2D + 1 = 0 or m2 + 2m + 1 = 0 n
n r n
(m 1)(m 1) 0 m 1, 1 –1 . Cr r n
r 1
i.e., repeated roots
Given A = {1, 2, 3, ---- n} & B = {a, b, c}
Complementary function = (c1 + c2x)e–x Number of onto fun ction s
Now Particular Integral (P.I.)
3
3–r 3 n
1 –1 . Cr r
. 2e3x [D = 3] r 1
D2 2D 1
3 13 n 3 2 3 n
1 C1 1 –1 C2 2
1 3x 2e3x e3x
P.I. . 2.e
32 2.3 1 16 8 3
C3 3
n
–1
3 3
Solution y = C. F. + P. I.
3 3
C1 C2 2n 3
C3 3n
3x
e
y c1 c2 x e – x 3! 3! n 3! n
8 2 3
2!1! 2!1! 3! 0!
102. (c) Given ydx + (x – y3) dy = 0
dx dx 1 3 3. 2n 3n
y x y3 0 x y2
dy dy y
3n 3 2n 1
compare this equation to general equation
105. (b) Let there are n persons in the room. The
dx 1 2 total number of hand shakes is same as the
i.e. Px Q P ,Q y
dy y number of ways of selecting 2 out of n.
1 n n n 1
Pdy
dy C2 66 66
I.f . e e y
e log y
y 2!
1 P A B 1 1 tan
B 2
.
15 1/12 sec tan 1
1 1
P A B 1
15 12 180 B .A
sec2
But,
P A B P A P B P A B sec 2 .B A
1 5 1 89 1
P A B cos 2 .B A
12 12 180 180
2 x
109. (a) f x dx , where f x 112. (b) Given : 2x 1 4 8
1.5 2
2 2x 2 0
2
2 x 1 2 1 x 2 7 6 2x
dx . xdx
1.5 2 2 1.5 2 2
1.5
2x 1 4x 2 12 4 4x 14
1 1 175 7
4 2.25 1.75
4 4 400 16 8 12 14x 0
110. (b) If 2 P(X = 0 ) + P (X = 2) = 2 P (X = 1)
Let probability distribution of X be given 8x 3 24x 4x 2 12 16x
by 56 96 112 x 0
r m
m .e 8x 3 4x 2 152x 140 0
P(X = r) where r = 0, 1, 2, .....
r! (x + 5) is a factor of above equation
m0 e m m2 .e m
m.e m
8x 3 40x 2 36x 2 180x
2 2
0! 2! 1!
28x 140 0
2
m2 8x x 5 36x x 5 28 x 5 0
2 2m m2 4m 4 0
2
x 5 8x 2 36x 28 0
2
m 2 0 m 2
x 5 4 2x 2 9x 7 0
1 tan
111. (c) A & AB I
tan 1
4 x 5 2x 2 7x 2x 7 0
1
B I A , A11 1, A12 tan ,
4 x 5 x 2x 7 1 2x 7 0
A 21 tan , A 22 1
4 x 5 2x 7 x 1 0
1 tan 2 2
|A| 1 tan sec x 5, 3.5,1
tan 1
EBD_7443
2007-28 Target VITEEE
113. (b) For only one solution | A | 0 118. (a) Given : H is the harmonic mean between
P&Q
k 2 1
2PQ 1 P Q
0 k 1 2 0 H
P Q H 2PQ
0 0 k 2
2 1 1 H H
k k 1 k 2 0 2
H Q P P Q
k 0, k 1, k 2. k 1
119. (c) We have a b a b
114. (c) Let
1 2 5 1 2 5 a a b b a b
A 2 4 a 4 0 0 a 6
1 2 a 1 0 0 a 6 a .b a a .a b b.b a b.a b
R2 R2 2R1 , R 3 R 3 R1 a .b a b
clearly rank of A is 1 if a = –6
2 2
115. (c) Given : ax 4 bx 2 c 0 a b b.b b 1, a .a a 1
3
a1a 2 b1b 2 c1c 2
1 1 cos
117. (a) x x 0 a12 b12 c1 . a 2 2 b 2 2
2
c22
x x
2
1 2 2 3 4 3
1 1 cos
x x 1 0 1 4 16 . 4 9 9
x x
2 6 12 20
1
x 0 x2 1 0 x i 21 . 22 462
x
Thus, the given equation has no real roots. 462 cos 20
VITEEE
SOLVED PAPER 2006
25. Which is the incorrect statement of the 33. When the conductivity of a semiconductor is
following? only due to the breaking up of the covalent
(a) Photon is a particle with zero rest mass bonds, the semiconductor is known as
(b) Photon is a particle with zero momentum (a) donor (b) extrinsic
(c) Photons travel with velocity of light in (c) intrinsic (d) acceptor
vacuum 34. In a P-type semiconductor, the acceptor impurity
(d) Photons even feel the pull of gravity produces an energy level
26. The deBroglie wavelength associated with a (a) just below the valence band
steel ball of mass 1000 gm moving at a speed of (b) just above the conduction band
1 ms–1 is [h = 6.626 × 10–34 Js] (c) just below the conduction band
(a) 6.626 × 10–31m (b) 6.626 × 10–37m (d) just above the valence band
(c) 6.626 × 10–34m (d) 6.626 × 1034m 35. An oscillator is essentially
27. The velocity v, at which the mass of a particle is (a) an amplifier with proper negative feedback
double its rest mass is network circuits
(b) converts alternating current into direct
3 current
(a) v = c (b) v c
4 (c) an amplifier with no feedback network
(d) an amplifier with proper positive feedback
3 network circuits
(c) v c (d) v = 2c 36. Which of the following gates can perform perfect
2
binary addition?
28. How much energy is produced, if 2 kg of a
(a) AND gate (b) OR gate
substance is fully converted into energy?
(c) EXOR gate (d) NAND gate
[c = 3 × 108 ms–1]
37. The frequency of an FM transmitter without
(a) 9 × 1016 J (b) 11 × 1016 J
signal input is called
(c) 15 × 1016 J (d) 18 × 1016 J
(a) the centre frequency
29. The difference between the rest mass of the (b) modulation factor
nucleus and the sum of the masses of the (c) the frequency deviation
nucleons composing a nucleus is known as (d) the carrier swing
(a) packing fraction (b) mass defect 38. The fundamental radio antenna is a metal rod
(c) binding energy (d) isotopic mass which has a length equal to
30. The half life period of Radium is 3 minute. Its (a) in free space at the frequency of operation
mean life time is
3 (b) in free space at the frequency of
(a) 1.5 minute (b) minute 2
0.6931 operation
(c) 6 minute (d) (3 × 0.6931) minute (c) in free space at the frequency of
31. ‘Pair production’ involves conversion of a 4
photon into operation
(a) a neutron-electron pair 3
(b) a positron-neutron pair (d) in free space at the frequency of
4
(c) an electron-proton pair operation
(d) an electron-positron pair 39. Vidicon works on the principle of
32. The sub atomic particles proton and neutron fall (a) electrical conductivity
under the group of (b) photoconductivity
(a) mesons (b) photons (c) thermal conductivity
(c) leptons (d) baryons (d) SONAR
EBD_7443
2006-4 Target VITEEE
40. The maximum range, dmax, of radar is 49. How many lattice points belong to a face
(a) proportional to the cube root of the peak centered cubic unit cell?
transmitted power (a) 1 (b) 2
(b) proportional to the fourth root of the peak (c) 4 (d) 3
transmitted power 50. Schottky defect in solids is due to
(a) a pair of cation and anion vacancies
(c) proportional to the square root of the peak
(b) occupation of interstitial site by a pair of
transmitted power
cation and anion
(d) not related to the peak transmitted power (c) occupation of interstitial site by a cation
at all (d) occupation of interstitial site by an anion
51. Which one of the following is amorphous?
PART - II (CHEMISTRY) (a) Polystyrene (b) Table salt
(c) Silica (d) Diamond
41. The equivalent weight of potassium 52. The metal that crystallises in simple cubic system
permanganate when it acts as oxidising agent in is
ferrous ion estimation is (a) Po (b) Na
(c) Cu (d) Ag
(a) 158 (b) 31.6
53. When ideal gas expands in vacuum, the work
(c) 79 (d) 39.5 done by the gas is equal to
42. The magnetic moment of lanthanide ions is (a) PV (b) RT
determined from which one of the following (c) 0 (d) nRT
relation? 54. For a closed system consisting of a reaction
(a) n(n 2) (b) g J(J 1) N2O4(g) 2NO2(g), the pressure
(a) remains constant (b) decreases
(c) g n(n 1) (d) 2 n(n 1) (c) increases (d) becomes zero
55. 6 moles of an ideal gas expand isothermally and
43. Which one of the following has maximum number
reversibly from a volume of 1 litre to a volume of
of unpaired electrons? 10 litres at 27ºC. What is the maximum work
(a) Mg2+ (b) Ti3+ done?
(c) V 3+ (d) Fe2+ (a) 47 kJ (b) 100 kJ
44. Excess of NaOH reacts with Zn to form (c) 0 (d) 34.465 kJ
(a) ZnH2 (b) Na2ZnO2 56. The reaction,
(c) ZnO (d) Zn(OH)2 Zn(s) + CuSO4(aq) ZnSO4(aq) + Cu(s) is an
45. How many isomers does Co(en)2Cl2+ have? example of a
(a) 1 (b) 3 (a) spontaneous process
(c) 2 (d) 4 (b) isobaric process
46. NH3 group in a coordination compound is named (c) non-spontaneous process
as (d) reversible process
(a) ammonium (b) ammine 57. For the reaction, H2 (g) + I2 (g) 2HI (g)
(c) amine (d) ammonia (a) Kp = –Kc (b) Kc = 0
47. Name the complex Ni(PF3)4 (c) Kp = Kc (d) Kp = 0
(a) tetrakis (phosphorus (III) fluoride) nickel 58. The increase of pressure on ice water at a
(0) constant temperature will cause
(b) tetra (phosphorus (III) fluoride) nickel (a) water to vaporize (b) water to freeze
(c) Nickel tetrakis phosphorus (III) fluoride (c) no change (d) ice to melt
(d) (phosphorus (III) tetrakis fluoride) nickel 59. The order of the reaction
(0) 1
N2O5 N2O4(g) + O (g) is
48. The purple colour of KMnO4 is due to 2 2
(a) charge transfer (b) d-d transition (a) 3 (b) 2
(c) f-f transition (d) d-f transition (c) 1 (d) 0
Solved Paper 2006 2006-5
60. The reactions with low activation energy are 68. Which one of the following products obtained
always when diethyl ether is boiled with water in
(a) adiabatic presence of dilute acid?
(b) slow (a) Glycol (b) Ethy1 alcohol
(c) non-spontaneous (c) Ethylene oxide (d) Peroxide
(d) fast 69. Identify the product for the following reaction
61. For a cell reaction to be spontaneous, the O
standard free energy change of the reaction must CH2OH HCl
be CH3–C–CH3 + ?
CH2OH
(a) zero (b) positive
(c) infinite (d) negative CH 3
62. Equivalent conductance of an electrolyte COOH
(a) CH3–CHOH +
containing NaF at infinite dilution is 90.1 COOH
Ohm–1cm2. If NaF is replaced by KF what is the
value of equivalent conductance? H3C O–CH2
(b) C
(a) 90.1 Ohm–1cm2 (b) 111.2 Ohm–1cm2 H3C O–CH2
(c) 0 (d) 222.4 Ohm–1cm2
63. The tendencies of the electrodes made up of Cu, H3C
C–OH
Zn and Ag to release electrons when dipped in H3C
their respective salt solutions decrease in the (c) CH3–CHOH
order (d) No reaction
(a) Zn > Ag > Cu (b) Cu > Zn > Ag 70. What is the reaction of acetaldehyde with
(c) Zn > Cu > Ag (d) Ag > Cu > Zn concentrated sulphuric acid?
64. The electrode reaction that takes place at the (a) No reaction
anode of CH4 – O2 fuel cell is (b) Decomposition
(a) 2O2 + 8H+ + 8e– 4H2O (c) Charred to black residue
(b) CH4 + 2H2O CO2 + 8H+ + 8e– (d) Polymerisation
(c) CH4 + 2O2 CO2 + 2H2O 71. Calcium Acetate on heating under distillation
(d) 2H+ + 2e– H2 gives
65. What is the hybridization of oxygen atom in an (a) Acetaldehyde and Calcium Oxide
alcohol molecule? (b) Calcium Carbonate and Acetic acid
(a) sp 3 (b) sp (c) Acetone and Calcium Carbonate
(c) sp 2 (d) p 2 (d) Calcium Oxide and CO2
72. Identify the correct statement
O LiAlH 4
66. ? (a) Aldehydes on reduction give secondary
R–C–OH
(a) RCH2CH2OH (b) RCHO alcohols
(c) RCOR (d) RCH2OH (b) Ketones on reduction give primary alcohols
67. Which one of the following is correct? (c) Ketones reduce Fehling’s solution and give
red cuprous oxide
(a) RCH2OH KMnO4 No reaction (d) Ketones do not react with alcohols
Na 2Cr2O7 ,H 2SO4 73. The O – H stretching vibration of alcohols
(b) CH3CH2OH No reaction
absorbs in the region 3700 – 3500 cm–1. The O –
H stretching of carboxylic acids absorb in the
(c) CH3CHO Na 2Cr2O7 ,H 2SO4 No reaction region
(a) 3900 – 3700 cm–1 (b) 3000 – 2500 cm–1
CH3 (c) 3700 – 3500 cm–1 (d) 1700 – 2000 cm–1
(d) CH3–C–OH 74. Which among the following reduces Fehling’s
CH3 solution?
(a) Acetic acid (b) Formic acid
alkaline KMnO 4 No reaction (c) Benzoic acid (d) Salicylic acid
EBD_7443
2006-6 Target VITEEE
75. Determine the experimental condition for the
x 3 7
following reaction
82. If x = –9 is a root of 2 x 2 0 , then other
COOH
7 6 x
+ CO2
OH OH two roots are
(a) 3, 7 (b) 2, 7
(a) in presence of KOH
(c) 3, 6 (d) 2, 6
(b) on heating 83. The values of for which the system of equation
(c) in presence of NaOH x + y + z = 1, x + 2y + 4z = , x + 4y + 10z = 2 is
(d) in presence of HCl consistent are given by
76. Which one of the following is an ingredient of (a) 1, –2 (b) –1, 2
Pthalic acid manufacture by catalytic oxidation (c) 1, 2 (d) 1, 1
(a) Benzene (b) Salicylic acid
1 3 2
(c) Anthranilic acid (d) naphthalene
84. Let A 2 5 t , then the values of t
77. On comparison with H C H bond angle of
4 7 t 6
methane, the C N C bond angle of
trimethylamine is for which inverse of A does not exist
(a) higher (b) no change (a) –2, 1 (b) 3, 2
(c) not comparable (d) lower (c) 2, –3 (d) 3, –1
78. The treatment of acylazide (RCON3) with acidic 85. The non integer roots of
or alkaline medium gives x4 3x 3 2x 2 3x 1 0
(a) RCONH2 (b) R – NH2
1 1
(c) RCH2 NH2 (d) RCOCHNH (a) (3 13), (3 13)
2 2
79. The sequence of basic strength of alky1 amines
follows the order 1 1
(b) (3 13), (3 13)
(a) RNH2 < R2NH > R3N 2 2
(b) R2NH2 < R2NH < R3N
1 1
(c) R2NH < RNH2 < R3N (c) (3 17 ), (3 17 )
2 2
(d) RNH2 < R2NH < R3N
80. Activation of benzene ring in aniline can be 1 1
(d) (3 17), (3 17)
decreased by treating with 2 2
(a) dil. HCl (b) ethyl alcohol
(c) acetic acid (d) acetyl chloride 86. If e x y 1 y2 , then the value of y is
1 x x 1 x x
PART - III (MATHEMATICS) (a) (e e ) (b) (e e )
2 2
x x
81. The value of x, for which the matrix x x 2
(c) e e 2(d) e e
87. Consider an infinite geometric series with the
2 first term a and common ratio r. If its sum is 4 and
1 2
x
3
A 1 x 2x 2 is singular, is the second term is , then
4
1
1 2 4 3 3
x (a) a = ,r= (b) a = 2, r =
7 7 8
(a) ±1 (b) ±2 3 1 1
(c) a = ,r= (d) a = 3, r =
(c) ±3 (d) ±4 2 2 4
Solved Paper 2006 2006-7
88. If and are the roots of the equation 95. If sin , cos , tan are in G.P. then cos9 +
ax2 + bx + c = 0, then the value of 3 + 3 is
cos6 + 3cos5 – 1 is equal to
3abc b3 a 3 b3 (a) –1 (b) 0
(a) (b) (c) 1 (d) 2
a3 3abc
96. If in a triangle ABC,
3 3 5cosC + 6cosB = 4 and 6cosA + 4cosC = 5,
3abc b (3abc b )
(c) (d)
a3
a3 A B
then tan tan is equal to
89. The volume of the tetrahedron with vertices 2 2
P (–1, 2, 0), Q ( 2, 1, –3), R (1, 0, 1) and S (3, –2, 3)
is 2 3
(a) (b)
3 2
1 2
(a) (b) 1
3 3
(c) (d) 5
5
1 3
(c) (d) 97. In a model, it is shown that an arc of a bridge is
4 4 semielliptical with major axis horizontal. If the
90. If a iˆ 2jˆ 3k,
ˆ b ˆi 2jˆ kˆ and length of the base is 9m and the highest part of
the bridge is 3m from horizontal; the best
c 3iˆ ˆj then t such that a tb is at right angle approximation of the height of the arch, 2m from
to c will be equal to the centre of the base is
(a) 5 (b) 4 11 8
(c) 6 (d) 2 (a) m (b) m
4 3
91. An equation of the plane passing through the
line of intersection of the planes x + y + z = 6 and 7
(c) m (d) 2 m
2x + 3y + 4z + 5 = 0 and passing through (1, 1, 1) 2
is 98. The number of real tangents through (3,5) that
(a) 2x + 3y + 4z = 9 (b) x + y + z = 3 can be drawn to the ellipses 3x2 + 5y2 = 32 and
(c) x + 2y + 3z = 6 (d) 20x + 23y + 26z = 69 25x2 + 9y2 = 450 is
92. The length of the shortest distance between the (a) 0 (b) 2
lines r 3iˆ 5jˆ 7kˆ (iˆ 2ˆj k)
ˆ and (c) 3 (d) 4
99. If the normal to the rectangular hyperbola xy =
r ˆi ˆj kˆ (7iˆ 6jˆ k)
ˆ is
c
(a) 83 units (b) 6 units c2 at the point ct, meets the curve again at
t
(c) 3 units (d) 2 29 units
c
93. The region of the argand plane defined by ct ', , then
t'
z i z i 4 is (a) t3t' = 1 (b) t3t' = –1
(a) interior of an ellipse (c) tt' = 1 (d) tt' = –1
(b) exterior of a circle 100. An equilateral triangle is inscribed in the
(c) interior and boundary of an ellipse parabola y2 = 4x one of whose vertex is at the
(d) interior of a parabola vertex of the parabola, the length of each side of
13
the triangle is
94. The value of the sum (i n i n 1 ) where 3 3
n 1 (a) (b) 4
2 2
i 1 equals
(a) i (b) i –1 3
(c) 8 (d) 8 3
(c) – i (d) 0 2
EBD_7443
2006-8 Target VITEEE
x 3 y3 d2 y dy
u u (a) 2 0
104. If u = tan –1 x y , then x x y dx 2 dx
y
3
(a) sin 2u (b) cos 2u d2 y dy
(b) 0
(c) sec2 2u (d) tan 2u dx 2 dx
3
x d2 y dy
105. If f ' x and f(0) = 0, then f(x) = (c) a 0
1 x dx 2 dx
3
3 1 d2 y dy
2 (d) 2a 0
(a) (1 x) 2 6(1 x) 2 1 dx 2 dx
3
y
110. The solution of xcosec y dx + xdy = 0
x
3 1
2 is
(b) (1 x) 2 3(1 x) 2 2
3 x
(a) log x cos c
y
3 1 y
2 (b) log x cos c
(c) (1 x) 2 4(1 x) 2 2 x
3
x
(c) log x sin c
y
3 1
2
(d) (1 x) 2 3(1 x) 2 1 y
3 (d) log x sin c
x
Solved Paper 2006 2006-9
2006 SOLUTIONS
1 1
4 C 2 C 2 1 1000 Q
C1 C2
x2 1– x
2
x2 1– x
2
C1 C2
2 2
1000 Q
2 1– x x C1C2
0 nI 4 10 –7 250 20 10 –3 1 1
B 0.25
2r 2 40 10 –3 16 4
EBD_7443
2006-12 Target VITEEE
19. (b) According to Brewster's law, reflected light 25. (b) Photon moves with speed of light ie,
is plane polarised if unpolarised light falls v = c and rest mass of a particle is
at the interface of air and medium at an angle
m0 m 1 – v2 / c2
ip called polarising angle then
hence m0 (photon)= 0
= tan ip (glass) = tan 60 3 photon has zero rest mass.
20. (a) Newton's ring arrangement is used for
h
determin ing the wavelength of Momentum of photon =
monochromatic light. For this the diameter
of nth dark ring (Dn) and (n + p)th dark ring 26. (c) de Broglie wavelength is given by
(Dn + p) are measured then h 6.626 10 –34
–3
6.626 10 –34 m
D2(n p) 4(n p) R and D2n 4n R mv 1000 10 1
27. (b) Let the velocity of a particle be v where
D2n D2n mass m is double the rest mass i.e., m = 2m0
p
then
4pR
Here, n = 10, n + p = 20; v2 v2
m0 m 1– m0 2m 0 1 –
p = 10; R = 1 m, D10 = 3.96 × 10–3 m, c2 c2
D20 = 5.82 × 10–3 m
1 v2 1 v2
1– =1 – 2
D 220 2
D10 2 c2 4 c
4pR
v2 1 3
3 2 3 2 1–
(5.82 10 ) (3.36 10 ) c2 4 4
4 10 1
3
= 5646 Å v c
4
21. (b) Angular momentum in any stationary orbit
28. (d) By Einstein's equation E= mc2 where
nh m = 2kg
is mvr for 4th orbit, n = 4
2 E = 2×(3 × 10 8 )2
= 2 × 3 × 3× 10 16 = 18 × 1016 J
4h 29. (b) By definition, the difference between the
mvr
2 sum of the masses of neutrons and protons
forming a nucleus and mass of nucleus is
called mass defect
22. (d) According to Bohr's, Brackett series is
30. (b) Mean life time = 1.44 T where T is half
obtained when an electron jumps to 4th orbit
life period of an atom
from any other outer orbit
23. (a) Total energy of electron T 3
= 1.44 T = minute
0.6931 0.6931
KZe 2 31. (d) (by conservation of charge)
E K.E. P.E.
2r 32. (d) Baryons are proton, neutron, lamda,
0 –
–KZe2 sigma ( –), X
i ,
Potential energy in the orbit P.E.
r 33. (c) As donor and acceptor impurities are added
P.E. = 2 × E P.E.=2 × ( –13.6)= –27.2 eV to semiconductor to make an extrinsic semi-
24. (a) Bragg's condition is 2dsin = n for second conductor, intrinsic semiconductor is
order n = 2 , sin =1. For longest d=2 formed by internal generation of e– by
=d breaking up of covalent bonds.
Solved Paper 2006 2006-13
truth table is A B Y
Molecular mass 158
0 0 0 = = 31.6
0 1 1 5 5
1 0 1
42. (b) In case of lanthanoids, 4f orbitals lie too
1 1 0
deep and hence the magnetic effect of the
This shows it gives perfect binary addition motion of the electron in its orbital is not
37. (d) In FM, carrier frequency is the constant quenched out. Here spin contribution S and
frequency which is modulated by signal orbital contribution L couple together to
amplitude. It is also called carrier swing. give a new quantum number J.
(Centre frequency is fc in AM wave,
Thus magnetic moment of lanthanoids is
frequency deviation f max – fc ,
given by, g J(J 1)
max )
mod ulation factor
fc where J = L – S when the shell is less than
38. (c) The common antenna is a straight half fill
J = L + S when the shell is more than half fill
conductor of length l held vertically
4 1 S(S 1) L(L 1)
with its lower end touching the ground. and g 1
2 2J(J 1)
39. (b) The vidicon is a storage-type camera tube
in which a charge-density pattern is formed 43. (d) Mg2+ = 1s2, 2s2, 2p6 (No unpaired electrons)
by the imaged scene radiation on a
photoconductive surface which is then Ti3+ = 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 4s0, 3d1
scanned by a beam of low-velocity (One unpaired electrons)
electrons. The fluctuating voltage coupled
V3+ = 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 4s0, 3d2
out to a video amplifier can be used to
reproduce the scene being imaged. The (Two unpaired electrons)
electrical charge produced by an image will Fe2+ = 1s2, 2s2, 2p6, 3s2, 3p6, 4s0, 3d6
remain in the face plate until it is scanned
or until the charge dissipates. (Four unpaired electrons)
40. (b) Maximum range of radar d max Fe2+has highest number of unpaired
l and
electrons.
power transmitted by antenna of length l is
44. (d) Zn + 2NaOH Na2ZnO2 + H2
2 1/ 4
p l/ l p and d p Sod. zincate
EBD_7443
2006-14 Target VITEEE
54. (b) As the system is closed, hence the reaction
45. (c) + + will be reversible, hence according to
en en
Le-chatelier principle pressure decreases
Cl Cl since the volume is increasing.
Co Co V2
55. (d) W = – 2.303 nRT log
V1
Cl Cl
en en Given n = 6, T = 27°C = 273 + 27 = 300 K
V1 = 1 L, V2 = 10 L
d - cis form l - cis form
10
W = – 2.303 × 6 × 8.314 × 300 log
1
Cl +
= 34.465 kJ
56. (a) It is spontaneous process because zinc is
more reactive than copper, hence can easily
en Co en
repace Cu from CuSO4.
57. (c) Kp = Kc (RT) n
n = np(g) – nr(g) = 2 – 2 = 0
Cl
Kp = Kc
trans form (meso)
46. (b) Neutral ligands are given the same names 58. (d) Ice Water
as the neutral molecule. However, two very The volume of ice is more than water.
important exceptions to this rule are: Therefore when pressure is increased the
H2O Aquo (Aqua) NH3 Ammine. equilibrium shifts in forward direction. It
47. (a) Ni(PF3)4 – tetrakis phosphours (III) fluoride favoures melting of ice.
nickel (0). 59. (c) It is a first order reaction because
48. (a) The colour of KMnO4 is due to charge
rate of reaction [N2O5]
transfer. The configuration of manganese
in permagnate ion is d0 but it is coloured 60. (d) The reactions with low activation energies
because its electrons are photo-exited. are always fast whereas the reactions with
49. (c) In face centred cubic lattice, the atoms are high activation energy are always slow.
present at eight corners of faces and one 61. (d) For spontaneous reaction free energy
each at 6 faces. change is negative.
Lattice points belonging to face centred G = – nFE
62. (a) Because at infinite dilution the equivalent
1 1
cubic unit cell = 8 6 4 conductance of strong electrolytes
8 2 furnishing same number of ions is same.
50. (a) Schottky defect is caused when equal 63. (c) Reducing character i.e tendency to loose
number of cations and anions are missing electron decreases down the series, hence
from their lattice sites. the correct order is Zn > Cu > Ag.
51. (a) Polystyrene is thermoplastic substance.
64. (b) At anode the following reaction takes place
52. (a) Po – Simple cubic lattice
CH4 + 2H2O CO2 + 8H + + 8e –
Na – bcc
Cu – fcc 65. (a) Oxygen atom in alcohol molecule is sp3
hybridised.
R P1T2 P2 T1 66. (d) In this reaction LiAlH4 acts as reducing
53. (c) Wirr Pext
P1P2 O
During expansion in vaccum Pext = 0 || LiAlH4
agent. R C OH RCH2OH
work done = 0.
Solved Paper 2006 2006-15
67. (d) 3° alcohols are resistant to oxidation and 73. (d) The O – H strecting of carboxylic acid
are oxidised only by strong oxidising agents absorb in region of 1700-2000 cm–1
like conc. HNO3. They are resistant to
oxidation in neutral or alkaline KMnO4. O
||
68. (b) C2H5 – O – C2H5
H 2O
2C2H5OH 74. (b) Formic acid H C OH has – CHO
boil, dil.acid
ethyl alcohol group and therefore it reduces Fehling
solution.
O
|| CH 2OH HCl COOH
69. (b) CH3 C CH3 + | NaOH
CH 2OH 75. (c)
OH OH
H3C O – CH2 + CO2
This is decarboxylation reaction.
H3C O – CH2
cyclic ketal Catalytic
76. (d)
70. (b) oxidation
CH3 Napthalene
Conc. H 2SO4 drops
Room temp. CH
O O COOH
3 CH3CHO
Dil. H2SO4 CH CH
H3C O CH3 COOH
Para aldehyde Phthalic acid
(pleasant smelling liquid,
used as hypnotic and soporofic) 77. (b) In both the cases carbon is sp3 hybridised
(sleep producing) and bond angle is 109°28'.
78. (b) This reaction is known as curtius
Conc. H 2SO4 H3C – CH – O – CH – CH3 rearrangement.
or HCl gas
4 CH3CHO O O N2 2NaOH
dil H 2SO 4
RCON3 RNCO
H3C – CH – O – CH – CH3
Na2CO3 + RNH2
Metaldehyde
(used as solid fuel in spirit lamps) 1° amine is formed.
79. (a) It is expected that the basic nature of
distillation
71. (c) 2(CH3COO)2Ca amines should be in order tertiary >
CH3COCH3 + 2CaCO3 secondary > primary but the observed
Acetone Calcium order in the case of lower members is found
carbonate to be as secondary > Primary > tetriary. This
72. (d) Ketones do not react with alcohol. anomalous behaviour of tetriary amines is
reduction due to steric factors i.e crowding of alkyl
(i) Aldehydes 1° alcohol
groups cover nitrogen atom from all sides
e.g., CH3CHO CH 3CH 2OH thus makes the approach and bonding by a
reduction proton relatively difficult which results the
(ii) Ketones 2° alcohol maximum steric strain in tetiary amines. The
CH3 CH3 electrons are there but the path is blocked,
C=O CHOH
CH3 CH3 resulting the reduction in basicity.
(iii) Ketones do not reduce Fehling solution but Thus the correct order is
aldehydes do so. R2 NH > R NH2 > R3N.
EBD_7443
2006-16 Target VITEEE
80. (d) On acetylation aniline is converted into
(x 9)(x 2 9x 14) 0
acetamide which is resonance stablised and
therefore less reactive. (x 9) (x 2 7x 2x 14) 0
NH2 NHCOCH3
(x 9) (x 7) (x 2) 0
+ CH3COCl x 9, 7, 2
83. (c) We have
Acetanilide
1 1 1 : 1
PART - III (MATHEMATICS) A:B 1 2 4 :
2
1 4 10 :
81. (a) We know that, A is singular if |A| = 0
2 1 1 1 : 1
1 2
x ~ 0 1 3 : 1
2 2
|A| 1 x 2x 0 0 3 9 : 1
1
1 2
x applying R 2 R2 R1
& R3 R 3 R1
2 2 1
|A| 2x 2x 1 2 2x 2 x 0
x x
1 1 1 : 1
2 2 2 ~ 0 1 3 : 1
[0] 2 2x 2x 0
x x 2
0 0 0 : 3 2
3 2
2x 2x 2 2x 0
applying R 3 R 3 3R 2
x3 x2 x 1 0
But the system is consistent
2
x (x 1) 1(x 1) 0 2
3 2 0
(x 1) (x 2 1) 0 ( 2) ( 1) 0 2 or 1
x 1 84. (c) We know that inverse of A does not exist
only when |A| = 0
x 3 7
1 3 2
82. (b) Given 2 x 2 0
2 5 t 0
7 6 x
4 7 t 6
x[x 2 12] 3[2x 14] 7[12 7x] 0
( 30 7t t 2 ) 3( 12 4t)
x 3 67x 126 0 2(14 2t 20) 0
But given (x = 9) is a root of given
determinant. 30 7t t 2 36 12t 12 4t 0
(x + 9) is a factor
t2 t 6 0 t 2 3t 2t 6 0
x 3 9x 2 9x 2 81x 14x 126 0
t(t 3) 2(t 3) 0
2
x (x 9) 9x(x 9) 14(x 9) 0 (t 3)(t 2) 0 t 2, 3
Solved Paper 2006 2006-17
b1 b 2 n 1 n 1 n 1
6j + k)
>
>
( 7i –
>
j–k+ µ
>
>
r = –i – Q
95. (b) Given : sin , cos , tan are in G.P..
L2
cos 2 sin tan cos3 sin 2
cos3 1 cos 2
>
>
>
>
>
r = (3i + 5j + 7k) + (i – 2j + k)
cos cos6 3cos5 . (cos3 cos2 ) 1
C dy
or y(1 log x)
dx
Y´
d y 1 dy
& y. (1 log x).
2 x dx
3 dx
So, the coordinates of B are ,
2 2 x 1
d y 1 dy
(1 log x).
Since, B lies on y2 = 4x dx 2 x dx
2
3 dy
4 0 1 log x 0
4 2 Now,
dx
216 1
. 3 8 3 l og x 1 log e log
2 e
101. (d) Let f(x) = ax + b
Given f(2) = 4 & f '(2) = 1 1
x
f(2) = a . 2 + b = 4 2a + b = 4 ...(1) e
Solved Paper 2006 2006-21
1 Let 1 + x = t2 x = t2 – 1
d2 y 1 1
dx = 2t . dt
Also, at x is e e 0
dx 2 e
t2 1
dy f (x) . 2t dt 2 (t 2 1)dt
0 t
dx
t3
1 f (x) 2 t c
So, x is a point of local maxima. 3
e
Maximum value
(1 x)3/ 2
1 f (x) 2 (1 x)1/ 2 c
1 3
= value of y when x ee
e
.......... (1)
z z 1
104. (a) Euler's theorem x y nz But f (0) 0 2 1 c 0
x y 3
x3 y3 4 4
Given : U = tan–1 c 0 c
x y 3 3
Equation (1) becomes
x3 y3
tan U z (let)
x y (1 x)3/ 2 4
f (x) 2 (1 x)1/ 2
n= 3–1=2 3 3
z z 2
x y 2z f (x) (1 x)3 / 2 3(1 x)1/ 2 2
x y 3
U U
sec 2 U . x y 2 tan U 2
x y Then, I log tan x dx
2
0
U U sin U
x. y 2. . cos2 U
x y cos U a a
f (x)dx f (a x)dx
U U 0 0
x y sin 2U
x y
x 2
105. (b) Given : f '(x) , f (0) 0 I log(cot x)dx
1 x
0
x
f '(x)dx dx
1 x
2
1
x I log dx
f (x) dx 0
tan x
1 x
EBD_7443
2006-22 Target VITEEE
2 2
1 a2 2
I log tan x dx log(tan x)dx sin 2 d
0 0 6
0
I I 2I 0 I 0
[Using eq. (1)]
a 2 2 1 cos 2
107. (d) If curve r = a sin 3 . d
To trace the curve, we consider the 6 2
0
following table :
cos 2 1 2sin
3 5
3 0 2 3
2 2 2
2 5 a2 sin 2 2
0 .
6 3 2 3 6 12 2 0
r 0 a 0 a 0 a 0
a2 a2
. sin
Thus there is a loop between 12 2 24
3 3
2 xe x ex
1 1
dz zx.sin z x x x
z x z cosec z P.I. .sin 4x sin 4x
dx x sin z 2 4 8
Solution y = Complementary function
dz dx + Particular Integral
x cos ecz sin z dz
dx x
x
y = A cos 4x + B sin 4x + sin 4x
log | x | cos z c 8
113. (c)
y 114. (d) Let us make one packet for each of the
log | x | cos c
x books on the same size. Now, 3 packets can
be arranged in P(3, 3) = 3! ways
d2 y 5 large books can be arranged in 5! ways
111. (c) If 2y x2 4 medium size books can be arranged in
dx 2
4! ways
d 3 small books can be arranged in 3! ways
(D2 2)y x2 D Required number of ways
dx
= 3! × 5! × 4! × 3! ways
EBD_7443
2006-24 Target VITEEE
115. (a) An identity relation is one in which every
3 4 3 4 4 4
element of a set is related to itself only. 4 2 1 4 2 1
a * b = a + b – ab C3 . C4 .
3 3 3 3
As in identity relation 'a' is related to 'a', so
the correct option will be the one which 4! 8 1 4! 16
. . .
gives the value of the relation = 'a'. So, 3!1! 27 3 4! 0! 81
equating a + b – ab = a, we get b(1 – a) = 0.
Now putting the values of a, we find b and 32 16 48 16
the option in which a = b, will be the answer. 81 81 81 27
For a = 0, b = 0, so the correct option. 119. (b) n = total number of ways = 25 = 32
For a = 1, b(1 – 1) = 0 b can have multiple Since each answer can be true or false
values. & m = favourable number of ways
For a = 2, b(1 – 2) = 0 b = 0 but a = 2. = 5C4 + 5C5
116. (a) p q ~p ~ pvq p q
T T F T T 5! 5!
5 1 6 m 6
T F F F F 4!1! 5! 0!
F T T T T Since to pass the quiz, student must give 4
F F T T T or 5 true answers.
117. (b) Let S be the sample space
m 6 3
n(S) 36 Hence, p p p
n 32 16
Events
[sum greater than 3 but not exceeding 6] 120. (a) Since f(x) is the probability density function
= {(2, 2), (3, 1), (1, 3), (4, 1), (1, 4), (5, 1) (1, 5), of random variable X.
(3, 2), (2, 3), (4, 2), (2,4), (3, 3)}
n(E) 12 f (x) 1
C1 VC 2
(a) x (b) x
(c) V 1 (d)
C2 (C1 C 2 )
5. In the network shown in the Fig, each resistance
is 1 . The effective resistance between A and B
is U U
1
1 1 (c) x (d) x
1 1
A 1 1 B
4 3
(a) (b) 9. A straight wire of diameter 0.5 mm carrying a
3 2 current of 1 A is replaced by another wire of
8 1 mm diameter carrying same current. The
(c) 7 (d) strength of magnetic field far away is
7
EBD_7443
MT-2 Target VITEEE
(a) twice the earlier value in the coil is 220V, the self-inductance of the
(b) same as the earlier value coil is
(c) one-half of the earlier value (a) 5 H (b) 6 H
(d) one-quarter of the earlier value (c) 11 H (d) 12 H
10. A positively charged particle moving due east 16. In a region of uniform magnetic induction
enters a region of uniform magnetic field B = 10–2 tesla, a circular coil of radius 30 cm
directed vertically upwards. The particle will and resistance 2 ohm is rotated about an axis
(a) continue to move due east which is perpendicular to the direction of B
(b) move in a circular orbit with its speed and which forms a diameter of the coil. If the
unchanged coil rotates at 200 rpm the amplitude of the
(c) move in a circular orbit with its speed
alternating current induced in the coil is
increased
(a) 4 2 mA (b) 30 mA
(d) gets deflected vertically upwards.
(c) 6 mA (d) 200 mA
11. Power dissipated across the 8 resistor in the
17. If 0 and 0 are the electric permittivity and
circuit shown here is 2 watt. The power
magnetic permeability in vacuum, and are
dissipated in watt units across the 3 resistor
corresponding quantities in medium, then
is refractive index of the medium is
1 3 i1
0
(a) (b)
i 0 0
(c) 0 0 (d)
8 i2 0 0
20. The angular separation d between two 26. Einstein’s photoelectric equation is
wavelength and + d in a diffraction grating Ek h . In this equation Ek refers to
is directly proportional to
(a) kinetic energy of all the emitted electrons.
(a) frequency of light
(b) mean kinetic energy of emitted electrons
(b) grating element (c) maximum kinetic energy of emitted
(c) spatial frequency of grating electrons.
(d) wavelength of light (d) minimum kinetic energy of emitted
21. In the Bragg scattering of a beam of electrons electrons.
each of mass m and velocity v by a nickel 27. In a photoelectric experiment anode potential
crystal, the first maximum is observed at = is plotted against plate current
30° ( being the angle the beam makes with the
crystal plane). What is the inter-planar distance I
d for the crystal?
h 2h C B
(a) (b) A
mv mv
h mv V
(c) (d)
2mv h (a) A and B will have different intensities while
22. What is the ground state energy of B and C will have different frequencies
positronium? (The ground state energy of (b) B and C will have different intensities while
hydrogen is A and C will have different frequencies
–13.6 eV) (c) A and B will have different intensities while
(a) – 3.4 eV (b) – 6.8 eV A and C will have equal frequencies
(c) – 13.6 eV (d) – 27.2 eV (d) A and B will have equal intensities while B
23. The minimum wavelength in Lymann series of and C will have different frequencies
hydrogen spectra is 91.2 nm, the longest 28. Which figure shows the correct force acting
wavelength in this series must be on the body sliding down an inclined plane?
(m mass, fs force of friction)
eh ch
(a) (b) N B
Vc eV fs
eV cV
(c) (d) (a)
ch eh sin
mg mg
24. The glancing angle in a X-rays diffraction C mg cos A
experiment is 30° and the wavelength of the X- N B
rays used is 20 mm. The interplanar spacing of fs
the crystal diffracting these X-rays will be
(a) 40 nm (b) 20 nm (b)
sin
(c) 15 nm (d) 10 nm mg mg mg cos
C A
25. The velocity of a body of rest mass m o is
N sin B
3 mg
c (Where c is the velocity of light in
2
vacuum). The mass of this body is (c) fs
mg mg cos
C A
3 1
(a) mo (b) mo N B
2 2
2 (d) fs
(c) 2mo (d) mo sin
3 mg mg mg cos
C A
EBD_7443
MT-4 Target VITEEE
29. The energy released per fission of a 92 U235 37. In frequency modulation
nucleus is nearly (a) the amplitude of modulated wave varies as
(a) 200 eV (b) 20 eV frequency of carrier wave
(c) 200 MeV (d) 2000 eV (b) the frequency of modulated wave varies as
30. Half-lives of two radioactive substances A and amplitude of modulating wave
B are respectively 20 minutes and 40 minutes. (c) the amplitude of modulated wave varies as
Initially, the sample of A and B have equal number frequency of carrier wave
of nuclei. After 80 minutes, the ratio of remaining (d) the frequency of modulated wave varies as
number of A and B nuclei is frequency of modulating wave
(a) 1 : 16 (b) 4 : 1 38. Two liquids of densities d1 and d2 are flowing
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 1 in identical capillary tubes uder the same
31. The binding energy per nucleon is largest for pressure difference. If t1 and t2 are time taken
for the flow of equal quantities (mass) of
(a) 56Fe (b) 16O
liquids, then the ratio of coefficient of viscosity
(c) 4He (d) 208Pb
of liquids must be
32. The radius of Ge nucleus is measured to be twice
the radius of 9Be4 nucleus. How many nucleons d1 t 1 t1
(a) (b)
are there in the Ge nucleus ? d2t2 t2
(a) 72 (b) 96
(c) 120 (d) 144 d2 t2 d1t 1
33. A Zener diode has a breakdown voltage of 9.1 V (c) (d)
d1 t 1 d 2t 2
with a maximum power dissipation of 364 mW.
39. Two masses ma and mb moving with velocities
What is the maximum current that the diode can
va and v b in opposite dir ection collide
withstand ?
elastically and after the collision ma and mb
(a) 0.04 A (b) 0.4 A
move with velocities Vb and Va respectively.
(c) 4.0 A (d) 40 A
Then the ratio ma/mb is
34. The voltage across a diode in a full wave rectifier
having input voltage of peak value Vm during Va Vb ma mb
(a) (b)
its non conducting period is Va Vb ma
(a) 0 (b) – Vm
(c) – 2Vm (d) – 4Vm 1
(c) 1 (d)
35. A n-p-n transistor conducts when 2
(a) both collector and emitter are negative with 40. The most suitable device at present for solid
respect to the base state picture tube is
(b) both collector and emitter are positive with (a) LED (b) LCD
respect to the base (c) Silicon (d) Quartz crystal
(c) collector is positive and emitter is negative PART - II : CHEMISTRY
with respect to the base 41. Some Gem stones used to show colour. Ruby
(d) collector is positive and emitter is at same
shows colour due to __________.
potential as the base
(a) d-d transition of Al3+ and Cr3+
36. The diagram of a logic circuit is given below.
The output F of the circuit is represented by (b) d -d transition of Al3+
(c) d -d transition of Cr 3+
W (d) d-d transition of Cr 3+
X 42. The lanthanide contraction is responsible for
F the fact that
(a) Zr and Y have about the same radius
W (b) Zr and Nb have similar oxidation state
(c) Zr and Hf have about the same radius
Y
(d) Zr and Zn have the same oxidation states
(a) W . (X + Y) (b) W . (X . Y) (Atomic numbers : Zr = 40, Y = 39, Nb = 41,
(c) W + (X . Y) (d) W + (X + Y) Hf = 72, Zn = 30)
Mock Test 1 MT-5
43. At equilibrium, if Kp = 1, then 50. Which one of the following ionic species will
(a) G 0 (b) G 1 impart colour to an aqueous solution?
(c) G 1 (d) None of these (a) Ti4+ (b) Cu+
44. Carbon - 14 dating method is based on the fact (c) Zn2+ (d) Cr3+
that: 51. When electrons are trapped into the crystal in
(a) C-14 fraction is same in all objects anion vacancy, the defect is known as :
(b) C-14 is highly insoluble (a) Schottky defect
(c) Ratio of carbon-14 and carbon-12 is constant (b) Frenkel defect
(d) all the above (c) Stoichiometric defect
45. 235 1 236 fission products +
92 U 0n 92 U (d) F-centres
neutrons + 3.20 × 10–11 J 52. The number of atoms contained in a fcc unit
235 cell of a monoatomic substance is
The energy released when 1 g of 92 U finally
(a) 1 (b) 2
undergoes fission is
(c) 4 (d) 6
(a) 12.75 × 108 kJ (b) 16.40 × 107 kJ
(c) 8.20 × 107 kJ (d) 6.50 × 106 kJ 53. The second order Bragg diffraction of X-rays
with = 1.00 Å from a set of parallel planes in a
46. K 3[Al(C 2O 4 )3 ] is called metal occurs at an angle 60º. The distance
(a) Potassium alumino oxalate between the scattering planes in the crystal is
(b) Potassium trioxalateoaluminate (III) (a) 0.575 Å (b) 1.00 Å
(c) Potassium aluminium (III) oxalate (c) 2.00 Å (d) 1.15 Å
(d) Potassium trioxalato aluminate (VI)
54. Identify the correct statement regarding
47. A co-ordination complex compound of cobalt entropy:
has the molecular formula containing five
ammonia molecules, one nitro group and two (a) At absolute zero of temperature, entropy
chlorine atoms for one cobalt atom. One mole of a perfectly crystalline substance is taken
of this compound produces three mole ions in to be zero
an aqueous solution. On reacting this solution (b) At absolute zero of temperature, the
with excess of AgNO3 solution, we get two entropy of a perfectly crystalline substance
moles of AgCl precipitate. The ionic formula is +ve
for this complex would be (c) At absolute zero of temperature, the
(a) [Co(NH3)4 (NO2) Cl] [(NH3) Cl] entropy of all crystalline substances is
(b) [Co (NH3)5 Cl] [Cl (NO2)] taken to be zero
(c) [Co (NH3)5 (NO2)] Cl2 (d) At 0ºC, the entropy of a perfectly crystalline
(d) [Co (NH3)5] [(NO2)2Cl2] substance is taken to be zero
48. Which of thefollowing does not have a metal- 55. Standard Gibb’s free energy change for
carbon bond? isomerization reaction
(a) Al(OC 2 H 5 )3 (b) C 2 H 5MgBr cis-2 pentene trans-2-pentene
(c) K[Pt (C 2 H 4 )Cl 3 ] (d) Ni(CO) 4 is – 3.67 kJ/mol at 400 K. If more trans-2
pentene is added to the reaction vessel, then
49. Which one of the following octahedral
complexes will not show geometric isomerism? (a) more cis-2 pentene is formed
( A and B are monodentate ligands) (b) equilibrium remains unaffected
(a) [MA5B] (b) [MA2B4] (c) additional trans-2 pentene is formed
(c) [MA3B3] (d) [MA4B2] (d) equilibrium is shifted in forward direction
EBD_7443
MT-6 Target VITEEE
56. In the following reaction, how is the rate of 3 5
(a) K(510.1 – 457.6) ln (3.07 × 10 / 2.2 10 )
appearance of the underlined product related to
the rate of disappearance of the underlined 3
(b) 3 . 048 10
reactant ? 5
(c) ln 2. 2 10 457.6 K cal.
BrO 3( aq ) 5Br ( aq ) 6 H (aq )
(d) (510 .1 457 .6 / 52 .5) R ln (307)/2.2) cal.
61. The ionic conductance of Ba2+ and Cl– are
3Br2( l) 3H 2 O ( l) respectively 127 and 76 ohm–1 cm2 at infinite
dilution. The equivalent conductance (in ohm–
d[Br2 ] 5 d[Br ] 1 cm2) of BaCl at infinite dilution will be :
(a) 2
dt 3 dt (a) 139.5 (b) 203
(c) 279 (d) 101.5
d[Br2 ] d[ Br ] 62. On passing a current of 1.0 ampere for 16 min
(b)
dt dt and 5 sec through one litre solution of CuCl2, all
copper of the solution was deposited at
d[Br2 ] 3 d[ Br ] cathode. The strength of CuCl2 solution was
(c)
dt 5 dt (Molar mass of Cu= 63.5; Faraday constant =
96,500 Cmol–1)
d[Br2 ] 3 d[Br ] (a) 0.01 N (b) 0.01 M
(d)
dt 5 dt (c) 0.02 M (d) 0.2 N
57. The rate of reaction between two reactants A 63. Standard electrode potentials are :
and B decreases by a factor of 4 if th e Fe+2/Fe Eº = –0.44; Fe+3/Fe+2 Eº = + 0.77 ; If
concentration of reactant B is doubled. The Fe+2, Fe+3 and Fe blocks are kept together, then
(a) Fe+2 increases
order of this reaction with respect to reactant
(b) Fe+3 decreases
B is:
2
(a) 2 (b) 2 Fe
(c) remains unchanged
(c) 1 (d) 1 Fe 3
58. According to Le-chatelier’s principle, adding (d) Fe+2 decreases
heat to a solid liquid equilibrium will cause 64. The most durable metal plating on iron to
protect against corrosion is
the
(a) nickel plating (b) copper plating
(a) temperature to increase (c) tin plating (d) zinc plating.
(b) temperature to decrease 65. Reaction of CH — CH with RMgX leads to
2 2
(c) amount of liquid to decrease
O
(d) amount of solid to decrease. formation of
59. Which of the following is true at chemical (a) RCHOHR (b) RCHOHCH3
equilibrium? R
(a) ( G)T,p is minimum and ( S)U,V is also (c) RCH2CH2OH (d) CHCH 2OH
minimum R
(b) ( G)T,V is minimum and ( S)U,V is maximum 66. Increasing order of acid strength among
(c) ( G)T,V is maximum and ( S)U,V is zero p-methoxyphenol, p-methylphenol and
p-nitrophenol is
(d) ( G)T,p is zero and ( S)U,V is also zero
(a) p-Nitrophenol, p-Methoxyphenol,
60. The racemisation of - pinene is first order p-Methylphenol
reaction. In the gas the specific reaction rate was (b) p-Methylphenol, p-Methoxyphenol,
found to be 2.2 10 5
mm 1
at 457.6 K and p-Nitrophenol
(c) p-Nitrophenol, p-Meth ylphenol,
3
3.07 10 at 510.1 K. The energy of activation p-Methoxyphenol.
is (d) p-Methoxyphenol, p-Methylphenol,
p-Nitrophenol
Mock Test 1 MT-7
67. When phenol is treated with excess bromine 73. Aspirin is an acetylation product of
water. It gives (a) o-hydroxybenzoic acid
(a) m-Bromophenol (b) o-dihydroxybenzene
(b) o-and p-Bromophenols (c) m-hydroxybenzoic acid
(c) 2,4-Dibromophenol (d) p-dihydroxybenzene
(d) 2,4, 6-Tribomophenol. 74. Which of the following is incorrect?
68. In the reaction: (a) NaHSO3 is used in detection of carbonyl
CH3 compound
| (b) FeCl3 is used in detection of phenolic group
Heated
CH3 CH CH 2 O CH 2 CH3 HI (c) Tollen reagent is used in detection of
Which of the following compounds will be unsaturation
formed? (d) Fehling solution is used in detection of
glucose
(a) CH3 CH CH3 CH3CH 2 OH
| 75. Formic acid is obtained when
CH3 (a) Calcium acetate is heated with conc. H2SO4
(b) Calcium formate is heated with calcium
(b) CH3 CH CH 2 OH CH3CH3 acetate
| (c) Glycerol is heated with oxalic acid at 373 K
CH3
(d) Acetaldehyde is oxidised with K2Cr2O7 and
CH3 H2SO4.
| 76. When aniline reacts with oil of bitter almonds
(c) CH3 CH CH 2 OH CH3 CH 2 I
(C 6 H 5CHO ) condensation takes place and
CH3 benzal derivative is formed. This is known as
| (a) Million's base
(d) CH3 CH CH 2 I CH3CH 2OH
(b) Schiff's reagent
69. n-Propyl alcohol and isopropyl alcohol can be (c) Schiff's base
chemically distinguished by which reagent? (d) Benedict's reagent
(a) PCl5 77. The consituent of the powerful explosive RDX
(b) Reduction is formed during the nitration of
(c) Oxidation with potassium dichromate (a) toluene (b) phenol
(d) Ozonolysis (c) glycerol (d) urotropine
70. The thermodynamic efficiency of cell is given 78. Aniline in a set of reactions yielded a product
by D.
(a) H/ G (b) nFE/ G
(c) nFE/ H (d) nFE
71. Pinacolone is
(a) 2, 3-Dimethyl-2 3-butanediol
(b) 3, 3-Dimethyl-2 butanone
(c) I-Phenyl-2Propanone
(d) 1,1-Diphenyl-2-ethandiol. The structure of the product D would be:
72. An ester is boiled with KOH. The product is (a) C6H5NHOH
cooled and acidified with concentrated HCl. A
(b) C6H5NHCH2CH3
white crystalline acid separates. The ester is
(a) Methyl acetate (b) Ethyl acetate (c) C6H5CH2NH2
(c) Ethyl formate (d) Ethyl benzoate (d) C6H5CH2OH
EBD_7443
MT-8 Target VITEEE
C N (a) 4 (b) 3
(c) 2 (d) 1
H 3O 83. If tan x + tan (x + /3) + tan (x + /3) = 3, then
79. + CH3MgBr P
(a) tan x = 1 (b) tan 2x = 1
OCH3 (c) tan 3x =1 (d) none of these.
Product 'P' in the above reaction is 84. If b and c are any two non-collinear mutually
OH O
CH – CH3
perpendicular unit vectors and a is any vector,,
C – CH3
(a) a . ( b c)
(b) then ( a b) b ( a . c) c (b c)
| b c |2
OCH3 OCH3
is equal to :
COOH
CHO (a) a (b) 2 a
(C 2 H 5 )3 N
(b) (C2 H 5 )3 N (C2 H 5 )2 NH Y
C2 H 5NH 2 NH 3
(–1,0) (1,0)
(b) O X
(c) (C2 H 5 )2 NH C2 H 5 NH 2
(C 2 H 5 )3 N NH 3
(d) (C 2 H 5 ) 2 NH (C 2 H 5 ) 3 N Y
(0,1)
C 2 H 5 NH 2 NH 3 .
(c) X
PART - III : MATHEMATICS O
ROR–1 is (0,1)
(1,0)
(a) {(1, 3), (1, 5), (2, 3), (2, 5), (3, 5), (4, 5)} (d) X
(–1,0) O
(b) {(3,1), (5, 1), (3, 2), (5, 2), (5, 3), (5, 4)}
(c) {(3, 3), (3, 5), (5, 3), (5, 5)}
(d) {(3, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5)}
82. The smallest positive integer n for which 86. The point (2a, a) lies inside the region bounded
by the parabola x2 = 4y and its latus rectum.
1 i
n Then,
1 is (a) 0 a 1 (b) 0 < a < 1
1– i
(c) a > 1 (d) a < 0
Mock Test 1 MT-9
87. The linear inequations for which the shaded 91. Three concurrent lines with direction cosines
area in the following figure is the solution set, l1, m1, n1; l2, m2, n2 and l3, m3, n3 are coplanar
are l1 m1 n1
then l 2 m 2 n2
l3 m 3 n3
(a) 0 (b) 1
(c) –1 (d) 2
x–y=1 92. The resultant moment of three forces
î 2ˆj 3k̂ , 2î 3ˆj 4k̂ and î ˆj k̂ acting
on a particle at a point P (0, 1, 2) about the
point A (1, –2, 0) is
X X (a) 6 2 (b) 140
x + 2y = 8 (c) 21 (d) None
2x + y = 2 th th th
93. If the p , q , r , terms of a G.P. are respectively x,
109. In [0,1] Lagranges Mean Value theorem is NOT 114. The locus of a point, such that the sum of the
applicable to squares of its distances from the planes
x + y + z = 0, x – z =0 and x – 2y + z = 0 is 9, is
1 1
x x (a) x2 y2 z2 3
2 2
(a) f (x) 2
1 1 (b) x 2 y 2 z 2
x x 6
2 2
(c) x2 y2 z2 9
sin x
(b) , x 0 (d) x 2 y2 z2 12
f ( x) x
1, x 0 115. The distance of the point (–5, –5, –10) from
the point of intersection of the line
(c) f ( x) xx
r. 2iˆ ˆj 2kˆ 3iˆ 4ˆj 2kˆ and the
(d) f ( x) x
plane r · ˆi ˆj kˆ 5 is
110. With respect to multiplication modulo 5, the
set G = {1, 2, 3, 4} is (a) 13 (b) 12
(a) a finite abelian group of order 4 (c) 4 15 (d) 10 2
(b) not a finite abelian group of order 4 116. The asymptotes of the hyperbola
(c) both (a) and (b) xy – 3x + 4y + 2 = 0 are
(d) none (a) x = – 4 and y = 3 (b) x = 4 and y = –3
111. Let f be function such that f (x + y) = f(x) + f(y) (c) x = –4 and y = –4 (d) x = –3 and y = 3
for all x and y and f(x) = (2x2 + 3x) g (x) for all x,
117. The integer n for which
where g (x) is continuous and g(0) = 3. Then
f’(x) is equal to (cos x 1)(cos x e x )
lim is a finite non-zero
(a) 9 (b) 3 x 0 xn
(c) 6 (d) none of these number is
112. The differential equation (a) 1 (b) 2
(1 y 2 ) x dx (1 x 2 ) y dy 0 (c) 3 (d) 4
represents a family of : 118. The order and degree of the differential
(a) ellipses of constant eccentricity equation whose solution is
(b) ellipses of variable eccentricity y cx c 2 3c 3 2 2 , where c is a parameter,,
(c) hyperbolas of constant eccentricity
are respectively
(d) hyperbolas of variable eccentricity
(a) 1 and 4 (b) 1 and 3
1 x (c) 1 and 2 (d) none of these
113. dx is equal to 119. A football is inflated by pumping air in it.
x
When it acquires spherical shape its radius
1 x 1 increases at the rate of 0.02 cm/s. The rate of
(a) 2 1 x 2log c increase of its volume when the radius is 10 cm
1 x 1 is ___________ cm/s
(a) 0 (b) 2
1 x 1 (c) 8 (d) 9
(b) 4 1 x 2log c
1 x 1 120. Let B is a set containing the elements of
boolean algebra and a, b B , then a. (a + b) =
1 x 1
(c) 4 1 x 2log c (a) b (b) a . b
1 x 1 (c) a + b (d) a
(d) None of these.
EBD_7443
MT-12 Target VITEEE
PART - IV : (ENGLISH) 122. The character of a nation is the result of its-
Direction (Qs. 121 - 123) : Read the passage carefully (a) gross ignorance
and answer the questions given below. (b) cultural heritage
(c) socio-political conditions
At this stage of civilization, when many nations are
brought in to close and vital contact for good and (d) mentality
evil, it is essential, as never before, that their gross 123. The need for a greater understanding between
ignorance of one another should be diminished, that nations-
they should begin to understand a little of one (a) is more today than ever before
another's historical experience and resulting mentality. (b) was always there
It is the fault of the English to expect the people of
(c) is no longer there
other countries to react as they do, to political and
international situations. Our genuine goodwill and (d) will always be there
good intentions are often brought to nothing, because 124. Direction: Choose the correct meaning of the
we expect other people to be like us. This would be idiom from the options given below.
corrected if we knew the history, not necessarily in At one's wit's end
detail but in broad outlines, of the social and political (a) Perplexed
conditions which have given to each nation its present
(b) Clear Up
character.
121. According to the author the 'Mentality' of a (c) Explain
nation is mainly product of its- (d) Enlighten
(a) present character 125. Choose the best pronunciation of the word,
(b) international position Poem, from the following options.
(c) politics (a) poy-em (b) poe-um
(d) history
(d) poh-om (d) poi-um
MOCK
VITEEE Mock Test Paper
2
Max. Marks : 125 Time : 2½ hrs
PART - I : PHYSICS
10 10 10
A B
1. In an inelastic collision, which of the following
does not remain conserved? 10 10
(a) Momentum
(b) kinetic energy
(c) Total energy C D
(d) Neither momentum nor kinetic energy 10 10 10
2. Three capacitors C1, C2 and C3 are connected to (a) 10 (b) 20
a battery as shown. With symbols having their (c) 30 (d) 40
usual meanings, the correct conditions are 6. According to stokes law, the relation between
terminal velocity (vt) and viscosity of the
V
Q2 2 C 2 medium (n) is
V1
Q1 C1
(a) vt = n (b) vt n
Q3 C3 1
(c) vt
V3 n
V (d) vt is independent of n.
7. Kirchhoff’s first law, i.e. i = 0 at a junction, deals
with the conservation of
(a) Q1 = Q2 = Q3 and V1 = V2 = V
(a) charge (b) energy
(b) V1 = V2 = V3 = V
(c) Q1 = Q2 + Q3 and V = V1 + V2 (c) momentum (d) angular momentum
(d) Q2 = Q3 and V2 = V3 8. The potential difference between the terminals
3. A parallel plate condenser with oil between the of a cell in an open circuit is 2.2 V. When a resistor
plates (dielectric constant of oil K = 2) has a of 5 is connected across the terminals of the
capacitance C. If the oil is removed, then cell, the potential difference between the
capacitance of the capacitor becomes terminals of the cell is found to be 1.8 V. The
internal resistance of the cell is
(a) 2C (b) 2C
7 10
(a) (b)
C C 12 9
(c) (d)
2 2 9 12
4. At the centre of a cubical box + Q charge is (c) (d)
10 7
placed. The value of total flux that is coming out 9. Direct current is passed through a copper
a wall is sulphate solution using platinum electrodes. The
(a) Q / o (b) Q / 3 o elements liberated at the electrodes are
(a) copper at anode and sulphur at cathode
(c) Q / 4 o (d) Q / 6 o
(b) sulphur at anode and copper at cathode
5. What will be the equivalent resistance of circuit (c) oxygen at anode and copper at cathode
shown in figure between two points A and D (d) copper at anode and oxygen at cathode
EBD_7443
MT-14 Target VITEEE
10. Two electric bulbs, one of 200 V, 40W and other (a) 10 s (b) 0.1 s
of 200 V, 100W are connected in a domestic (c) 0.01 s (d) 1 s
circuit. Then 16. Two coils of self inductances 2 mH and 8 mH are
(a) they have equal resistance placed so close together that the effective flux
(b) the resistance of 40W bulb is more than in one coil is completely linked with the other.
100W bulb The mutual inductance between these coils is
(c) the resistance of 100W bulb is more than (a) 6 mH (b) 4 mH
40 W bulb (c) 16 mH (d) 10 mH
(d) they have equal current through them 17. Which one of the following electromagnetic
11. A beam of metal supported at the two edges is radiations has the smallest wavelength?
loaded at the centre. The depression at the (a) Ultraviolet waves (b) X-rays
centre is proportional to (c) -rays (d) Microwaves
18. Which one of the following phenomena is not
explained by Huygen’s constr uction of
wavefront?
(a) Refraction (b) Reflection
(a) Y 2 (b) Y
(c) Diffraction (d) Orgin of spectra
(c) 1/Y (d) 1/Y 2
19. Two light waves having their intensities in the
12. A charged particle of charge q and mass m enters
ratio 16 : 9 interfere to produce interference
perpendicularly in a magnetic field B . Kinetic pattern. What is the ratio of maximum intensity
energy of the particle is E; then frequency of to minimum intensity in this pattern ?
rotation is (a) 4 : 3 (c) 25 : 7
(b) 625 : 49 (d) 49 : 1
qB qB
(a) (b) 20. A slab of thickness t and refractive index 1.5 is
m 2 m
placed in between point A and B as shown in the
qBE qB figure given below. The optical path length
(c) (d) between A and B is
2 m 2 E
13. If N is the number of turns in a coil, the value of t
self inductance varies as
(a) N0 (b) N x y
A B
(c) N2 (d) N–2
14. In an A.C. circuit with voltage V and current I
the power dissipated is n = 1.5
(a) dependent on the phase between V and I
t
1 (a) x y (b) (x + t + y)
(b) VI 2
2
3 5
(c) x t y (d) x t y
(c) 1 VI 2 2
2
21. If according to the Bohr model of the hydrogen
(d) VI atom, the ionization energy of the atom in its
15. A magnetic field of 2 × 10–2 T acts at right angles ground state is 13.6 eV, then the energy required
to a coil of area 100 cm2, with 50 turns. The to ionize the atom from its first excited state will
average e.m.f. induced in the coil is 0.1 V, when it be
is removed from the field in t sec. The value of t (a) 6.8 eV (b) 3.4 eV
is (c) 1.7 eV (d) 0.85 eV
Mock Test 2 MT-15
22. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct 26. Radiations of two photon’s energy, twice and
answer using the codes given belowthe Lists ten times the work function of metal are incident
List-I List-II on the metal surface successsively. The ratio of
maximum velocities of photoelectrons emitted
1 1 in two cases is
A. Balmer series 1. v RH
32 n2 (a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 3
(c) 1 : 4 (d) 1 : 1
1 1
B. Brakett series 2. v RH 2
27. If an electron and positron annihilate, then the
1 n2 energy released is
1 1 13 13
(a) 3.2 10 J (b) 1.6 10 J
C. Lyman series 3. v RH 2 2
2 n
(c) 4.8 10 13 J (d) 6.4 10 13 J
1 1 28. The ratio of molar specific heat at constant
D. Paschen series 4. v RH pressure CP, to molar specific heat at constant
2 2
4 n
volume Cv for a monoatomic gas is
Codes :
A B C D CP 3 CP 5
(a) (b)
(a) 3 2 1 4 CV 5 CV 3
(b) 3 4 2 1
(c) 4 3 2 1 CP 7 CP 9
(c) (d)
(d) 2 3 1 4 CV 9 CV 7
23. A force Fx acts on a particle such that its position 29. Which of the following are true regarding forces
x changes as shown in the figure.
between nucleons inside the nucleus :
1. attractive in nature
2. electrical in nature
3 3. extremely short range
Fx (N)
W f 4 f2
(c) (d) f3 – f1
X 2
Ic
36. In common emitter amplifier the is 0.98.
W Ie
Y The current gain will be
(a) 4.9 (b) 7.8
The output F of the circuit is represented by (c) 49 (d) 78
(a) W + (X + Y) (b) W + (X.Y) 37. A student takes 50gm wax (specific heat = 0.6
(c) W, (X + Y) (d) W, (X.Y) kcal/kg°C) and heats it till it boils. The graph
33. NAND and NOR gates are called universal gates between temperature and time is as follows. Heat
primarily because they supplied to the wax per minute and boiling point
(a) are available universally are respectively
Temperature (°C)
250
(b) can be combined to produce OR, AND and 200
NOT gates (a) 500 cal, 50°C 150
(c) are widely used in Integrated circuit 100
(b) 1000 cal, 100°C 50
packages 0
(d) are easiest to manufacture 1 2 3 4 567 8
(c) 1500 cal, 200°C Time (Minute)
34. Of the diodes shown in the following diagrams,
which one is reverse biased ? (d) 1000 cal, 200°C
+10 V 38. Consider telecommunication through optical
fibres. Which of the following statements is not
R true ?
(a)
+5 V (a) Optical fibres may have homogeneous core
with a suitable cladding
(b) (b) Optical fibres can be of graded refractive
–12 V R
index
–5 V (c) Optical fibres are subject to electromagnetic
interference from outside
(c) R (d) Optical fibres have extremely low
transmission loss
–10 V 39. What should be the maximum acceptance angle
at the aircore interface of an optical fibre if n 1
+5 V
and n2 are the refractive indices of the core and
R the cladding, respectively
(d)
(a) sin 1 (n 2 n1 ) (b) sin 1
n12 n 22
1 2 1T2 2T1
(a) (b)
2 T1 T2
1T2 2T1
(c) T2 T1
(d) T1T2 1 2
f1 f 2 f3 f 4
Mock Test 2 MT-17
68. Electrolytic reduction of nitrobenzene in weakly 74. Ethanol and dimethyl ether form a pair of
acidic medium gives functional isomers. The boiling point of ethanol
(a) N-Phenylhydroxylamine is higher than that of dimethyl ether, due to the
(b) Nitrosobenzene presence of
(c) Aniline (a) H-bonding in ethanol
(d) p-Hydroxyaniline (b) H-bonding in dimethyl ether
69. If an organic compound shows a streching (c) CH3 group in ethanol
( C = O) frequency of 1720 cm–1. The organic (d) CH3 group in dimethyl ether
compound is __________. 75. Propan - 1- ol may be prepared by the reaction of
(a) An aliphatic aldehyde propene with
(b) An , unsaturated aldehyde (a) H3BO3
(c) A phenolic aldehyde (b) H2SO4/H2O
(d) An aromatic aldehyde (c) B2H6,NaOH–H2O2
70. In the given reaction, O
||
NO 2 X
(d) CH 3 C O O H
Sn
76. Sodium formate on heating yields
HCl (a) Oxalic acid and H2
X- stands for (b) Sodium oxalate and H2
(a) – NH 2 (b) SnCl2 (c) CO2 and NaOH
(d) Sodium oxalate.
(c) – Cl (d) – NH 3 Cl 77. An ester (A) with molecular fomula, C9H10O2
71. In a set of reactions acetic acid yielded a was treated with excess of CH3MgBr and the
product D. complex so formed was treated with H2SO4 to
SOCl2 Benzene
give an olefin (B). Ozonolysis of (B) gave a ketone
CH3COOH A B with molecular formula C8H8O which shows +ve
Anhy.AlCl3
iodoform test. The structure of (A) is
HCN H.OH
C D (a) C6H5COOC2H5
The structure of D would be: (b) C2H5COOC6H5
(c) H3COCH2COC6H5
COOH CN (d) p — H 3CO — C 6 H 4 — COCH 3
CH2 – C – CH3 C – CH3
(a) (b) 78. Self condensation of two moles of ethyl acetate
OH OH
in presence of sodium ethoxide yields
OH OH (a) acetoacetic ester
CH2 – C – CH3 C – COOH (b) methyl acetoacetate
(c) (d)
CN CH3
(c) ethyl propionate
72. Ketones (d) ethyl butyrate
[ R — C — R1 , where R = R1 = alkyl groups]\ 79. Methanol is industrially prepared by
|| (a) Oxidation of CH4 by steam at 900°C
O (b) Reduction of HCHO using LiAIH4
can be obtained in one step by (c) Reaction HCHO with a solution of NaOH
(a) oxidation of primary alcohols (d) Reduction of CO using H2 and ZnO – Cr2O3.
(b) hydrolysis of esters 80. Indicate which of the nitrogen compounds
(c) oxidation of tertiary alcohols amongst th e following would undergo
(d) reaction of acid halides with alcohols Hoffmann’s reaction, i,e., reaction with Br 2 and
73. Phenylmethyl ketone can be converted into strong KOH to furnish the primary amine (R –
ethylbenzene in one step by which of the NH2) ?
following reagents?
(a) R CO NHCH 3 (b) R – CO – ONH4
(a) LiAlH4 (b) Zn-Hg/HCl
(c) NaBH4 (d) CH3MgI (c) R – CO – NH2 (d) R – CO – NHOH.
EBD_7443
MT-20 Target VITEEE
PART - III : MATHEMATICS `15 on each magazine A and B respectively.
These are processed on three machines I, II &
81. If sin (y + z – x), sin (z + x – y) and sin (x + y – z)
III and total time in hours available per week on
are in A.P. (with x, y, z /2), then tan x, tan y each machine is as follows:
and tan z are in
(a) A.P. (b) G.P. Magzine A(x) B(y) Time available
(c) H.P. (d) none of these. Machine
82. The number of roots of equation I 2 3 36
1 1 II 5 2 50
tan 2x tan is 3x
4 III 2 6 60
(a) 0 (b) 1
(c) 2 (d) infinite The number of constraints is
83. In order that the equation (a) 3 (b) 4
(c) 5 (d) 6
2ax(ax nc) (n 2 2)c 2 0 may have real
88. If
roots, n belongs to interval
sin 3 x cos 5 dx A sin 4 x B sin 6 x C sin 8 x D .
(a) [ 2, 2] (b) ( , 2)
Then
(c) (2, ) (d) ( , )
84. The portion of a tangent to a parabola y2 = 4ax 1 1 1
(a) A , B , C , D R
cut off between the directrix and the curve 4 3 8
subtends an angle at the focus, where =
1 1 1
(b) A , B , C , D R
(a) (b) 8 4 3
4 3
1 1
2 (c) A 0, B , C , D R
(c) (d) 6 8
2 3
(d) none of these.
85. There are 25 trees at equal distances of 5 meters
89. In a ABC, the area of the triangle is
in a line with a well, the distance of the well from
the nearest tree being 10 metres. A gardener b 2 (c a ) 2 , then tan B is equal to
waters all the trees separately starting from the
well and he returns to the well after watering 1 8
(a) (b)
each tree to get water for the next. The total 4 15
distance the gardener will cover in order to water
all the trees is 1 15
(c) (d)
(a) 3550 m (b) 3434 m 2 8
(c) 3370 m (d) 3200 m
90. If ( x) log 5 log 3 x , then ' (e) =
86. If nCr denotes the number of combination of n (a) 1 (b) e loge5
things taken r at a time, then the expression 1
n n n
(c) log5e (d) loge5
Cr 1 Cr 1 2 Cr equals e
103. If x cos y sin p , a variable chord of the (b) a tumbler is half empty if and only if it is
half full
x2 y2 (c) Both (a) and (b)
hyperbola 1 subtends a right angle (d) None of the above
2
a 2a 2
109. A car will hold 2 in the front seat and 1 in the
at the centre of the hyperbola, then the chords rear seat. If among 6 persons 2 can drive, then
touch a fixed circle whose radius is equal to the number of ways in which the car can be
(a) (b) filled is
2a 3a
(a) 10 (b) 20
(c) 2a (d) 5a (c) 30 (d) None of these
110. The value of
104. If x 2 cos x dx f (x ) sin x g(x ) cos x c .
2 2
Then log e sin x dx log e cos x dx is
(a) f(x) = x2, g(x) = x 0 0
(b) f(x) = x2 + 2, g(x) = x
(c) f(x) = x2, g(x) = 2x – 1 (a) log 2 (b) log 2
(d) f(x) = x2 – 2, g(x) = 2x 2 2
105. Let P be a variable point on the ellipse 1
(c) log (d) none of these.
2
x2 y2
1 with foci F and F . If A is the area 111. If A, B, C are the angles of a triangle then the
a 2 b2 1 2
sin 2A sin C sin B
of the triangle PF1F2, then the maximum value of A
is value of determinant sin C sin 2B sin A
(a) 2abe (b) abe sin B sin A sin 2C
1 is
(c) abe (d) None of these (a) (b) 0
2
106. In each of a set of games it is 2 to 1 in favour of (c) 2 (d) None of these
the winner of the previous game. The chance 112. The length of projection of the segment joining
P(–1, 2, 0) and Q (1, –1, 2) on the plane
that the player who wins the first game shall win
three at least of the next four is 2x y 2z 4 is
(a) 3 (b) 4
8 4
(a) (b) (c) 5 (d) 3 3
27 81
x sin1 / x , x 0
4 113. f(x) =
(c) (d) None 0 , x 0 at x = 0 is
9
(a) continuous as well as differentiable
107. The normal to the curve represented
(b) differentiable but not continuous
parametrically by x = a (cos + sin ) and y = (c) continuous but not differentiable
a (sin – cos ) at any point , is such that it (d) neither continuous nor differentiable
(a) makes a constant angle with x-axis 114. Area enclosed between the curves y = sin 2x,
(b) is at a contant distance from the origin y = cos2x and y = 0 in the interval [0, /2] is
(c) touches a fixed circle 1
(d) satisfies (b) and (c) (a) 2 1 sq. units
3
108. Consider the following statements
p : A tumbler is half empty. 1
(b) 3 sq. units
q : A tumbler is half full. 2
Then, the combination form of “p if and only if
1
q” is (c) 2 sq. units
(a) a tumbler is half empty and half full 4
(d) (2 + 3) sq. units
Mock Test 2 MT-23
field. The line of force follow the path (s) shown (b) 1> 3 2
in the figure as (c) 1< 2 3
1 1
2 2 (d) 1 < 3 2
3 3 9. In a mass spectrometer used for measuring the
4 4
masses of ions, the ions are initially accelerated
(a) 1 (b) 2 by an electric potential V and then made to
(c) 3 (d) 4 describe semicircular path of radius R using a
Mock Test 3 MT-25
magnetic field B. If V and B are kept constant, 15. In a series resonant circuit, having L, C and R as
its elements, the resonant current is i. The power
charge on the ion
the ratio will be dissipated in the circuit at resonance is
mass of the ion
proportional to i 2R
(a) 1/R2 (b) R2 (a) 1 (b) zero
(c) R (d) 1/R L
C
10. A charged particle (charge q) is moving in a circle
of radius R with uniform speed v. The associated (c) i 2 L (d) i 2 R
magnetic moment µ is given by
(a) qvR2 (b) qvR2/2 where is the angular resonance frequency.
(c) qvR (d) qvR/2 16. Two coils have a mutual inductance 0.005 H.
11. In a certain region of space electric field E and The current changes in the first coil according
magnetic field B are perpendicular to each other to equation I=I0 sin t, where I0 = 10A and =
and an electron enters in region perpendicular 100 radian/sec. The maximum value of e.m.f. in
to the direction of B and E both and moves the second coil is
undeflected, then velocity of electron is (a) 2 (b) 5
(c) (d) 4
E
(a) (b) E B 17. The electric and magnetic field of an
B electromagnetic wave are
(a) in opposite phase and perpendicular to each
B
(c) (d) E B other
E (b) in opposite phase and parallel to each other
12. For a conservative force in one dimension, (c) in phase and perpendicular to each other
potential energy function V(x) is related to the (d) in phase and parallel to each other.
force F(x) as 18. In Young’s double slit experiment, the fringe
dV(x) width is found to be 0.4 mm. If the whole
(a) F(x)
dx
apparatus is immersed in water of refrative index
dV(x)
(b) F(x)
dx 4
, without disturbing the geometrical
(c) F(x) = V(x) dx 3
–dV(x) arrangement, the new fringe width will be
(d) F(x)
dx
(a) 0.30 mm (b) 0.40 mm
13. A transformer is used to light a 100 W and 110 V
lamp from a 220 V mains. If the main current is 0.5 (c) 0.53 mm (d) 450 microns
amp, the efficiency of the transformer is 19. A ball of mass m hits the floor making an angle
approximately as shown in the figure. If e is the coefficient of
(a) 50% (b) 90% restitution, then which relation is true, for the
(c) 10% (d) 30%. velocity component before and after collision?
14. What is the value of inductance L for which the
current is maximum in a series LCR circuit with
C = 10 µF and = 1000s– 1 1 1
(a) 1 mH v v
(b) cannot be calculated unless R is known
(c) 10 mH
(d) 100 mH
EBD_7443
MT-26 Target VITEEE
(a) V1 sin = V sin 24. The X-rays of wavelength 0.5 Å are scattered by
(b) V1 sin = – sin a target. What will be the energy of incident X-
(c) V1 cos = V cos rays, if these are scattered at an angle of 72º ?
(d) V1 cos = –V cos (a) 12.41 keV (b) 6.2 keV
20. Unpolarized light is incident on a glass plate (c) 18.6 keV (d) 24.82 keV
25. The momentum of photon whose frequency f is
having refractive index 1.5. The angle of
incidence at which the plane polarised light hf hc
(a) (b)
obtained, is c f
(a) 52° (b) 57° h c
(c ) (d)
(c) 60° (d) 66° f hf
21. If in the first Bohr orbit of a bydrogen atom, the 26. A proton and -particle are accelerated through
the same potential difference. The ratio of their
total energy of the electron is – 21.76 × 10–19 J,
de-Broglie wavelength will be
then its potential energy will be (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(a) – 43.52 × 10–19 J (b) – 21.76 × 10–19 J
(c) 2 : 1 (d) 2 2 : 1
(c) – 10.88 × 10–19 J (d) – 13.60 × 10–19 J
27. In a photoelectric effect measurement, the
22. Given that the formula for the various spectral
stopping potential for a given metal is found to
series in the hydrogen atoms is given by be V0 volt when radiation of wavelength 0 is
used. If radiation of wavelength 2 0 is used with
1 1 1 , where n and n are integers, the same metal then the stopping potential (in
R 1 2
n12 n 22 volt) will be
(a) 2 1 3 4
(b) 2 4 3 1
(c) 2 4 1 2
Stress
(d) 4 3 2 1
(a) Young's modulus of elasticity
23. To obtain laser from a system, the stimulating
(b) compressibility
radiation must be
(c) shear strain
(a) an electromagnetic wave of any frequency (d) tensile strength
with suitable phase 29. Which one of the following groups of particles
(b) an electromagnetic wave of any frequency is a Boson group ?
with any phase (a) Photon, muon, pion, proton
(c) an electromagnetic wave of suitable (b) Photon, pion, graviton, Kaon
frequency (c) Pion, neutron, graviton, photon
(d) any wave with suitable frequency (d) Electron, muon, neutrino, proton
Mock Test 3 MT-27
N IC
N and where IC, IB and IE are the collector,,
(a) 0.693 (b) N0 IB
N0
base and emitter currents, then
N N0
(c) 0.693 (d) (1 ) (1 )
N0 N (a) (b)
53. Which of the following is the strongest acid? 59. The pyknometric density of sodium chloride
crystal is 2.165 × 103 kg m–3 while its X-ray density
OH
OH
is 2.178 × 103 kg m–3. The fraction of unoccupied
(a) (b) sites in sodium chloride crystal is
NO2 (a) 5.96 × 10–3 (b) 5.96
Cl (c) 5.96 × 10–2 (d) 5.96 × 10–1
60. A reaction occurs spontaneously if
OH OH (a) T S < H and both H and S are + ve
(b) T S > H and H is + ve and S is ve
(c) (d) (c) T S > H and both H and S are + ve
NO2 (d) T S = H and both H and S are + ve
NO2 61. Which one of the following is an inner orbital
complex as well as diamagnetic in behaviour?
54. A colourless liquid, at room temperature, reacts
(Atomic number: Zn = 30, Cr = 24, Co = 27,
with soda-lime to form sodium salt of a carboxylic
Ni = 28)
acid and ammonia gas. The liquid is
(a) [Zn(NH3)6]2+ (b) [Cr(NH3)6]3+
(a) propanoic acid
(c) [Co(NH3)6]3+ (d) [Ni(NH3)6]2+
(b) formamide 62. [Co(NH3)4 (NO2)2] Cl exhibits
(c) propanamide (a) linkage isomerism, ionization isomerism and
(d) methyl enthanoate geometrical isomerism
55. 59 g of an amide obtained from a carboxylic acid, (b) ionization isomerism, geometrical isomerism
RCOOH, upon heating with alkali liberated 17 g and optical isomerism
NH3. The acid is (c) linkage isomerism, geometrical isomerism and
(a) Formic acid (b) Acetic acid optical isomerism
(c) Propionic acid (d) Benzoic acid (d) linkage isomerism, ionization isomerism and
56. The correct relationship between free energy and optical isomerism
equilibrium constant K of a reaction is 63. The d electron configurations of Cr 2+, Mn2+,
(a) G RT ln K (b) G RT lnK Fe 2+ and Ni 2+ are 3d 4 , 3d 5 , 3d 6 and 3d 8
respectively. Which one of the following aqua
(c) G RT lnK (d) G RT lnK complexes will exhibit the minimum paramagnetic
57. The intermetallic compound LiAg crystallizes in behaviour?
a cubic lattice in which both lithium and silver (a) [Fe(H2O)6]2+ (b) [Ni(H2O)6]2+
(c) [Cr(H2O)6] 2+ (d) [Mn(H2O)6]2+
atoms have coordination number of eight. To
what crystal class does the unit cell belong ? (At. No. Cr = 24, Mn = 25, Fe = 26, Ni = 28)
(a) Simple cubic 64. The radioactive isotope, tritium, (13 H ) has a half-
(b) Face-centred cubic
life of 12.3 years. If the initial amount of tritium is
(c) Body-centred cubic 32 mg, how many milligrams of it would remain
(d) None after 49.2 years?
58. Schottky defect in crystals is observed when (a) 8 mg (b) 1 mg
(a) an ion leaves its normal site and occupies an (c) 2 mg (d) 4 mg
interstitial site 65. A human body required 0.01M activity of
(b) unequal number of cations and anions are radioactive substance after 24 hours. Half life of
missing from the lattice radioactive substance is 6 hours. Then injection
(c) density of the crystal is increased of maximum activity of radioactive substance that
can be injected will be
(d) equal number of cations and anions are
(a) 0.08 M (b) 0.04 M
missing from the lattice
(c) 0.32 M (d) 0.16 M
EBD_7443
MT-30 Target VITEEE
66. The hypothetical complex chlorodiaquotriammine 73. Iodoform test is not given by
cobalt (III) chloride can be represented as (a) 2-Pentanone (b) Ethanol
(a) [CoCl(NH3)3 (H2O)2]Cl2 (c) Ethanal (d) 3-Pentanone
(b) [Co(NH3)3 (H2O)Cl3] 74. Acetaldehyde reacts with
(c) [Co(NH2)3 (H2O)2 Cl] (a) Electrophiles only
(d) [Co(NH3)3 (H2O)3]Cl3 (b) Nucleophiles only
67. The basic character of the transition metal (c) Free radicals only
monoxides follows the order (d) Both electrophiles and nucleophiles.
(Atomic Nos.,Ti = 22, V = 23, Cr = 24, Fe = 26) 75. Aldehydes and ketones will not form crystalline
(a) TiO > VO > CrO > FeO derivatives with
(b) VO > CrO > TiO > FeO (a) Sodium bisulphite
(c) CrO > VO > FeO > TiO (b) Phenylhydrazine
(d) TiO > FeO > VO > CrO (c) Semicarbazide hydrochloride
68. The complex ion [Co(NH3)6]3+ is formed by sp3d2 (d) Dihydrogen sodium phosphate.
hybridisation. Hence the ion should possess 76. Reaction of phenylacetylene with dil. H2SO4 and
(a) Octahedral geometry HgSO4 gives
(b) Tetrahedral geometry (a) acetophenone
(c) Square planar geometry (b) 2-phenylethanol
(d) Tetragonal geometry. (c) phenylacetaldehyde
69. Identify the correct order of boiling points of the (d) phenylacetic acid
following compounds : 77. A carbonyl compound reacts with hydrogen
CH3CH2CH2CH2OH CH3CH2CH2CHO cyanide to form cyanohydrin which on hydrolysis
1 2 forms a racemic mixture of -hydroxy acid. The
CH3CH2CH2COOH carbonyl compound is
3 (a) acetone (b) diethyl ketone
(a) 1 > 2 > 3 (b) 3 > 1 > 2 (c) formaldehyde (d) acetaldehyde
(c) 1 > 3 > 2 (d) 3 > 2 > 1 78. Among the following the strongest acid is
70. Glacial acetic acid is (a) CH 3 COOH
(a) pure acetic acid at 100º C (b) CH 2 ClCH 2COOH
(b) pure acetic acid at 0º C
(c) CH 2 ClCOOH
(c) acetic acid mixed with methanol
(d) pure acetic acid at 16.6º C (d) CH 3CH 2 COOH.
71. 2-Phenylethanol may be prepared by the reaction 79. [Ti(H2O)6]3+ shows purple colour due to
of phenylmagnesium bromide with (a) d yz electronic transition
d
(a) HCHO (b) CH3CHO x2 y2
8 21
(a) (b) (a) (b)
3 2 21 8
2
(c) (d) (c) (d) none of these.
6 4 7
3 2 105. Number of 6-digit telephone numbers, which can
99. If A = , then (A–1)3 is equal to be constructed with digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
0 1
if each number starts with 35 and no digit appears
1 1 26 1 1 26 more than once is
(a) (b)
27 0 27 27 0 27 (a) 1680 (b) 8!
(c) 6! (d) 6.6 !
Mock Test 3 MT-33
106. The diffrerential equation 113. A rod AB 13 ft long moves with its ends A, B on
dy 1 two perpendicular lines OX and OY respectively.
sin 2 y x 3 cos 2 y represents a family If the end A is 12 ft from O and is slipping away at
dx x
of curves given by the equation 1
2 ft/sec. then the end B is moving at
2
(a) x6 6x 2 C tan y
(a) 5ft/sec. (b) 6ft/sec.
(b) 6x 2 tan y x6 C (c) 2.5ft/sec. (d) 3ft/sec.
114. Two common tangents to the circle x2 + y2 = 2a2
(c) sin 2 y x 3 cos 2 y C
and parabola y2 = 8ax are
(d) none of these
107. If the system of equations x + y + 2 = 0, (a) x = ±(y + 2a) (b) y = ±(x + 2a)
x + y – 2 = 0, x + y + 3 = 0 is consistent, then (c) x = ±(y + a) (d) y = ±(x + a)
(a) 1 (b) 2 115. Children have been invited to a birthday party. It
(c) 1, 2 (d) 1, 2 is necessary to give them return gifts. For the
108. A steam boat is moving at velocity V when steam purpose, it was decided that they would be given
is shut off. Given that the retardation at any pens and pencils in a bag. It was also decided
subsequent time is equal to the magnitude of the that the number of items in a bag would be atleast
velocity at that time. The velocity v in time t after 5. If the cost of a pen is `10 and cost of a pencil
steam is shut off is is `5, minimize the cost of a bag containing pens
(a) v = Vt (b) v = Vt – V and pencils. Formulation of LPP for this problem
(c) v = Vet (d) v = Ve–t is
109. If the binary operation * is defined on the set Q +
(a) Minimize C = 5x + 10y subject to x + y 10,
ab x 0, y 0
of all positive rational numbers by a * b = .
4 (b) Minimize C = 5x + 10y subject to x + y 10,
1 1 x 0, y 0
Then 3 * * is equal to (c) Minimize C = 5x + 10y subject to x + y 5,
5 2
x 0, y 0
3 5 3 3
(a) (b) (c) (d) (d) Minimize C = 5x + 10y subject to x + y 5,
160 160 10 40 x 0, y 0
110. P, Q, R, S are the points (–2, 3, 4), (–4, 4, 6), (4, 3, 5)
and (0, 1, 2). Then projection of PQ on RS is sin 2 x
116. The integral dx is
(a) 0 (b) 29 cos 4 x
16 (a) a polynomial of degree 5 in sin x
(c) (d) none (b) a polynomial of degree 4 in tan x
29
111. If X follows Binomial distribution with mean 3 (c) a polynomial of degree 3 in tan x
and variance 2, then P(X 8) is equal to : (d) a polynomial of degree 5 in cos x
17 18 19 20 117. The equation of the ellipse with focus at (±5, 0)
(a) 9 (b) 9 (c) 9 (d)
3 3 3 39 36
112. Sum of the series and x = as one directrix is
5
1 4 9 16
......
1. 2 . 3. 4 3. 4 .5 . 6 5. 6 . 7 .8 7 .8. 9 .10 x2 y2 x2 y2
(a) 1 (b) 1
36 25 36 11
5 3
(a) log 2 (b) log 2
2 2
x2 y2
1 1 (c) 1 (d) None of these
(c) log 2 (d) None of these 25 11
6 24
EBD_7443
MT-34 Target VITEEE
him. I had never shot an elephant and never wanted
((a n )nx tan x ) sin nx
118. If xlim0 0, where n is to. (Somehow it always seems worse to kill large
x2 animal.) Besides, there was the beast's owner to be
non-zero real number, then a is equal to considered. But I had got to act quickly. I turned to
some experienced-looking Burmans who had been
n 1 there when we arrived, and asked them how the
(a) 0 (b)
n elephants had been behaving. They all said the same
thing; he took no notice of you if you left him alone,
1
(c) n (d) n but he might charge if you went too close to him.
n 121. The phrase 'Preoccupied grandmotherly air'
119. The equation of the line passing through (1, 2, 3) signifies
(a) being totally unconcerned
and parallel to the planes r. ˆi ˆj 2kˆ 5 and
(b) pretending to be very busy
(c) a very superior attitude
r. 3iˆ ˆj kˆ 6 is
(d) calm, dignified and affectionate disposition
ˆi 2ˆj 3kˆ 2iˆ 3jˆ 4kˆ 122. From the passage it appears that the author was
(a) r
(a) an inexperienced hunter
(b) r 3iˆ 5jˆ 4kˆ iˆ 2ˆj 3kˆ (b) kind and considerate
(c) possessed with fear
(c) r ˆi 2jˆ 3kˆ 3iˆ 5jˆ 4kˆ (d) a worried man
123. The author did not want to shoot the elephant
(d) r 3iˆ 5jˆ 4kˆ because he
120 Let p: Kiran passed the examination, (a) was afraid of it
q: Kiran is sad (b) did not have the experience of shooting
The symbolic form of a statement “It is not true big animals
that Kiran passed therefore he is said” is (c) did not wish to kill animal which was not
(a) (~ p q) (b) (p q) doing anybody any harm
(c) ~ (p ~ q) (d) ~ ( p q) (d) did not find the elephant to be ferocious
124. Direction: Choose the word which is most similar
PART - III : ENGLISH to the word given in the bold. Foment
Direction (Qs. 121 - 123) Read the passage carefully (a) interrogate (b) spoil
and answer the question given below. (c) spray (d) incite
125. Choose the best pronunciation of the word,
But I did not want to shoot the elephant. I watched Wednesday, from the following options.
him beating his bunch of grass against his knees, with (a) wed-ness-day (b) wed-nesh-day
the preoccupied grandmotherly air that elephants (c) wenz-day (d) wens-day
have. It seemed to me that it would be murder to shoot
MOCK
VITEEE Mock Test Paper
4
Max. Marks : 125 Time : 2½ hrs
PART - I : PHYSICS 5. A steady current of 1.5 amp flows through a
copper voltameter for 10 minutes. If the
1. In a hollow spherical shell, potential (V) changes
electrochemical equivalent of copper is
with respect to distance (s) from centre as
30 × 10–5 g coulomb–1, the mass of copper
deposited on the electrode will be
(a) 0.50 g (b) 0.67 g
V (c) 0.27 g (d) 0.40 g.
(a) (b) V 6. Kirchhoff’s first and second laws for electrical
circuits are consequences of
S
(a) conservation of electric charge and energy
S
respectively
(b) conservation of electric charge
V V (c) conservation of energy and electric charge
(c) (d) respectively
(d) conservation of energy
S S
7. For the network shown in the Fig. the value
2. Four charges equal to -Q are placed at the four of the current i is
corners of a square and a charge q is at its centre.
If the system is in equilibrium the value of q is
Q Q
(a) (1 2 2 ) (b) (1 2 2 )
2 4
Q Q
(c) (1 2 2 ) (d) (1 2 2 )
4 2
3. The stored energy of Capacitor is W after giving
a charge q. If we increase charge form q to 2q
then stored energy is (The capacitance of
capacitor is C)
(a) 2 W (b) W/2 9V 18V
(c) 4W (d) W/4 (a) (b)
4. When air is replaced by a dielectric medium of 35 5
force constant K, the maximum force of 5V 5V
attraction between two charges, separated by a (c) (d)
distance 9 18
(a) decreases K-times 8. Two cells, having the same e.m.f., are connected
(b) increases K-times in series through an external resistance R. Cells
(c) remains unchanged have internal resistances r 1 and r2 (r1 > r2 )
respectively. When the circuit is closed, the
1
(d) becomes times potential difference across the first cell is zero.
K2 The value of R is
EBD_7443
MT-36 Target VITEEE
14. The core of a transformer is laminated because
r1 r2 r1 r2
(a) (b) (a) the weight of the transformer may be
2 2 reduced
(c) r1 r2 (d) r1 r2 (b) rusting of the core may be prevented
(c) ratio of voltage in primary and secondary
9. If 25W, 220 V and 100 W, 220 V bulbs are may be increased
connected in series across a 440 V line, then (d) energy losses due to eddy currents may be
(a) only 25W bulb will fuse minimised
(b) only 100W bulb will fuse 15. A step-up transformer operates on a 230 V line
(c) both bulbs will fuse and supplies a load of 2 ampere. The ratio of the
primary and secondary windings is 1 : 25. The
(d) none of these
current in the primary is
10. A mild steel wire of length 2L and cross-sectional (a) 25 A (b) 50 A
area A is stretched, well within elastic limit,
(c) 15 A (d) 12.5 A
horizontally between two pillars. A mass m is
suspended from the mid point of the wire. Strain 16. An inductance L having a resistance R is
in the wire is connected to an alternating source of angular
frequency . The quality factor Q of the
2L
x inductance is
m R L
2
(a) (b)
L R
x x
(a) (b)
2L L
1/ 2
2 2
R L
x x (c) (d)
(c) (d) L R
L 2L
11. An electron enters a region where magnetic field 17. Assuming no heat losses, the heat released by
(B) and electric field (E) are mutually the condensation of x g of steam at 100°C can
perpendicular, then be used to convert y g of ice at 0°C into water at
(a) it will always move in the direction of B 100°C, the ratio x : y is :
(b) it will always move in the direction of E (a) 1 : 1 (b) 1 : 2
(c) it always possesses circular motion (c) 1 : 3 (d) 3 : 1
(d) it can go undeflected also. 18. Interference is possible in
12. A wire carries a current. Maintaining the same (a) light waves only
current it is bent first to form a circular plane coil of (b) sound waves only
one turn which produces a magnetic field B at the
(c) both light and sound waves
centre of the coil. The same length is now bent
more sharply to give a double loop of smaller radius. (d) neither light nor sound waves
The magnetic field at the centre of the double loop, 19. Two sources of light are said to be coherent if
caused by the same current is they emit light
(a) 4B (b) B/4 (a) of equal amplitudes
(c) B/2 (d) 2B (b) having the same wavelength
13. A coil of inductive reactance 31 has a (c) having a constant phase relationship
resistance of 8 . It is placed in series with a (d) having the same intensity
condenser of capacitative reactance 25 . The
20. The figure gives the potential energy function
combination is connected to an a.c. source of
110 volt. The power factor of the circuit is U(x) for a system in which a particle is in one-
dimensional motion. In which region the
(a) 0.64 (b) 0.80
magnitude of the force on the particle is greatest
(c) 0.33 (d) 0.56
Mock Test 4 MT-37
K.E.max.
K.E.max.
hydrogen atom for the transition between n = 2
and n = 1 states is v0. What is the frequency of
the radiation emitted by the hydrogen atom for
transition between n = 4 and n = 1 states ?
(a) 3v0/2 (b) 2v0
(c) (d)
(c) 4v0 (d) 5v0/4
K.E.max.
K.E.max.
22. Match List-I (Series Spectra of Hydrogen) with
List-II (Region in which the series lies) and select
the correct answer using the codes given below
the Lists :
List-I List-II 27. If n bullets each of mass m are fired with a velocity
(Series spectra (Region in which the v per second from a machine gun, the force
of Hydrogen) series lies) required to hold the gun in position is
A. Lyman 1. Visible
B. Balmer 2. Infra red mv
C. Paschen 3. Ultra violet (a) (n + 1) mv (b)
n2
D. Brackett 4. X-ray
5. -ray mv
Codes : (c) (d) mnv
n
A B C D
(a) 3 1 2 2 28. The ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths of proton
(b) 1 3 2 4 and -particle having same kinetic energy is
(c) 3 1 4 5
(d) 1 2 3 5 (a) 2 :1 (b) 2 2 :1
23. In Millikan oil drop experiment a drop of charge (c) 2 : 1 (d) 4 : 1
Q and radius r is kept constant between two 29. Match List-I (Classification) with List-II
plates of potential difference of 800 volt. Then
(Elementary Particles) and select the correct
charge on other drop of radius 2 r which is kept
constant with a potential difference of 3200 V is answer using the codes given below the Lists :
(a) Q/2 (b) 2 Q List-I List-II
(c) 4 Q (d) Q/4 (Classification) (Elementary particles)
24. White X-rays are called white due to the fact A. Baryons 1. Nucleon
that B. Mesons 2. Neutrino
(a) they are electromagnetic radiations hav- C. Leptons 3. Pion
ing nature same as that of white light.
(b) they are produced most abundantly in X D. Bosons 4. Photon
ray tubes. Codes :
(c) they have a continuous wavelength A B C D
range. (a) 1 3 2 4
(d) they can be converted to visible light us- (b) 2 3 1 4
ing coated screens and photographic (c) 1 4 2 3
plates are affected by them just like light.
(d) 2 4 1 3
EBD_7443
MT-38 Target VITEEE
30. Mp is the mass of proton and mn is the mass of (a) NAND (b) XOR
neutron. If the mass of nucleus of an atom ZXA (c) OR (d) NOR
is measured and found to be M, then the nuclear 37. A ball is thrown up at an angle with the
binding energy would be (c is the velocity of horizontal. Then the total change of momentum
light) : by the instant it returns to ground is
(a) {Zmp + (A – Z)mn – M}c2
(a) acceleration due to gravity × total time of
(b) {Amn + Zmp + M}c2
(c) {(Z – A)mp + Amn – M}c2 flight
(d) {M – Zmp– (A – Z)mn}c2 (b) weight of the ball × half the time of flight
31. When a radioactive element decays by gamma (c) weight of the ball × total time of flight
radiation (d) weight of the ball × horizontal range
(a) its mass number will decrease by one unit 38. A particle of mass m has momentum p. Its
with no change in atomic number kinetic energy will be
(b) its mass number will not change but the (a) mp (b) p2m
atomic number will increase by one unit
(c) both mass number and atomic number of p2 p2
(c) (d)
the element change m 2m
(d) there will be no change in either mass 39. The reading of Centigrade thermometer
number or atomic number of the element coincides with that of Fahrenheit thermometer
32. In the uranium radioactive series, the initial in a liquid. The temperature of the liquid is
nucleus is 92U238 and that the final nucleus is (a) – 40ºC (b) 313°C
206
82Pb . When uranium nucleus decays to lead, (c) 0°C (d) 100°C
the number of particles and particles emitted
40. If a rubber ball is taken at the depth of 200 m in a
are
pool, its volume decreases by 0.1%. If the
(a) 8 , 6 (b) 6 , 7
density of the water is 1 × 103 kg/m3 and g =
(c) 6 , 8 (d) 4 , 3
10m/s2, then the volume elasticity in N/m2 will
33. In semiconductors at a room temperature
be
(a) the conduction band is completely empty
(a) 108 (b) 2 × 108
(b) the valence band is partially empty and the 9
(c) 10 (d) 2 × 109
conduction band is partially filled
(c) the valence band is completely filled and
the conduction band is partially filled PART - II : CHEMISTRY
(d) the valence band is completely filled 41. The alcohol which does not give a stable
34. The peak voltage in the output of a half-wave compound on dehydration is
diode rectifier fed with a sinusoidal signal (a) Ethyl alcohol (b) Methyl alcohol
without filter is 10V. The d.c. component of the (c) n-Propyl alcohol (d) n-Butyl alcohol
output voltage is
42. IR spectrum of an organic compound is found
(a) 20/ V (b) 10/ 2 V
(c) 10/ V (d) 10V about 1715 cm–1. The organic compound is
35. An oscillator is nothing but an amplifier with (a) An aliphatic ketone
(a) positive feedback (b) An aliphatic aldehyde
(b) large gain (c) , - unsaturated ketones
(c) no feedback (d) Phenolic ketone
(d) negative feedback 43. The most suitable method of separation of a
36. The following configuration of gate is equivalent mixture ortho and para-nitrophenols mixed in
to the ratio of 1 : 1 is
A OR (a) Steam distillation
B
Y (b) Crystallisation
AND (c) Vapourization
NAND (d) Colour spectrum
Mock Test 4 MT-39
44. When diethyl ether is treated with excess of Cl 2 51. Indicate which of the nitrogen compounds
in the presence of sunlight, then the product amongst th e following would undergo
formed is Hoffmann’s reaction, i,e., reaction with Br 2 and
(a) CH 3CHCl O CH 2 CH 3 strong KOH to furnish the primary amine (R –
NH2) ?
(b) CH 3CHCl O CHClCH 3
(a) R CO NHCH 3
(c) CCl 3CCl 2OCCl 2 CCl3 (b) R – CO – ONH4
(d) CH 3CCl 2 O CHClCH 3 (c) R – CO – NH2
45. The ether that undergoes electrophilic (d) R – CO – NHOH.
substitution reactions is 52. Benzaldehyde reacts with ethanoic KCN to give
(a) CH3OC2H5 (b) C6H5OCH3 (a) C6H5CHOHCN
(c) CH3OCH3 (d) C2H5OC2H5 (b) C6H5CHOHCOC6H5
46. What is the Eºcell for the reaction (c) C6H5CHOHCOOH
2+ 2+ 4+
(d) C6H5CHOHCHOHC6H5
Cu (aq) + Sn (aq) + Cu (S) + Sn (aq) 53. Which of the following compound will undergo
at 25ºC if the equilibrium constant for the reaction self aldol condensation in the presence of cold
is 1 × 106? dilute alkali ?
(a) 0.5328 V (b) 0.3552 V (a) CH 2 CH CHO
(c) 0.1773 V (d) 0.7104 V
(b) CH C CHO
47. The ionic conductance of Ba 2+ and Cl – are
respectively 127 and 76 ohm–1 cm2 at infinite (c) C 6 H 5CHO
dilution. The equivalent conductance (in ohm–1
(d) CH 3CH 2CHO.
cm2) of BaCl2 at infinite dilution will be :
(a) 139.5 (b) 203 HCl
(c) 279 (d) 101.5 54. 3CH 3COCH 3
3H 2O
48. A solution of [Ni(H2O)2+ 6 ] is green due to (A)
(a) d-d transition from t2g eg
(b) d-d transition from eg t2g (CH 3 )2 C CH CO CH C(CH 3 ) 2
(c) d-d electronic transition from t 2g eg state (B)
associated with an amount of energy which This polymer (B) is obtained when acetone is
comes under visible green region. saturated with hydrogen chloride gas, B can be
(d) d-d electronic transition from t2g* eg* (a) phorone
49. Prevention of corrosion of iron by Zn coating is (b) formose
called (c) diacetone alcohol
(a) Galvanization (d) mesityl oxide.
(b) Cathodic protection
55. Formic acid is obtained when
(c) Electrolysis
(a) Calcium acetate is heated with conc. H2SO4
(d) Photoelectrolysis
(b) Calcium formate is heated with calcium
50. Indicate which of the nitrogen compounds
acetate
amongst th e following would undergo
(c) Glycerol is heated with oxalic acid at 373 K
Hoffmann’s reaction, i,e., reaction with Br 2 and
strong KOH to furnish the primary amine (d) Acetaldehyde is oxidised with K2Cr2O7 and
(R – NH2) ? H2SO4.
56. In the Freidel Craft's acylation reaction, the
(a) R CO NHCH 3
effective electrophile is
(b) R – CO – ONH4
(a) RCOCl (b) AlCl3
(c) R – CO – NH2
(d) R – CO – NHOH. (c) RCOCl (d) RCO
EBD_7443
MT-40 Target VITEEE
57. The total number of possible isomers for the 1
complex compound [CuII (NH3)4] [PtII Cl4] (a) log k vs (b) k vs T
(a) 3 (b) 6 log T
(c) 5 (d) 4 1 1
58. Identify the incorrect statement among the (c) k vs (d) log k vs
log T T
following:
(a) Lanthanoid contraction is the accumulation 64. The activation energy for a simple chemical
of successive shrinkages. reaction A B is Ea in forward direction. The
(b) As a result of lanthanoid contraction, the activation energy for reverse reaction
properties of 4d series of the transition (a) Is always double of Ea
elements have no similarities with the 5d (b) Is negative of Ea
series of elements. (c) Is always less than Ea
(d) Can be less than or more than E a
(c) Shielding power of 4f electrons is quite
65. If is the fraction of HI dissociated at equilibrium
weak.
(d) There is a decrease in the radii of the atoms in the reaction, 2 HI (g) H2 (g) + I2 (g),
or ions as one proceeds from La to Lu. starting with 2 moles of HI, the total number of
59. Wooden artifact and a freshly cut down tree give moles of reactants and products at equilibrium
7.6 and 15.2 counts min –1 g –1 of carbon are
(t1/2 = 5760 years) respectively. The age of the (a) 2 + 2 (b) 2
artifact is (c) 1 + (d) 2 –
66. Aniline is an activated system for electrophilic
(a) 5760 years
substitution. The compound formed on heating
(b) 5760 × (7.6/15.2) years
aniline with acetic anhydride is
(c) 5760 × (15.2/7.6) years
NH2 NH2
(d) 5760 × (15.2 – 7.6) years
60. Half-life of a radioactive particle is 1 second. The
rate of dissociation of A is 1000 per second. Then (a) (b)
COCH3
after 3 sec, (A) will be
COCH3
(a) 500 (b) 250
(c) 125 (d) 333 NH2 NHCOCH3
61. Half life of a first order reaction is 4 s and the (c) (d)
initial concentration of the reactants is 0.12 M. COCH3
The concentration of the reactant left after 16 s 67. Which of the following reagents will convert p-
is methylbenzenediazonium chloride into p-
(a) 0.0075 M (b) 0.06 M cresol?
(c) 0.03 M (d) 0.015 M (a) Cu powder (b) H2O
62. When a biochemical reaction is carried out in (c) H3PO2 (d) C6H5OH
laboratory in the absence of enzyme then rate of 68. [A ]
reduction
[ B]
CHCl 3 KOH
reaction obtained is 10–6 times, then activation
reduction
energy of reaction in the presence of enzyme is [ C] N Methylanil ine , A is
6 (a) Formaldehyde (b) Trichloromethane
(a) (c) Nitrobenzene (d) Toluene
RT 69. A nitro alkane reacts with HONO to give
(b) Different from Ea obtained in laboratory insoluble product in alkali which turns blue on
(c) P is required treatment with an alkali. The nitric alkane is
(d) Can't say anything (a) CH 3 CH 2 NO 2
63. The temperature dependence of rate constant
(k) of a chemical reaction is written in terms of (b) CH 3 CH CH 2 NO 2
|
-E / RT*
CH 3
Arrhenius equation, k = Ae a . Activation
energy (E*a ) of the reaction can be calculated (c) (CH 3 ) 2 CHNO 2
by plotting (d) (CH 3 )3 CNO 2
Mock Test 4 MT-41
(c) (d)
(a) not real (b) equal to 3 2
4 88. If A, B, C are points (1, 0, 4), (0, –1, 5) and
(2, –3, 1) respectively, then the coordinates of
(c) greater than (c) less than foot of the perpendicular drawn from A to the
4 4 line BC are
82. The general value of that satisfies the equation
1 1 9
2cot 2 2 3 cot 4cosec 8 0 is : (a) , , (b) (1, –2, 3)
2 2 2
(a) n (b) n
6 6 3 3 5
(c) , , (d) None of these
(c) 2n (d) 2n 2 2 2
6 6
83. Which of the following functions is NOT 1
2 x
one-one ? 89. The value of log dx is
2 x
(a) f : R R defined by f (x) 6x 1 1
(a) 0 (b) 2
(b) f:R R defined by f (x) x 2 7 (c) loge2 (d) log e 2
(c) f:R R defined by f (x) x 3 90. The values of p, for which both the roots of
equation 4x2 – 20px + 25p2 + 15p – 66 = 0 are less
2x 1 than 2, belong to :
(d) f : R {7} R defined by f (x)
x 7 4 4
(a) ,2 (b) 1,
3 5 5
84. sin 2 cos 1 is equal to (c) (2, ) (d) (– , –1)
5
91. Let A 2î k̂ , B î ĵ k̂ and
6 24
(a) (b)
25 25 C 4î 3ˆj 7 k̂ . The vector R which
4 24 satisfies the equations
(c) (d) –
5 25 R B C B and R . A 0 is given by
85. Suppose that the number of elements in set A
is p, the number of elements in set B is q and (a) 2î k̂ (b) î 8 ĵ 2k̂
the number of elements in A × B is 7. Then
1
p2 + q 2 = (c) (î ĵ 2k̂ ) (d) None of these
6
Mock Test 4 MT-43
92. Let A = {1, 2, 3, 4}. The function f : A A and 98. The minimum value of |z| + | z – i| is
g:A A are defined in the table given below.. (a) 0 (b) 1
x 1 2 3 4 (c) 2 (d) none
f (x) 3 2 4 1
dy
g (x) 4 3 2 2 99. If x m y n ( x y ) m n then
The value of x, for which (fog) (x) = (gof) (x), is : dx
(a) 1 (b) 2 my ny
(c) 3 (d) 4 (a) (b)
mx nx
93. The population of a village increases
continuously at the rate proportional to the y
number of its inhabitants present at any time. If (c) (d) none of these
x
the population of the village was 20, 000 in 1999 100. If the system of equations x + 2y – 2z = 1, 4x +
and 25000 in the year 2004, what will be the 2 y – z = 2, 6x + 6y + z = 3 has a unique solution,
population of the village in 2009? then
(a) 3125 (b) 31250 (a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 21350 (d) 12350 (c) 3 (d) None of these
94. If a, b, c are sides of a triangle and 101. A plane passes through a fixed point (a, b, c).
a2 b2 c2 The locus of the foot of the perpendicular to it
from the origin is the sphere
(a 1) 2 (b 1) 2 (c 1) 2 0 , then
(a 1) 2 (b 1) 2 (c 1) 2 (a) x2 y2 z 2 ax by cz 0
n2 n 1 n2 n (c) log x x2 3 C
(c) 2 (d) 2
n n 1 2(n n 1) (d) None of these
107. There is 30% chance that it rains on any particular 112. Let f (z) = sinz and g(z) = cosz. If * denotes a
day. Given that there is at least one rainy day, composition of functions, then the value of
then the probability that there are at least two (f + ig) * (f – ig) is :
rainy days is –iz eiz
(a) i e– e (b) ie
6
14 7 – e– i z
6
5 10 7 14 (c) – i e (d) None of these
(a) (b) 113. Suppose that the probability that an item
7
7 10 17
1 produced by a particular machine is defective
10 equals 0.2. If 10 items produced from this machine
are selected at random, the probability that not
6 more than one defective is found is
14 7
6 1
13 7 15 10 1 2
(c) (d) (a) 2 (b)
5 10 7
7 e e2
1
10 3
(c) (d) none of these
108. The logical expression X, in its simplest form for e2
the truth table 114. Four distinct points (2k, 3k), (1, 0), (0, 1) and
(0, 0) lie on a circle for
a b X
1 0 0
(a) only one value of k
1 1 1 is (b) 0 < k < 1
0 1 0
(c) k < 0
0 0 0
(d) all integral values of k
(a) X = a . b (b) X = a + b (c) |x| 1 , x 0
X = a'. b (d) X = a . b' 115. If f (x) = 0 , x 0 then lim f (x) exists for
x a
109. < N, + > where N is set of natural numbers is |x| 1 , x 0
(a) a semi group (b) a monoid group all
(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none (a) a 1 (b) a 0
110. The angle between the lines whose direction (c) a –1 (d) a 2
cosines are given by the equations 116. Area bounded by the parabola y = x2 – 2x + 3
3l m 5n 0 , 6 nm 2 nl 5lm 0 is and tangents drawn to it from the point P(1, 0) is
equal to
1 1 1 1
(a) cos (b) cos 4 2
6 6 (a) 4 2 sq. units (b) sq. units
3
1 2 1 5
(c) cos (d) cos 8 2 16
3 6 (c) sq. units (d) 2 sq. units
3 3
Mock Test 4 MT-45
117. The length of the line segment joining the vertex do? The administration set up remains week mainly
of the parabola y2 = 4ax and a point on the because the employees do not have the right example
parabola where the line segment makes an angle to follow and they are more concerned about being in
the good books of the bosses than doing work.
4am
to the x-axis is . Here, m and n 121. The employees in our country
n
respectively are (a) are quite punctual but not duty conscious
(a) sin , cos (b) cos , sin
2 (b) are not punctual, but somehow manage to
(c) cos , sin (d) sin2 , cos
complete their work
118. A balloon ascends with uniform acceleration of
(c) are somewhat lazy but good natured
5
122 cm/sec units, at the end of half a minute a (d) are not very highly qualified
8
body is released from it. The time that elapses 122. According to the writer, the administration in
before the body reaches the ground in sec is : India
(a) 10 (b) 15 (a) is by and large effective
(c) 20 (d) none
(b) is very strict and firm
1
119. The domain of f (x) = - 1- x 2 is: (c) is affected by red tape
2x -1
ù1 é (d) is more or less ineffective
(a) ú ,1ê (b) [ – 1, [
úû 2 êë 123. The word 'assessment' means
(c) [1, [ (d) None of these (a) enquiry
120. The number of ways of selecting 8 books from a
library which has 9 books each of Mathematics, (b) report
Physics, Chemistry and English is : (c) evaluation
(a) 165 (b) 27C8
8 (d) summary
(c) 3 (d) None of these
124. Choose the word which is most dissimilar to the
PART - IV : ENGLISH
word given in bold.
Direction (Qs. 121 - 123) Read the passage carefully
Abate
and answer the questions given below
(a) augment
What needs to be set right is our approach to work. It
is a common sight in our country of employees (b) free
reporting for duty on time and at the same time doing (c) provoke
little work. If an assessment is made of time they spent
in gossiping, drinking tea, eating "pan" and smoking (d) wane
cigarettes, it will be shocking to know that the time 125. Choose the best pronunciation of the word, Genre,
devoted to actual work is negligible. The problem is from the following options.
the standard which the leadership in administration
sets for the staff. Forgot the ministers because they (a) zhon-ruh (b) jen-ner
mix politics and administration. What do top (c) zon-er (d) zon-ra
bureaucrats do? What do the below down officials
EBD_7443
MOCK
VITEEE Mock Test Paper
5
Max. Marks : 125 Time : 2½ hrs
PART - I : PHYSICS 5. In a metre-bridge, the balancing length from the
left end when standard resistance of 1 is in
1. Six charges of equal magnitude, 3 positive and right gap is found to be 20 cm. The value of
3 negative are to be placed on PQRSTU corners unknown resistance is
of a regular hexagon, such that field at the centre (a) 0.25 (b) 0.4
is double that of what it would have been if (c) 0.5 (d) 4
only one +ve charge is placed at R. 6. A wire has a resistance of 3.1 at 30ºC and a
P Q resistance 4.5 at 100ºC. The temperature
coefficient of resistance of the wire
U R
O (a) 0.0064 ºC–1 (b) 0.0034 ºC–1
T S –1
(c) 0.0025 ºC (d) 0.0012 ºC–1
(a) + , +, +, –, –, – (b) –, + , +, +, –, – 7. Two batteries, one of emf 18 volt and internal
(c) –, + , +, –, +, – (d) + , –, +, –, +, –
2. Steam is passed into 22 g of water at 20°C . The
mass of water that will be present when the water
acquires a temperature of 90°C is (Latent heat of
steam is 540 cal/gm)
(a) 24.8 gm (b) 24 gm resistance 2 and the other of emf 12 volt and
(c) 36.6 gm (d) 30 gm internal resistance 1 , are connected as
3. Two capacitors of capacitances C1 and C2 are shown. The voltmeter V will record a reading
of
connected in parallel across a battery. If Q1 and
(a) 30 volt (b) 18 volt
Q2 respectively be the charges on the capacitors,
(c) 15 volt (d) 14 volt
Q1 8. A galvanometer can be converted into a
then will be equal to
Q2 voltmeter by connecting
(a) A high resistance in parallel
C2 C1 (b) A low resistance in series
(a) (b) (c) A high resistance in series
C1 C2
(d) A low resistance in parallel
9. An electron moves in a circular orbit with a
C12 C 22 uniform speed v. It produces a magnetic field
(c) (d)
C 22 C12 B at the centre of the circle. The radius of the
circle is proportional to
4. Streamline flow is more likely for liquids with
(a) high density and low viscosity B B
(a) (b)
(b) low density and high viscosity v v
(c) high density and high viscosity v v
(d) low density and low viscosity (c) (d)
B B
Mock Test 5 MT-47
10. The Young’s modulus of a perfectly rigid body 18. A parallel beam of monochromatic light of
is wavelength 5000Å is incident normally on a
single narrow slit of width 0.001 mm. The light is
(a) unity
focussed by a convex lens on a screen placed in
(b) zero focal plane. The first minimum will be formed for
(c) infinity the angle of diffraction equal to
(d) some finite non-zero constant (a) 0° (b) 15°
(c) 30° (d) 50°
11. A beam of electron passes undeflected through
mutually perpendicular electric and magnetic fields. 19. The angular separation d between two
If the electric field is switched off, and the same wavelength and + d in a diffraction grating
magnetic field is maintained, the electrons move is directly proportional to
(a) in a circular orbit (a) frequency of light
(b) grating element
(b) along a parabolic path
(c) spatial frequency of grating
(c) along a straight line
(d) wavelength of light
(d) in an elliptical orbit.
20. A stationary body of mass 3 kg explodes into
12. A heating coil is labelled 100 W, 220 V. The coil is
cut in half and the two pieces are joined in parallel three equal pieces. Two of the pieces fly off in
to the same source. The energy now liberated two mutually perpendicular directions, one with
per second is
a velocity of 3iˆ ms 1 and the other with a
(a) 25 J (b) 50 J
(c) 200 J (d) 400 J velocity of 4jˆ ms 1. If the explosion occurs in
13. Eddy currents are produced when 10–4 s, the average force acting on the third piece
(a) a metal is kept in varying magnetic field in newton is y
(b) a metal is kept in steady magnetic field
(c) a circular coil is placed in a magnetic field (a) (3iˆ 4j)
ˆ 10 4
(d) through a circular coil, current is passed 1 4ˆj
14. If the number of turns per unit length of a coil of (b) (3iˆ 4j)
ˆ 10 4 x
1 3iˆ
solenoid is doubled, the self-inductance of the )
4j
solenoid will (c) (3iˆ 4ˆj) 10 4 (3
i+
(–
(a) remain unchanged 1×
(b) be halved (d) (3iˆ 4j)
ˆ 104
(c) be doubled 21. Which one of the following is accompanied by
(d) become four times the characteristic X-rays emission ?
15. The time constant of C-R circuit is (a) -particle emission
(a) 1/CR (b) C/R (b) Electron emission
(c) CR (d) R/C (c) Positron emission
16. In a circuit, L, C and R are connected in series (d) k-electron capture
with an alternating voltage source of frequency 22. A spectral line results from the transition n = 2 to
f. The current leads the voltage by 45°. The value n = 1 in the atoms/species given below. Which
of C is one of these will produce th e shortest
1 1 wavelength emission ?
(a) (b) (a) Hydrogen atom
f (2 fL R ) 2 f (2 fL R )
(b) Singly ionised helium
1 1 (c) Doubly ionised lithium
(c) f (2 fL R )
(d) 2 f (2 fL R ) (d) Deuterium atom
17. The frequency of electromagnetic wave, which 23. K wavelength emitted by an atom of atomic
is best suited to observe a particle of radius number Z = 11 is . Find the atomic number for
3 × 10–4 cm is of the order of an atom that emits K radiation with wavelength
4
(a) 1015 (b) 1014
13
(a) Z = 6 (b) Z = 4
(c) 10 (d) 1012 (c) Z = 11 (d) Z = 44
EBD_7443
MT-48 Target VITEEE
24. The glancing angle in a X-ray diffraction is 30º M(2 He4) =4.00387 amu, then in the nuclear
and the wavelength of X-rays used is 20 nm. the reaction
6 2 2 2He4, the energy released will be
interplanar spacing of the crystal dffracting these 3Li + 1H
X-rays will be (a) 20 MeV (b) 22 MeV
(a) 40 nm (b) 20 nm (c) 50 MeV (d) 44 MeV
(c) 15 nm (d) 10 nm 32. What is the product aXb of the following nuclear
25. If the energy of a photon is 10 eV, then its reaction ?
14 4 16 b
momentum is 7N + 2He 8 O + aX
(a) 5.33 × 10–23 kg m/s (a) Electron (b) Neutron
(b) 5.33 × 10–25 kg m/s (c) Proton (d) Deutron
(c) 5.33 × 10–29 kg m/s 33. The following truth table belongs to which of
(d) 5.33 × 10–27 kg m/s the following four gates?
26. In a photoelectric experiment the stopping A B Y
potential for the incident light of wavelength 1 1 0
4000Å is 2 volt. If the wavelength be changed to 1 0 0
3000 Å, the stopping potential will be
0 1 0
(a) 2 V (b) Zero
(c) Less than 2 V (d) More than 2 V 0 0 1
27. A particle with rest mass m0 is moving with speed (a) NOR (b) XOR
of light c. The de-Broglie wavelength associated (c) NAND (d) OR
with it will be 34. The transfer ratio of a transistor is 50. The
(a) (b) zero input resistance of the transistor when used in
(c) m0 c/h (d) h /m0c the common emitter configuration is 1 k . The
peak value of the collector A.C. current for an
28. Figure shows three forces applied to a trunk that A.C. input voltage of 0.01 V peak is
moves leftward by 3 m over a smooth floor. The (a) 100 A (b) 0.01 mA
force magnitudes are F1 = 5N, F2 = 9N, and F3 = (c) 0.25 mA (d) 500 A
3N. The net work done on the trunk by the three 35. Which of the following gates will have an output
forces of 1?
1 0
1 1
(A) (B)
0 0
1 0
(C) (D)
(a) D (b) A
(c) B (d) C
36. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit
(a) 1.50 J (b) 2.40 J with two inputs A and B and the output C. The
(c) 3.00 J (d) 6.00 J voltage waveforms of A, B and C are as shown
29. The activity of a radioactive sample is measured below
as 9750 counts per minute at t = 0, as 975 counts A
Logic gate
per minute at t = 5 min. The decay constant is B circuit C
approximately,
1
(a) 0.230 per minute (b) 0.461 per minute
(c) 0.691 per minute (d) 0.922 per minute A t
30. A radioactive substance has a half life of four 1
months. Three fourth of the substance will decay B t
in 1
(a) three months (b) four months
t
(c) eight months (d) twelve months C
31. If the masses of the nuclei are The logic circuit gate is
M(1H2) = 2.0147 amu, (a) NAND gate (b) NOR gate
M(3Li6) =6.017 amu and (c) OR gate (d) AND gate
Mock Test 5 MT-49
= 10 ms–2)
NO 2
(a) 0.06 (b) 0.03
(c) 0.04 (d) 0.01 Cl
(a) Br Br (b)
38. Advantage of optical fibre is
(a) high bandwidth and EM interference
(b) low bandwidth and EM interference Br Br
(c) high and width, low transmission capacity NO 2
Cl
and no EM interference
(d) high bandwidth, high data transmission (c) Br Br (c) None of these
capacity and no EM interference
39. If 1 and 2 are the refractive indices of the
44. Which of the following gives the best yield of
materials of core and cladding of an optical fibre,
metabromo aniline ?
then the loss of light due to its leakage can be
minimised by having HNO3 (1) Sn , HCl
(a)
(a) 1> 2 (b) 1 < 2 H 2SO 4 (2 ) NaOH
(c) 1 = 2 (d) none of these
Br2 / FeCl3
40. A particle of mass m1 moving with velocity v
HNO3 Br2
strikes with a mass m2 at rest, then the condition (b)
for maximum transfer of kinetic energy is H 2SO 4 FeBr3
Br2 HNO3
PART - II : CHEMISTRY (c)
FeBr3 H 2SO 4
41. One organic alcohol is irradiated with IR source
and it produces three streching frequency such (1) Sn , HCl
as 3391 cm–1, 2981 cm–1 and 1055 cm–1. Name of (2 ) NaOH
that organic alcohol is
(a) Methanol (b) Ethanol (d) (1) Sn , HCl HNO3
(c) Isobutanol (d) Isopropanol (2 ) NaOH H 2SO 4
42. The following reaction is Br2
NO2 FeBr3
59. The OH group of an alcohol or the –COOH group 65. The appearance of colour in solid alkali metal
of a carboxylic acid can be replaced by halides is generally due to
–Cl using (a) Schottky defect
(a) phosphorus pentachloride (b) Frenkel defect
(b) hypochlorous acid (c) Interstitial positions
(c) chlorine (d) F-centres
(d) hydrochloric acid 66. CsBr crystallises in a body centered cubic lattice.
60. A and B in the following reactions are The unit cell length is 436.6 pm. Given that the
OH atomic mass of Cs = 133 and that of
B R– C
R–C–R' HCN/ A Br = 80 amu and Avogadro number being
KCN CH2NH2
O R' 6.02 × 1023 mol–1, the density of CsBr is
CN (a) 0.425 g/cm3 (b) 8.25 g/cm3
(a) A = RR'C , B = LiAlH4 (c) 4.25 g/cm 3 (d) 42.5 g/cm3
OH
OH 67. Cu aq is unstable in solution and undergoes
(b) A = RR'C , B = NH3
COOH simultaneous oxidation and reduction according
CN to the reaction :
(c) A = RR'C , B H 3O
OH 2Cu ( aq ) Cu 2 (aq) Cu (s) choose correct
(d) A = RR'CH2CN, B = NaOH
Eº for above reaction if Eº Cu2+/Cu = 0.34 V and
61. Consider the following transformations :
Eº Cu2+/Cu+ = 0.15 V
CaCO 3 heat I2 (a) –0.38 V (b) +0.49 V
CH3COOH A B C
NaOH (c) +0.38 V (d) –0.19 V
The molecular formula of C is 68. Specific conductance of 0.1 M sodium chloride
solution is 1.06 × 10–2 ohm–1 cm–1. Its molar
OH
| conductance in ohm–1 cm2 mol–1 is
(a) CH 3 C CH 3 (b) ICH2 — COCH3 (a) 1.06 × 102 (b) 1.06 × 103
| 4
I (c) 1.06 × 10 (d) 5.3 × 102
(c) CHI3 (d) CH3I 69. Hydrogen-Oxygen fuel cells are used in space
62. Caboxylic acid group does not give the usual craft to supply
addition and elimination reactions of aldehydes (a) Power for heat and light
and ketones because (b) Power for pressure
(c) Oxygen
(a) O–H bond is more polar than C = O group (d) Water
(b) Carboxylate ion gets ionised 70. Corrosion is basically a
(c) Carboxylate ion gets stabilised by (a) altered reaction is presence of H2O
resonance (b) electrochemical phenomenon
(d) it exists as – COOH and there is no carbonyl (c) interaction
group (d) union between two light metals and a heavy
63. The enthalpy and entropy change for the metal
reaction 71. When during electrolysis of a solution of AgNO3
Br2(l) + Cl2 (g) 2 BrCl (g) 9650 coulombs of charge pass through the
are 30kJ mol–1 and 105 JK–1 mol–1 respectively. electroplating bath, the mass of silver deposited
The temperature at which the reaction will be in
on the cathode will be
equilibrium is
(a) 1.08 g (b) 10.8 g
(a) 273 K (b) 450 K
(c) 21.6 g (d) 108 g
(c) 300 K (d) 285.7 K
64. In graphite electrons are : 72. How many isomers of C5H11 OH will be primary
(a) Localised on each carbon atom alcohols ?
(b) spread out between the sheets (a) 5 (b) 4
(c) localised on every third carbon atom (c) 2 (d) 3.
(d) present in antibonding orbital. 73. HBr reacts fastest with
(a) 2-Mehtylpropan-1-ol
EBD_7443
MT-52 Target VITEEE
(b) 2-Methylpropene-2-ol
1
(c) propan-2-ol (a) ( y12 2ax1 )( y12 4a 2 )
(d) propan-1-ol. |a|
74. Which one of the following on oxidation gives a
1
ketone ? (b) ( y12 4ax1 )( y12 4a 2 )
(a) Primary alcohol |a|
(b) secondary alcohol 1
(c) tertiary alcohol (c) ( y12 4ax1 )( y12 2a 2 )
|a|
(d) All of these
75. An aromatic ether is not cleaved by HI even at (d) None of these
525 K. The compound is 31
(a) C6H5OCH3 (b) C6H5OC6H5 83. In a ABC, a = 5, b = 4 and cos( A B) .
32
(c) C6H5OC3H7 (d) Tetrahydrofuran Then c is
76. Acetic anhydride reacts with diethyl ether in the (a) 6 (b) 5
presence of anhydrous AlCl3 to give (c) 4 (d) 3
(a) CH3COOCH3 (b) CH3CH2COOCH3
(c) CH3COOCH2CH3 (d) CH3CH2OH 84. Let a 2iˆ ˆj k,
ˆ b ˆi 2ˆj kˆ and a unit
77. Phenol is vector ĉ be coplanar. If ĉ is perpendicular to
(a) a base stronger than ammonia â , then ĉ =
(b) an acid stronger than carbonic acid
(c) an acid weaker than carbonic acid 1 1
(a) ( ĵ k̂) (b) ( î ĵ k̂ )
(d) a neutral compound 2 3
CH 2 O 1 1
(c) (î 2ˆj) (d) (î ĵ k̂ )
78. O CH 2 5 3
CH 2 O 85. Let X = {1, 2, 3, 4} A function is defined from X
The above shown polymer is obtained when a to N as R ( x, f (x )) : x X, f (x ) xPx 1 .
carbonyl compound is allowed to stand. It is a The range of f is
white solid. The polymer is (a) {1, 2, 3, 4} (b) {1, 4, 9, 16}
(a) Trioxane (b) Formose (c) {1, 2, 6, 24} (d) {1}
(c) Paraformaldehyde (d) Metaldehyde. 86. If f(x) be a quadratic polynomial such that
79. The compound formed when malonic ester is f(0) = 2, f’(0) = – 3 and f’’ (0) = 4 then
heated with urea is 1
(a) Cinnamic acid (b) Butyric acid f (x ) dx is equal of
(c) Barbituric acid (d) Crotonic acid. 1
80. Schotten-Baumann reaction is a reaction of
phenols with 16
(a) –3 (b)
(a) Benzoyl chloride and sodium hydroxide 3
(b) Acetyl chloride and sodium hydroxide (c) 0 (d) none of these.
(c) Salicylic acid and conc. H2SO4 87. The tangent at a point P on the hyperbola
(d) Acetyl chloride and conc H2SO4 x2 y2
1 meets one of its directrices in F. If
PART - III : MATHEMATICS a 2 b2
PF subtends an angle at the corresponding
81. The equation k sin + cos 2 = 2k – 7 possesses a focus, then equals
solution if : 3
(a) 2 k 6 (b) k > 2 (a) (b) (c) (d)
(c) k > 6 (d) k < 2 4 2 4 12
88. In a right angled triangle one side is thrice the
82. If the tangents are drawn from the point (x1, y1)
other side in length. The is suspended by a
to the parabola y2 = 4ax, then the length of their string attached at the right angle. The angle that
chord of contact is the hypotenuse of the will make with the
vertical is
Mock Test 5 MT-53
(c) c.a = a.b = 0 (d) a.b = b.c = c.a = 0 and 3x2y – y3 = b2. The angle of intersection of
these curves is
3 1
90. If, P( B) , P(A B C )
4 3 (a) (b) (c) (d) 0
3 2 4
1 98. For binary operation * defined on R – {1} such
and P( A B C ) , then P (B C) is
3 a
that a * b is
1 1 1 1 b 1
(a) (b) (c) (d) (a) not associative (b) not commutative
12 6 15 9 (c) commutative (d) both (a) and (b)
91. If m sin = n sin ( + 2 ), then tan ( + ) . cot
is equal to 99. The value of the boolean expression [a.b' c].a '
if a = 0, b = 0, c = 1
m n m–n
(a) (b) (a) 1 (b) 0
m–n m n (c) 2 (d) none
m n m–n 100. Suppose , , R are such that
(c) (d)
mn mn sin , sin , sin 0 and
2 3 1
92. If P A , P B and P A B , sin 2 sin cos cos 2
5 10 5 2
sin sin cos cos 2 then
then P A | B . P B | A is equal to
sin 2 sin cos cos 2
5 5 25
(a) (b) (c) (d) 1 cannot exceed
6 7 42 (a) 1 (b) 0
93. Solution of differential equation xdy – ydx = 0
represents: 1
(c) (d) None of these
(a) rectangular hyperbola. 2
(b) parabola whose vertex is at origin. 101. Area of the region between th e curves
(c) circle whose centre is at origin. x2 + y2 = 2, y = sin x and y-axis in first quadrant
(d) straight line passing through origin. is
94. If and ( < ) are the roots of the equation 3 3
8 4
x 2 + bx + c = 0 , where, c < 0 < b, then (a) sq. units (b) sq. units
4 8
(a) 0 < < (b) 0 | | 2 2
8 4
(c) 0 (d) 0 | | (c) sq. units (d) sq. units
4 8
3
x x2 6
x 3
102. If the roots of z iz
2
2i 0 represent the
95. dx is equal to
x (1 3
x) vertices of a ABC in the Argand plane, then
the area of the triangle is
3 2/3
(a) x 6 tan 1 x1 / 6 C 3 7 3 7
2 (a) (b)
2 4
3 2/3
(b) x 6 tan 1 x1 / 6 C (c) 2 (d) None
2 103. If n + 2C8 : n – 2P4 = 57 : 16, then the value of n is:
3 2/3 (a) 20 (b) 19 (c) 18 (d) 17
(c) x 6 tan 1 x1 / 6 C 104. The sides of a triangle are three consecutive
2
(d) None of these. natural numbers and its largest angle is twice the
96. If the system of equations x + 2y – 3z = 1, (p + 2) smallest one. The length of the greatest side is
z = 3(2p + 1) y + z = 2 is inconsistent, then the (a) 4 (b) 5
value of p is (c) 6 (d) none of these
EBD_7443
MT-54 Target VITEEE
105. A family of curves is given by the equation 3 1
(c) a ,c ,b 0
x2 y2 2 2
= 1. The differential equation (d) none of these
a 2 b2
representing this family of curves is given by 1 5
2 109. The value of tan cos 1 is
d2 y dy dy 2 3
xy Ax – y = 0. The value of A
dx 2 dx dx
is 3 5 3 5
(a) (b)
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 3 (d) 5 2 2
106. A brick manufacture has two depots A and B,
with stocks of 30000 and 20000 bricks respectively. 5
(c) (d) none of these
He receive orders from three builders P, Q and R 6
for 15000, 20,000 and 15000 bricks respectively. 110. If 3f (cos x) + 2 f (sin x) = 5x, then f’(cos x) =
The cost (in `) of transporting 1000 bricks to the 5 5
builders from the depots as given in the table. (a) (b)
cos x cos x
To Transportation cost
From per 1000 bricks (in `) 5
(c) (d) none of these
P Q R sin x
A 40 20 20 111. Let A {x : 1 x 1} = B and S be the subset
B 20 60 40 of A×B defined by S = {(x,y) : x2 + y2 = 1}. This
The manufacturer wishes to find how to fulfill defines
the order so that transportation cost is minimum. (a) an one-one function from A into B
Formulation of the L.P.P., is given as (b) a many - one function from A into B
(a) Minimize Z = 40x – 20y
Subject to, x + y 15, x + y 30, x 15, y 20, (c) a bijective function from A into B
x 0, y 0 (d) Not a function
(b) Minimize Z = 40x – 20y 112. A variable plane moves so that the sum of
Subject to, x + y 15, x + y 30, x 15, y 20, reciprocals of its intercepts on the three
x 0, y 0 coordinate axes is constant . It passes through
(c) Minimize Z = 40x – 20y a fixed point, which has coordinates
Subject to, x + y 15, x + y 30, x 15, y 20,
x 0, y 0 1 1 1
(d) Minimize Z = 40x – 20y (a) ( , , ) (b) , ,
Subject to, x + y 15, x + y 30, x 15, y 20,
x 0, y 0 1 1 1
(c) , , (d) , ,
107. Total number of ways of selecting five letters from
letters of the word INDEPENDENT is
113. The probability of a man hitting a target is 1/4.
(a) 70 (b) 72 (c) 75 (d) 80
The number of times he must shoot so that the
108. The values of a, b and c which make the function
probability he hits the target, at least once is
sin(a 1)x sin x more than 0.9, is
, x 0 [use log 4 = 0.602 and log 3 = 0.477]
x
f (x) c ,x 0 (a) 7 (b) 8 (c) 6 (d) 5
114. The coordinates of a point on the line
x bx 2 x 6
,x 0 x 2 y 1 z 3
bx 3/ 2 at a distance of from
3 2 2 2
continuous at x = 0 are the point (1, 2, 3) is
3 1
(a) a ,c , b= 0 56 43 111
2 2 (a) (56,,43, 111) (b) , ,
17 17 17
3 1
(b) a ,c ,b 0 (c) (2, 1, 3) (d) (–2, –1, –3)
2 2
Mock Test 5 MT-55
115. Suppose that X has a Poisson distribution. If souls. However, there were an unpleasant number of
P(X 1) 0.3 , and P(x 2) 0.2 then questions about why the Estonia sank and why so
many survivors were men in the prime of life, while
P(X = 0) =
most of the dead were women, children and the elderly.
(a) e 1/3 (b) e –3/2 (c) e –4/3 (d) 0.5
121. One can understand from the reading that ----.
116. The value of x which satisfy the equation
(a) the lifesaving equipment did not work well
1 + sin2ax = cos x, where a is irrational is/are
and lifeboats could not be lowered
, (b) design faults an d incompetent crew
(a) 0 (b) 0, (c) (d) 0,
2 2 contributed to the sinking of the Estonia
117. A curve passes through the point (5, 3) and at ferry
any point (x, y) on it, the product of its slope (c) 139 people managed to leave the vessel but
and the ordinate is equal to its abscissa. The died in freezing water
curve is (d) most victims were trapped inside the boat
(a) parabola (b) ellipse as they were in their cabins
(c) hyperbola (d) circle 122. It is clear from the passage that the survivors of
118. The lines whose vector equations are the accident ----.
r 2iˆ 3jˆ 7kˆ (2iˆ pjˆ 5k)ˆ (a) helped one another to overcome the tragedy
that had affected them all
and r iˆ 2jˆ 3kˆ (3iˆ pjˆ pk)ˆ
(b) were mostly young men but women,
are perpendicular for all values of and if p = children and the elderly stood little chance
(a) 1 (b) –1 (c) – 6 (d) 6 (c) helped save hundreds of lives
sin( cos 2 x ) (d) are still suffering from severe post-traumatic
119. lim equals stress disorder
x 0 x2
123. According to the passage, when the Estonia
sank, ----.
(a) (b) (c) (d) 1 (a) there were only 139 passengers on board
2
120. Which one of the following relations on the set of (b) few of the passengers were asleep
real numbers R is an equivalence relation ? (c) there were enough lifeboats for the number
(a) aR1b |a| |b| (b) aR 2 b a b of people on board
(d) faster reaction by the crew could have
(c) aR 3b a divides b (d) aR 4 b a b increased the Estonia's chances of survival
PART - IV : ENGLISH 124. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate words from
the option to complete the sentence.
Direction (Qs. 121 -123) : Read the passage carefully A rising China and the anti-India _________of
and answer the questions given below. Kathmandu's hill elite, however, have the
Naval architects never claim that a ship is unsinkable, potential to neutralize, over the longer term, some
but the sinking of the passenger-and-car ferry Estonia of Delhi's natural _________advantages in
in the Baltic surely should have never have happened. Nepal.
It was well designed and carefully maintained. It carried (a) happiness, unnecessary
the proper number of lifeboats. It had been thoroughly
(b) good nature, unimportant
inspected the day of its fatal voyage. Yet hours later,
the Estonia rolled over and sank in a cold, stormy (c) resentments, strategic
night. It went down so quickly that most of those on (d) enjoyment, common
board, caught in their dark, flooding cabins, had no 125. Choose the best pronunciation of the word,
chance to save themselves: Of those who managed to Debris, from the following options.
scramble overboard, only 139 survived. The rest died (a) deb-rees (b) de-bree
of hypothermia before the rescuers could pluck them (c) deb-ris (d) deb-re
from the cold sea. The final death toll amounted to 912
EBD_7443
MOCK
VITEEE Mock Test Paper
6
Max. Marks : 125 Time : 2½ hrs
PART - I : PHYSICS
1 q2
(a)
1. Two particles A and B, move with constant 4 0 d2
velocities v1 and v2 . At the initial moment their
1 q2
(b) more than
position vectors are r1 and r2 respectively. The 4 0 d2
condition for particles A and B for their collision
is 1 q2
(c) Less than
(a) r1.v1 r2 .v2 4 0 d2
(b) r1 v1 r2 v2 (d) zero
4. There capacitors C1, C2 and C3 are connected
(c) r1 r2 v1 v 2 as shown in the figure. A potential difference of
r1 r2 v2 v1 14 volts is applied to the input terminals. What
(d) is the charge on C3 (in µC) ?
| r1 r2 | | v2 v1 |
2. In the figure, a proton moves a distance d in a
C1= 4µF
uniform electric field E as shown in the figure.
Does the electric field do a positive or negative 14 volt C2 C3
work on the proton? Does the electric potential 4F
energy of the proton increase or decrease? 2µF
E
(a) 8 (b) 4
(c) 42 (d) 100
+
p 5. The radii of two concentric spherical conducting
d shells are r 1 and r2 (> r1). The charge on the
(a) Negative, increase outer shell is q. What will be the charge on the
inner shell which is connected to the earth ?
(b) Positive, decrease
(c) Negative, increase r1 r2
(d) Positive, increase (a) q (b) q
r2 r1
Here, distance increases so, potential energy
increases. (c) – q (d) zero
3. Two charged spherical conductors (each of 6. Figure shows three points A, B and C in a region
radius R) are at a distance d part (d > 2R). The of uniform electric field E . The line AB is
charge on one is +q and that on the other is – q. perpendicular and BC is parallel to the field lines.
The magnitude of the force between them will Then which of the following holds good?
be :
Mock Test 6 MT-57
E 3 D 3
A
B C 3
3 3
C E
F
(a) VA = VB = VC (b) VA = VB > VC A B
3
(c) VA = VB < VC (d) VA > VB = VC
A cell of emf 3V is connected across AB. The
Where VA, VB and VC represent the electric effective resistance across AB and the current
potentials at the points A, B and C respectively. through the arm AB will be
7. The work done in carrying a charge q once (a) 0.6 , 1 A (b) 1.5 , 2 A
around a circle or radius r with a charge Q placed (c) 0.6 , 2 A (d) 1.5 , 1 A
at the centre will be 12. In a given network, each resistance has value of
6 . The point X is connected to point A by a
(a) 2 (b) Qq /(4
Qq(4 0r ) 0r) copper wire of negligible resistance and point Y
is connected to point B by the same wire. The
(c) Zero (d) Qq 2 /(4 0r) effective resistance between X and Y will be
8. An object A has a charge of +2 µC and the object
B has charge of +6 µC. Which statement is true? 6 6 A6
X Y
B
(a) FAB 3FBA (b) FAB FBA
(a) 18 (b) 6
(c) 3 FAB FBA (d) FAB 4FBA (c) 3 (d) 2
9. An aluminium (Al) rod with area of cross-section 13. The figure shows three situations when an
4 × 10–6 m2 has a current of 5 ampere, flowing electron with velocity v travels through a
through it. Find the drift velocity of electron in
the rod. Density of Al = 2.7 × 103 kg/m3 and uniform magnetic field B . In each case, what is
the direction of magnetic force on the electron?
Atomic wt. = 27. Assume that each Al atom
provides one electron y y y
(a) 8.6 × 10–4 m/s (b) 1.29 × 10–4 m/s
(c) 2.8 × 10–2 m/s (d) 3.8 × 10–3 m/s v B B
x x x
10. Taking the internal resistance of the battery as B v v
negligible, the steady state current in the 2 z z z
resistor shown in the figure will be 1 2 3
2 (a) + ve z-axis, – ve x-axis, + ve y-axis
(b) – ve z-axis, – ve x-axis and zero
(c) + ve z-axis, + ve y-axis and zero
A B (d) – ve z-axis, + ve x-axis and zero
3 14. The magnetic field at P on the axis of a solenoid
having 100 turns/metre and carrying a current of
0.2 µF 5 A is:
6
6V 2.8
(a) 1.8 A (b) 2.9 A 45° 45°
(c) 0.9 A (d) 2.8 A
P
11. Six resistors, each of value 3 area connected
as shown in the fig.
EBD_7443
MT-58 Target VITEEE
20. In a series LCR circuit, if the applied voltage V
(a) 250 0 (b) 500 2 0 and the current in the circuit I at any instant t are
(c) 500 0 (d) 250 2 0 given as :
15. In an A.C. circuit resistance R, inductance L and V= V0 sin t and I = I0 sin ( t – )
capacitance C are in parallel. The value of R is then which of the following holds good :
1 1
50 , inductive reactance X L = 40 and (a) L (b) L
C C
capacitive reactance XC = 25 . Then the reading
of ammeter will be: 1
(c) L (d) none
C
C 21. A particle tied to a string describes a vertical
L circular motion of radius r continually. If it has a
velocity 3 gr at the highest point, then the
A ratio of the respective tensions in the string
R holding it at the highest and lowest points is
(a) 4 : 3 (b) 5 : 4
200V (c) 1 : 4 (d) 3 : 2
22. A generator at a utility company produces 100 A
(a) 10.2 A (b) 5 A
of current at 4000 V. The voltage is stepped up
(c) 17 A (d) 7 A
to 2,40,000V by a transformer before it is sent on
16. The current i passed in any instrument in an a high voltage transmission line. The current in
A.C. circuit is i = 2 sin t amp and potential transmission line is
difference applied is given by V = 5 cos t volt. (a) 3.67 A (b) 2.67 A
Power loss in the instrument is: (c) 1.67 A (d) 2.40 A
(a) 10 watt (b) 5 watt 23. A parallel monochromatic beam of light is incident
(c) zero watt (d) 20 watt normally on a narrow slit. A diffraction pattern is
17 In A.C. circuit in which inductance and formed on a screen placed perpendicular to the
capacitance are joined in series. Current is found direction of the incident beam. At the first
to be maximum when the value of inductance is minimum of the diffraction pattern, the phase
0.5 H and the value of capacitance is 8 F. The difference between the rays coming from the two
angular frequency of applied alternating voltage edges of slit is
(a) 0 (b)
will be:
(a) 400 Hz (b) 5000 Hz (c) (d) 2
(c) 2 × 105 Hz (d) 500 Hz 2
18. In a series LCR circuit the frequency of a 10 V 24. The electric field of a plane electromagnetic wave
a.c. voltage source is adjusted in such a fashion in free space travelling along x-direction is given
by : Ez = 60 sin (kx + t) V/m.
that the reactance of the inductor measures 15 The magnetic field component will be given as :
and that of the capacitor 11 . If R = 3 , the 60
potential difference across the series (a) Bz sin (kz t)T
c
combination of L and C will be:
(a) 8 V (b) 10 V 60
(b) Bz sin (kx t)T
(c) 22 V (d) 52 V c
19. What direct current will produce the same 60
amount of thermal energy in a resistance R = (c) By sin (ky t)T
c
2 as an alternating current that a peak value
of 4.24 A and frequency 50 Hz? 60
(d) By sin (kx t)T
(a) 3 A (b) 2 A c
(c) 5 A (d) 4 A Here c represents the speed of light in free space.
Mock Test 6 MT-59
48. Copper metal has a face-centred cubic structure (c) Intercept of CH3COOH plot
with the unit cell length equal to 0.361 nm. (d) Kohlrausch’s law
Picturing copper ions in contact along the face 54. For the reaction,
diagonal. The apparent radius of a copper ion H
CH3COCH3 + I2 products
is-
The rate is governed by expression
(a) 0.128 (b) 1.42
(c) 3.22 (d) 4.22 dx
k[acetone][H ]
49. For a reaction to be spontaneous at all dt
temperatures The order w.r.t. I2 is:
(a) G and H should be negative (a) 1 (b) 0
(c) 3 (d) 2
(b) G and H should be positive
55. 1.08 g of pure silver was converted into silver
(c) G= S= 0
nitrate and its solution was taken in a beaker. It
(d) H < G and was electrolysed using platinum cathode and
50. The standard entropies of CO2 (g), C(s) and silver anode. 0.01 Faraday of electricity was
O2(g) are 213.5, 5.740 and 205 JK–1 respectively. passed using 0.15 volt above the decomposition
The standard entropy of formation of CO2 is: potential of silver. The silver content of the
(a) 2.76 JK–1 (b) 2.12 JK–1 beaker after the above shall be
(c) 1.12 JK –1 (d) 1.40 JK–1 (a) 0 g (b) 0.108 g
51. In a closed insulated container, a liquid is stirred (c) 0.108 g (d) 1.08 g
with a paddle to increase the temperature, which 56. In a fuel cell, CH3OH is used as fuel and oxygen
of the following is true? gas is used as an oxidiser. The reaction is
(a) E W 0, q 0 3
CH3OH( ) O 2 (g) CO2 (g) H 2O( )
2
(b) E W q 0 If standard enthalpy of combustion for methanol
(c) E 0, W q 0 is – 726 kJ/mol, what will be the cell efficiency.
Given that
(d) W 0, E q 0
G f values (kJ/mol) :
52. Le-Chatelier’s principle is applicable only to a :
CH3OH(l) = – 166.3 CO2(g) = – 394.4
(a) system in equilibrium
H2O (l) = – 237.1
(b) irreversible reaction (a) 70.23% (b) 96.7%
(c) homogeneous reaction (c) 80% (d) none of these
(d) heterogeneous reaction 57. Specific conductance of a N/10 KCl solution at
53. The plot shown below represents the variation 23°C is 0.0112 ohm–1 cm–1.The resistance of cell
of molar conductivity of NaOH and CH3OH containing the solution at the same temperature
was found to be 55 ohm. The cell constant will
NaOH be :
(a) 0.316 cm–1 (b) 0.616 cm–1
(c) 6.16 cm–1 (d) 616 cm–1
m 58. 1-Phenylethanol can be prepared by the reaction
CH3COOH
of benzaldehyde with
(a) ethyl iodide and magnesium
(b) methyl iodide and magnesium
(c) methyl bromide and aluminium bromide
c
(d) methyl bromide
0
m for CH3COOH is obtained from the : 59. When phenol is treated with excess bromine
water. It gives
1000 K (a) m-Bromophenol
(a) Relation m
c (b) o-and p-Bromophenols
(b) Intersection of NaOH and CH3 COOH (c) 2,4-Dibromophenol
curves (d) 2,4, 6-Tribomophenol.
EBD_7443
MT-62 Target VITEEE
60. Ether in air forms : 69. What is product of the following sequence of
(a) Oxide (b) Peroxide reactions
(c) Alkenes (d) Alkanes
NaBH 4 HBr
61. Which one of the following will most readily be O
CH 3OH
dehydrated in acidic conditions ?
OH ( i) Mg, Et 2O PCC
O OH
( ii ) H 2C O CH 2Cl 2
(a) (b) (iii ) H 3O
O O
(a) CHO (b) COOH
(c) (d)
OH OH CH 3
OH (c) (d)
62. Prestone is a mixture of: CHO OH
(a) Glycol + H2O (b) Glycerol + H2O 70. With Tollen’s reagent a silver mirror will be formed
(c) Acetone + H2O (d) propanal + H2O by:
63. Benzyl ethyl ether can be prepared by which (a) acetic acid (b) acetaldehyde
combination of components ? (c) acetyl chloride (d) acetone
(a) C6H5CH2Br + C2H5ONa
(b) C6H5CH2ONa + C2H5Br 71. Identify the respective final products in the
(c) both (a) and (b) following two reactions.
(d) C6H5CH2OH + C2H5OH Br2 / PCl 3 Br2
(i) CH3CH2COOH [A] [B]
64. Which is not true about acetophenone ?
H2O
(a) It reacts with 2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine [C]
to form 2, 4-dinitrophenylhydrazone Cl 2 / PBr3 Cl 2
(b) It reacts with Tollen’s reagent to form silver (ii) CH3CH2COOH [D] [E]
mirror H2O
(c) It reacts with I2/NaOH to form iodoform [F]
(d) On oxidation with alkaline KMnO4 followed (a) CH3CHOHCOOH and CH3CHOHCOOH
by hydrolysis it gives benzoic acid (b) CH3CHOHCOCl and CH3CHOHCOBr
65. Which of the following does not turn Schiff’s
(c) CH3CHBrCOOH and CH3CHClCOOH
reagent to pink ?
(a) Formaldehyde (b) Benzaldehyde (d) CH3CHClCOOH and CH3CHBrCOOH.
(c) Acetone (d) Acetaldehyde
O
66. When acetic acid is heated with P 2 O5 the
compound formed will be :
(a) (CH3CO)2O (b) CH3COCH3 72. Product .
(c) CH3CHO (d) CH4
67. Acetone on distillation with conc. H2SO4 forms :
Here the product is
(a) phorone (b) acrolein
(c) mesitylene (d) mesityl oxide O O
68. The major product in the reaction of -bromo
cyclohexanone with potassium ethoxide is
(a) O (b) O
O
(a) (b)
OC2H2 COOH COOH
CO2C2H5 (c) (d)
(c) (d) O COOH
Mock Test 6 MT-63
73. What is the main product when 77. Identify (C) and (D) in the following series of
reactions
HOOC COOH is heated ?
excess of AgOH
COOH CH3 NH 2 [A] [B]
CH 3I
COOH heat
(a) [C] [D]
COOH
(a) (CH3)3COH, CH3NH2
(b) (CH3)2C = CH2, CH3NH2
(b) O
(c) (CH3)3N, CH3OH
(d) (CH3)2C=CH2, CH3OH
b2 ac c2 ab 3 26
(a) 2 (b) 2
(c) (d) 26
q pr r pq 7
152
a2 bc 90. The value of cot cosec tan 1 is
(c) (d) None of these 3 3
p2 qr
5 6 3 4
(a) (b) (c) (d)
84. Let function f :R R be defined by 17 17 17 17
91. If cos–1x + cos–1y + cos–1z = 3 then xy + yz + zx is
f (x) = 2x + sin x for x R , then f is
equal to :
(a) one-one and onto
(a) 1 (b) 0
(b) one-one but NOT onto
(c) onto but NOT one-one (c) –3 (d) 3
(d) neither one-one nor onto 92. Let f : R R be a function such that
85. Eighteen guests are to be seated, half on each
side of a long table. Four particular guests x y f ( x) f ( y)
f , f (0) 0 and
desire to sit on one particular side and three 3 3
others on the other side of the table. The
f ' (0) 3 . Then
number of ways in which the seating
arrangement can be done equals (a) f(x) is a quadratic function
(a) 11C4 (9!)2 (b) 11C6 (9!)2 (b) f(x) is continuous but not differentiable
6 5 (c) f(x) is differentiable in R
(c) P0 × P0 (d) None of these
(d) f(x) is bounded in R
Mock Test 6 MT-65
x 2 x4 x6 xn e 2x x
3 2
x
(b) cos x 1 ..... ..... (b)
2! 4! 6! n! 2
where n is even
1 2x 3 3 2 3x 3
x x3 x5 (c) e x x
(c) cos x 1 ..... 2 2 2 4
1! 3! 5!
2 2
x 2n 1 (d) e 2x x 4 x3 x
( 1)2n 1
..... 3
(2n 1)!
113. The solution of differential equation
x x 2 x3 xn
(d) cos x 1 ..... dy
1! 2! 3! n! = cos (x + y) is –
108. A particle is moving along a straight line path dx
according to the relation x y
s2 = at2 + 2bt + c (a) tan x C
s represents the distance travelled in t seconds 2
and a, b, c are constants. Then the acceleration
of the particle varies as x y
(b) cosec x C
(a) s – 3 (b) s 3/2 2
(c) s –2/3 (d) s 2
x y
2 (c) cot x C
2 2 2
109. With the usual notation x x dx is
1 (d) None of these
equal to-
dy
(a) 4 + 2 – 3 (b) 4 – 2 + 3 114. The solution of x 3 4 x 2 tan y e x sec y
dx
(c) 4 – 2 – 3 (d) None of these satisfying y (1) = 0 is :
110. Let and be the distinct roots of
ax2 + bx = c = 0, then (a) tan y (x 2) e x log x
a2
(a) ( )2 (b) 0 x
(d) sin y e (x 1) x
3
2
115. G is a set of all rational numbers except –1 and *
a2 1 is defined by a* b = a + b + ab for all a, b G .
(c) ( )2 (d) ( )2
2 2
In the group (G, *) the solution of
111. If f (x) = (x + 1)cot x be continuous at x = 0 then
f (0) is equal to: 2 1 * x *3 1
5 is
(a) 0 (b) – e
(a) 71 (b) 68
(c) e (d) None
(c) 63/5 (d) 72/5
Mock Test 6 MT-67
116. Which of the following is a contradiction? conservation efforts, soil erosion has accelerated due
(a) (p q) ~ (p q) to new demands placed on the land by heavy crop
production. In the years ahead, soil erosion and the
(b) p ( p q) pollution problems it causes are likely to replace
(c) (p q) p petroleum scarcity as the nation's most critical natural
(d) None of these resource problem.
117. If P = n(n 2 – 12) (n2 – 22) (n2 – 32) ...... (n2 – r2),
121. As we understand from the reading, today, soil
n > r, n N then P is necessarily divisible by erosion in America-
(a) (2r + 2) ! (b) (2r + 4) !
(a) causes humans to place new demands on
(c) (2r + 1) ! (d) None of these
the land
118. For a biased dice, the probability for the different
(b) is worse than it was in the nineteenth
faces to turn up are
century
Face 1 2 3 4 5 6 (c) happens so slowly that it is hardly noticed
P 0.10 0.32 0.21 0.15 0.05 0.17 (d) is the most critical problem that the nation
faces
The dice is tossed and it is told that either the 122. The author points out in the passage that erosion
face 1 or face 2 has shown up, then the probability in America-
that it is face 1, is (a) has damaged 282 million acres ever since
16 1 5 5 settlers first put the prairies and grasslands
(a) (b) (c) (d) under the plow
21 10 16 21
(b) has been so severe that it has forced people
119. The domain of the function
to abandon their settlements
3 (c) occurs only in areas with no vegetation
f(x) = + log10 (x3 – x), is
4 – x2 (d) can become a more serious problem in the
(a) (– 1, 0) (1, 2) future
(b) (1, 2) (2, ) 123. It is pointed out in the reading that in America-
(c) (– 1, 0) (1, 2) (2, ) (b) petroleum is causing heavy soil erosion and
(d) (1, 2) pollution problems
120. If E and F are the complementary events of (b) heavy crop production is necessary to meet
events E and F respectively and if 0 < P(F) < 1, the demands and to prevent a disaster
then (c) soil erosion has been hastened due to the
overuse of farming lands
(a) P(E \ F) + P( E \ F) = 1 (d) water is undoubtedly the largest cause of
erosion
(b) P(E \ F) + P(E \ F ) = 1
124. Realists in India can't object to a good neighborly
(c) P( E \ F) + P(E \ F ) = 1 relationship between Nepal and China
_________in Beijing know the dangers of
1 moving too far and too fast and __________an
(d) P(E \ F ) + P( E \ F ) =
2 Indian reaction.
PART - IV : ENGLISH (a) Pragmatists, provoking
(b) escapist, delighting
Direction (Qs. 121 -123) : Read the passage carefully
and answer the questions given below (c) evader, make happy
(d) idealist, rude
Erosion of America's farmland by wind and water has 125. Choose the best pronunciation of the word,
been a problem since settlers first put the prairies and Bowl, from the following options.
grasslands under the plow in the nineteenth century.
(a) bohl (b) ba-owl
By the 1930s, more than 282 million acres of farmland
were damaged by erosion. After 40 years of (c) bo-ul (d) ba-oul
EBD_7443
MOCK
VITEEE Mock Test Paper
7
Max. Marks : 125 Time : 2½ hrs
PART - I : PHYSICS 5. An electric dipole consists of two opposite
charges each 0.05 C separated by 30 mm. The
1. The force ‘F’ acting on a particle of mass ‘m’ is dipole is placed in an uniform external electric
field of 106 NC–l. The maximum torque exerted by
indicated by the force-time graph shown below.
the field on the dipole is
The change in momentum of the particle over (a) 6 × l0–3 N-m (b) 3 × 10–3 N- m
the time interval from zero to 8 s is : (c) 15 × l0–3 N- m (d) 1.5 × l0–3 N- m
6. A particle A has a charge q and particle B has
6 charge + 4q with each of them having the mass
3 m. When they are allowed to fall from rest through
same potential difference, the ratio of their speeds
0 VA : VB will be :
F(N)
2 4 6 8 (a) 4 : 1 (b) 1 : 4
–3
(c) 1 : 2 (d) 2 : 1
t(s) 7. The inward and outward electric flux from a
closed surface are respectively 8 × 103 and
4 × 103 units. Then the net charge inside the
(a) 24 Ns (b) 20 Ns
closed surface is :
(c) 12 Ns (d) 6 Ns (a) – 4 × 103 coulomb
2. An air filled parallel plate condenser has a (b) 4 × 103 coulomb
capacity of 2 pF. The separation of the plates is
4 103
doubled and the interspace between the plates (c) coulomb
is filled with wax. If the capacity is increased to 0
6pF, the dielectric constant of wax is : (d) – 4 × 103 0 coulomb
(a) 2 (b) 3 8. The adjacent graph shows the extension ( l) of
(c) 4 (d) 6 a wire of length 1m suspended from the top of a
3. Four metal conductors having different shapes : roof at one end with a load W connected to the
1. a sphere other end. if the corss-sectional area of the wire
2. cylinder is 10–6m2, calculate the Young’s modulus of the
3. pear material of the wire
4. lightning conductor
are mounted on insulating stands and charged.
The one which is best suited to retain the charges
for a longer time is : 4
(l ×10 )m
(a) 1 (b) 2 3
–4
(c) 3 (d) 4 2
1
4. After terminal velocity is reached, the
acceleration of a body falling through a fluid is
(a) equal to g (b) zero 20 40 60 80 W(N)
(c) less than g (d) greater than g
Mock Test 7 MT-69
(a) 2 × 1011 N/m2 (b) 2 × 10–11 N/m2 two turns and carries the same current, the new
(c) 2 × 10 N/m–12 2 (d) 2 × 10–13 N/m2 value of magnetic induction at the centre is :
9. In a potentiometer experiment the balancing with (a) 3 B (b) 5 B
a cell is at length 240 cm. On shunting the cell (c) 4 B (d) 2 B
with a resistance of 2 , the balancing length
14. How many calories of heat will be produced
becomes 120 cm. The internal resistance of the
cell is approximately in a 210 watt electric bulb in
(a) 0.5 (b) 1 5 minutes?
(c) 2 (d) 4 (a) 80000 cal (b) 63000 cal
10. A material 'B' has twice the specific resistance of (c) 1050 cal (d) 15000 cal
'A'. A circular wire made of 'B' has twice the 15. As the temperature of a liquid is raised, the
diameter of a wire made of 'A'. then for the two coefficient of viscosity
wires to have the same resistance, the ratio lB/lA (a) decreases (b) increases
of their respective lengths must be
(c) remains the same
1 (d) may increase or decrease depending on the
(a) 1 (b)
2 nature of liquid
1 16. On a linear temperature scale Y, water freezes at –
(c) (d) 2 160° Y and boils at – 50° Y. On this Y scale, a
4
temperature of 340 K would be read as : (water
11. A current of 6 A enters one corner P of an
freezes at 273 K and boils at 373 K)
equilateral triangle PQR having 3 wires of
resistances 2 each and leaves by the comer R. (a) – 73.7° Y (b) – 233.7° Y
Then the current I1 and I2 are (c) – 86.3° Y (d) – 106.3° Y
6A 17. The upper half of an inclined plane of inclination
is perfectly smooth while lower half is rough. A
block starting from rest at the top of the plane
P will again come to rest at the bottom, if the coef-
I1 I2
ficient of friction between the block and lower
2 2 half of the plane is given by
2
Q R (a) = (b) = 2 tan
2 tan
(a) 2 A, 4 A (b) 4A, 2A
1
(c) 1 A, 2A (d) 2A, 3A (c) = tan (d) =
tan
12. The electron drift speed is small and the
charge of the electron is also small but still, we 18. The tank circuit used in a radio transmitter should
obtain large current in a conductor. This is due have
to the (a) high effective Q
(a) conducting property of the conductor (b) low effective Q
(b) resistance of the conductor is small (c) loosely coupled load
(c) electron number density of the conductor (d) Both (a) and (c)
is small 19. A short-circuited coil is placed in a time-varying
(d) electron number density of the conductor magnetic field. Electrical power is dissipated due
is enormous to the current induced in the coil. If the number
13. A wire in the form of a circular loop of one turn of turns were to be quadrupled and the wire
carrying a current produces a magnetic field B at radius halved, the electrical power dissipated
the centre. If the same wire is looped into a coil of would be
EBD_7443
MT-70 Target VITEEE
(a) halved (b) the same × × × × ×
× × × × ×
(c) doubled (d) quadrupled × × I × ×
I
20. A coil of wire having inductance and resistance
has a conducting ring placed coaxially within it.
I D
Thecoil is connected to abattery at timet = 0, so
that a time-dependent current l1(t) starts flowing (1) (2)
through the coil. If I2(t) is the current induced in × ×
× × ×
the ring, and B(t) is the magnetic field at the axis × ×
× × ×
of the coil due to I1(t), then as a function of time D × ×
I × ×
(t > 0), the product I2(t) B(t) × × × ×
× ×
× × ×
(a) increases with time I × D × ×
×
(b) decreases with time × ×
× × ×
(3) (4)
(c) does not vary with time (a) i1 > i2 > i3 > i4 (b) i1 = > i2 > i3 > i4
(d) passes through a maximum (c) i1 > i2 > i3 = i4 (d) i1 = i2 > i3 = i4
21. In a LCR circuit capacitance is changed from C 25. A conducting circular loop is placed in a uniform
to 2 C. For the resonant frequency to remain magnetic field of 0.02 tesla with its plane
unchanged, the inductance should be changed perpendicular to the magnetic field. If the radius
from L to of the loop starts striking at a constant rate of 1
mm/s. Then the emf induced in the loop at the
(a) L/2 (b) 2 L instant when the radius is 4 cm will be:
(c) 4 L (d) L/4 (a) 8 V (b) 5.0 V
22. One conducting U tube can slide inside another (c) 2.0 V (d) 2.5 V
as shown in figure, maintaining electrical contacts 26. Two inductors 0.4 H and 0.6 H are connected in
between the tubes. The magnetic field B is parallel. If this combination is connected in series
perpendicular to the plane of the figure . If each with an inductor of inductance 0.76 H. The
tube moves towards the other at a constant equivalent inductance of the circuit will be:
speed v, then the emf induced in the circuit in (a) 0.1 H (b) 0.2 H
(c) 1 H (d) 2 H
terms of B, l and v where l is the width of each
27. Which one of the following is not true ?
tube, will be
(a) Ampere's law is : B.d µ0iin
X A X X X
BX
d
X v (b) Faraday's law is : C 0
X v X dt
X X X
X
X µ0 i r
X X C (c) Biot-Sawart law is dB
4
.
3
r
(a) – Blv (b) Blv
(d) Gauss's law is 0 E .d A qin
(c) 2 Blv (d) zero
23. If the number of turns in a coil becomes doubled 28. Two slits separated by a distance of 1 mm are
then its self inductances will be: illuminated with red light of wavelength
6.5 × 10–7 m. The interference fringes are
(a) unchanged (b) four times observed on a screen placed 1 m from the silts.
(c) halved (d) doubled The distance of the third dark fringe from the
24. Four identical circular conducting loops are central fringe will be equal to :
placed in uniform magnetic fields that are either (a) 0.65 mm (b) 1.30 mm
increasing (I) or decreasing (D) in magnitude at (c) 1.62 mm (d) 1.95 mm
identical rates. Arrange the magnitude of the
currents induced (i) in the loops.
Mock Test 7 MT-71
29. In an interference pattern produced by the If the average power radiated by the star is 10 16
identical coherent sources of monochromatic watt, the deuteron supply of the star is exhausted
light, the intensity at the site of central maxima is in the time of the order of the mass of the nuclei
follows:
I. The intensity at the same spot when either of
M(1H2) = 2.014 amu, M(p) = 1.007 amu,
the two slits is closed is I0 then we must have
M(n) = 1.008 amu, M(He4) = 4.001 amu
(a) I and I0 are not related (a) 1016 sec (b) 1012 sec
(b) I = 4I0 (c) 106 sec (d) 108 sec
(c) I = I0 35. Radiation from a hydrogen discharge tube is
(d) I = 2I0 incident on the cathode of a photocell. The work
30. Energy E and frequency v of a photon is correctly function of the cathode surface is 3.2 eV. To
represented by: reduce the photocurrent to zero, the voltage (in
E E volts) of the anode relative to the cathode must
be made :
(a) – 3.2 (b) + 3.2
(a) (c) – 10.4 (d) – 13.6
(b)
36. The circuit has two oppositively connected ideal
diodes in parallel. What is the current flowing in
the circuit?
E E
4
D1 D2
(c) (d)
12V
3 2
31. A freshly prepared radioactive source of half life
2 hours emits radiation of intensity of which is
64 times the permissible safe level. The minimum (a) 1.71 A (b) 2.00 A
time after which is would be possible to work
(c) 2.31 A (d) 1.33 A
safely with this source is:
(a) 64 hrs (b) 24 hrs 37. If the lattice constant of this semiconductor is
(c) 6 hrs (d) 12 hrs decreased, then which of the following is correct?
32. An -particle of 10 MeV collides head on with conduction
Ec
band width
copper nucleus (Z = 29) and is deflected back.
What is the maximum limit of radius of copper band gap Eg
nucleus? valence
(a) 10.4 × 10–15 m (b) 6.4 × 10–15 m band width Ev
(c) 4.2 × 10–15 m (d) 8.4 × 10–15 m (a) All Ec, Eg, Ev increase
33. Ultra violet light of wavelength 300 nm and (b) Ec and Ev increase, but Eg decreases
intensity 1.0 W/m2 falls on the surface of a
(c) Ec and Ev decrease, but Eg increases
photoelectric material. If one percent of incident
photons produce photoelectrons, then the (d) All Ec, Eg, Ev decrease
number of photoelectron emitted from an area of 38. The logic circuit shown below has the input
1.0 cm2 of the surface is nearly: waveforms ‘A’ and ‘B’ as shown. Pick out the
(a) 2.13 × 1011/sec (b) 1.52 × 1012/sec correct output waveform.
12
(c) 3.02 × 10 /sec (d) None of these
34. A star initially has 1040 deuterons. It produces
A
energy via the process
2 2 3 Y
1H + 1H 1H + p B
2 3 4
1H + 1H 2He + n
EBD_7443
MT-72 Target VITEEE
47. The appearance of colour in solid alkali metal 53. The order of a reaction, with respect to one of
halides is generally due to the reacting component Y, is zero. It implies that:
(a) Schottky defect (a) the reaction is going on at a constant rate
(b) Frenkel defect (b) the rate of reaction does not vary with
(c) Interstitial positions temperature
(d) F-centres (c) the reaction rate is independent of the
48. The second order Bragg’s diffraction of X-rays concentration of Y
of wavelength 100 pm from a set of parallel lattice (d) the rate of formation of the activated
planes in a metal occurs at a grazing angle of complex is zero
30º. The spacing between the successive 54. The specific rate constant of a first order depends
scattering planes in the cystal is on the :
(a) 50 pm (b) 100 pm (a) concentration of the product
(c) 150 pm (d) 200 pm (b) concentration of the reactant
49. The decomposition of limestone (c) temperature
CaCO3 (s) CaO(s) + CO 2 (g) (d) all of these
55. The resistance of 1 N solution of acetic acid is
is non-spontaneous at 298 K. The H and S 250 ohm, when measured in a cell of cell constant
value for the reaction are 176.0 kJ and 160 JK–1 1.15 cm –1 . The equivalent conductance
respectively. At what temperature the (in ohm–1 cm2 equiv–1) of 1 N acetic acid will be
decomposition becomes spontaneous? (a) 4.6 (b) 9.2
(a) At 1000 K (c) 18.4 (d) 0.023
(b) below 500 C 56. Zn amalgam is prepared by electrolysis of
(c) Between 500 C and 600 C aqueous ZnCl2 using Hg cathode (9gm). How
much current is to be passed through ZnCl2
(d) above 827 C solution for 1000 seconds to prepare a Zn
50. Calculate the entropy change for Amalgam with 25% Zn by wt. (Zn = 65.4)
CH4(g) + H2O(g) 3H2(g) + CO(g), using (a) 5.6 amp (b) 7.2 amp
(c) 8.85 amp (d) 11.2 amp
the following data :
57. Rusting of iron is prevented by zinc coating over
Substance CH4(g) H2O(g) H2(g) CO(g)
its surface. This process is called :
S°/JK–1 186.2 188.7 130.6 197.6
(a) Electrolysis
mole–1
(b) Galvanization
The entropy change is:
(a) – 46 JK–1 mole–1 (c) Photoelectrolysis
(b) + 46 JK–1 mole–1 (d) Cathodic protection
(c) – 214.5 JK–1 mole–1 58. Ethanol and dimethyl ether form a pair of
(d) + 214.5 JK–1 mole–1 functional isomers. The boiling point of ethanol
51. According to the third law of thermodynamics is higher than that of dimethyl ether, due to the
which one of the following quantities for a presence of
perfectly crystalline solid is zero at absolute (a) H-bonding in ethanol
zero? (b) H-bonding in dimethyl ether
(a) Free energy (b) Entropy (c) CH3 group in ethanol
(c) Enthalpy (d) Internal energy (d) CH3 group in dimethyl ether
52. Which reaction is not affected by change in 59. Reaction of CH — CH with RMgX leads to
2 2
pressure?
O
(a) H 2 (g) + I 2 (g) 2HI(g) formation of
(b) N 2 (g) + 3H 2 (g) 2NH3 (g) (a) RCHOHR (b) RCHOHCH3
R
(c) 2C(s) + O 2 (g) 2CO(g)
(c) RCH2CH2OH (d) CHCH2OH
(d) SO 2 (g) + 2O 2 (g) 2SO3 (g) R
EBD_7443
MT-74 Target VITEEE
60. Acetylene, on reacting with formaldehyde under 67. Which of the following is formed, when calcium
high pressure, gives acetate is heated ?
(a) propanol (b) propyl alcohol (a) CH3CHO (b) CH3COCH3
(c) allyl aldehyde (d) butyndiol. (c) CH3CH2OH (d) CH3CHO
61. In the following reaction : 68. The reaction of an organic compound with
Conc. H 2SO 4
ammonia followed by nitration of the product
C2H5OH Z. gives a powerful explosive, called RDX. The
443 K
organic compound is:
Identify Z : (a) phenol (b) toluene
(a) CH2 = CH2 (c) glycerine (d) formaldehyde
(b) CH3 – CH2 – O – CH2 69. Which carbonyl compound will be purified with
| sodium bisulphite-
CH3
(c) CH3 – CH2 – C (a) 2-Pentanone (b) 3-Hexanone
| (c) 4-Heptanone (d) All of these
SO4 70. Which of the following will not give HVZ
(d) (CH3CH2)2 – SO4
reaction?
62. The most suitable reagent for the conversion of
(a) Trichloroethanoic acid
RCH2OH RCHO is :
(a) KMnO4 (b) 2-methyl butanoic acid
(b) K2Cr2O7 (c) Ethanoic acid
(c) CrO3 (d) Propanoic acid
(d) PCC (pyridine chloro chromate) 71. When propionic acid is treated with aqueous
63. Arrange the following in decreasing order of NaHCO3, CO2 is liberated. The C of CO2 comes
solubility in water from
(a) NaHCO3 (b) – CH3 group
(c) – COOH group (d) – CH2 group
O O O 72. Both propanoic acid, CH3CH2COOH as well as
I II III 2-chloropropanoic acid give precipitate with aq.
(a) I > III > II AgNO3. How you distinguish the precepitates
(b) III > II > I in the two ?
(c) II > III > I (a) By aq. NH4OH
(d) All are equally soluble (b) By aq. HNO3
64. Which of the following reaction can produce (c) By either of the two
(d) By none of the two.
R – CO – Ar ?
(a) AlCl3 O
ArCOCl H Ar
(b) RCOCl ArMgX 73. CH3CH2CH2COOH + NCl
HCl
Product is
heat
(c) HOOCCH CHCOOH
(A) , product (A) is :
CH 2 CHCOOH CO2
CH2
COOH (a) (b) RCONH2
O O
(d) heat
H /H2 O NaOH
76.
(i ) CHN 2COOC 2 H 5
[Y] (Y) CaO, (Z)
(ii ) Heat with Cu powder (a) A cyanide (b) A carboxylic acid
(c) An amine (d) An arene
oxidation
[Z] 80. Consider the following ions
Compound Z should be +
(I) Me2N N N
O +
(a) (II) O 2N N N
COOH
+
HOOC (III) H3C O N N
(b) COOH
+
HOOC (IV) H3C N N
HOOC The reactivities of these ions in azo-coupling
(c) COOH reactions (under similar conditions) will be such
HOOC that
(a) (I) < (IV) < (II) < (III)
COOH (b) (I) < (III) < (IV) < (II)
(d) (c) (III) < (I) < (II) < (IV)
COOH (d) (III) < (I) < (IV) < (II)
EBD_7443
MT-76 Target VITEEE
PART - III : MATHEMATICS 88. a , b and c are perpendicular to b c , c a
1 2 5
an d a b respectively an d if a b 6,
81. The rank of the matrix 2 4 a 4 is
1 2 a 1 b c 8 and c a 10 , then a b c is
(a) 1 if a = 6 (b) 2 if a = 1 equal to
(c) 3 if a = 2 (d) none of these
(a) 5 2 (b) 50
x x , if 0 x 2
82. The function f x is (c) 10 2 (d) 10
x 1 x, if 2 x 3
89. The acute angle that the vector 2î 2ˆj k̂
(a) differentiable at x = 2
(b) not differentiable at x = 2 makes with the plane contained by the two
(c) continuous at x = 2 vectors 2î 3ˆj k̂ and î ĵ 2k̂ is given by
(d) None of these
83. Suppose p, q, r 0 and system of equation 1 1
1 1
(p + a)x + by + cz = 0, (a) cos (b) sin
3 5
ax (q b) y cz 0 ,
(c) 1 (d) 1
ax by (r c)z 0 has a non-trivial solution, tan 2 cot ( 2)
a b c x 1 y 1 z 3
then value of p q 90. Given the line L : and the
r is 3 2 1
(a) –1 (b) 0 (c) 1 (d) 2 plane : x 2y z . Of the following
1 cos{2( x 2)} assertions, the only one that is always true is
84. lim is equal to (a) L is to (b) L lies in
x 2 x 2
(c) L is paralel to (d) None of these
(a) equals (b) equals – 91. If f (x) = sin x + cos x, g (x) = x2 – 1, then g (f (x))
2 2
is invertible in the domain
1
(c) equals (d) does not exist 0,
2 (a) (b) ,
2 4 4
a a
85. If x, a R, where x , then
3 3 (c) , (d) [0, ]
2 2
3a 2 x – x 3 92. Shamli wants to invest `50,000 in saving
tan – 1 is equal to
a 3 – 3ax 2 certificates and PPE. She wants to invest atleast
`15,000 in saving certificates and at least
x x `20,000 in PPF. The rate of interest on saving
(a) 3 tan – 1 (b) –3 tan – 1 certificates is 8% p.a. and that on PPF is 9% p.a.
a a
Formulation of the above problem as LPP to
a determine maximum yearly income, is
(c) 3 tan – 1 (d) None of these (a) Maximize Z = 0.08x + 0.09y
x
Subject to, x + y 50,000, x 15000, y 20,000
x 5 (b) Maximize Z = 0.08x + 0.09y
86. If sin 1 cosec 1 , then the value Subject to, x + y 50,000, x 15000,
5 4 2
of x is y 20,000
(a) 4 (b) 5 (c) 1 (d) 3 (c) Maximize Z = 0.08x + 0.09y
87. The sum of the series Subject to, x + y 50,000, x 15000,
y 20,000
log 4 2 – log 8 2 + log16 2 + ..................to is (d) Maximize Z = 0.08x + 0.09y
(a) 1 – log e 2 (b) 1 + log e 2 Subject to, x + y 50,000, x 15000,
y 20,000
(c) log e 2 – 1 (d) log 2 e
Mock Test 7 MT-77
93. If and are the roots of x2 – x + 1 = 0, then the the axis of x is always a constant c. The locus of
equation whose roots are 100 and 100 are P is
(a) x2 – x + 1 = 0 (b) x2 + x – 1 = 0 (a) a straight line having equal intercepts c on
2
(c) x – x – 1 = 0 (d) x2 + x + 1 = 0 the axes
94. If ( 1) is a cube root of unity, then
c
2 (b) a circle having its centre at 0, and
1 1 1 2
2
1 1 1
2 c
1 1 1
passing through c 2 ,
2
(a) 0 (b) 1
(c) – 4 (d) 2 c
95. If vector equation of the line (c) a parabola with its vertex at 0, and
2
x 2 2y 5
z 1, is c
2 3 passing through c 2 ,
2
5ˆ ˆ 3ˆ
r 2iˆ j k 2iˆ j pkˆ then p is (d) None of these
2 2
101. The projections of a line segment on the
equal to
coordinate axes are 12, 4, 3. The direction cosine
(a) 0 (b) 1 (c) 2 (d) 3
of the line are:
96. If A = sin8 + cos14 , then for all values of :
(a) A 1 (b) 0 < A 1 12 4 3 12 4 3
(a) - ,- , (b) ,- ,
(c) 1< 2A 3 (d) none of these 13 13 13 13 13 13
97. A circular wire of radius 7 cm is cut and bent
again into an arc of a circle of radius 12 cm. 12 4 3
(c) , , (d) None of these
The angle subtended by the arc at the centre 13 13 13
is 102. A parabola is drawn with its vertex at (0, – 3), the
(a) 50° (b) 210° (c) 100° (d) 60° axis of symmetry along the conjugate axis of the
98. The locus of the mid points of chords of the
x 2 y2
2 hyperbola 1 and passing through
parabola y 4ax, which pass through a fixed 49 9
point (h, k), is given by the two foci of the hyperbola. The co-ordinates
of the focus of the parabola are
(a) y 2 2ax ky 2ah 0
11 11
(a) 0, (b) 0,
(b) y 2 2ax ky 2ah 0 6 6
1 x2 5 1
(c) f ( x) log (a) (b)
1 x 2 3 3
(d) f(x) = k, k is a constant 2 4
105. Let p : I am brave, (c) (d)
3 3
q : I will climb the Mount Everest.
111. The area between the curve y = x (x –1) (x – 2)
The symbolic form of a statement,
'I am neither brave nor I will climb the mount and x-axis is
Everest' is (a) 1/4 (b) 1/2
(a) p q (b) ~ (p q) (c) 1 (d) 0
(c) ~ p ~ q (d) ~ p q /6
106. The expansion of log cosh x in powers of x by cos7 3x dx
112. Evaluate :
Maclaurin’s theorem is 0
x x3 x5 x6 15 16
(a) ...... (a) (b)
1 5 25 125 150 105
x2 x4 x6 105 16
(b) ........... (c) (d)
2 12 45 150 150
113. The differential equations of all conics whose
x2 x4 x6 axes coincide with the co-ordinate axis is
(c) ...........
2 12 45 d2 y dy
2
dy
(a) xy 2
x y 0
dx dx dx
x x3 x 5 x 6
(d) ........... 2
1 5 25 125 d2 y dy dy
(b) xy 2
x x 0
107. The current flowing through a tangent dx dx dx
galvanomenter is obtained from the relation i = k 2
tan where is the deflection and k is a constant. d2 y dy dy
(c) xy 2
x y 0
The relative error in the value of i due to error in dx dx dx
the observation of is 2
d2 y dy dy
d 2d (d) xy 2
x y 0
(a) (b) dx dx dx
sin sin 114. The degree and order of the differential equation
d 2d of the family of all parabolas whose axis is X - axis,
(c) (d) are respectively.
sin 2 sin 2
(a) 2, 3 (b) 2, 1
108. If the letters of the word SACHIN are arranged
in all possible ways and these words are written (c) 1, 2 (d) 3, 2
out as in dictionary, then the word SACHIN 115. In the group of non-zero rational numbers under
appears at serial number the binary operation * given by a* b = ab/5 the
(a) 601 (b) 600 identity element and ht inverse of 8 are
respectively.
(c) 603 (d) 602
(a) 5 and 5/8 (b) 5 and 25/8
/2
sin x (c) 5 and 8/25 (d) none of these
109. Evaluate dx
0 sin x cos x
Mock Test 7 MT-79
U(x)
two parts are 2pî and pĵ . The momentum of
(c) X
the third part
(a) will have a magnitude p 3
8. If vs, vx and vm are the speed of soft gamma of photoelectrons would be about
rays, X-rays and microwaves respectively in (a) 1.49 eV (b) 2.2 eV
vacuum, then (c) 3.0 eV (d) 5.0 eV
(a) vs > vx > vm (b) vs < vx < vm 15. The load versus elongation graph for four wires
(c) vs > vx < vm (d) vs = vx = vm has been shown in the figure. The thinest wire
9. The resistance of a wire is R. If the length of the is Load a
b
wire is doubled by stretching, then the new (a) a c
resistance will be
(b) b
(a) 2R (b) 4R d
(c) R (d) R/4 (c) c
10. Which of the following curves correctly Elongation
(d) d
represents the variation of capacitive reactance
16. A charged particle shows an acceleration of
(Xc) with frequency n?
4.2 × 1010 ms–2 under an electric field at low speed.
The acceleration of the particle under the same
XC XC field when its speed becomes 2.88 × 108 ms–1 will
(a) (b) be
(a) 2.88 × 108 ms–2 (b) 1.176 × 1010 ms–2
n n (c) 4.2 × 1010 ms–2 (d) None of these
17. The real time variation of input signals A and B
are as shown below. If the inputs are fed into
XC XC
(c) (d) NAND gate, then select the output signal from
the following.
n n
(a) 250 J (b) 200 J 35. A nucleus ruptures into two nuclear parts which
(c) 150 J (d) 10 J have their velocity ratio equal to 2 : 1. What
30. In cyclotron the resonance condition is will be the ratio of their nuclear radius ?
(a) the frequency of revolution of charged (a) 21/3 : 1 (b) 1 : 21/3
1/2
(c) 3 : 1 (d) 1 : 31/2
particle is equal to the frequency of A.C.
voltage sources 36. An electron with velocity V along the axis
approaches a circular current carrying loop as
(b) the frequency of revolution of charged
shown in the figure. The magnitude of magnetic
particle is equal to the frequency of applied
i
magnetic field
(c) the frequency of revolution of charged V
–e
particle is equal to the frequency of rotation R
x
of earth
(d) the frequency of revolution of charged
force on electron at this instant is:
part icle, frequency of A.C. source an d
frequency of magnetic field are equal 0 eviR 2 x eviR 2 x
31. The length of a potentiometer wire is . A cell of (a) 2 (x 2 (b) 0
R 2 )3 / 2 (x 2 R 2 )3 / 2
emf E is balanced at a length /3 from the
positive end of the wire. If the length of the wire eviR 2 x
0
is increased by /2. At what distance will be the (c) (d) zero
4 (x 2 R 2 )3 / 2
same cell give a balance point?
(a) 2 /3 (b) /2 37. In a photoelectric experiment anode potential
(c) /6 (d) 4 /3 is plotted against plate current
32. Two drops of the same radius are falling through
air with a steady velocity of 5 cm per sec. If the I
two drops coalesce, the terminal velocity would
be C B
(a) 10 cm per sec A
(b) 2.5 cm per sec
(c) 5 × (4)1/3 cm per sec V
(b) 8 carbon atoms, 4 atoms constitute ccp and 57. In some fission process, the mass number of
4 atoms occupy all the octahedral voids fission fragments are 144 and 90 respectively.
(c) 8 carbon atoms, 4 atoms form fcc lattice If the K.E. of heavy fragment is 70 MeV, the
and 4 atoms occupy half of the tetrahedral total fission energy is
voids alternately (a) 200 MeV (b) 182 MeV
(c) 190 MeV (d) 170 MeV
(d) 12 carbon atoms, 4 atoms form fcc lattice
58. At constant pressure, addition of helium to the
and 8 atoms occupy all the tetrahedral
reaction system :
holes.
N 2 ( g ) 3H 2 ( g ) 2 NH 3 ( g )
OH
(a) favours the formation of ammonia
NaOH CH 2=CHCH 2Cl (b) reduces the formation of ammonia
53. [X] [Y] . (c) reduces the dissociation of ammonia
(d) does not affect the position of equilibrium
Here [Y] is a 59. Fehling solution can be used for distinguishing
(a) single compound between
(b) mixture of two compounds (a) CH3CHO and C6H5CHO
(c) mixture of three compounds (b) CH3CHO and CH3COCH2OH
(d) no reaction is possible (c) both (a) & (b)
54. In the reaction A + B Products, initial (d) none
concentration of both A and B equal to 0.1 60. Which one does not belong to the same
M,each is reduced to 1.0 × 10–2 M. The half-life compound ?
is increased to ten fold. The rate of the reaction (a) Paraformaldehyde
is : (b) Paraldehyde
(a) proportional to first power of concentration (c) Trioxane
(b) proportional to second power of (d) Formalin
concentration 61. An iron piece treated with acidified KMnO4
(c) independent of concentration (a) displaces copper from a dilute H2SO4
(d) insufficient information (b) liberates hydrogen from dilute H2SO4
55. Aomic size of Zr and Hf is almost the same (c) displaces copper from CuSO4 solution but
because of does not liberate H2 from dilute H2SO4
(a) both have (n – 1)d2ns2 configurations (d) neither displaces copper from CuSO4
(b) both have the same number of d-electrons solution nor liberates H2 from dilute
in penultimate energy level H2SO4 .
(c) lanthanide contraction 62. A B, k1 1011 e 3000 / T
(d) large screening effect of 4f-electrons over
the valence shell. X Y , k2 1010 e 2000 / T
56. Ethanol can be prepared more easily by which If the two reactions have all the reactants at unit
reaction? molarity each, at what temperature their initial
(i) rates will be equal?
CH 3 CH 2 Br H 2 O CH 3 CH 2 OH
(a) 2000 K (b) 3000 K
(ii) CH3CH 2 Br Ag2 O (in boiling water) (c) 1000 K (d) 1000/2.303 K
63. Molar conductances of BaCl2, H2SO4 and HCl
CH 3CH 2 OH at infinite dilutions are x1, x2 and x3 respectively.
(a) by (i) reaction Equivalent conductance of BaSO4 at infinite
(b) by (ii) reaction dilution will be :
(c) both reactions proceed at same rate (a) (x1 + x2 – x3) /2 (b) x1 + x2 – 2x3
(d) by none (c) (x1 – x2 – x3) /2 (d) (x1 + x2 – 2x3) /2
EBD_7443
MT-86 Target VITEEE
64. Geometrical isomerism can be shown by (a) o - aminoacetophenone
(a) [Ag( NH 3 )(CN)] (b) p-aminoacetophenone
(c) both (a) and (b)
(b) Na 2 [Cd( NO 2 ) 4 ] (d) m-aminoacetophenone
(c) [Pt Cl 4 I 2 ] 72. A coordination complex having which one of
the following descr iptions would be
(d) [Pt ( NH 3 )3 Cl][Au(CN) 4 ] paramagnetic to the maximum extent?
65. Which of the following statement is not true ?
(a) At room temperature, formyl chloride is (a) d 6 (octahedral, low-spin)
present in the form of CO and HCl
(b) d 8 (octahedral)
(b) Acetamide behaves as a weak base as well
as a weak acid. (c) d 6 (octahedral, outer orbital)
LiAlH
(c) CH 3 CONH 2 4 CH 3CH 2 NH 2 (d) d 4 (octahedral,low-spin)
(d) None of the three 73. Which of the following processes takes place
66. A carboxylic acid can best be converted into acid with decrease of entropy?
chloride by using (a) Solid gas
(a) PCl5 (b) SOCl2 (b) sugar + water solution
(c) HCl (d) ClCOCOCl (c) NH3(g) + HCl(g) NH4Cl(s)
67. In the Mac-Arther Cyanide process for (d) A(g) + B(g) mixture
extraction of silver, a small amount of KNO3 is 74. Identify (C) and (D) in the following series of
added. The function of KNO3 is reactions
(a) to oxidise the sulphur present in argentite excess of AgOH
ore to SO2 CH 3 NH 2 [A ] [B]
CH3I
(b) to form anions with Ag+ which is then
heat
reduced to metallic silver by zinc [ C] [ D ]
(c) to oxidise Ag in natural form to Ag+
(d) to oxidise the impurities of lead and zinc (a) (CH3)3COH, CH3NH2
present in it (b) (CH3)2C = CH2, CH3NH2
68. Dehydration of an alcohol in presence of (c) (CH3)3N, CH3OH
sulphuric acid gives alkene (d) (CH3)2C=CH2, CH3OH
H SO 75. Which one of the following is not an oxidation
CH 3CH 2 OH 2 4 CH 2 CH 2 H 2 O product of a primary amine?
Here sulphuric acid acts as (a) A hydroxylamine
(a) an acid (b) a base (b) A nitroso compound
(c) a catalyst (d) all the three (c) A nitro compound
69. Dopping of AgCl crystals with CdCl2 results in (d) None of these
(a) Schottky defect 76. Which method can be used to distinguish
(b) Frenkel defect
(c) Substitutional cation vacancy [Co(NH3 )6 ][Cr(NO 2 ) 6 ] and
(d) Formation of F- centres [Cr(NH3)6][Co(NO2)6]
70. An organic compound A on heating with ethanol (a) by measurement of their conductivity
gives compounds B and C, of which compound (b) by titration method
C is again a derivative of the compound B. The
(c) by precipitation method with AgNO3
compound A is
(d) by electrolysis of their aqueous solutions
(a) CH3COOH (b) (CH3CO)2O
(c) CH3COOC2H5 (d) CH3 CH2OH 77. Which electrphile is likely to be formed as an
71. When aniline is treated with acetyl chloride in intermediate in the following electrophilic
presence of anhydrous aluminium chloride, the substitution reaction ?
main product is
Mock Test 8 MT-87
1 x 2 7 z
(b) sin 89. If f(z) = , where z = 1+ 2i, then |f(z)| is
2 6 1 z2
equal to :
2 x 2
(c) cos 1 |z|
3 2 (a) (b) | z |
2
(d) None of these (c) 2 | z | (d) None
EBD_7443
MT-88 Target VITEEE
90. If arg(z1 ) arg(z 2 ) , then (a) sin – cos (b) sin + cos
(c) tan + cot (d) tan – cot
(a) z2 = kz1–1 (k > 0) 98. If the eccentricity of the hyperbola x2 – y2 sec2 = 4
(b) z2 = kz1(k > 0)
is 3 times the eccentricity of the ellipse
(c) | z2 | = | z1 | x2sec2 + y2 = 16, then the value of equals
(d) None of these 3
91. If nPr = nPr + 1 and nCr = nCr – 1, then the values (a) (b)
6 4
of n and r are
(a) 4, 3 (b) 3, 2
(c) (d)
(c) 4, 2 (d) None of these 3 2
92. If (G, *) is a group such that (a * b)2 = (a * a) *
99. In a triangle ABC, a cos A b cos B c cos C is
( b * b) for all a, b, G , then G is a b c
(a) abelian (b) finite equal to
(c) infinite (d) None
r R
93. Let f : R R be a function defined by (a) (b)
R r
f (x) = min {x 1, x 1} ,Then which of the 2r R
(c) (d)
following is true ? R 2r
100. The value of sin (cot–1 (cos (tan –1x)) is
(a) f (x) is differentiable everywhere
(b) f (x) is not differentiable at x = 0
(a) x2 2 (b) x2 1
(c) f (x) 1 for all x R
x2 1 x2 2
(d) f (x) is not differentiable at x = 1
C1 C3 C5 x 1
94. The value of ....... is equal to (c) 2 (d) 2
2 4 6 x 2 x 2
2n 1 2n 1 5 1 12
(a) (b) 101. The equation sin sin has
x x 2
n 1 n 1
(a) no solution
2n 1 2n 1 (b) only one solution, x = 13
(c) (d) (c) only one solution, x = – 13
n 1 n 1
(d) two solutions, x = ± 13
32 k 42 32 3 k 102. A point P moves such that the sum of twice its
2
52 42 4 k = 0, then the value distance from the origin and its distance from
95. If 42 k
5 k 62 52 5 k the y-axis is a constant equal to 3. P describes
(a) A circle with its centre at (–1, 0) and radius
of k is
(a) 2 (b) 1 2 3
(c) –1 (d) 0 (b) An ellipse centred at (–1, 0) and of
96. If f(x) = x 2 – 4x – 5, then f(A), where 1
eccentricity
1 2 2 2
2 1 2 (c) A hyperbola centred at (1, 0) and of
A= equals eccentricity 2
2 2 1 (d) None of these
(a) O (b) I 103. The equation of the tangent to the parabola
(c) –I (d) 2I y 2 6x at the point whose ordinate is 6, is
cos sin (a) x + 2y + 6 = 0 (b) 2x – y + 6 = 0
97. is equal to (c) x – 2y + 6 = 0 (d) x – y + 6 = 0
1 tan 1 cot
Mock Test 8 MT-89
x2 y 2 1
104. If e1 is the eccentricity of the ellipse 1 111. If f(x) is a quadratic in x, then f (x) dx is
16 25
and e2 is the eccentricity of the hyperbola passing 0
through the foci of the ellipse and e1e2 = 1, then equal to
equation of the hyperbola is :
1 1
(a) f (0) 4f f (1)
x2 y2 x2 y2 6 2
(a) 1 (b) 1
9 16 16 9
1 1
x2 y 2 x2 y 2 (b) 4f (0) f f (1)
(c) 1 (d) 1 6 2
9 25 9 36
3 2
105. The two curves x – 3xy + 2 = 0 and 1 1
(c) f (0) f 4(1)
3x2y – y3 – 2 = 0 6 2
(a) Cut at right angles
(b) Touch each other 1 1
(c) Cut at an angle /3 (d) f (0) f f (1)
6 2
(d) Cut at an angle /4
106. For the curve yn = an – 1 x if the subnormal at 1
any point is a constant then n is equal to 112. If f’(x) =f (x) + f (x ) dx and given f (0) = 1.
(a) 1 (b) 2 0
(c) –2 (d) –1 Then f (x) =
107. The coordinates of a moving particle at time t
are given by x = c t2 and y = b t2. The speed of 2e x 1 e 2e x 1 e
the particle is given by (a) (b)
2 e 1 e 3 e 3 e
(a) 2 t (c + b) (b) 2 t (c 2 b2) 2e x 2e x
(c) (d)
(c) t (c 2 b2 ) (d) 2 t (c 2 b2 ) 2 e 3 e
1 1 113. If p (u v) (v w) (w u)
108. lim equals to
h 0 h3 8 h 2h 1
and [ u v w ] , then is equal to
5
1 1
(a) (b) (a) 5 (b) 10
8 8 (c) 15 (d) None of these
1 1
(c) (d) 114. Solve : (D2 + 6D + 8)y = e–2x.
48 48
109. Five balls of different colours are to be placed 1
(a) y Ae 4x Be 2x xe 2x
in three boxes of different sizes. Each box can 2
hold all five balls. In how many ways can we
place the balls so that no box remains empty? 4x 2x 1
(b) y Ae Be xe 2x
(a) 50 (b) 100 2
(c) 150 (d) 200 1
4x
110. In a hurdle race, a player has to cross 10 hurdles. (c) y Ae Be 2x xe 2x
E E
(a) (b) 2
1
0 R r 0 R r
E E
3
(c) (d) (a) i2 > i3 > i1 (b) i2 > i1 > i3
(c) i1 > i2 > i3 (d) i1 > i3 > i2
0 R r 0 R r 11. The variable point B of a 80 rheostat AC has
been set exactly in the midway such that the
8. A solid sphere of radius R1 and volume resistance of the part AB is equal to the resistance
of the part BC. The rheostat is connected with a
0 resistance of 20 and a battery of 8.0 V as shown
charge density is enclosed by a hollow
r in the figure. The current supplied by the battery
sphere of radius R2 with negative surface charge is :
density , such that the total charge in the
system is zero. 0 is a positive constant and r is A
the distance from the centre of the sphere. The B
R2
ratio R is C
1
(a) (b) 2 / 0
0
8.0V
1 1
(c) (d)
0 (a) A (b) A
0/ 2 2 5
9. A battery has an emf of 15 V and internal 2 1
(c) A (d) A
resistance of 1 . Is the terminal to terminal 15 3
potential difference less than, equal to or greater 12. Two cells, having the same e.m.f., are connected
in series through an external resistance R. Cells
than 15 V if the current in the battery is (1) from
have internal resistances r1 and r 2 (r1 > r 2 )
negative to positive terminal, (2) from positive
respectively. When the circuit is closed, the
to negative terminal (3) zero current?
potential difference across the first cell is zero.
(a) Less, greater, equal The value of R is
(b) Less, less, equal
(c) Greater, greater, equal r1 r2 r1 r2
(a) (b)
(d) Greater, less, equal 2 2
10. The figure shows three circuits with identical (c) r1 r2 (d) r1 r2
batteries, inductors and resistances. Rank the
13. An electron is moving in an orbit of radius R
circuits according to the currents through the with a time-period T as shown in the figure. The
battery just after the switch is closed, greatest magnetic moment produced may be given by :
first:
Mock Test 9 MT-93
60º I
(a)
(a) 150N (b) Zero
t
(c) 150 3N (d) 300N
EBD_7443
MT-94 Target VITEEE
I (a) + ve y-axis, x-axis (b) – ve z-axis, y-axis
(c) + ve z-axis, x-axis (d) + ve x-axis, x-axis
25. Fpe represents electrical force on proton due to
(b)
electron and Fep on electron due to proton in a
t
hydrogen atom. Similarly, F'pe represents the
I
gravitational force on proton due to electron and
F'ep the corresponding force on electron due to
(c) proton. Which of the following is NOT true ?
t
(a) Fpe Fep 0
I
(b) F'pe ' 0
Fep
mass of hydrogen atom = 1.00783 u (c) (Eg)C < (Eg)Ge > (Eg)Si
mass of neutron = 1.00867 u (d) (Eg)Si < (Eg)Ge > (Eg)C
34. In semiconductors at a room temperature
mass of nitrogen atom 7 N 4 =14.00307 u (a) the conduction band is completely empty
the calculated value of the binding energy of the (b) the valence band is partially empty and the
conduction band is partially filled
nucleus of the nitrogen atom 7 N 4 is close to (c) the valence band is completely filled and
(a) 56 MeV (b) 98 MeV the conduction band is partially filled
(c) 104 MeV (d) 112 MeV (d) the valence band is completely filled
30. The peak voltage in the output of a half-wave 35. The following figure shows a logic gate circuit
diode rectifier fed with a sinusoidal signal without with two inputs A and B and the output C. The
filter is 10V. The d.c. component of the output voltage waveforms of A, B and C are as shown
voltage is below
(a) 20/ V (b) 10/ 2 V A
Logic gate
(c) 10/ V (d) 10V B circuit C
31. The diagram of a logic circuit is given below.
1
W t
A
X 1
F
B t
1
W t
C
X
The logic circuit gate is
The output F of the circuit is given by : (a) NAND gate (b) NOR gate
(a) W. (X + Y) (b) W. (X. Y) (c) OR gate (d) AND gate
(c) W + (X. Y) (d) W + (X + Y) 36. Two bodies A and B having masses in the ratio
32. The graph given below represents the I-V of 3 : 1 possess the same kinetic energy. The
characteristic of a Zener diode. Which part of ratio of linear momentum of B to A is
the characteristic curve is most relevant for its (a) 1 : 3 (b) 3 : 1
operation as a voltage regulator ? (c) 1: 3 (d) 3 :1
I (mA) 37. Main function of the RF amplifiers in a
superheterodyne receiver is to
(a) amplify signal
(b) reject unwanted signal
Reverse bias a (c) discriminate against image frequency signal
Vz Forward bias and IF-signal
d c b V (V) (d) all the above
38. Optical fibre are used for long distance
communication because
e (a) it amplifies signals to be transmitted
(b) it transfer signals faster than electrical
I ( A) cables
(a) a b (b) b c (c) it pre-emphasise weak signals
(c) c d (d) d e (d) it provide little attenuation as compared to
33. Carbon, silicon and germanium have four valence electrical cable for light propagation
electrons each. These are characterized by 39. A super heterodyne receiver is designed to
valence and conduction bands separated by receive transmitted signals between 5 and 10
energy band gap respectively equal to (Eg)C , MHz. The tuning range of the local oscillate for
(Eg) Si and (Eg) Ge. Which of the following IF frequency 600 kHz for high-side tuning would
statements is true? be
(a) (Eg)C = (Eg)Si = (Eg)Ge (a) 4.6 to 9.6 MHz (b) 5.6 to 10.6 MHz
(b) (Eg)C > (Eg)Si > (Eg)Ge (c) 4.6 to 10.6 MHz (d) 5.6 to 9.6 MHz
EBD_7443
MT-96 Target VITEEE
40. Two straight metallic strips each of thickness t 46. A transition metal ion exists in its highest
and length are rivetted together. Their oxidation state. It is expected to behave as
coefficients of linear expansions are 1 and 2 . (a) a chelating agent
If they are heated through temperature T, the (b) a central metal in a coordination compound
bimetallic strip will bend to form an arc of radius (c) an oxidising agent
(a) t /{ 1 T} (d) a reducing agent
2
47. Non-stoichiometr ic compound have the
(b) t /{( 2 1 T} properties of:
(c) t( 1 2 T (a) electrical conductance
(b) isolation
(d) t( 2 1 T (c) insulation
(d) none of these
PART - II (CHEMISTRY) 48. The lattice parameters of a crystal are a = 5.62 Å,
b = 7.41 Å C = 9.48 Å. The three co-ordinates are
41. Colour of cupric chloride is blue due to _____.
mutually perpendicular to each other. The crystal
(a) p -d electronic transition causes emission is –
of energy (a) tetragonal (b) orthorhombic
(b) d-d electronic transition causes emission (c) monoclinic (d) trigonal
of energy 49. Enthalpy is equal to
(c) d-d electronic transition causes absorption
of energy at red visible wave length G G/T
(a) –T 2 (b) –T 2
(d) p-d electronic transition of Cu2+ state. T T
V P
42. Stainless steel does not rust because:
(a) chromium and nickel combine with iron G/T G
(c) T2 (d) T2
(b) chromium forms an oxide layer and protects T T
V P
iron from rusting
(c) nickel present in it, does not rust 50. Given that S oH 1
131 JK mol 1
,
(d) iron forms a hard chemical compound with 2
(a) t 42g (b) t 32g e2g SoHCl 187 JK 1mol 1 . The standard entropy
change in the formation of 1 mole of HCl(g) from
(d) t 42g e2g (d) t 52g e0g H 2 (g ) and Cl 2 (g ) will be
44. [Ti(H2O)6]3+ shows purple colour due to (a) 20 JK–1 (b) 10 JK–1
(c) 187 JK –1 (d) 374 JK–1
(a) d yz d 2 2 electronic transition
x y 51. What is the entropy change (in JK–1 mol–1) when
(b) d xz d 2 2 electronic transition one mole of ice is converted into water at 0º C?
x y (The enthalpy change for the conversion of ice
(c) d xy eg [d ,d ] electronic transition to liquid water is 6.0 kJ mol–1 at 0ºC)
x2 y2 z2 (a) 21.98 (b) 20.13
(d) d xz eg [d 2 2 , d 2 ] electronic transition (c) 2.013 (d) 2.198
x y z 52. Two substances R and S decompose in solution
45. Amongst the following which are not true ? independently, both following first order kinetics.
(a) EAN of iron in Fe(C5 H 5 ) 2 is 36. The rate constant of R is twice that of S. In an
experiment, the solution initially contained 0.5
(b) [Fe(H 2 O) 6 ]2 has paramagnetism due to millimoles of R and 0.25 of S. The molarities of R
4 unpaired electrons. and S will be equal just at the end of time equal to
(a) twice the half life of R
(c) [Cr ( NH 3 ) 6 ]3 is paramagnetic. (b) twice the half life of S
(c) the half life of S
(d) [Co I 4 ]2 has square planar geometry.. (d) the half life of R
Mock Test 9 MT-97
53. The first order rate constant for a certain reaction (a) CH 3CH 2 – O O CH 2 CH 3 and
increases from 1.667 × 10 6 s 1 at 727ºC to 1.667 CH3
× 10–4 s–1 at 1571ºC. The rate constant at 1150ºC,
assuming constancy of activation energy over C6H5 C — O — OH respectively
the given temperature range is
(a) 3.911 × 10–5 s–1 (b) 1.139 × 10–5 s–1 CH3
(c) 3.318 × 10–5 s–1 (d) 1.193 × 10–5 s–1 (b) CH3CH2– O – O– CH2CH3 and
54. Law of mass action can be applied to aqueous CH3
solutions of weak electrolyte since-
(a) Reaction is always carried out in closed vessel. C6H5 CH respectively
(b) Pressure, temperature of surroundings re-
main constant. CH2 – O – OH
(c) State of equilibrium exist between the
ionised and unionised molecules OOH
|
(d) Nothing can be predicted (c) CH 3 C H – O – CH 2 CH 3 and
55. A 0.5 M NaOH solution offers a resistance of
31.6 ohm in a conductivity cell at room CH3
temperature. What shall be the approximate molar
conductance of this NaOH solution if cell C6H5 C — O — OH respectively
constant of the cell is 0.367 cm–1 . CH3
(a) 234 S cm2 mole–1 (b) 232 S cm2 mole–1
(c) 4645 S cm2 mole–1 (d) 5464 S cm2 mole–1 CH3
56. An electrochemical cell is set up as: Pt; H2 |
(1atm)|HCl(0.1 M) || CH3COOH (0.1 M)| H2 (1atm); (d) No reaction and C 6 H 5 C – OOH
|
Pt. The e.m.f of this cell will not be zero, because CH3
(a) the temperature is constant
(b) e.m.f depends on molarities of acids used respectively
(c) acids used in two compartments are different 59. Which of the following diols would cleave into
two fragments with HIO4
(d) pH of 0.1 M HCl and 0.1 M CH 3COOH is (a) 1, 3-hexanediol (b) 2, 4-hexanediol
not same (c) 1, 6-hexanediol (d) 3, 4-hexanediol
57. The half cell potential for the quinhydrone 60. One organic alcohol is irradiated with IR source
electrode and it produces three streching frequency such
O OH as 3391 cm–1, 2981 cm–1 and 1055 cm–1. Name of
that organic alcohol is
+ –
(a) Methanol (b) Ethanol
+ 2H + 2e (c) Isobutanol (d) Isopropanol
61. Which of the following reactions will not result
in the formation of anisole?
O (a) Phenol + dimethyl sulphate in presence of
OH
set up at pH = 4 will be (quinhydrone = 1 : 1 a base
molecular compound of quinone (Q) and (b) Sodium phenoxide is treated with methyl
hydroquinone (QH2), iodide
Eº = 0.699 V ) (c) Reaction of diazomethane with phenol
(a) 0.699 V (b) 0.463 V (d) Reaction of methylmagnesium iodide with
(c) 0.935 V (d) 0.817 V phenol
58. Predict the compounds A and B in the
OH
following reactions
h
CH 3CH 2 – O CH 2 CH 3 O2 A ; CHCl3 50% KOH
62. X
CH3 KOH
O2, 95 – 135º
C6H5CH B
CH3 The final product of this reaction is/are:
EBD_7443
MT-98 Target VITEEE
OH OH
(b) X is
CH
(a)
and Y is
OH OH
(c) Both are
CH2OH COOK
(b) +
(d) Both are
COOH COOK
(c) + 67. The condensation product of benzaldehyde and
acetone is
OH O O
||
C COOK (a) C 6 H 5 CH CH C CH 3
(d) (b) C 6 H 5CH C(CH 3 ) 2
63. In the reaction, O
||
C6 H5 OH
NaOH
(A)
CO 2
(B)
HCl
(C) : (c) C 6 H 5 CH 2 C CH CH 2
140 C,(4–7 atm)
72. Which of the following carboxylic acids 79. During the preparation of arenediazonium salts,
undergoes decarboxylation easily ? the excess of nitrous acid, if any is destroyed by
(a) C6H5CHOHCOOH adding.
(b) C6H5COCOOH (a) Aq NaOH (b) Aq Na2CO3
(c) C6H5COCH2COOH
(c) Aq NH2CONH2 (d) Aq KI
(d) C6H5COCH2CH2COOH
73. The reaction of HCOOH with conc. H2SO4 gives 80. A nitrogen containing organic compound gave
(a) CO2 (b) CO an oily liquid on heating with bromine and
(c) Oxalic acid (d) Acetic acid potassium hydroxide solution. On shaking the
74. If acetylchloride is reduced in the presence of product with acetic anhydride, an antipyretic
BaSO 4 and Pd, then drug was obtained. The reactions indicate that
the starting compound is :
(a) CH 3CHO is formed (a) aniline (b) benzamide
(b) CH 3COOH is formed (c) acetamide (d) nitrobenzene
(c) CH 3CH 2OH is formed PART - III (MATHEMATICS)
(d) CH 3COCH 3 is formed
81. If A is a non-zero column matrix of order m × 1
75. The treatment of acylazide (RCON3) with acidic and B is a non-zero row matrix of order 1× n, then
or alkaline medium gives rank of AB is equal to
(a) RCONH2 (b) R – NH2 (a) n (b) m
(c) RCH2 NH2 (d) RCOCHNH
(c) 1 (d) None of these
76. Which of the following compounds will form
alcohol on treatment with NaNO2, HCl/H2O at 82. The number of solutions of equation x 2 – x 3 = 1,
0°C? – x1 + 2 x 3 = 2, x1 – 2x 2 = 3 is
(a) (CH3)2CHNH2
(a) zero (b) one
(b) C6H5NH2 (b) two (d) infinite
(c) CH3 NH 2 83. Shaded region in the following figure is
represented by
Y
(d) H2N NH2
77. The refluxing of (CH3)2NCOCH3 with acid gives (0,20) x + y = 20
(a) 2 CH3NH2 + CH3COOH 20 , 40
C(10,16) B
3 3
(b) 2 CH3OH + CH3CONH2
(c) (CH3)2NH + CH3COOH 2x+5y = 80
(d) (CH3)2NCOOH + CH4
78. Which of the following reactions will not give N, X
A(20,0) (40,0)
N- dimethyl benzamide ?
(a) 2x 5y 80, x y 20, x 0, y 0
(a) CO.O.C 2 H5 (CH3 ) 2 NH
(b) 2x 5y 80, x y 20, x 0, y 0
(c) 2x 5y 80, x y 20, x 0, y 0
(b) CONH 2 CH 3Mg I (d) 2x 5y 80, x y 20, x 0, y 0
(a)
x y z
3 3 | z |2
(c) (d) None of these
2
(b) x y z 3 96. If sin x+ sin 2 x = 1, then the value of
x y z 1 cos12 x + 3 cos 10 x + 3 cos8 x + cos6 x – 1 is equal to
(c) (d) None of these (a) 0 (b) 1
2
(c) –1 (d) 2
90. A sphere is inscribed in a cube of side 2a. If the
cube is bounded by the coordinate planes as its 97. If cos 1 x cos 1
y cos 1
z then
three faces, then the equation of the sphere is x + y + z2 + 2xyz =
2 2
(a) 0 (b) 1
(a) x2 y2 z 2 2ax 2ay 2az a 2 0
3
(b) x2 y2 z 2 2ax 2ay 2az 2a 2 0 (c) (d) 2
2
(c) x2 y2 z 2 ax ay az a 2 0 98. A student is to answer 10 out of 13 questions
in an examination such that he must choose at
(d) x2 y2 z2 4a 2 least 4 from the first five questions. The
number of choices available to him is
91. Let a , b R , such that 0 <a < 1, 0 < b < 1. If the (a) 140 (b) 196
complex numbers z1 = – a + i, z2 = –1 + bi and (c) 280 (d) 346
z3 = 0 form an equilateral triangle, then values of 99. If a = 0 and b = 1, where a and b are two boolean
a and b are variables, then a + b =
(a) 1 (b) 0
(a) a = b = 2 3
(c) 1 or 0 (d) none
(b) a = 2 3 ,b= 2 3
Mock Test 9 MT-101
PART - I (PHYSICS) 2q
(a) 2q, 4q (b) , 4q
3
1. The plate of a parallel plate capacitor are
separated by d cm. A plate of thickness t cm. 2q 4q 4q
(c) , (d) 2q,
with dielectric constant k1 is inserted and the 3 3 3
remaining space is field with a plate of dielectric 4. An uncharged capacitor with a solid dielectric is
constant k2. If Q is the charge on the capacitor connected to a similar air capacitor charged to a
and area of plates is A cm2 each, then potential potential of V0. If the common potential after
difference between the plates is – sharing of charges becomes V, then the dielectric
constant of the dielectric must be –
Q t d t V0 V
(a) A k k2 (a) (b)
0 1 V V0
V0 V V0 V
4 Q t d t (c) (d)
(b) V V0
A k1 k2
5. Two long coaxial and conducting cylinders of
radius a and b are separated by a material of
4 Q k1 k2 conductivity and a constant potential
(c)
A t d t difference V is maintained between them, by a
battery. Then the current, per unit length of the
Q k1 d t cylinder flowing from one cylinder the other is –
(d) 4 4
0A t k2
V
(a) ln (b / a) V (b)
(b a)
2. A ball of mass m moving with a constant velocity
strikes against a ball of same mass at rest. If e = 2 2
(c) V (d) V
coefficient of restitution, then what will be the ln (b / a) (b a)
ratio of velocity of two balls after collision? 6. A cell of emf E having an internal resistance ‘r’ is
1 e e 1 connected to an external resistance R. The
(a) (b) potential difference ‘v’ across the resistance R
1 e e 1
varies with R as shown by the curve :
1 e 2 e
(c) (d) V
1 e e 1
3. An infinite number of charges, each equal to q E A
B
coulomb, are placed along the x-axis at x (in
metres) = 1, 2, 4, 8, ...... and so on. The potential E/2
and field in SI units at x = 0 due to this set of
D
1 R
charges are respectively times (a) A (b) B
4 0 (c) C (d) D
EBD_7443
MT-104 Target VITEEE
7. Figur e shows a
wire of uniform
resistance between r
A and B with a total I
resistance of R0. A A
The contact C can
(0, b)
A fR0 (1-f)R0 B
divide the wire into
resistances f R 0 C
and (1 – f ) R0. (0,0) (a,0)
The batteries are identical and have zero internal
resistances. 0I b
(a) 1
The value of f for which ammeter reads maximum 4 a a 2
b2
is:
(a) 0 (b) 1
0I b
(c) 0 or 1 (d) cannot be found (b) 1
4 a a 2
b2
8. A battery of internal resistance 2 is connected
to a variable resistor whose value can vary from
4 to 10 . The resistance is initially set at 4 . If 0I b
(c) 1
the resistance is now increased then – 4 a a 2
b2
(a) power consumed by it will decrease
(d) None of these
(b) power consumed by it will increase 12. A straight wire B
(c) power consumed by it may increase or may current element is
decrease carrying current
(d) power consumed will first increase then 100A, as shown in i
decrease. figure.
9. Two electric bulbs rated P1 watt V volts and P2 The magnitude
watt V volts are connected in parallel and applied field at point P A
across V volts. The total power (in watts) will be which is at
(a) P1 + P2 (b) P1 P2 per p en di cu la r 60°
d i s t a n c e
30°
P1 P2 P1 P2 ( 3 1) m from the
(c) (d) P
P1 P2 P1 P2 3 1m
current element if
10. If a ball of steel (density = 7.8 g cm–3) attains a end A and end B of the element subtend angle
terminal velocity of 10 cms–1 when falling in a 30° and 60° at point P, as shown is
tank of water (coefficient of viscosity (a) 2.5 × 10–6 T (b) 5 × 10–6 T
4 (c) 2.5 × 10–5 T (d) 8 × 10–5 T
water 8.5 10 Pa s ) then its terminal
13. In the figure shown a
velocity in glycerine (r = 12 gcm–3 , water = 8.5 × conducting ring of radius
10–4 Pa-s) would be nearly a is placed in a uniform
(a) 1.6 × 10–5 cms–1 and constant magnetic
(b) 6.25 × 10–4 cms–1 field of induction B, with
(c) 6.45 × 10–4 cms–1 its plane perpendicular to
(d) 1.5 × 10–5 cms–1
B . The ring is made to
11. An infinitely long wire carrying current I is along
rotate with constant angular speed about the
Y axis such that its one end is at point A (0, b)
diameter YY'. The emf induced in the ring is :
while the wire extends upto + The magnitude
(a) a2B sin t (b) a2B cos t
of magnetic field strength at point (a, 0) is 2
(c) a B (d) zero
Mock Test 10 MT-105
14. A coil of area 7 cm2 and of 50 turns is kept with 18. The equation of alternating current is :
its plane normal to a magnetic field B. A
I 50 2 sin 400 t amp. Then the frequency
resistance of 30 ohm is connected to the
resistance-less coil. B is 75 exp (– 200t) gauss. and root mean square of current are respectively
(a) 200 Hz, 50 amp (b) 400 Hz, 50 2 amp
The current passing through the resistance at
(c) 200 Hz, 50 2 amp (d) 50 Hz, 200 amp
t = 5 ms will be-
19. In an L-R circuit, the value of L is (0.4/ ) henry
(a) 0.64 mA (b) 1.05 mA
and the value of R is 30 ohm. If in the circuit, an
(c) 1.75 mA (d) 2.60 mA alternating emf of 200 volt at 50 cycles per second
15. An air-plane with 20 m wing spread is flying at is connected, the impedance of the circuit and
250 ms-1 straight south parallel to the earth’s current will be :
surface. The earth’s magnetic field has a (a) 11.4 ohm, 17.5 ampere
horizontal component of 2 × 10–5 Wb m–2 and (b) 30.7 ohm, 6.5 ampere
the dip angle is 60º. Calculate the induced emf (c) 40.4 ohm, 5 ampere
between the plane tips is: (d) 50 ohm, 4 ampere.
(a) 0.174 V (b) 0.173 V 20. In the LCR series circuit, the voltmeter and
(c) 1.173 V (d) 0.163 V ammeter readings are –
16. A conducting rod is rotated in a plane 400V 400V
perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field with V
constant angular velocity. The correct graph
between the induced emf (e) across the rod and
time (t) is : L
C
e
t
(a)
100V,50Hz
A ~
e A.C. generator
(a) E = 100 volts, I = 2 amp
t (b) E = 100 volts, I = 5 amp
(b)
(c) E = 300 volts, I = 2 amp
(d) E = 300 volts, I = 5 amp
e 21. The energy of electromagnetic wave in vacuum
is given by the relation
(c) t
E2 B2 1 2 1
(a) (b) 0E µ0B2
2 0 2µ 0 2 2
e
E2 B2 1 2 B2
(c) (d) 0E
(d) t c 2 2µ0
22. Interference fringes were produced using white
17. An alternating voltage is given by: light in a double slit arrangement. When a mica
sheet of uniform thickness of refractive index 1.6
e e1 sin t e 2 cos t . Then the root mean (relative to air) is placed in the path of light from
square value of voltage is given by one of the slits, the central fringe moves through
some a distance. This distance is equal to the
(a) e12 e 22 (b) e1e 2 width of 30 interfernece bands if light of
wavelength 4800 Å is used. The thickness (in
e1e 2 e12 e22 µm) of mica is –
(c) (d) (a) 90 (b) 12
2 2
(c) 14 (d) 24
EBD_7443
MT-106 Target VITEEE
23. The first diffraction minima due to a single slit 28. The energies of energy levels A, B and C for a
diffraction is at =30° for a light of wavelength given ato are in the sequence EA < EB < EC. If the
5000 Å. The width of the slit is – radiations of wavelengths and are
(a) 5 × 10–5 cm. (b) 10 × 10–5 cm. emitted due to the atomic transitions C to B, B to
–5 A and C to A respectively then which of the
(c) 2.5 × 10 cm. (d) 1.25 × 105 cm.
following relations is correct ?
24. Two Nicol prisms are first crossed and then one
(a) + = 0 (b) =
of them is rotated through 60°. The percentage
of incident light transmitted is – 1 2
(c) (d) = .
(a) 1.25 (b) 25.0 1 2
(c) 37.5 (d) 50 29. In a photoelectric effect measurement, the
25. If radiation corresponding to first line of “Balmer stopping potential for a given metal is found to
series” of He+ ion knocked out electron from 1st be V0 volt when radiation of wavelength 0 is
excited state of H atom, the kinetic energy of used. If radiation of wavelength 2 0 is used with
ejected electron from H atom would be (eV) – the same metal then the stopping potential (in
volt) will be
Z2
(Given E n (13.6 eV) V0
n2 (a) (b) 2 V0
2
(a) 4.155 eV (b) 8.310 eV
(c) 2.515 eV (d) 5.550 eV hc hc
(c) V0 (d) V0
26. Cathode rays moving with same velocity v describe 2e 0 2e 0
an approximate circular path of radius r metre in an 30. The electrons can not exist inside the nucleus
electric field of strength x volt metre–1. If the speed because
of the cathode rays is doubled to 2v, the value of (a) de-Broglie wavelength associated with
electric field needed so that the rays describe the electron in -decay is much less than the
same approximate circular path (volt metre–1) is size of nucleus
(a) 2 x (b) 3 x (b) de-Broglie wavelength associated with
(c) 4 x (d) 6 x electron in -decay is much greater than
27. Two identical photocathodes receive light of the size of nucleus
frequencies f1 and f2 . If the velocites of the photo (c) de-Broglie wavelength associated with
electrons (of mass m ) coming out are electron in -decay is equal to the size of
nucleus
respectively v1 and v 2 , then
(d) negative charge can not exist in the
2h nucleus
(a) v12 v 22 (f1 f 2 )
m 31. A force F is applied to a block of mass 2 3 kg
as shown in the diagram. What should be the
1/ 2 maximum value of force so that the block does
2h
(b) v1 v 2 ( f1 f 2 ) not move ?
m
F
(c) 2 2 2h
v1 v2 (f1 f 2 )
m 60° =
1
2 3
1/ 2
2h
(d) v1 v 2 (f1 f 2 ) (a) 10 N (b) 20 N
m
(c) 30 N (d) 40 N
Mock Test 10 MT-107
32. Horizontal tube of non-uniform cross-section has (a) – 487.5 Vin (b) – 417.5 Vin
radii of 0.1 m and 0.05 m respectively at M and N (c) – 237.5 Vin (d) – 127.5 Vin
for a streamline flow of liquid the rate of liquid 38. By adding indium at the rate of one indium atom
flow is per 4 × 108 germanium atoms, a sample of
N germanium atom is made p material. The donor
density is assumed to be zero and
ni = 2.5 × 1019 per cubic metre at 300K. If there
are 4.4× 1028 germanium atoms per cubic metre,
M find the ratio np : ni.
(a) continuously changes with time (a) 0.22 (b) 0.51
(b) greater at M than at N (c) 0.31 (d) 0.78
(c) greater at N than at M 39. An n-type silicon sample of width 4 × 10–3 m,
(d) same at M and N thickness 25 × 10–5 m and length 6 × 10–2 m
33. A radioactive nuclide is produced at the constant carries a current of 4.8mA when the voltage is
rate of n per second (say, by bombarding a target applied across the length of the sample. What is
with neutrons). The expected number N of nuclei the current density ? If the free electron density
in existence t seconds after the number is N0 is
is 1022/m3 then find how much time does it take
given by
for the electron to travel the full length of the
(a) t
N N0e sample ?
(a) 4.8×103 A/m2, 2×10–2s
n t
(b) N N 0e (b) 1.8×103 A/m2, 2×10–2s
(c) 3.3×103 A/m2, 2.2×10–2s
n n t (d) 5.2×103 A/m2, 4 × 10–2s
(c) N N0 e
40. A material has poisson’s ratio 0.50. If a uniform
rod of it suffers a longitudinal strain of 2 × 10–3,
n n t then the percentage change in volume is
(d) N N0 e
(a) 0.6 (b) 0.4 (c) 0.2 (d) Zero
where is the decay constant of the sample
34. A force of 10 N acts on a body of mass 20 kg for
PART - II (CHEMISTRY)
10 seconds. Change in its momentum is 41. The variation of equivalent conductance of
(a) 5 kg m/s (b) 100 kg m/s strong electrolyte with (concentration) ½ is
(c) 200 kg m/s (d) 1000 kg m/s represented by
35. In the nuclear reaction
198
80 Hg X 79 Au198 1H1 . X-stands for
(a) proton (b) electron (a) (b)
(c) neutron (d) deutron
c c
36. A transistor is connected in CE configuration.
The voltage drop across the load resistance (RC)
3 k is 6V. Find the base current. The current
gain of the transistor is 0.97 is
(a) 61.86 µA (b) 51.86 µA (c) (d)
(c) 42.16 µA (d) 70.16 µA c c
37. Find the output of the circuit given below 42. The reaction of C6H5CH = CHCHO with NaBH4
740 k
650 k
gives
10 k
(a) C6H5CH2CH2CH2OH
– 100 k
–
(b) C6H5CH = CHCH2OH
Vin +
+
Vo (c) C6H5CH2CH2CHO
(d) C6H5CH2CHOHCH3
EBD_7443
MT-108 Target VITEEE
43. Which of the following compound will undergo 49. Which of the following gives primary amine on
self aldol condensation in the presence of cold reduction?
dilute alkali ? (a) CH 3CH 2 NO 2
(a) CH 2 CH CHO (b) CH 3CH 2 O N O
(b) CH C CHO
(c) C6H 5 N NC 6 H 5
(c) C 6 H 5CHO
(d) CH 3CH 2 NC
(d) CH 3CH 2CHO. 50. Conductivity (unit Siemen's S) is directly
44. CsBr crystallises in a body centered cubic lattice. proportional to area of the vessel and the
The unit cell length is 436.6 pm. Given that the concentration of the solution in it and is
atomic mass of Cs = 133 and that of Br = 80 amu inversely proportional to the length of the
and Avogadro number being 6.02 × 1023 mol–1, vessel, then th e unit of constant of
the density of CsBr is proportionality is
(a) 0.425 g/cm3 (b) 8.50 g/cm3 (a) S m mol–1 (b) S m2 mol–1
–2
(c) S m mol2 (d) S2 m2 mol–2
(c) 4.25 g/cm 3 (d) 42.5 g/cm3
45. In the anion HCOO– the two carbon-oxygen 51. In an irreversible process taking place at constant
bonds are found to be equal length. What is the T and P and in which only pressure-volume work
reason for it? is being done, the change in Gibbs free energy
(a) electronic orbitals of carbon atom are (dG) and change in entropy (dS), satisfy the
hybridised criteria
(b) the C=O bond is weaker than the C–C bond (a) (dS)V, E > 0, (dG)T, P < 0
(c) the anion HCOO– has two reasonating (b) (dS)V, E = 0, (dG)T, P = 0
structures (c) (dS)V, E = 0, (dG)T, P > 0
(d) the anion is obtained by removal of a proton (d) (dS)V, E < 0, (dG)T, P < 0
from the acid molecule. 52. Bordeaux used as fungicide is a mixture of
46. Identify X, (a) CuSO 4 Ca OH 2
H3C (b) CaSO 4 Cu OH
CH3MgI 2
C=O
H3C dry ether (c) CuCO3 Cu OH 2
(d) CuO CaO
H 2O
Intermediate X 53. The conductivity of a saturated solution of
(a) CH3OH (b) Ethyl alcohol BaSO4 is 3.06 × 10–6 ohm –1 cm –1 and its
equivalent conductance is 1.53 ohm –1 cm 2
(c) Methyl cyanide (d) tert-Butyl alcohol equiv–1. The Ksp for BaSO4 will be
47. The half-life of Th 232 is 1.4 × 1010 years and that (a) 4 × 10–12 (b) 2.5 × 10–9
of its daughter element Ra228 is 7 years. Calculate (c) 2.5 × 10 –13 (d) 4 × 10–6
the weight of radium228 in equilibrium with 1 gram 54. In a uranium mineral, the atomic ratio
of Th232. NU–238/NPb–206 is nearly equal to one. The age
(a) 6 × 10–12 (b) 8.4 × 10–12 (in years) of the mineral is nearly (given that the
–10
(c) 5 × 10 gm (d) 3 × 10–10 gm half-life of U-238 is 4.5 × 109 years)
48. When 1 mol of a gas is heated at constant (a) 3.0 × 108 (b) 4.5 × 108
volume, temperature is raised from 298 to 308 K. (c) 3.0 × 10 9 (d) 4.5 × 109
If heat supplied to the gas is 500 J, then which 55. The reaction L M is started with 10.0 g of
statement is correct ? L. After 30 and 90 minutes 5.0 g and 1.25 g of
(a) q = w = 500 J, U = 0 L respectively are left. The order of the reaction
(b) q = U = 500 J, w = 0 is
(c) q = –w = 500 J, U = 0 (a) 0 (b) 1
(d) U = 0, q = w = –500 J (c) 2 (d) 3
Mock Test 10 MT-109
SOLUTIONS
MOCK TEST 1
1. (c) s> k> r r3
C D
2. (d) E (ds) cos E ( r 2 ) cos 0º r2 E .
0.5Y r2 r4 r6
3. (d) Y [Alt : r5
2 (1 )
2 8 R R 2R
= 1 1
3 3 8. (b) We know that U = – W
i3 Therefore
C D
x x
i2 i4 U= Fdx or U kxdx
i4
0 0
i2
kx 2
A i1 O i1 B U ( x) U ( 0) given U(0) = 0,
2
8 kx 2
Now is parallel to AB, that is, 2 so U(x) =
3 2
total resistance 9. (b) The current is same in both the wire, hence
magnetic field induced will be same.
8/3 2 16 / 3 16 8 10. (b) In a perpendicular magnetic field, the path of
8/3 2 14 / 3 14 7 a charged particle is a circle, and the magnetic
field does not cause any change in energy.
EBD_7443
MT-116 Target VITEEE
11. (c) Power = V . I = I2R
medium is (v) 1 .
Power 2 1 1
i2
R 8 4 2
Therefore refractive index of the medium
1
Potential over 8 = Ri 2 8 4V Vel. of E.M.wave in vacuum (v 0 )
2 ( )
This is the potential over parallel branch. So, Vel. of E.M. wave in medium (v)
4
i1 1 1/ 0 0
4 = =
Power of 3 = i12R = 1 × 1 × 3 = 3W 1/ 0 0
output D
12. (a) Efficiency is given by 18. (c) Distance of n th maxima, x n
input d
5 15 14 As b g
0.875 or 87.5 %
10 8 15
x blue x green
13. (b) Time constant is L/R
Given, L = 40H & R = 8 19. (b) Material expands outward and so x, r
= 40/8 = 5 sec. increases. Due to linear expansion diameter
14. (c) L = 2mH, i = t2e–t of rod will increase.
20. (c)
di 21. (a) For Bragg’s scattering of a beam of electron,
E= L L[ t 2 e t 2 te t ]
dt the inter-planar distance ‘d’ is given by
when E = 0, 2d sin = n
–e–t t2 + 2te–t = 0 Here = 30°
or, 2t e–t = e–t t2 1
t = 2 sec. sin 30 ; n 1
2
15. (c) Initial current (I1) = 10 A; Final current
(I2)= 0; Time (t) = 0.5 sec and induced e.m.f. n 1
d
( ) = 220 V. 2 sin 1
Induced e.m.f. ( ) 2
2
(I I1 )
= L dI L 2 L
(0 10)
20L h
dt t 0.5 or d
mv
220 (According to de-Broglie, wavelength
or, L 11H
20 h
associated with an electron )
[where L = Self inductance of coil] mv
E 0 nBA mm
16. (c) I0 22. (b) For positronium reduced mass
R R m m
Given, n = 1, B = 10–2 T,
A = (0.3)2m2, R = 2 m2 m
f= (200/60) and = 2 (200/60) 2m 2
Substituting these values and solving, we Hence Rydberg’s constant for positronium
get is half of that for hydrogen atom.
I0 = 6 × 10–3 A = 6mA Hence, ground state energy for positronium
17. (d) We know that velocity of electromagnetic 13.6
6.8 eV
wave in vacuum (v0 ) 1 and 2
0 0 hc hc
23. (b) eV or
velocity of electromagnetic wave in min
min
eV
Solutions MT-117
COCH3
+
84. (a) Since, b, c and b c are mutually
H3 O
perpendicular vectors, therefore any vector
OCH3 can be expressed in ter ms of
a
80. (d) All aliphatic amines are stronger bases than
NH3 and among different ethylamines order b, c and b c.
of basictity is 2° > 3° > 1°. Thus, the correct
order is (d) i.e., Let a x b y c z ( b c) ....(i)
(C 2 H 5 ) 2 NH (C 2 H 5 )3 N Taking dot product with b c in eq. (i),
C 2 H 5 NH 2 NH 3 .
This anomolous behaviour of tertiary ethyl
we get, a. ( b c) 0 0 z | b c |2
amine is due to steric factors i.e., crowding a . ( b c)
of alkyl groups cover nitrogen atom from z
all sides and thus makes the approach and | b c |2
bonding by a lewis acid relatively difficult
which results the maximum steric strain in Taking dot product with b in eq. (i), we get
tirtiary amines. The electrons are there but
a. b x b . b y c . b z .0 x
the path is blocked resulting the reduction
in its basicity. Taking dot product with c in eq. (i), we get
81. (c) R A × B under given condition a < b is
given by a. c 0 y 0 y a. c
R = {(1, 3), (1,5), (2,3) (2,5), (3,5) (4,5)}
R–1 = {(3,1), (5, 1), (3,2), (5,2), (5, 3), (5,4)} a . ( b c)
a ( a . b) b ( a . c ) c ( b c)
RoR–1 = {(3, 3), (3, 5), (5,3), (5, 5)}. | b c |2
1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i2 2i 2i 85. (c) Since y 1 | x | 1 x R, therefore,
82. (a) i
1– i 1– i 1 i 2 2
1– i graph of the given function must lie on or
n above the line y = 1.
1 i
1 in 1 hence only (c) option is correct.
1– i 86. (b) Let S x2 – 4y
Clearly the smallest value of n is 4. Since the point (2a, a) lies inside the
83. (c) The given equation can be written as parabola,
tan x tan / 3 tan x tan 2 / 3 S (2a, a) = 4a2 – 4a < 0
tan x 3 or a (a – 1) < 0 ...(1)
1 tan x tan / 3 1 tan x tan 2 / 3
Also, the vertex A (0, 0) and the point (2a, a)
tan x 3 tan x 3 are on the same side of the line y = 1 (the
tan x 3 equation of latus rectum)
1 3 tan x 1 3 tan x
So, a – 1 < 0 i.e. a < 1 ...(2)
(tan x 3)(1 3 tan x)
Y
(1 3 tan x) (tan x 3)
tan x 3
S (0, 1)
1 3tan 2 x
8 tan x
tan x 3 y=1
1 3 tan 2 x (2a, a)
tan x (1 3 tan 2 x ) 8 tan x
3
1 3 tan 2 x X
A
3(3 tan x tan 3 x )
3 From (1) and (2), we have a (a – 1) < 0
1 3 tan 2 x
or 0 < a < 1
3 tan 3x 3 tan 3x 1
EBD_7443
MT-122 Target VITEEE
87. (c) Let L1 : x + 2y = 8; P(E3/A) =
L2 2x + y = 2;
P E3 P A / E3
L3 : x – y = 1
Since the shaded area is below the line L1, P E1 P A / E1 P E2 P A / E2 +P E3 P A / E3
we have + P(E4)P(A/E4)
x + 2y 8. Since the shaded area is above
1 1
the line L2, we have 2x + y 2. Since the
= 4 7 = 0.165
common region is to the left of the line L3,
1 3 1 1 1 1 1 4
we have x – y 1
4 18 4 4 4 7 4 13
88. (a) We have,
(3 – x)4 + (2 – x)4 = (5 – 2x)4 = (3 – x + 2 – x)4 p q y r z
(3 – x)4 + (2 – x)4 = (3 – x)4 + (2 – x)4 + 4
90. (c). p x q r z 0
(3 – x) (2 – x)3 + 4 (3 – x)3 (2 – x) + 6 (3 – x)2
p x q y r
(2 – x)2
2 (3 – x) (2 – x) [2 (3 – x)2 + 3 (3 – x) (2 – x) Apply R1 R1 – R3 and R2 R2 – R3,
+ 2 (2 – x2)] = 0
(3 – x) (2 – x) (18 + 2x2 – 12x + 18 – 9x – 6x x 0 z
+ 3x2 + 8 + 2x2 – 8x) = 0 we get 0 y z 0
(3 – x) (2 – x) (7x2 – 35x + 44) = 0 p x q y r
x = 2, 3 and 7x2 – 35x + 44 = 0
Since discriminant of 7x2 – 35x + 44 = 0 is x[ yr z(q y)] z[0 y(p x)] 0
negative, [Expansion along first row]
it has no real roots. xyr xzq xzy yzp zyx 0
Hence the gievn equation has two real
p q r
roots and two imaginary roots. xyr zxq yzp 2 xyz 2
x y z
89. (c) Let A, E1, E2, E3 and E4 be the events as
defined below 91. (a) Let l, m, n be the d.c.’s of the normal to the
A : a black ball is selected plane which contains the two concurrent
lines with d.c’s l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2.
E1 : box I is selected
The line whose d.c.,’s are l, m, n is
E2 : box II is selected perpendicular to the line whosed d.c.,’s are
E3 : box III is selected l1, m1, n1 and l2, m2, n2.
E4 : box IV is selected l1 l + m1 m + n 1 n = 0 ...(1)
Since, the boxes are chosen at random, and l2 l + m2 m + n2 n = 0 ...(2)
Therefore, P(E1) = P(E2) = P(E3) If the third line whose d.c’s are l3, m3, n3
also lies in this plane, then it is at right angles
1 to the normal to this plane.
= P(E4) = l3 l + m3 m + n 3 n = 0 ...(3)
4
Eliminating l, m, n from (1), (2) and (3), we
3 2 get
Also, P(A/E1) = , P(A/E2) = , P(A/
18 8
l1 m1 n1
1 4 l2 m2 n2 0,
E3) = and P(A/E4) =
7 13 l3 m3 n3
P(box III is selected, given that the drawn
ball is black) = P(E3/A) By Bayes’ theorem, 92. (b) If F be the resultant of the three given
forces then
Solutions MT-123
y q th term AR q 1 , A B'
A B A' B
G R 4 5 x 4 5 x
3 1 3 1 5 6 y 0 5 6 y 0 k 7
4 4 4 4 6 k z 0 k 7 0
AG AR AR AG
4 5
3 13 1 1 3 1 3 Also 0 rank 2, if k 7
4 44 4 4 4 4 4 5 6
BG BR BG BR BG independent of the value of d
EBD_7443
MT-124 Target VITEEE
101. (a) Let A = Cr + 2 Cr–1 + Cr–2
n n n
The number of numbers ending in 107. (b) Rewrite the equation of straight line in the
32 = 2.2!= 4 following form
The number of numbers ending in y x cot p cos ec ....(i)
40 = 3! = 6
So, the required number = 6 + 4 + 6 + 4 + 4 x2 y2
Now y = mx + c is a tangent to 1
+ 6= 30 a2 b2
105. (a) Solving the two equation x2 = ay and if c2 = a2m2 + b2
y – 2x = 1, we get Applying this condition at (i), we get
x2 = a (2x + 1) or x2 – 2ax – a = 0
(p cos ec ) 2 a 2 ( cot ) 2 b2
x1 + x2 = 2a and x1x2 = –a
So, the given line cuts the parabola at two p 2 cos ec 2 a 2 cot 2 b2
poins (x1, y1) and (x2, y2)
p 2 a 2 cos 2 b 2 sin 2 .
2
Now, 40 = (x1 – x2)2 + (y1 – y2)2 [Given] 108. (b) We have,
2
3x 4
7 4
x2 x 22 3x 4 5x 7
40 = (x1 – x2)2 + 1
a a gof (x) = g
5x 7 3x 4
5 3
5x 7
( x1 x 2 ) 2
= (x1 – x2)2 1 21x 28 20x 28 41x
a2 = x
15x 20 15x 21 41
7x 4
4a 2 Similarly, fog (x) = f
= [(x1 + x2)2 – 4x1x2] 1 5x 3
a2
7x 4
= 5(4a2 + 4a) 3 4
5x 3
a2 + a – 2 = 0 =
7x 4
a = 1, –2 5 7
5x 3
1
106. (a) I = sin x .1 dx 21x 12 20x 12 41x
= x
Integrating by parts and taking 1 as second 35x 20 35x 21 41
function. Thus, gof (x) = x, x B and fog (x) = x,
d x A, which implies that gof = IB and
I = sin 1 x 1dx sin 1
x 1dx dx
dx fog = IA.
109. (a) The function defined in (a) is not
1 x
sin x ( x) dx differentiable at x = 1/2.
2 110. (a) Construct the composition table by taking
1 x
elements 1,2, 3, 4 of G in this order in a
1 dt horizonltal row and a vertical column.
x sin 1 x , substituting1 x 2 t
2 t Composition table
x5 1 2 3 4
2xdx dt
1 1 2 3 4
1 1 t1 / 2 2 2 4 1 3
x sin x C 3 3 1 4 2
2 1
2 4 4 3 2 1
Computing as
1
x sin x 1 x2 C 1 ×5 1 = 1, 1 ×5 2 = 2, 1 ×5 3 = 3, 1 ×5 4 = 4
2 ×5 1= 2, 2 ×5 2 = 4, 2 ×5 3 = 1, 2 ×5 4= 2
EBD_7443
MT-126 Target VITEEE
3 ×5 1= 3, 3 ×5 2 = 1, 3 ×5 3 = 4, 3 ×5 4 = 2 … (i)
4 ×5 1= 4, 4 ×5 2 = 3, 4 ×5 3 = 2, 4 ×5 4 = 1. Clearly c > 0 as c = e2a
(i) Closure propety : As all the entries of Hence, the equation (i) gives a family of
composition table are clements of G, hyperbolas with eccentricity
therefore, G is closed under multiplication c 1
modulo 5. c 1
c c2 1
(ii) Associative Law : For all a, b, c G c 1 if c 1
(a ×5 b) ×5 c = a ×5 (b ×5 c) c 1 c 1
as the least non negative remainder Thus ecentricity varies from member to
obtained by dividing ( a × b) × c by 5 is member of the family as it depends on c.
same as obtained on dividing a × ( b × c) 113. (c) Put 1 x z2 dx 4z x dz
by 5.
×5 is associative in G.
(iii) Existence of Identity : For any a G, 1 G 1 x z
dx (4z x )dz
such that 1 ×5 a = a ×5 1 = a x x
1 G is identity element in G for × 5.
(iv) Existence of Inverse : From composition z2 1
4 dz 4 1 2
dz
table, z 2
1 z 1
1 ×5 1= 1, 2 ×5 3 = 3 ×5 2 = 1, 4 ×5 4 = 1
1, 3, 2, 4 G are respectively inverses 1 z 1
of 1, 2, 3, 4 under ×5 . 4 z log C
2 z 1
(v) Commutative Law : For all a, b G.
a ×5 b = b ×5 a
As the least non-negative remainder 1 x 1
4 1 x 2 log C
obtained by dividing a × b by 5 is same as
1 x 1
obtained on dividing b× a.
×5 is commutative in G.
114. (c) Let the variable point be ( , , ) then
Hence ( G, ×5 ) is a finite abelian group of
order 4. according to question
f ( x h ) f (x ) 2 2 2
111. (a) We have f ( x ) Lim | | | | | 2 |
h 0 h 9
3 2 6
f ( x ) f (h ) f ( x )
f ' (x ) Lim 2
9. 2 2
h 0 h
[by given property] So, the locus of the point is
f (h ) (2h 2 3h ) g(h ) x2 y2 z2 9
Lim Lim
h 0 h h 0 h 115. (a) Given equation of line is
Lim (2h 3)g (h ) 3 g (0) 3 3 9
h 0 r 2iˆ ˆj 2kˆ 3iˆ 4jˆ 2kˆ
x dx y dy
112. (d) Given 2
xiˆ yjˆ zkˆ 2 3 ˆi 1 4 ˆj 2 2 kˆ
1 x 1 y2
Integrating we get, Any point on the line is
1 1 (2 + 3 , – 1 + 4 , 2 + 2 )
log(1 x 2 ) log(1 y 2 ) a
2 2 Since it also lie on the plane r · ˆi ˆj kˆ
2 2
1 x c (1 y ),
So,
Where c e 2a
2 3 iˆ 1 4 ˆj 2 2 kˆ . ˆi ˆj kˆ 5
2 2 x2 y2
x cy c 1 1 2+3 +1–4 +2+2 =5
c 1 c 1
=0
c
Solutions MT-127
2 dr
i.e 0 2 2
3 1
0 0 k
1
0 4 r2 .
2 2 2 dt
k = –12 when r = 10cm
Asymptotes of the given hyperbola are dv
xy 3x 4 y 12 0 or 4 (10)2 .(0.02) = 8 cm3/s.
dt
( x 4)( y 3) 0 i.e x = –4 and y = 3 120. (d) a . (a + b) = (a + b) . a
(Commutative law) = (a + b) . (a + 0)
(cos x 1)(cos x e x ) (Identity law) = a + (b . 0)
117. (c) 5 lim
x 0 xn (Distributive law) = a + 0 = a.
(cos x 1)(cos x e x )
lim
x 0 xn
x2 x4
...... x x 2 ......
2! 4!
lim
x 0 xn
is non-zero n = 3.
EBD_7443
MT-128 Target VITEEE
MOCK TEST 2
1. (b) In an inelastic collision, momentum remains 8. (b) E = V + ir
conserved, but K.E is changed.
2. (c) C2 and C3 are parallel so V2 = V3 1.8 10
2.2 1.8 r r
C1 and combination of C2 & C3 is in series. 5 9
So, V = V2 + V1 or V = V3 + V1 9. (c) In the electrolysis of CuSO4 , oxygen is
and also Q1 = Q2 + Q3 liberated at anode and copper is deposited
3. (d) When oil is placed between space of plates at cathode.
2A 0
C ... (1) V2 200 200
d 10. (b) R1 = 1000
P1 40
KA 0
C , if K 2 V2 200 200
d R2 = 400
P2 100
A 0
When oil is removed C' ........(2) R1 (for 40W) > R2 (for 100 W)
d
on comparison both equation, weget
C' = C/2 11. (c)
4. (d) According to Gauss’ Law
Q enclosed by closed surface For a beam, the depression at the centre is
E.ds flux fL
o given by,
so total flux = Q/ o 4Ybd3
Since cube has six face so flux coming out [f, L, b, d are constants for a particular beam]
through one wall or one face is Q/6 o.
1
10 O 10 F 10 i.e.
5. (c) A B Y
12. (b) For circular path in magnetic field,
10 10
mr 2 = qvB
G E
C D
10 10 10 2 qvB
As v r
Equivalent Circuit mr
F q(r )B qB
2
10
mr m
A
10 E 10 D
O If is frequency of roatation, then
10
10 10 qB
G 2 2 m
Equivalent Resistance of circuit
N 0 Ni
20 20 13. (c) L ; BA; B
= 10 10 10 10 10 30 i 2R
20 20
2
6. (c) According to Stoke's law , F= 6 vTR N 0 Ni 0N
7. (a) We know from the Kirchhoff's first law that L A A L N2
i 2R 2R
the algebraic sum of the current meeting at
any junction in the circuit is zero (i.e. i = 0) 14. (a) Power dissipated = Erms. Irms = (Erms) (Irms)
or the total charge remains constant. cos
Therefore, Kirchhoff's first law at a junction Hence, power dissipated depends upon
deals with the conservation of charge. phase difference.
Solutions MT-129
1 W0 1 32. (b) W L1 (W + X)
9 W0 3 X
2 W + (X.Y)
27. (b) Energy of electron = mec2 W L3
Y L1 (W + Y)
Energy of positron= mpc2
me mp c 33. (b)
speed of light. 34. (d) Positive terminal is at lower potential
Thus according to conservation of energy (–10V) and negative terminal is at higher
released potential 0V.
2 35. (b)
2m e c 2 2 9.1 10 31
3 108 36. (c) We know that for common base
1.6 10 13 Joules . i c collector current
0.98
28. (b) For a monoatomic gas, the average energy i e emmiter current
3 & for common emitter
of a molecule at temperature T is k BT .
2 ic collector current
3 ib base current
Internal energy U RT
2
0.98 0.98
dU 3 49.
CV = R 1 1 0.98 0.02
dT 2 37. (c) Since specific heat = 0.6 kcal/g × °C = 0.6
For an ideal gas, CP – CV = R cal/g × °C
5 CP 5 From graph it is clear that in a minute, the
CP =R and temperature is raised from 0°C to 50°C.
2 CV 3
29. (c) Forces between nucleons inside the Heat required for a minute = 50 × 0.6 × 50
nucleus are = 1500 cal.
(i) attractive in nature Also from graph, Boiling point of wax is
(ii) extremely short range 200°C.
(iii) strongest forces in nature 38. (c) Optical fibres are not subjected to
30. (d) 2 2 3 1 electromagnetic interference from outside.
1H 1H 2 He 0n 13 MeV
39. (b) Core of acceptance angle
2
The binding energy of is 2.21H 1
sin n12 n 22
(2.2) × 2 = 13 MeV + Binding energy
(4.4) = – 13 MeV + Binding energy 40. (c) If is the original length of wire, then
Binding energy of He = 13 + 4.4 = 17.4 change in length of first wire,
31. (a) Half live of given radioactive nucleus = 100 ( 1 )
1
years
Number of half lives is 300 years Change in length of second wire,
300 2 ( 2 )
3
100 T1 T2
Now the number of atoms left after n half- Now, Y
A 1 A 2
lives is
n 3
1 1 N0 T1 T2 T1 T2
N N0 N0 or or
2 2 8 1 2 1 2
Hence the number of nuclei which have
or T1 – T1 = T2 – T2
decayed in 300 years is 2 1
7N0 T2 1 T1 2
N0 N0 8 or
8 T2 T1
Solutions MT-131
1 N=N NMe 2
Ù0(CH 390.71ohm cm 2
3COOH)
68. (c) Electrolytic reduction of Nitroalkane in
0.0591
62. (d) E log 10 K weakly acidic medium give aniline
n
Here, n 2, E 0.295 NO2 NH2
rearrangement
73. (b) Zn-Hg/HCl
COONa
Nitrobenzene Aniline
76. (b) 2HCOONa | + H2
Hence, option (a) is correct. 360
SOCl 2 COONa
71. (d) CH 3COOH CH 3 COCl sod.formate
77. (a)
OMgBr
|
CH3MgBr
C6 H5 COOC2 H5 C6 H5 C OC 2 H 5
|
CH3
O
||
Mg(OC2 H5 )Br Excess
C6 H5 C CH3
CH3MgBr
OMgBr CH3
H2 O |
C6 H5 C CH3 C6 H5 — C — CH3
| |
CH3 OH
CH3
|
Con. H 2SO 4 Ozonolysis
C 6 H 5 — C CH 2
'B'
C 6 H 5COCH 3 HCHO
O O n2 2(n 2 2) 0
|| ||
CH 3 C CH 2 C OC 2 H 5 [ 4a 2 c 2 is positive]
(ethyl acetoacetate )
79. (d) Water gas is mixed with half its volume of n2 4 0 (n 2)(n 2) 0
hydrogen.The mixture is compressed to
2 n 2 n [ 2, 2]
approximately 200 – 300 atmospheres. It is
then passed over a catalyst |ZnO + Cr 2O3| +
+
at 300°C. Methyl alcohol vapours are –2 – 2
formed which are condensed
ZnO Cr2O3 –2 n 2
CO 2H 2 CH3OH
Compressed gas
300 C
Methyl alcohol 84. (c) The equation of the tangent at P (at2, 2at)
to y2 = 4ax is ty = x + at2 ...(1)
80. (c) Br2 / KOH It meets the directrix x = –a
R CONH 2 RNH 2
This is known as Hoffmann’s Bromamide a ( t 2 1)
ty a at 2 y
reaction. t
81. (a) For the given A.P., we have
sin (z + x – y) – sin (y + z – x) = sin 2 at)
(x + y – z)– sin (z + x – y) P (a t1 , 2
2 cos z sin (x – y) = 2 cos x sin (y – z) Q
21 3 4
8/7 104. (d) I = x 2 cos x dx
1 x C
32 d 2
102. (a) We have, (2 * 3) * 4 = 1 * 4 = 1 = x 2 cos x dx x cos x dx dx
dx
and 2 * (3 * 4) = 2 * 1 = 1 [Integrating by parts taking x2 as first
Since, each row is same as their function]
corresponding column.
Therefore, the operation * is commutative. x 2 sin x 2 x sin xdx
We have (2 * 3) = 1 and (4 * 5) = 1 x 2 sin x 2 x sin x dx
d
x sin x dx dx
Therefore, (2 * 3) * (4 * 5) = 1 * 1 = 1 dx
103. (a) Equation of the pair of straight lines joining [Integrating by parts again taking x as first
the centre (origin) and the intersection function]
points of the variable chord and the
hyperbola is x 2 sin x 2 x ( cos x ) cos x dx
a
x
e F2 (-ae, 0) F1(ae, 0)
1 1 2
previous game was a loss is ].
1 2 3 110. (b) log sin x dx ...(i)
107. (d) We have 0
dx 2 2
a ( sin sin cos ) a cos
d log sin x dx log cos x dx ...(ii)
2
and 0 0
From (i) and (ii)
dy
a (cos cos sin ) a sin ,
d 2 2
2 log sin x dx log cos x dx
dy dy / d
tan 0 0
dx dx / d /2
So, the slope of the normal is sin 2 x
log dx
2
1 0
cot , which varies as .
dy / dx
2 2
The equation of the normal at any point is log sin 2x dx log 2 dx ;
y a(sin cos ) 0 0
cot [x a(cos sin )]
2
x cos y sin a. log sin 2x dx log 2
Clearly, it is a line at a constant distance 2
0
| a | from the origin.
Put 2x t 2dx dt
Further, the equation x cos + y sin = a
represents the equation of a tangent to the 1
circle x2 + y2 = a2 for any value of , which 2 log sin t dt log 2
2 2
is a fixed circle. 0
108. (b) The given statements are
p : A tumbler is half empty. 2
1
q : A tumbler is half full. . 2 log sin t dt log 2
2 2
We know that, if the first statement 0
happens, then the second happens and [Since sin ( – t) = sin t, see property No. 8]
also if the second happens, then the first 2 log 2 log e 2
2 2
Solutions MT-139
function is continuous at x = 0
sin 2A sin C sin B
For function to be differentiable :
111. (b) Let sin C sin 2B sin A f (0 + h)= f (0 – h)
sin B sin A sin 2C
f (0 h) f (0)
f (0 + h) =
2 sin A cos A sin C sin B h
sin C 2 sin B cos B sin A 1
h sin
0 1
sin B sin A 2 sin C cos C lim h lim sin
h 0 h h 0 h
The above determinant is the product of
two determinants, which does not exist.
sin A cos A 0 cos A sin A 0 1
( h)sin 0
sin B cos B 0 cos B sin B 0 0 h
f (0 – h) = lim
sin C cos C 0 cos C sin C 0 h 0 h
112. (b) Given plane is 2x y 2z 4 0. 1
= lim sin
P h 0 h
which does not exist. So function is not
differentiable at x = 0
Q R 114. (c) y = sin2x ...(i) and y = cos2x ...(ii)
Solving (i) and (ii), we get
sin2x = cos2x
tan2x = 1
N M x
tan x 1
4
From points P and Q draw PM and QN Y
perpendiculars on the given plane and
QR MP .
,y
4
| 2( 1) 2 0 4 | 8,
| MP |
22 ( 1) 2 ( 2) 2 3
X
| 2.1 ( 1) 2.2 4 | 5 O /4 /2
| NQ |
2 2 ( 1) 2 ( 2) 2 3
Required area = area of shaded region
Also /4 /2
2 2 2 = sin 2 x dx cos 2 x dx
| PQ | (1 1) ( 1 2) ( 2 0) 17
0 /4
2 2
| NM | | QR | PQ RP 17 1 4. /4 /2
1 cos 2x 1 cos 2x
113. (c) For function to be continuous : = dx dx
f(0 + h) = f(0 – h) = f(0) 2 2
0 /4
1/ x 1 f (1 x) f (1)
lim
f (1 x) x 0 x f (1)
B(b) 119. (c) lim e
A(a) M x 0 f (1)
Then, area of triangle ABC
1 1 f '(1)
(AB)(CM) | b a | CM ....(i)
2 2 e f (1)
e2
Again, area of triangle ABC
120. (a) 10 = 9.
= , 11 = 9. 2 = 2
1 1
| AB AC | | (b a ) ( c a ) | (2 – ) (2 – 2) (2 – 10) (2 – 11)
2 2
1 = (2 – )2 (2 – 2)2
|b c c a a b | ...(ii)
2 Now x3 – 1 = (x – 1) (x – ) (x – 2),
From (i) and (ii), dividing by x – 1
|b c c a a b| x2 + x + 1 = (x – ) (x – 2)
CM
|b a| or (x2 + x + 1)2 = (x – )2 (x – 2)2.
117. (b) We have, Put x = 2, we get (2 – )2 (2 – 2)2 = (7)2 = 49
dy ax 3 121. (c)
(ax + 3) dx = (2y + f) dy
dx 2y f
122 (c)
x2 123 (d)
a + 3x = y2 + fy + C (Integrating)
2 124 (b) The second part of the sentence explains
or amplifies the part before the semicolon.
a 2 2 Since his recordings range widely, his tastes
x + y – 3x + fy + C = 0
2 could be described as wide-ranging, or
This will represent a circle, if eclectic.
125 (d)
Solutions MT-141
MOCK TEST 3
1. (a) Also 3 > 1 otherwise the ball would have
floated in liquid 1. From the above
1 q2 (8 10 18 ) 2
2. (c) Work done = = discussion we conclude that
2 c 2 100 10 8
1 < 3 < 2.
= 32 × 10–32 J 9. (a) In mass spectrometer, when ions are
3. (d) Unit positive charge at O will be repelled accelerated through potential V
equally by three charges at the three corners
of triangle. 1
mv 2 qV ..........(i)
By symmetry, resultant E at O would be 2
zero. As the magnetic field curves the path of
4. (d) the ions in a semicircular orbit
5. (a) If m1, m2 are masses and u1, u2 are velocity
mv 2 BqR
then by conservation of momentum m1u1 Bqv v .......... (ii)
R m
+ m2u2 = 0 or | m1u1 | | m2 u 2 | Substituting (ii) in (i)
R/2 2
1 BqR q 2V
m qV or
6. (a) 2 m m B2 R 2
Since V and B are constants,
R/2
q 1
R R
. m R2
R1 R 2 2 2
Re q R 10. (d) Magnetic moment, m = IA
R1 R 2 R R R eq
4 qv qvR
2 2 ( R2 )
7. (a) A balanced wheatstone bridge simply 2 R 2
requires
q 2 R
P R 2 2 I and T
T v
Q S 2 S
11. (a) Electron moves undeflected if force exerted
Therefore, S should be 2 . due to electric field is equal to force due to
A resistance of 6 is connected in parallel.
magnetic field.
In parallel combination,
1 1 1 |E|
q | v || B | q | E | |v|
R R1 R2 | B|
12. (a) Conservative force is negative gradient
1 1 1
S 3 of potential
2 6 S
8. (d) From the figure it is clear that liquid 1 floats –dV(x)
F(x) =
on liquid 2. The lighter liquid floats over dx
heavier liquid. Therefore we can conclude 13. (b) Efficiency of the transformer
that 1 2 Poutput 100
100 100 90.9%
Also 3 < 2 otherwise the ball would have Pinput 220 0.5
sink to the bottom of the jar. 14. (d) Condition for which the current is maximum
in a series LCR circuit is,
EBD_7443
MT-142 Target VITEEE
1 En 21.76 10 19
Thus U n
LC 2 2
1 = – 10.88 × 10–19 J
1000 22. (a)
L(10 10 6 ) 23. (c) The stimulating radiation is an electro-
= L = 100 mH magnetic wave of suitable frequency.
34
1 1 hc 6.6 10 3 108
24. (d) Energy J
15. (d) At resonance L = , = 0.5 10 10
C LC
E 6.6 10 34 3 108
Current through circuit i = = eV = 24.82 keV
R 5 10 11 1.6 10 19
Power dissipated at Resonance = i2R
h
d(i 0 sin t ) 25. (a) Moment of photon p
di
16. (b) e M = 0.005
dt dt
E mc 2 But, p mc
= –0.005 × i0 ×( cos t)
E mc.c so, E pc
e max . 0.005 i 0 (when cos t = –1)
= 0.005 × 10 × 100 = 5 V hc hc
E pc
17. (c) Variation in magnetic field causes electric
field and vice versa.
h c hf
In electromagnetic waves, E B. Both p and p
f c
E and B are in the same phase.
1
In electromagnetic waves 26. (d) qV m v 2 or m v 2q Vm ;
E E0 sin( t kx) 2
B B0 sin( t kx) h h 1
so i.e. ;
The electromagnetic waves travel in the mv 2q V m qm
direction of (E B). p q m
so 2 4 2 2
0. 4 q pm p
18. (a) ' 0.3 mm
4
hc hc
3 27. (d) eV0 W0 and eV W0
19. (a) As the floor exerts a force on the ball along 0 2 0
the normal, & no force parallel to the Subtracting them we have
surface, therefore the velocity component
hc 1 hc
along the parallel to the floor remains e ( V0 V) 1
constant. Hence V sin = V1 sin 1. 0 2 2 0
20. (b) From Brewster’s law
or V hc
= tan i V0
i = tan–1 = tan–1(1.5) = 57° 2e 0
21. (c) The total energy of the electron in n th orbit
stress
is given by 28. (a) tan(90 )
En = Tn + Un strain
29. (b) Bason group
1 ze2 1 ze 2 photon, pion, graviton, kaon
4 0 2rn 4 0 2rn 30. (c) The half life of the sample is
or En = 2Un
N0
Here En = –21.76 × 10–19 J 0.693
N
Solutions MT-143
7 1 8 4 4
39. (b)
31. (a) 3 Li 1H 4 Be 2 He 2 He 40. (c) here, m = 4 , g = 4 × 10–3 kg
This nuclear reaction is not possible x 4t 2 t
32. (c) A A 4 A 4 dx d2 x
ZX Z 2X Z 2 1X 8t 1 8
no. of neutron = A – 4 – (Z – 2 + 1) dt dt 2
= A – 4 – (Z – 1) d 2 x dx
Work done, W fdx m dt
=A– Z– 4 + 1 =A– Z– 3 dt 2 dt
33. (d) During the formation of a junction diode. 2
Holes from p-region diffuse into n-region (4 10 3 )(8)(8 t 1) dt
and electrons from n-region diffuse into p- 0
region. In both cases, when an electrons 2
meets a hole, they cancel the effect to each 32 10 3 (8t 1)dt
other and as a result, a thin layer at the 0
junction becomes free from any of charges 2
carriers. This is called depletion layer there 8t 2
3
32 10 t
is a potential gradient in the depletion layer, 2
negative on the p-side, and positive on the 0
= 32 × 10–3 [4(2)2 + 2 – 0] = 576 mJ
n-side. The potential difference thus
developed across the junction is called 41. (b) For reaction 3A B C
potential barrier. If it is zero order reaction r = k [A]0, i.e the
34. (b) Output of upper AND gate = AB rate remains same at any concentration of
'A'. i.e independent upon concentration of
Output of lower AND gate = AB A.
Output of OR gate, Y A B BA 42. (b) For a first order reaction, A products
This is boolean expression for XOR gate. r
r k[A] or k
35. (c) As we know that I Ic Ib [ A]
Divide by I c both side
1.5 10 2
k = 3 × 10–2
Ie Ib 1 1 0.5
1 1
Ic Ic 1
0.693 0.693
36. (a) In reverse bias the current through a p-n Further, t1/ 2 23.1
junction is almost zero. 3 10 2k
37. (a) The critical frequency of a sky wave for 43. (c) We know that the activation energy of
reflection from a layer of atmosphere is given chemical reaction is given by formula
by fc = 9(Nmax)1/2
k2 E a é T2 - T1 ù
10 × 106 = 9(Nmax)1/2 = k = 2.303 êê T T úú , where k 1 is the
1 ë 1 2 û
2
10 106 rate constant at temperature T1 and k2 is
Nmax 1.2 1012 m 3
9 the rate constant at temperature T2 and Ea
is the activation energy. Therefore
38. (c) Frictional force is always opposite to the activation energy of chemical reaction is
direction of motion determined by evaluating rate constant at
N two different temperatures.
44. (b) r k[A]n if n = 0
W E
r k[A]0
S
EBD_7443
MT-144 Target VITEEE
or r = k thus for zero order reactions rate is 27
equal to the rate constant. Eq. wt of Al3+ = =9
3
45. (b) H Ea(f ) Ea(b) No. of gm eq. of H+ = no. of mole of H+
Thus energy of activation for reverse Hence Mass of H+ = 0.5 × 1g = 0.5 g
reaction depend upon whether reaction is We know that, 2g H2 at STP = 22.4 L
exothermic or endothermic 22.4
If reaction is exothermic, H ve 0.5 g H2 at STP = = ´ 0.5 = 5.6 L
2
Ea(b) Ea(f ) 49. (a) Thermodynamic is based on conservation
of energy.
If reaction is endothermic H ve According to Ist law of thermodynamics
Ea(b) Ea(f ) Supplied heat to any system is used as
46. (d) Given molarity = 0.01 M work and change in internal energy ( E )
Resistance = 40 ohm; Supplied heat to the system, Q = w + E
l 1
E = Q –w
Cell constant 0.4 cm . 50. (c) (CH3)2NH is most basic because two electron
A
releasing groups are present on Nitrogen.
Specific conductivity ( ) Also aromatic amines are less basic then
aliphatic amines. The basic character of
cell constant 0.4
= amines follow the order
resistance 40 R2NH > RNH2 > C6H5NHCH3 > NH3
1 51. (c) The mecahnism of Hoffmann bromide
= 0.01 ohm cm 1
reaction is
1000 (i) RCONH 2 Br2 RCONHBr HBr
Molar conductance ( m)
Molarity
OH
(ii) RCONHBr HBr R — CO N Br H 2O
1000 .01
10 3 ohm 1
cm mol 2 1
.01 K
+
(iii) R — C — N —Br R — C — N + KBr
47. (d) Given for the reaction
O O
Zn (s) Cu (2aq ) Cu (s ) Zn 2(aq ) , R
Eº = +1.10 V.
(iv) O = C N•• R—N=C=O
At equilibrium
••
(rearrangement)
0.0591
E cell log10 K eq
n (v) R N C O 2KOH RNH 2 K 2 CO 3
here (n number of exchan ge of
electrons) 52. (d) NH2 NHCOCH3
0.0591 (CH 3CO)2O Br2
or 1.10 log10 K eq
2 CH3COOH
2.20
log10 k eq = 37.22 CH3 CH3
0.059 (A)
or Keq = 1.66 × 1037 NHCOCH3 NH2
48. (d) No. of gram equivalent of H+ = No. of gm eq. of Br
+
H /H2O Br
4.5
Al3+ = 0.5
9 CH3 CH3
(B) (C)
Solutions MT-145
53. (c) Due to greater electron-withdrawing effect 59. (a) Fraction of unoccupied sites in NaCl crystal
of NO2, and also due to additional resonance
x-ray density–pyknometric density
due to –NO2 group in the phenoxide ion,
nitrophenols are stronger acids than x-ray density
chlorophenol. Further since resonance in
p-nitrophenoxide ion is more important than 2.178´103 - 2.165´103 0.13´103
= =
that in m-nitrophenoxide ion, former is more 2.178´103 2.178 ´103
stable, hence p-nitrophenol is more acidic
than m-nitrophenol. o-Nitrophenol is least 130
= = 5.96 × 10–3
acidic among the three isomers due to ortho- 2178
effect. 60. (c) For a spontaneous reaction
54. (b) Only amides (but not acids and esters) G(–ve), which is possible if S = +ve,
undergo hydrolysis in presence of soda- H = +ve
lime to form sodium salt of a carboxylic acid and T S > H [As G = H – T S]
and ammonia gas. Further, since the given 61. (c) [Co(NH3)6]3+ Co3+(27 –3 = 24)
compound is a liquid, it must be formamide,
because propanamide is a solid
55. (b) RCONH 2 NaOH RCOOH 2 3
NH 3 d sp
59 g (1 mole ) 17 g (1 mole )
(inner octahedral
complex & diamagnetic)
Thus wt. of 1 mole of RCONH2 = 59
In other words, R + 12 + 16 + 14 + 2 = 59 [Cr(NH3)6]3+ Cr3+(24 –3 = 21)
R = 59 – 44 = 15 2 3
Molecular mass of R as 15 corresponds to d sp (inner octahedral
CH3 group, hence RCOOH should be complex & paramagnetic)
CH3COOH
[Ni(NH3)6]2+ Ni2+ (28 – 2 = 26)
56. (a) The relation between free energy change
and equilibrium constant is given by
Nernst equation 3 2
sp d (outer octahedral
RT complex & paramagnetic)
E Eº ln Q
nF
[Zn(NH3)6]2+ Zn 2+(30 – 2 = 28)
At equilibrium, E c = 0 and Q = KC
RT 3 2
Eº ln K …(i) sp d (outer octahedral
nF complex &diamagnetic)
Again Gº = nFEº …(ii)
put in (i) 62. (a) The given compound may have linkage
G º RT
isomerism due to presence of NO2 group
lnK ; G º RT lnK which may be in the form –NO2 or –ONO.
nF nF
It may have ionisation isomerism due to
57. (c) A body-centred cubic system consists of
presence of two ionisable group –NO2 & –
all eight corners plus one atom at the centre
Cl. It may have geometrical isomerism in
of cube.
58. (d) If in an ionic crystal of the type A+, B–, the form of cis-trans form as follows :
equal number of cations and anions are [Co(NH3 ) 4 Cl(NO 2 )]NO 2 & [Co(NH3 )
missing from their lattice sites so that the (NO2)2]Cl ––– ionisation isomers.
electrical neutrality is maintained. The [Co(NH3)5(NO2)2]Cl & [Co(NH3)5(ONO)2Cl
defect is called Schottky defect. ––– Linkage isomers
EBD_7443
MT-146 Target VITEEE
66. (a) Chloro diaquatriammine cobalt (III) chloride
NO2 NO2
is [CoCl( NH 3 )3 (H 2O) 2 ]Cl 2
H3N NH3 H3N NO2 67. (a) The basic character of the transition metal
monoxide is TiO > VO > CrO > FeO because
CO CO
basic character of oxides decrease with
NH3 NH3 NH3 NH3 increase in atomic number. Oxides of
transitional metals in low oxidation state
NO2 NH3 i.e., + 2 and + 3 are generally basic except
Trans-form cis-form Cr2O3.
68. (c) According to VSEPR theory, a molecule
Geometrical isomers with six bond pairs must be octahedral.
63. (b) Lesser is the number of unpaired electrons 69. (b) Due to –I effect of the –COOH group, H-
smaller will be the paramagnetic behaviour. bonds in acids are much stronger than in
As Cr++, Mn++, Fe++ & Ni++ contains. alcohols; while aldehydes do not exhibit
H-bonding.
Cr++ (3d4) = 70. (d) Since acetic acid freezes at 16.6ºC while
water freezes at 0ºC, glacial acetic acid is
= 4 unpaired e–. obtained by crystallising, separating and
melting acetic acid.
Mn++ (3d5) =
1 2
= 5 unpaired e–. 71. (d) 2-Phenylethanol, C H 2OH C H 2C 6 H 5 , is
a 1º alcohol which can be prepared from
Fe++ (3d6)= C6H5MgBr by treating with ethylene oxide
= 4 unpaired e–. (note that HCHO will introduce only one
carbon atom, i.e. it will give C6H5CH2OH
Ni++ (3d8) = and not C6H5CH2CH2OH).
= 2 unpaired e–. C H MgBr O
6 5
As Ni++has minimum no. of unpaired e–
thus this is least paramagnetic. C 6 H 5 CH 2 CH 2 OH ;
64. (c) Given t1/2 = 12.3 years
C 6 H 5 MgBr HCHO C 6 H 5 CH 2 OH
Initial amount (N0) = 32 mg
Total time = 49.2 years 72. (a) Among acetic acid, phenol and n-hexanol
only CH 3 COOH reacts with NaHCO3 to
T 49.2
No. of half lives ( n ) 4 evolve CO2 gas.
t1 / 2 12.3
CH3COOH + NaHCO3
n 4 CH3COONa + CO2 + H2O
1 1 32
now N t N0 = 32 = 2 mg
2 2 16 73. (d) Iodoform test is exhibited by ethyl alcohol
acetaldehyde, acetone methyl ketones and
Hence 32 mg becomes 2 mg in 49.2 years
those alcohols which possess CH3CH(OH)-
65. (d) Remaining activity = 0.01M group. As 3-pentanone does not contain
after 24 hrs CH3CO-group as therefore it does not give
n iodoform test.
1
Remaining activity = Initial activity 74. (b) Acetaldehyde reacts only with
2 nucleophiles.
Total time 24
Since the mobile p electrons of carbon–
Used half life time (n) = 4 oxygen double bond are strongly pulled
T1 / 2 6
towards oxygen, carbonyl carbon is
4 electron-deficient and carbonyl oxygen is
1 electron-rich. the electron deficient (acidic)
So, 0.01 = Initial activity
2 carbonyl carbon is most susceptible to
Initial activity = 0.01 × 16 = 0.16M attack by electron rich nucleophilic
Solutions MT-147
reagents, that is, by base. Hence the typical 80. (a) 725 - 720 cm–1.
reaction of aidehydes and ketones is Generally in case of long chain alkanes
nucleophilic addition. C – H rocking frequency classically
75. (d) Dihydrogen sodium phosphate (NaH2PO4) characterized in the region of 725 - 720 cm–1.
does not have a lone pair of electrons on
81. (b) We have 2y cos = x sin
the P atom. As such it can not act as a
nucleophile and hence does not react with cos sin
aldehydes and ketones. or k (say)
x 2y
OH
C CH HO C CH 3 Then cos = kx and sin = 2ky ...(1)
H 2SO 4 /HgSO 4 Again 2x sec – y cosec = 3
76. (a)
O or 2 x y
3
C–CH3 cos sin
–H2O 2x y
or 3 [from (1)]
Acetophenone
kx 2ky
77. (d) Out of given compound only acetaldehyde
can form optical active hydroxy acid as it 2 1 1
or 3 , giving k =
contains one asymmetric carbon atom as k 2k 2
marked below :
x
O OH We now get cos and sin =y
|| | 2
HCN
CH3 C H CH3 C CN Squaring and adding we get
|
CH
x2
O cos2 + sin2 =
| 4 y2
hydrolysis
CH3 C* H
|
x2
COOH y2 1 , or x2 + 4y2 =4
78. (c) Chlorine is electron withdrawing group. 4
Further Inductive effect is stronger at 82. (c) We have
position than -position. i.e.,
x2 x 2 ( x2 x 1) 1
f (x)
2 2
CH 2 ClCOOH CH 2 Cl CH 2 OOH x x 1 x x 1
79. (c) d xy eg [d 2 2 , d 2 ] 1
x y z 1 2
electronic transition 1 3
x
If we see the d elctronic configuration of 2 4
Ti, it has d 1 configuration. Since
We can see here that as x , f (x) 1
[Ti(H2O)6]3+ is an octahedral compound which is the min value of f (x). i.e. fmin = 1.
hence the d-orbital splitting will be
2
d x 2–y2 , d z2
1 3
Energy Also f (x) is max when x is min
2 4
eg
electron transition which is so when x = – 1/2
t2g e 2
dxy dxz dyz 1 3 3
i.e. when x .
2 4 4
Here an electron which is present in t2g
excites and transition occuring from 1
fmax 1 7/3 Rf = (1, 7/3]
d xy eg[d 2 2 , d 2 ] . 3/4
x y z
EBD_7443
MT-148 Target VITEEE
83. (d)
86. (b) We have PQ AP PB PC
2 2
2 + 2x + x 1+x
1 x PQ AB PC
AB PQ PC PQ CP
1+x 1
1 = CP PQ CQ .
sin cot 1 1 x
2 2x x 2
A
1
cos(tan–1x) =
1 x2 B
P
C
1 1
So,
2
2 2x x 1 x2
Q
1
1 + 2x = 0 x=
2 AB CQ and AB || CQ
84. (d)
ABQC is a parallelogram.
2 2
sin 1 sin 1 2 tan 1 x Q is a fixed point.
2 2
1 1 87. (c) Since, A is obtuse angle 90 A 180
2tan–1 + 2tan–1 = 2tan–1 x
90 180 (B C) 180
2x
[ 2 tan–1 x = sin–1 ] 90 B C 0 B C 90
1 x2
tan–1 + tan–1 = 2 tan –1 x B 90 C tan B tan(90 C)
2x tan B cot C tan B tan C 1
2 tan 1 x sin 1
1 x2 88. (c) Chord PQ is normal to the parabola at Q
tan–1 + tan–1 = tan–1 x and is equation is
y = mx – 2am – am3 ...(1)
tan 1 tan 1 x
1 P
x y
[ tan–1 x + tan–1 y = tan–1 1 xy ]
90º X
O
x
1 Q
85. (b) We have The slope of normal PQ is m = tan . The
(gof) (1) = g (f (1)) = g (3) = 1 joint equation of OP and OQ is obtained by
(fog) (1) = f (g (1)) = f (4) = 1 making the equation of parabola y2 = 4ax
(gof) (2) = g (f (2)) = g (5) = 3 homogeneous with the help of (1). Thus
(fog) (2) = f (g (2)) = f (1) = 3 joint equation of lines OP, OQ is
(gof) (3) = g (f (3)) = g (3) = 1
mx y
(fog) (3) = f (g (3)) = f (1) = 3 y2 = 4ax
(gof) (4) = g (f (4)) = g (1) = 4 2am am3
(fog) (4) = f (g (4)) = f (2) = 5 or m (2 + m2) y2 + 4xy – 4mx2 = 0 ...(2)
(gof) (5) = g (f (5)) = g (2) = 1
(fog) (5) = f (g (5)) = f (3) = 3 Since POQ = , th e sum of the
2
gof = {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 1), (4, 4), (5, 1)} coefficients of x2 and y2 in (2) must be zero.
and fog = {(1, 1), (2, 3), (3, 3), (4, 5), (5, 3)}. m (2 + m2) – 4m = 0 or m (m2 – 2) = 0
Solutions MT-149
As m 0, we get m2 = 2 or m = ± 2 . 6
having the first throw = and that of the
Thus, m = 2 . 11
89. (b) Let (x1, y1)be the mid point of the variable 5
chord AP (where A is fixed while P varies) other = .
11
x2 y2 Hence the ratio of chances of their winning
of the hyperbola 1 = 6:5.
2
a b2
91. (c) The m men can be seated in m! ways
Equation of the chord having (x1, y1) as its
mid points is When they are seated, there are (m + 1)
places, shown by × where n women can
xx1 yy1 x12 y12 sit. Then no two women would be together
2 2 2 (T = S1)
a b a b2 as shown below
As it passes through the fixed point A (a, 0) × M × M × M × ...... × M ×
ax1 x12 y12 4x12 4 x1 4y12 Then n women can arrange themselves in
or 0
2 2 2 2
a a b a a b2 these (m + 1) places in m 1
Pn ways.
4x12 4ax1 a 2
4y12 Hence the required no. of ways
1
a2 2
b
m 1 m!(m 1)!
( 2x 1 a ) 2
4y12
= m! Pn
1 (m n 1)!
a2 b 2
92. (c) Put x sin 2 and a sin 2 . then
(2x a) 2 4y 2
Hence locus of (x1,y1) is 1
a2 b2 y sin 1 (sin cos cos sin )
90. (a) Let the persons be A and B.
Suppose that A has the first throw. We know 1 1
sin x sin a
that the probability of getting ‘a three’ in a
1 dy 1 1
single throw = and that of ‘not getting a dx 1 x 2 x
6
1 5 93. (c) z 3 iz 2 2i (z i )(z 2 2iz 2) 0
three’ = 1 .
6 6
z i, 1 i, – 1 – i
2 4
1 5 1 5 1 Let A = (0,1), B = (1,–1), C=(–1, –1),
P (A wins ) .....to
6 6 6 6 6
[Since, A can win at the 1st, 3rd, 5th, ..... 0 1 1
1
mutually exclusive trials with respective ABC 1 1 1
2
1 5
2
1 5
4
1 1 1 1
probabilities , , ...... ]
6 6 6 6 6
1
| 2 2| 2
1 5
2
5
2 2
1 .........
6 6 6 35
94. (b) Given mean = np = ...(i)
6
1 1 1 36 6
6 2 . 35
1
5 6 36 25 11 and variance = npq = ...(ii)
36
6
Solving (i) and (ii), we get
6 5 1 1 5
P(B wins) . 1 q= , p= 1
11 11 6 6 6
i.e. the probability of winning of the person we get n = 7
EBD_7443
MT-150 Target VITEEE
P (x = r) = nC pr qn – r for Binomial Thus R is equivalence relation.
r
distribution where r = 7
1
7 7 7 7 98. (a) It is given that a (b c) b
5 1 5 2
P (x > 6) = 7C7 . =
6 6 6 Note: a (b c) (a.c)b (a .b)c
95. (b) From the graph of f(x) = |sinx|, it is clear that 1
f(x) is continuous everywhere but not b (a .c)b (a .b)c
2
differentiable at x = n , n Z.
1
Y (a .c ) b (a .b)c 0 ...(i)
2
f(x) = y = |sin x|
Since b and c are non-parallel, therefore
for the existence of relation (i), the coeff. of
X b and c should vanish separately..
– 3 – 3 /2 – 2 – 3 /2 – – /2 O /2 3 /2 2 5 /2 3 .
Therefore, we get
96. (c) We have 1 1
a .c 0 i.e., a . c
and a . b = 0
x 2 2
y2 4a x a sin ........( i)
a Since a , b , c are the un it vectors
Differentiating w.r. t x, therefore
dy x 1 1
2y 4a 1 cos a.b . ( cos–1 = )
dx a 2 3 2
Since, the tangent is parallel to 3 2 1
99. (a) |A| 3 0 3 0 A exists
dy 0 1
x axis , 0
dx
1 0 1 2
This gives Adj. A
2 3 0 3
x x x
4a 1 cos 0 cos 1 sin 0
a a a 1 1 1 2
A
3 0 3
From (i) y 2 4a x 0 y 2 4ax,
which is the required locus. 1 1 2 1 2 1 2
(A 1 ) 3
97. (b) The relation is defined on N N . since 27 1 3 0 3 0 3
the elements of N N are ordered pairs 1 1 8 1 2 1 1 26
hence the relation on N N relates two 27 0 9 0 3 27 0 27
ordered pairs. Now,
(i) a , b N ab ba 100. (a) Given curves are y x .... (i)
and 2y – x + 3 = 0 .... (ii)
(a , b) R (a , b) (a , b) N N . Thus R is
Y
refiexive
(ii) Let y= x
(a, b) R (c, d) ad bc (a, b) and (c, d) N N
bc ad cb da (c, d) R (a , b) . 2y – x + 3 = 0
X X
Thus R is symmetric O
3
(iii) Again let (a,b) R (c,d) and (c,d) R (e,f) –3/2
ad bc and cf de
adcf bcde af de (a , b) R (e, f )
Thus R is transitive. Y
Solutions MT-151
3 or x 2 y2 z2 k2 .
y3
= y 2 3y 9 9 9 9
3 0 2
104. (a) I = cos sin3 d
101. (c) Given equations is cos x sin x 2 0
dy dz 1 1 1
Put tan y z sec 2 y 3
dx dx 1 1 1 40
3* * 3* 5 2 3*
dz 2 5 2 4 40 4
The equation becomes z x3 ,
dx x 3
which is linear in z =
160
The integrating factor is
P
2
dx
110 (a)
x 2 log x log x 2 2
I.F. e e e x
Hence, the solution is
Q
x6
z( x 2 ) x 3 ( x 2 ) dx a zx 2 a,
6 R S
a is constant of integration.
The four points are P (–2, 3, 4), Q (–4, 4, 6),
(6tan y)x 2 x 6 6a 6x 2 tan y x 6 c, R (4, 3, 5), S (0, 1, 2).
[c = 6a] direction ratios of RS are
107. (a) The system of equations will be consistent 0 – 4, 1 – 3, 2 – 5, i.e., 4, 2, 3.
if
Dividing each by ( 4) 2 ( 2) 2 (3) 2 , i.e.,
1 2
1 2 0
29 , the actual direction cosines' of RS
3
4 2 3
To evaluate we use R1 R 1 R 2 are , , .
29 29 29
followed by C 2 C 2 C1 to obtain
Projection of PQ on RS
1 1 0 1 0 0 4 2 3
= ( 4 2) ( 4 3) (6 4 )
1 2 1 2 29 29 29
3 0 3
1
( 8 2 6) 0
= 3( 1)(1 ) 3(1 2 ) 29
For the system to be consistent, we must which implies that PQ RS
have 1 2
0 or 1. 111. (c) As given,
Mean = np = 3 and Variance = npq = 2
dv
108. (d) The retardation at time t . Hence, npq 2 2
dt
np 3
q=
the differential equation is 3
dv dv 2 1
v dt ...(i) and p = ( 1– q) = 1 –
dt v 3 3
Integrating, we get log v t c ...(ii) 1
n. 3 n=9
When t 0, v V C log V 3
The equation (ii) becomes log v = – t + P(X > 8) = P(X = 8) + P(X = 9)
logV 8 9
9 1 2 9 1
v v t t = C8 C9
log t e v Ve 3 3 3
V V
8 9
ab 1 2 1 18 1 19
109. (a) Given that a * b a, b Q =9 1 = 9
4 3 3 3 3 39
Solutions MT-153
dx dy
n2 x y 0 ....(2)
112. (c) Tn dt dt
(2n 1) . 2n . (2n 1) . (2n 2)
When OA = 12, i.e. x = 12 then from (1),
n 132 = 122 + y2
2(2 n 1)(2 n 1)(2 n 2)
or y 13 2 12 2 5.
1 1 1 1 dx
= 2 12 (2n 1) Putting the values of y and in (2),
4 (2n 1) 3 (2n 2) dt
1 1 3 4 5 dy
we get 12 5 0
= 2 dt
24 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2
dy dy
1 1 4 1 4 or 30 5 0; 6ft / sec .
= dt dt
24 2n 1 2n 1 2n 2 Hence the end B is moving at the rate of
6ft/sec. The negative sign shows the
1 1 1 1 1 downward tendency of B i.e.y decreases
= 2 2n 1 2n 1 4 2 n 1 2 n 2
when t increases)
Putting n = 1, 2, 3, 4 and adding, we get 114. (b) Any tangent to the parabola y2 = 8ax is
1 1 1 1 1 1 2a
S 1 .... y = mx+ ...(i)
m
24 3 3 5 5 7
If (i) is a tangent to the circle, x2 + y2 = 2a2
1 1 1 1 2a
4 ... then, 2a
3 4 5 6
m m2 1
1 1 m2(1 + m2) = 2 ( m2 + 2)(m2 – 1) = 0;
= 24 1 4 log e 2 1
2 m = 1.
So from (i), y = (x + 2a).
1 1 1 115. (c) Let the no. of pencils in a bag be x
= (4 log e 2 1) log e 2 Let the no. of pens in a bag be y. There
24 6 24
should be at least 5 items in a bag
Note that sum of n terms of the first series
we have x + y 5
1 cost of pencils in a bag = `5x
is 1 which tends to 1 as n .
2n 1 cost of pens in bag `10y
Thus the sum of the first infinite series is 1. Total cost of a bag = 5x + 10y,
113. (b) At time t, let OA = x and OB = y. The total cost has to minimized
dx 1 Objective function is minimize
Then 2 ft./sec. C = 5x + 10y subject to x + y 5, x 0, y 0
dt 2
Y sin 2 x sin x 1
116. (c) Let I 2, 4 dx I 0, 2
B 4 3 3
13ft cos x 3 . cos x
sin x 1
O A X tan x c
3 3
3 cos x
dy
and we have to find .
dt 1 1
tan x 1 tan 2 x tan x c
From right angled AOB, 3 3
we have AB2 = OA2+OB2
1
132 = x2 + y2 ....(1) tan 3 x c
Differentiating with respect to t, we get 3
EBD_7443
MT-154 Target VITEEE
ALTERNATE : of eq. (ii) and the given line are
perpendicular.
sin 2 x
dx tan 2 x . sec 2 x dx ˆi ˆj 2kˆ .
cos x4 b1ˆi b 2 ˆj b3 kˆ 0
put tan x t b1 b 2 2b3 0
1 3 1
t 2 . dt
t c tan 3 x c b1 b2 2b3 0 ...(iv)
3 3
Similarly,
117. (b) We have ae = 5 [Since focus is (±ae, 0)]
a 3iˆ ˆj kˆ . b1ˆi b 2 ˆj b3 kˆ 0
a 36
and since directrix is x
e 5 e (3b1 + b2 + b3) = 0 ...(v)
From eqs. (iv) and (v), we obtain
5
On solving we get a = 6 and e = b1 b2 b3
6
1 1 1 2 2 3 1 1 1 1 3 1
2 2 25 2
b a (1 e ) 36 1 11 b1 b 2 b3
36
3 5 4
Thus, the required equation of the ellipse
Therefore, the direction ratios of b are –3, 5
x2 y2 and 4.
is 1.
36 11
b b 1ˆi b2ˆj b3kˆ 3iˆ 5jˆ 4kˆ
sin nx tan x
118. (d) lim n . lim (a n )n 0 Substituting the value of b in eq. (i), we
x 0 nx x 0 x obtain
n((a n)n 1) 0 ˆi 2jˆ 3kˆ
r 3iˆ 5jˆ 4kˆ
1 This is the equation of the required line.
(a n)n 1 a n .
n 120. (b)
119. (c) The equation of line passing through (1, 2,
3) and parallel to b is given by 121 (d)
MOCK TEST 4
1. (b) In shell , q charge is uniformly distributed 7. (d) It is a balanced Wheatstone bridge. Hence
over its surface it behaves as a conductor. resistance 4 can be eliminated.
X 6 9 18
X q R eq
6 9 5
R X V 5V
X i
X X R eq 18
X 8. (d) Current in the circuit
V = potential at surface E E 2E
q q r1 r2 R r1 r2 R
and inside V
4 0R 4 0R P.D. across first cell = E – ir 1
Because of this it behaves as an E r1
E
equipotential surface. (r1 r2 ) R
2. (b) Net field along,
2Er1
Now, E 0
kQ 2 kQ kq (r1 r2 ) R
AB =0
a2 ( 2a ) 2 a
2
2Er1
E 2r1 r1 r2 R
2 r1 r2 R
R = r 1 – r2
–Q –Q
9. (a) As for an electric appliance R (Vs2 / W ) ,
so for same specified voltage Vs
R 25 100
4
R 100 25
–Q –Q
i.e, R 25 4R with R100 R
Q 2 Q Q Now in series potential divides in
2q q (2 2 1)
1 2 4 proportion to resistance.
1 1 2 R1
CV 2 q /C So, V1 V
3. (c) W= U = (R 1 R 2 )
2 2
1 q1q 2 4
i.e., V25 440 352V
4. (a) In air Fair = 2 5
4 0 r
R2
1 q1q 2 and V2 V
In medium Fm = ( R1 R 2 )
4 0 Kr 2
1
i.e., V100 440 88V
Fm 1 Fair 5
Fm
Fair K K From this, it is clear that voltage across 100
W bulb (= 88 V) is lesser than specified
(decreases K-times)
(220 V) while across 25 W bulb (= 352 V) is
5. (c) By using m = ZIt
greater than specified (220 V), so, 25 W bulb
Where, Z is the electrochemical equivalent will fuse.
of copper.
Change in length
m 30 10 5 1.5 10 60 = 0.27 gm. 10. (a) strain =
6. (a) Kirchoff's first law deals with conservation Original length
of electrical charge & the second law deals 11. (d) When the deflection produced by electric
with conservation of electrical energy. field is equal to the deflection produced by
EBD_7443
MT-156 Target VITEEE
magnetic field, then the electron can go x 1
undeflected. or = .
y 3
0i
B and so it is independent of 18. (c) Interference is a wave phenomenon shown
2 r by both the light waves and sound waves.
thickness. 19. (c) Two sources of light are said to be coherent
12. (a) Let I be current and l be the length of the if they emit light having a constant phase
wire. relationship.
0 In 0I dU
For Ist case : B where 20. (d) | F | = , which is greatest in the reagion
2r l dx
2 r l and n = 1 CD.
l 21. (d) For hydrogen atom
For IInd Case : l 2(2 r' ) r'
4
1 1 1
R
0 nI 0 2I 4 0I n12 n 22
B' 4B
2r ' l l
2 For first condition
4
1
R v0 ; n1 2, n 2 1
13. (b) Power factor,
2
1
L R2 1 1 1 1
C v0 R R
2 2 4 1
(2) (1)
8 8
3 4
(31 25)2 82 6 2 82 v0 R or R v0
4 3
For second condition
0.8
10 4
R (constant) n1 = 4, n2 = 1
14. (d) When there is change of flux in the core of 3
a transformer due to change in current
around it, eddy current is produced. The 1 4 1 1
v0
direction of this current is opposite to the 3 (4)2 (1)2
current which produces it, so it will reduce
the main current. We laminate the core so 4 1 1 4 15 5
that flux is reduced resulting in the reduced v0 v0 v0
3 16 1 3 16 4
production of eddy current.
22. (a)
Np Ep 1
15. (b) QV 4 3
Ns Es 25 23. (b) r g and
3
Es = 25 Ep
But EsIs = EpIp QV 4 QV
(2 r )3 g so 8
25Ep × 2 = Ep × Ip Ip = 50 A 3 QV
16. (d) Quality factor
or Q 8 QV 800
Potential drop across capacitor or inductor 8Q 2Q
= V 3200
Potential drop across R
24. (c)
I L L 25. (b) Since work function for a metal surface is
=
IR R hc
17. (c) The heat lost in condensation = x × 540 cal. W
0
x 540 = y 80 y 1 (100 – 0) where is threshold wavelength or cut-
0
Solutions MT-157
off wavelength for a metal surface. can cross over to conduction band at 0 K.
here W = 4.125, But at room temperature some electrons in
eV = 4.125 × 1.6 × 10–19 Joule the valence band jump over to the
34 conduction band due to the small forbidden
6.6 10 3 108
so 0 3000A º gap, i.e., 1 eV.
4.125 1.6 10 19
26. (b) As per Einstein’s photoelectric equation : V0 10
34. (c) V V
E= h wF KE max
i.e. till a certain valve of , KE remains 0, it 35. (a)
only starts increasing once the Work 36. (b) A Y1
function (WF) of the metal surface is B
achieved. Y
27. (d) By Newton’s second law of motion
F = n(mv) = nmv Y2
h
28. (c) de Broglie wavelength, = Y1 A B, Y2 A.B
2mEK.E
Y (A B).AB AB BA
p m 4m p
This expression is for XOR
mp mp 37. (c) Change in momentum of the ball
= mv sin – (– mv sin )
[ E K.E ( ) E K.E ( p) ]
= 2 mv sin
p 2 2vsin
=
1 = mg g
29. (a) = weight of the ball × total time of flight
30. (a) Binding energy 38. (d) Let the velocity of the particle be v m/s.
E = [Zmp + (A – Z)mn – M]c2
Momentum of the particle (p) = mv
It can be shown as
Mass defect M Kinetic energy of the particle
= Mass of nucleons – Mass of nucleus. 1 1 (mv )2
From Einstein mass energy relation (E) = mv 2 .
E = Mc2 2 2 m
E = {Zmp + Nmn) – M}c2
p2
If A is the mass number, then N = A – Z E
Binding energy 2m
E = [Zmp + (A – Z)mn – M]c2 39. (a) Let the readings of two thermometers
31. (d) -rays are electrically neutral. The -rays coincide at C = F = x
are electromagnetic waves like X-rays. They C F 32
are called -photons. Thus, there will be no As
5 9
change in either mass number or atomic
number of the element. x x 32
32. (a) Let no. of -particles emitted be x and no. 5 9
of particles emitted be y. or 9x = 5x – 160
Diff. in mass no. 4x = 238 – 206 = 32 x = 8 4x = – 160, x = – 40°C
Diff. in charge no. 2x – 1y = 92 – 82 = 10 40. (d)
16 – y = 10, y = 6
33. (c) In semiconductors, the conduction is P h g 200 103 10
K 2 109
empty and the valence band is completely V /V V /V 0.1/100
filled at 0 K. No electron from valence band
EBD_7443
MT-158 Target VITEEE
41. (b) Dehydration of CH3 OH gives carbene 49. (a) Galvanization
(methylene), an unstable intermediate. 50. (c) R CONH 2
Br2 / KOH
RNH 2
H 2SO 4 This is known as Hoffmann’s Bromamide
CH 3OH [: CH 2 ] H 2O
Carbene reaction.
51. (c) Br2 / KOH
42. (a) The streching frequency for C = O in R CONH 2 RNH 2
case of aliphatic ketones is 1715 cm –1. This is known as Hoffmann’s Bromamide
43. (a) Due of chelation (intramolecular H- reaction.
bonding), o-nitrophenol has less b.p. than 52. (b) When benzaldehyde is refluxed with
the p-nitrophenol in which association of aqueous alcoholic potassium cyanide, two
molecules is possible due to intermolecular molecules of benzaldehyde condense
H-bonding. Hence the two isomers have together to form benzain
considerably different boiling points. H O
KCN (alc)
44 (c) Ethers react with Cl2 in presence of light to —C +C—
form fully chlorimated product (all hydrogen O H
atoms of the alkyl groups are replaced by H O
chlorine). —C +C—
45. (b) Only –OCOCH3 is electron-releasing due
OH
to presence of lone pair of electrons on the Benzoin
key atom. 53. (d) Aldehydes which contain a -hydrogen
on a saturated carbon, i.e., CH3CH2CHO
O O
.. || || undergo aldol condensation.
O
.. C CH 3 C OCH 3
H CH3
| |
CH3CH 2 – C O H H C CHO
O
|| propanol
C N C OH
CH3 CH3
2.303RT .0591 OH
| |
46. (c) E cell log K eq log K eq CH3CH2 C CHCHO
nF n |
OH
.0591
= log 10 6 = .0591 × 3 = 0.1773 3-hydroxy-2-methyl pentanal
2 54. (a) When 3 molecules are combined in
47. (a) The equivalent conductance of BaCl2 at presence of dry HCl gas they condense to
infinite dilution form phorone.
1 CH3 CH3
of BaCl2 of Ba of Cl –
2 C = O + H2 CHCOCH H2 + O = C
CH3 CH3
127 –1 2
76 139.5 ohm cm CH 3 CH 3
2 HCl
48. (c) d-d electronic transition from t2g eg state C CH.CO.CH C
–2H 2O CH 3
associated with an amount of energy which CH 3
comes under visible green region. Note : Two molecules of acetone condense
Here in the given compound Ni2+ is d8 to form mesityl oxide.
system so it is an octahedral compound CH3
hence splitting pattern will be C = O + H2 CHCOCH3
eg CH3
electronic CH 3
transition C = CH.CO.CH3
t2g CH 3
Solutions MT-159
2.303 15.2
t 5760 log 5760 years
0.693 7.2
1/T
EBD_7443
MT-160 Target VITEEE
Ea O
Slope
2.303R MgBr C OMgBr
or E a –2.303R Slope (i) CO2 H3O
+
V
12 12
10 3 L 1.91 10 3 L
2 2 4
3.31 2.25 2 5
1 (2)
Work done = –(–1.91 × 10–3) × P × 101.3 J
1 7 4
1895J mol –1 Hence, given expression tan
P 9794 atm 25 5
1.91 10 3 101.3
1 atm = 105 × 1.013 Pa 1 27 1 2
tan tan 1
25 25 4
P 9.92 108 Pa
82. (c) Given equation is
77. (c) In fluorite structure each F – ion is
surrounded by four Ca++ ions whereas each 2 cot 2 2 3 cot 4 cos ec 8 0
Ca++ is surrounded by eight F– ions, giving 2 2
a body centred cubic arrangement. Thus (cot 3) cot 4 cos ec 5 0
the co-ordination number of Ca++ = F– are (cot 3 ) 2 (cos ec 2) 2 0
8 and 4.
78. (a) p-type of semiconductors are produced cot 2 cosec 2 1
(a) due to metal deficiency defects
cot 3 and cosec = – 2
(b)by adding impurity containing less
electrons (i.e. atoms of group 13)
Ge belongs to Group 14 and In to Group 13. lies is the 4th quadrant and
6
Hence on doping, p-type semicondutor is
obtained. General solution is 2n ,n I
79. (b) Pepsin and Trypsin are two enzymes 6
involved in the process (hydrolysis of 83. (b) We have f (x) = x2 + 7, x R.
proteins) f(–2) = (–2)2+ 7 =11, f (2) = (2)2 + 7 = 11
Pepsin/ HCl
The images of distinct elements –2 and
Pr oteins Proteases and Peptones 2 of R are equal.
Stomach
Trypsin
‘f’ cannot be one-one.
Peptides
Chemotrypsin 3
(Pancreatic juice Intestine) 84. (d) sin 2 cos 1
5
Peptidases
Amino acids
(Intistine)
3 3
80. (b) Peptide bonds are present in enzyme. 2 sin cos 1 cos cos 1
5 5
H
3 3
N C 2sin cos 1
5 5
O
6 3 6 9
2 tan sin cos 1 sin sin 1 1
81. (c) sin 2 5 5 5 25
1 tan 2
1 tan 2 6 4 24
and cos 2 5 5 25
2
1 tan
85. (c) n(A) = p, n(B) = q
9 n(A × B) = pq = 7
1
3 16 7
cos 2 tan 1 So, possible values of p, q are 7, 1
4 9 25 p2 + q2 = (7)2 + (1)2 = 50.
1
16
EBD_7443
MT-162 Target VITEEE
1 3 1 1 3
log e (1 x 2 tan x ) 1 ( 1) ( 2) 0
86. (b) f ( x) ; 1 1 1
3
sin x
1
( 1) (3 1) 2(1 3 ) 0 .
f(0) must be equal to Lt f ( x ) 5
x 0
A (1, 0, 4)
1
2
x 2 tan x log(1 x 2 tan x ) x tan x
Lt
x 0 sin x 3
1
tan x x 3 2
Lt log(1 x 2 tan x ) x tan x (0, –1, 5)B M
:1
C
x 0 x sin x 3 (2, –3, 1)
( y z 10) î ( z x 3)ˆj ( x y 7) k̂ 0
a2 b2 c2
y z 10, z x 3, x y 7 4 a b c
Also ;
(a 1) 2 (b 1) 2 (c 1) 2
R .A 0 2x 0 . y z 0 z 2x .
Solving, we obtain Apply R 3 R 3 2R 2 R 1
x = –1, y = –8, z = 2. Hence
a2 b2 c2
R î 8 ĵ 2 k̂ . 4 a b c
= 4 (a – b) (b – c) (c – a).
92. (c) We have 1 1 1
fog = { (1, 1), (2, 4), (3, 2), (4, 2)}
gof = { (1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 2) (4, 4)} Now given
The identical pair in fog and gof is (3, 2). 0 4(a b)(b c)(c a ) 0
Hence, fog (x) = gof (x) x=3 Clearly, atleast one of the factors must be
93. (b) Let y be the population at an instant t. Now zero. Hence the triangle must be isosceles.
population increase at a rate no. of ALTERNATE :
inhabitants If a = b then 0 as C1 and C2 become
dy dy identical. Similarly if b = c or c = a, 0.
y or = ky 95. (c) Probability that exactly one event out of A
dt dt
dy dy and B occur is P(A) P(B) 2P(A B)
y
= kdt Integrating = kdt + c
y P(A) P(B) 2P(A B) 1 a ...(1)
or log y = kt + c ...(i) Similarly,
In 1999, t = 0, population = 20,000
log 20,000 = c Put the value of c in (i) P(B) P(C) 2P(B C) 1 2a .....(2)
log y = kt + log 20,000 or log y – log 20000 and P(C) P(A) 2P(C A) 1 a
= kt ......(3)
y Now, Probability that at least one out of A,
or log = kt ...(ii)
20000 B, C will occur is
In 2004, t = 5, y = 25000 P(A B C) P(A) P(B) P(C)
25000 1 5
log = k × 5 k = log P(A B) P(B C) P(C A)
20000 5 4
y 1 5 P(A B C)
Equ (ii) as log log t
20000 5 4 1
In 2009, t = 10 {P(A) P(B) 2P(A B)}
2
y 1 5 5 {P(B) P(C) 2P(B C)}
log log 10 2 log
20000 5 4 4 {P(C) P(A) 2P(C A)}
2
5 25 y 25
log log P(A B C)
4 16 20000 16
25 1
y= × 20000 = 25 × 1250 = 31250 (1 a ) (1 2a ) (1 a ) a2
16 2
3 1
a2 b2 c2 a 2 2a a2 2a 1
2 2
94. (c) Let (a 1) 2 (b 1) 2 (c 1) 2 ;
1 1
(a 1) 2 (b 1) 2 (c 1) 2 (a 1) 2 [ a 1]
2 2
Apply R 2 R2 R 3 and take 4 common 96. (b) The given equation can be rewritten as
|cos x| |cos x|2 ..... to
81 64
EBD_7443
MT-164 Target VITEEE
dx
X x y (Put Y = 0 in (i)) area
dy Similarly, ˆj a ˆj a a 2 ˆj
1
of OPT | X y | 2a 2 (given) and kˆ a kˆ a a 3 kˆ
2
1 dx dx ˆi a ˆi ˆj a ˆj kˆ a kˆ
| xy y 2 | 2a 2 xy y 2 2a 2
2 dy dy
= 3a a1ˆi a 2 ˆj a 3kˆ 3a a 2a
dx x 2a 2
, which is linear in x
dy y y2 106. (b) The general term is
The integrating factor is k k
1 xk 2 4 2
y
dy
log y 1 1 k k 1 2k k4 k2
I.F. = e e
y
k
2 2
The solution is x
1 2a 1
dy c (k 1)2 k2
y 2 y
y
1 2k
x 2a 2 y 2
a2 2 (k 2 1 k)(k 2 1 k)
c x cy
y 2 y
103. (b) The no. of ways of selecting 3 out of 7 1 1 1
consonants = 7C3 = 35 2 k 2 2
k 1 k k 1
The no. of ways of selecting 2 out of 4
vowels = 4C2 = 6 1
Now these five letters after selection can [f (k) f (k 1)]
be arranged among themselves in 5P5 i.e., 2
120 ways. 1
Hence the required no. of words = 35 × 6 × Where f (k)
2
120 = 25200. k k 1
104. (c) The given curve n n
y 1
x y x .........(i) Sn xk [f (k) f (k 1)]
2
k 1 k 1
It cuts the x-axis, when y 0 x 1
The required point is (1, 0) 1 1 1
Taking log of (i), we get log (x + y) = y log x [f (1) f (n 1)] 1
2 2 2
Differentiating w.r. t x, n n 1
1 dy dy y 3 7
1 log x 107. (d) P (r) = , so P( r )
x y dx dx x 10 10
When, x = 1, y = 0, we get The probability of at least one rainy day in 7
1 dy dy 0
days
1 0
1 0 dx dx 1 7
7
dy P (A) = 1
1. So, the slope of normal = 1 10
dx
Now the probability that at least two rainy
Equation of the normal is y – 0 = 1 (x – 1)
days in 7 days
y x 1 0
7 6
7 7 3 7
105. (b) Let a a1ˆi a 2ˆj a 3kˆ P (B) = 1 C1
10 10 10
Now, ˆi a ˆi ˆˆ a
i.i ˆi.a ˆi a a1ˆi Hence,
EBD_7443
MT-166 Target VITEEE
P (B A) ALTERNATE :
P (B / A) The equations are 3l m n 0 ...(1)
P(A)
and 6nm – 2nl + 5lm = 0 ....(2)
7 6 Divide first by n and second by n2, we get
7 7 3 7
1 C1 l m
10 10 10 3 1 0 and
7 n n
7
1 m l l m
10 6 2 5 0.
n n n n
6
14 7 l m
1 Put x, y , we get
15 10 n n
7
7 3x y 1 0 and 6 y 2x 5xy 0 .
1 Solving above equations for x, and y we
10
get x = –1, y = –2 or x = –2, y = 1.
108. (a) X = a . b
l m
109. (a) Closure property : For a, b N, a + b N. If 2, 1 l :m:n 2 :1: 1 .
n n
( sumof two natural numbers is a natural
number.) If l 1,
m
2 l : m : n 1: 2 : 1 .
Associative Law : a, b, c N m n
Now proceed as above.
(a + b) + c = a + (b + c).
< N, + > is a semi group. ( x 2 1) ( x 2 1)
111. (a) dx dx
Existence of Identity : , let e be the x x 4 3x 2 1 2 2 1
x x 3
additive identity, then for all a N. x2
a+e= e+ a=a e=0 N
Additive identity does not exist in N 1
1
< N, + > is not a monoid. x2 dz
dx
110. (b) The given equations are 2
1 z2 1
3l m 5n 0 ....(i) x 1
x
and 6mn 2nl 5lm 0 ...(ii)
From (i), we have m = –3l – 5n. Putting m 1 1
Putting x z 1 dx dz
= –3l – 5n in (ii), we get x x2
6( 3l 5n )n 2nl 5l ( 3l 5n) 0
log z z2 1 C
2 n 2 3ln l 2 0 (n l )(2n l ) 0
either l = –n or l = –2n. 1 1
If l = –n, then putting l = –n in (i), we obtain m log x x2 3 C
= –2n. If l = –2n, then putting l = –2n in (i), we
x x2
obtain m = n. 112. (b) (f ig)(z) f (z) ig(z ) sin z i cos z
Thus, the direction ratios of two lines are = – i(cos z + isin z)
–n, –2n, n and = – i eiz = (say)
–2n, n, n i.e., 1, 2, –1 and –2, 1, 1.
Hence, the direction cosines are Now (f ig) * (f ig)(z)
1 2 1 2 1 1 = (f ig)(f ig)(z )
, , or , , . The angle
6 6 6 6 6 6 = (f ig)( ) f ( ) ig( )
between the lines is given by = sin i cos i(cos i sin )
1 2 2 1 1 1 1
cos i e i( ie iz ) iz
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 = ie ie = ie
113. (c) We suppose the distribution to be Binomial
1
cos 1 . with n = 10, p = 0.2, q = 1 – p =0.8
6
Solutions MT-167
= lim f (0 h) lim(0 h) 1 4 2
h 0 h 0 = sq. units.
3
= lim h – 1 = 0 – 1 = – 1 Thus required area
h 0
X X 1
O h A x ,
2
and domain of q(x) exists when
1 x2 0 x2 1 |x| 1
Y 1 x 1
Hence, from eq.(i), we get
l2sin2 = 4a × l cos (put k = l sin , h = 1
l cos ) Common domain is ,1
2
4a cos 120. (a) In the absence of any condition, no book
l
sin 2 need to be selected on a particular subject
118. (b) For the balloon, and all the selected books may be on a
981 g single subject. If xn stands for the selection
5 cm / sec 2
u 0, f 122 cm / sec 2 of n (0 n 8) books on one subject, the
8 8 8
and t = 30 seconds. total number of ways of selecting 8 books
Let h be the height and v the velocity of the out of the lot.
balloon after 30 seconds. Then = the coeff. of x8 in (x 0 x1 x 2 .... x 8 )4 ,
g 15 4 being the number of subjects
v 0 .30 g cm / sec 4
8 4 1 x9
and = the coeff. of x8 in
1 x
1 g 2 225
h 0 . .30 g = the coeff. of x8 in (1 x) 4 (1 x 9 ) 4
2 8 4
Now the initial velocity of the released body = the coeff of x8 in (1 x ) 4 11
C8 165
will be 15/4 g cm/sec in the upward direction.
Suppose the body reaches the ground in t 121. (a)
sec. 122 (d)
225 15
1 2
g gt
gt 123 (c)
4 4
2
or 2 t 2 15t 225 0 or ( t 15) ( 2t 15) 0 124. (a) Abate means to reduce in degree or
15 intensity; Augment means to increase;
t 15 sec . sin ce t Provoke means to stimulate or give rise to
2
(a reaction or emotion, typically a strong or
1 unwelcome one) in someone; Wane means
119. (a) Given, f(x) = 1 x2
2x 1 to decrease gradually in size, number,
strength, or intensity
= p(x) – q(x)
125 (a)
Solutions MT-169
MOCK TEST 5
1. (c) Let us place the charges as shown on the 5. (a) Let unknown resistance be X. Then
regular hexagon condition of Wheatstone's bridge gives
P Q X 20r
+ , where r is resistance of wire per
R 80r
cm.
U +R
X R=1
+T S
E due to each charge at O is same in magni-
tude, the arrow shows the direction of E
due to each charge
E R E u E 0 where E 0 is electric field P = 20r Q = 80r
20 cm
due to +ve charge placed at R (100 – 20) cm
2. (a) Let m g of steam get condensed into water
(By heat loss). This happens in following 20 1
X R 1 0.25
two steps. 80 4
6. (a) R1 = 3.1 at T = 30°C
100°C
100°C Water R2 = 4.5 at T = 100°C
Steam (H1= m × 540) We have, R = R0 (1 + t)
R1 = R0 [1 + (30)]
R2 = R0 [1 + (100)]
[H2= m ×1× (100× 90)]
R1 1 30
R2 1 100
90°C 3.1 1 30 1
Water 0.0064 C
4.5 1 100
Heat gained by water (20°C) to raise it's E1 E2
temperature upto 90°C = 22 × 1× (90 – 20) 18 12
r r2 2 1
Hence , in equilibrium, heat lost = Heat gain 7. (d) V = 11 1 = 1 1
14 V
m × 540 + m × 1 × (100 – 90) = 22 × 1 × (90 r1 r2 2 1
– 20)
(Since the cells are in parallel).
m = 2.8 gm 8. (c) A galvanometer can be converted into a
The net mass of the water present in the voltmeter by connecting the high
mixture = 22 +2.8 =24.8 gm. ressistance in series with the galvanometer
3. (b) In parallel, potential is same, say V so that only a small amount of current
passes through it.
Q1 C1V C1
mv v
Q2 C2V C2 9. (d) r r
qB B
4. (b)
EBD_7443
MT-170 Target VITEEE
10. (c) For a perfectly rigid body strain produced 1
is zero for the given force applied, so R L
C
Y = stress/strain =
11. (a) If the electric field is switched off, and the 1 1
C= =
same magnetic field is maintained, the (R L) 2 f (R 2 f L)
electrons move in a circular orbit and
c
electron will travel a magnetic field to its 17. (b) Size of particle
velocity.
12. (d) Power of heating coil = 100 W and voltage 3 108
(V) = 220 volts. When the heating coil is 3 10 6
cut into two equal parts and these parts
are joined in parallel, then the resistance of = 1014 Hertz
the coil is reduced to one-fourth of the However, when frequency is higher than
previous value. Therefore energy liberated this, wavelength is still smaller. Resolution
per second becomes 4 times i.e., 4 × 100 = becomes better.
400 J. 18. (c) For first minimum, a sin = n = 1
13. (a) Eddy currents are produced when a metal 5000 10 –10
is kept in a varying magnetic field. sin 0.5
a 0.001 10 – 3
n2 A = 30°
14. (d) Self inductance of a solenoid = 19. (c)
20. (d) According to law of conservation of
So, self induction n2 momentum the third piece has momentum
So, inductance becomes 4 times when n is
doubled. 1 –(3iˆ 4j)
ˆ kg ms–1
15. (c) The time constant for resonance circuit, Impulse = Average force × time
T CR
Growth of charge in a circuit containing Impulse
Average force
capacitance and resistance is given by the time
formula, q q 0 (1 e / CR )
Change in momentum
CR is known as time constant in this time
formula.
16. (d) From figure,
–(3iˆ 4ˆj)kg ms –1
10 –4 s
21. (d) K-electron capture is accompanied by the
characterstic X-rays emission.
22. (c) Among given atoms/species, doubly
ionised lithium will produce shortest
wavelength emission from the transition
n = 2 to n = 1.
1 23. (a) According the Moseley’s law
L
tan 45º = C f a(Z b) f a 2 (Z b) 2
R
C
1 a 2 (Z b) 2
L =R
C
for k line, b = 1
Solutions MT-171
1 1 NH 2
m1u12 m1 v12
Ki Kf 2 2 Cl
Ki 1 Br Br
m1u12
2 HONO
H 3PO 2
elimenatio n of NH 2
Kf 4n NO2
1
Ki 2
1 n
Br2
Energy transfer is maximum when K f 0 FeBr3
Br
4n
2
1 4n 1 n2 2n NH 2
1 n
Sn / HCl
n 2 1 2n 0 NaOH
Br
n 12 0 n 1 ie. m2 m,
NO2
m1 m HNO 3, H2SO 4 Cl2/Fe
Transfer will be maximum when both 45. (b)
333 K
masses are equal and one is at rest.
41. (b) As far as characterstic of IR spectrum for
CH3CH2OH is NO2 NH2
O–H streching frequency 3391 cm–1
Cl /Fe reduction
O–H streching frequency 2981 cm–1
O–H streching frequency 1055 cm–1
Cl Cl
42. (a) Although benzene does not undergo
nucleophilic substitution, nitrobenzene (a) In case chlorination is done earlier
undergoes such reaction due to the than nitration, chlorobenzene formed
Solutions MT-173
at first step would introduce –NO2 53. (b) Cobalt - 60 is used for the treatment of blood
group in ortho-position, not in m- cancer.
position 54. (d) Given [A] = 0.01 M
Rate = 2.0 × 10–5 mol L–1 S–1
(b) Again if –NO2 group is reduced earlier For a first order reaction
than the chlorination step, –NH2 group Rate = k[A]
formed on reduction will again
introduce –Cl in o-position 2.0 10 5
k= = 2 × 10–3
46. (a) The Lanthanides are transition metals from [0.01]
Atomic numbers 58 (Ce) to 71(Lu).
0.693
Hence the electron configulation becomes: t1/2 = = 347 sec.
(n –2) f 1– 14 (n – 1) s2p6 d0 – 1 ns2. 2 10 3
47. (a) IUPAC name of sodium nitroprusside K 310
55. (b) Temperature coefficient = = 2.3
Na 2 [Fe(CN) 5 NO] is sodium K 300
pentacyanonitrosoyl ferrate (III) because
or K 310 = 2.3 K 300
in it NO is neutral ligand. Hence
2×O.N. of Na + O.N. of Fe + 5×O.N. of CN 56. (a) The rate law equation contains [H ]2 ,
1×O.N. of NO = 0 term. The rate will charge with change in
2×(+1) + O.N. of Fe + 5 ×(–1) +1×0 = 0 pH and new rate will be
O.N. of Fe = 5 – 2 = +3, Hence ferrate (III) [2]2 = 4 times the old rate
48. (d) Co here is in +3 oxidation state 57. (c) It is bimolecular first order reaction since
Rate [N2O5]
Co
58. (d) A 2 (g) B 2(g ) 3C(g) D(g)
step-1 step-2
Co3+ since the steps 1 and 2 are exothermic hence
Unpaired electrons = 4 and sp 3 d 2 low temprature will favour both the
hybridisation and octahedral shape. reactions. In step - 1 moles are increasing
49. (c) Diaminodichloroplatinum (II) commonly hence low pressure will favour it. In step 2
known as cis - platin is found to have moles are decreasing, hence high pressure
anticancer property. will favour it.
50. (b) The cause of showing different oxidation 59. (a) Among the given options, only PCl5 can
is due to the fact that there is only a small convert an alcoholic group as well as a
difference between the energies of electron carboxyl group to chloride.
in the ns orbitals and (n – 1)d orbitals with PCl5
the result both ns as well (n – 1)d electrons RCH 2OH RCH 2Cl
can be used for compound formation. PCl5
Lesser energy difference between 5f and RCOOH RCOCl
6d orbitals than between 4f and 5d orbitals
result in larger no. of oxidation state. O OH
|| |
HCN
51. (c) d-d electronic transition causes absorption 60. (a) R – C– R R– C – CN
KCN |
of energy at red visible wave length.
R (A )
In cupric chloride CuCl 2, cupper is in +2
state and hence it is d9 system. In five d-
orbitals there is one unpaired electron OH
|
present which absorbs energy due to d-d Re duction by
R – C – CH 2 NH 2
transition. LiAlH 4 ( B) |
52. (b) Lead Apron since it absorbs harmful R
radiations.
EBD_7443
MT-174 Target VITEEE
61. (c) CH 3COOH CaCO3 (CH 3COO) 2 Ca 2 º
e Cu Cu ; E 2 0.15V; ...(ii)
CH 3
Heat
CO Cu e Cu; E3º ? ... (iii)
CH 3
Now, G1º nFE1º 2 0.34F
I 2 NaOH
CHI3 NaI CH 3COONa 3H 2 O
G º2 1 0.15F , G 3º 1 E 3º F
62. (c) Due to resonance in carboxylate ion, the
double bond character of C = O bond in Again, G1º G º2 G 3º
carboxylic acids is greatly reduced as
compared to that in aldehydes and ketones. 0.68F 0.15F E3º F
O O O E3º 0.68 0.15 0.53V
C C C
O O O E ºcell º
E cathode º
(Cu / Cu ) E anode (Cu 2 / Cu )
63. (d) We know that = 0.53 – 0.15 = 0.38 V.
G= H– T S 1000 1.06 10 2 1000
68. (a) m
When the reaction is in equilibrium, G = 0 M 0.1
H 1.06 10 2
0 H T S T
S 69. (b) H2 – O2 fuel cell supply power for pressure.
2 30 1000 70. (b) Corrosion is an electrochemical
T 285.7 K phenomenon.
2 105
64. (b) In graphite, the electrons are spread out Eq.wt i t
71. (b) Mass deposited =
between the sheets. 96500
65. (d) The appearance of colour in solid alkali
108 9650
metal halide is due to presence of F-centres 10.8 g
found as defect in the crystal structure. 96500
66. (d) In body centred cubic lattice one molecule 72. (b) Four primary alcohols of C5 H11 OH are
of CsBr is within one unit cell. possible. These are:
Atomic mass of unit cell (i) CH 3CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OH
= 133 + 80 = 213 a.m.u
(ii) CH 3CH 2 CH CH 2 OH
Volume of cell = (436.6 × 10–12)3 |
n ´ at.wt. CH 3
Density =
Av.no.´ vol.of unit all cell (iii) CH 3 CH CH 2CH 2 OH
213 |
Density = CH 3
23 12 3
6.02 10 ( 436.6 10 )
CH 3
ZM |
(iv) CH 3 C CH 2 OH
a 3 NA |
CH 3
213 107
42.5 gm / cm 3 73. (b) Greater the stability of the intermediate
6.02 (436.6) 3 carbocation, more reactive is the alcohol.
2 Since 2-methylpropan-2-ol generates 3°
67. (c) 2 Cu Cu Cu carbocation, therefore, it reacts fastest with
º HBr.
2e Cu 2
Cu ; E1 0.34V; ...(i)
Solutions MT-175
74. (b) Secondary alcohols on oxidation give 81. (a) Given, k sin + cos 2 = 2k – 7
ketones. k sin + 1 – 2 sin2 = 2k – 7
Note : – Primary alcohols from aldehydes. 2sin2 – k sin + (2k – 8) = 0
For the existence of real roots, discriminant
R R 0.
[O]
CHOH C=O k2 – 4 × 2 (2k – 8) 0
R R (k – 8)2 0, which is always true.
Isopropyl Ketone
Roots of the quadr atic equation are
alcohol
k 4
, 2, but sin 2.
75. (b) Due to greater electronegativity of sp2 - 2
hybridized carbon atoms of the benzene
ring, diaryl ethers are not attacked by k 4
sin but 1 sin 1
nucleophiles like I–. 2
76. (c) (CH 3CH 2 ) 2 O (CH 3 CO) 2 O k 4
1 1
Ether Acid anhydride 2
anhy. AlCl3 2 k 4 2 2 k 6
CH 3COOCH 2 CH 3
Ester 82. (b) Given parabola is y 2 4ax
77. (c) Conjugate base of phenol, i.e. phenoxide
Let P ( x1, y1 ) ... (1)
ion is a weaker base than the HCO3– ,
)
conjugate base of H2CO3. This is due to ,2 2at 1
at 1
resonance, in HCO3– in which all resonating Q(
structures are equivalent.
CH2 P (x1,y 1)
On keeping O O
78. (a) 3 HCHO CH2 CH2 R (a
t2 2, 2
aq. solution O at2 )
Trioxane Let the tangents from P touch the parabola
(meta formaldehyde) at Q(at12, 2at1) and R (at22, 2at2), then P is
COOH H2N the point of intersection of tangents.
79. (c) CH 2 + CO x1 = at1 t2 and y1 = a (t1 + t2)
COOH H2 N or t1t2 = x1/a and t1 + t2 = y1 / a ...(2)
Malonic ester Now QR (at12 at 22 ) 2 ( 2at 1 2at 2 ) 2
CO NH
CH 2 CO a 2 ( t1 t 2 ) 2 [( t1 t 2 ) 2 4]
2 H 2O
CO NH
Barbituric acid | a || t1 t 2 | ( t1 t 2 )2 4
80. (a)
OH O.COC6H5 | a | ( t1 t 2 )2 4 t1t 2 . ( t1 t 2 )2 4
aq. NaOH
+ C6H5COCl
y12 4x1 y12
|a| . 4 [using (2)]
phenyl benzoate a2 a a2
The function of NaOH is
(i) To convert phenol to more stronger 1
( y12 4ax1 ).(y12 4a 2 )
nucleophile PhO– |a|
(ii) To neutralize the acid formed
EBD_7443
MT-176 Target VITEEE
83. (a) We have, f (1) 1! 1, f (2) 2! 2,
31
A B 1 cos( A B)
1 f (3) 3! 3 2 1 6 ,
32 1
tan
31
...(i) f (4) = 4! = 4 × 3 × 2 × 1 = 24
2 1 cos( A B) 1 63
32 Range of f = {1, 2, 6, 24}
Using Napier’s analogy, 86. (b) Let f (x) = ax 2 bx c . f (0 ) 2 c 2
A B a b C Also f’(x) = 2ax + b and f”(x) = 2a
tan cot ...(ii)
2 a b 2 f”(0) = 4 2a = 4 a = 2 and f’(0) = – 3
From (i) and (ii) we get, b = –3
f(x) = 2x2 – 3x + 2
a b C 1 5 4 C 1
cot cot 1 1
a b 2 63 5 4 2 63 2x 2 3x 2 dx 2 2x 2 2 dx
[given a = 5, b = 4] 1 0
C 9 C 7 [Separating even & odd parts]
cot tan
2 63 2 3 1 1
2 x3
4 x 1 dx 4 x
C 7 3
1 tan 21 0 0
2 9 1
cos C
C 7 8 1 16
1 tan 2 1 1 4
2 9 3 3
Now, using cosine rule, 87. (b) The equation of tangent at any pont
c2 a2 b2 2ab cos C x sec y tan
1
P (a sec , b tan ) is
1 a b
52 42 2 5 4 = 36
8 Y
c=6 P
84. (a) As c is coplanar with a and b, we take,
c= a+ b ...(1) F
| | ( 0 | | dy x2 y2
m1
Hence, 0 | | dx 2xy
1 cot cot 2
2p2 19p 9
sin 2 sin 2 sin 2 1 cot cot 2
So, (adjA)B 2p 1 1 cot cot 2
6p 3
Solutions MT-179
2
sin 2 sin 2 (cot (n 2)(n 1)n.(n 1) 57
= sin cot )
8.7.6.5.4.3.2.1 16
(cot cot )(cot cot ) (n + 2) (n + 1) n (n – 1) = 143640
(n2 + n – 2) (n 2 + n) = 143640
= sin( ) sin( ) sin( )
(n2 + n)2 – 2(n2 + n) + 1 = 143640 + 1
It is clear from here that cannot exceed 1. (n2 + n – 1)2 = (379)2
[ sin / 1, for any R] n2 + n – 1 = 379 [ n2 + n – 1 > 0]
101. (a) 2 2 2
We have x + y = ...(i) is a circle with n2 + n – 1 – 379 = 0
vertex (0, 0) and radius . n2 + n – 380 = 0 (n + 20) (n – 19) = 0
and y = sinx ...(ii) n = – 20, n = 19
Y n is not negative.
2 2 2
x+y = n = 19
y = sinx 104. (c) Let the sides of the ABC be a = n, b = n + 1,
c=n +2
( ,0) Where n is a natural number
X Clearly, C is the greatest and A is the least
(0, 0) angle
As given, C = 2 A
sin C = sin 2 A
i.e. sin C = 2in A cos A
Required area = area of shaded region
= Area of the circle in 1st quadrant – b2 c2 a 2
i.e. k c = 2 k a ×
2 2bc
sin xdx = cos x
0 4 0 or b c2 = a (b2 + c2 – a2)
3 3 Substituting the values of a, b, c we get
8
1 1 sq. units (n + 1) (n + 2)2 = n [(n + 1)2 + (n + 2)2 – n2]
4 4 or (n + 1) (n + 2)2 = n (n2 + 6 n + 5)
102. (c) z 3 iz 2 2i (z i )(z 2 2iz 2) 0 or (n + 1) (n + 2)2 = n (n + 1) (n + 5)
or (n + 2)2 = n (n + 5), [Since n –1]
z i, 1 i, – 1 – i
or n = 4
Let A = (0,1), B = (1,–1), C=(–1, –1), Hence the sides are 4, 5 and 6.
0 1 1 x2 y2
1 105. (b) Differentiating the equation =1
ABC 1 1 1 a2 b2
2
1 1 1 w.r.t. x, we get
1 2x 2y dy
| 2 2| 2 2 =0
2 a b2 dx
n 2
103. (b) Given C8 : n 2 P4 57 :16 x2 xy dy
or 2 =0
n n! a b 2 dx
n 2
C8 Cr
57 r!(n r)!
n 2 n! y2 xy dy x2 y2
P4 16 n
and Pr or 1 =0 1
(n r)! b2 b2 dx a2 b2
(n 2)! (n 2 4)! 57 Differentiating again w.r.t. x, we get
8!(n 2 8)! (n 2)! 16
EBD_7443
MT-180 Target VITEEE
x 0, y 0
2y dy y dy x dy dy xy d 2 y 107. (b) There are 11 letters in the given word which
. =0
b2 dx b2 dx b 2 dx dx b 2 dx 2 are as follows (NNN) (EEE) (DD)IPT
Five letters can be selected in the following
d2 y dy
2
dy manners :
or xy 2
x y =0 (i) All letters different : 6C5 = 6
dx dx dx (ii) Two similar and three different : 3C1.
5C = 30
comparing with the given differential 3
equation, we get A = 1. (iii) Three similar and two different : 2C1.
5C = 20
106. (c) The given information can be expressed as 2
given in the diagram: (iv) Three similar and two similar : 2C1. 2C1
In order to simply, we assume that 1 unit = =4
1000 bricks (v) Two similar, two similar and one
Suppose that depot A supplies x units to P different :
3C . 4C = 12
and y units to Q, so that depot A supplies 2 1
(30 – x – y) bricks to builder R. Total selections = 6 + 30 + 20 + 4 + 12 = 72
Now, as P requires a total of 15000 bricks, it 108. (c) In the definition of the function, b 0, for
requires (15 – x) units from depot B. then f(x) will be undefined in x > 0.
Similarly, Q requires (20 – y) units from B f(x) is continuous at x = 0,
and R requires 15 – (30 – x – y) = x + y – 15 LHL = RHL = f(0)
units from B.
Using the transportation cost given in sin(a 1)x sin x
lim
table, total transportation cost. x 0 x
x 0
Z = 40x + 20y + 20(30 – x – y) + 20(15 – x)
+ 60(20 – y) + 40(x + y – 15) x bx 2 x
= 40x – 20y + 1500 lim 3/ 2
c
Obviously the constraints are that all x 0 bx
x 0
quantities of bricks supplied from A and B
sin(a 1)x sin x
to P, Q, R are non-negative. lim
x 0 x x
A
30 units 1 bx 1
lim c
x 30 x 0 bx
y – x–
0
` 20
`4 `2 y (1 bx ) 1
0 (a 1) 1 lim c
P Q R x 0 bx ( 1 bx 1)
15 units 20 units 15 units
1
15 ` 40 ) a+2 lim c
60
–y
y
–
`2 x +6 5 x 0 1 bx 1
–
`
x
20
1
0
B (7 – y –
8– =x+ 1
20 units a+2 c
2
x 0, y 0, 30 – x – y 0, 15 – x 0, 20 – y 0, 3 1
x + y – 15 0. a ,c ,b 0
2 2
Since, 1500 is a constant, hence instead
of minimizing Z = 40x – 20y + 1500, we 1 5
109. (b) Let cos , then 0 and
can minimize Z = 40x – 20y. 3 2
Hence, mathematical formulation of the 5
given LPP is Minimize Z = 40x – 20y, cos
3
subject to the constraints:
x + y 15, 2
sin 1 cos 2
x + y 30, 3
x 15, y 20,
Solutions MT-181
e m
m2 118. (d) 2iˆ pjˆ 5kˆ and 3iˆ pjˆ pkˆ are
115. (c) We are given that e–m . m = 0.3 and
2! perpendicular
2 × 3 + p (–p) + 5 (p) = 0
= 0.2
p = –1 or p = 6
4 Hence for p = 6, the lines are perpendicular.
Dividing, m 0.4 0.3
3
sin( cos 2 x)
P (X = 0) = e–m = e–4/3 119. (b) lim
x 0 x2
116. (a) The given equation can be written as
sin{ sin 2 x}
1 cos x sin 2 ax 0 lim
x 0 x2
x
or sin 2 sin 2 ax 0 sin( sin 2 x)
2 lim
x 0 x2
x
sin 0 and sin ax 0
2 sin( sin 2 x) sin 2 x
lim
x 0 sin 2 x x2
x
n and
2 sin 2 x
lim
ax m where m, n are integers x2
x 0
m R1 is reflexive.
2n m 2an ...(1)
a; Again a, b R, | a | | b | |b| |a|
Now m and n are integers but a is irrational aR1b bR 1a . Therefore R is symmetric.
hence the result (1) will hold good if m = 0
and n = 0 and in that case x = 0 is the only Also, a, b,c R, | a | | b | and | b | | c |
solution. |a| |c|
dy aR1b and bR 1c aR1c
117. (c) We have, .y x (Given)
dx R1 is transitive
ydy xdx R2 and R3 are not symmetric.
R4 is neither reflexive nor symmetric.
y2 x2 C
Integrating. i.e y 2 x 2 C 121 (d)
2 2 2
122 (b)
Since the curve passes through the point
(5, 3), 123 (c)
9 = 25 + C C = – 16 124 (c)
So the curve is y2 = x2 – 16 i.e x2 – y2 = 16 125 (b)
which is clearly a rectangular hyperbola.
Solutions MT-183
MOCK TEST 6
q1
A B
A B
2. (a) Force = eE Let q1 be the charge on the inner shell. On
Workdone = force × distance being earth its potential will be zero.
Force and distance are in opposite 1 q1 q2
direction, so work is negative. or V=0 =
W=–eE×d 4 0 r1 r2
Here, distance increases so, potential
r1
energy increases. q' = q
q –q r2
– + – + 6. (b) Here the electric field at A and B is same but
3. (b) – + – + at C it will decreases,
– + – + s o VA = VB ( V = – Edr)
and VC is less than VA or VB
d VA = VB > VC
Because of induction, the effective force 7. (c) In a round trip, displacement is zero. Hence,
between them becomes equal to greater work done is zero.
than
+q
1 q2
F= . r
4 0 d2
4. (c) +Q
C1 = 4µF
6
6V 2.8
1 1 1 6 X Y
or R ' 1.2
2 3 R' 5
Current drawn from the battery 6
The equivalent resistance is given by
E 6
I 1.5 Ampere 1 1 1 1 3 1
R 4
Potential difference between A and B R 6 6 6 6 2
V IR ' 1.5 1.2 1.8V Req 2
Current through 2 resistor 13. (b) According to Fleming's Right hand Rule
V 1.8 In (1) force is in – z axis
0.9 A In (2) force is in – x-axis
2 2
11. (d) Rearranging the resistors CDEF, we get a In (3) force is zero
balanced wheatstone bridge as shown in because
the figure. F = q (v B) = qvB sin 180
D i.e. F = 0
3 3 14. (d) Given: n = 100 turns/m
I = 5A
C 3 E
0 nI
3 B= (sin 1 sin 2 )
3 3 2
A B
F 0 100 5
3 B= (sin 45 sin 45 )
A B 2
3
effective resistance between C and E 0 500 1 1
=
6 6 2 2 2
=3
6 6 500
0 2
Now, effective resistance between A and B = = 0 250 2
2 2
3 3
1.5
3 3 = 250 2 0
Solutions MT-185
1 1 Vp I p4000 100
So, = Is A = 1.67 A
LC 0.5 8 10 6 Vs 240000
23. (d) In a single slit diffraction pattern, the path
1
= difference ( x) for nth minima is given by
6
4 10 x = n ,, where n 1, 2, 3,...
1 1000 or phase difference, n(2 )
=
2 For 1st minimum, n = 1.
= 500 Hz
18. (a) XL = 15 ; XC = 11 ; R = 3 2
24. (d) Given Ez= 60sin (kx + t) V/m. The magnetic
Impedance, Z = R2 (X L X C )2 field component must be perpendicular to
Ez and x.
= 9 16 5
E0 60
E rms 10 Also B0 = . Thus
Irms = = 2A c c
Z 5
VL = Irms × XL = 2 × 15 = 30 V 60
By = sin (kx + t).
VC = Irms × XC = 2 × 11 = 22 V c
VL – VC = 8V 26. (c) Given, 1H2 + 1H2 4
2He + Q
19. (a) Peak current, I0 = 4.24 A The total binding energy of the deutrons
= 4 × 1.15 = 4.60 MeV
I0 4.24
I rms The total binding energy of alpha particle
2 2 = 4 × 7.1 = 28.4 MeV
Thermal energy produced, The energy released in the process
2 2 = 28.4 – 4.60 = 23.8 MeV.
H = Id RT I rms RT
26. (b) Number of fissions per second
2 Total energy produced / sec.
Id I rms
=
Direct current, Energy released per fission
EBD_7443
MT-186 Target VITEEE
31. (b) Given:
1.6 106 J / s 1019 E = 57 meV = 57× 10–3 × 1.6 × 10–19 J
= 13
200 1.6 10 J 200 hc
E=
1000
= 1016
34
200 hc 6.6 10 3 108
= 5 ×1016 fissions per second. = 22
E 57 1.6 10
27. (a) We have 1 mv 2 h h 0 6.6 3 10 26
2 =
1 57 1.6 10 22
mv12 h(5 0 0) ....(1) = 0.2171052 × 10–4 m
2 = 217105.2 × 10–10 m
1 = 217105 Å (Approx.)
mv2 2 h(9 0 0) ....(2) 32. (b) When m1 > m2 & m2 at rest then the bodies
2
(2)/(1) collide in elastically and move together as
one body without changing the direction.
v22 8 0 33. (b) Extrinsic semiconductor is due to the type
2 of impurity atom's valency. If impurity atoms
v12 4 0
are trivalent, then carriers are hole. And if
impurity atoms are pentavalent then carriers
v2 = 2v1 2 4 105
are electron.
= 5.64 × 105m/sec 34. (a) = 0.95
h ie = 100 mA
28. (a) = ic = ?
2mK
34 ic
6.63 10 = i
2 9.1 10 31 5.5 1.6 10 16 e
= 169 nm ic
0.95 =
100
1 1 1
29. (a) We have, = R ic 0.95 100mA
n12 n 22
i c 95mA
1 1 1 35. (d) In forward biasing, the value of diffusion
=R current decreases.
22 32
36. (a) = 0.95; RL = 5k
1 1 1 Ri = 70
=R
4 9 RL 5 103
AV = 0.98 70
1 9 4 Ri 70
=R RL
36 Power gain = 2
. 0.98 70 68.6
Ri
1 5
=R
36 m2
37. (b) Pc Pt 1
36 2
5R
30. (d) For shortest wavelength m2
11.8 10 1
n1 = 2, n2 = 2
1 1 1 m 0.6 % modulation = 60%.
R
2 38. (c) The given graph does not obey Hooke's
1 law and there is no well defined plastic
R(0.5) , shows visible region. region. So the graph represents elastomers.
Solutions MT-187
39. (c) In Bernoulli’s theorem only law of 48. (a) For a face-centred cube, we have.
conservation of energy is obeyed. 2a 2 0.361
40. (d) H = ncp t radius = = nm = 0.128
4 4
41. (d) In a tetragonal distortion, the ligands along 49. (a) For a reaction to be spontaneous G should
the z-axis move away. Their repulsion be negative.
significantly decreases for the orbitals We know G = H – T S
involving z-direction. These are lowered in Thus, for a reaction to be spontaneous at
energy. all temperatures G and H should be
42. (c) Cu + ion in aqueous solution negative.
disproportionates to Cu(s) and Cu 2(aq) . 50. (a) C(s) O 2 (g) CO 2 (g)
43. (b) In [Fe(CN)6]3– Fe is in +3 state. Thus entropy of formation of CO2
Fe (Z = 26) in Fe3+ we have 23 electrons. SCO2 (SC SO2 )
Thus, EAN of Fe = 26 – 3 + 12 = 35 = [213.5 – (5.740 + 205)] JK–1
[12 electrons gained from six ligands] = 2.76 JK–1.
44. (d) Magnetic moment 51. (a) Internal energy is dependent upon
temperature and according to first law of
n ( n 2) 3.87 B.M n 3
thermodynamics total energy of an isolated
(unpaired electrons). The comlex may be system remains same, i.e., in a system of
regarded as a high spin d7 complex of Fe+ constant mass, energy can neither be
and No+ created nor destroyed by any physical or
45. (c) EDTA forms a more stable coordination chemical change but can be transformed
complex with lead than with calcium or from one form to another
sodium and in this form passes out from E q w
the body without harmful effects. The For closed insulated container, q = 0, so,
calcium salt is used so that any excess of E w , as work is done by the system
EDTA will not remove Ca 2 ions from the 52. (a) Le-Chatelier’s principle is applicable only
body. to a system in equilibrium.
53. (d) We can obtain for NaOH at infinite dilution
46. (d) The optical isomers are pair of molecules
by extrapolating the line of NaOH but we
which are non super imposable mirror cannot obtain for CH3COOH because on
images of each other extrapolating the curve of weak electrolyte
3+ N en 3+ it does not approach a limiting value. But
en – N molar concluctivity at infinite dilution for a
N N
N N Co weak electrolyte can be calculated by using
en Kohlrausch's law. According to this law
Co en
N N
N N Ù°m for AxBy = x y
N en A B
en The relation of molar conductivity and
N 1000K
d form l form specific conductivity i.e., Ùm = ,
Enantiomers C
The two optically active isomers are is not useful because when C 0,
collectivity called enantiomers. Ùm
47. (d) When electrons are trapped in anion 54. (b) The order w.r.t. I2 is zero because the rate is
vacancies, these are called F-centres. not depends on the concentration of I2.
55. (a) Ag e Ag
+ve –ve 1F 108 g
ion ion 1 F = 1 mole of electrons = 96500 C
0.01F = 1.08 g Ag; Ag left = 1.08 – 1.08 = 0
F- centre in crystal
EBD_7443
MT-188 Target VITEEE
61. (c) Option (c) is the answer. Dehydration will
56. (b) G reaction Products Reactants be most easier when –OH group is trans to
C = O group.
G (CO2 ) G (H 2O) 62. (a) Prestone is a mixtrue of glycol & H2O. It
has freezing point much below 0°C, hence
3 presence of glycol (CH2OHCH2OH) in H2O
G (CH3OH) G (O2 ) reduce its freezing point. Therefore, it is
2
used as an antifreeze for automobiles
= [– 394.4 + (– 237.1)] – [(–166.3) + (0)]
radiators.
= – 702.3 kJ mol–1
63. (c) C6H5CH2Br + NaOC2H5 or
G 702.3 C6H5CH2ONa + C2H5Br
% Efficiency = 100 = 100 C6H5CH2OC2H5
n 726
64. (b) Acetophenone (C6 H5 COCH3 ) being a
= 96.7%
ketone, does not reduce Tollen’s reagent.
Specific conductance 65. (c) Aldehydes restore the pink colour of
57. (b) Cell constant =
Conductance Schiff's reagent (Schiff's reagent is a dilute
solution of rosaniline hydrochloride in
0.0112 water whose red colour has been
= or 0.0112 × 55
1/55 discharged by passing sulphur dioxide).
= 0.616 cm–1. Ketones do not restore Schiff's reagent
58. (b) Dry ether colour.
CH 3 I Mg CH 3 MgI
66. (a) P2O5 is a dehydrating agent. When it is
NaBH 4 CH2OOC.COOH
69. (a) O OH |
CH 3OH
CHOH CO2
|
HBr (i) Mg. Et 2O CH2OH
Br
(ii ) H 2C O
CH2OOCH CH 2OH
| |
CH 2 OH CHOH
H 2O
CHOH HCOOH
| | Formic acid
PCC
CH2OH CH2OH
CHO 76. (a) 3
In amines, N is sp hybridised and thus has
CH 2Cl 2
pyramidal shape. In the given structure,
70. (b) Acetaldehyde is the only compound among since the three alkyl groups are different,
the given compounds which can reduce and the fourth corner of the pyramid is
Tollen’s reagent to silver mirror. occupied by lone pair of electrons, the
molecule is chiral. However, the two
CH3CHO + 2[Ag(NH3)2]+ + 3OH– enantiomers of the amine are not resolvable
Acetaldehyde Tollen's reagent because of their rapid interconversion
CH3COO– + 2H2O + 2Ag + 4NH3 through a transition state having planar
structure (sp2 hybridised nitrogen)
Silver
CH3I
mirror 77. (c) CH3 NH 2 (CH3 )4 N I
excess (A)
Br2
71. (c) (i) CH3CH2COOH PCl3
CH3CH2COCl AgOH heat
(CH3 )4 N OH
Br2 (B)
CH3CH(Br) COCl
H2 O
CH3CH(Br) COOH. (CH3 )N CH 3OH
(C) and (D)
Cl2
(ii) CH3CH2COOH 78. (a) Consider the given sequence
PBr3
Reduction HNO 2
Cl2 [A] [B] CH3 CH 2 OH
CH3CH2COBr CH2CHClCOBr Since, [B] on reaction with HNO2 form a
H2O primary alcohol (CH3CH2OH) so [B] is a
CH3CH(Cl)COOH.
72. (a) This is an example of Baeyer-Villiger primary aliphatic amine. i.e., [B] is
oxidation CH3CH2NH2.
73. (c) 1, 6- and 1, 7-dicarboxylic acids on heating Since, [A] on reduction forms CH3CH2NH2
form cyclic ketones (Blanc rule) so [A] is CH3CN.
Reduction
CH3 CH 3 CN CH 3CH 2 NH 2
|
74. (d) CH 3 C CH 2
CH3COCl 79. (b) When alcoholic KOH reacts with chloroform
ZnCl2 or AlCl 3 and aniline the following reaction take
place:
CH3 NH2
|
CH3 C CH 2COCH3
| + CHCl3 + 3KOH
Cl
75. (c) When glycerol is heated with oxalic acid
following reaction occurs. N=C
CH2OH HOOC
| | + 3KCl + 3H2O
100 110 C
CHOH HOOC
| oxalic H 2O
CH 2OH acid Phenyl isocyanide
EBD_7443
MT-190 Target VITEEE
This is also called Carbylarmine reaction. It 84. (a) Given that
is used for detection of 1° amines. The f (x) = 2x + sin x , x R
isocyanide formed has a very offensive
smell which is used to detect its presence. f ' (x) = 2 + cos x
80. (c) Diazonium cation reacts with aniline in But – 1 cos x 1
weakly acidic medium resulting in N, N- 1 2 + cos x 3
coupling rather than C-coupling.
1 2 + cos x 3
f ' (x) > 0, x R
N N HN f (x) is strictly increasing and hence one-
one
H Also as x , f (x) and x –
–H f (x) –
N N NH
81. (b) The given relation is R = {(1, 1), (2, 2),(3, 3), Range of f (x) = R = domain of f (x) f (x)
(1, 3)} on the set A = {1, 2, 3}. is onto.
Clearly, R is reflexive and transitive. Thus, f (x) is one-one and onto.
To make R symmetric, we need (3, 1) as (1, 85. (b) After sending 4 to one side and 3 to other
3) R. side. We have to select 5 for one side and
If (3, 1) R, then R will be an equivalence 6 for other side from remaining.
relation. Hence, (3, 1) is the single ordered This can be done in 11C5 × 6C6 ways
pair which needs to be added to R to make
= 11C5
it the smallest equivalence relation.
82. (d) PQ = I P–1 = Q Now, there are 9 on each side of the long
Now the system in matrix notation is PX = B table and each can be arranged in 9! ways.
X = P–1 B = QB Required number of ways
x 2 2 1 1 = 11C5 × 9! × 9!
1 = 11C6 × (9!)2 [ nCr = nCn – r]
y 13 5 m 1
9 86. (d) The graph of the inequalities 2x + y 10,
z 8 1 5 5 x 0, y 0 is the region bounded by AOB.
1 This region has no point common with the
y (13 5 5m) region {(x, y) : x 6, y 2} as is clear from
9
– 27 = 8 + 5m (Given y = – 3) the figure . Hence, the region of the given
m=–7 inequalities is the empty set.
83. (a) Since 1, 2 and 1, 2 are the roots of ax2
+ bx + c = 0 and px2 + qx + r = 0 respectively, Y
therefore
b c
1+ 2= a , 1 2= a ...(1)
B(0, 10)
q r
and 1 + 2 = p , 1 2 = p ...(2)
9=x
non-trivial solution
y=
1 2
10
= 0 i.e. 2– 2 1=0
1 2
y=2
or 1 2 1 2 1 2
A
1 2 1 2 1 2 X
2 (5, 0) (6, 0)
pb pc b ac
qa ra q2 pr
Solutions MT-191
tn =
2
, n = 1, 2, 3,...... and BA î 3ˆj
(2n 1) 2n (2n 1)
ˆi ˆj kˆ
1 2 1
= BC BA 2 6 3 9iˆ 3jˆ 12kˆ
2n 1 2 n 2n 1
1 3 0
1 1 1 1
=
2n 1 2n 2n 2n 1 | BC BA | 92 32 (12) 2 3 26
2 2 2 and | BC | 4 36 9 7
1+ ........
1.2.3 3.4.5 5.6.7
3 26
1 1 1 1 AD
=1 .... 7
1 2 3 4
90. (b)
1 1 1 1 5
....
2 3 4 5 3
= 1 + loge2 + loge2 – 1= 2 loge2
88. (b) Let equation of the variable plane be 4
x y z 5 2
a b c
1 ...(1) Let cosec 1 , tan 1
3 3
The intercepts on the coordinate axes are
a, b, c. The sum of reciprocals of intercepts 5 2
cosec , tan
is constant , therefore 3 3
1 1 1 4 3
cot , cot
a b c 3 2
(1 / ) (1 / ) (1 / ) cot cot 1
or 1 Now, cot
a b c cot cot
1 1 1
, , lies on the plane (1) 13
Hence, the variable plane (1) always passes 2
1 1 1
through the fixed point , , . 3
4 3
A (1, 4, –2) 1
3 2 6 2 1 6
= =
4 3 9 8 17
3 2
89. (c) 91. (d) As given: cos–1x + cos–1y + cos–1 z = 3
and we know that 0 cos –1 x
B (2, 1, –2) D C (0, –5, 1)
cos 1 x , cos 1 y , cos 1 z
AD =AB sin x = y = z = cos = –1.
| BC BA | | BC BA | xy + yz + zx = (–1) (–1) + (–1) (–1) + (–1) (–1)
AB. = 1+ 1 + 1 = 3
| BC | . | BA | | BC |
EBD_7443
MT-192 Target VITEEE
x 2 1
cos
2 2 3 3
x y b
c
y 1 –
and sin
2 2 3
x y A
a
B
=( a b ). (m a ) c (m c ) a )
S x
A C A
(where m b c )
B L
{( a b ). c }.{( a ( b c )}
Let the normal at the extremity L of the latus [ a b c ]2 42 16
rectum passes through the extremity B of
the normal axis f ( x 2 ) f (x )
104. (c) lim
b2 x 0 f (x ) f (0)
Coordinates of L are ae, and
a Using L.H. Rule
coordinates of B are (0, –b). f (x 2 ).2 x f (x )
lim
Equation of the normal at L is x 0 f ( x)
ax 2 2
ay a b 2 xf ( x 2 )
e lim 1 0 1 1
(see previous illustration) x 0 f ( x)
If it passes through B’ (0, – b), then
105. (a) y 1 4x x 2 5 ( x 2) 2
0 + ab = a2 – b2
a 2b 2 (a 2 b2 ) 2 Y
y = mx
But b 2 a 2 (1 e 2 ).
y = 1+ 4x – x2
a 2 a 2 (1 e 2 ) [a 2 a 2 (1 e 2 )]2
1 e 2 e 4 or e 4 e 2 1 0
102. (b) Let the asymptotes be X
x + 2y + k1 = 0 …(1) 3 2
and 2x + y + k2 = 0 …(2) 2
Since (1) and (2) pass through the centre of 3/ 2 3/ 2
the hyperbola i.e (1, –1), (1 4x x )dx 2
2 mx dx
We have
k1 = 1 and k2 = –1
So, the asymptotes are x + 2y + 1 = 0 0 0
and 2x + y – 1 = 0 3 9 1 27 9
Since the equation of a hyperbola and its 2 m
2 4 3 8 4
asymptotes differ in constant terms only,
therefore equation of hyperbola is 13
On solving, we get m
( x 2 y 1)(2x y 1) 0 6
Since it passes through the point (2, 1), 106. (c) Let = + . Then, tan = K tan
(2 2 1)(4 1 1) 0 20 tan K
or
Thus the equation of hyperbola is tan 1
( x 2 y 1)(2x y 1) 20 0 Applying componendo and dividendo,
we have
i.e 2x 2 2 y 2 5xy x y 21 0
tan tan K 1
103. (a) We have, [ a b b c c a] tan – tan K –1
Solutions MT-195
or
sin cos cos sin K 1 d 2s as 2 ( at b) 2
sin cos – cos sin K –1 dt 2 s3
sin K 1 d 2s
i.e.,
sin – K –1
a s 3.
dt 2
Given that, – = and + = .
2 2
Therefore, 2
109 (c) I = [x 2 ] dx – [x ] dx
sin K 1 K 1 0 0
sin K –1 or sin = sin .
K –1 2 2 2 2
107. (a) We have = 1 dx + 2 dx + 3 dx – 1 dx
1 1 3 1
y cos x, y1 sin x cos x
2 =4– 2 – 3
2 1 cos a ( x )( x )
y2 sin x cos x 110. (a) Given limit = lim 2
2 2 x (x )
n (x )( x )
then yn cos x 2sin 2 a
2 = lim 2
Now put x = 0; then x (x )2
y0 1, (y1 )0 0, (y 2 )0 1 =
3 (x ) (x )
(y3 )0 cos 0 sin 2 a
2 2 2
lim
n x (x )2 a2 ( x )2 ( x )2
In general (y n )0 cos 4
2
Now, put n = 4; then (y4)0 = cos 2 1 a2 ( x )2 ( x )2
n 4
Hence (y n )0 cos = 0, if n is odd
2
a2 ( )2
= ( 1) n/2 if n is even. = .
2
x2 111. (c) Given f (x) = (x + 1) cot x is continuous at x
Then f (x) f (0) xf '(0) f ''(0) ... =0
2!
lim f (x) f (0)
x 0
x2 x4 x6 xn
cos x 1 ... ( 1) n / 2 ... x cot x
2! 4! 6! n! 1
when n is even. cot x
Now, lim (1 x) lim (1 x) x
108. (a) s2 = at2 + 2bt + c x 0 x 0
ds ds at b 1
2s
2 at 2 b or , x cot x
= lim e
x
dt dt s lim 1 x e
x 0
again differentiating x 0
x
d 2s a.s (at b) ds lim
x 0 tan x lim
x
1
. = e = e
dt 2
s2 dt x 0 tan x
f (0) = e
at b
as (at b) 112. (c) x 3e 2x dx
s
2 dv = e2x dx
s
u = x3 v = 1/2 e2x
EBD_7443
MT-196 Target VITEEE
u' = 3x2 v1 = 1/4 e2x 116. (a)
u'' = 6x v2 = 1/8 e2x
u''' = 6 v3 = 1/16 e2x p q p q p q ~ (p q) (p q) ~ (p q)
Using Bernoulli's formula T T T T F F
T F F T F F
u dv uv u ' v1 u "v 2 ....
F T F T F F
We get F F F F T F
1 2x 1 2x
x 3 e 2x dx (x 3 ) e (3x 2 ) e (p q) (~ (p q)) is a contradiction.
2 4
117. (c) P = n (n + 1) (n – 1) (n + 2) (n – 2).........
1 2x 1 2x (n + r) (n – r)
(6x) e (6) e
8 16 = {n (n + 1) (n 2).......(n + r)} {(n – 1)
(n – 2).......(n – r)}
1 2x 3 3 2 3x 3 = (n + r) (n + r – 1)......(n + 1) (n) (n – 1)......
e x x
2 2 2 4 (n – r)
Clearly P is product of (2r + 1) consecutive
dy
113. (a) We are given that cos (x y) integers, so divisible by (2r + 1) !
dx
Put x + y = v, 118. (d) Let E : ‘face 1 comes up’ and F: ‘face 1 or 2
dy dv dy dy comes up’
so that 1+ 1
dx dx dx dx E F E E F
So, the given equation becomes P(E) = 0.10 and P(F) = P(1) + P(2)
dv dv = 0.10 + 0.32 = 0.42
1 cos v 1 cos v Hence, required probability
dx dx
1 2v P E F P E 0.10 5
1 sec dv dx = P E/F
dv dx P F P F 0.42 21
1 cos v 2 2
Integrating both sides, we get 3
119. (c) Let g(x) = x ±2
1 v
sec 2 dv 1.dx 4 – x2
2 2 D (g(x)) = R – {–2, 2}
h (x) = log10 (x3 – x)
v x y x3 – x > 0
tan x C tan x C
2 2 x (x + 1) (x – 1) > 0
which is the required solution. – + – +
114. (b) Rewriting the given equation in the form –1 0 1
4 dy 3 x x (–1, 0) (1, )
x cos y 4 x sin y xe Domain of f(x) is (–1, 0) (1, 2) (2, ).
dx
120. (a) P (E / F) + P ( E / F)
d 4
(x sin y ) xe x
dx P(E F) P(E F)
=
P(F) P(F)
x 4 sin y xe x dx c ( x 1) e x c
Since, y (1) 0 so, c = 0. P( E F) P(E F) P(F)
1
P(F) P(F)
4
Hence, sin y x ( x 1) e x 121 (b)
115. (a) 1
2 * x *3 5 1 122 (d)
123. (c)
x 2*(5*3) 2*(5 3 15) 124. (a)
2*(23) 2 23 46 71 125 (a)
Solutions MT-197
MOCK TEST 7
L µ0 id r
LC = L' × 2C L' dB .
2 4 r3
22. (c) Relative velocity = v + v = 2v
Gauss's law is : 0 E.dA q.
emf. = B.l (2v)
23. (b) Self inductance of a small circular coil of 28. (c) Given d = 1mm, = 6.5 × 10–7m.
D = 1m.
2 2
0N A 0N ( r2 )
radius r, L = 2n 1 D
2r 2r For n th dark fringe yn=
2 d
i.e. L N 2 For third fringe,
If no. of turns are doubled then self 2 3 1 1 6.5 10 7
inductance will be four times. y3 = 3
2 1 10
24. (d) The change in flux in both 1 and 2 are same
while in (3) and (4) is zero. = 1.625 mm.
25. (b) B = 0.02T ; = 90° 29. (b) I = I0 + I0 + 2 I0 I0 4I0
dr 1 I/I0= 4
1mm / sec m / sec
dt 1000 30. (c) E = h
(Since radius is decreasing) E
= ? ; when r = 4 cm = 0.04 m It is a straight line graph (c)
31. (d) Given N0 = 64 N
d d
=– (B r 2 ) 1
n
dt dt
N = N0
2
EBD_7443
MT-200 Target VITEEE
n n
1 1 1 1040
N 64N total number of reactions, n =
2 64 2 3
6 n Etotal = n × E
1 1
i.e.,
2 2 1040 12
= 3.875 10 J
n=6 3
but n = T/T1/2; T1/2 = 2 hrs = 1.29 × 1028 J
T = T1/2 × n We have Etotal = Pt
T = 2 × 6 = 12 hrs.
32. (d) The distance of closest approach of - E total 1.29 10 28
particle t=
P 1016
2
1 2Ze = 1.29 × 1012 s.
r=
4 0 E 35. (a) Given W = 3.2 eV
9 10 9
2 29 1.6 10 19
1.6 10 19 Vs = – 3.2 V.
= 13 36. (b) D2 is forward biased whereas D1 is reverse
10 1.6 10
= 8.35 ×10–15 m = 8.4 × 10–15 m. biased.
So effective resistance of the circuit
hc
33. (b) Energy of a photon = R= 4+2 =6
34 12
6.62 10 3 108 i 2A
= 6
300 10 9
37. (c) A crystal structure is composed of a unit
= 6.62 × 10–19 J
No. of photons emitted/sec/m2 cell, a set of atoms arranged in a particular
way; which is periodically repeated in three
IA 1 10 4
1019 10 4 dimensions on a lattice. The spacing
= =
(hc / ) 19 6.62
6.62 10 between unit cells in various directions is
called its lattice parameters or constants.
1015
= Increasing these lattice constants will
6.62
increase or widen the band-gap (E g), which
If one percent of incident photons produce
photo electrons, th en the no. of means more energy would be required by
photoelectrons emitted electrons to reach the conduction band
from the valence band. Automatically Ec and
1 1015
= = 1.52 × 1012/sec Ev decreases.
100 6.62
38. (d) Here y ( A B ) A.B A B . Thus it is
34. (b) 2 2 3 an AND gate for which truth table is
1H 1H 1H P
2 3 4 A B y
1H 1H 2 He n
0 0 0
31 H 2 2 He
4
P n 0 1 0
M = M(2He4) + M(p) + M(n) – 3M (1H2) 1 0 0
= (4.001 + 1.007 + 1.008) – (3 × 2.014) 1 1 1
= (6.016 – 6.042) = – 0.026 amu
| E | = | M | c2 = 0.026 × 931.5 MeV
= 0.026 × 931.5 × 1.6 × 10–13J
= 3.875 × 10–12J
As each reaction involves 3 deutrons, the
Solutions MT-201
solution, mercuric chloride and potassium 71. (a) Carboxylic acids decompose bicarbonates
permanganate into CO2 gas and H2O to form sodium salts
of carboxylic acids.
HCOOH 2CuO CO 2 H 2 O Cu 2 O -
Fehling sol. Cuprous oxide So, CO2 comes from HCO3 of NaHCO3
(reddish brown)
72. (b) Precipitates in two cases is due to different
66. (d) Hoffman Rearrangement compounds.
O O CH 3CH 2 CH 2 COO Ag + (Soluble in HNO3)
|| Br2 || From propanoic acid
R C NH 2 R C NHBr
AgCl (Insoluble in HNO 3 )
O From chloropropanoic acid
|| 73. (a) N-Chloro- or N-bromo-succinimide is the
KOH latest reagent used for -halogenation.
R C N Br
Br 74. (a)
O O 75. (d) The basic character of an amine in water is
|| || determined by (i) electron availability on the
: :
4 3
2
2at) Similarly, m = ,n
P (at , 13 13
G Y 12 4 3
Hence, direction cosines are , , .
13 13 13
X
T A x 2 y2
102. (a) Eqn. of hyperbola is 1
49 9
Its conjugate axis is y-axis.
1 ax ax 1 1
( x) x f (x) i k sec2 .
1 a x
a x
1 cos 2
i k tan sin
It is an even function
cos
1 x2
(c) f ( x) log 1 cos
1 x2 2
. .
cos sin
2
1 x i 2 2
f ( x) log f ( x)
1 x2 i sin .cos 2sin .cos sin 2
It is an even function 108. (a) Alphabetical order is
(d) f(x) = k f (–x) = k = f(x) A, C, H, I, N, S
It is an even function No. of words starting with A = 5!
105. (c) No. of words starting with C = 5!
106. (b) We have
No. of words starting with H = 5!
y log cosh x No. of words starting with I = 5!
y1 tanh x No. of words starting with N = 5!
SACHIN – 1
y2 sech 2 x 1 tanh 2 x 1 y12 Sachin appears at serial no. 601
Solutions MT-209
/2 x=1 X
sin x
2I = dx O x=2
0
cos x sin x
/2
cos x
dx
sin x cos x
0 The required area is symmetrical about the
/2
point x = 1 as shown in the diagram.
sin x cos x So Reqd. area
= dx
0
sin x cos x 1 1
= 2 y dx 2 (x 3 3x 2 2x) dx
/2
0 0
1.dx [x]0 / 2 0
0
2 1
x4 3 2 1
/2 = 2 x x =2 1 1 = 1/2
sin x 4 4
dx 0
= 4 4
0 sin x cos x
/6
2
(Two players played three games each)
d2 y dy n 2
a+b y =0 .....(iii) C2 78 (n 2)(n 3) 156
dx 2 dx
n 2 5n 150 0 n 15 .
a ydy / dx
From (2), 118. (a) Given, sin–1x – cos–1x = …(i)
b x 6
2
a d2 y dy sin–1x + cos–1 x= …(ii)
From (3), b y 2
2
dx dx Adding equations (i) and (ii), we get
2
dy 2sin–1 x = sin 1 x
y 2 3 3
dx d2 y dy
y 3
x dx 2 dx x sin
3 2
2 Given equation has unique solution.
d2 y dy dy 119. (d) The number of ways of arranging 50 books
xy 2
x y =0
dx dx dx = 50 P 50 = 50!. The number of ways of
choosing places for the five volume
114. (c) y2 4a(x h), 2yy1 4a dictionary is 50C5 and the number of ways
yy1 2a y12 yy1 0 of arranging the remaining 45 books =
45P = (45)! Thus the number of favourable
Degree = 1, order = 2. 45
ways is ( 50C5) (45 !). Hence the probability
115. (b) Let e be the identity element. Then
of the required event
ae
a *e a for all a a e 5 50
5 C5 45! 50! 45!
Let x be the inverse of 8. Then 50! 5! 45! 50!
8x 25
x *8 e x *8 5 5 x 1 1
5 8
5! 120
116. (c) {g ( x )} is real if g(x) 0 120. (c) With respect to A the following results are
in favour of the required event .
(x 1)(x 3) WW; WLW; WLLW; LWW; LWLW;
or 0
(x 2) LLWW
So, the desired probability
(x 1) (x 2) (x 3)
or 0 = p.p + pqp + pqqp + qpp + qpqp + qqpp
(x 2) 2 = p2(1+ 2q + 3q2)
or [ x ( 1)](x 2)(x 3) 0, x 2 121 (c)
122. (d)
+ + 123 (d)
– –1 2 — 3 124 (a) Tremulous means shaking or quivering
1 x 2 or x 3 slightly. Therefore, Steady is the opposite
of Tremulous.
Domain = [–1, 2) [3 )
117. (a) Let there be n participants in the beginning. 125: (d)
Solutions MT-211
MOCK TEST 8
2k 1 1
14. (a) K max h h hc
U = 0 at x = 0 and at x ; also at 0
a 0
32. (c) If R is radius of bigger drop formed, then 41. (d) Number of unpaired electrons in Cr, Mn2+
4 4 3 and Fe3+ are 6, 5 and 5 respectively.
R3 2 r or R = 21/3 r 42. (b) LiAlH4 does not reduce –NO2 group to
3 3
–NH2 group.
As v0 r2 SOCl 2
43. (d) R COOH RCOCl
2 1/ 3 2
v 01 R (2 r)
22 / 3 CH 2 N 2 Ag 2O
v0 2 2
r r RCOCHN 2 RCH 2 COOH
H 2O
or v 01 v 0 2 2 / 3 5 (4)1 / 3 Diazoketone
33. (b) The position of nth dark fringe. So position 44. (c) With ammonia, HCHO forms
of first dark fringe in x1 D / 2d . hexamethylenetetramine, CH3CHO gives
d = 20 cm, D = 0.1mm, = 5460 Å, acetaldehydeammonia addition product,
x1 = 0.16 while C6H5CHO gives hydrobenzamide.
45. (b)
34. (d) 0V –2V It can be sketched as
46. (c) Units of k show zero order;
rate = k = constant
Immobile ions
[A] reacted after 100 min = 100 × k
– + = 100 ×1.0 × 10–3 = 0.1 mol L–1.
P – + N [B] after 100 min = 2 × 0.1 = 0.2 mol L–1
0V – +
depletion
47. (c) A plot of m vs C is linear with negative
layer –2V slope.
35. (b) As momentum is conserved, therefore, 48. (c)
49. (c) In H2 – O2 fuel cell, anode :
m1 A1 v2 1
m2 A2 v1 2 H 2 (g) 2OH (aq) 2H 2 O( ) 2e
Cathode :
1/ 3 1/ 3
R1 A1 1
1 : 21 / 3 H 2O
1
O 2 (g) 2e 2OH (aq)
R2 A2 2 2
ˆ ˆ 0 Hence, net reaction :
36. (d) F q [v ( i)] B (i)
37. (a) From the graph it is clear that A and B have 1
H 2 (g) O2 (g) H 2 O( )
the same stopping potential and therefore 2
the same frequency. Also B and C have the
º 0.0592 1/ 2
same intensity. Ecell Ecell log P PO
2 H2 2
38. (d) The electric field deduced by Gauss’ law is
due to all the charges. 50. (c)
39. (b) Total internal resistance of two cells
K 2 Cr2 O 7 6H 2 SO 4 4KCl 2KHSO 4
1 1
0.5 . Since internal resistance of 4NaHSO4 2CrO 2Cl 2 3H 2O
1 1
coil is equal to external resistance (= 0.5 ), hc
hence power developed is maximum by 51. (b) E h ;
cells in circuit.
2 hc 6.63 10 34 (3 108 )
Current through R 2A 656 nm .
0.5 0.5 E 3.03 10 19
Power (2) 2 0.5 2 W. 52. (c)
40. (a)
EBD_7443
MT-214 Target VITEEE
53. (c) 59. (a) Aromatic aldehydes are weak reducing
–
agents, hence these do not reduce Fehling
OH O O O solution. On the other hand, aliphatic
aldehydes and –hydroxyketones are easily
:– oxidised by Fehling solution, i.e., they
reduce Fehling solution.
.–.
60. (b) Paraldehyde is a solid trimer of
acetaldehyde, while others are different
CH 2 = CHCH2Cl
forms of formaldehyde.
61. (d) Iron becomes passive on treatment with
OCH2CH = CH2 OH conc. HNO3 or acidified KMnO4, H2O2 or
CH2CH = CH2 H2CrO4.
+ + 62. (d) Under the given condition, k1 = k2
1011 e–3000/T = 1010 e–2000/T ; 10 = e1000/T
ln 10 = 1000/T, 2.303 log 10 = 1000/T;
OH T= 1000/2.303 K
63. (d) m ( BaSO4 ) Ba 2 SO42
O O
CH 3COOH CH 3COOC 2 H 5 – H
( B) ( C) : :CCl2
CCl2
71. (d) In presence of AlCl3 (a Lewis acid), aniline
is converted into anilinium cation, which – –
being m-dir ecting gives aminoaceto- O O
phenone. CHCl2 – CHO
6 OH
72. (c) (a) d : d sp (n = 0)2 3
(0, 1) f (A ) A2 4A 5I
1 2 2 1 2 2 9 8 8
X' Now, A 2
X 2 1 2 2 1 2 8 9 8
(–1, 0)
2 2 1 2 2 1 8 8 9
Y'
9 8 8
Hence, f (x) is differentiable everywhere for
2
all x R. A 4A 5I 8 9 8
C1 C 3 C 5 8 8 9
94. (d) .....
2 4 6
1 2 2 1 0 0
n n (n 1)(n 2)
4 2 1 2 5 0 1 0
2 4!
2 2 1 0 0 1
n (n 1)(n 2)(n 3)(n 4)
+ ......
6! 0 0 0
0 0 0 O
1
(n 1)n (n 1)n (n 1)(n 2)
0 0 0
n 1 2! 4!
1 cos sin
[ n 1C2 n 1
C4 n 1
C6 .....] =
n 1 sin cos
1 1
1 2n 1 cos sin
2n 1 1 n 1
C0
n 1 n 1
95. (b) Breaking the given determinant into two cos 2 sin 2
=
determinants, we get cos sin cos sin
32 k 42 32 k 32 k 42 3
cos2 sin 2
4 2
k 5 2
4 2
k + 4 2
k 5 2
4 =0 = = cos + sin
cos sin
2 2 2 2 2
5 k 6 5 k 5 k 6 5 98. (b) Given: x2 – y2 sec2
= 4 and x2 – sec2 + y2 = 16
9 k 16 3
x2 y2
0+ 7 9 1 =0 1
4 4 cos 2
9 11 1
EBD_7443
MT-218 Target VITEEE
This represents an ellipse centred at (–1, 0)
x2 y2
and 1 1
16 cos2 16 4 3
and of eccentricity = = .
According to problem 4 2
103. (c) Let x1 be the abscissa of the point whose
4 4cos 2 16 16 cos 2 ordinate is 6.
3
4 16 Since the point (x1, 6) lies on y2 = 6x,
36 = 6x1 or x1 = 6
1 + cos2 = 3(1 – cos2 ) 4 cos2 = 2 The point is (6, 6)
1 3 Equation of tangent at (6, 6) is
cos ,
2 4 4 3
y 6 2
( x 6) ( yy1 = 2a (x + x1))
2
99. (a) We have, a cos A b cos B c cos C
a b c or x 2 y 6 0
R (sin 2A sin 2B sin 2C) x2 y2
104. (b) The eccentricity of 1 is
2R (sin A sin B sin C) 16 25
4 sin A sin B sin C 16 3
e1 1
A B C 25 5
2 4 cos cos cos
2 2 2 5
e2 ( e1e2 = 1)
A B C r 3
4 sin sin sin foci of ellipse = (0, 3)
2 2 2 R
Equation of hyperbola is
1 1
100. (b) We have, sin [cot (cos (tan x ))]
x2 y 2
1
16 9
1 1
= sin cot 105. (a) We have x3 – 3xy2 + 2 = 0 ......... (1)
1 tan tan 1 x2 and 3x2y – y3 – 2 = 0 ......... (2)
Diff. (1) and (2) w.r.t. x, we obtain
1 1 dy x2 y2
sin cot = and
dx 2xy
1 x2 C1
dy 2xy
1 =
dx C2 x y2 2
1
1 cot 2 cot 1 Since m1 × m2 = – 1, therefore the two
1 x2 curves cut at right angles.
106. (b) For the curve yn = an – 1 x
On putting n = 2, we get y2 = ax
1 1 x2 Which is curve of the form of parabola,
1 2 x2 where the subnormal at any point is a con-
1 stant.
1 x2 n = 2.
101. (b) 5 and 12 are two sides of a right angled
triangle and dx dy
107. (d) 2 c t and 2bt
dt dt
x = hypotenuse = 52 122 13
2
2 x2 dx 2 dy
102. (b) y2 + x = 3 v
dt dt
(x 1) 2 y2
+ = 1.
4 3 { 2ct 2 2bt 2 } 2t c 2 b2
Solutions MT-219
3 9
lim
2 8 h 5 5 10 510
108. (d) =
h 0 2h.3 8 h 6 6 6 2 69
111. (a) 2
If f (x) = ax + bx + c,
8 (8 h)
lim 1
h 0 2h.3 8 h{82/3 81/3. 1
f (x) dx = (2a + 3b + 6c)
(8 h)1/3 (8 h)2/3} 0 6
1 1 a b
48 f (0) = c, f = + + c, f (1) = a + b + c
2 4 2
109. (c) Let the boxes be marked as A, B and C. We
have to ensure that no box remains empty 1
f (0) + 4f + f (1) = 2a + 3b + 6c
and all five balls have to put in. There will 2
be two possibilities : 1
(i) Any two box containing one ball each
and 3rd box containing 3 balls. Number 112. (b) Given f’(x) = f(x) + f (x ) dx ...(1)
0
of ways
= A(1) B(1) C(3) Differentiating we get,
= 5C1 . 4C1 . 3C3 = 5 . 4 . 1 = 20 f " (x )
1
f " (x ) f ' (x ) 0
(ii) Any two box containing 2 balls each f ' (x )
and third containing 1 ball, the number
of ways f " (x)
On integrating dx dx
= A(2) B(2) C(1) = 5C2 . 3C2 . 1C1 f ' (x)
= 10 × 3 × 1 = 30
ln f ' ( x ) x c f ' (x ) ex c
ke x
Since, the box containing 1 ball could be
any of the three boxes A, B, C. Hence, the where k = ec, a constant
required number of ways = 30 × 3 = 90. Again integrate
Hence, total number of ways = 60 + 90 = f ' (x) dx kex D f ( x) kex D ...(2)
150.
Put x = 0 in (1), f(0) = ke°+D k+ D= 1
110. (d) It is a case of Bernoulli trials, where success
is not crossing a hurdle successfully. Here, (given f(0) = 1) ...(3)
n = 10. 1
Also from (1), f’(x) = f(x) + f ( x ) dx
5 1 5
p = P (success) = 1 q= 0
6 6 6
1
let X be the random variable that represents
the number of times the player will knock ke x ke x D (ke x D) dx
down the hurdle. 0
Clearly, X has a binomial distribution with 1
ke x Dx D 0 ke D k D 0
1 0
n = 10 and p =
6 k (e 1) 2D 0
P(X = r) = nCrqn–r. pr Solving (3) and (4) , we get
1 r 5 10 r k
2
and D
1 e
= 10Cr 3 e 3 e
6 6
P (player knocking down less than 2 2e x 1 e
hurdles) f (x )
3 e 3 e
= P(X < 2) = P(X = 0) + P(X = 1)
113. (d) p (u v) (v w ) v( w u)
10 1 0 5 10 0 10 1 1 5 9
= C0 C1 p.w (u v ). w (v w ). w
6 6 6 6
EBD_7443
MT-220 Target VITEEE
v( w u ). w 1 4
x2 1 x2
= 3 4x
2 3 2
[u v w] 0 0 0 1
5
1 1 1
5( p . w ) = 3 4 4 1 16 1
2 3 2
Similarly, 5 ( p . u ) and v 5 ( p . v )
3 1 15 3 9
= 12
v 5( p . w ) 5( p . u ) 5( p . v ) 2 3 2 2 2 3
5 p.(u v w) 3 3 3
= 2 3 sq. units
Hence, depends on the vectors 2 2
116. (b) Let T be the temperature of the cooling
114. (b) The characteristic equation is p2 + 6p + 8 = 0 object at any time t.
(p + 4) (p + 2) = 0 p = – 4 and – 2
The C.F. is Ae–4x + Be–2x dT dT
(T S) k(T S) T S ce kt ,
Particular integral, dt dt
1 where k is negative.
2x
P.I. = e
D 2
6D 8 T S ce kt
When t = 0, T = 150 150 = S + c
1 c = 150 – S
e 2x
(D 4)(D 2) The temperature of the cooling object at
Since, f(D) = (D + 2) q (D) any time is
T = S + (150 – S)ekt
1 1
xe 2x xe 2x 117. (c) Without loss of generality,
( 2) 2 let the right angled OAB be
Hence the general solution is such that OA = OB = a units.
1 Along OA take unit vector as
4x 2x 2x
y Ae Be xe B
2
115. (b) The tangent on x2 + y2 = 4 at 1, 3 is
1, 3 is y x 3
A
Y O E
ˆ OE aˆ ˆ OD aˆ
OA ai; i; OB aj; j;
2 2
X a
(0, 0) (4, 0) AD OD OA ĵ a î ;
2
a
BE OE OB î aˆj ;
1 4 2
4 x
Required area = x 3 dx dx a a
3 AD . BE ĵ a î . î aĵ
0 1 2 2
Solutions MT-221
5a 2 5a 2 3 ˆ 3 3ˆ
cos a2 = 4 i j
4 4 2 2
4 4 8 3 ˆ 3 3ˆ 5ˆ 3 3ˆ
cos ; cos 1 = i j i j
5 5 2 2 2 2
Hence the girl’s displacement from her
118. (c) Let O and B be the initial and final positions
of the girl respectively. 5ˆ 3 3 ˆ
initial point of departure is i j
Then, the girl’s position can be shown as 2 2
in the figure. 2
Now, we have OA = 4iˆ 119. (a) F(2) F(X 2) f (x)dx
AB ˆi AB cos 60 ˆj AB sin60
2 2x 2
B N 2x e
3 km 2e dx 2.
0
2
0
30° 4 4 e4 1
[e 1] 1 e
60° e4
W E
A 4 km O 120. (a) Logical expression corresponding to above
circuit is = a ' b' c
Logical expression corresponding to the
complimentary to the above circuit is
S
(AB cos 60° is component of AB along X- (a ' b' c)' (a ' b' )' . c'
axis and AB sin 60° is component of AB
along Y-axis) = (a ' )' . (b' )'. c'
MOCK TEST 9
E i
=
R2 e
The equivalent current, i
T
In circuit 3, on closing the switch , the Magnetic moment is given by
current through the inductor is zero and e
E M iA A
i3 = T
R1 R 2 14. (d) In the galvanometer, Ig = max. current
th rough galvan ometer, S = shunt
resistance, G = galvanometer resistance
then
S
Ig(galvanometer) = I
G S
G S 50 1
Thus i2 > i3 > i1 I Ig Ig 51Ig
S 1
A
40 15. (b) The time period of oscillation
B
11. (d) 20 T =2 LC
40 8V
C = 2 20 10 3 50 10 6
= 6.28 × 10–3 s.
The required time will be
T
60 40 t 1.54 ms
=
4
16. (c) The self induction and resistance of
The equivalent resistance of the circuit each part become 0.9 × 10–4 H and 3
60 40 respectively. The effective value of self
R= 24 inductance
60 40
4
V 8 1 0.9 10
Current, i = A L 0.45 10 4 H
R 24 3 2
12. (d) Current in the circuit 3
and R 1.5
E E 2E 2
r1 r2 R r1 r2 R Thus time constant
P.D. across first cell = E – ir 1 L 0.45 10 4
= 0.3 × 10–4
E r1 R 1.5
E
(r1 r2 ) R
EBD_7443
MT-224 Target VITEEE
17. (c) Change in momentum along the wall 22. (b) The power consumed in series is given by
= mv cos60º – mv cos 60º = 0 1 1 1
Change in momentum perpendicular to the
wall P P1 P2
= mv sin60º – (– mv sin60º) = 2mv sin60º P1 P2 100 200
Applied force = P 66 W
P1 P2 100 200
Change in momentum
23. (a) The related light becomes plane polarised.
Time 24. (c) The direction of propagation of em-wave is
2 mv sin 60º 2 3 10 3 z. As electric field and magnetic field must
= = be perpendicular and so direction of
0.20 2 0.20
oscillations of E will be x.
= 50 3 3 = 150 3 newton
18. (a) At any time t, the side of the square 25. (d) Fpe Fep and F pe
' F ep
' .
a = (a0 – t), where a0 = side at t = 0. Thus (d) option is not correct.
At this instant, flux through the square : 26. (b) Since work function for a metal surface is
= BA cos 0° = B (a0 – t)2 hc
d W
emf induced E = – 0
dt where 0 is threshold wavelength or cut-off
E = – B.2 (a0 – t) (0 – ) = +2 aB wavelength for a metal surface.
r here W = 4.125,
19. (d) A B eV = 4.125 × 1.6 × 10–19 Joule
34
I v 6.6 10 3 108
so 0 19
3000Å
4.125 1.6 10
D C h
As flux decreases the flux current in loop is 27. (b) Wavelength, = . As each of them has
p
clockwise. Force on DA due to long wire
and BC is towards left while on wire BC is same momentum, so
towards right. e p.
e
20. (b)
A v
28. (d) We have
h
h = h 0 + Kmax
××× × × ×b× × × × ××× h K max
××× ××××××× ×××
×××
×××
×××××××
×B× × × × ×C×
×××
××× 0= h
××× ××××××× ×××
××× ××××××× ××× 34
××× ××××××× ××× 6.63 10 1015 3 1.6 10 19
=
dA 6.63 10 34
B.
| d / dt | dt = 2.7 × 1014 Hz
I
R R R 29. (c) Mass of nucleons
d 1 dh 7 1.00783 7 1.00867 14.1155 u
B h.b Bb The mass defect, m = 14.1155 – 14.00307
dt 2 dt Bbv = 0.11243 u
R R Thus binding energy = 0.11243 × 931
b t I t = 104 MeV.
21. (d) R = 2k = 5t2 – 4t + 12, t = 0.2 sec.
V0 10
d 30. (c) V V
Induced emf e =
dt
e = – 10t + 4 = –10 × 0.2 + 4 = + 2 V 31. (a) F (W X ). (W Y ) W .( X Y )
32. (d) Voltage regulator needed constant voltage
e 2 and so de part is most relevant for its
I= = 10–3 A= 1 mA
R 2 103 operation.
Solutions MT-225
or
r
( 2
t
1) T
(b) [Fe(H 2 O) 6 ]2 :
3d
..
4s
4p
So, r
t .. .. .. .. .. 4d
sp3 d 2
( 2 1) T
( H 2O a weak field ligand)
EBD_7443
MT-226 Target VITEEE
6
(c) [Cr( NH 3 ) 6 ] 3
:
3d
..
4s G
2
H
2
1 G
T T T T
P
4p
.. .. .. d 2 sp3 (3 unpaired electrons)
on rearrangement, we get
7 G H
–
(d) [CoI 4 ]2 :
3d 4s
.. T
P
T2
4p
.. .. .. sp3 (tetrahedral) H –T 2
T
G
0.0591 c OH
E= log 1
n c2 COONa
Rearrangement
If all the concentrations are identical then
obviously the cell voltage is zero. But as
the pH of 0.1 M HCl (strong acid) & pH of 'B'
EBD_7443
MT-228 Target VITEEE
Given | a b | |a b | OC BA 1 1 1 1
sin cos sec 1 (2) cosec 1
2
Diagonals of the parallelogram OACB 5 5
are equal.
OACB is a rectangle. 1 1 1 1
2tan 2cot k
3 3
a and b are adjacent sides of a
rectangle. 1 1
85. (b) Clearly b is H.M. of a and c or 2 tan 1 cot 1 k
2 2 3 3
Also the G.M. of a and c is ac
Since or 2 k
2
2
G.M. H.M ac b b ac .......(i ) or + =k
Again, for the positive numbers an, cn or 2 =k
or k=2
an cn
G.M. a n c n and A.M. 88. (a) Since are coplanar vectors,
2 , ,
therefore
an cn
Since A.M. > G.M. a n cn a 1 1
2
[ ] 0 1 b 1 0
an cn n n
ac b (Using (i)) 1 1 c
2
an cn 2b n a (bc 1) 1(c 1) 1(1 b) 0
abc a c 1 1 b 0 ...(1)
2 sin
86. (b) We have, = y abc (a b c) 2
1 cos sin
1 1 1
Now,
4 sin cos 1 a 1 b 1 c
2 2
Then, =y (1 b)(1 c) (1 a)(1 c) (1 a)(1 b)
2 cos 2 2 sin cos
2 2 2 (1 a)(1 b)(1 c)
3 2(a b c) (ab bc ca )
2 sin sin cos
2 2 2 1 (a b c) (ab bc ca ) (abc)
=y
cos sin sin cos 3 2(a b c) (ab bc ca )
2 2 2 2 1 (a b c) (ab bc ca ) (a b c) 2
1 – cos sin [From (1)]
= y..
1 sin 3 2(a b c) (ab bc ca )
1.
Trick: Put value of = 30° and check. 3 2(a b c) (ab bc ca )
87. (b) The given question can be written as 89. (a) Let the equation of the required plane be
x y z
1 ...(i)
1 1 1 a b c
sin sec 1(5) sec 1(2) sin 1
5 2 It meets co-ordinate axes in points
A (a, 0, 0), B(0, b, 0), C(0, 0, c).
1 1
2 tan 2 tan 1 ( 3) k a b c
3 The centroid of ABC is , ,
3 3 3
or
a b c
, ,
3 3 3
Solutions MT-231
D x C sec2 x dx
(2 tan x 1)2 4
r r
1 2 tan x 1
A tan 1 C
x B 22 2
108. (a) The given function is f(x) = x3 + 3x – 5
dA 1 d 2A The first derivative is f '(x) = 3x2 + 3
(440 – 4x) x = 110 ; = – ve The second derivative is f"(x) = 6x .
dx dx 2
A is max. when x = 110. The function is concave upward when
f"(x) > 0 , that is, when x > 0.
440 2x 440 220 The function is concave downward when
2r = = = 70 ft
22 / 7 f"(x) < 0 , that is, when x < 0.
EBD_7443
MT-234 Target VITEEE
At point of inflection, f"(x) = 0 , that is, x = 0.
1; x 1
At x = 0, f(x) = – 5
2
Hence, f is concave upward in the interval 3x ; 1 x 0
(0, ), concave downward in the interval f ' (x) =
1; 0 x 1
(– , 0) a nd (0, –5) is the point of inflection.
2
/2
3x ; x 1
(x)
109. (a) Let I dx then Clearly f is not differentiable at – 1, 0 and 1.
0 (x) x 113. (c) The given equation can be rewritten as
2
y = A cos (x + B) – Cex,
/2 x where A = c1 + c2, B = c3, C = c4e c5
2 As the minimum number of parameters is 3,
I dx
0 x (x) order of the differential equation = 3.
2 114. (b) The differential equation is
Adding
d2y
1 sin x ....(i)
(x) x dx
/2
2
2I dx dy
Integrating we get x cos x c ....(ii)
0 x (x) dx
2
dy
/2 When x 0, 0 c 1
/2 dx
1.dx x 0 = /2
0 dy
Equation (ii) is x cos x 1
I = /4 dx
110. (a) Bounded figure ABCD is a rectangle. Integrating again we get
AB 1 1 2 , BC 4 4 2 2 x2
y sin x x D ...(iii)
2
When x 0, y 0 D 0
A(1, 1) The particular solution is
B y = |x| –2 x2
y x sin x
–2 –1 0 1 2 y = 1 – |x –1|
2
115. (b)
D
116. (a) 8n 7n 1 (1 7) n 7 n 1
–2 C
Which is a multiple of 49 of n 2
Thus, bounded area = ( 2) (2 2) = 4 sq. For n 1, 8n 7n 1 8 7 1 0
units.
111. (a) Given, A = {x : |x| < 3, x I} For n 2, 8 n 7n 1 64 14 1 49,
A = {x : –3 < x < 3, x I} = {–2, –1, 0, 1, 2} a multiple of 49. So, 8n 7n 1 is a multiple
Also, R = {(x, y) : y = |x|}
of 49 for all n N .
R = {(–2, 2), (–1, 1), (0, 0), (1, 1), (2, 2)}
Hence X contains all elements which are
112. (d) f (x) = max. {x, x3}
multiples of 49 for n N . Also Y contains all
x ; x 1 elements which are multiples of 49.
3 X Y
x ; 1 x 0
= Note that Y contains all multiples of 49 but X
x ; 0 x 1 does not contain all multiples of 49 but some,
3 i.e. Y / X .
x ; x 1
Solutions MT-235
117. (a) Let us first consider 2 letters and 2 119. (c) Let n be the number of tosses and X the
envelopes, then there is only one way to number of times heads occurs. Then X ~ B
place both the letters in wrong envelope. (n, p), with p = 1/2. Since P(X = 7) = P(X = 9),
Next, we consider 3 letters and 3 directed we have
envelopes. 7 n 7 9 n 9
The number of ways of putting all letters in n 1 1 n 1 1
C7 C9
wrong envelopes 2 2 2 2
= Total number of possible arrangements –
Number of ways in which all letters are in n n
n 1 n 1
correct envelopes C7 C9
2 2
– Number of ways in which 1 letter in
correct envelope That is, nC7 = nC9 = nCn–9, yielding 7 = n – 9
= 3 ! – 1 – 3C1 × 1 = 2 or n = 16. Hence
[ The case of two letters in correct 1
16
16 15 1
16
15
envelope and one in wrong envelope is not P( X 2) 16 C 2
2 2 2 213
possible]
120. (a) Let E1 be the event that exactly two players
Further, we consider 4 letters and 4 directed scored more than 50 runs then
envelopes.
The number of ways of putting all letters in 1 1 3 9
P(E1) =
wrong envelopes 2 3 4 10
= Total number of possible arrangements –
1 2 1 9 1 2 3 1
number of ways in which all letters are in +
correct envelope – Number of ways in 2 3 4 10 2 3 4 10
which 1 letter is in correct envelopes (3 in 1 1 1 9 1 1 3 1
wrong envelope)
2 3 4 10 2 3 4 10
– Number of ways in which 2 letters are in
correct envelope (2 in wrong envelope) 1 2 1 1 65
= 4 ! – 1 – 4C1 × 1 = 9. 2 3 4 10 240
NOTE : Such problems are called problems Let E2 be the event that A and B scored
of deragement. Hence, using the formula more than 50 runs, then
of deragement.
The required number of ways of placing all 1 1 3 9 27
P(E1 E2 )
letters in wrong envelope 2 3 4 10 240
Desired probability
1 1 1 1
= 4! 1 1! 2! 2! 4!
P ( E1 E 2 ) 27
= P ( E 2 / E1 )
P ( E1 ) 65
4! 4! 4! 121 (c)
= 12 4 1 9
2 ! 3! 4 ! 122 (d)
118. (c) We are given that e–m . m = 0.3 and 123.(c)
124. (b) Pertinacious means holding firmly to an
m
e m2 opinion or a course of action. Insipid means
= 0.2 lacking vigour or interest.
2!
125 (d)
4
Dividing, m 0.4 0.3
3
P (X = 0) = e–m = e–4/3
EBD_7443
MT-236 Target VITEEE
MOCK TEST 10
9. (a) In parallel combination, total power So the emf induced between its tips,
P = P1 + P2. e = BV v
But as by definition of angle of dip,
0
10. (b) v BV
tan i.e., BV BH tan
BH
v2 02 1 So,
v1 01 2 e (BH tan )v 2 10 5
3 250 20
4
7.8 –1.2 8.5 10 10 i.e., e ( 3) 10 V 1
0.173V
=
7.8 –1 13.2 16. (c)
= 6.25 ×10–4 cms–1 17. (d)
0 I 18. (a) 2 nt 400 t n = 200
11. (b) B [sin 90 sin( )]
4 a I0 50 2 amp.
I
= 0 (1 sin ) r.m.s. current = I0 / 2 = 50 amp.
4 a
19. (d) Here, X L L 2 fL
0.4
2 50 40 R = 30
I
Z R2 X L2 302 40 2 50
A
(0, b) Vrms 200
I rms 4A
Z 50
20. (a) VL and VC will be in opposite phase so they
(0,0) will cancel each other being equal in
(a,0) magnitude.
Resultant potential difference = applied
0 I b
p.d. = 100 volts
= 1
4 a a 2
b2 Hence, Z = R
Vrms 100
0i I rms 2 amp.
12. (b) B (sin 1 sin 2 ) Z 50
4 d
1 2
10 –7 100 3 1 21. (d) 0E 0 is electric energy density..
2
= = 5 × 10–6 T
3 1 2 2
B2
13. (d) 2 0
is magnetic energy density..
FG dB IJ B20
14. (a) E = – NA H dt K So, total energy =
1
2
2
0E 0
2 0
E NA d tD
i= = (75e –200t) × 10–4 22. (d) Shift of fringe pattern = ( 1)
R R dt d
NA 10
= [75 × (–200)e–200t] × 10–4 30D (4800 10 ) D
R (0.6)t
d d
50 7 10 8
=+ [15000e–1] 30 4800 10 10
0.6t
30
10 5
175 10 5 175 10 5 30 4800 10 1.44 10
= = t
e 2.73 0.6 0.6
= 0.64 × 10–3 A = 0.64 mA 24 10 6
15. (b) As the plane is flying horizontally it will cut 23. (b) 24. (d)
the vertical component of earth’s field BV .
EBD_7443
MT-238 Target VITEEE
25. (a) Energy of photon corresponding to first line dN
33. (c) n N
2 1 1 dt
of Balmer series = (13.6) (2)
4 9 dN (n N)dt
Energy need to eject electron from n = 2 N t N
level in H atom dN 1 dN
dt t
1 4 1 n N n N
N0 0 N0
= (13.6) = (13.6) 1
9 4
eV
4 1 N
log e (n N) N0 t
11
= 13.6 4.155 eV
36 1 n N
26. (a) According to relation, log e t
n N0
Mv2 Mv
Bqv r n N0
r Bq t log e
n N
m2v
r B 2B' 2x n N0
B'q t
e
27. (a) 28. (d) n N
t
hc hc n N (n N0 ) e
29. (d) eV0 W0 and eV W0
0 2 0 n n t
N0 e N
Subtracting them, we have
hc 1 hc 34. (b) Change in momentum = F × t
e ( V0 V) 1 = 10 × 10 = 100 Ns or 100 kg m/s
0 2 2 0
35. (c)
hc 36. (a) Voltage across the collector load resistance
or V V0 (RC) = 6V, = 0.97; RC = 3 k .
2e 0 The voltage across the collector resistance
30. (b) is,
31. (d) Balancing vertical forces, we have RC = ICRC = 6V
N Fsin 60 mg 6 6
Hence, IC = R 2mA
For the block not to move, we must have C 3 103
Fcos 60 N 0.97
Current gain 32.33
i.e., Fcos 60 (Fsin 60 mg) 1 1 0.97
1 1 3 2 10 3
IC
F F (2 3)(10)N IB 61.86 A
32.33
2 2 3 2
37. (a) Rf = 740 k , R'f = 650 k , R1 = 10 k ,
1 1 R'1 = 100 k .
or F 10N Let V1 be the output voltage of the first
2 4 amplifier
or F 4 10N 40N
32. (d) According to principle of continuity, for a Rf 740 103
V1 1 V 1 Vin
streamline flow of fluid through a tube of R1 in 10 103
non-uniform cross-section the rate of flow 75Vin
of fluid (Q) is same at every point in the
tube. Rf 650 103
i.e., Av = constant A1v1 = A2v2 V0 V1 75Vin
R in 100 103
Therefore, the rate of flow of fluid is same
at M and N. 487.5 Vin
Solutions MT-239
4.4 10 28 H CH3
38. (a) Na 8
1.1 10 20 atom / m3 , | |
4 10 CH3CH 2 – C O H H C CHO
propanol
ni2 6.25 1038 ,
CH3 CH3
pp Na 1.1 1020 atom / m3 | |
OH
CH3CH 2 C CHCHO
ni2 6.25 1038 |
np 20 OH
Na 1.1 10 3.hydroxy,2 methyl pentanal
18
5.68 10 atom / m 3 44. (d) In body centred cubic lattice one molecule
of CsBr is within one unit cell.
np 5.68 1018 Atomic mass of unit cell
0.22 = 133 + 80 = 213 a.m.u
ni 2.5 1020
Volume of cell = (436.6 × 10–10)3
39. (a) Current I = 4.8 mA = 4.8 × 10–3 A
Width b = 4 × 10–3 m, Thickness n ´ at.wt.
Density =
t = 25 × 10–5 m Av.no.´ vol.of unit cell
Length = 6 × 10–2 m 213
Free electron density n = 1022/m3. Density =
The current density J = I/A 6.02 10 23 (436.6 10 10 )3
Area = b × t = 4 × 10–3 × 25 × 10–5 = 10–6 m2 For body centered cubic crystal n = 2
I 4.8 10 3 ZM
So, current density J
A 10 6 a3NA
= 4.8 × 10 A/m2.
3
Suppose the drift velocity is vd then 2 213 107
I = neAvd. 8.50 gm / cm3
6.02 (436.6)3
3
4.8 10 45. (c)
vd 3 m / sec
10 22 1.6 10 19 10 6 46. (d) H3 C
Now the time taken by the electron to travel
C = O + CH 3 MgI
distance
full length of the sample t H3 C
speed vd
6 10 2 H3 C
= 2 10 2 sec H OH H2 O
3 C O MgI
40. (d) H3 C
41. (a) The equivalent conductance of strong CH3
electrolyte little increases with dilution.
42. (a) Normally NaBH4 as well as LiBH4 reduce
only–CHO group without effecting carbon- CH3
|
carbon double bond, however when it is C C OH Mg(OH)I
present in conjugation with benzene ring |
and aldehydic group it is also reduced CH3
along with the reduction of – CHO group. Tert butyl alcohol
LiAlH 4
C6 H5CH CH CHO C6 H5CH 2CH 2CH 2 OH
NA NB
C6 H5CH CH CHO C6 H5CH 2 CH 2CH 2OH 47. (c) At equilibrium
43. (d) Aldehydes which contain a -hydrogen t1 / 2 of A t1 / 2 of B
on a saturated carbon, i.e., CH3CH2CHO
N0 N0
undergo aldol condensation. 1 x
232 228
1.4 1010 7
EBD_7443
MT-240 Target VITEEE
where N0 Avogadro no. 55. (b) After every 30 minutes the amount is
and x g is wt. of radium 1
reduced to and t1/2 is independent of
on solving x = 5 × 10–10g 2
48. (b) As volume is constant hence work done in initial concentration for 1st order, hence
this proces is zero hence heat supplied is reaction is 1 order.
equal to change in internal energy. 56. (b)
49. (a) Nitroethane on reduction in acidic medium, AgNO 2 PCl 5
57. (c) C 2 H 5 NO 2 C 2 H 5 OH
like Sn + HCl, Fe + CH3COOH or H2 – Ni B
gives.
Primary amine. C 2 H5C l POCl3 HCl
[ A]
Sn HCl
CH 3CH 2 NO 2 6H CH 3CH 2 NH58.
2 2H(d)2 O Since the compound (C4H10O) react with
Sn HCl sodium, it must be alcohol (option b, c, or d).
CH3CH2 NO2 6H CH3CH2 NH2 2H2O
whereas alkyl nitrite on reduction in neutral As it is oxidised to carbonyl compound
medium gives alcohol. which does not reduce Tollen’s reagent, the
carbonyl compound should be a ketone and
Area Concentration thus C 4 H10 O should be a secondary
50. (a) Conductivity
length alcohol, i.e., sec-butyl alcohol; other two
given alcohols are 1º.
k Area Concentration 59. (c) The statement (c) is incorrect.
length 60. (d) The two components should be
(CH3)3CONa + (CH3)3CBr. However, tert-
Conductivity length
k alkyl halides tend to undergo elimination
Area concentration reaction rather than substitution leading to
Sm 1
m the formation of an alkene, Me2C = CH2
= S m mol–1 61. (a) Electronic configuration of Cr is
m 2 mol m 3 3d 4s
51. (a) For spontaneous reaction, dS > 0 and G
and dG should be negative, i.e. < 0.
52. (a) CuSO 4 Ca(OH) 2 is Bordeaux mixture. So, due to half filled orbital I.P. is high of Cr.
6 62. (d) The reaction is known as Gatterman
K 1000 3.06 10 1000 aldehyde reaction.
53. (d) Solubility
eq 1.53 63. (a) First option is incorrect as the value of KP
= 2 × 10–3 given is wrong. It should have been
Ksp = S2 = 4 × 10–6 PCO 2
2.303 N KP
54. (d) t log 0
PCH 4 [PO2 ]2
Nt
64. (d) Acetone forms mesitylene (1,3,5-trimethyl
0.693 N0 benzene) on distillation with conc. H2SO4.
where log
t1 2 Nt 65. (b) [Cr(H2O)6]2+ Cr is in Cr2+ form
where N0 = original amount
Nt = amount left after time t Cr 2
24 3d 4s
2.303 U 238 Pb206
t log
U 238 Fe 3
26 3d 4s
2.303 Pb206 In [Fe(H2O)]2+ Fe2+ form. Both will have 4
or t log 1
U 238 unpaired electrons.
66. (b) Like Clemmensen reduction, Wolf-Kishner
Given Pb206 : U238 = 1
reduction involves reduction of >C=O to
2.303 >CH2 , of course by different reagent.
4.5 109 log 2 4.5 10 9 years
0.693
Solutions MT-241
x y a b 20 12p 8
– = – ........(2) 13 13
b a b 2 a 2
p1 = length of the perpendicular from the Taking +ve sign, we get
centre to the tangent 20 12p 8
p=1
2 13 13
2 ab Taking –ve sign, we get
= 1 1 =
a 2 b2 20 12p 8 28 7
a 2 b2 p
13 13 12 3
p2 = length of the perpendicular from the 99. (a) Given, f (x) < 0 and g (x) > 0 therefore g (x)
centre to the normal is an increasing function and f (x) is a
a b decreasing function
b 2 a 2 a2 b2 x + 1 < x + 5 g (x + 1) < g (x + 5)
= 1 1 = f (g (x + 1)) > f(g (x + 5))
2 a2 b2 Again x < x + 1 g (x + 1)
a2 b2 f (g (x)) > f (g (x + 1)) x < x + 2
f (x) > f (x + 2)
ab a 2 b2 g (f (x)) > g (f (x + 1)) x > x – 2
Area of the rectangle = p1 p2 = f (x) < f (x – 2)
a 2 b2
g (f (x)) < g (f (x – 2))
96. (a) f ' (x) = 6x2 + 12x + 7 = 6 (x2 +2x) + 7 = 6
(x +1)2 + 1 100. (a) For A, B, C to speak in order of alphabets,
which is positive for all value of x. Hence 3 places out of 10 may be chosen first in
f(x) is monotonic increasing function. 10
C3 ways.
The remaining 7 persons can speak in 7!
97. (b) f (x) = cos x, 0 x < 1 ways. Hence, the number of ways in which
2 2
= – 2, x 1 all the 10 persons can speak is 10C3 .
f (x) changes sign from positive to nega- 10! 10!
tive from the left side of x = 1 to the right 7! = .
3! 6
side of x = 1. f (x) changes from an increas-
ing function to a decreasing function. y 2 ex e x
f (x) has a local maximum at x = 1. 101. (b)
1 ex e x
98. (b) The distance of point (1, 1, p) from the plane
Applying comp. and dividendo.
r . 3iˆ 4ˆj 12kˆ 13 0
y 1 2e x
or (in cartesian form) 3x + 4y – 12z + 13 = 0, is
x
e2x
3 y 2e
3 1 4 1 12 p 13
d1 1/2
2 1 y 1 y 1
32 42 12 x log = log
2 3 y 3 y
3 4 12p 13 20 12p
(i) Hence, the inverse of the function
169 13
1/2
The distance of the point (–3, 0, 1) from the ex e x
x 1
f (x) 2 is loge
plane x x 3 x
e e
3x + 4y – 12z + 13 = 0 is 102. (b) By changing x as –x and y as–y, both the
3 3 4 0 12 1 13 8 given equation remains unchanged so
d2 required area will be symmetric with respect
2 13
32 42 12 to both the axis, which is shown in the
figure. So,
According to the given condition,
d1 = d2 1
Required area = 4 1 x2 (1 x) dx
20 12p 8
0
13 13
EBD_7443
MT-244 Target VITEEE
1 x 4/3 3 2z x
x 1 x2 lim
=4 1 x2 sin 1 x x x 0 x 4/3 [ 3 8z 4x 3
8z ]4
2 2 2
0
3
2z 1
1 1 4 23/3
= 4 0 . 1 = –2 2 3 8z 2 .z
2 2 2
dx x 2 dx
Y 105. (b)
x 1 x3 x3 1 x3
3
Put 1 – x = t 2 –3x2dx = 2t dt
2
tdt 1 1 t
3 2 dt log
integral =
O (1 t 2 ) t 3 1 t2 3 1 t
X
1 1 x3 1
log C
3 1 x3 1
1
106. (a) f (x) ex ex f (x) dt = ex + kex, where
0
cos ax cos bx
103. (c) We have, lim 1
x 0 cos cx 1
k f (t) dt
(a b) (a b)x 0
2 sin x sin 1
2 2
= lim k (e t ke t ) dt e ke 1 k ,
x 0 cx
2 sin 2 0
2
e 1
k
(a b)x (a b)x 2 e
sin .sin 2
2 2 . x e 1 ex
= lim 2
cx Thus f (x) ex 1
x 0
x sin 2 2 e 2 e
2 107. (c) The sphere is the solid of revolution
2 generated by the revolution of a semi
(a b)x (a b)x cx 4 circular area about its diameter.
sin sin 2
2 2 2 c
= lim
x 0 (a b)x 2
.
(a b)x 2
.
cx
y
. . sin 2
2 a b 2 a b 2
a b a b 4 a 2 b2
= 2 . Hence m
2 2 c c2
and n are
a2 – b2 and c2 respectively. x
B(–a,0) O A(a,0)
3 2
x z (z x) 2
104. (b) lim
x 0 3 4
8xz 4x 2 3
8xz Let the equation of the circle be x2 + y2 = a2
for the semi circle about the x-axis the
3 variable varies form x = –a to x = a.
x 2xz x 2 Volume of the sphere
lim
x 0 (3 x 3 8z 4x 3
8z 3 x ) 4
Solutions MT-245
1 1 1 3
1 e e 1 .
1 2 1 =0 1! e2
3 p 5 117. (c) Let the normal at ‘t1’ cuts the parabola again
at the point ‘t2’. the equation of the normal
(10 + p + 3) – (6 – 5 – p) = 0 p=–6 at (at12, 2at1) is y + t1x = 2at1 + at13
111. (d) The given lines may be written as Since it passes through the point ‘t2’ i.e
x y z x y z (at22, 2at2)
and 2at2 + at1t22 = 2at1 + at13
1/ 2 1/ 3 1 1/ 6 1 1/ 4
2a(t1 – t2) + at1(t12 – t22) = 0
1 1 2 + t1(t1 + t2) = 0 ( t1 t 2 0)
Direction ratios of two lines are , , 1
2 3 2 + t12 + t1t2 = 0
1 1 2
and , 1, t2 t1
6 4 t1t2 = –(t12 + 2) t1
EBD_7443
MT-246 Target VITEEE
118. (a) Reflexive: For any x R, we have Y
x x 2 2 an irrational number..
x R x for all x. So, R is reflexive. (0, 3)
Symmetric: R is not symmetric, because 2
(0, 2) (6/5, 6/5)
R 1 but 1R 2 ,
Transitive: R is not transitive also because X' X
(2, 0) (3, 0)
2x +
2 R 1 and 1 R 2 2 but 2 R 2 2 . 3x 3y =
6
119. (a) For a, b Z' a + b Z' +
2y
Z' is closed under addition =
6
Also, a + b = b + a Y'
Addition on Z' is commutative Shaded portion shows the feasible region.
a b c a b c , a, b, c Z '. Now, the corner points are
Addition is associative on Z'. 6 6
(0, 2), (2,0), , , (0, 0).
a 0 0 a a, a Z ' 5 5
0 Z'is an additive identity At (0, 2),
< Z', + > is a monoid. value of z = – 2(0) – 3(2) = – 6
120. (a) Given problem is max z = – 2x – 3y At (2, 0),
x y x y value of z = – 2(2) – 3(0) = – 4
Subject to 1, 1 , x, y 0
2 3 3 2 6 6 6 6
First convert these inequations into At , , Value of z = – 2 –3
5 5 5 5
equations we get
3x + 2y = 6 ...(i) 30
2x + 3y = 6 ...(ii) = =–6
5
on solving these two equation, we get point At (0, 0), value of z = – 2(0) – 3(0) = 0
6 6 The max value of z is 0.
of intersection is , . 121 (c)
5 5 122 (a)
Now, we draw the graph of these lines. 123. (a)
124. (d)
125 (b)